º
º
*> -
º
º
%.
%.
** 2,
§ º º
*— ` ~2. ->
º, *3. !. º
ºsº
sº
sº -2.
2. º Sº
< * L. &
§
º
S 2-
^ -- ºr ºl
sº ºccº
º sº ~
\ º -
|
/ %.
*.
%
&
º-
º,
*
w º 2-
<- -
)





-
-
**-*
*
-
+
|
.
-
º
º





* , - - - - -
*{.{ } . . . . . . . .
T H E
CH IN E S E R E POS iT O R Y.
F R O M M A Y, 13.33, T (; A P R L. 1834
S E C O N D E 1) I TI-O N.
C 4 N T O N :
PR IN T E D F O R T H E P R O P R 1, 1 o Rs.
1834, º:


De 7c)
V, 2–
PAA/NJ


In compliance with current copyright
law, U.C. Library Bindery produced
this replacement volume on paper
that meets the ANSI Standard Z39.48-
1984 to replace the irreparably
deteriorated original.
1991





C H IN E S E R E POSITORY.
Vol. II.-MAY, 1834.—No. 1.
Introductory Remarks.
The progress of the English language, and the
extent to which it is spoken at the present time,
are very remarkable. As a medium of communi-
cation, the Chinese is, doubtless, employed by a far
greater number of individuals than any other living
language on earth; but then, with a very few excep-
tions, it is confined to one half of one hemisphere,
while the English is used round the whole globe,
and almost from pole to pole. The prospect that
the English language will be far more extensively
used, was never fairer than at this hour. Look at
British India. For a long time its progress there
was very slow, and its effects were almost imper-
ceptible; now its march is beginning to be rapid,
and its influence is of the most interesting charac-
ter. The first endeavors to communicate a know-
ledge of a foreign tongue to the natives of India,
must necessarily have been attended with many
hindrances and opposed by many obstacles; but a
marked change has taken place, and instruction is
given with almost as many advantages as in the
most favored countries of Europe. The work gath-
ers new interest as it proceeds; and if it is well
conducted, its results, we believc, will far exceed
the most sanguine cypcctations of its conductors


2 Introductory Remarks. MI AY,
r
t
and supporters. By acquiring a knowledge of the
English tongue, the native youth will be introduced
into a new world. He will live and move in a new
atmosphere. He will be acted upon by new influ-
ences. He will see and feel a thousand new rela-
tions. But for a time everything with him will
be unsettled—his future destiny will be at stake.
There is a tide in the affairs of men,
Which taken at the flood leads on to fortune :
Neglected, all is lost.
Europe, since the sun of the Reformation arose,
has been agitated and shaken to her very centre;
a spirit of noble origin has gone abroad, and as it
has gathered strength, it has elevated and blessed
the nations. The freedom of thought was boldly
asserted; and inci, began to feel that each had a
right, and that each was bound, to think for himself.
But not so in the East. The kingdoms aud tribes
of India, like the members of a once rich and pros-
perous family, which have become dissipated and
reduced, have been content to slumber. For cen-
turies, the inhabitants of Hindostan were all wrap-
ped in the thickest darkness; superstitious rites,
the most appalling and degrading, pressed down
the people with a mountain's weight: and in this
condition, had no influence come in to relieve them,
they must have continued as long as the generations
of men endure. Armies could march through the
land in every direction; they could conquer and
subdue its inhabitants—could even change some of
their external forms; but they could never effectu-
ally reach the more permanent and important fea-
2 tures of intellectual, moral and religious character.
China has been conquered again and again, and
changes of u certain character—as in costume and
the like, have taken place; but the principal usages,
manners, customs, laws, and religions of this na-
tion remain unchanged. On these, military power
acts in vain—or clºse tº v to degrade and to de-
stroy. To correct. to improve, and to eieval, the


1833. Introductory Remarks. ;3
intellectual and moral powers of this nation, another
influence must be employed,—an influence which
though silent in its operations, like the light and
heat of the sun, is equally powerful.
An influence of this description is felt in some
parts of India, and the slumbering intellect of the
inhabitants is beginning to show signs of life. A
crisis has come. But if the present favor ble op-
portunities of giving a right direction to the wak-
ing and expanding energies be neglected, they will
surely take a wrong direction, and political, mental,
and religious anarchy will be the inevitable conse-
quence. The present condition of India is, there-
fore, justly viewed with deep interest and anxietv.
But the inhabitants have been awakened out of
their slumberings, and brought to their present
interesting attitude, not by the thunders of heavy
artillery; “but by the noiseless operation of wide
and diffusice benevolence, on the part of strangers
situated at a distance equal to half the globe's cir-
cumference.” Letters have been the means, or
rather they have been made the channel, through
which treasures, richer than all the merchandise of
India, have been conveyed to its inhabitants. A
Roman emperor could march, his armies through
the British Isles; but it was left to other men in
a far, different capacity to lay the broad and deep
foundations of that nation's greatness. Again in
heir turn, British armies could march over the
ilains of Hindostan, but they could never turn
e mind of a Hindoo from his vain, and wicked
superstitions to intellectual and moral improve-
ment. - - " - -
What was true of all India is now in-its fullest
ºxtent true of China. This whole nation is in a
rofound sleep, and while she is dreaming of great.
less and of glory, she is borne backward by a strong
ind rapid tide of influence; and if the nation be
not speedily roused, who can tell where her retro-
gression will end? It is justly the glory of our


4 Introductory Remarks. MAY,
-
age, that in, many parts of the world the condition
of the human family is improving, and with a ra-
pidity such as man has never before witnessed.
Numerous examples to illustrate the truth of this
position, may be found in Europe and in North
Anerica, in some small districts of Africa, and of
southe...) and 'vestern Asia. The means of these
improvements may have been various; but of them
all, the increase of knowledge is by far the most
important. On the contrary, the gradual decline of
this empire is owing, in no small degree, tº its
retrogression in knowledge. The Chinese have
schools and high literary titles in great numbers,
and there are many inducements to learn. Still,
though many do learn, knowledge is not increased.
Is there now no remedy for this lapsed and laps-
ing condition 1 Are there no means of promoting
among the Chinese such an increase of knowledge
as shall turn the tide of influence 1 Must Christian
philanthropists sit down in despair and give up all
for lost Shall we see the Tfindoo join in the
rapid course of modern improvement, and at the
same time regard the case of the Chinese as hope-
less And what more effectul way can be devis-
ed for benefiting the Chinese, than to learn as
accurately as possible their true condition; to ex-
hibit it to themselves; and then to put within their
reach the means of improvement?" And to accom.
plish all this, what better means can be employed
than those which have proved to be so effectual
and successful in other places ! -
In this work a beginning, and one worthy o
notice, has been made. A knowledge of their lan-
guage has been acquired by foreigners—in China,
among the Chinese colonies, j in Europe. It
is confidently believed that the language will never
again be abandoned by foreigners, but that, on the
contrary, the number of those who read and speak
it wikl be greatly increased. This is desirable on
many accounts. Such knowledge will give the


1833. Introductory lºcmarks. 5
foreigner power and influence with the Chinese, and
over them too—a power which will be both harm-
less and beneficial to all. It is of little use to
come in contact with the Chinese unless we can
communicate freely with them—interrogate them,
and be interrogated; hear them argue for, and de-
fend their high superiority; and in turn, let them
hear the opposite statements. We entertain no
mean opinion of the strength of the Chinese; yet
we do not by any means regard them as invinci-
ble either by arms or arguments. They could never
stand against the discipline of European forces—
and we hope they will never be put in such a
woful position; but if they can be brought into
the open field of argument, we are, if possible,
still more sure they must yield. It is impossible
that forms, and usages, and claims founded in er-
ror and falsehood, can stand against the force of
truth. By a free intercourse of thought, commer-
cial and political, social and religious relations can,
and sooner or later, certainly will, be improved.
On this point we have uot the shadow of a doubt;
but the changes will be hastened, retarded, or stop-
ped, as the friends of humanity show themselves
bold, vigorous, and active, or the reverse.
Commercial relations with China—always impor-
tant and interesting—are peculiarly so at the pres-
ent time, because they are almost the only rela-
tions which exist between the Chinese and the na-
tions of the West. These relations, however, are
in several particulars exceedingly embarrassed, and
mainly for want of a better understanding between
the parties, they are embarrassed to the injury of
both the native and the foreigner, and to none pro-
bably more than to the government.—Of political
foreign relations, with only one solitary exception,
none exist. And though “all beneath the starry
heavens are one family,” yet all social and friend-
ly intercourse is disallowed. The foreigner is
seldom permitted to enter under the roof of his


(; Jutroductory Jº, marás. \! A y.
( 'hinese friend; and the native that allows it, acts
contrary to the usages of the land, and, except he
is in authority, or has influence with those who
rule, exposes himself to reproach and punishment.
'The merchant, “if he pleases,” may bring hither
his specie and his merchandise, but not his family;
“foreign ladies can by no means be allowed to
come up to the provincial city.” And thus that
which God has joined together, man here puts
asunder.—In religion, the foreigner is allowed to
act according to the dictates of his own con-
science; provided, nevertheless, that his conscience
does not require him to obey the command of the
Savior of the world, “to teach all nations his gos-
pel.” What means may and ought to be employ-
ed to improve political and commercial relations
with the Chinese, and to secure religious toleration,
is an inquiry of great interest, upon which however
we cannot now proceed to remark.
There ought, moreover, to be an interchange of
knowledge. While we seek to obtain information
concerning the laws, manners, customs, and re-
sources of this people, it is in a high degree de-
sirable that they should become acquainted with
our language, laws, and various institutions. The
English language, in its remarkable progress, great-
ly predominates in the foreign community of this
place; a knowledge of it is likely to increase among
the native inhabitants. This we infer from what
has already been done here and in other places.
There are now fire English presses in China;
two are in Macao, and three in Canton. Three
of these presses are from England, and two are
from America. The Honorable E. I. Company's
press with a printer arrived in China in 1814.
Morrison's Dictionary of the Chinese language, his
Vocabulary of the Canton dialect, and his View of
China; the translation of a novel by Mr. Thoms;
and the Canton Miscellany, in a series of numbers
published in 1831 —are the principal works which


1833. Introductory Remarks.
7
have appeared from that press. A Chinese dic-
tionary of the Fuhkeen dialect by Mr. Medhurst
of Batavia, is now being printed. The next press
arrived here in 1825; from which the first number
of the Canton Register appeared in November,
1827. We have before us a complete series of
this paper up to the present time. In addition to a
full register of the mercantile transactions of Canton,
it contains a great variety of notices of the manners,
customs, &c., of the Chinese and other eastern na-
tions. Almost every page of the Register has been
filled with original matter; and it is this which has
given it particular value abroad, where it has done
much to direct public attention to the Chinese. A
third press arrived in 1831, and a second period-
ical, the Chinese Courier, appeared shortly after.
The Courier has pursued a course different from
that of its “cotemporary.” Its pages have been oc-
cupied partly with European intelligence, and part-
ly with local news and notices of mechanical arts,
manufactures, and such like, among the Chinese.
The two other presses reached China during last
year. All these presses are in operation, and are
supported solely by foreigners.
Some attempts have been made to furnish na-
tive youth with instruction in the English language.
An experiment of this kind, though on a very limit-
ed scale indeed, is now in progress. There is
manifested in several instances a very strong desire
to gain a knowledge of the language; and though
many more difficulties are to be expected here
than were found to exist in India, the result will
be the same. As the Chinese come more and more
in contact with those who speak the English lan-
guage, their desire to learn it, and to gain a know-
ledge of European sciences, arts, and literature, will
increase. Even now, were there no apprehensions
that government would interfere, almost any number
of scholars, it is lºclieved, could be collected into
schools, and trained in courses of study similar to


$7 Introductory Remarks. MAY,
those which have been established in the semina-
ries for native youth at Calcutta, Bombay, Ceylon,
and elsewhere in India.
We should rejoice to see literary and scientific
journals spring up and flourish around us; and could
such be translated and printed in Chinese and wide-
ly circulated, they would hardly fail to accomplish
great good. But mere secular knowledge should
never take precedence of that which concerns man's
present spiritual condition and his eternal destiny.
“Knowledge is power;” and unless it is pure and
excellent, and is regulated and controlled by right
principles, it will surely be directed to bad purposes.
Man is a religious being; and everywhere as he
progresses in knowledge, he assumes for himself
some kind of religious character. But what sys-
tem of religion, in its principles and effects, is com-
parable to Christianity? The christian's Code is
perfectly adapted to the wants and necessities of the
human family, in every clime and in every variety
of circumstances. Men cannot be politicians of
unprejudiced. and impartial views, and act wisely
and justly in the discharge of all their duties, with-
out adopting the principles of the Bible. “The
book of Proverbs, and the Sermon on the Mount,
contain the elements of the best political economy
which was ever devised. They inculcate what is
of immeasurable importance in the intercourse of
nations—enlargement of mind, and comprehensive-
ness of view, and clearness and power of con-
science. These would settle questions of foreign
intercourse, and domestic improvement, with far
more certainty and safety, than the volumes of Ad-
am Smith, or the statistics of Seybert and Pitkin.”
Some of the states of antiquity were rich in
knowledge, but beggarly in religion; and it was
by the destructive influence of their religion that
their knowledge and power were taken from them.
Had their religion been pure, had it been the reli-
gion of the “Teacher sent from God,” it would have


1833. Introductory lºcmarks. Q
preserved knowledge and given stability and security
to the state. Here we must refer again to the
British Isles. What is it which has given to that
nation her high rank, and her commanding influ-
ence? Is it her position? Is it her numbers? Had
she driven from her coast Augustine and his compan-
ions, and cherished and preserved the system of the
Druids, as the Chinese have the doctrines of their
Sage, never could she have gained in commerce, in
arts, in sciences, and in literature, her present ele-
vation. But it is not in all these that her great
strength consists; that has its foundation, and its
best security too, in her religious principles. Let
her be deprived of them, and her commerce, her
arts, her sciences, and her literature, will all wither
and die. This same superiority of Christian prin-
ciples we see illustrated elsewhere, both in Europe
and in America. The happiest portions of the globe
are those in which Christianity has gained the high-
est ascendency. And it ever will be thus. Give
the glorious revelation of our God complete do-
minion over the hearts and consciences of men, and
all strifes and contentions and misrule, together
with every species of oppression and wrong and
outrage, will come to a perpetual end. The con-
fused noise of the warrior will no more be heard ;
and garments will no more be rolled in blood; the
groans of the prisoner will cease; the captive go
free; and all nations come and bow down and
worship before the Lord our Maker. Then shall
'The dwellers in the vales and on the rocks
Shout to each other; and the mountain tops,
From distant mountains catch the flying joy;
Till, nation after nation taught the strain,
Earth rolls the rapturous hosanna round.
Come that blessed day. Let our eyes once behold
the sight, and then give thcsc worthless bodies to
the worms.


10 Pemul Laws of China. MAY,
REW’ IH. W.
Ta Tsing Leuh-le; being the fundamental laws, and
a selection from the supplementary statutes of the
Penal Code of China; originally printed and
published in Peking, in various successive edi-
tions, under the sanction, and by the authority, of
the several emperors of the Ta Tsing, or the pres-
ent dynasty. Translated from the Chinese, and
accompanied with an appendix, consisting of
authentic documents, and a few occasional notes,
illustrative of the subject of the work; by Sir
GeoRGE TiioMAs STAUNToN, Bart. F. R. s. Pp.
581. London: 1810.
The reigning Mantchou-Chinese family is of very
recent origin. One of its most illustrious chiefs,
who gained his distinction by military achievements,
took the title of emperor, and established himself
at Moukden in 1616. In 1644, his grandson, a lad
six years of age, was placed on the throne of China.
Three years after this event, the original edition
of the penal laws of China was published in the
name of the young monarch, Shunche. It was pre-
faced by the following document, which we quote
according to the translation of sir George.
“When we contemplate the progressive establishment of our
dominions in the East, by our royal ancestors and immediate
predecessors, we observe that the simplicity of the people orig-
inally required but ſcw laws; and that with the exception of
crimes of extraordinary enormity, no punishments were inflict-
ed besides those of the whip and the baniboo. Since, how-
cver, the Divine Will has been graciously pleased to intrust
us with the administration of the empire of China, a multitude
of judicial proceedings in civil and criminal cases, arising out
of the various dispositions and irregnlar passions of mankind


13:33. Penal Laws of China. | |
in a great and populous nation, have successively occupied our
royal attention. Hence we have suffered much inconvenience,
ſrom the necessity we have been almost constantly under, of
either aggravating or mitigating the erroneous sentences of the
magistrates, who, previous to the re-establishment of a fixed
code of penal laws, were not in possession of any secure foun-
dation, upon which they could build a just and equitable de-
cision. -
“A numerous body of magistrates was, therefore, assembled
at the capital, at our command, for the purpose of revising the
penal code, ſormerly in force under the late dynasty of Ming,
and of digesting the same into a new code, by the exclusion
of such parts as were exceptionable, and the introduction of
others, which were likely to contribute to the attainment of jus-
tice, and to the general perfection of the work. The result of
their labors having been submitted to our examination, we ma-
turely weighed and considered the various matters it contained,
and then instructed a select number of our great officers of
state, carefully to revise the whole, for the purpose of making
such alterations and einendations as Inight still be found re-
quisite.
“As soon as this object was accomplished, we issued our
royal authority for the .mpression and publication of the work,
under the title of “Ta Tsing Leuh, tseih keae foo le,” or the
General Laws of the inperial dynasty of Tsing, collected and
explained, and accompanied by supplementary clauses.
“Wherefore, officers and in agistrates of the interior and ex-
terior departinents of our empire, be it your care diligently to
observe the same, and to ſorbear in ſuture to give any decision,
or to pass any sentence, according to your private sentiments,
or upon your unsupported authority. Thus shall the magis-
trates and people look up with awe and submission to the jus-
tice of these institutions, as they find themselves respectively
concerned in them; the transgressor will not fail to suffer a
strict expiation of his crimes, and well be the instrument of
deterring others from similar misconduct; and, finally, the go.
vernment and the people will be equally secured for endless .
generations in the enjoyment of the happy effects of the great
and noble virtues of our illustrious progenitors.”
The penal laws of the Ta Tsing dynasty, in com-
ing down to the present time, have passed through
a great number of editions; the latest which we
have seen, and which is now before us, was pub-
blished in the 10th year of Taoukwang (1830), in
28 volumes, octavo. We may occasionally, as we
pass on with the review, pause to compare the trans-
lation with the original; though our chief endeavor


1 J Prmal Lanrs of China. MAY,
will be to give, and as succinctly as possible, an
outline of the whole work, with remarks, pro re
nata, on those points which show in the clearest
light the intentions and the opinions of the Chinese.
—The body of the work is arranged under the
following heads; (1.) general laws; (2.) civil laws;
(3.) fiscal laws; (4.) ritual laws; (5.) military laws;
(6.) criminal laws; and (7.) laws relative to pub-
lic works.
I. GENERAL LAws. This division commences with
a description of the ordinary punishments. The low-
est degree of punishment is a moderate correction,
nominally from 10 to 50 blows, with the lesser" bam-
boo, of which however, only from 4 to 20 are to be
inflicted. The second degree is inflicted with the
larger bamboo; and the number of blows is nomi-
nally from 60 to 100, of which only from 20 to 40
are to be inflicted. Temporary banishment, with
the same number of blows as in the second, con-
stitutes the third degree of punishment. Perpet-
ual banishment with 100 blows is the fourth. And
death, either by strangulation, or by decollation, is
the fifth and last. “All criminals capitally convict-
ed, except such atrocious offenders as are expressly
directed to be executed without delay, are retained
in prison for execution at a particular period in
the autumn; the sentence passed upon each indi-
vidual being first duly reported to, and ratified by,
the emperor.”—It is obvious to remark, here, that
many of the laws and edicts of the Chinese, as well
as many of their words and actions, seem design-
ed to operate solely in terrorem; hence for 50 blows,
20 only are to be inflicted; for 90 blows, only 35
are to be inflicted; and so on.
The next section relates to offenses of a trea-
sonable nature ; they are ten in number: namely—
* This is required to be about five feet and a half long; its breadth
at the extremity is to be about two inches: its thickness one and a
quarter; and its weight about two pounds; the greater is to he of the
ame length, ºut a little broader and a little heavier.


*
-
1833. Penal aws of China. - 1:3
* Rebellion, which is an attempt to violate the divine order of
things on earth by resisting and conspiring against the emper-
or, and is, therefore, an unspeakable outrage, and a disturb-
ance of the peace of the universe; disloyalty, which is evinced
by an attempt to destroy the imperial temples, tombs, and pala-
ces; desertion, a term which may be applied to the offense
of, undertaking to quit, or betray the interests of the empire;
parricide, the murder of a father, uncle, aunt, grandfather, or
grandmother—a crime of the deepest dye; massacre, which is
held to be the murder of three or more persons in one family;
sacrilege, which is committed by stealing from the temples
any, of the sacred articles consecrated to divine purposes, or
by purloining any articles in the immediate use of the sove-
'reign, or by counterfeiting the imperial seal, by administering to
‘the sovereign improper medicines, or, in general, by the com-
mission of any error or negligence by which the safety of his
sacred person may be endangered; impiety, which is discove-
rable in every instance of disrespect or negligence towards
those to whom we owe our being, and by whom we have been
educated and protected; it is likewise committed by those who
inform against, or insult such near relations, while living, or
who refuse to mourn for their loss, to show respect for their
memory, when dead; discord, in families, which is the breach
of the legal or natural ties which are founded on our connec-
tions, by blood or marriage; insubordination, the rising against
or murdering a magistrate; and , incest, the co-habitation of
persons related by any of the degrees within which marriage
is prohibited.—These crimes being distinguished from others
by their enormity, are always, punished with the utmost rigor
of the law; and when capital, are exempted from the benefit
of general pardon. - - - - -
... There are eight privileged classes; the first in-
cludes the relations and connections of the emper-
or; the second comprehends all those servants of
the crown who are distinguished for their long and
faithful service; the third includes those who are
illustrious for their actions; the fourth class com-
prehends those who are eminent for their wisdom
and virtue; the fifth includes those who possess
great abilities; the sixth includes those who, by
day, and by night, are zealously and assiduously en-
gaged in the performance of their civil and mili-
tary duties; the seventh consists of the nobility, which
includes all persons of the first rank, and those of
the second and third who are in any civil and military


14 Penal Laws of China. MAY,
command; the eighth includes the second and third
generations of those who have been distinguished
for their wisdom and eminent services.—Persons
belonging to the privileged classes cannot be put
on trial, except for offenses of a treasonable na-
ture, without the express command of the emperor.
This benefit extends to all the near relations of the
privileged classes. ºn ". . .
When an officer of government commits an of-
fense, his superior shall report the case to the em-
peror, who must direct and sanction the trial. If
the accused is convicted of any offense, which in
ordinary cases is punishable by the infliction of
cºrporal chastisement, he shall instead thereof be
subject to fine or to degradation, or to both. But
those persons who have official situations without
possessing rank, shall not be exempt from corpo-
ral punishment.—It is remarked here by the trans-
lator, that “every officer of government, from the
first to the ninth rank, must be previously quali-
fied by a literary, or military degree, according to
the nature of his profession; but the clerks and
other inferior attendants in the employ of govern-
ment are not considered to have any rank, or to
be permanently distinguished from the rest of the
community.” - - -
. The Tartar subjects of the empire are chastised
with the -whip instead of the bamboo; and instead
of banishment, they are “confined with the cangue
ſkeli) or movable pillory.” There are several con-
siderations which are admitted in mitigation of pu-
nishment. When several persons are concerned in
an affair, the accessories are punished with less
severity than the principals.
It frequently happens in China, at the accession
of a new emperor, and also on the occurrence of
certain anniversaries, that there are passed acts
of general pardon. From the benefits of these acts
all those persons shall be excluded, “who have been
convicted of any of the ten treasonable offenses


|{3,3}. /*enal Laws of China. |
before mentioned;" or of inurder; embezzlement of
governincut stores; robbery; house-breaking; grave-
opening; bribery; forgery and fraud; adultery; kid-
mapping; swindling; and in general all cases where
the laws have been transgressed by premeditation
or design. On the other hand, pardon shall be
extended to all who have offended inadvertently, or
who are liable to punishment merely by implication,
or who are chargeable with “public offenses,”—
provided such offenses, either of commission or
omission, took place within the limits of their own
jurisdiction. There are “particular,” acts of pardon;
and indulgence is frequently granted to offenders
“for the sake of their parents” who are sick, in-
firm, or aged above seventy years, and have no
other child or grandchild above the age of sixteen
to support them. There are some provisions made
also for astronomers, artificers, musicians, and wo-
men, and for the aged, and young, and the infirm,
Persons who make a voluntary and full confes-
sion of their guilt, before it is otherwise discovered,
and surrender themselves up to justice, are par-
doned. When all the parties to an offense have
escaped, if an individual among them surrenders
voluntarily, and also delivers into custody one
other more guilty than himself; or if, when the
guilt is equal, the larger proportion of the party
are delivered up by the smaller-those who thus
voluntarily surrender themselves shall be pardoned,
except in cases of killing, of wounding, and of
criminal intercourse between the sexes. But “re-
mission of punishment, upon a timely and voluntary
confession of guilt, shall not be allowed in those
cases of injury to the person or property which
:annot be repaired by restoration or compensation,
or when the offense was known to the officers of
justice while the offender was concealed, or in cases
of clandestinely passing public barriers.—If the
robber, thicſ, or swindler, repenting of his conduct
restores the plunder to the persons from whom he


| () Penal Laws of Chunu. MAY,
took it, or if the corrupt officer restore the amount
of the bribe to the person from whom it was re-
ceived, this restitution shall be deemed equal to
a confession at the legal tribunal, and in the same
degree entitle the offender to pardon.”
Concerning the forfeiture of goods, the law is, that
“in any case of an illegal transfer of property, in
which both parties are guilty, or when any person
is convicted of possessing prohibited goods, such
goods or property shall be forfeited to the state:
but when any article of property has been obtained
from an individual by violence, injustice, extortion,
or false pretences, it shall be restored to the own-
er.”
The following are the laws concerning offenses
of members of public departments, committed in
their official capacity, and concerning errors and
failures in public proceedings.
“In all cases of officers of government associated in ouc
departinent or tribunal, and committing offenses against the
laws as a public body, by false or erroneous decisions and in-
vestigations, the clerk of the department or tribunal shall be
punished as the principal offender; the punishment of the
several deputies, or executive officers, shall be less by one de-
gree, that of the assessors less by another degree, and that of
the presiding magistrate less by a third degree.... If an inferior
tribunal reports its erroneous judgment to a superior, which
superior, neglecting to examine and discover the error, con-
firms the same, the members of the superior tribunal shall be
respectively liable to punishment less by two degrees than
those of the inferior tribunal. On the other hand, when a
superior tribunal communicates its erroneous judgment to an
inferior tribunal, if the menbers of the latter neglect to exam-
ine the same, and having failed to discover the error, confirm
it by their proceedings, they also shall be liable to punishment,
though under a proportionate mitigation, in the case of each
individual.—In all these cases, the scale of the punishinent in-
curred shall commence with the clerks of the respective courts.”
“Upon any error or failure in the public proceedings of an
officer of government, if he discovers and corrects, or remedies
the same, he shall be pardoned. Also, in case of error or
failure in the proceedings of a public office or tribunal, if any
one member discovers so as to correct or remedy the saune,
all the members shall obtain pardon Au extraordinary delay
in issuing public orders trous anv iribunal of iustice or other


1833. Penal Laws of China. 17
public department, renders all the members liable to punish-
ment; but if any one of them voluntarily interposes, and pre-
vents any ſnrther delay from taking place, all the magistrates
or officers of that tribunal or department, shall be pardoned;
but the clerk shall incur the full punishment except he had
himself acknowledged the impropriety of delay which had taken
place, and interposed to prevent its continuance ; in which case
his punishment shall be reduced two degrees.”
“In translating the titles of the constituent of
ficers of a Chinese tribunal or public board,” Sir
George remarks, that “it was impossible to find
terms that were not in some point of view exception-
able, but those which have been chosen will show,
that the arrangement is analogous to thät adopted
iu such of our own colonial governments, as are
administered by a president, nembers of council,
secretaries, and clerks.”
“Offenses committed by foreigners”—is the head-
ing of a distinct section, which we quote entire.
“In general, all foreigners who come to submit
themselves to the government of the empire, shall,
when guilty of offenses, be tried and schtenced
according to the established laws. The particular
decisions however of the tribunal Lefan Yuen (the
foreign or Colonial Office,) shall be guided accoro...g
to regulations framed for the government of the
Mongol tribes.”
“This section of the code,” says the translator
in a note, “has been expressly quotcd by the pro-
vincial government of Canton, and applied to the
case of foreigners residing there and at Macao for
the purpose of trade. The laws of China have
never, however, been attempted to be enforced
against those foreigners, except with considerable
allowances in their favor; although on the other
hand, they are restricted and circumscribed in such
a manner that a transgression on their part of any
specific article of the laws, can scarcely occur, at
lcast, not without, at the same time, implicating
and involving in their guilt some of the natives,


18 Penal Laws of China. MAY,
who thus, in most cases, become the principal vic-
tims of offended justice.
“The situation of foreigners in China is certainly
by no means so satisfactory on the whole as might
be desired, or even as it may be reasonably expect-
ed to become in the progress of time. [Again,
in another note.] It is one of the necessary, but em-
barrassing consequences of the footing upon which
foreigners are at present received in China, that
they can neither consider themselves as wholly
subject to, or as wholly independent of the laws
of the country in which they live. When unfor-
tunately involved in contentions with the govern-
ment, there is a line, on one side of which sub-
mission is disgraceful, and on the other, resistance
unjustifiable ; but this line being uncertain and un-
defined, it is not surprising that a want of confi-
dence should sometimes have led to a surrender
of just and reasonable privileges; or that at other
times, an excess of it should have brought the
whole of this valuable trade, and of the property
embarked in it, to the brink of destruction.”
The following paragraph points out the mode of
procedure when the laws appear contradictory.
When the law in any particular case appears
to differ from the the general laws contained in this
division of the code, the magistrate shall always
decide according to the former, in preference to
the latter. If an offense is committed under ag-
gravated circumstances, of which the offender is
ignorant at the time, he shall suffer no more than
the punishment due in ordinary cases; as for ex-
ample, “if a nephew, being educated at a distance
from his uncle, and not knowing his person, strikes
him, it shall be judged to be only an ordinary case
of assault.’ On the other hand, if the offense is
committed under palliating circumstances, the ot-
fender shall have the full advantage thereof; as for
instance, ‘a father strikes a person whom he sup
poses to be a stranger, but who was in fact his sou.’


l:}.}:}. Penal Laurs of China. 19
When the sentence of the law is said to be in-
creased, it is implied that the punishment shall be
inflicted more severely,–a sentence of forty blows,
becomes a sentence of fifty blows; when the sen-
tence is diminished, the punishment is mitigated,
fifty blows are reduced to forty; and so forth.
The following is the law concerning the diri-
sion of time. “A day shall be considered to have
elapsed when the hundred divisions are completed.”
At present, the day is divided into ninety-six divi-
sions. “A day's labor shall, however, be computed
only from the rising to the setting of the sun. A large
year shall consist of 360 days complete; but a man's
age shall be computed according to the number
of years of the cycle elapsed since his name and
birth were recorded in the public register.”—Con-
cerning this division of time the translator remarks,
that the civil year in China ordinarily consists of
no more than twelve lunations, but that an inter-
calary month is introduced as often as may be
necessary to bring the commencement of every
year to the second new moon after each preced-
ing winter solstice. The most usual date em-
ployed by the Chinese, is the year of the reigning
emperor, but they likewise compute by cycles of
sixty years, each year of such a period being
distinguished with a particular name, formed by
a binary combination of ten initial, and twelve final,
characters.
Here we conclude our extracts from the first
division, or preliminary regulations of the Penal
Code. We have passed over several whole sec-
tions; but have endeavored to bring into notice all
the most important topics, and, as far as it could
well be done, in the words of our elegant and
learned translator.”
*To be critinued,


2(l (ºut:luſ!'s Journal, \l AY.
Journal of a voyage along the coast of China from
the province of Canton to Leaoutung in Man-
tehou Tartary; 1832–33: by the Rev. CHARLEs
Gutzlaff.
[The journal, which we here introduce, and which we shall conclude in
our next number, contains a sketch of the third voyage which has been made
along the coast of China by Mr. G., during Thé Tast two years. He em.
barked for the first, on board a junk at Bankok, June 3d, 1831, reached
Mantchou Tartary in November, and returned to Macao, Dec. 13th. On
the second, he embarked Feb. 26th, visited several places in thc provinces
of Fuhkeen and Chekeång on his way up to Shantung. and from thence
he passed to Corea, and returning by the Lewchew archipelago, reached
Macao, Sept. 4th, 1832. For the third, he embarked on the 20th of last
Oct., and returned on the 29th ult. This last voyage, in regard to direct
intercourse with the people and opportunity for observation, far exceeded
either of the preceding ; and the journal, though brief, affords abundant
evidence that to the people of China, the “foreign barbarians" are no un-
welcome visitors.-We ought to add, that this journal was written for
publication in England, and that at our request, the writer was induced to
ict it appear in thc pages of the Repository.]
After much consultation with others, and a con-
flict in my own mind, I embarked in the Sylph
Capt. W., commander, and A. R., esquire, super-
cargo, Oct. 20th, 1832. The Sylph was a fast sail-
ing vessel, well manned and armed. She had to
beat up against a strong northeast monsoon, and
to encounter very boisterous weather before reach-
ing her destination, Tečntsin and Mantchou Tar-
tary. From the moment we left Macao roads,
we had to contest our whole course against wind
and current. Furious gales, accompanied with rain
and a tremendous sea, drove us several days along
the coast, threatening destruction to our barque.
But God who dwelleth on high did not forsake us;
and, though often engulphed in the deep, his al-
mighty hand upheld our sinking vessel. Only one
Lascar was swept away; we heard his dying groan,
but could lend no assistance. It was a dark, distnal
night; we were thoroughly drenched with water:
horror hovered around us. Many a wave swept over


8:3:3. (Fulzlaff’s Journal. 2|
our deck, but those which dashed against our poop
were really terrible; three of them might have
sunk us.
October 26th, we lay to under a double reefed sail,
and then ran into Ke-seak (Ke-shih) bay, on the east
coast of Canton province. The harbor is lined
with rocks. The coast is bleak and studded with
granite; the interior is very fertile. Many villages
and cities are visible from this place. We were
soon visited by the fishermen, a boisterous and
rough sort of people. In exchange for their fish,
we gave them rice, but they were never satisfied
with the quantity. Perceiving, however, that the
barter yielded them a great profit, they brought
vegetables, and offered themselves as brokers. Al-
though this was an imperial naval station, they were
by no means frightened by the presence of his ma-
jesty's officers. They received my books gladly,
frequently repeating their thanks, and promising to
circulate them far and wide amongst their friends.
—In this voyage 1 was provided with a choice
stock of books, three times the number which I
had in the preceding voyages.
I)uring the night the wind subsided, and for the
first time we enjoyed repose. The next evening
we visited Kap-che (Kä-tsze), a little to the east of
Ke-seak. Here 1 was hailed by my friends, who
called me their townsman, and expressed their de-
light in seeing me come back again. Books were
in great demand, and the genuine joy in receiving
them was visible in every countenance. I had been
here a few months before, and traveled through
many a village with the word of God in my hand.
It had drawn the attention of many, and the inter-
est now manifested was truly encouraging.
The weather becoming gradually fair, though
the wind was contrary, we were able by tacking to
advance slowly. When we passed Namoh (Nan-
aou) in Fuhkeen, we saw occasionally large vil-
lages and cities along the coast, at which we could


J2 (Julzlaff’s Journal. MlAY.
only gaze, and were obliged to put into Lae-ao
(Nae-aou) bay. This is in the northern part of
Fuhkečn, lat. 26 degrees N., and long. 120 degrees
2.; a very excellent harbor, and almost land-lock-
ed. Anxious to proceed on our voyage we weigh-
ed anchor early next morning. The inhabitants
in the neighborhood who had never seen a ship,
came off in boats, but being rather distrustful they
kept aloof. When I hailed them they approached
nearer and nearer, but by the time they came along
side, we had already got under way. Tendering
a book to an intelligent looking man, he was at
first surprised at the strange gift, but then turn-
ing to his countrymen he read it aloud. Their
attention was instantly drawn towards him; other
requests were made, and within a few minutes, the
ship was surrounded by clamorous applicants. The
captain was beckoning them away, and loosened
the painters, but they clung to our tackle and de-
clared, “we must have these good books, and will
not move without them.” Such determination had
the desired effect; I gave them freely what they
so earnestly craved, and they went away exulting.
November 8th, we put into Pih-kwan, on the
frontier of Chekeñng, in lat. 27 degrees 11 min., N.,
long. 120 degrees 22 minutes, E. This harbor is
spacious, and by changing the berth, affords shelter
against all winds. Here we visited several junks
which were on their way to Shanghae. When
books were offered to the crews, they refused to
accept them, upon the plea of having nothing to give
us as an equivalent; and upon hearing that they
might receive them as a present, they made many
bows, and said that they took them upon credit.
Innumerable native craft are always seen plying
about, as we approach the emporiums of Keāng-
man and Chekeång. These coasters seem to be an
aquatic race, preferring the briny element to the
comforts of the shore. Of all the Chinese fisher-
men, which is a very numerous class of people,


1833. (ºutzlaff's Journal. 23
the natives of Fuhkeen are the most enterprising
and daring. The greater part of the Chinese coast
is visited by them; they brave all dangers for a
scanty livelihood, and suffer the severest hardships
to return to their families with five dollars after
the toils of a whole year. Want and their lawless
inclinations have frequently converted them into pi-
rates; even at this moment they are the terror of
the whole Chekeång coast.
We, had now (Nov. 15th) reached Keāngnan;
the ‘w.nds were variable, and a month after our
departure we saw the promcntory of Shantung,
and were beating towards Mantchou Tartary. ;
was now a year since I had been there ; we land-
ed at Fung-ming, a place to the south of Kae-chow.
Some Shantung emigrants, who here constitute
the most numerous part of the population, were
quietly walking along the shore, when they saw
“these strangers” start up to view. Instead of being
startled they looked very gravely at us, and after
having satisfied their curiosity in regard to our
origin, they went on with their work. We had
had a long conversation with the owner of a house,
who had posted himself right in the way to pre-
vent our entering his dwelling. I now thought it
high time to make them a present of some books.
When they found that I really intended to give these
to them, they changed their tone, became friendly
and hospitable. We entered their hovels of which
the oven constituted the principal part, and, in fact,
seems to be the drawing-room, bed, and kitchen.
Pigs, asses, and goats lodged in an adjoining room
very comfortably. Our host had provided a quan-
tity of fuel from the stalks of the cotton plant,
which grows here very abundantly. He had a very
numerous and healthy family of children dancing
with delight about the strangers. Every body was
well dressed in seven-fold jackets and skins, and
seeined also to be well fed; for the country abounds
in all the necessaries of life, aud has abundance of
2.


24 Gutzlaff's Journal. MAY,
ſ
produce for exportation. When we left the people,
now grown more familiar with us, they pressed for-
ward to receive the word of eternal life, and were
by no means deficient in compliments and thanks
for the precious gift. -* - -
A few hours afterwards we arrived in the bay
of Tung-ts...e-kow, in lat. 39 deg. 23 min. N., long.
121 deg. 7 min. E., where we found a large fleet of
junks, bound to the southern provinces, but now
lying at anchor. They were all loaded with Man-
tehou produce. The people on board seemed open-
hearted, and answered our questions with great
frankness. Their unanimous advice was, not to pro-
coed farther to the north, because we should there
meet with ice.—I can bear witness to their readi-
ness to receive the tidings of salvation. Though
their utter ignorance of Christianity opposed a strong
barrier to their understanding our brief conversa-
tions, yet the books will speak to them at leisure.
They may be only partly perused, or even some
of them may be thrown away; yet many a tract
and Bible will find readers, and impart knowledge
necessary to the salvation of the soul. Filled with
these thoughts we visited the valleys and hills a-
round the bay. Very few traces of idolatry were
visible in their houses; we saw only one temple
dedicated to the Queen of Heaven, with the trophies
of her saving power hung up—some junks in min-
iature. A few blind men were the overseers. We
found here a very intelligent people, who made
rational inquiries of us, and who also read our
books.-Nothing struck them so much as the
construction of a watch. The fine calico of our
shirts, and the broadcloth of our coats, also struck
their fancy very much; but for their want of money
they would have bought these at a high price.
The valleys along this coast present an alluvial
soil. In no part of the world perhaps does the sea
recede so rapidly and constantly as in Leaoutung
and Pih-chihle. Every year adds to the land some


1836. Gutzlaff's Journal. 25
fertile acres, and makes the navigation more dan-
gerous. We walked along an estuary which runs
a considerable distance into the country. Large
flocks of goats were browsing upon the remnants
of grass which the retiring autumn had left. The
people were much frightened when they saw us
entering the villages; many of their houses were
very bare and comfortless. I here learned to my
great surprise, that the people had become appre-t
hensive that we were about introducing Roman
Catholicism. Though I explained to them the wide
difference between our respective tenets, they shook
their heads and began to disbelieve my statement.
The people in the junks, however, were all attention,
and gladly received the gospel.—We had from an
eminence, a full view of the adjacent country.
None of the existing charts gives a correct outline
of the coast; the southwestern extremity does not
run out into a promontory, but ends in a bluff head-
land, about a degree in breadth. Many islands
are scattered along the coast, but the water is
shallow, seldom exceeding ten fathoms.
On the 28th of Nov., we arrived in the roads of
Kae-chow. Upon examination, we found it impracti-
cable to anchor so close in shore as to protect us from
the strong northerly gales; we therefore bore away
ºr Kin-chow and the Great Wall. Whilst we were
anticipating the pleasure we should experience in
isehºlding his ancient structure, we ran upon a sand-
bank, ... ºch was entirely unknown to all of us.
The ship knocked very heavily upon a hard sand
bottom, and our apprehension both of losing keel
and rudder, and of springing a leak, were by no
means groundless. Backing the sails and throw-
ing part of the cargo overboard, proved ineffectual
to set us off; the vessel settled in the sand, and
remained immovable. The next morning a fierce
north wind blew from the ice-fields of Kamtschat-
ka down the bay; the water decreased, the ship
fell over on her beam-ends, and all our Lascars
lo-


26 Gutzlaff's Journal. MAY,
were disabled by cold from doing any work. Dur-
ing these hours of peril, our almighty God consol-
ed our hearts so that we were enabled to remain
cheerful, and to hope and pray for the best.
After having failed in all our efforts to get her
off, a party of volunteers was made up, and de-
parted for Kae-chow to procure assistance from the
mandarins. The land was more than 25 miles
distant, the cold most intense, and we had thirteen
helpless Lascars in the boat. Entirely covered with
ice, we arrived at a head-land, and were received
most humanely by some fishermen and a priest,
but found no mercy before the mandarins. One
of the Lascars was frozen to death, the others
were on the verge of eternity. Never did I so well
understand the 28th chapter of Acts; we also were
received into cottages, and a fire was kindled to
thaw our clothes. - .
Whilst we were on shore endeavoring to hire
some lighters, the ship got off by the interposition
of God, who had ordered the south wind to blow,
thus driving up more water upon the bank. His
name be praised to all eternity—for we were very
near utter destruction. I had afterwards an inter-
view with a Mantchou officer of high rank; even he,
though a heathen, ascribed our escape to “supreme
heaven.” When we returned to the ship, we again
ran the risk of perishing with cold ; for tie north
wind rose on a sudden, and the cold became so
intense that everything congealed. .
Dec. 3d, our ship was coated inside as well
as outside with solid ice. After several hours of
labor we succeeded in getting up the anchor, and
took a speedy farewell of these dismal regions.
At our re-entering Tung-tsze-kow bay, we saw a
great number of junks at anchor. We were hailed
by the kind natives, who procured for us provisions
and fuel, which the mandarins had promised, but
had never furnished. The absence of their rulers
rendered them more friendly ; they did everything


18:33. ("ulzlaff’s Journal. 27
in their power to oblige, and showed themselves
worthy of our trust.—There is here a great field for
Christian enterprise. The inhabitants show much
sound understanding, and are free from that de-
grading superstition which reigns in southern Asia.
Though every grove and high place was full of
idols and images, and every eminencº, a torned with
a temple, the people were not utterly enslaved by
superstition. In their habits and behavior, ‘hey ap-
peared very much like our peasantry: some of their
farms were in excellent order, and plenty reigns
everywhere.—Kae-chow city, which we visited, is
situated about 10 miles in the interior, surrounded
by a high wall, and thickly inhabited ; it is a place
of extensive trade, but the houses are low and ill-
built. The Chinese colonists, which are by far
the most numerous part of the population, are very
industrious; whilst the Tartars live at their ease,
and enjoy the emoluments of government. I con-
sider Mantchou Tartary as a very hopeful field for
missionary enterprise, and hunibly hope that it will
soon attract the notice of some society.
Unable to remain any longer in these northern
latitudes, we bore away for Shantung. However,
as we there found the cold rigorous, we steered for
Shanghae in the southern part of Keāngsoo prov-
ince. Though keeping about 80 miles distant
from the shore of Keāngnan, we nearly ran upon
a bank of the Yellow river. It is very apparent,
that the immense sand-flats of Keiingnan extend
a great distance from the low coast; but this coast,
as well as the greater part of Shantung and Pih-
chihle, is entirely unknown to any European na-
vigator. We arrived (December 11th) near the
entrance of the channel which leads between shoals
and sand-flats to the Woosung river, on which
Shanghae is situated ; here we were detained
for three days by contrary winds. The air was
darkened, and the storm raged throughout the dis-
mal days and nights. The motion of the ship was


28 Gutzlaff’s Journal. MAY,
very great, the sea dashing violently against her
weather-side.
When at last the thick clouds cleared away, and
the sun shone out in his lustre, the sea still run-
ning very high, we perceived a junk in distress.
She had lost both her masts and anchors, and was
drifting like a log upon the wide ocean. Several
Chinese vessels were in her neighborhood, but
only one approached her, and after perceiving her
helpless state, bore away with one of her crew.
It was time now for us to retaliate in the Christian
way ; for when we were in distress, nobody came
to save us, and we had now an excellent oppor-
tunity of executing Christ's commands in Matth. v.
44. We manned a boat and ran alongside, but
were nearly swamped by the huge waves. The
crew, twelve in number, stretched out their hands
for assistance, and with piteous cries intimated their
dangerous situation. The first thing which they
handed to us, was an image of the Queen of Heav-
en, the patroness of Chinese navigators. At this
extraordinary instance of heathenish delusion, I
grew impatient, as we had not a moment to lose ;
I called to them, “let the idol perish, which can
neither save itself nor you.” We snatched up four
men into the boat and returned towards the ship.
The idol was drowned, but all the men were saved.
.s soon as they reached our ship, the captain of the
junk fell on his knees before Mr. R. the supercargo.
We directed him to adore the true God, and render
him thanks for deliverance. When we had saved
their clothing, and a small part of their cargo, the
water had almost risen between decks, and we set
fire to the vessel. * * *
After many reverses, having entered the Woo-
sung river, we drew up a memorial addressed to
the principal magistrate of Shanghae district, and
delivered the Chinese, who were natives of Tsung-
ming island, to his care. We had immediately an
interview with admiral Kwang, the naval commander


1833. Gutzlaff's Journal. 20
of this station ; he was very friendly, made numer-
ous inquiries respecting Mr. L. the supercargo of
the Amherst, and offered his services for our accom-
modation. During the time which we staid in the
river, or lived at Shanghae, I had frequent opportu-
nities of visiting those places where I had been six
months ago. The people appeared even riore friend-
ly than before. In the villages, they inquired
whether I had brought new books with rhe, and
were eager to obtain them. After distributing a
few, the demand grew more urgent, so that I could
scarcely show my face in any of the villages with-
out being importuned by numerous crowds. Most
joyfully did they receive the tidings of salvation,
though still ignorant of the glad message, “to you
is born a Savior.”—As it is a custom with them to
expose their dead near their houses, they are con-
stantly reminded of their mortality. - .
The mandarins never directly interfered with my
distributing books or conversing with the people.
After having issued the severest edicts against hav-
ing any commercial dealings, they gave us full per-
mission to do what we liked. When they saw that
their inflammatory placards had not the desired ef-
fect, they changed their tone, praised our conduct
in rescuing twelve Chinese, but gave also their
paternal advice to the people, to have nothing to do
with the barbarians. Meanwhile an imperial edict!
had arrived, enjoining the officers to treat us with.'
compassion, but not to supply us with rice or water.
They acted up to the letter of these peremptory :
injunctions, but sent great quantities of live-stock,
flour, &c., aboard, with the sole condition of not.
paying for them. As we were rather short of provi-
sions, we accepted their stores. ,
This central part of China is very fertile, being.
a continous plain of a black, loamy soil, well ir-
rigated by numerous ditches and canals. The po-
pulation is immense, and if we ought to judge from
the numerous children which we saw, it is on the


-, * Cutlºff's Journal. May.
increase. Shaughae appears to be the greatest
emporium of the empire. We found there more
than a thousand junks moored opposite the city.
and others were arriving whenever the weather
permitted. We may call it the gate of central Asia,
and especially of the central provinces of China.
During the time we remained in the port, (from
Dec. 25th, 1832 till Jan. 5th, 1833,) though it is
situated in latitude 31 degrees north, the weather
was rather severe, the thermometer seldom rising
above 33.
Jan. 5th, we sailed from this port, shaping our
course to Chapoo, a harbor on the north coast of
Chekeñng, in lat. 30 deg. 37 min. Until you come
to the high lands which form the harbor of this
city, the whole coast from the Yellow river is
very flat, and scarcely visible even with the ship
close in to the land. The sea is everywhere re-
ceding from the land, so that the flats formed along
the shore, which are dry at low water, constitute a
barrier to the whole coast, and are gradually be-
coming arable soil. We tried to reach the shore
a few miles north of Chapoo, but even our jolly-
boat got aground, and we must have waded more
than a mile through the mud, before we could
reach the shore. But from Chapoo the country
becomes hilly with undulating ridges, and continues
so for a long distance, with little variation.
Chapoo is the only place from whence the impe-
rial monopoly with Japan is carried on. It has a
tolerable harbor, with considerable overfalls. The
rise and fall of the tide is very great, so much
that the smaller junks are left high and dry at low
water. Together with its suburbs, the town is
perhaps five miles in circuit, built in a square,
and intersected by numerous canals which are con-
nected with the Hangchow river. Nothing can ex-
ceed the beautiful and picturesque appearance of
the surrounding region. We may say that as far
as the cye can range, all is one village interspersed


1333, Gutzlaff's Journal. 31
with towering pagodas, romantic inausoleums, and
numerous temples. The adjacent country is called
the Chinese Arcadia; and surely if any territory in
China is entitled to this name, it is the tract around
Hangchow and Chapoo. It seems that the na-
tives also are sensible of their prerogative in inhab-
iting this romantic spot. 'l'hey have tried to im-
prove upon nature, and have embellished the scen-
ery with canals, neat roads, plantations, and con-
spicuous buildings. We found , nowhere so much
openness and kindness as among them. Their
intelligent inquiries respecting our country, were
endlèss, and they seemed never satiated with our
company. f * * . . . . . . . . . "
When we first landed, an armed force was
drawn up along the shore. The soldiers had match-
locks and burning matches ready for a charge. A
Tartar general had placed himself in a temple to
superintend the operations. Being accustomed to
the fire of Chinese batteries, which, seldom do hurt;
and knowing that their matchlocks cannot hit, we
passed the line of their defence in peace. The sol-
diers retreated, and the crowds of people in the
rear being very dense, a great part of the camp.
was overrun and pressed down by the people, so that
the tents fell to the ground. After this outset, noth-
ing disagreeable occurred; we were at full liberty
to walk abroad and converse with the people, and
were only occasionally troubled with the clamorous
intreaties of some officers. But after an interview
with a messenger from the lieut.-governor at Hang-
chow, (a very sensible, courteous officer,) and several
other mandarins, we came to an understanding.'... '
In one of our excursions I took a box of books,
with me. We had visited a temple upon a high
hili which overlooks all this populous region.” The
temples "might be called elegant by the Chinese, if
the abominations of idolatry did not render such an
epithet inapplicable. When I took the books out
of the beat and handed a copy to imam of respect-


32 . Remarks on the MAY,
able appearance, he read aloud the title, and all at
once the crowd rushed upon me, hundreds stretching
out their hands to receive the same gift. Within
a few minutes the store was exhausted, but the
news spread with great rapidity. We saw the peo-
ple sitting for six hours together on the brow of a
hill opposite to which our vessel was lying at an-
chor. As soon as they saw us approaching near
to the shore, they ran down the hill with great
velocity, grasped the books from my hands; and sped
towards their friends in the surrounding villages.
If ever our Christian books have been read with at-
tention, it was here at this time. We took a wide
r^nge in the adjacent country, and were really as-
tonished at the general knowledge which these si-
lent nreachers had spread.—Let us not boast of
such an extraordinary instance of the diffusion of
knowledge, nor deny to curiosity her full share in
this stir; yet after all this, the gospel must be said
to have flown here on eagles' wings. We leave the
result to God, and wish to revisit those places,
not to exult selfishly in the great changes which
may have taken place, but to praise our Redeemer
that he has given to these millions the means of
knowing the way of eternal life.
'M ISC E L L A NIE. S.
RsMARKs on the population of China.”—It appears that
the existing population of China, as given in your paper by
a comparative statement of authors who have written upon
the subject, has excited much interest. To all who are only
acquainted with one part of China, or who have obtained all
their knowledge from report, the enormous number of 360 mil-
lions must appear far above the actual amount. Having vi-
sited only the maritime provinces of the empire, I am by no
means competent to judge of the population in the inland
provinces; nor did I ever take the trouble to compare the
* From a Correspondent.


1833. Population of China. 33
statistical accounts of one district with the average popula-
tion. Yet I have been everywhere struck with the dense
adult population which I met, and with the amazing numbers
of the rising generation. Every habitable spot is cultivated,
and inhabited by the greatest numbers which by their utinost
exertions can subsist upon it. View the bleak coast of Fuh-
keen province; the barren rocks and the extensive sand flats
are rendered arable by industry, and are thickly inhabited.
The plains of Chekeång exhibit still greater multitudes in
their innumerable hamlets. Keāngsoo is crowded with vil-
lages and cities; hundreds of miles we saw nothing but hamlet
joined to hamlet. Shantung province is inferior to both these,
yet it has an immense population; and Pih-chihle is a world
in itself.
'That China should furnish subsistence for a greater number
of people than most of the countries of Europe on equal space,
is not at all suprising, if we regard the provisions of the poorer
classes, which are here a greater proportion than anywhe.e
else in the world. These all live on a very sparing diet, not
in quantity, but in quality. It is only, in times of general
starvation, that we could expect the inhabitants of the poorest
parts of Europe to live upon the common diet of the poor
people here. We may safely assert that one European requires
an *mount of land to maintain him, sufficient for the main-
tenance of two Chinese.
In Europe, we have gardens, immense forests, marshes,
meadows, &c. We find nothing like these in any part of China,
at least on a large scale. There may be wastes which are ab-
solutely unproductive; but where are the meadows with their
large herds of grazing cattle 7 . Where shall we find the Eu-
ropean gardens or orchards There are indeed some, but they
bear no proportion to the ground laid out for these purposes
in Europe. Their forests are on the brows of hills, so that very
little arable land is lost thereby; and their marshes, by im-
mense labor have been converted into fertile rice-fields. The
Chinese do not consume so much animal food as we do; hence
the grain which with us is devoted to the support of cattle,
here falls to the share of man. Add to this, the grossness of
the Chinese stomach which refuses nothing; a. *#.
the large importation of provisions—from southern Asia and
Mantchou Tartary; and the question how these millions tan
subsist, will be solved.
In Europe, we live not merely to drag out our terrestrial
existence, but we live also for enjoyment, and the poorest classes
often waste more than would maintain double their number.
In China, the means of enjoyment are very limited. The com-
mon people bend their whole mind to get the indispensable
necessaries of their existence; they seldom go further. Though
they are occasionally extravagant during the time of their fes-
tivitics, they curtail their expenses immediately after they are
U.


34 Population of China. MAY,
over. I have adduced these facts to show the possibility of
the existence of such a population. I have added my own tes-
timony as an eye-witness, and add that I never saw a more
populous country, nor ever beheld so numerous a progeny.
But China is uot only populous in itself, it has a superabun-
dance to send to the adjoining countries. I do not here men-
tion Corea as having recieved Chinese emigrants, but refer to
Mantchou Tartary, Formosa, Siain, Cochinchina, and the In-
dirth—Archipelago.
A century ago, Mantchou Tartary was a dreary waste, hav-
ing been deserted by its original cultivators, for their more
ambitious projects in China. At the present moment there are
millions of Chinese from Shantung province, inhabiting this
country. I have been in Tingchoo ſoo district, from whence
the major part of these colonists went ; but we found no ap-
apparent diminution in the population. Every year new emigrants
depart and penetrate farther to the north, but their departure
i scarcely perceptible in the numbers remaining.
During the time when the Dutch held a part of Formosa,
some Chinese settlers came fron Fuhkeen province; but since
the Chinese have had possession of the island, their numbers
have increased to several millions. These supplies are both
from Fullkeen province, and the eastern parts of Cantou ; and
they are daily on the increase, so much so as to threaten the
entire extinction of the aborigines.
When the Ming dynasty reigned, a few traders found their
way to the southern parts of Asia. But after the accession
of 'he Mantchou family to the throne, multitudes of men from
Fullkeen left their homes for the islands of the Indian Archipela-
go, to escape the thralldom of these “barbarian rulers.” When
Yungching succeeded Kanghe, he not only connived at these
emigrations but even encouraged them. With the extension
of the trade to the countries south of China, emigration also
increased. Many of the islands are thickly inhabited by
the Chinese settlers, whose numbers are annually increased by
uéw comers, whilst only a few return to their native land. I
have been in those parts of the empire from whence these colo-
dists come; but the emigration never thins the dense popula-
'tilin, which might send forth tenfold the present number of
colonists, without depriving the country of cultivators.
The most numerous part of the population in Siam is Chi-
nese, far outnumbering the natives. Most of these emigrants
come from the eastern part of Canton province; and notwith-
standing this constant drain, the numbers are so immense
that government is constantly harassed with providing them
the means of subsistence. In Cochinchina and Tungking, the
Chinese colonists are numerous, notwithstanding the great re-
strictions made to prevent any augmentation.—Were we well
acquainted with the countries west of China, we might


1833. Vuccination. 35
perhaps find that the Chinese emigrants also throng towards
those vassal states, wherever they are not directly prohibited
from crossing the frontiers. The little which we have said,
however, may be sufficient to show that the populution of Chi-
na is enormous, and is on the increase. I think therefore that
the census as given in the Ta Tsing Hwuy-teen, is rather be-
low than above the actual number.
Whilst viewing these myriads, debased by gross idolatry,
we cannot but deeply lament their condition. As long as the
glorious gospel shall not penetrate these vast regions, they
will stand like a blank and dreary waste, before the eyes of
the Christian philanthropist. But as there has been a time .
of lamentation for many centuries, there—will also be—a-period
of rejoicing. TFor them also the Redeemer of the world be-
came man, and suffered the most cruel death on the cross;
the same blood which was shed for the European nations,
and which has proved effectual to the salvation of millions,
will likewise afford deliverance to the sons of China. There
are no chimeras; we trust in the saving power of the exalted
Son of God; we believe his promises, and may perhaps in
our own times see the approach of the glorious day.
The political economist ºr my ask, What will become of Chi-
na if her population contin' s to increase at the present rate
To this question, I can give no answer. We may look
wishfully to the western Shores of the American continent;
there is still TºmTor many TüßTTTof industrious colonists
like the Chinese; but the syst., ºf national separation prevents
one frºm Tidulging in such speculations.—Let Christianity
sway her sceptre over China, and all will be well.
Vacci Nation.—The papers concerning the introduction of
w ºccination into this country, alluded to in a previous number,
(see volume first, page 334,) came to hand early in this month.
They were accompanied by a very polite and friendly letter,
which however requires us to refrain from remarks which, we
think, are due to the writer of these papers. We can, there-
fore, only tender to that venerable and worthy gentleman,
and we are happy to do it thus publicly, our hearty thanks,
both on our own account and in behalf of the benefited mil-
lions of this empire.—The first part of the papers consists
of a Report which was written in 1816; the last part contains
a summary of three other Reports, which were made subse-
quently and at different times. The tract mentioned in the
first Report, with one or two others written by natives on the
same subject, we purpose to notice in a future number. Dur-
ing the present season, and partly perhaps in consequence of


36 - Vaccination. MAY,
the unusual prevalence of the small-pox, the practice has been
very extensive in Canton;–a little grandson of his excellency
governor Loo is among the subjects vaccinated. Without fur-
ther remark for the present we here subjoin the papers entire.
Report submitted to the Board of the National Vaccine Es-
tablishment, respecting the introduction_of_the practice* of vac-
cine inoculation into China, A. D. 1805; its progress since
that period, and its actual state. Dated Canton, February 18th,
1816.
It having devolved upon me to conduct or superintend the
introduction and practice of vaccine inoculation in this part of
the world, during the last eleven years, I beg leave to submit
to the Board of the National Vaccine Establishment, the fol-
lowing Report of its commencement, progress, and present
state. I do not flatter myself that any suggestions or facts in
my power to adduce, can be deemed essential, either to
t’-e establishment, or to the improvement, of the practice;
still I trust, that the following details will convey some testi-
inony of the efficacy of it, in addition to the mass of evidence
which has enabled the Board, and the Medical Profession at
large, to pledge themselves so filly and so solemnly in its
behalf to their country. - -* .
Almost from the period at whical rational proof was forded
of the efficacy of vaccination for its end, the Honorable the Fast
India Company— had, in their own territories, promoted the
practice by every aid and countenance in their power to afford;
and especially so, by a munificence of expense for the end,
which few governments have incurred in behalf of their subjects,
in mitigation of mere personal and domestic evils and suffer-
ings, however great and general they might be. Their relations
with this empire being merely commercial, and its institutions
so peculiar, no construction of duty called for, nor did their
influence admit of, such effectual interference;—notwithstanding
they have all along sanctioned the end; in consequence of
which many attempts were made to introduce the practice from
British India, but unsuccessfully.
In the spring of 1805, and whilst James Drummond, esquire,
was at the head of their affairs in this country, the vaccine
was brought by Mr. Hewit, a Portuguese subject and a mer-
chant of Macao, in his vessel, upon live subjects from Manila;
—His Catholic Majesty having had it conveyed by suitable
means, and umder the care of professional men (across the
South American continent), to his settlement in the Phillippine
islands. I observe that one of them (D. F. X. Balmis,) states
himself to have introduced the practice in this country; but
before his arrival in China, it had been quite extensively
conducted by the Portuguese practitioners at Macao, as well
as by myself among the inhabitants there and the Chinese, and


1833. Vaccination. 37
the accompanying tract drawn up by ine, had been translated
by Sir George Staunton into Chinese, and published several
months previous to his arrival.
As I deemed the inoculation among subjects connected with
the foreign society, or with the settlement of Macao, nugatory
towards an establishment of the practice in China; it was
from the beginning conducted, first at some expense, by ino-
culations at stated periods among the natives,<-and of them,
necessarily, the poorest classes, who dwelt clowued together in
boats or otherwise, so that (the small-pox being, invariably,
an annual epidemic in this province) its efficacy soon came to
the test. By the time the British Eactory removed from Ma-
cao io-Canton in that season, a degree of confidence had been
established in its favor; and in the course of the winter and
spring months of 1805–6, and during the raging of the small-
pox (of which the annual period of attack is in February, and
of its decline early in June), the numbers brought for ino-
culation were great.
At that time it was considered judicious to endeavor to give
the practice extension by vaccinating as many as possible, not
fully aware of the characteristic apathy of the Chinese to what
does not immediately appeal to their observation through the
exigency either of their sufferings or interests, and erroneously
thinking that such a benefit to be appreciated, required but to be
known. Very many (I believe I may state thousands,) were
in the course of twelve months inoculated; and even under the
circumstances stated, and in that early stage of the pursuit,
I heard no imputation laid against the success of the practice,
which admitted of being traced,—an instance of good fortune
the less to have been expected, because in order to fulfill the
views -% had taken of the most proper means for its dissemina-
tion, I had instructed several Chinese in the details of it,
after the best manner I could, and they practiced it exten,
sively as weii at a distance from as under my inspection.
When the small-pox ceased to be epidemic, the evil and
the remedy against it were equally forgotten; and I found
great difficulty in procuring a sufficient number of subjects,
by means of which, merely to preserve the vaccine. In fact,
since its first introduction into China, it has been twice extinct;
and in both instances, again brought from the island of Luçonia.
At two other times, when lost at Macao and Canton, at-which
places only I had it in my power to exert any care respectº
ing it,) it has been found to have been képt up in countr
districts at considerable distance from either, but still within
the province of Canton. Beyond that province, I have no
certain grounds for stating the practice to have spread; and
a hope, at one time held out to me, that the vaccine might
be found unrir the cows in some of the remoter provinces,
proved fr’t us.


;38 Vaccination. MAY,
Its present state, and the prospects of its preservation, are
points upon which it will probably be most satisfactory to
atford notices; and as connected with those, the proofs in
favor of the efficacy of the practice.
It certainly has spread greatly here from among ſhe lower
classes of society, so as to have become general among the
tnidºſſing rauk, and to be frequently resorted to by those of
the higher couditions. The class of Chinese, who are now
the vaccinato.s, are generally taken from those who are or
have been employed about the British Factory. From their
medical men, especially those who devote themselves peculiarly
to the treatment of small-pox, it at first met with strenuous
opposition; and it still meets with little acceptation. Alarms
of failure have been occasionally spread ; and although the diſ-
ficulty of tracing such when stated, is a great incidental draw-
back; I have had occasion to see variola, measles, pemphi-
gus and cutaneous eruptions, which had been supposed to arise
from variolous infection in persous previously vaccinated;—yet
upon the whole, the confidence in its efficacy though gradual-
ly conceded, has become full, grounded upon ample and an-
nual evidence before adverted to, with ſewer obstacles from
prejudice than could be anticipated, especially in a Chinese
community. There remains only one prejudice to couteud
with, entestained against submitting the children to vaccinatiou
during the great heals of the summer and autumnal months,
arising no doubt from an observation, generally just, that all
diseases attacking or brought on at that season, are more
than usually dangerous or severe. -
This impediment will also, I doubt not, be surmounted in
course of time, especially so, as from a view chiefly to that
one point, some of the principal members of the Chinese coul-
mercial corporation, in whom is vested the exclusive privilege
of conductiig the foreign trade, have established a fund, for
affording gratuitous inoculation to the poor ...Tºtimes, es-
pecially framed, and judiciously so, to allot small premiums
to those who bring forward their children at that objectionable
period. The practice is conducted at their hall for meetings,
by the Chinese vaccinator whom I have before mentioned;
and from 15 to 40 (when the number of applicants requires
limitation,) are, at that place inoculated every ninth day. I
am now released from the laborious, and, here, peculiarly irksome
task of personally conducting the vaccination,-my care being
limited to inspection of the pustules from which the lymph is
taken, and that for form only, in consequence of malicious
rumors having been circulated, of the Chinese vaccinators not
having been circumspect in the choice of the matter they
used. -
As far as the medical servants of the º
3.
in China are concerned, the practice has always, a ll
descriptions of persons, been gratuitously dispensed. But it is


1833. Vaccination. 39
no way unfavorable, either to the cliances of dissemination or
preservation of the practice, that it has become a source, both
of reputation and emolument to the Chinese, who have en-
gaged in it, and who conduct it extensively throughout the
city of Canton and country around, as well at the station
specified. As regards the description of people who have hith-
erto been benefited by it, their conviction of its efficacy must
have been chiefly founded upon pure practical grounds, from
their frequent opportunities of observation, that no kind of
exposure to, or communication with, variolous patients infected
persons who had been vaccinated. To those among whom it
has now advanced, a perusal of the tract printed in their
language will serve to give additional currency and stability
to the practice. I am unable to form to myself any probable
estimate of the number of persons who have been benefited
by vaccination in the districts of and around Canton and Ma-
cao; but in the period I have specified it must have been
very great, so much as to reuder a connection between tile
greater mildness of the small-pox, when epidemic, and the
dissemination of the practice, not impossible. The mode in
which the practice has been conducted, corresponds to that
deemed most proper in Europe; the difficulty of again seeing
the patients or testing them, rendering it necessary to guard
against the chance of failure by an increased number of in-
sertions, generally four.
The next Report which was made, dated March 19th, 1821,
was suggested by documents from the Board, and the European
accounts and publications about that period, narrating occur-
rences, and numerous ones, of attacks of a secondary, though
modified small-pox after vaccination; which became a source
of considerable solicitude, with a corresponding desire to as-
certain, if, and how far, we had—proved instruments of spread-
ing delusions instead of a benefit. After stating that the prac-
tice of vaccination had been uninterruptedly continued, and
its having received a steady and great extension with increas-
ing confidence in its efficacy; it was added, that the circum-
stances, which in England had shaken the public confidence
as to the practice had been communicated to the Chinese
inoculators, (the Board's Report of the preceding year was
translated into Chinese for them,)—and that it was endeavored
to see or learn the details of every case of rumored failure.
The result proved satisfactory, although in the preceding and
that season, the small-pox had prevailed in an unusual degree
of severity, and attended with mortality. Two descriptions of
cases were traced; one in which the supposed vaccination had
been with spurious, matter, or otherwise imperfectly or unskill-
fully conducted; the other, when a modified small-pox had
actually ensued after inoculations which had been made and
which had proceeded regularly. Of the first description, though


4() Vaccination. MAY,
*
numerous, none presented themselves who had been vacci-
nated under inspection, or at the Canton institution. Of the
second, the number was few, but too many to allow of any
doubt as to the occurrence. In such cases, with from 50 to 200
eruptions, the fever was slight, it went off when the eruption
appeared, and that desiccated about the 5th day, leaving no
marks, answering closely to the real phenomena of the chick-
en-pox, with which the Chinese are familiar, as occurring
after siliall-pox, c : variolous inoculation practiced in their mode.
And their general reliance on the security from the practice,
has not been shaken by this knowledge, more than it was
by our stateinents.
Written queries were furnished to the Chinese vaccinators,
to be put, and answers obtained, in case of reported failure;
and inspection was to be observed and enjoyed wherever that
was possible, as well as strict attention paid to the rule of
inoculating with at least four insertions, leaving two pustules
to dry untouched wherever it was possible to do so.
It had then extended to the adjoining province of Keāng-
se, but again dropped there, having been met by the hostility
of the priesthood, who in that province had a double interest
in the preservation of the small-pox, by being much employ-
ed in the inoculation aſter the Chinese method, and in minis-
trations with their deities, to avert or mitigate the scourge.
The breaking out of the scarlet fever afforded plausible ground
of crimination against a practice, which was said to retain the
poison in the system, to appear at a future time, in still worse
shapes.
In the autum of 1820, Monst. Despiaua, French surgeon
in the service of the king of Cochinchina, arrived, bringing a
letter from Monsr. Vannier, then acting as minister to that
sovereign, requesting furtherance to his mission, which was,
to convey the vaccine to Cochinchina, for which place he
departed in February, 1821, and succeeded in his object.
Two reports have been made since that of March 19th, 1821,
copies of which have not been preserved. It may be stated,
as a summary of their purport, that the practice has, in the
interval, acquired great stability and extension among the Chi-
nese of Canton province of every condition; that it is known
to have been conveyed again to Keāngse, as well as to Keāng-
man, and Fuhkeen provinces; that it reached Peking, but
unfortunately was again lost there; that its anti-variolous effi-
cacy is universally known and confided in; and that its preser-
vation during the period specified has greatly and almost ex-
clusively, resulted from the well adapted system pursued at
the institution, and the agency of the Chinese vaccinators; the
principal of whom, A-he-qua, (who has been engaged in the
practice since 1805,) is a man remarkably qualified for the
-


1833. Malacca. 41.
business by his cast of judgment, method, and perseverance.
He has been encouraged in his laudable exertions by the fa-
vorable opinion of his countrymen, and by marks of distinc-
tion or consideration which have been conferred upon him by
the higher functionaries of the local government. The reports
in question also contained a summary of what evidence had
presented itself, that the practice of vaccination fails occasion-
ally, however unfrequently, in affording a perfect security
against the occurrence of variolous disease, though still modified
and mitigated in character by the previous experimer...
- A. P.
December 26th, 1832.
RELIGIOUS INTELLIGENCE,
MALAçcA.—The population
of the district of Malacca, in-
cluding town and country, is
computed to be above 25,000;
of whom two thirds live in the
town of Malacca and its vicin-
ity; and it consists of Chinese,
Malays, Arabs, Klings or (Ala-
labars), Portuguese, Dutch, and
English. But the Chinese con-
stitute considerably more than
one. third of the aggregate po-
pulation of the district. -
The acting Principal of the
Anglochinese college, the Rev.
Mr. Tomlin, has very obliging-
ly furnished us with accounts of
the Chinese and Malay schools
at Malacca, down to the 11th of
March 1833; and of the Indo-
Portuguese schools, to October
of the preceding year. These
schools are supported by cha-
rity, and contain between six
and seven hundred children.
The accounts of the Malay
and Portuguese schools must
r
be deferred till the publication
of our next number; concern-
ing the Chinese schools, Mr.
T. 1hus writes:—
“In giving a report of our la-
bors here during the present
year, we are still unable to com-
municate *} very cheering in-
telli - Inuch apparent
fruit of them, or to speak of any
remarkable change—going on
around us. However, we are
thankſul ihat we can say the
same means are in operation,
and the same labors are carried
on as heretofore, which if stead-
ily persevered in with faith and
prayer, will at last, through the
Lord's blessing, change the sur.
rounding wilderness into a fruit-
ful field. The good seed is
daily scattered around us, and
though some of it may fall
amongst thorns or on stony
ground, yet not a little falls
upon what may reasonably be
thought a genial soil—the hearts


42
MAY,
Jſalacca.
of children. The most obvious,
and perhaps the most important
means of promoting the Lord's
work at Malacca, is the educa-
tion of the young. This is evi-
dent from the simple fact that
ſrom two classes of its mixed
inhabi'ants, the Chinese and
Malays, we have 500 boys and
girls in the Lission schools, dai-
ly acquiring some knowledge of
thé Sacred Scriptures, and of
other Christian books.
“The four Chinese schools un-
der the care of the missionary are
daily superintended by the senior
boys of the college. Every Sat-
urday they are visited by the
missionary himself. Each child
repeats to him what he has read
and got by heart during the
week, and then explains the
same in colloquial Chinese.
But as ſew children born here,
know much of their father's na-
tive tongue, they go a step far-
ther and render the Chinese
into Malay, with which they all
are familiar. It is satisfactory
to know that the children are
learning something of our holy
religion, not merely by rote, ac-
cording to the countmon mode
in native schools in the East,
but that they have some under-
standing of what they read, and
are trom week to week advan-
cing in divine knowledge. What
is lodged in the memory of a
child by his heathen teacher,
is impressed on his heart and
conscience by the Christian
teacher once a week. The
older boys in the schools have
also the advantage of further
Christian instruction, by attend-
ing with their teachers our Sab-
bath morning's Chinese service
in the chapel. Also at two
of the Fulkeen schools where
we have week day evening ser-
vices, several of the elder schol-
ars are usually present.
There are six Chinese girls
schools under the care of Miss
Wallace, which seem to be do-
ing well. They have the be-
nefit of her daily instruction,
which must be very conducive
to their usefulness. The plan
of a double rendering of the les-
sons into the colloquial tongues
of the Chinese and Malays, is
followed also in these schools;
and indeed with the girls this
is doubly important, they being
usually much more ignorant of
Chinese than the boys.
“In the college we have twen-
ty-six boys. They are all taught
to read English as well as Chi-
nese; but the juniors are prin-
cipally under the care of the
Chinese teacher, who takes con-
siderable pains to instruct them
in Christian books. The sen-
ior boys forming an upper class,
are almost entirely under our
own tuition. They have given
tolerable satisfaction by atten-
tion to their studies, and by the
progress which they have made.
Two or three of them especially
seem promising youths, and we
indulge a hope of their becom-
ing sincere and enlightened fol-
lowers of our gracious Redeem-
er. In training up these youths
for life and for eternity, it is our
main and constant desire to
lead them to the fountain head
of heavenly wisdom, where they
may drink of the pure streams
of the water of life; yet we do
not wholly desert the little rilis
of human knowledge.
“Immediately after morning
worship in Chinese, the senior
boys commence their studies by
reading a chapter of the Bible,


1833.
43
.Malacca.
which is explained to them in
English and Chinese; after
which they again go over it
rendering it verse by verse into
Chinese.
“After breakfast we take up
“Pilgrim's Progress,” and read
and explain a page, more or less,
as before. A passage of this
lesson is then selected as a Chi-
nese exercise in writing, to be
presented the following day. In
the afternoon we read a part of
Dr. Milne's “Treatise on the
Soul,” with the College teach-
er of Chinese at our head.
When the latter has made the
lesson sufficiently plain to all, in
respectable colloquial Chinese,
we explain it to them in easy,
familiar English. A passage is
selected from this lesson as an
English exercise in writing.
“They have also daily exercises
in Murray's Grammar and in
English composition. On Thurs-
days, half a day is devoted to a
lecture on Geography; or As-
tronomy. On the Sabbath, a
portion of the Sacred Scriptures
is usually given to them to re-
peat on Monday morning.
“The senior boys are also em-
ployed about two hours each
day as monitors in teaching the
juniors English reading, writing,
and arithmetic on the British
system, under the general super-
jntendence of the missionary.
The senior boys, as has already
been observed, daily visit and
number the scholārs un the
"Chinese boys schools, and are
... constant in attendance at our
various religious services in Chi-
nese, held in the chapel on the
Sabbath, and at two other places
in the town on week day even-
ing: most of them attend very
regularly our English services
in the chapel on Sabbath and
Wednesday evenings. It is in-
deed not a little cheering to our
spirits to see half a dozen Chi-
nese youths, in their own dress,
sitting among the professed peo-
ple of God and in His temple,
bending the knee before Him in
prayer, listering attentively to
the preached gospel, and to hear
them singing with the under-
standing the praises of Jehovah
in our own tongue. Several of
our Christian friends on wit-
nessing such a sight for the first
time, have expressed no little
surprise and delight. Could our
friends in England and Ame--
ica beheld with their own eyes
the same sight, their, hearts
would doubtless be filled with
joy and gratitude in being priv-
ileged to behold even this “ day .
of sinall things,” and would be
encouraged to persevere and
not to ſaint in helping the
Lord's work in this vast and
almost cheerless field. We can-
not indeed say that these, once
heathen youths, are now be-
come real Christians; but while
we observe them daily increas-
ing in divine knowledge, and
see them constantly coming up
with the people of God to His
sanctuary, and there meekly re-
ceiving instruction from IHis
ministers, we indulge a cheer-
ing hope of seeing some, at least,
becoming true and enlightened
disciples of the Savior, and
instructors and guides to their
own benighted countrymen.
“It may be thought that we
are indulging too sanguine an-
ticipations about these college
boys, and looking too much on
the bright side of the picture.
Perhaps it may be the case;
for we readily acknowledge we


44
MAY,
Malacca.
-are prone to look on the Lord's
work with a cheerful aspect,
and hail with joy even a tender
and solitary green blade that
makes its appearance upon the
sterile surface of the wilderness.
We do not however glory in
these things as the fruit of our
own labors; for o-her men have
labored and we have entered
into their labors, and whatever
fruit the Lord may permit us to
gather, we would remember that
others have long toiled here,
and borne the heat and burden
of the day.
“The following is a summary
c" what has been printed in Ma-
lacca during the year;-6,000
copies of various tracts, chiefly
reprints of old standard tracts,
five having been recut on new
blocks in a larger character;
2,000 single gospels; and 130
complete copies of the enlarged
and revised new edition of the
JSacred Scriptures,-the first
which have been printed from
the new blocks.
“We have not much to say
respecting our intercourse with
the heathen, and the distribu-
tion of tracts amongst the Chi-
nese. The daily labors of the
whole college, and other duties
of the establishment continual-
ly pressing on the time and
the attention of the Chinese
missionary, leave him little time
for going out amongst the peo-
ple, though this he considers to
be the most important and in-
teresting part of the missionary
work. Occasionally he takes a
bundle of tracts and Scriptures
under his arm, and makes an
early morning excursion into
the town.
- “However on two occasions,
(being obliged for the sake of
his partner's health to retreat
from the scene of his labors,
and spend a few weeks in the
neighborhood of Malacca, dur-
ing the vacation at the com-
mencement of the year, and
again about the middle of the
year at Singapore,) he had leis-
ure for going out amongst the
people a good deal. On the
former occasion, being situated
amongst the Malays, many
tracts and portions of the Bible
were given to them, and they
were generally well received.
At Singapore, being again pla-
ced for a little while in the
sphere of his former labors, he
cheerfully entered on his work
again, and was glad to find the
same large and craving demand
for the bread of life as former-
ly, so that he was often com-
pelled to deliver all he had to
casual passengers who stopped
him in the roads and streets,
before he had got well into the
town. Besides the Chinese, in-
dividuals of various nations ac-
costed him without ceremony
or hesitation, inquiring for books
in their respective languages.
Even the Malays threw off their
shyness and readily asked for
tracts and the New Testament.
Several were very desirous of
obtaining the latter complete,
and made interesting inquiries
about the Christian religion, par-
ticularly as to the main points
of difference between it and,
Mohammedamism. Many of tne
ignorant Malays think there is
only a slight difference between
our religion and theirs, and in
proof of this, mention the Law,
Prophets, Psalms, and New
Testament as books held sa-
cred by themselves. But the
grand point upon which we are


1833.
Literary Votices. 45
at issue with them is, Jesus
Glºrist the son of God, the only
Saviour of men, contrasted and
opposed to the impostor- Mo-
bammed. This should always
be plainly stated to them and
strenuously maintained.”
Singapore.—The population
of this settlement, according to
a census taken January 1st 1833,
is 20,978. Of these, 8,517 are
Chinese; 7,131 are Malays; 119
are Europeans; 96 are Indo-
Britons; 300 are native Christ-
ians; others are Armenians,
Jews, Arabs, Javanese, &c.—
Among the Malays in Singa-
pore and the adjacent islands,
the Rev. C. H. J'homsen is the
only missionary now employed;
and among the Chinese there
is no one at present except Mr.
Abeel, who during a short so-
journ is “endeavoring,” as he
writes under date of March 30th
1833, “to supply every Chinese
house in Singapore with Chris-
tian tracts.”
SIA.M.–The Rev. J. T. Jones,
late of the Burman mission, was
at Singapore Teb. 26th, expect-
ing to embark that evening or .
the next day for Bankok. -
Burmah.-By recent accounts
it appears that the mission in
this empire continues to enjoy
prosperity. The New Testa-
ment in Burmese is now—pub-
ſished entire, and they have b >
gun to print in the Karen and
Peguan languages. They have
already four presses and three
printers sent out from the
churches, employed in their
book department.
LITERARY NOTICES.
“A Sermon preached on board
the American ship Morrison, at
Whampoa, in China, Dec. 2d,
1832. By Robert MoRRison,
D. D. Printell for the Author
at the Albion Press.”
WE have been favored with
a copy of this sermon, which
we were present to hear also
at the time of its delivery on
board the ship. The name
of the ship, as a testimony of
personal friendship to the Doc-
tor; the circumstance also of its
being the first day of celebrating
religious worship in the Morrison
at Whampoa, and the attentive
and numerous audience, made it
an interesting occasion. From
the text, Rev. 1: 3, the author
addressess a word of admoni-
tion to the various characters
specified in the message to the
churches. (I.) “To those who
have left their early attachment
to the Lord Jesus Christ and
his cause. (2.) To those who
labor in the service of God and
suffer tribulation. (3.) To those
who remain faithful in the
midst of the most ungodly


46
MAY.
Literary Votices.
society. (4.) To those who pos-
sess the virtues of charity, faith,
and patience, but who do not
bear a sufficient testimony a-
gainst error and vice. (5.) To
those who have a naine to live,
but are dead, (6.) To the faith-
ful, though feeble. And (7.)
finally to the iukewarm.” The
subject appeared to us well
chosen and very apposite to the
situation of his audience.
We take this occasion also
to say a word, respecting the
amount of foreign shipping to
China; and the means of Chris-
tian instruction enjoyed by the
seamen engaged in it. The
number of different vessels un-
der the British flag which ar-
rived in China during 1832,
was about 75. More than 20
of these were in the service of
the hon E. I. Company, carrying
each, say from 100 to 150 men.
These splendid inerchantmen
do not enjoy the services of a
chaplain or of any religious
instructor; but we understand it
men's Friend Society sent out
a CITTUttm; Tſſived here at
the end of Oct., 1832. By him,
public worship was maintained
at Whampoa, during the four
or five succeeding months. Not-
withstanding several inconven-
iences attendant upon preach-
ing on a ship's deck, whenever
the Bethel Flag has been hoist-
ed, an audience has always as-
sembled, from 25 or 30, to 50,
70, 80, or 90. We hope that
for the ensuing season, some
convenient stationary accom-
modation can be procured.
The Eva Ngelist ; and Mis-
cellanea Sinica.-The first num-
ber of his neum—ucriadical ap-
peared on the 1st instant; a
second number came out on the
21st, and a third on the 27th
of the month, It has for its
motto, “Go ye into all the
world and preach the gospel to
every creature.” It is a reli-
gious publication; and thus far
its columns have been princi-
is required that the service of "pally filled with papers exhib-
the church of E ead
each Sabbath before the crews.
Of the remaining 50 ships, we
know little, except that many
of them are manned with. Las-
cars, and officered with Furo-
peans. But for those who un-
derstand English, we do not
learn that any provision is made
for their religious instruction,
unless some individual masters
may attempt it.
The number of American
vessels which arrived in China
during the shipping season, from
June 1832 to May 1833, was
about 60. Forty-five of these
came up to W -
For the benefit of seamen at
this port, the American Sea-
iting the doctrines and precepts
and promises of the gospel, and
the character and duties of the
professors of Christianity.
At the same time, “affairs
of this vast empire, and the
surrounding Chinese language
nations,—Corea, Japan, Lew-
chew, and Cochinchina, togeth-
er with the numerous Chinese
settlements in the Archipelago,
are viewed with intense interest
by the Christian-Evangelist,”
and “as occurrences which aré
political and commercial have
#. on those that are
religions and moral, they ought
not ſo be overlooked by those
who wish for the universal
spread of the gospel.”


1833.
-
Journal of Occurrences, 47
The moral and religious cha-
racter of the Chinese comes di-
rectly under the observation of
the Evangelist. On this topic
the native is allowed to speak
for himself. Each of the num-
bers before us contains short
pieces printed in the Chinese
character; these, with the excep-
tion of the single phrase Yay-
ho-hwa, “Jehovah,” are Chi-
nese composition; and they will,
doubtless, prepare the way for
the introduction of foreign in-
telligence. A Chinese Maga-
zine is a great desideratun;
and we hope another year will
not pass away before such a
publication is commenced.
Concerning the term Yay-
hº-hwa the Evangelist says;–
“The missionaries in the South
Sea islands have introduced
Jehovah as the name of God.
We have not found in any of
the books of the Romish mis-
sionaries, that they have intro-
duced this name to the know-
ledge of their Chinese converts.
It has been proposed by a pro-
testant missionary to use Yau-
ho-hwa in the Chinese ian-
guage; for the natives some-
times ask the name of our God.
And why not introduce that
name by which he has revealed
himself, and been known to
his people in every age of the
world ! ‘God spake unto Moses,
and said unto him —I am Jeho-
vah; and I appeared unto A-
braham, unto Isaac, tºnd unto
Jacob, by the name of God Al-
mighty; and by my name Je-
hovah, was I not also known
to them 2'. The import of the
Chinese words [Yay ho hwal,
father, fire, and flower or flame,
will remind the reader of mount
Sinai, when “Jehovah descend-
ed on it in fire,' to proclaim
these words; “I am Jehovah
thy God. Thou shalt have no
other gods beside me. Thou
shalt not make to thyself any
graven image, to bow down
thyself to it. Thou shalt not
take the name of Jehovah thy
God in vain; ſor Jehovah will
not acquit him who taketh his
name in vain.'”
JourtNAL OF occurrences.
iterary exa Tions.—The li-
tera ñinations in Kwangchow foo
commenced on the 6th of the 4th
moon (May 24th). The number of
competitors is stated to be more than
25,000, varying in age from the lad
of fifteen years to the hoary head of
seventy and upwards. The candi-
dates from the several heen, assemble
in Canton on different days, accord-
ing to notice previously given by the
chefoo, who presides at the examina-
tions.
Imperial presents.-At the close
of The Täte ign against the
rebel mountaineers at Leenchow,
900,000 taels were required to defray
the expenses of the war. Of this sum
210,000 taels were advanced by the
hong merchants. In consequence of
. º: by the request of governor
oo, his majesty has condescended
to confer on the said-merchants the
Gºr of accepting their money-He
directed aſ Tſſe same time also that
two hu'a-ling, or peacock's feathers,


48
Journal of Occurrences.
should be sent down for the two sen-
ior merchants. Howqua and Mow-
ua.—In the case of Howqua, the mon-
ey (100,000 taels.) was given, and
the honor received, in the name of
his son Woo Yuenhwa.
Decapitation.—At 10 o'clock on
the 28th inst. the governor of Can-
ton, witn tue fooyuer and other chief
officers of the province, sat in judg-
ment on the case of seventeen crim-
inals, who were all sentenced to
suffer death by decapitation. The
wang-ming, or imperial order, was im-
mediately demanded. and the crim-
inals were led away to the place of
execution—to undergo the penalty
of the law at 2 o'clock. P. M.
Insurrection in Szechuen.—Letters
have been received in Canton during
the month, which report that an in-
surrection has broken out in Sze-
chuen. One officer of the 5th rank.
and several of inferior rank, are said
to have been killed.
Chi sold.—A scarcity of rice
in Chaouchow foo, on the east of
Canton, has increased the demand
and raised the price of provision in
this city. In consequence of this,
the governor and fooyuen have sent
out a proclamation forbidding rich
merchants to hoard up rice, beyond
a certain quantity, thereby increas-
ing its price and distressing the poor.
Still though the price has risen but
very little, many of the poor suffer
much. Instances are numerous where
arents have been seen going through
'the streets leading their own children
by the hand, and offering them for
sale. They are urged to this pain-
ful necessity from want of provi-
sions for themselves, as well as for
their children. In cases of this kind,
the purchaser is required to give a
written promise that he will provide
—“eOess-—
Postscript.—The weather during the last half of the mºnth, has been
unusually cold and dry, and northerly winds have !. for several
successive days. Among the native population there
of sickness, and many have died, or as the Chinese say in
for the child, treat it well, &c. We
knew an instance only a few day
ago, where a little girl of 6 years of
age was sold for twenty-five dollars.
Formosa.—The accounts of the re-
bellion in Formosa continue to be
vague and unsatisfactory.-Concern-
ing the population and productions
of the island, the last number of the
Canton Register (for May 18th), con-
tains the following remarks.
“The whole population may a-
mount to two or three millions. The
greater part are cultivators of the
ground: many (principally the Amoy
men) are merchants, fishermen, and
sailors. On the whole they are a
lawkess tribe, who put the govern-
ment and every human regulation at
defiance, strictly adhering to their
clans. Some of the country-born in
the interior, have never acknowledg-
ed the mandarins as their rulers.....
But notwithstanding their aversion to
every government, they are a very
industrious race. The quantity of
rice exported to Fuhkeen and Che-
keång is very considerable, and em-
ploys more than three hundred junks.
At Teentsin alone, there arrive an-
nually more than seventy junks loaded
with sugar. The exportation of cam-
phor is likewise by no means small.
The owners of the plantations are
generally Amoy men, whose families
live in their native country. The capi-
tal they employ is great; the trade pro-
fitable. The friendly feelings of the
Formosan colonists towards foreign-
ers are quite proverbial; but hitherto
they have had very little intercourse
with them. Some traces of the
Dutch government still remain, but
the name of this nation is almºst for-
otten. The natives have receded
urther and further towards the east
coast, and have been partly amalga-
mated with the eastern planters."
deal
anguage,
as been a
lite
seen yelo, "have gone to ramble among the genii."—The lady of hi:
excellency Yuen, formerly governor of Canton but now of Yunnan and
weichow, is reported recently to have set out on such a rambling !


THE
CHIN E S E REIPOSITORY.
Voi... II.-JUNE, 1833.-No. 2.
Journal of a voyage along the coast of China, fron:
the province of Canton to Leaoutung in Man-
tehou Tartary; 1832–33 : by the Rev. CHARLEs
Gutzl.AFF.”
JANUARY 14th, we changed our station, and came
to anchor under an island. The curiosity to see
the ship was greater here than at our former place,
and being less embarrassed by the presence of the
mandarins, we were able to live more quietly and
to extend our intercourse with the people. A tem-
ple built on the island under which we lay, is very
spacious, and presents a real labyrinth. The whole
island is picturesque, and appears to have been
designedly chosen on this account. We saw here
an edict pasted up, forbidding the possession of
arms on any account, and threatening decapita-
tion to all who dared to disobey this regulation.
The priests had for a long time been desirous to
get hold of a few Christian books, but when they
could not obtain them, they almost wept for dis-
appointment;-I had previously landed on the
opposite shore, where I was surrounded by multi-
tudes who did not cease importuning me till they
had gotten every book out of my hands. There
* Continued from page 32.
G


50 Gutzlaff's Journal. JUNE,
were very few individuals who could not read, so
that we may entertain the well-founded hope, that
even the smallest tracts will be perused to advan-
tage. We enjoyed the society of the natives very
much. Combining intelligence and cordiality, they
lost no opportunity of showing their friendship, or
of making pointed inquiries. Whe a field for
missionary exertion do they present Their hearts
are open to the impression of truth, and their
doors for the reception of its messengers. We
humbly trust in the wise government of God, (which
can defeat all the restrictive laws of the most crook-
ed policy,) that the doors to these parts will be
soon thrown open.
Though it was now winter, and often severe
weather, the country to the southwest presented
the most attractive views. From a temple, which
being imperial had a gilded spire, we used to
look down upon the surrounding valleys. With
the priest, a very cunning man and a fine pattern
of Chinese politeness, I had a very long conversa-
tion upon religion. As soon as I touched upon
some points which concerned a higher world, he
was dumb. As to the religious creed of other na-
tions, he appeared to be a perfect latitudinarian.
On the 17th of January, we got under way for
Kintang, an island which we had visited in the
Lord Amherst. The cold being very piercing, some
of our crew died. As the mandarins had previous-
ly taken possession of the anchorage in the inner
harbor, we took care not to have anything to do
with them. The natives being under the immediate
control of their rulers, were rather distrustful; how-
ever they recognised me, and brought great numbers of
diseased people, of whom they requested me to take
charge. The state of the poor, and in general of
all the common people, is very wretched during the
winter. In Furope we have firesides and comfort-
able rooms; but these miserable beings can neither


1833, Gutzlaff's Journal. 51
afford nor procure fuel. Every shrub is cut up ;
every root is dug out; and the hills, which in
other countries are generally covered with wood,
are bare or only planted with a few fir-trees. To
supply the want of fire, they carry fire-pots in their
hands with a few coals in them. They dress in
five or six thick jackets, which are stuffed with cot-
ton and thickened with numerous patches put upon
them; indeed, many are only patchwork, but they
keep the body warm, and this is all that is required.
The Chinese are generally dirty in their habits;
and the consequences both of warm clothing and
uncleanliness are a great many cutaneous diseas-
es—often very serious when they have become in-
veterate. It ought to be an object with a mission-
ary who enters this field, to provide himself with
large quantities of sulphur and mercurial ointment,
and he may be sure to benefit many.
It has always been my anxious desire to give
medical help whenever it was practicable. However
the sufferers are so numerous that we were able to
assist only a very small portion of the number. I
should recommend it to a missionary about to enter
China, to make himself perfectly acquainted with the
diseases of the eye. He cannot be too learned in
the ophthalmic science, for ophthalmia is more fre-
quent here than in any other part of the world.
This arises from a peculiar, curved structure of
the eye, which is generally very small, and often
in lamed by inverted eye-lids. Often while dealing
out eye-water to a great extent, and successively
examining the eye, I have wished to establish a
hospital in the centre of the empire, in some place
easy of access by sea and by land. I know scarce-
ly one instance of a clever medical man having
given himself up to the service of this distant na-
tion, with the view of promoting the glorious gos-
pel and the happiness of his fellow men. There
have been several gentlemen both at Macao and
Canton whose praiseworthy endeavors to alleviate


52 Gutzlaff’s Journal. JUNE,
suffering, have been crowned with much success.
Yet we want a hospital in the heart of China itself,
and we want men who wish to live solely for the
CallSe.
We went farther towards the southern parts of
this island, where I began my Christian operations,
which were attended with ample success. We have
walked over many hills, and gone through numerous
valleys, carrying in our hands the Sacred Scrip-
tures, which found ready readers. Surely we could
not complain of their want of politeness, for all
doors were open for us, and when the people re-
luctantly saw that we would not enter their hovels,
they brought tea out to us, forcing us to take some
of this beverage.
From this island we shifted our anchorage to
Ketow point, a head-land on the main. A great
many tea plantations are found here, and for the
first time we have seen the plant growing wild.
This district is cultivated only in the valleys; the
mountains furnish a good deal of pasture, but the
Chinese keep only as many cattle as are indispen-
sably necessary for the cultivation of the fields.
When I first went on shore, the people seemed
distrustful of receiving the word of salvation; some.
of them hinted that our books merely contained the
doctrines of western bārbarians, which were quite
at variance with the tenets of the Chinese sages.
I did not undertake to contest this point with them,
but proceeded to administer relief to a poor man
who was almost blind. He was affected with this
unexpected kindness, and turning towards me said;
“Judging from your actions your doctrines must be
excellent; therefore I beseech you, give me some of
your books; though I myself cannot read, I have
children who can.”—From this moment the de-
mand for the word of God-inereased, so that I could
never pass a hamlet—without being importuned by
the people to impart to them the knowledge of di-
yine things. In the wide excursions which I took, I


1833. Gutzlaff's Journal. 53
daily witnessed the demand for the word of God.
The greatest favor we could bestow upon the
natives, was to give them a book, which as a
precious relic was treasured up and kept for the
perusal of all their acquaintance and friends.
Having remained here seven days, we then de-
parted for other parts of the Chusan group. The
weather during this time was generally dark and
stormy. Feb. 4th, we arrived at the island Pooto-
lat. 30°3' N., and long 121° E.
At a distance, the island appeared barren and
scarcely habitable, but as we approached it, we
observed very prominent buildings, and large glit-
tering domes. A temple built on a projecting rock,
beneath which the foaming sea dashed, gave us
some idea of the genius of its inhabitants, in thus
selecting the most attractive spot to celebrate the
orgies of idolatry. We were quite engaged in view-
ing a large building situated in a grove, when we
observed some priests of Budha walking along the
shore, attracted by the novel sight of a ship. Scarce-
ly had we landed, when another party of priests in
common garbs and very filthy, hastened down to
us, chanting hymns. When some books were
offered them, they exclaimed, “praise he to Bud-
ha,” and eagerly took every volume which I had.
We then ascended to a large temple surrounded
by trees and bamboo. An elegant portal and mag-
nificent gate brought us into a large court, which
was surrounded with a long row of buildings—not
unlike barracks,—but the dwellings of the priests.
On entering it, the huge images of Budha and his
disciples, the representations of Kwanyin, the
Goddess of Mercy, and other deformed idols, with
the spacious and well adorned halls, exhibit an im-
posing sight to the foreign spectator. With what.
feelings ought a missionary to be impressed when
he sees so great a nation under the abject control
of disgusting idolatry? Whilst walking here, I was.
strónglyreminded of Paul in Athens, when he was


54 Gutulaff's Journal. JUNE,
passing among their temples and saw an altar de-
dicated “to the unknown God.” For here we also
found both a small hall and an altar covered with
white cloth, allotted to the same purpose. I ad-
dressed the priests who followed us in crowds,-for
several hundreds belong to this temple; they gave
the assent of indifference to my sayings, and fixed
their whole attention upon the examination of our
cſöttres lt was satisfactory, however, to see that
the major and intelligent part of them were so
eagerly reading our books, that they could not find
a few moments even to look at us. The treatise
which pleased them most, was a dialogue between
Chang and Yuen, the one a Christian, and the other
an ignorant heathen. This work of the late, much
lamented Dr. Milne, contains very pointed and
just remarks, and has always been a favorite book
among the Chinese readers.
The high priest requested an interview. He was
an old deaf man, who seemed to have very little
authority, and his remarks were common-place
enough. Though the people seemed to be great-
ly embarrassed at our unexpected appearance,
their apprehensions gradually subsided; meanwhile
we had the pleasure of seeing our ship coming to
anchor in the roads. Having therefore renewed
my stock of books with a larger store, I went again
on shore. At this time the demand was much
greater, and I was almost overwhelmed by the num-
bers of priests who ran down upon us. Earnestly
begging at least a short tract, of which I had ta-
ken great quantities with me, I was very soon
stripped of all, and had to refuse numerous appli-
cations.
We afterwards followed a paved road, discover-
ing several other small temples, till we came to
some large rocks, on which we found several in-
scriptions hewn in very large letters. One of them
stated that China has sages! The excavations were
filled with small gilt idols, and superscriptions. On


1833. Gulzlaff's Journal. 55
a sudden we came in sight of a still larger temple
with yellow tiles, by which we immediately recog-
nized it as imperial. A bridge very tastefully built
over an artificial tank, led to an extensive area
paved with quarried stones. Though the same
architecture reigned in the structure of this larger
building as in the others, we could distinguish a
superior taste and a higher finish. The idols were
the same, but their votaries were far more numer-
ous; indeed this is the largest temple I have ever
seen. The halls being arranged with all the tin-
sel of idolatry, presented numerous specimens of
Chinese art.
These colossal images were made of clay, and
tolerably well gilt. There were great drums and
large bells in the temple. We were present at the
vespers of the priests, which they chaunted in the
Pali language, not unlike the Latin service of the
Romish church. They held their rosaries in their
hands, which rested folded upon their breasts;
one of them had a small bell, by the tinkling of
which their service was regulated; and they occa-
sionally beat the drum and large bell to rouse Bud.
Jha to attend to their prayers. The same words
were a hundred times repeated. None of the of.
ficiating personages showed any interest in the cere-
monies, for some were looking around, langhing and
joking, whilst others muttered their prayers. The
few people who were present, not to attend the
worship, but merely to gaze at us, did not seem in
the least degree to feel the solemnity of the service.
Though we were in a dark hall standing before
the largest image of Budha, there was nothing im-
pressive: even our English sailors were disgusted
with the scene. Several times I raised my voice
to invite all to adore God in spirit and in truth,
but the minds of the priests seemed callous, and
a mere assent was all which this exhortation pro-
duced.—Though the government sometimes decries
Budhism as a dangerous doctrine, we saw paper:


56 Gutzlaff's Journal. JUNE,
stuck up, wherein the people were exhorted to re-
pair to these temples in order to propitiate heaven
to grant a fertile spring ;-and these exhortations
were issued by the emperor himself. What in-
consistency! -
This temple was built during the time of the
Leii...g. dynasty, several centuries ago, (about A. D.
550,) but it has undergone great repairs; and both
under the last and present dynasties has enjoyed
the imperial patronage. It was erected to em-
blazon the glorious deeds of the Goddess of Mercy,
who is said to have honored this spot with her
presence. On the island are two large, and sixty
small temples, which are all built in the same
style, and the idol of Kwanyin holds a prominent
station among her competitors. We were told, that
upon a spot not exceeding twelve square miles,
(for this appears to be the extent of the island,)
2000 priests were living. No females are allowed
to live on the island, nor are any laymen suffered
to reside here, unless they be in the service of the
priests. To maintain this pumerous train of idlers,
lands on the opposite island have been allotted for
their use, which they farm out; but as this is still
inadequate, they go upon begging expeditions not
only into the surrounding provinces, but even as
far as Siam. From its being a place of pilgrim-
age also the priests derive great—profits. Many
rich persons, and especially successful captains, re-
pair thither to express their gratitude and spend
their money in this delightful spot. For this rea-
son the priests have large halls and keep a regular
establishment, though they themselves live on a
very sparing diet. We never saw them use any
meat; few are decently dressed; and the greater
part are very ignorant, even respecting their own
tenets. We saw many young fine-looking children
whom they had bought to initiate them early in-
to the mysteries of Budhism. They complained bit-
terly of the utter decay of their establishment, and


1833. Gutzlaff's Journal. 57
were anxious to obtain from us some gift. To
every person who visits this island, it appears at
first like a fairy land, so romantic is everything
which meets the eye. Those large inscriptions
hewn in solid granite, the many temples which
appear in every direction, the highly picturesque
scenery itself, with its many-peaked riven, and
detached rocks, and above all a stately mausoleum,
the largest which I have ever seen, containing the
bones and ashes of thousands of priests—quite
bewilder the imagination. -
After having examined all the localities, we en-
deavored to promulgate the doctrines of the gospel.
Poo-to being a rendezvous for a numerous fleet of
boats, gave us great facility in sending books to
all the adjacent places. Nor were the people
very slow in examining us and our books When
their minds were satisfied upon the subject, they
became excessively clamorous for Christian books.
At first I had brought my stores on shore, but find-
ing that the great crowds bore me down and rob-
bed me of every leaf, I entered into a boat and
sat down, while multitudes of boisterous applicants
were on the shore. They now waded and even swam
in order to get near me, and carried off in triumph
the precious gift. Thousands and thousands of
books have thus been scattered, not in this place
only, but they have found their way into the pro-
vinces, for some persons took them purposely for
importation. He who oversees and directs all, will
send these harbingers of salvation with eagle-swift-
ness to all parts.
In order to satisfy my mind respecting founding
a depository for scriptures and tracts in one of the
temples, I took my station in the great hall which
leads into the large temple. At this time I had
taken the precaution of guarding my back by the
wall, that I might not be thrown down by the
crowd. Within a few minutes the priests throng-
ed around me. Though they were urgent, they
ii.


58 Gutzlaff's Journal. JUNE,
behaved politely and begged, ulmost with tears, that
I would give them a few tracts. How joyfully did
they retire with the books under their arms
Thus we passed many days here, and the de-
mand for the word of God, not indeed as such,
but as being a new doctrine, increased daily more
and more. We afterwards visited several other
islands belonging to the Chusan group, which
teemed whith inhabitants. They are less obstacles
here to the promotion of the gospel than in many
islands in the Pacific. They are far more populeus,
and their inhabitants are a very thriving people, no-
ways deficient in natural understanding. English
vessels visited them occasionally, during the last
century, but they have never been accurately known
by any European navigator; therefore we took the
trouble to explore them as far as circumstances
would permit. The great Chusan has high tower-
ing hills, and splendid fertile vallies, some of which
are alluvial ground. There are perhaps one mil-
lion of inhabitants. Besides other places on its
coast, we visited Sinkeå mun, a fishing village, with
a harbor sheltered from all winds—but the very
seat of iniquity. The natives here crowded on board;
they wanted books, und insisted upon having them;
my great stock being almost exhausted, they offered
money and besought me not to send them empty
handed away. On one occasion, I had taken some
on shore; several sailors acted as my safeguard,
to prevent my being overpowered by the crowd.
We ran for a long distance to escape their impor-
tunity, but finally they overtook us and I was liter-
ally plundered. Those who gained their point, re-
turned shouting, whilst the others left Ine with a
saddened heart, and uttering reproaches that I had
not duly provided for their wants For days I have
been solicited, but I could not satisfy the craving
desire. I promised to return with a larger supply,
and hope that God will permit me to re-enter this
sphere.


1833. Gutzlaff’s Journal. 59
After staying a considerable time on the coast of
Seángshan, on the main, we reached Shih-poo in
latitude 29° 2' north on the first of April. I
can scarcely do justice to this place, delightfully
situated as it is at the bottom of a basin, having one
of the best harbors in the world, entirely formed by
the hand of God. Hitherto the weather had been
very boisterous and cold, a thick mist filling the
air. We had been weeks without seeing the sun;
even in March, and in this latitude, we had storms.
But now the spring was approaching, the wheat fields
stood in the blade, and the blossoms of the peach-
trees perfumed the air. To ramble at such a sea-
son surrounded by such scenery is true enjoyment,
and draws the heart powerfully towards the al-
mighty God. The mandarins had now given-up
the principle of disturbing-us-from mere jealousy,
and they will perhaps never try to interfere with
us any more. So fruitless have been all their at-
tempts to deter us from any intercourse with the
natives, that the more they strove to effect their
purpose, the more we gained our point, and the
readier we were received by the natives.
We delayed some time on the coast of Fuhkečn.
We arrived at a time of general scarcity; the great-
er part of the people were living upon sweet pota-
toes, dried and ground; for the revolution, or
rather rebellion, in Formosa, had prevented the
grain-junks from bringing them the custoinary sup-
plies from that island. Some of the poor peasants
lived upon the ears of the green wheat, roasted
and boiled like rice. This scarcity had given
rise to piracy and highway robbery. We spent
some time in a village inhabited by pirates, but
received no injury. Notwithstanding all these dis-
asters, the Fuhkeen men are the same enterpris-
ing class which they have been for centuries, en-
grossing all the trade of the coast. We look for
the time, when they will be brought to the obe-


60 Gutzlaff’s Journal. JUNE,
Jáience of the gospel, and become the medium of
communication with all parts of China. I had here
also an epportunity of scattering the light of di-
vine truth, thouhg on a smaller scale, for we stayed
only a short time.
In our excursions we examined Kin-mun, a large
islai.d to the north of Amoy harbor. Here were
immense rocks piled upon each other, just as though
done by human hands. Though very sterile, it has
at least 50,000 inhabitants, who are enterprising
merchants or sailors. Several-places of considerable
importance we may be said to have discovered,
for they are not known to any European else, nor
were they ever visited by Europeans, if we except
Jesuits. As it is not my intention to give any geo-
graphical sketches, I refrain from enumerating them.
However as our commercial relations are at the . .
present moment on such a basis as to warrant a
continuation of the trade all along the coast, we
hope that this may tend ultimately to the intro-
duction of the gospel, for which many doors are
opened—Millietts-of-Bibles and tracts will be need-
ed to supply the wants of this people. God, who in
his mercy has thrown down the wall of national se-
paration, will carry on the work. We look up to the
ever blessed Redeemer to whom China with all its
millions is given: and in the faithfulness of his pro-
mises, we anticipate the glorious day of a general
conversion, and are willing to do our utmost in
order to promote the great work.
After a voyage of six months and nine days,
we reached Lintin, near Macao, on the 29th of
April. Praised be God for all his mercies and
deliverances during such a perilous voyage'
Note. Some further account of the island of Poo-to will be given in
a future number, in a paper on Budhism.


(833. Penal Laws of China. 61
PENAL LAWS OF CHINA.
The Chinese government is divided into se-
veral distinct, though not altogether independent,
departments. Of these, the six Tribunals, name-
ly (1.) the Le Poo, or that of Civil Office; (2) the
Hoo Poo, or that of Revenue; (3.) the Le Poo, that
of Rites; (4.) the Ping Poo, that of War; (5) the
Hing Poo, that of Punishments; and (6) the Kung
Poo, or Tribunal of Public Works,—are the most im-
portant, and correspond to the six last of the seven
divisions of the penal laws. The first division,
containing general laws, or preliminary regulations,
we have already noticed; and will now proceed to
the next division.
II. Civil LAws. These refer to the adminis-
tration of the civil government, and are divided
into two books; the first is headed “system of
government,” and the second, “conduct of magis-
trates.”
Concerning hereditary succession, the first topic
under the first of these two subdivisions the law
is, that every officer, whose rank and title are he-
reditary, shall be succeeded in them by his prin-
cipal wife's eldest son, or by his legal representa-
tive ; if such son and his representative are de-
ceased or incapacitated to succeed, the son next
in age or his representative shall be called to the
succession; and if there are no such sons or re-
presentatives, the sons of the other wives and their
legal representatives shall, according to seniority,
be entitled to the succession.—But whoever enters
on the succession to an hereditary dignity in vio-
lation of the order prescribed by this law, shall
• Continued from page 19.


62 Penal Laws of China. June,
be punished for such offense with one hundred
blows and three years' banishment.—None of the
hereditary dignities which existed previous to the
Mantchou Tartar conquest, appear to have been
recognized by the present government, excepting
only that which is attached to the family of Con-
fucius, “whose real or supposed descendants are
at this day distinguished with peculiar titles of
honor, and maintained at the public expense.”
If any civil officers, who have not distinguished
themselves by extraordinary services to the state,
are recommended to the consideration of the em-
peror, as deserving the highest hereditary honors,
such officers and those who recommend them, shall
suffer death; those however, who are recommended
to such honors in consequence of their being the
lineal descendants of officers who have averted na-
tional calamities, protected the empire, and con-
tributed to the establishment of the imperial fami-
ly, shall be free from any liability to the penaltics
of this law.
The appointment and removal of officers depend
on the autherity of the emperor. If any great of
ficer of state presume to confer any appointment
on his own authority, he shall suffer death by
being beheaded. Notwithstanding this law, the
governors of the provinces are constantly in
the habit of filling vacancies in the inferior offices;
but this is always done by virtue of authority
supposed to be conferred by the emperor, and is
generally stated to be only ad interim, until his
majesty's pleasure is known.—In every public of
fice or tribunal, whether at court or in the provinces,
the number of officers, clerks, and attendants to be
employed, is established by law. Nevertheless,
“when necessary,” officers of government may hire
persons to assist in collecting the duties, or in
completing the registers of the people.”
Officers of government are prohibited from leap-
ing their respective stations, except on account of


1833. Penal Laws of China. (33
sickness, or upon public service, and shall be pu-
nished with forty blows for every breach of this law.
They are limited in the time of entering on the
duties of any office to which they may have been
appointed ; and a single day's untiecessary delay
subjects them to the bamboo. Officers who do
not present themselves at court, or at head-quar-
ters, or after leave of absence do not return in
due time, are also liable to the bamboo.
VII. Irregular interference of superiors with sub-
ordinate magistrates is strictly interdicted. Never-
theless, in all serious criminal or intricate revenue
cases, “in which interference or consultaion is re-
quisite, it shall be lawful to summon the attend-
ance of the members of the inferior tribunals.-In
order to show how far the inferior tribunals are
connected with, and snbject to, the authority of
their respective superiors, the translator has ap-
pended to his work “the official reports of some
remarkable legal proceedings.” Our limits forbid
us to quote from these ; and we add on this point
only a single remark, and in his own words;–“As
the investigation of all capital cases must pass
through every step, from the tribunal of the low-
est magistrate to the throne of the emperor; and
as there is, generally speaking, a right of appeal
through the same channel in all cases, whether
civil or criminal, partiality and injustice could ac- .
cording to such a system, scarcely ever escape
detection and punishment, if the interference of
superior magistrates, did not whenever it takes
place, [which is not unfrequent, render the ap-
peal hopeless, and the repetition of the investiga-
tion nugatory.”
All persons who engage in cabals and state
intrigues, shall be beheaded, and their wives and
children shall become slaves, and their fortunes
shall be confiscated.—Any combination between
officers in the provinces and those at court in the


64 Penal Laws of China. - JUNE,
immediate attendance on his majesty, the object
of which may be, either the betraying of the secrets
of the state, unwarrantable pretensions to offices
of power and emolument, or joint addresses to the
sovereign for private and unlawful purposes, shall
subject all the parties guilty of such an offense,
to suffer death, and their wives and children to
perpetual banishment. -
All officers and others in the employ of go-
vernment, are required to make themselves perfect
in the knowledge of the laws, so as to be able to
explain clearly their meaning and intent, and to
| superintend and insure their execution. At the
close of every year they must all undergo an–ex-
amination; and if they are found deficient in knowl-
edge of the laws, they shall forfeit one month's
salary when holding official, and receive forty blows
when holding any of the inferior, stations. And all
private individuals, whatever may be their calling,
“who are found capable of explaining the nature,
and comprehending the objects of the laws, shall
receive pardon in all cases of offenses resulting
purely from accident, or imputable to them only
from the guilt of others, provided it be the first
offense, and not implicated with any act of trea-
son or rebellion.”
Those who delay or neglect to execute orders of
government, who destroy and discardedicts and seals
of office, fail to report to their superiors, or are
guilty of errors and informalities in their public do-
cuments, together with all those who are convicted
of altering any official dispatch, or of using of-
ficial seals, or of neglecting to use them, accord-
ing to the established regulation of the empire, are
liable to the “appropriate penalties” of the law.—
No part of the penal laws is better devised than this,
which is intended to regulate the conduct of ma-
gistrates:–the rules are good, but in practice they
are almost entirely neglected,


1833. Penal Laws of China. 65
III. FiscAl LAws. This division in the origi-
mal, which has been closely followed in the trans-
lation, is divided into about eighty sections; se-
veral of these, however, refer to the same general
subject.
The laws concerning the enrollment of the peo-
ple are very plain and definite. All persons what-
ever shall be registered according to their respec-
tive professions or vocations, whether civil or mili-
tary, whether post-men, artisans, physicians, astro-
logers, laborers, musicians, or of any other denomi-
nation whatever. When a family has omitted to
make any entry whatever in the public register,
the master thereof, if possessing lands charge-
able with contributions to the revenue, shall be
punished with one hundred blows; but if he
possess no such property, with eighty blows
only. When any master of a family, has among his
household, strangers who constitute, in fact, a dis-
tinct family, but omits to make a corresponding
entry in the public register, or registers them as
members of his own family, he shall be punished
with one hundred blows, if such strangers possess
taxable property, and with eighty blows if they
do not possess such property; and if the person
harbored is not a stranger, but a relative, possess-
ing a separate establishment, the punishment of
the master so offending, shall be less than as afore-
said, by two degrees, and the person harbored shall
be liable to the same punishment. In all these
cases the register is to be immediately corrected.
Children are to be entered on the public register
at the age of four years; but the period of liability
to public service, is between sixteen and sixty.—
In all the districts of the empire, one hundred
families shall form a division, in order to provide a
head and ten assessors, whose duty it is to oversee
and assist in the performance of all public duties.
These are to be chosen from among the most
respectable men in the district, persons of mature
1.


66 Penal Laws of China. JUNE,
age, but who have never held any civil or imilitary
employment, nor been convicted of any crime.
These “elders” must see that all the families in
their respective divisions have been registered, and
failure in doing this exposes them to the bamboo.
The returns of population are to be made annually.
We will notice in this connection the rule of
succession and inheritance; but the laws of marriage,
which have a place in this division of the code,
will be reserved and form a part of a separate ar-
ticle at another time.—The eldest son of the prin-
cipal wife, as in the case of “hereditary dignities,”
comes first in the succession ; and after him the
other sons or representatives according to seniori-
ty. A man who has no male issue shall choose
one from among those of the same surname, who
is known to be descended from the same ances-
tors, beginning with his father's issue, next with
his relations of the first degree, then those of the
second, then those of the third, and last with those
of the fourth degree; on failure of these, he is at
liberty to choose whomsoever he may prefer among
those of the same surname; and if afterwards a
son is born, he and the adopted child shall parti-
cipate equally in the family property. But no heir
can be chosen to supply the place of a son of
the first wife, before she has completed her fif-
tieth year.
The regulations concerning the land-taz consti-
tute a very important branch of the fiscal laws of
China. Whether the tenure by which the land is
in general held, is of the nature of a freehold, and
vested in the landholder without limitation or con-
trol, or whether the sovereign is in fact, the ex-
clusive proprietor of the soil, while the nominal
landholder is no more than the steward of his
master, is a question which our translator has dis-
cussed with his usual ability. The truth, he thinks,
in this case, lies between the two extremes. It is
well known that several of the richest merchants


1833. Penal Laws of China. 67
in Canton have considerable landed possessions,
which they esteem as the most secure, if not the
most important portion of their property. The or-
dinary contribution of the landholder to the revenue
is supposed not to exceed one tenth of the produce,
a proportion which leaves enough in his hands, to
enable him to reserve a considerable income to
himself, after discharging the wages of the labor-
ers, and the interest of the capital employed in
the cultivation of his property. “It is chiefly upon
this income that all the superannuated, superseded,
and unemployed officers of government; all mer-
chants retired from, and no longer engaged in busi-
ness; all those Tartar families who hold their pro-
perty in China under a species of feudal vassalage;
and, lastly, all farmers and others not actually labor-
ing agriculturists, must be supposed to subsist. As
there are no public funds in China, the purchase
of land is the chief, if not the only mode of render-
ing capital productive with certainty and regularity,
and free from the anxiety and risk of commercial
adventure.”
On the other hand, it appears from the Penal
Code itself, “that the proprietorship of the land-
holder is of a very qualified nature, and subject to
a degree of interference and control on the part of
government, not known or endured under the most
despotic of the governments of Europe.” By one
section of the law, the proprietor of land seems to
be almost entirely rest icted from disposing of it
by will; by another, it appears that the inheritors
must share it amongst them in certain established
proportions. Those lands are forfeited, which the
proprietors do not enter on the public register, ac-
knowledging themselves responsible for the pay-
ment of taxes upon them ; and in some cases lands
seem to be liable to forfeiture, “merely because
they are not cultivated when capable of being so.”
It appears very evident from the whole tenor of
the laws, as well as from other considerations,


68 Penal Laws of China, JUNE,
that the Chinese government feels no small solicitude
in providing for the necessary wants of the people.
And on this account, as well as for raising a re-
venue, they endeavor to secure the cultivation of
all the lands in the empire, and have framed their
laws accordingly. Whoever neglects to cultivate
his lands or to pay his taxes, exposes himself to
punishment. -
The taxes are paid both in money and kind.
According to the regulations concerning coinage,
there are founderies and mints, where the metal is
prepared and cast, and also store-houses in which
the coin is deposited, until required for public ser-
vice. The quantity of metal coined in the former,
and the periods of its issue from the latter, are
fixed by the Board of Revenue, “in order that the
successive supplies of coin for the use of the people
may correspond with their wants, and be regulated
according to the market-prices of gold, silver, grain,
and other articles in general use and consumption.”
In no private dwelling of any soldier or citizen
shall any utensils of copper be used, except mirrors,
military arms, bells and articles especially conse-
crated to religious purposes. Whatever quantity
any individual may have in excess, he is permitted
to sell to government, and at a fixed rate. And
whoever buys or sells copper clandestinely, or con-
ceals the same in his house, shall be punished with
the bamboo.
On account of the inconvenience which would
attend the payment of large sums in their coin, of
which they have only one kind (the tseen, or cash),
and as paper currency is not in use, ingots of sil-
ver, of one and of ten Chinese ounces (leång or
taels) weight, are used in payments to gevernment.
Gold is also used.—Whoever has the charge of
collecting or receiving money due to government,
“shall be answerable for the delivery of the same
in no other than perfectly pure bullion, whether gold
or silver.”—The regulations concerning the receipt


1833. Penal Laws of China. 69
and issues of public stores, are too numerous, 'and
unimportant to be enumerated here. Suffice it to
remark, that the whole impost on the summer har-
vest must be paid before the end of the 7th moon,
and that on the autumnal harvest, by the end of the
12th moon.—The total amount of the revenue col-
lected in the Chinese empire is said to be about
sixty-six millions of pounds sterling, annually; of
which only twelve are remitted to Peking, while
fifty-four are retained in the provinces. These
sums, says sir George, are probable not far from
the truth; though on such a subject the accuracy
of the information must be in some degree ques-
tionable.
Duties on salt form a considerable branch of the
revenue. This trade is a monopoly, and through-
out the empire is carried on by a limited number
of merchants, who are licensed by government,
and whose proceedings are under the inspection
and control of officers especially appointed to that
service. These merchants are usually rich and
respectable. The laws which regulate the trade
are very specific, as well as rigorous; and those
who violate them are subject to heavy penalties.
There are duties also levied on tea, and various
other articles for “the home consumption.” In
short, all merchants who defraud the revenue, “by
not duly contributing the amount of the rated and
established duties on their merchandize, shall be
punished with fifty blows, and forfeit to govern-
ment half the value of the goods smuggled; three
tenths of such forfeiture shall be given to the in-
former, but no such reward shall be allowed, when
the smuggled goods are discovered and ascertained
by the regular officer on duty. Whoever conveys
goods through a barrier or custom-house station,
without taking out the regular permit, shall be lia-
ble to all the ordinary penalties of smuggling.
All large trading vessels also, which navigate the
seas, shall on reaching their destined port, deliver


70 Penal Laws of China. JUNE,
to the officers of the custom-house, “a full and true
manifest of all the merchandize on board," that the
duties payable thereon may be duly assessed and
paid.—All duties must be paid to government
within the year in which they are due.
Private property likewise comes under the cog-
nizance of government. “Whoever lends his mon-
ey or other property of value, in order to derive
profit from such transaction, shall be limited to the
receipt of an interest on the amount or value of
the loan, at the rate of three per cent. per month.”
—This is considerably above the ordinary rate of
interest in this part of the country. To lend upon
pledges, is also a very frequent practice in China.
Shops of money-lenders, where deposits may be
made of any kind of personal property, are extreme-
ly numerous in all parts of the empire, and, in
general, upon a scale of greater respectability than
establishments of a similar nature in Europe!
Sales, markets, and manufactures are the last
topics treated of in this division of the Penal Code.
In every city, public market, and sea-port, where
licensed agents are stationed by government, it
shall be the duty of such agents to keep an offi-
cial register of all the ships and merchants that
successively arrive, describing their real names and
references, and also the marks, numbers, quantity
and quality of goods brought to the market; who-
ever transgresses this law shall receive sixty blows,
and be expelled from the service. All unfair tra-
ders “shall be severely punished; and whoever
procures or makes use of false weights, measures,
and scales, shall receive sixty blows. If a private
individual manufactures any article for sale, which
is not as strong, and durable, and genuine, as it
is professed to be, or if he prepares and sells any
silks or other stuffs of a thinner or slighter tex-
ture and quality, narrower or shorter, than the cus-
tomary standard, he shall be punished with fifty
blows. -


1833. Penal Laws of China. 71
IV. RITUAL LAws. The emperor, and his great
officers of government, are the only persons who are
allowed to offer the great sacrifices, and perform the
sacred rites of the celestial empire. The monarch
himself is the high priest of the nation; and his
vassals are the ministers who do his will, and aid
in the politico-religious services of the state. But
, the priests, properly so called, and the people, both
soldiers and citizens, are forbidden to participate
in the highest religious solemnities of the nation.
All those officers whose duty it is to superintend
and aid in the imperial sacrificial rites, must pre-
pare themselves for every such occasion by absti-
nence; and whoever either by eating or drinking,
by listening to music or retiring to the apartments
of his wives and concubines, by mourning for the
dead or visiting the sick, by taking cognizance of
capital offenses, or by partaking of public feasts,
fails so to do, shall forfeit one month's salary.
And whoever neglects duly to prepare the animals,
precious stones, silks, and grain for the grand sac-
rifices shall receive one hundred blows. And who-
ever destroys or damages, whether intentionally or
not, the altars, mounds, or terraces consecrated to
the sacred rites, shall receive one hundred blows,
and be perpetually banished.—In all the provincial
cities of the first, second, and third order, the
local genii, the genii of the hills, the rivers, the
winds, the clouds, and of the lightnings, also the
ancient holy emperors, enlightened kings, faithful
ministers, and illustrious sages, shall be honored
“by oblations and other holy rites.”
The sepulchral monuments of ancient emperors
and princes, and the tombs of saints, sages, faith-
ful ministers, aid other illustrious individuals, shall
be carefully preserved ; and no person shall pre-
sume, on pain of receiving eighty blows, to feed
cattle, cut wood, or to guide the plough, in the
places where the remains of such distinguished
personages are deposited.
*


72 Penal Laws of China. JUNE,
The laws respecting unlicensed forms of worship,
magicians, leaders of sects, and teachers of false
doctrines, we quote entire.
“If any private family performs the eeremony of the adoration
of heaven and the north star, burning incense for that purpose
during the night, lighting the lamps of heaven, and also seven
lamps to the north star, it shall be deemed a profanation of
these sacred rites, and derogatory to the celestial spirits; the
parties corcerned, therein shall accordingly be punished with
eighty blows.--When the wives or daughters are guilty of these
offenses, the husbands and fathers shall be held responsible.
“If the priests of Füh, and Taou-sze, after burning incense
and preparing an oblation, imitate the sacred imperial rites, they
also shall be punished as aforesaid, and moreover be expelled
from the order of priesthood.—If any officers of government, sol-
diers, or citizens, permit the females belonging to their families
to go abroad to the temples of priests, in order to burn in-
cense in token of worship, they shall be punished with forty
blows; but when widows, or other women not under the guardi-
anship of men, commit the same offense, the punishment shall
fall on themselves.—The superior of the temple, and the porter
at the gate, shall also be equally punished for admitting them.
“Magicians, who raise evil spirits by means of magical books,
and dire imprecations, leaders of corrupt and impious sects, and
members of all superstitious associations in general, whether
denominating themselves Mi-le-fo or Pe-lien-kiaou, or in any
other manner distinguished, all of them offend against the laws,
by their wicked and diabolical practices and doctrines. When
such persons, having in their possession concealed images of
their worship, burn incense in honor of them, and when they
assemble their followers by night in order to instruct them in
their doctrines, and by pretended powers and notices endeavor
to inveigle and mislead the multitude, the principal in the com-
mission of such offenses shall be strangled, after remaining in
prison the usual period, and the accessories shall severally receive
one hundred blows, and be perpetually banished to the distance
of three thousand le.
“If at any time the people, whether soldiers or citizens, dress
and ornament, their idols, and after accompanying them tumul.
tuously with drums and gongs, perform oblations and other sa-
cred rites to their honor, the leader or instigator of such meet.
ings shall be punished with one hundred blows.
“If the head inhabitant of the district, when privy to such
unlawful meetings, does not give information to government,
he shall be punished with forty blows.-The penalties of this
law shall not however be so construed as to interrupt the
regular and customary meetings of the people, to invoke the
terrestrial spirits in spring, and to return thanks to them in
autumn."


1833. Penal Laws of China. 73
“The Christian sect,” remarks the translator, “is
in this code entirely passed over in silence.” In
clauses added since the translation was made, the
Se-yang jin and the teen-choo keaou are noticed.
Our limits forbid us here to enter on the discus-
sion of this subject; but we purpose soon to re-
cur to it again, and will then lay before our read-
ers all the information, worthy of notice, which
we can command.—Several sections concerning
sundry “miscellaneous observances,” close this divi-
sion of the code. Medicines and provisions, equi-
page and furniture, are to be well chosen and du-
ly provided for his majesty.—Private individuals
are prohibited from keeping in their possession,
celestial images, astrological books, and books for
calculating fortunes, and so forth.-The houses,
apartments, carriages, dress, furniture, and other
articles used by the officers of government, and by
the people in general, shall be comformable to the
established rules and gradations. “Priests of Foe”
or Tao-sse,” must visit their parents, sacrifice to their
ancestors, and mourn for their relations “in the
same manner as is by law required from the people
in general.”—The celestial bodies and phenomena
inust all be carefully observed and noted. Con-
jurers and fortune-tellers must not frequent the
houses of any civil or military officers, under pre-
tense of prophesying to them future events; this law
shall not however be understood to prevent them
from telling the fortunes and casting the nativities
of individuals, by the stars, in the usual manner.—
Such are the ritual laws of China:
* In the Asiatic Journal, this word has been frequently written Fo-hi or
Fuh-he. The editor of that work, referring (in No. xxxiv, for Oct. 1832,
p. 89,) to a correction of this error, which was pointed out to him in the
Canton Register, remarks that “Jhis ‘new and unfounded expression,' whethcr
correct or not, is as commonly used as that of Budha priests. It occurs,
for example, repeatedly, in Sir George Staunton's translation of the code
of China, in the text as well as the notcs.”—Fuh-he, the name of an am.
cicnt emperor, the supposed founder of the Chinese empire, may be, for
aught we know, “as commonly used as Budha priests; ” but it is never ap.
plied, when used correctly, to those priests themselves. Sir George writes,
not Fo-hi but Foc.—the old orthography of Fuh, which is the Clunese
abbreviation of Full-too, or Budha,
J
--


74 Remarks on the JUNE,
MIIS C E L L A NIE S.
Remarks on the history and chromology of China, from the
earliest ages down to the present time. By Philosinensis. .
It is a trite remark, that in no country of Furope, or of
the whole globe, is there so much sameness to be found as in
China. Observe the physiognomy, the character, and the in.
stitutions of the people, and you find only a slight difference
between the inhabitants of the several provinces. View their
cities, houses, temples, and public courts, and how little do
they differ from each other, though separated in distance more
than a thousand miles. The diversities in the Chinese dress,
and in their whole mode of life. are indeed so slight as to be
almost imperceptible to a stranger, who, on seeing them for the
first time, can scarcely distinguish an inhabitant of Peking
from a native of Canton. This uniformity pervades also their
whole literature; the Chinese thoughts are stereotyped in their
classics, and the learned individual or author merely gives a
new edition.
When we consult their history, we meet with the same bar.
renness of ideas, arising from their uniformity in all ages. The
history of the nation is involved in that of the emperor;-he
is the sole agent; and the nation is the engine, which is set in
motion at the pleasure of the autocrat or his ministers. A
mere panegyric, or a modified censure, which implies a partial
praise, is all which we find in the records concerning the lives
of the emperors. Yaou and Shun, the celebrated emperors of
antiquity, so frequently mentioned in their annals, are held up
as examples worthy of imitation ; and the emperor whom the
modern historians would oraise, is exhibited as the rival of
their virtues. But when proßgacy and tyranny meet with just
retribution, and the nation shakes off the hateful yoke, and
murders the oppressor, these historians exercise all their skill
in portraying a monster of the infernal regions, a prodigy of
worthlessness and cruelty. They can seldom preserve the “due
medium” which Confucius so frequently recommended; for
they scarcely ever dare to represent the glaring faults of those
emperors whose good qualities overbalance their palpable de-
fects. Hence arises the great veneration, and the more than
divine homage, which the nation pays to the “son of heaven,"
the personified celestial virtue, whose paternal care and com-
passion extend beyond the “four seas," and comprehend all


1833. History of China. 75
nations. These notions have even reached Europe; and many
learned men, after perusing the historical panegyrics of Du
Halde and of others, consider the Chinese government the
most excellent and glorious which ever existed, or which now
exists on the globe. And even now, if we regard merely the
edicts of this common political and tender father, we are in-
duced to believe that China can boast the only patriarchal
government which has survived the wreck of time, and which
continues to lavish its divine blessings on the millions of its
children. But these historical and political delusions vanish
before a scrutinizing eye; and we see in this universal father
of mankind, nothing but a despot who tramples on the laws
of the country, and keeps the nation under iron bondage.
The great mass of historians were mere adulators, and if
there has been an honorable exception, his voice was either sup-
pressed, or uttered only to late posterity, when another dynasty
filled the throne. There were however privileged and imperial
writers, charged with the office of duly representing the actions
of their sovereign—without the varnish of flattery—as an example
to posterity. No nation boasts so long a series of historians
and of history. The unchangeable nature of the Chinese
written language, is well adapted to preserve the relations of
events, to all generations, down to the last day. Their his-
torical details received no borrowed aid from foreign nations;
they had no. Thucydides or Tacitus as models, but wrote in
their own original way. Ignorant of other nations, they con-
fined themselves to their own country, and mentioned the “bar-
barians” only as they came in contact with them. As they
constitute so great a portion of the inhabitants of the globe,
their history on this account, notwithstanding all its defects, is
very valuable. It will also be worthy of our consideration to
investigate the means by which so immense a mass of people
has been kept together, whilst every other nation, with very
few exceptions, has dwindled to nothing, or lost its nationality
under the influence of foreign conquerors. A study of this
history will furnish us the means to become intimately ac-
quainted with the Chinese character, and with the leading
#". of the celestial government. Here existed a state with.
Öut the aid of classic fore, here it was overthrown, but never
annihilated, and withstands to this day the inroads of all-de-
stroying time. The Chinese empire is in this respect peerless.
Whilst the Babylonian, Persian, Grecian, Roman, and other
monarchies now exist only in the records of history, China,
though the cotemporary of them all, is still in vigor, and was
never so great in extent of territory as at the present moment.
What a prospect does it present in a religious point of view 1
All, even the most savage nations, have undergone great chan-
es by the introduction of new creeds. Exterminating wars
ve swept the western parts of Asia, have desolated Europe,


76 Remarks on the JUNE,
and even raged in America; but China, though it has partially
adopted one foreign superstition, has never been stirred by its
influence to bloodshed. Southern Asia may have been en-
veloped in metaphysical darkness, have sunk under the bur-
den of myriads of deities, and made degrading and abomina-
ble supersititions the sole object of life.—China has naturalized
innumerable idols, but always viewed them as mere auxiliaries
in the phalanx of political institutions, and in the common busi-
ness of life. We read of no legislative priests here, who sub-
vert old customs to establish their own systems on their ruins.
Every igion is modeled after the state, moulded into the
laws of rites, and adapted to the religious indifference of...the
- #. Even popery, which never Yields to popular opinion, is
ere reduced to the necessity of allowing idolatrous practices,
arising from the peculiar constitution of the country. No bulls
of excommunication from the pope can entirely do away the
evil; the Chinese remain Chinese, even when bigoted papists.
True, pure Christianity, which with its celestial power subdues the
fiercest barbarians, has never entered China, to contest the
palm of victory with rites established in times immemorial.
Whilst the altars of polished heathens are subverted, the cross
planted in their stead, and the gospel proves victorious where-
ever it is preached, China is not visited from on high, and
remains in a state of religious apathv. To other nations,
unimportant when compared with the vast multitudes of this,
the Gospel is sent, the word of life preached, while China
abides in idolatry, and scarcely knows the name of the Redeemer.
—The ways of Providence are mysterious, and in nothing more
so than as it regards China; but let us adore where we cannot
comprehend, till eternity unfold to us the mystery. Let us how-
ever cherish the hope, that in these latter days, the glory of the
Saviour will be revealed to all flesh, and his name be adored by all
the millions of this empire. When God lays his hand upon them,
human customs crumble into dust, how deeply and how long
soever cherished.
Mohammedanism, which in the spring-tide of its youth in-
undated so great a portion of Asia, Africa, and even of Europe,
was arrested in its progress on the frontiers of China. Timur,
the all-conquering Timur, was snatched away by death, when on
the eve of invading China, Rºd proclaiming, by the sword, the
law of the prophet. Comparatively few Mussulmen are to be
found here, and of them, although the unity of the Deity is the
most prominent point of their creed, there is not one who does
not participate in idolatrous rites.
We have only touched upon a few topics, which may en-
gage the future writer of a Chinese historv. Such a work is
greatly needed at the present moment; could it be composed
with the skillful hand of a Tacitus, and written in the pleasing
style of a Robertson, it would excite a livelier interest in be.
half of Chū. There are abundant materials; but they require


1833. History of China. 77
a man of unbiased mind, and conversant with Chinese man-
ners and language, to make the proper selections and arrange-
ment. We cannot expect that the attention of Europeans will
be attracted to inis country, unless we endeavor-to give China
that consideration in the scale of nations, which she-deserves.-
To stimulate those who are competent to the task, these
lines are written, and we expect not to plead in vain.—The
history itself might be treated in the Chinese way, of periods,
which comprise the time each successive dynasty reigned; or, in
a more extensive view of ancient, middle, and modern history.
As we ought to conform ourselves to the taste of western wri-
ters, the latter mode is preferable.
Ancient history might extend from the creation of the world
to the extinction of the latter Han dynasty, and of the San
Kwá, or Three States, which succeeded it, A. d. 279.
Like all histories of those remote times, this is composed of
fables, interwoven with a great deal of truth, or modeled ac-
cording to the course of events in later ages. There is
only one record—the Mosaic—unsullied by the plagiarism of
mythological ingenuity; all others are more or less tinctured
with the absurdities of fiction. The Chinese are less extrava-
gant in this than the Hindoos, the western Asiatics, Greeks,
and Egyptians; and, in that prosaic way which is characteris-
tic of the nation, they describe what they received as tradi.
tions, or imagined to have taken place. Even in the records
of this distant country, under all the rubbish in which they are
buried, we observe a resemblance to the details of the Mosaic
revelation. To reconcile all the discrepancies would indeed be
a fruitless attempt, for how can we find the clue to these
variations! But we shall arrive near the truth, if receiving
implicitly the genuine account drawn up by an unerring Hand,
we regard it as the touchstone by which to try all historical
veracity. We are fully aware that repeated attempts to remove
these discrepancies have proved abortive —and though the infidel
may exult at the differences both in chronology and history, yet
these differences upon closer inspection are after all compara-
tively small, yea, less puzzling than the details of many events
which have transpired in our own times.
The first question which arises, when we are informed
that China Proper has a population of 360 millions, is—from
whence did so numerous a people spring 1 None of all the
nations which have successively flourished, has ever numbered
such immense multitudes. Did we observe in the features of
the Chinese any great variety, we might imagine that several
tribes of central Asia, or of the Caucasian race, had left their
homes and emigrated to these eastern and more fertile lands,
that centuries had amalgamated them, and they had become one
nation. If this was the fact, it must have been at a very early
period; for at the present moment no trace of their national


1833. History of China. 79
can find amidst all this rubbish, the materials for drawing a
true picture. To obviate every misunderstanding, however,
which might arise from these remarks, we express our firm
conviction that the human family subsequent to the fall, pos-
sessed a vigorous understanding, and were able to invent not
only those things indispensably necessary for their existence,
but even to cultivate arts, in order to render life agreeable.
Yet the tendency of their inventions surely differed widely from
ours, as the external causes which gave rise to invention were
not the same. It is a fundamental error of some historians to
describe our first ancestors as rude and brutish, like the savages
of New Zealand or New Holland, whose minds are obscured
and debased, by the operation of the common tendencies of the
human heart to degenerate. Writers of this description might
learn a lesson from the C'minese; who, however, go to the op-
posite extreme. Man, the crown of creation, bearing upon his
front the image of God, though greatly clouded, is still ennobled
by it, and can claim the highest intelligence as his peculiar
prerogative. The degeneracy of his posterity, and their be.
coming even like brutes, proves nothing against this assertion.
To the disappointment of unbelievers, an account of the de-
Inge is found in the Chinese annals, and the time of this great
event differs very ſittle from that assigned to it by the scriptural
chronology. The error of the historians, in dating the reign
of the succeeding emperors from this great catastrophe, without
informing us how the empire was revived, after having been deso-
lated and depopulated by the elements, is here again as great as
before; and it shows that the writers who lived in the middle
ages were little conversant with the primeval formation of states.
It is also a speaking proof, that very little true history has been
transmitted to posterity from those ancient times, and that the
Chinese labor under the same difficulties, in this respect, as all
other nations, the Hebrews excepted. How great sover the
destruction ot-books—may have been under Tsin chehwang, (“the
first emperor Tsin,”) in 200 B. c., it certainly cannot be believed,
that so many thousand copies, in the hands of so many millions
of persons, as it is asserted, could all have perished. If we fix the
foundation of the Chinese empire 2200 years B. c. we hope not
to be far from the truth, though we have no certain historical
data to guide us. The reason for fixing upon this period is,
that this was a time when the posterity of the antediluvians
began to spread abroad into the four quarters of the world.
Family after family left the abodes of their ancestors, and
passed away to inhabit the desolate places of the earth. But
to account for so distant a migration as that from western Asia
to the eastern extremes of this continent, is rather a difficult
task. Yet we ought to remember that a higher than human
hand guides the nations in their movements, nnd that the same
Providence who called the immense hordes of barbarians from


80 Remarks on the JUNE,
the frontiers of China to Europe, in the fifth and sixth cen.
turies, could also guide the steps of a few families in their
eastward migration. For it is written, that God has made of
one blood all nations of men, for to dwell on all the face of
the earth, and hath determined the times before appointed, and
the bounds of their habitation.
It is rather doubtful whether the time, during which the
celebrated emperors, Yaou, Shun, and Yu, are said to have
lived, from 2317 to 2197 b. c. is correctly stated in the Chi-
nese annals. We would not hesitate to assign to them a pe.
riod 300 or 400 years later; but as it is, we frankly confess,
that we are unable to solve the difficulties which the pres.
ent date involve. On the other hand, neither the Chinese,
nor those who implicitly adopt their chronology, can give sa-
tisfactory proof of their having lived at so early an age.
These emperors appear to have been actuated by the true
patriarchal spirit; and the title of patriarchs would suit
them better than the high sounding appellation of emperor.
They are held up as patterns to all ages; and the present
Chinese constitution of government exhibits a model of their
concentrated skill. Every institution and important law is de-
rived from the wisdom. By their management, as the Chi-
nese histories and classics inform us, the empire reached the
ne plus ultra of civilization,-the golden age of virtue and of
primeval simplicity. We do not doubt, that these founders
of an empire so lasting, possessed superior talents, and were
guided by wisdom and the most sublime principles; otherwise
they could never have become what they were ; yet we fear
also that the historian ascribes to them the origin of sciences
and institutions, of which they never thought.—Yu was the
founder of a long line of emperors, who seem to have
very early degenerated, and with them the whole dynasty of
Heå. We are told that in the reign of Wang-hwae or
Te-hwae, the eighth monarch of this dynasty, foreign embas.
sadors arrived by way of sea. From whence they came is by
no means clear. Nor is it possible to believe, that at so early
a period (2027 B. c.), navigation should have become so
perfect, as to render distant voyages possible. Had this been
the case, then those tribes on the southwest, which probably
sent these “tribute bearers,” could as well have made excur-
sions to the western parts of Asia, where the seas are less
boisterous, and flourishing states existed in the remotest periods of
antiquity. All this only adds to the proofs, that the chronology
labors under great difficulties from placing the foundation of
their empire at so early an age.
The dynasty of Hei was succeeded by that of Shang. The
history of these times, with the chronology, we find in the Shoo.
King und Chun Tsew, two of the books which are comprehended
underthe-mame-of-the Five Classics. The Chun Tsew is scarcely


1833, History of China. 81
---
anything but a mere chronological list of occurrences; but the
Shoo King is written in a very sententious style, which renders the
meaning rather obscure. These works were compiled by Con-
fucius, and are therefore held in great veneration. A descrip-
tion of the ancient manners is found in the She King, or Book
of Odes. This was also compiled by Confucius, who collected
them either from ancient records or from oral tradition. There
is nothing superior in this work.” From the many licentious
expressions which occur in it, we should rather fear that even
their antiquity was not exempt from depravity of manners. But
the Chinese escape such a reproach by saying, that those ex-
ceptionable passages have been interpolated; and for the honor
of the simplicity of the olden times, one would be tempted
to give credit to this subterfuge. In the Shoo King- we dis.
cover, under a vast mass of trifles, some fov traces of mono-
theism; yet even these few and faint rays are so obscured
by the details of rites, institutions, and maxims, which directly
sanction idolatry, that they are scarcely discernible among them.
Yet after all, these are the most valuable records of ancient
times; and it is only to be regretted that we must trust so
much to commentators to discover their true scnse. The words
are so few and so indefinite, as to serve any purpose of any
interpreter.
The Le Ke, or the Book of Rites, which is nothing else than
a code of ancient customs and forms remodeled and enlarged by
the ceremonious hand of Confucius, perplexes us greatly. Some
of the maxims there laid down, are truly excellent; some of
the rites prescribed are praiseworthy, and indispensably neces.
sary for the establishmeut of a well-regulated society; but the
greatest part is too punctilious, substituting mere ceremony for.
substancé. We cannot imagine that the simplicity of antiquity
demanded such ornaments. It is impossible to maintain truth
and honesty under the burden of so many ceremonies, which
substitute words for actions, mere professions for acts of be.
nevolence. To impute this formality to the unceremonious
Yaou, Shun, and their successors, is too far-fetched and im.
probable. We abstain from remarking on the Yih King.
The Shang dynasty presents nothing extraordinary, the
emperors only practicing what they learned of their predeces.
sors. The feudal system seems to have been in full force at
that time. Hence the many broils and party wars of the chiefs;
which few emperors were able entirely to quell. Some of the
emperors themselves seem to have been very worthless persons.
The court at the time appears to have been held in Shanse.
We think that the first foundation of the empire was laid
on the banks of the Yangtsze keang and the Hwang ho; that
from thence the people extended themselves abroad principal.
ly first in a northern direction; and that the present province
of Shanse was chosen as the seat of government, because it
enablzd he emperor to oppose the barbarians from the north-
K


82 Remarks on the JUNE,
ern regions. The hardy Scythian tribes, as early as this time,
appear to have made occasional visits to China, but the re-
cords on this subject are scantv. In seems sufficiently clear,
that China, even under the Shang dynasty, though small in
extent compared with later times, was already very populous.
For this rapid increase we can account only by their longevi.
tv, and by the custom of early marriage which still continues.
Neither do we read of exterminating wars which could desolate
the country. Thus the prolific Chinese could progressively
increase in numbers, and extend in territory.
Chow, the last emperor of this dynasty, is held up as a monster
of wickedness; but he received the wages of his iniquity, and
with him the Shang dynasty became extinct, 1123, b. c.
The first emperor of the Chow dynasty, which now obtain.
ed the throne, appears to have been a very excellent man.
His name was Woo wang, the ‘Martial king.' The capital
was now transferred to SG-ngan in Shense province. If all
the wise maxiins ascribed to him in the Shoo King were really
uttered and practiced by him, he was surely one of the wis.
ost monarchs that ever liveed. Inded we are rather astonish-
ed to find such models of perfection on earth. However, he
committed a great fault, in dividing some parts of the empire
amongst the descendants of the former illustrious families
which had occupied the throne.—Light seems gradually to have
dawn, it on China, and we find now no difficulty in asserting,
that the authentic history begins with the Chow dvansty.
The Chun Tsew, already mentioned as one of the early records,
details the history of a part of this period, including a space
of 242 years. The feudal system must have been carried to
a very great height, for there were at that time about 125
different states in China. We may easily believe that these
gave rise to numberless feuds. -
At the beginning of the seventh eentury, arose a man in
China, who has been the object of admiration during all the
subsequent ages. Kung footsze, called by foreigners Confu.
cius, was a native of the state of Loo, which now forms a part
of ſhe province of Shantung. He was not indeed the author of
a great religious and political revolution among his countrymen,
but he was a reformer and improver of what already existed.
His was designed to be entirely practical philosophy; sound
politics were the theme of discussion, and to render a peo-
ple happy by strict subordination and by the due observance
of fixed rites his constant topic. He was surely a great man.
and could his theory be reduced to practice, strife, rebellion,
and warfare would cease. His high opinion of the power of vir.
tue over the human heart, and his eulogiums on the excellency
of human nature, show that he was little conversant with the
world, and with the human heart. At the same time he tells
his disciples, that virtue runs with the speed of the postman,
he informs them, that he has never found one man who truly


1833. History of China, 83
loves virtue. He asserts that it is as easy to transfuse virtu-
ous principles into all mankind, as to “turn the finger in the
palm of the hand;” nevertheless he confesses, that he had only
one disciple, (and he died at an early age,) who profited by
his lessons, and became virtuous by his instructions. Yet
these glaring contradictions, which are only a few specimens
of his inconsistency, ought not to throw him out of our es-
timation. He was a man, and acted like a man; he was a
teacher, but had his faults. He surely did much for China.
Writing by means of a sort of hieroglyphics was in use be-
fore his time; thogh there were records written or carved on
bamboo, there were no books extant. He may be called
the first Chinese author. It is deeply to be regretted, that
he insisted so much upon the observance of mere forms,
and above , all, that he forgot the Divine Being as the
author of all virtue, the ruler of the universe, and the only
proper object of adoration. His references to the Omnipotent
are few and obscure; he inculcates polytheism, and never dwells
upon the immortality of the soul. We might excuse him for his
ignorance if he knew nothing better; but we must acknowledge
that his whole mind was so engrossed with the things of this
world, that his views never reached beyond the grave. To
spend years in mourning for parents and ancestors, to vener.
ate and pay adoration to the tablets erected to their memory,
and to rest satisfied with this, without any inquiry whether the
soul has existence after death or not, is the drift of his in.
structions. It would however be unjust to accuse him of athe.
ism, for never has there been, and never can there ire, an athe-
istical lawgiver. Confucius in ſis own formſ way, reveres
the powers above him, but what they were he never gave him.
self the trouble to inquire; he was anxious to enter the courts
of princes, to make people virtuous, and to establish a good
government. In this he succeeded but partially, and in some
points he was entirely foiled. Yet his system, if impartially
viewed, possesses an intrinsic value, and has stood the test of
ages. Down to this moment, his doctrines are professedly
adopted, and he himself is really deified.
Of quite a different character was his contemporary, Laou.
keun, or Laoutsze, the founder of a new religious sect. He
seems to have been a man of that mystic cast of mind, which
plunges into dark speculation, and acknowledges as truth the .
greatest absurditics—the mere productions of a heated brainz
He strove for earthly immortality, but died like every other mor-
tal; his followers engaged in the same pursuit, but they also
went the way of all flesh.-This seems to have been a very
philosophic age of the world, for in Greece also lawgivers and
wise men lived at the same time.
This dynasty kept the throne a great length of time. Civ.
ilization made rapid progress in China, whilst the western
world had only emerged from thick darkness and barbarism.


84 Remarks on Chinese History. JUNE,
Mang-tsze (Mencius), who lived about two centuries later than
Confucius, irod tº the footsteps of his great pattern, and be.
came a second reformer to his nation. He appears to have
possessed a more independent spirit, and his sayings are often
more apposite than those of his master. His works, as well
as those of Confucius, constitute a part of the writings com.
monly called the Four Books.
The independent states which had gradually assumed exor.
bitant powers, at this time desolated China with civil wars.
• In vain did the emperors strive to maintain their ascendency;
they were repeatedly beaten, and their power dwindled away to
a mere shadow. Like the German emperors of the middle ages,
their title was high-sounding, but their power was despicable.
Amongst all the tributary states, the kingdom of Tsin finally
wrought the ruin of the imperial family. The latter monarchs
of this family were men of ordinary talents, incapable of curbing
and keeping in subjection so many haughty princes. This dy-
nasty which had sat on the throne about 867 years, a period
unparalleled in history, and which had produced many ex-
cellent emperors, now lost its glory amidst the contending par.
ties; and the last emperor abdicated in favor of the prince
of Tsin. Being the ruler of a very flourishing state, and hav-
ing ample resources, this prince fought successfully against the
other six states into which China was then divided. These
states were finally subdued by the ruler of Tsin, who having
established the dynasty of that name, assumed the title of
Che hwang-te, the first Emperor.’ He divided the empire
into thirty-six provinces, aud is said to have raised that
stupendous fabric, the Great Wall about 214 B. c. But in Chi-
nese history, the name of this emperor is marked with indel.
ible infamy, as the destroyer of Chinese literature. This charge
requires some qualification 3 yet even to the present time those
irreparable losses are deeply regretted; and the Chinese lament
that catastrophe, as much as Europeans do the destruction of
the Alexandrian library.
This dynasty was only of short duration. Three emperors main-
tained a precarious reign, during sixteen years, when after a short
contest, Lcu, Pcng, a mere-robber, seated himself on the throne,
202 b. c., and became the founder of the celebrated Han dynasty.
This age is remarkable for the mumerous literati and good authors,
who have immortalized their names by their writings. Even
to this day the Chinese like to designate themselves by the
name of Han jin, or “men of Han.” The empire was consid.
erably enlarged by the addition of Kwangtung and Kwangse
on the south, and of several Tartar tribes on the north.
When the Chinese first came in contact with foreigners, they
maintained intercourse with them without that narrowness of
views which now characterizes their policy. This whole pe. .
riod was remarkable for the wars which desolated the empire.
The San Kwo, a historical novel, of very doubtful authority,


1833. The Bugis Language. 85
was written nearly cotemporaneously with the events of this
period. It exhibits a frightful picture of the cruelties which
were committed during a series of most bloody contests. This
was the age of heroism, and the only one which China can
boast. yº. great talents, which were called forth by dire
necessity proved the bane of the country; there were few who
shone as heroes, and showed humanity to the vanquished.
In the reign of the emperor Haou-ping-te, our Saviour was
born; but the Chinese were then ignorant, as they are at this
day, of that great event, which stands in so intimate a relation
to the salvation of all nations.—The religion of .Budha. very
soon entered the empire, and spread its baneful influence over
all China. The emperor Ming te is said to have been admon-
ished in a dream, that the “holy one” was to be found in the
West. This so interested him, that he sent a deputation to
India, which brought some priests of Budha from Ceylon.
After that event (about 70 A. D.), Budhism spread rapidly
throughout the country.
How mysterious are the ways of Providence; China strove
to open a friendlly intercourse with foreigners; and the first
gift which she received from them was a baneful one. How
could they then view any foreign country favorably How
could they think that any nation besides themselves was truly
enlightened, when even the countrymen of the “holy one” were
degraded by such superstition? During this dynasty, China
received her final formation as a literary nation; and thenceforth
to the present era, she has made little or no improvement.
The How Han dynasty which succeeded this, had only tem-
porary possession of the throne. During the latter part of it,
the Huns became formidable to China, and very soon carried
desolation over all Europe. This subject requires our particular
attention; but we wish first to speak of the middle ages.
[Note. The How Han dynasty has sometimes been classed as one of
the minor states which succeeded the celebrated Han dynasty.—As our
Correspondent in his present “Remarks on the history of China,” (which
will be continued in our next number,) does not purpose to go into a minute
examination of the chronology, we hope it may be in our power erelong to
give that subject a more full investigation.]
T1: E. B.U.GIS I.A.NTGUAGE.
1. A Code of Bugis Maritime Laws, with a translation and
vocabulary, giving the pronunciation and meaning of each
word. SINGApoRE, 1832.—12mo, pp. 28.
2. Vocabulary of the English, Bugis, and Malay languages, con-
taining about 2000 words. SINGApore, 1833, 8vo. pp. 64.
MANY are the languages and dialects, more or less differing
from each other, which are spoken throughout the numerous
islands of the Indian Archipelago. Their written alphabets


86 The Bugis Language. JUNE,
differ also, not only in the number and form of their letters, but
likewise in their derivation.—Of these languages, according to
the author of the two little works before us, the chief are the
Malayan and Bugis —to these we may add the Javanese, which
language is spoken over a considerable extent of territory, to-
wards the south-western limit of the Archipelago. These three
are in fact, the mother-languages, of which the majority of the
others are but dialects, differing in purity of style and idiom,
according to their proximity or otherwise, to the principal na-
tions by which the several languages are spoken.
Malay has been so long and extensively known, and so much
has been published concerning it, that it would be needless for
us to advert to it, further than to mention the peculiar circum-
stance of its alphabet being purely Arabic,+the gift of its
Mohammedan conquerors, while the alphabets of all the sur-
rounding nations (though they also profess the Mohammedan
religion), approach more or less nearly to the Sanskrit.—
Having adverted to this peculiarity we pass on to consider the
Bugis language, which, with the Javanese, has hitherto been
very much disregarded. These, as well as the other languages
of the Indian Archipelago, have been noticed, indeed, by Mr.
Crawfurd, in his history of those places, in which he also gives
specimens of the written characters of each. But it is only
within a few years past, that works of practical utility, intro-
ductory to a knowledge of these languages, have appeared. In
1828, the Rev. G. Bruckner, of the Baptist mission at Sama-
rang, had a font of Javanese types cast at Serampore, with
which he has printed the New Testament, several Christian
tracts, and a grammer of that language. Of these works we
hope that we shall be able to give our readers some account,
in a future number. At a later period, the Rev. C. H. Thom-
sen, of the London Missionary Society at Singapore, went also
to Serampore to superinted, among other things, the punching
of moulds for a font of Bugis types; with which he has since
printed some religious tracts, besides the two little works whose
titles we have placed at the head of this article.*
The Bugis is the principal language spoken on the island of
Celebes (which the natives call Wugi), and on the opposite
coast of Borneo, which is for the most part inhabited by emi-
grants from the island of Wugi or Celebes. “The languages
and literature of Celebes,” we are told by Crawfurd, “ though
in many features of resemblance partaking of the character of
those of the more western countries, differ very essentially from
them. The alphabet, in the first place, takes a new charac.
ter; the letters of which it consists taking a new form, as
* We hear that Mr. Thomsen possessed a font of Bugis types, pre-
vious to this period; but they were very defective, and were not therefore
employed. The types now used are cast at Singapore, from the moulds which
were made at Serampore.


1833. . The Bugis Language, 87
little like that of the Javanese as that is to the Arabic or Ro-
man. The alphabets of Celebes consist of eighteen consonants
and five vowels, to which are added sometimes four supple-
mental consonants, being merely four of the first eighteen as-
pirated,—and an additional vowel. It is singular that the pecu-
liar and technical classification of the Sanskrit alphabet should
have been adopted in the alphabet of Celebes, though neglect.
ed in that of Java.”—Crawfurd's History of the Indian Archi.
pelago, Vol. II, p. 60.
This account of the alphabet, as given by Mr. Crawfurd agrees
very nearly with what is now laid before us in these introductory
works of Mr. Thomsen, from which we extract the following
list of the letters, with their respective forms, names, and
powers.
The Bugis ALPHABET.
ForMS. NAMES POWERS.
* ka like k.
•) ga 33 g, in go.
* nga a nasal, like ng.
•r. n'kak like k, aspirated.
~! pa 25 p.
JR ba 25 b.
*- IIla 25 III.
A) m’pak 25 p, aspirated.
* ta, 25 t.
*> da, »y d.
•r. Ila, y 2 Il.
º n’råk y? r, aspirated,
•y cha , ch, as in church,
-o ja soft, between j and y.
~ In 181 aS In manlaC.
& n'chak like ch, aspirated.
--> al 35 a, in father.
-S ra 3 * r.
•e la y? l.
- Wa »y w, English.
c Sa yy S.
co ha 22 h.
ºr iya a compound of i, and a,
Each consonant, or letter of the alphabet, has an inherent
vowel, corresponding to a, in father, and fortiis a distinct syllable,
either with its inherent or with a movable vowel,


88 The Bugis Language. June,
“The movable vowels are as follows:
t e, before the letter is like e, in pen.
i, above , , like i, in tin.
1 o, after , , like o, in so.
u, under , , like u, in under.
Öng, at the top of the letter, like the
German Ö in Königsberg: and it is 3, Ön, or öng,
according to its place in the word, or according to
the letter which follows it.—The Bugis has two
marks of punctuation; : stands at the end of a
complete sentence, and # stands at the end of a
subject.
“They have adopted the European numerals for
all purposes of notation.”
º
The resemblance which crists between the powers of these
letters, and of those of the Sanskrit alphabet, is very appa-
rent. But the aspirates being seldom used in Bugis, they aro
thrown out of the usual order of the Sanskrit, and placed at
the end of each series, under the name of supplemental letters.
This will easily be rendered plain to those of our readers who
are unacquainted with the rudiments of Sanskrit, by the following
comparison of the first series of each alphabet.
Sanskrit.— ka, kha, ga, gha, nga.
Bugis.-- ka, ga, nga, n’kak.
Here, in the Bugis, the supplemental letter, n'kak, is an aspi-
rate, the n being slightly sounded, and the k being uttered with
a strong emission of the breath.
The following remarks, respecting the languages of the island
of Celebes, are from Crawfurd's History of the Indian Archi-
pelago.
“Besides the dialects of some abject savages, and of some
tribes more improved, two great languages prevail in Celebes,
the languages of the Bugis and Macassars, as they are
denominated by the people of the western portion of the
Archipelago, and from them by us;–or Wugi and Mang-
kasara, as they call themselves. The Bugis is the hanguage
of the more powerful and numerous nation, and is the most
cultivated and copious. The Macassar is more simple in
structure, abounds less in synonymes, and its literature is more
scanty. Both partake of the common simplicity in structure
of all thc languages of the Archipelago, and are distinguished
above all, even the Malay, for a soft and vocalic pronunciation.
Except the soft nasal ng, no word or syllable in either
language ever ends in a consonant, and no consonant ever


1833. The Bugis Language. 89
coalesces with another. The organs of the people seem hardly
capable of pronouncing a consonant so situated, so that even
foreign words, when used, or adopted in the language, must
undergo the change implied in this principle of orthoepy....The
Bugis are said to be possessed of a recondite and ancient lan-
guage, parallel to the Kawi of Java, and the Pali of the
Budhist nations; but the knowledge of it is confined to a very
few, and I have no specimens.”—Vol. II. pp. 60, 61.
We very much regret our inability to offer more extended
remarks on this subject, but we hope this short notice of the
language will help to excite some interest and inquiry res-
pecting it among European residents in Malayan and other
countries of the Indian Archipelago. It is not our present object
to enter into any detailed account of the Bugis, as a people;
but we may be allowed to refer to the extent and import.
ance of their trade with the various countries of the Indian
Archipelago, and the very great desirableness that it should not
be shackled by the restrictions of any fºr ign power. The
extent of their former trade may be in ºr, d from the major
part of the “Code of maritime laws" before us, of which most
of the sections consist entirely of details of the fixed rates
of passage-money from one place to another, throughout the
Malayan and Javanese coasts and islands. Much of this
trade is still carried on, and were it perfectly unshackled, it
might be conducted to a far greater extent.
The following abstract of the “Code of maritime laws”
will perhaps be deemed interesting.
“The five first sections, on freight and passage money, explain a mode
of trade existing to the present day, in the East. A person having goods,
either natural produce or manufactured, puts his articles on board a prahu."
going to any place where he expects to find a market; these goods pay
freight per centage, as laid down by the law; the man's passage money
is included in that charge, and during the voyago he takes part in rowing
or sailing the prahu, &c.
“The sixth section treats on the freight of money, which is either pice
or gold dust. If the amount is one hundred and ten reals or below that,
it pays no freight; but when above that sum, it pays one half the charge
per cent. on goods to the same place. -
“The seventh, eighth, ninth, and tenth sections treat on a mode of
shares, in trade and shipping, perhaps peculiar to these parts.--The Juro-
mudi and Jurobatu have the principal management in navigating the
prahu;-the former has charge of the hinder part of the prahu, and of see.
ing the water bailed out, which is done with a bucket and pully -the lat-
.." charge of the rigging and fore part of the prahu, under the Juro-
mucil. -
The cleventh, twelfth, and thirteenth sections, regulating the amount
of passage money, have, no doubt, been framed principally, if not exclu-
sively, in consideration of the practice of carrying slaves to distant parts,
for sale, since women are included, who otherwise never travel by water.
“The fourteenth, and last section, lays down the principle of a court of
native admiralty-law, but the latter part is vague as well as arbitrary.”
See Code of Bugis maritime laws, Introduction, pp. 1, ii, iii.
". Or Prow. Sinall native trading vessels are generally so called by the
Malays.
L


90 Corn Laws. JUNE,
The great simplicity of Bugis letters, gives an air of pecu-
liar neatness to the printing;-at first sight it might easily be
mistaken for short-hand writing. We are glad to find that
Mr. Thomsen intends to continue his researches in this lan-
guage.—We heartily wish him success.
CoRN laws—“He that withholdeth corn, the people shall
urse him ; but blessing shall be upon the head of him that
selleth it.” Prov. xi, 26.
On the 20th and 22d ult, the authorities of Canton issued two
proclamations concerning grain, the first referring to natives
hoarding up corn, and the other intended to encourage foreigners
to import rice. The latter was issued jointſy by the governor,
hieut.-governor, and hoppo, who “ apprehend " that the cus-
tom-house servants and others “extort fees beyond what the
law allows.” The total amount of duties sanctioned by the
emperor is, they say, only 620 and odd taels; all fees beyond
this “fixed rate" are strictly interdicted; and if hereafter, the
custom-house people “dare to offend, on its being discovered, their
crimes shall be punished.”—The other proclamation, which
was issued by the governor and lieut.-governor, is curious;
we give it entire.
“Paddy and rice, say they, are in daily use and absolutely
necessary among the people. It is requisite that they be in a
continual flow, as water from a spring, and be sold without
interruption to afford supplies. Hence to preserve grain in
order to supply the consumption, is not by law interdicted ;
but to hoard up grain in order to get an extraordinary price,
is punished as a crime. This arises from a sincere desire to
pay great attention to food for the people, and to interdict
nefarious merchants. Of rice, wheat, or any other grain, no
shop is permitted to have of each sort more than 160 shih.
To hoard up more than this quantity for the purpose of rais-
ing the price, is punishable the same as the cirime called
“opposition to government orders.' If there be a constant
flow kept up by selling, as much or as little may be possessed
as the merchant pleases. The intention of the law herein, if
carefully investigated, is, that if the people be but accommoda-
ted, so may the merchant.
“We the governor and lieut.-gov. have by inquiry ascertained,
that at Fuh-shan, in Nanhae district, (and several other places
throughout the province,) there have heretofore been large com-
panies of forestallers; who make general arrangements with the
retailers to enable them to hoard up grain. Every autumn
about the time of harvest, if the price of paddy be one tael,
the capitalist gives to the corn-dealer two mace as earnest
monev: and for the other eight mace he gives a bond bear-
ing interest at one per cent, per month. The accounts are to be
-


1833. Corn Laws, 91
made up in six months. If the profits are large they all re-
vert to the capitalist, and the corn-dealer gets only the interest.
“If the transaction turns out a losing one, the corn-dealer
pays interest on the money advanced. When the rice is
sold, bonds are given, the corn-dealer preserves his principal,
and the rich capitalist gets a daily interest to afford the means
of purchasing more rice. -
“The method of secreting the corn, is to make inside a large
granary with a high wall before it, and outside a small one
containing a thousand shih, or a few hundred, as it may
happen, to show to the examiners when they come. When
official examiners who are well acquainted with their illegal
proceedings come, the corn-dealers give a bribe secretly, and
both parties mutually protect each other. These are some of
the base illegalities by which forestallers of grain raise the
price to an extravagant height.
“We, the governor and lieut.-governor, found out these pro-
ceedings at an early period; and the reason why we have not
sent officers to seize the several hoards, was the consideration
that the country-people engaged in these transactions had no
other motive than to get gain, and that it has been the com-
mon practice for a long time past. And if they will but let
the stream flow by selling out continually to supply the poor
with food, government will not inquire deeply into the affair.
But if the said forestallers will not act thus, but as they have
generally done heretofore, when the grain is yet on the ground,
while the green blade has not yet become the yellow ear,
they shut up the doors of their hoards, and plot to obtain an
exorbitant price to satisfy their covetous hearts, without the
least regard to the detriment done to the people in reference
to their food, studying only cruel covetousness, it will be dif.
ficult to excuse them. Now is the time between the green blade
and the yellow ear, and we should by rights send officers
to examine strictly, but in clemency we first issue this admo.
nitory edict, and expressly give instruction to all shopmen
and corn-dealers. -
“Be it therefore known unto all you shopmen and traders,
that although your hoarding up grain, is only for the purpose
of getting an interest on your capital, still the high price dis-
tresses many poor people;—who knows the number! By one
man's anxiety to get exorbitant profits, thousands and tens
of thousands are in bitterness for want of food. The rich
man who harbors such a spirit, may rest assured that Heaven.
will not allow him to enjoy his solitary happiness. If he could
give his mind to benefit the age, although he should make but
small profits; he would cause food to flow, and Heaven will
certainly in secret help the felicitous man. By daily and monthly
accumulations he would certainly acquire original gains. Since he
would enjoy a good name; and avoid committing crimes—why be
afraid to act thus !


92 The Press. JUNE,
“If the grain-hoarder will but listen to our exhortations given
with a mother's tenderness, and sell his corn, it will be an
act of beneficence, just the same as if he had done it for
goodness' sake. His past misconduct in hoarding it will not at
all be inquired into. But if he disobeys, and still shuts up
his hoard, he despises the law for the sake of gain, and we
will secretly send officers, who will descend on his hoard like
a falling star, confiscate it to government, sell it to the peo-
ple, and severely punish him as he deserves. Profits you will
have none ; and punishment will overtake you. Meditate and
judge! Which will be gain, and which will be loss 1 Hasten
to change your scheme ! Do not invole yourselves in sorrow.
Let every one do what is right and tremblingly obey. Oppose
not. A special proclamation.” -
The Paess.—We hear with astonishment and regret that the
Albion Press, at Macao, from which were issued the Anglo-
Cºſmese Calendar for the current year, also a sermon, and four
numbers of a religious newspaper called “the Evangelist and
Miscellanea Sinica,” has been interaicted by civil authority
from publishing any uáre works. The Albion Press is one
of ſhe five presses which were mentioned in our last number,
and is the property we believe of Mr. J. R. Morrison. Two
reasons, we hear, are assigned for interdicting this press: first,
that the above-named publications contained doctrines contrary
to the Roman Catholic church; and second, that the printing
press is proſTſſed in all the Portuguese territories, unless pos.
sessing ſhe sanction of the -king of Portugal. The validity
and the justice of these reasons will be canvassed by a candid
and enlightened community in Europe, as well as throughout
India and the East. This thing has not been done in a corner.
The action is recorded on high ; and at that tribunal the parties
who have instigated and carried this measure into execution, must
stand and be judged.
We are the more surprised at such an exercise of authority,
because the publications in question make no mention of the
C (tholic church, and are printed in the English language; and
because it has been proved in the most satisfactory manner that
Macao is not the territory of the king of Portugal, that it belongs
to China, and that the Dutch, Spanish, English, and Amer-
icans live there by right derived from the Chinese.—At the
present day, in every quarter of the globe, except here and
there a narrow district, the liberty of the press is enjoyed. In
England and in America, the Catholic church is allowed, as
she ought to be, to publish whatever she pleases. In the Brit-
ish settlement nearest to us, “an apostolic missionary, canon
of Chartres, professor of theology and parish minister of Sin-
gapore,” recently published to the world that, the sovereign pontiff,
bishop of Rome, successor of the apostle St. Peter, and visible
, hief of the church of Jesus Christ on earth, is the only legiti-


1833. Religious Inulligence. - - - 93
~
male and supreme judge of all questions which regard faith,
good MANNERs, discipline, &c. These doctrines were put forth
in a Protestant paper, and in the face of a Protestant govern.
ment. And Mr. Courvezy and his brethren are at full liberty to
re-echo such sentiments as often as they choose. And now we
beg to ask, whether those who avow the Christian principle of
doing to others what they would have others do to them, are not
bound in justice to reciprocate the same full liberty l—“With
what measure you mete, it shall be measured to you again.” -
A MoWTHLY PRRIanic-AL in the Chinese language will, we
rejóce to know, soon be before the public. The work is being
executed in a very neat, and elegant style—far superior to
that of the Peking Gazette. From a perusal of the leading-
articles which are to form the first six numbers, we think the
work well designed to interest, gratify, and benefit those for
whose sake it is to be published. It is indeed an “excellent
way” of showing to the Chinese that foreigners are not their
enemies, nor inferior to themselves in “arts, sciences, and
principles.” We give the work our unqualified approbation, and
hearty support.
RELIGIOUS INTELLIGENCE.
The MALAys, according to sir
Thomas Stamford Raffles, built a
city and established themselves on
the peninsula of Malacca, as early
as the thirteenth century.TAfter sub-
duing Sumatra, where they seem to
have dwelt previously to settling in
Malacca, they became the masters
of the Sunda isles, the Philippines, the
Moluccas, and some other groups.
At that time they acted a splendid part
in the east; they planted colonies,
and carried on an extensive com.
merce. Great numbers of ships from
ina, Cochinchina, and Siam, filled
the harbors of Malacca.—They are
now divided into distinct tribes with-
out any general head. The great
body of the nation are slaves; their
masters are the nobility, who are
independent, and sell their services
to him who pays them best.
The Malays arc strong, nervous,
and of a dark brown color; their
hair is long, black and shining; the
nose large and flat, their eyes bril-
liant and full of fire. In general. they
are fond of navigation, war, plunder,
change of place, and of all daring
enterprises. They pay more regard
to their absurd laws of honor, than
to justice-or-mamry. They are
always armed, and are perpetually
at war among themselves, or enga-
ged in plundering their neighbors.
Such are the high-spirited, jealous,
and revengeful tribes. TWTo by the
power of #ºn.
§:# forgiving.
his [[TWOFFTOT reformation is
now birº.
and hope
++" will surely be accom.
TTShed.
The following brief account of the
Malay department of the mission at
Malacca, is from the Rey, Mr. Tom-
lin, and forms a #####".
which was published in our last num-
ber, concerning the Chinese schools
at the place.
profess the Mūſīāmme religion.
In prosecuting our labors among
the Malays, says Mr. T., there are
many difficulties to be encountered
peculiar to the followers of the false
º
-


94
JUNE,
Religious Intelligence.
prophet. In conversation on relig-
ious topics they are generally reserved
and suspicious ; in their attachment
to their own creed, bigoted and in.
exorable; and to read the Koran in a
language perfectly unintelligible to
themselves, is an attainment to which
they attach no inconsiderable merit.
The grand objection which they raise
t C. Christian religion is the funda-
mºſtãITEtfine of the Saviour's di.
viñTWTWHigh they regard in no other
g an blasphemy. They would ad-
mit that he was a prophet sent from
God to make known his will, and
to reform mankind, and that in proof
of his divine mission he was enabled
to work miracles; but to designate
him by the appellation “Anak Allah”
(the son of God) is a doctrine which
they oppose most strenuously, and
hesitate not to charge those who
maintain it, with polytheism.
It is however gratifying to see, not.
withstanding the tenacity with which
the Malays adhere to their own sys.
tem of delusion, that their prejudices
against the Christian religion are par.
tially giving way, and the Sacred
Scriptures, which at a former period
were either absolutely rejected or
received with a degree of suspicion,
are now in many instances perused
with apparent gratification.
A class of young men consisting
chiefly of the teachers of schools, has
been formed; they meet three even.
ings in the week, for the purpose
of learning (at ‘their own request)
the English language, and also of
j perusing the Sacred Scriptures in
the Malayan tongue, The plan
adopted at this #. is to pro-
ceed. regularly throug New Tes-
tament, limiting, our reading to one
chapter only each evening, and mak.
ing remarks on certain passages which
may require elucidation. The good
effects of this method of instruction
have already appeared, not only in
the increase of knowledge which the
teachers themselves acquire of divine
truth, but also in the decided pre-
erence which they give the Sacred
Scriptures to any other as school
lessons. In illustration of this fact
one instance, among many, may be
adduced.
The father of one of the teachers,
finding that his son had introduced
the Injil (N. T.) into his school,
became much incensed against him,
and ordered him to quit his house
and company. The teacher requested
the missionary to interfere in his be.
half, and to ascertain from the fath-
er what were his real intentions.
The latter, in compliance with the
wishes, of the missionary, called at
his residence, on which occasion he
objected most strenuously to the in-
troduction of the Scriptures into the
schools, alledging as a reason that
their religion was one, and ours
another. The conversation ended in
a proposal on his part, that either
the Sacred Scriptures should be ex-
cluded, or the school closed. The
teacher was made acquainted with
his father's sentiments, which instead
of intimidating him, tended rather to
confirm him in his decision of re-
taining the Scriptures at all hazards.
NQ resistance has since been offered,
and they are—stiſſ retained as school
ºnns S-----" "
The number of Mala -
siz. The aggregate number of chil-
dren, consisting of boys and girls,
is about 200, of which 180 regularly
attend. In their lessons the children
are examined once a week, by which
means, their progress is more easily
ascertained, and any negligence on
the part of the schoolmasters soon
detected. The girls are under the
superintendence of Mrs. T., many of
whom are able to read tolerably
well, and with a degree of fluency.
In addition to the weekly examina.
tions, the schools are visited daily by
a superintendant who calls over the
names of the scholars, and marks the
absentees. A short catechism in the
Malay has been prepared, which it
is intended shortly to introduce into
the schools.
Our labors among the adult po-
pulation have hitherto been confined
to occasional conversation with in-
dividuals, and the distribution of the
Scriptures and tracts. The fi s of
the town of Malacca have been sup-
plied from time to time with Christ.
ian books, which were in most cases
received with apparent gratitude. In
many instances, individuals have of
their own accord applied at the mis-
sionary's residence for copies of the
Scriptures. Amongst these applicants
was the nakodah of a native prow,
trading between Malacca and the
opposite coast of Sumatra. He had
on a former occasion, he said, ob.
tained several copies of the Scrip.
tures, as well as tracts, which he con.


1833.
95
Journal of Occurrences.
veyed to Siak in his prow, and dis-
tributed some of them among his
friends. The circumstance soon be-
came known to others of the natives,
who by their urgent requests suc-
ceeded to exhaust his stock, not leav-
ing him a single copy for himself.
We readily furnished him with a
fresh supply, for which he appeared
grateſul, and wtih apparent sincerity
invoked upon us the blessing of the
Almighty.
Another instance worthy of record,
may be here mentioned. A respect.
able Malay nakodah has been in
the habit of calling on us for me.
dicine, and readily enters into con-
versation about our religion. One
morning he entered our room, and
with a mild and serious countenance
requested to sit down and talk a.
while with us, hoping we would not
take it amiss if he put several ques-
tions about our religion. We shall
notice a few of the important in-
quiries he made during this visit.
“Does not the Koran,” said he,
“agree with your Scriptures, and com-
plete them 7” The Ko I replied,
differs widely from our sacred books,
, and contains many foolish things
mixed up with a little truth, evidently
proving it cannot be the word of
God. “But,” he inquired, “is not Mo-
hammed spoken of in your Scrip-
tures 7 was he not the son of Abra-
ham, and the last of all the prophets?
And Jesus Christ, did he not complete
what was left short, and so was
§. than all that preceded him 7”
ohammed, said I, is not once men-
tioned in our Scriptures. The Arabi-
ans and Jews were always two des.
tinct nations, though both descended
from Abraham. The latter were the
chosen people of God and the des.
cendants of Isaac, from whom Mo-
ses and all the prophets came : but
the Arabians were a rejected nation,
JOURNAL OF OCCURRENCES.
EonatesA.—The facts—and even
the reports which have come to our
ears, on this subject, during the month,
are very few. The Reb is said
still to continue with unabated vio.
lence. The respective colonists from
the provinces of Canton and Fuh.
keen, have taken up arms against
each other, the former having for
the descendants of Ishmael, the son
of an Egyytian bond woman, who
was disinherited and sent out into
the wilderness. And out of this na-
tion not even one prophet had risen
before the time of Mohammed, as
the Mohammedans themselves allow.
From His chosen people, the Jews,
God raised up his Son to be the Sa.
viour of them and of all the nations.
“How is he,” said the nakodak,
“who was the son of Mary, the son of
God? How do you know He takes
away our sins 7” The son of God, I
replied again, in order to redeem
men, took upon him our nature, be.
ing miraculously begotten by the pow.
er of the Holy Spirit. If we exam.
inc onr lives and hearts, we shall
find we are all great sinners in the
sight of God, grievous transgressors
of His holy laws, and therefore de.
serving of eternal punishment. This
I feel to be the state of my own
heart, and therefore I flee to Jesus,
who has suffered and died for my
sins upon the cross, and I find par.
don and peace in believing, which
I never felt before and am assured
of His mercy and love to me.—Na.
kodah, *…*.*.*.*H:
heart t sinful and wicked, an
thār-you-cannot be justified in the
presence of a holy and righteous God?
The nakodah here groaned and ac.
knowledged that he felt himself a
sinner, and seemed to rejoice in the
tender compassion and love of the
Saviour to sinners.
SIAM.—The Rev. J. T. Jones reach.
ed Bankok on the 25th of March.
He is now the only Protestant mis-
sionary in Siam.—Mr. Abeel, in very
ill health, sailed from Singapore for
Fngland on the 26th May, in the
British bark Cambridge. If his health
is restored, he expects, after visiting
America, to return again to the East.
the sake of revenge, enlisted under
the government. This is the amount
of our present information.
There is a statement in one of the
Peking Gazettes, of a body of troops,
marching through the province of
Honan to Fuhkeen, having kidnap.
ned 17 young children, from two of
the villages through which they pass.


96
Journal of Occurrences.
ed. The emperor orders strict in-
vestigation to be made, for the pre-
servation of military discipline.
Cochinchina.-In February last,
while admiral Le was cruising off
Hainan, he was overtaken by a storm,
his fleet scattered, and the vessels
obliged to take shelter in various
ports of that island. Some vessels
were lost; and it is now found that
one of those supposed to be lost,
was driven on the coast of Cochin-
china, to what port does not ap-
pear. This vessel contained two
commissioned officers and seventy
men. The king of Cochinchina, as
soon as he ascertained who they were,
supplied them with food and money;
giving five taels to each officer, and
two dollars each to the men. They
have lately returned, with a Cochin-
chinese escort; which the governor
has quartered on the priests of the
temple Hae-chwang-sze, on the Ho-
man side of the river, until he has
prepared an official reply to his Co.
chinchinese Majesty.
LiterARY GRADUATEs.-One of the
sons of the senior hong-merchant
Howqua, and one of Tingqua's, have
been promoted to the literary rank
of kenjiar with permission to pass
trials for the higher degree of tsin-
sze, at the immediately ensuing ex-
aminations. In this trial they have
both failed. The cause of their pro-
motion was their having paid large-
ly to the expenses of the Leônchow
rebellion.—We have heard a Chi-
mese compare the honorary gift of
a peacock's feather, so often conferred
by his imperial majesty, to a broom,
—made, he said, to sweep the iron
money chest. We fear this may be
said of most of the honorary gifts and
titles in China.
Peking GAzettes. In these are
as usual many references to the em.
peror's intended movements, such as
reviewing troops, visiting temples,
&c.; also, court orders, and ap-
pointment of officers. Among the
former, is an order to change the
winter for the summer dress; and
among the latter, the appointment of
three princes and nine great minis-
ters, to attend the plough, at the
annual ceremony of ploughing the
imperial field, “in the temple of the
earth.”
A ChrNese MohammedAN has re-
cently returned to Canton from a
pilgrimage to Mecca. He is a native
of Teentsin, in the province of Chih-
le,_a poor and ignorant man. About
three years ago he came down to Can-
ton and obtained a passage in a coun-
try ship to Bombay, whence he found
his way to the tomb of the Prophet.
In the same way he has now
cffected his return, bringing with
him a large store of Arabic books.
Though altogether unable to make
himself understood either by his fel.
low-countrymen on board the ship,
or by the Mohammedan Lascars, he
was on account of his pilgrimages
treated with respect and attention by
the latter. At Canton he joins the
society of his religious associates,
from whom the sanctity of his cha-
racter will insure to him support and
the means (which he does not possess)
of returning to his native province.
We have been informed—with what
degree of truth we are unable to
sav, that a considerable number of
pilgrims repair annually to Mecca;
but this is the only instance, of late
years, of such a pilgrimage being
made by sea, among men who pro-
ſess different religions, and speak
totally different languages.
- •e(s)0-
Postscript.—We learn from various sources, that in several of the prov-
inces of this empire many of the people are suffering extremely on ac-
count of the scarcity of provisions. Government officers are required in
times of scarcity to provide for the poor; but it not unfrequently happens
that thcy fail to do so; and in such cases poor people—-men, women, and
children—in companies of two or three hundred sometimes leave their homes
and wander through the country seeking for provisions. Such a company
recently passed through Canton.
We learn by the Singapore Chronicle of May 9th, that the Jºing of
Cochinchina is waging a hot persecution jºiº
#############. ite e French mission.
aries has fled to Siam, and obtained permission to repair to Bankok,


THE
chi Nese RE Pos I to R Y.
Vol. II.-July, 1833.-No. 3.
PENAL LAWS OF CHINA. *
W. Military Laws.-Under this division, the
protection of the palace is the first leading subject.
The person of the emperor and his apartments,
as well as those of the empress, empress-mother,
and empress-grandmother, are sacred. Whoever
unauthorizedly and without sufficient excuse enters
the imperial temple, burying-place, hall of sacri-
fices, palaces, gardens, or citadel of Peking, shall
be punished with the bamboo ; and whoever in like
manner enters apartments in the actual occupation
of the emperor shall suffer death by being stran-
gled. No person shall presume to travel on the roads
or to cross the bridges which are expressly provided
for his majesty, except ou!y such as belong to his
retinue, who are “necessarily permitted, to proceed
upon the side-paths thereof.” During the imperial
journeys all the soldiers and people, except those
who are attached to his royal person, must make
way for his approach; and whoever fails to do so,
and intrudes within the lines, shall be condemned
to death. And all persons who enter any of the
imperial inclosures must be furnished with licenses,
and be kept continually under the strictest watch
* Concluded from page 73.
xt


98 Penal Laws of China. July,
Notwithstanding all their precautions, the emperors
have sometimes found themselves in imminent dan-
ger, though their subjects, it must be confessed,
have oftener been exposed to the greater danger;
and hence the common saying among the people
that, being by the side of an emperor is like sleeping
by the side of a tiger.
Several sections refer to the government of the
army. Military forces, except in cases of great
emergency, cannot be employed without the em-
peror's permission; and every movement of the in-
perial troops must be immediately reported to the
commander-in-chief, to the Board of War, and to
the emperor.—All those who betray the secrets of
state, or fail in their military operations, or are in
any way unfaithful to their trust, shall be severely
punished, according to their rank and the enormity of
their crimes.—The regulations of the nocturnal po-
lice, which are to be observed in all the cities and
fortifications of the empire, strictly prohibit persons
“from stirring abroad at night,” from twelve minutes
past nine o'clock in the evening till twelve minutes
past five in the morning, except only on public
business, or private affairs of an urgent nature,
such as sudden illness, births, deaths, and burials.
The gates of cities are to be closed and bolted at
an early hour. - t
In order to secure the protection of the frontier,
no person is allowed, without a regular license, to
pass any of the barriers or posts of government; and
whoever does so without submitting himself to ex-
amination, shall be punished with blows; and “if
such individual proceeds afterwards so far as to
have communication with the foreign nations be-
yond the boundaries, he shall suffer death by being
strangled.” Passports must never be granted to
exiles, or residents expressly fixed by law; nor
must those who are regularly furnished with li-
censes be unnecessarily detained. All persons who
seek to carry the productions and inventions of the


1833. Penal Laws of China. 09
country out to strangers beyond the frontiers, with
all those who are convicted “either of introducing
themselves or others into the empire, or of having
plotted the means of removing themselves ºr cº-
ers out of the empire, shall all, without any dis-
tinction between principals and accessories, be con-
demned to suffer death by being beheaded.” More
effectually to prevent intercourse with foreigners
by sea, the laws forbid the people to build upon
or inhabit any of the small islands along the coast,
which are at any distance from the main land.
Notwithstanding these prohibitions, great numbers
of the Chinese annually leave their country; and
the small islands are the chief or sole retreat of
thousands.
The laws require that a due supply of “military
horses and cattle” be provided for the army; and
every officer in charge of the rearing and feeding
of such—“horses, horned cattle, camels, mules,
asses, and sheep,”—and who fails to keep them
in proper order and to secure a proper increase,
shall be punished with the bamboo ! Whoever
clandestinely, that is without permission of the go-
vernment, kills his own horses, horned cattle, ca-
mels, or asses, shall be punished with the bamboo.
Whoever has vicious and dangerous animals must
set a mark on them and tie them up ; but if,
from neglect of so doing “any person is killed
or wounded, the owner of the animal shall be
obliged to redeem himself from the punishment of
man-slaughter or man-wounding, by the payment
of the legal fine.” • .
Expresses and public posts are designed solely
for the conveyance of official dispatches. There
are messengers appointed to carry dispatches to
all the provinces and districts of the empire, who
are required to travel at the fixed rate of 300 le,
or Chinese miles, in a day and a night; and “if
through dilatoriness they exceed the time to the
extent of an hour and a half, they shall be punished


100 Penal Laws of China. JULY,
with twenty blows; and the punishment shall in-
crease by a progressive ratio of ten blows for each
additional delay of an hour and a half, until it
amounts to fifty blows.”—It is added in a note by
the translator that, “although the distance from
Peking to Canton by land exceeds 1200 English
miles, governmental dispatches have been known to
arrive in twelve days, and within a period of thir-
ty days answers and instructions have frequently
been received by the magistrates from the court,
even upon affairs of no extraordinary importance.”
But ordinary dispatches are usually carried at a
much slower rate; the Peking gazettes for example,
are usually thirty days in reaching Canton.—Offi-
cers of government, it is stated in the Ta Tsing
Hwuy-teen, are allowed ninety days to travel from
Peking to Canton. -
VI. CRIMINAL LAws. This is the most important
division of the penal code; it consists of eleven
books, and one hundred and sixty-nine sections;
many of these minor divisions however refer to
the same subject, and will be noticed in the
same paragraph. It should be remarked here al-
so that the arrangement of the code is in many
parts bad—at least that it differs widely from that
which would be deemed the most fit and proper
by European writers. For example, “high treason,”
“rebellion and renunciation of allegiance,” and
“sorcery and magic” are treated of under the
head of theft and robbery. We quote the principal
paragraphs concerning high treason :- -
“High treason, is either treason against the state, by an
attempt to subvert the established government; or treason
against the sovereign, by an attempt to destroy the palace in
which he resides, the temple in which his family is worship-
'ed, or the tombs in which the remains of his ancestors are
deposited. Ahl persons eonvicted of having been principals or
accessories to the actual or designed commission of this, heinous
crime, shall suffer death by a slow and painful execution,
“All the male relations in the first degree, at or above the
age of 'sixteen, of persons convicted as aforesaid; namely, the


1833, Penal Laws of £hina | () I.
father, grandfather, sons, grandsons, paternal uncles, and their
sons respectively, shall, without any regard to the place of re-
sidence, or to the natural or acquired infirmities of particular
individuals, be indiscriminately beheaded. All the other male
relations at or above the age of sixteen, however distant their
relationship, and whether by blood or by marriage, shall likewise
suffer death, by being beheaded, if they were living under the
same roof with the treasonable offender, at the time the
offense was committed. The male relations in the first degree,
under the age of sixteen, and the female relations in the first
degree, of all ages, shall be distributed as slaves to the great
officers of state. The property of every description belonging
to the treasonable offenders shall be confiscated for the use
and service of government......All persons who, when privy to
the commission of, or to the intent to commit the crime of
high treason, willfully conceal and connive at the same, shall
be beheaded.
“Any person who shall apprehend, and deliver into the
custody of a magistrate, an offender against this law, shall be
employed forthwith under government according to his quali-
fications; or if already an officer in the employ of government,
he shall be suitably promoted; and in every case he shall be
rewarded with the possession of the whole of the confiscated
property of the offender.....If the relations of persons intending
to commit the aforesaid crime, shall, previous to the commission
of any overt act, deliver them up to the officers of justice,
those who are so delivered up, and their several relations, shall
all of them be entirely pardoned.”
All persons who renounce their country and al-
legiance, or devise the means thereof, shall be be-
headed; no distinction shall be made between prin-
cipals and accessories.—All persons convicted of
writing or editing books of sorcery and magic, or
of employing spells and incantations, in order to
agitate and influence the minds of the people, shall
be beheaded.—All persons guilty of stealing the
consecrated oblations offered up by the emperor
to the spirits of Heaven and Earth, or any of the
sacred utensils, clothes, meat-offerings, and precious
stones used on such occasions; also all persons
guilty of stealing an imperial edict or official 'seal
or stamp, shall be beheaded. In these cases also
no distinction shall be made between principals and
accessories. “Stealing in general” is punishable
with fifty blows. Stealing the keys of the gates


1:32 Penal Laws of China. JULY,
of forts and cities, as well as the stealing of mili-
tary weapons and accoutrements is punishable with
blows and banishinent. In certain instances those
who are guilty of stealing are branded on their
arms with the mark of “thief.” When the property
stolen exceeds in value 120 taels, or Chinese ounces
of silver, the thief or thieves shall suffer death by
being strangled. -
In general, “a private and concealed taking ”
constitutes a theft; and “an open and violent tak-
ing,” a robbery. All persons concerned in the actual
commission of highway robbery shall be beheaded;
and all those who are found guilty of taking un-
lawful possession of the property of others, in open
day and by forcible means, shall, however small
the amount of property taken, be punished with one
hundred blows and banishment for three years.
Obtaining property under false pretenses is punish-
able the same as theft; and all those who are
guilty of extorting property from any individual
shall be punished one degree more severely than
in ordinary cases of theft.
Concerning kidnapping, or the unlawful seizure
and sale of free persons,—a practice more or less
prevalent throughout every part of the country, we
make the following brief quotations.
“All persons who are guilty of entrapping by means of
stratagems, or of enticing away under false pretenses, a free
person, and of afterwards offering for sale as a slave such free
person, shall,—whether considered as principals or as ac-
cessories, and whether successful or not, in effecting such in-
tended sale, be severely punished with a hundred blows, and
banished perpetually to the distance of 3000 le. All those who
are guilty of entrapping or enticing away any persons in the
manner aforesaid, in order to sell them as principal or inferior
wives, or for adoption as children or grandchildren, shall if con-
sidered as principals, be punished with a hundred blows and three
years' banishment.....The persons kidnapped, shall not in any
of the aforesaid cases be liable to any punishment, but shall
be restored without delay to their respective families.
“All such persons also, as receive the children of free parents,
upon the faith of a promise to educate and adopt them as
their own, and nevertheless sell them afterwards to others,


1833. Penal Laws of China. 103
shall be punished according to this law, except it those cases
in which it can be proved that a pecuniary consideration was
given and received in the first instance.....Any person who sells
his children or grandchildren against their consent, shall be
punished with eighty blows. Any person who in the like
manner sells his younger brother or sister, or his nephew or
niece, his own inferior wife, or the principal wife of his son,
or his grandson, shall be punished with eighty blows, and
two years' banishment.”
Disturbing graves is a crime of frequent occur-
rence. Whoever is guilty of breaking up another
man's burying-place until the coffins become visi-
ble, shall be punished with one hundred blows and
perpetual banishment; and whoever, after having
been guilty of the aforesaid, uncovers the corpse
shall be strangled. If a father destroys the corpse
of his son he shall be punished with eighty blows;
but whoever is guilty of destroying, or mutilating,
or casting away, the unburied corpse of an elder
relation, shall be beheaded. Several minor crimes,
such as stealing bricks, clothes, and other articles
from a burying-place, are punished less severely.
Destroying the life of man, or homicide, in its
several degrees of guilt, is the subject of several
important sections. The original contriver of pre-
concerted homicide shall suffer death by decapita-
tion; and the accessories, who contribute to the
perpetration of the murder, shall be strangled;
other accessories, who do not actually join in the
perpetration of the deed, shall be perpetually ba-
nished. . “All persons guilty of killing in an affray,
so as to kill, , though without any ea press or im-
plied design to kill,” shall, whether the blow was
struck with the hand or the foot, with a metal
weapon, or with any instrument of any kind, suf-
fer death, by being strangled.” All persons play-
ing with the fist, with a stick, or with any weap-
on, “in such a manner as obviously to be liable
by so doing to kill, and who shall thus kill
some individual, or who by mistake kill one person


1 ()4 Penal Laws of China, JULY,
for another, shall suffer death. But persons who kill
purely by accident, that is, in all those cases where
there could have been no previous thought or inten-
tion of doing an injury, shall be permitted to redeem
themselves by the payment of a fine. Also, when
a principal or inferior wife is discovered by her hus-
band in the act of adultery, if such husband, at the
very time he discovers, kills the adulterer, or adulter-
ess, or both, he shall not be punished. Any individual
who is guilty of killing three or more persons,
all of whom were relations of the first degree, or
inmates of one family; and also any person who,
with an intent to mangle and divide the body of
the deceased for magical purposes, is guilty of
killing any individual, shall suffer death by a
slow and painful execution. All parricides like-
wise shall suffer death in the same manner; and
even should the criminal die in prison, the slow
and painful execution shall take place on his life-
less body' -
All persons rearing venomous animals, preparing
poisonous drugs, or using magical writings and
imprecations with a view to occasion the death
of any person therewith ; together with all those
who are guilty of alarming to death with violent
threats, in order to accomplish an object criminal
and unlawful in itself, shall suffer death.—An un-
skillful practitioner of medicine, who administers
drugs, or performs operations with the puncturing
needle, contrary to the established rules and prac-
tice, and thereby, though without any design to
injure, kills the patient, shall be allowed to
redeem himself from the punishment of homicide,
but shall be obliged to quit his profession for ever.
If it shall appear, however, that he intentionally devi-
ates from the established rules and practice, and
aggravates the complaint in order to extort more
money for its cure, and the patient dies, the money
shall then be considered as stolen, and the me-
dical practitioner shall be decapitated.


1833. Penal Laws of China, 105
If a wife strikes and abuses her husband's
father or mother, grandfather or grandmother, and
the husband, instead of accusing her before a ma-
gistrate, kills her in consequence of such offense,
he shall be punished with one hundred blows. But
if a wife having been struck and abused by her
husband, and in consequence thereof, kills herself,
the husband shall not be responsible. Whoever is
guilty of killing his son, his grandson, or his slave,
and attributing the crime to another person, shall
be punished with seventy blows, and one and a half
year's banishment.
Quarreling and fighting are strictly interdicted
in the penal code. In all ordinary cases those who
are guilty of these crimes are punished with the
bamboo;—for striking with the hand or foot, the
punishment is 20 blows; for striking with a cud-
gel, 30 blows are inflicted; the offense of “tearing
away more than an inch of hair,” is punished with
50 blows; that of breaking a tooth, a toe, a fin-
ger, or any bone of the body, wounding an eye, or
disfiguring the nose and ears, subjects the offender
to a punishment of 100 blows. Striking individ-
uals of the imperial blood, or any of the ordinary
and extraordinary officers of government, is pu-
inishable with blows and banishment. Slaves who
intentionally strike their masters shall be behead-
ed. A husband shall not be punished for striking
his first wife, “unless the blow produces a cutting
wound;" but the wife who strikes her husband,
shall be liable to one hundred blows. Any person
who is guilty of striking his father, mother, pater-
nal grandfather or grandmother; and any wife who
is guilty of striking her husband's father, mother,
paternal grandfather or grandmother, shall be be-
headed. If a father, mother, paternal grandfather,
or grandmother, chastises a disobedient child or
grandchild in a severe and uncustomary manner, -
so that the child or grandchild dics, the party so
offending shall be punished with one hundred blows,
N


100 Penal Laws of China. July,
Abusive language is disallowed by the laws; and
all those who offend in this respect are punishable
with blows, banishment, or death, according to the
circumstances of the case. A child or grandchild,
who is guilty of addressing abusive language to
his or her father or mother, paternal grandfather or
grandmother; or a wife who is guilty of address-
ing abusive language to her husband's father or
mother, paternal grandfather or grandmother, shall
suffer death by being strangled; provided always,
however, that the persons abused, themselves com-
plain to the magistrates, and had themselves heard
the abusive language which had been addressed
to them. Slaves guilty of addressing abusive lan-
guage to their masters, shall likewise be strangled.
All the subjects of the empire may by “indict-
ments and informations,” seek redress for their
grievances. False, malicious, and anonymous in-
dictments; bribery and corruption; and forgeries
aud frauds, are strictly interdicted. The accuser
in all cases is held responsible for the truth of the
charges which he may bring forward publicly before
a magistrate; and the magistrate is bound to listen
to every complaint which is regularly brought be-
fore him. And not only bribes, but every species
of pecuniary over-charge; and “presents of all kinds,
made to civil and military officers upon taking
charge of their governments, eatables only excepted,”
are disallowed. Further; and persons in authority
when guilty of accepting, at any time, from the
inhabitants of their district, presents consisting of
the produce or manufacture thereof, shall be pu-
nished, at the least, with forty blows, and the giver
shall suffer punishment less than the receiver only
by ten blows. “Nevertheless, all presents of eatables
to such persons, when upon any official progress ;
and presents of all kinds, when made to them by
their relations, on particular occasions, shall be
exempted ſrom the prohibitions and penalties of
this law.” . .


18:33. Penal Lau's of China. | ()7
The laws relative to incest and adultery require
that all criminal intercourse with a married or
unmarried women shall be punished with the bain-
boo; that the “violation of a married or an un-
married woman—that is to say a rape, shall be
punished with death by strangulation ; and that
criminal intercourse with a female under twelve
years of age, shall be punished the same as a
rape.”—It is added, in one of the supplementary
clauses, that “depraved and disorderly persons
conspiring together, and seizing on the son or
relative of an honest family, in order to commit
an unnatural crime, shall, whether their guilt he
aggravated by the subsequent crime of murder or
not, suffer death by being beheaded immediately
after conviction, as in the case of vagabond out-
laws.” And “if no conspiracy had been formed,
but the additional guilt of murder incurred ; or if
a boy under ten years of age had been seduced
away for such purpose,” the criminal shall be be-
headed. . A husband consenting to, or conniving
at, the adultery of his principal or any other of
his wives, shall, together with the adulterer and
adulteress, be punished with the bamboo. And any
individual compelling his principal or inferior wife,
or any female educated under his roof, to engage
in a criminal intercourse, shall with the adulterer
or fornicator be punished with eighty blows, but
the woman shall be considered innocent.
Any person who accidentally sets fire to his own
house shall be punished with at least 40 blows;
if the fire reaches other buildings, he shall receive
50 blows; if it causes the death of any person,
100 blows shall be inflicted; and death shall be
the punishment if it reaches any of the imperial
buildings. Willful and malicious house-burning, is
a more heinous crime, and the laws mete out for
it a severer punishment. . .
Police officers, and the soldiers and attendants
employed on the public service, are required, when


108 Penal Laws of China. JUI.Y,
any cases are brought to their motice, to pursue
and arrest the offenders immediately ; and if they
fail to seize the offenders within a given time,
they shall be punished with the bamboo, or by a
forfeiture of their salary. All ordinary prisoners
charged with offenses punishable with banishment
or death, and not privileged to consideration of
their rank, tender youth, extreme age, or bodily
infirmity, must always be strictly confined, and in
certain cases be fettered and handcuffed. They
must also (according to the tenor of the law) be
duly supplied with food and clothes—by their friends
when they are able, if otherwise, by government;
and they must not in any case be maltreated by
the jailors or others in whose custody they may
be placed.
Torture is not to be used in the judicial ez-
amination of those belonging to any of the eight
privileged classes, or of those who have attained
their seventieth year, or of those who have not ex-
ceeded their fifteenth year, or finally of those who
labor under any permanent disease or infirmity. In
all these cases the offenses shall be determined
on the evidence of facts and witnesses alone.
The examination of prisoners must, generally speak-
ing, be strictly confined to the subject of the
information laid against them.—After a trial is
concluded, and the facts alleged are fully sub-
stantiated, the accusers shall forthwith be dismiss-
ed and absolved from all further responsibility. In
all tribunals of justice, sentence shall be pronounced
against offenders, according to all existing laws, stat-
utes, and precedents applicable to the case, when
considered collectively. After a prisoner has been
tried, and convicted of any offense punishable with
temporary or perpetual banishment, or with death,
he shall, in the last place, be brought before the
magistrate, together with his nearest relations and
family, and informed of the offense whereof he
stands convicted, and of the sentence intended to


18:33. Penal Laws of China. |(}{}
be pronounced against him; their acknowledgement
of its justice, or their protest against its injus-
tice, shall then be taken down in writing; and
in every case of their refusing to admit the justice
of the sentence, their protest shall be made the
ground of another and more particular investiga-
tion. A false judgment can be reversed only by
an appeal to the emperor.—Female offenders can-
not be imprisoned except in capital cases, or cases
of adultery. In all other cases, they shall re-
main in the custody of their husbands, or other
relations, or neighbors, who shall, upon every such
occasion, be held responsible for their appear-
ance at the tribunal of justice, when required.
WII. Laws REI.Ative to PUBLic works. This
is the least important division of the penal code.
Public benevolent institutions are scarcely known
in this country; and the public works which do
exist are designed to serve chiefly, not to say en-
tirely, the purposes of government. It should not
be forgotten, however, that this “patriarchal go-
vernment,” consisting of Tartar conquerors, never
fails to provide, and with “a mother's tender-
ness,” for all the wants and necessities of “the
simple and unprivileged ” people !
All the public residences, granaries, treasuries,
and manufactories; embankments of rivers, roads,
and bridges; and also the walls of cities, and
other fortified places, must frequently be examined,
and always kept in due repair; but no new struc-
tures can be raised, no new works undertaken,
or old ones repaired, without special permission.
Every new work of whatever description, must in
every respect conform to the “established rules and
customs.” Any deviation from this law is pu-
nishable with forty blows, and in extreme cases
with perpetual banishment. Any private individ-
ual who shall be convicted of manufacturing for
sale, silks, satins, or other similar stuffs, according


1 * * * *.* tº 1.au's of China. July,
, , º, onlbuted pattern of the “dragon” or the
..,..., -which are for imperial use,_shall be
........ded with one hundred blows, and the goods
o, Jutiscated ; and any individual who is guilty
o, purchasing and actually wearing such prohibited
studs, shall be punished with the bamboo and
banishment. - - - . . . .
 have now reached the end of sir George
Staunton's very faithful translation of the Penal
Code. “The laws of a nation form the most in-
structive portion of its history.” To those who
wish to become acquainted with the habits, man-
mers, and customs of the Chinese, the Ta Tsing
Leuh-le is one of the most valuable works that
can be presented. Both in respect to the sub-
jects of which it treats, and the pre-eminent
authority which it possesses, it ranks second to no
work which the Chinese have produced. It is
not the work of a few individuals; nor the pro-
duction of a single age. There can be little doubt
that many of these laws had their origin in very
remote periods; yet still they are not immutable.
They recognize no higher authority, and are
based on no more permanent power, than the will
of one man; though that is supreme, and to it
“all beneath the azure skies" must bow. The
emperor has no equal ; and consequently no inter-
national law can exist within his dominions. All
beyond the limits of his empire are thieves and
robbers—are rude and barbarous, and aliens from
the Middle Kingdom.—The laws of this land, being
dependent on the will of the monarch, have gone
into disuse with every declining dynasty, and with
every rising one they have been modeled and fram-
ed anew. Hence many of the “established usages
and old customs” are of very recent origin; and
somo of them are wholly unsupported by imperial
authority, - . . . . . . . . . . -
Many of the laws which constitute the penal
code are just and good : the exceptions to this
- *


1833. IIistory of China. | | |
remark however, are not few. It would be inter-
esting to compare these laws with those of the
ancient and modern nations of the west. Though
to us this code appears very defective, yet by the
natives it is viewed in a different light; they often
speak of it with pride and admiration; “all they
seem in general to desire is, its just and impartial
execution, independent of caprice and uninfluenced
by corruption.” "
MISC E L L A NIE S.
Remarks on the history of China during the middle ages, from
the dynasty of Tsin, A. D. 280, to the commencement of the
Yuen dynasty in 1279–(Concluded from page 85.)
We might now have expected the general dawn on this land,
of the inextinguishable light of the world, and the commence-
ment of the universal reign of truth. Yet China, at that time
next, in civilization to Greece and Rome, has remained sta-
tionary, yea has even receded in knowledge and virtue. The
heroic ages in which literature flourished have passed away,
and the imitative genius of the nation is seen to direct itself
only to, the multiplication and modification of already existing
arts and knowledge. The invariable rules of formality bind
down the human spirit, whose native elementis IEEEdom. The
history-is-barreñTöf great events, for the nation is sleeping
under the opiate of ſancied s iority;—there is nothing more
to learn, nothing to improve, nothing to invent; all that is
valuable in thought is stereotyped, and henceforth we may
look in vain to the voluminous productions of the modern lit-
erati, for one new idea. Even the classical expressions in
this formal language are under the control of the ancients.
Thus have the Chinese in a manner ceased to be an inde-
pendent nation, their slavery to antiquity i n the yoke
of foreign oppressors, since the ſiſter may be shaken off, and
cam mever, enslave the immortal spirit. - -
. The dynasties , during these middle ages, were of short
continuance, and but a small number of the emperors were
great men. Whilst the western world was made subject
to Christ, the son of God, China remained prostrate before
idols of wood and stone. During the period in which the an-
cient poetic systems of idolatry were overthrown, when the altars


| 12 Remarks on the July,
of Jupiter and the ſanes of Apollo disappeared, China was
enslaved alternately by Taouisin and Budhism. None of their
absurd doctrines were wanting in votaries, the emperors thein-
selves occasionally espoused them; yet amidst all the innova-
tions and changes, the divine rays of Christianity did not pe-
netrate these dark regions.—“O the depth of the riches both
of the wisdom and knowledge of God! How unsearchable are
his judgments, and his ways past finding out! For who hath
known the mind of the Lord, or who hath been his coun-
selor "
The whole western world was in convulsions during these ages,
yet the same cause whicn overwhelmed those long established
empires, preserved China from utter ruin; but of this we pro-
pose to speak hereafter. When the dark ages overspread and
enveloped the mind of all Europe, China still remained what
it was. Though not free from revolutions, yet the changes
were transitory, and the old model of perfect government was
only retouched and shaded anew.—After these general aud
preliminary remarks, we shall enter into a few details.
Woo te, the founder of the Tsin dynasty, or rather the
western Tsin, as distinguished from fiTlater family of the same
name, was a magnanimous prince, and the son of a general.
He only could withstand the power of the tributary chieſs; his
successors were all involved in war with them, in which they
often suffered defeat. None of these emperors could assert un-
disputed sovereignty; none of them performed any great ex-
ploits. When this family had retained the throne 140 years,
Lew-yu, a man of mean birth, after killing Kung te the last
emperūr of the eastern Tsin, grasped the reins of the empire.
With him commences the first Sung dynasty, A. p. 420.
He fixed his residence at Nanking. This, as well as the foll,
following dynasties, was of short duration; they are called by
the Chinese historians, the “five generations.” “Two sovereigns
then claimed the empire, the one residing in the north, the
other in the south; and the wars between these two monarchs
are the most remarkable events of the period. The royal
family was driven from the throne by Seanu Taouching, who
murdered the last emperor Shun te, and founded the Tse dy-
nasty, A-B-479.
The Tse, Leãng, Chin and Suy dynasties were equally des-
titute of strength with their predecessors. During the contin-
uance of Tse, mention is made of a philosopher who taught
materialism, and the morality of is "...º.º.º.
rāti generally have too strongly adhered to these doctrines,
and even without a teacher have rejected the few expressions
in their classics which oppose them. Woo te, the founder
of the Leãng dynasty, was a strict votary of Budhism, and,
which is the first instance of this kind, styled himself a priest.
It is not unlikely that istianity in a debased form, mº
its appearance in China about this time he Nestorians,


1833. History of China. 113
persecuted by their own brethren of the west, sought an asy-
lum and found it on the western frontiers of China. From
thence it is very probable that they spread themselves eastward;
but we possess no authentic records upon this subject.
Whilst tracing this part of the history, we are strongly re-
minded of the weak Byzantine emperors in the decline of their
power. A succession of worthless monarchs occupied the throne
of China, each rendering both his dignity and nation contemp-
tible, till he was removed by assassination to make way for a
more unworthy successor. The founder of the Suy dynasty,
however, presents a laudable exception; he seems to have been
a great prince, but the times were so degenerate, that he could
effect very little towards a reformation.
As there were numerous rival chiefs, and opposing parties,
at this time, there jS consequently much confusion in the his-
tory. Wei, Leãng, Tse, Chin, Chow and Suy, are also called
the six dynasties, some of which are not admitted into the ca-
talogues of Chinese annals; the northern emperors are merely
mentioned, and their actions only slightly noticed. This con-
fusion is increased by the assumed denomination of the respec-
tive monarchs, the kwo havu,”—which was often changed dur-
ing the lifetime of an emperor; and also by the use of the
name which he receives after his death. Many emperors bore
the same posthumous name, which is the reason that foreigners,
as well as natives, are apt to mistake them for each other.
To prevent all misunderstanding, we shall give the names of
the several dynasties. till the invasion of the Mongols, from
A. D. 618 to 1270. They are Tang, How-Leãng, How-Tang,
How-Tsin, How-Han, How-Chow and Sung, all within a period
of 662 years.
The most celebrated among them doubtless is that of Tang,
which ruled from 618 to 906. The Chinese to the present
time occasionally style themselves Tang jin, or “men of Tang.”
The second emperor, Taetsung, appears as a luminary
amongst the host of his unworthy predecessors in the preceding
dynasties. He was a -man of vigorous mind, and of great ap-
plication to business; he therefore reformed abuses, and brought
back the glorious days of antiquity, never being dismayed by
obstacles.—During his reign, the first Nestorian Christians ap-
pear to have arrived at the court, and come to the notice of
the emperor. He is also said to have erected a church for
them; and we see nothing improbable in the fact. Though
the Chinese historians do not speak of any religious creed,
as having made its first appearance at this time, they mention
the arrival of embassadors from the west, whose appearance
- - i -
* It ought to be the plan generally adopted in Chinese history to give
the name of the emperor's reign, rather than the designation which is as-
signed him at his death in the temple of his ancestors; for why should
we not in this imitate the Chinese government, which constantly uses the
former name, even when reterring to emperors long since dead
U -


{ 14 Remarks on the JUly,
was extraordinary. This fact is corroborated by several ac-
counts written by contemporaries in Syriac, Arabic, and Latin,
and by the inscription" found upon a stone table at Sengan,
the capital of Shense.
Besides we know, that the Nestorians had made numerous
converts among the Tartars of the deserts which border upon
China; and every reader has heard of “Prester John, the
rich and magnificent prince of a Tartar tribe.” But beyond
this we know scarcely anything of the further progress of
Christianity here. Surely that heavenly Power, which over-
comes the world, and subjects it to Christ, when exerted by
the true believer, was not the portion of the Nestorians who
then entered China. They may have made many proselytes,
and this is nowhere easier than in China; but they made
very few converts to the Lord. Wherever the heart is imbued
with divine grace, wherever the Holy Spirit is shed abroad,
there Christianity takes root, and only there. If such had been
the case at that time, or even had the Bible been given to
the Chinese, those traces of early Christianity would not have
vanished so quickly and so utterly.
During this reign, the first notice is recorded of the Coreans,
a people very probably sprung from the same stock as the Chi-
nese. The latter had already extended their dominion to the
distant shores of the Corean peninsula.
The emperor Heentsung of this dynasty, established the
celebrated Hanlin college, a national institute, and the focus
of all Chinese learning. The doctors who compose its members
are eligible to the highest dignities of the empire, and even
without any promotion they perform the nost important func-
tions. What learned men might this college have produced, if
the naturally good understanding of the Chinese had not been
obscured by ancient prejudices and dogmas, or their capacities
been ſettered by old usages. Yet to the great detriment of
national improvement, we see hundreds of the most talented
men whom China can boast, and who have successively fill-
ed these collegiate ranks only re-echoing what the ancient sages
said. Beyond this, they know nothing; whoever has committed
most of these sayings to memory, is the ablest man; whoever
can dress what he has learned, in the most pertinent language,
is the greatest genius.
When Taetsung, the eighth emperor, reigned, the Tartar
tribes, who from time immemorial had been in the practice of
making inroads, became victorious over the Chinese, took the
imperial residence, and made dreadful carnage. The success
of these hordes may be principally ascribed to the disunion of
the Chinese tributary princes, who often put the emperor at
defiance, and engaged in war against their sovereign.
'The greatest—proof of a weak monarch is exhibited, when
* Respecting this inscription, see our first volume pp. 44 and 449. We
propose to recur to this subject in a future number,


1833. History of China. 115
women and eunuchs assume his power. During the latter part
of this dynasty, it appears that the numerous eunuchs establish-
ed themselves as the sole arbiters in all important governmental
matters. At first they were the humble servants of the emperor,
always ready to execute his commands at any sacrifice; but
they very soon became the masters, selected the emperors, were
their absolute counselors, in fact only wanted the name of
sovereigns. The great distress occasioned by this misrule, and
the reduced condition of the empire, can easily be imagined,
without entering into any ſull details. If an emperor arose
who possessed sufficient energy to oppose the current, he soon
died, and left the empire to a a weak successor. In such times
of general degeneracy, superstition gained ground, and the weak-
minded rulers were amused by the idle dreams of corrupting
delusions. One of the emperors was anxious to preserve a
finger of Budha as a relic, and brought it in a great proces-
sion to his capital. Another tried to become immortal by tak-
ing a draught of immortality from one of the Taou sect,-
but died instantly.—Such were the rulers of such an empire;
its fall, like that of all similar states, was sudden ; the cowardly
eunuchs were killed, the last emperor of this line was slain,
and his general Choo-wan ascended the throne.
Corea, which had hitherto submitted tamely to the Chinese
government, now sent a number of colonists to Leaoutung,
which at present is called Fungteen, and is the country from
whence the present reigning dynasty originated. These settlers.
caused much annoyance to the Chinese government, which in
its degenerate state was unable to cope with so petly a nation.
The five dynasties which are already enumerated as fol-
lowing the Tang, can boast of no hero or great emperor.
The historians call them the latter woo tae, or “five dynas-
ties.” Under the emperor Mingtsung of the How-Tang line,
printing was invented. The simple method of printing books
from wooden blocks upon which the characters are engraved
has continued in use among the Chinese till this time, and
has proved a great blessing to the nation. Under the How-
Tsin line, the Tartars gained a firm footing in Pih-chih-le
province. This was no ways extraordinary, since even in
Mingtsung's reign, China had acknowledged a “barbarian” as
emperor. Torn by internal discord, the country could not
oppose any of its determined foreign enemies. The colonists
of Leaoutung repeated their inroads upon China incessantly,
and the empire bowed to every usurper. Under such circum-
stances, there was neither order nor law, and the tributary chiefs
were only desirous to grasp a larger share of the sovereignty,
Such was the state of China when the family of Sung-as-
cended the throne, and reigned prosperously many years. The
founder of this line was called by common suffrage to the
throne. He was truly a wise prince, and reformed the corrup-
ions of his predecessors. Six of his posterity maintained


116 Remarks on the . JULY,
themselves upon his throne with imperial dignity, though one
of them became tributary to the Tartars of Leaoutung. But
the eighth emperor, Weitsung, made himself a slave to the
eunuchs, and was severely punished for his weakness and im-
prudence. He called in the eastern Tartars to punish the tur-
bulent colonists of Leaoutung; but these tigers turned upon their
employer, slew him, took possession of a part of Shanse pro-
vince, and founded there the empire of Catai, which made so
great a figure in ancient geographical researches. The empire
began again to sink under innumerable evils; the Tartars
though often repulsed, still remained victorious. Like all the
barbarous nations which overthrew the Roman empire, and
received their civilization from the conquered, these Tartars
also adopted Chinese manners; Hetsung, one of their kings
even went so far as to render homage to Confucius.
Choo He, the celebrated commentator on the classics and a
very perspicuous writer, lived under the reign of Ningtsung.
During this time the Kin, or eastern Tartars, were becoming
bolder and bolder, and threatened the subjugation of the
whole empire. But they soon met their match in the west-
ern Tartars. These latter lived in the countries which ex-
tend from Shense province to Tibet and Samarcand. Like
the whole . Scythian race, they were nomades, and addicted
to rapine. But having once been repulsed from the Chinese
frontiers during the Han dynasty, they did not again attempt
to enter them, till the emperor himself called in their aid
against the eastern Tartars. But the remedy became worse than
the disease. The Tartars perceiving the weakness of the em-
pire, gradually took possession of the greater part of the pro-
vinces, whilst the emperors were dreaming away their lives in
idle pleasure. When finally roused to action, by imminent
and palpable danger, it was too late. The victorious Tartars
with a disciplined army drove all before them, and found
nowhere any effectual resistance. Disdaining any proposals
for peace, they aimed at the full possession of the empire,
and forced the emperor Twantsung to take refuge in Canton
province. Here he died by disease, and the last member of
the imperial family, driven from the land, was obliged to betake
himself to the Chinese fleet. Here, surrounded on all sides
by enemies, he despaired of life, and at last threw himself
into the sea. His grandees followed his example, the fleet
was destroyed by the elements, and the Tartar king quietly
seated himself upon the vacant throne.
Thus we have arrived at the conclusion of the history of
the middle ages; we see the proud Chinese humbled under
the yoke of barbarians, who had emerged from the deserts on
their western borders. What power would have been able to
humble them, had they improved upon the knowledge already
acquired, and opposed art to the rude but irresistible valor of
the nomades'


1833. History of China. 1 |7
Modern history, from A. D. 1280 down to the present time.
When Europe was overrun by innumerable hordes of Asia-
tic barbarians, who forced the Germans from their homes to
seek other abodes, arts and sciences shared in the general
ruin of splendid cities, and few traces of early civilization
were left. Ages of darkness, superstition, and barbarism fol-
lowed; Europe, especially its southern portions, for more than
five centuries, was gradually sinking in the scale of nations.
The wounds then inflicted upon Europe were deep, and
many centuries could not heal them. Though these roving
tribes were finally reduced to a sort of order and discipline,
yet ignorance and barbarism held uncontrolled dominion. We
might have expected the same result in China, when the
western Tartars gained possession of the country: but as
China had less to lose, she would sooner have
from the shock. Yet she did not feel this terrible scourge.
Unlike their brethren in Europe, those victorious emperors
took no pleasure in the destruction of records and monuments
of so many past ages. They rather accommodated themselves
and their national customs to the Chinese; they became wise
and lenient rulers, and showed themselves superior to their
immediate predecessors on the throne. So extraordinary a fact
can only find a solution in the superior genius of the Mongol
or Yuen rulers; they were men of penetrating minds, unbigot-
ed, and desirous to improve. But they reigned too short a
time to leave permanent impressions of their institutions.
The Ming dvnasty, which followed, kept up the pageantry
of majesty to the extent of their power. They obtained easy
possession of the throne, while the nation rejoiced to shake
off the hateful yoke of barbarians. Yet China remained under
the Ming dynasty what it had been a thousand years before.
But the doctrines of the ancient sages, which at least recog-
nised the existence of a supreme Being, were exploded by
the superficial scholars in the days of Ming. There re-
mained then nothing but a void and monotonous materialism
and atheism, as the creed of the learned ; whilst Budhism
ard Taouism amused the multitude, and entered even into
the imperial palaces.
At this period all Europe was struggling against the mighty
empire of darkness, and gradually obtained the victory. At
once when released from thralldom, the immortal spirit began
to expand, and feel itself a participator of the divine nature,
and created for a higher world. An entire-change—was soon
wrought in the relations with - - he wid €an
fiðTonger presented an impassable barrier and wall of separa-
tion; accCFTATIt witHTRETTEsign ature, nation_mingled
\. - – - --...-, .-- -
With mºttºn, true réligion spurious philosoph
meſſa wide door for the introduction of aſſimprovements.
'Europe asserted her independence, and may henceforth bid


| | 8 Remarks on the July,
defiance to the wild barbarians of the Asiatic stepps; she ex-
tended her empire to the most distant shores, and laid
the foundation of that greatness, which every year increases.
She was constituted the empire of the world. All this is
the work of a higher Being, who with omnipotent hand and
unsearchable wisdom, gives the command; “let there be light,”
and there is light. Let us therefore adore God, the Giver of
every good and perfect gift.
From a glauce at China during this period of general reno-
vation, we perceive the continuance of the same weakness,
the genuine offspring of ignorance and bigotry. The same
claim of universal empire is made which their ancient sages
who knew very he world around them, had instituted.
Notwithstanding this exorbitant claim to sovereignty over all
barbarians, they could not assert their own independence against
one petty Tungouse tribe, which under the name of Mantchous
overthrew the Ming dynasty, and established a new line of
monarchs.
During the period of the Ming dynasty, European science was
extending her dominion. She approached the forbidden land
of China, but was soon arrested in her progress. The mum-
mery of popery weakened the penetrating influence of truth.
The most bigoted nations of Europe were the first to find
access to China. Here they remained by mere sufferance,
because the Chinese were too feeble to drive them away.
Blind zeal for preaching a faith which constitutes a frail man
the sole lord of human consciences, overcame the most for-
midable obstacles, pulled down the wall of anti-national se-
clusion, and gained a momentary triumph in China. While the
Japanese eagerly grasped at the improvements voluntarily of
fered them, the §ºn. look up to others as
their masters, and to acknowledge their own inferiority. When
finally the Mantchots overcame the country, and a new line
of intelligent emperors adorned the throne, a mighty change
took place in the treatment of foreigners. But this brought
two jarring claims into collision,--the spiritual supremacy of
God's vicegerent the pope, and the political supremacy of *
“heaven's son” the emperor. Both strove for universal do-
minion, an utopian idea, altre absurd in both cases in the
view of all rational men, and they opposed each other with
all the power at their command. The Europeans had not yet
stemmed the influence of blind attachment to old customs,
which prevents improvements, when they allowed themselves to
be driven from the scene of their arduous exertions, or were
merely suffered to remain in disguise, and without any influ-
ence. The Chinese retained just so much of their sciences
as was indispensably necessary, and the door for improvement
was then shut. -
While Protestant nations have been visiting these remote
hores, and have been presenting ocular demonstration of their


1833. IIistory of China. | 19
superiority, the Chinese have clung closer and closer to their
old institutions. The march of improvement has reached even
Hindostan, but in China it is regarded as a dangerous intruder.
A mighty empire has arisen from barbarism on the very fron-
tiers of China, but its example has in no way influenced its more
ancient neighbor. British enterprise has been repeatedly on
the point of gaining the victory over Chinese obstinacy, but
has always been checked by some mistaken policy. Another
Alexander arises in Europe, and extends his way on that con-
tinent; he approaches the east, and only wants time to enslave
every civilized nation; but he is suddenly arrested in his pro-
gress. A mighty British empire rises in Asia, and extends its
borders to the Chinese dependencies, but the Chinese frontiers
yet remain inviolate. The Turkomans, whose brethren once
triumphed over the mighty Saracen, and demolished the last
remnants of the Roman empire, establishing their own despotism
in the face of all civilized nations,—are reduced to submis-
sion under the iron rule of China.
Yet with all this apparent power and extensive sway, the
empire is becoming more enfeebled, and the people have sunk
into a state of perfect apat helplessness. Whilst the
most powerful nations tremble to come within the reach of
this colossus, a few rude mountaineers in Canton can bid de-
fiance to the united celestial army; pirates are cruising along
the coast in sight of a large imperial fleet; and a handful
of **.*, *. the proud mandarins at bay.
Almost all nations aim mental advancement and superior-
ity; while China glories in its classic ignorance, yet holding
out to those ‘pitiable barbarians’ who approach its shores the
glorious prospect of being renovated by the transforming in-
fluence of the celestial empire.
The philanthropist stands despairing and exclaims, “China
is inaccessible.” Yet measures are in concert which must ulti-
mately prove successful to demolish the natural wall of sepa-
ration. The glorious gospel of God our Saviour is translated
into the Chinese language, and a small number-of-his true
servants have resolved to promote .*.*.*.*.
Shall their films be bounded by that narrow limit? No. "The
kingdom, and the dominion, and the greatness of the kingdom
under the whole heaven, shall be given to the people of the
saints of the Most High, whose kingdom is an everlasting
kingdom, and all dominions shall serve and obey him.”
From the east coast of the Caspian sea, the northeast of Per-
sia, and north of ‘l’ibet, to the western limits of China, immense
stepps extend, inhabited by Tartar tribes. Their territories to-
wards the north are lost in the dreary regions of Siberia, and
towards the northeast they border upon Corea and the great
ocean. These extensive abodes of the Scythians have from
time immemorial been the nursery of warlike nations, who,
conscious of both their own powers and the weakness of their


120 Remarks on the July,
neighbors, have carried their victorious arms to the most dis-
tant parts of the world.
In the midst of these deserts, the almighty arm of God, about
the decline of the Sung dynasty, raised up a man who soon
proved himself the scourge of his fellow beings, carrying vic-
tory and destruction in all directions. The same creative
Being who endowed an Alexander and a Napoleon with
their mighty powers, constituted Genghis khan a universal con-
queror. Born a rude barbarian, he had sagacity enough first to
improve his troops by discipline, before he sent them into the
field (about A. D. 1200). After suppressing a rebellion in his
own tribe, he overcame the celebrated Prester John, khan of
the Keraites, whose skull he enchased in silver and preserved.
Seated on a felt, he was proclaimed, in a general diet, the
grand khan of the Tartars, and very soon turned his victor-
ious arms towards China. His soldiers had little to lose, their
horses and cattle being their only property; and they had the
prospect of gaining everything. The emperor had returned a
disdainful answer to the embassy which the khan had sent
to him, and the latter revenged the insult by the slaughter of
multitudes, and took Peking and the northern provinces. When
overloaded with spoil, he returned to scourge and subject
Transoxiana and a part of Persia. Upon his death, he
exhorted his sons to attempt the entire conquest of China.
Octai his son carried further the victories of his father; all
Europe felt the scourge, whilst the eastern Mohammedans
lay prostrate before the stern conquerors. Even the forbidding
regions of Siberia were not secure from their ravages, and they
planted there the standard of victory. Gaiuk, the son of Octai,
left the empire to his two cousins Mangou and Kublai.
While Mangou laid waste Persia, Khorasan, Chaldea, and Syria,
Kublai invaded the southern parts of China, and seized on the
empire. When firmly seated on the throne, under the name of
Che-yuen, he amalgamated his soldiers with the natives, and
strove to introduce western arts and sciences.—The father
and uncle of the celebrated Marco Polo were at his court,
and received commissions to bring thither a number of mission-
aries well versed in the sciences. The monarch condescended
also to send an embassador to the pope, who however never
reached his destination. Marco Polo's father and uncle likewise
failed in their commission, two missionaries who set out with
them on their return, having through fear withdrawn from
the expedition. The two former, however, accompanied by
the young Marco Polo, reached the Chinese court, and pass-
ed: several years in the service of Kublai. Possessing sagacity
to see the advantages of ruling a country with benevolence
and wisdom, he very early conciliated the Chinese to such
a degree, that they cheerfully submitted to the yoke imposed
by barbarians. No Chinese emperor either before or after him
had the same enlarged and liberal views of policy. Had his


1833. History of China. 121
successors been animated by the same principles, China would
now vie with Russia in civilization. Christians, Jews, and Mo-
hammedaus flocked to his eourt, and TāTſº Peñission to
settle in his dominions; he granted toleration to every religiou,
and was himself not disinclined to popery. Not content to
become the monarch of so vast an empire, he also subdued
the states on the south, sent his ſleet into the Indian Archi-
pelago, and attacked Japan. But in the two latter expeditions
he failed, though supported by the most vigorous measures. But
his proper glory consists in the improveinents which he made
in the empire; the Great_canal, 300 ſeagues in length, is a
more lasting monument of his greatness, than all the trophies
of the victories which he gained. " ' " " " ' " ' ' '.'
His 'posterity did not inherit the same greatness of soul.
Imbued with Chinese learning;' and surrounded by Chinese
courtiers, they soon themselves became Chinese, and the nu-
merous hosts of their countrymen followed their example. The
most abject superstitions marked the declitie of the line. Wail-
tsung, ihe'eighth emperor, became a devotee of the Grand
Lama, the pope of central 'Asia; and thenceforward the de-
cline of the empire was rapid." "Choo Yueiichang, originally a
servant of a Budhist priest, but a man of superior mind, put
himself at the head of a numerous party of rebels, defeated
the imperial troops, crossed the Yellow river, alrd drove the
Mongols out of the empire; when he assumed the name of
Humgwoo. China had tamely submitted to foréigu rulers for
about ninety years, and ‘now’ returned willitigly to the rule of
one of her own sons. - ' ' ' ' " ' " " ' " . * .
All founders of dynasties need to fossess"more vigor of mind
than ordinary princes; thus Hungwoer (whose title in the
ancestral hall was Tae-Tsoo,) possessed great abilities, and be-
came the ſounder of the Min lasty. He abolished the su-
perstitious veneration of bonzes (the priests of Budha), discarded
the eunuchs, and became master of his own actions. He again?
transferred the -seat of government from Peking to Nanking.
Timur, or T the terror of Asia and Europe, was al-
ready on his march from Samarcand towards Peking, with an
innumerable host of warriors; he had resolved either to make
all the Chinese Mohammedans, or to extirpate them from the
earth, a threat which he would have made good, but he died
§ his march, A. d. 1405. How wonderful are the ways of
od. - - * . . - * . . . . . - . . . . . . . . . " -
The feeble efforts of the divided Tartars were now such
as' could be repelled by the more feeble emperors; for they
were never wanting in the point of issuing fulminating edicts.
and in the use of golden weapons rather" than iron, against
their implacable enemies, Heeutsung, the ninth emperor of
this line, fell into the same "error with 'niany of his predeces.
sors in the preceding dynasties —lie weakeued his mind by the
debasing superstitious of Budhism. Tamine and ſcDCTIOT’soon
P


122 Itemurks on the JULY,
afterwards laid waste the country, and a new scourge, the in-
vasion of the Japanese, ſlevastated the coast. Instead of vi-
gorously opposing these pirates, Shetsung the twelfth emper-
or, (in , whose reign the Portuguese first arrived in China,)
merely built some forts upon the shore, which are in partial
existence till this day. He spent his time and amused himself
with the idle speculations of Taouism, whilst the Tartars ad-
vanced as far as Arº But he fell a victim to the
draught of immortality, in the preparation of which the Taou
priests are such great adepts. At a period when the cºuntry
was again afflicted with a great famine, , and, when thfi
eastern Tartars were making very successful inroads, Wan;
leih, who was a truly great man, was seated upon the ihrane.
But standing alone amongst millions of his degenerate subjests,
he was unable to stop the torrent which was sweeping away
the foundation of his throne. His successors were weak men.
The Tartars º often repulsed always returned, and at
length took formal possession of *...", Tsungching,
the last emperor of this line, was a learned but weak-minded
man. In vain did he endeavor to Pº the insurrections,
which sprung up in every province of the empire. Armies of
robbers swarmed in all the principal parts of his dominions,
whilst the Tartars with º ſury followed up their first
victory. Le, one of the principal leaders of the rebels, took
possession of Honan province, and marched triumphantly to
Peking. The emperor instead of boldly resisting the rebels,
amused himself in retirement with tº H. "Hi-
the Budhists. When this inevitable danger approached him,
he was roused from his stupor, but too late; he was over-
come, killed his daughter with his own hand, and hanged
himself, A. D. 1624. . . ! . . .
Had Le, the usurper, º restrained by humanity, he would
have gained the hearts of the people; but he was an odious
*yraut, whose º: cruelty is recorded in the Chines
annals in letters of blogd. . Woo Sankwei, a general who j
been sent against the Tartars, opposed this monster, and call-
hd in to his aid the . Mantehºus, who till now had been the
enemies of the empire. Le, lºaded with the spoils of Peking,
withdrew to Shense prºvince, and the Tartars made a trium-
phant entry into the capital. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
We are now braught to the present ruling dynasty, which has
assumed the name of Ta Tsing. The reader will have remarked,
that China became the prey of eyery bold adventurer, who had
perseverance and power enough to drive the emperor from the
throne. The nation itself was passive, possessing no internal
strength, and the monarchs were remarkable for their imbecility.
Near the end of the Ming dynasty, a man appeared on the frontiers
of China, whose sole power was more formidable than that of
the great khan, and whose subjects might have effected a more
permanent couquest than did the Mantchous. He came both


1833. - History of China. 123
to liberate and to enslave the spirit; endowed with perseverance,
directed by prudênce, and led by irresistible enthusiasm, he
was ready to encounter every danger, and make every sacrifice
to gain his end. Men of such minds must prove the be-
nefactors or the scourges of their race; especially so, when
sustained by hosts of similar spirits, who with implicit obedience
to their superiors all co-operate for the same end.—Such a min
wds Francis Xavier, who A. D. 1552, arrived on the frontiers of
Chiº.The island of Shangchuen, or St. John. Whatever
superstition may have since done to make him an object of
ridicule in the eyes of enlightened men, *†.
man, and in his class a hero of the first rank. Alas, that he
t for so bad a cause, though surely himself actuated by
exalted principles. Men of such a stanip are capable of effect-
ing any purpose. Even in the present state of things, ten min-
isters of the gospel, endowed with ān unconquerable zeal for
the glory of their Saviour, might carry the victory over Chinese
anti-imationality, if they acted with equal perseverance and great-
er wisdom, the wisdom that corneth from above. -
This great man died immediately on his arrival; his succes-
sors gained the object in view, and established themselves and
º in China. Up to this time, the name of Ricci, one of
he most distinguished of them, is known to the-thinese.
Hè might have shone as a philosopher in Europe, but hé
chose the less spléndid career of preaching what he believed
to be truth, to the greatest of nations. As a mali of leårning
he had few equals, and who amongst us can compare with
him in fervent zeal? Such an instance of devotedness to such
a cause, inight well cause us to blush, did we not hope that
heavenly power in these latter days will be granted to the true
evångelists, that they may be ready to live and to die for the
holy cause of their Redeemer.
While thé Mantchous took possession of the greater part of the
coutitry, some surviving princes of the Ming dynasty founded an
empire in Canton province. Yew Sung, one of these princes hav-
ing been driven from Keāngse where he hād established him-
self, was strängled at Peking. Yew Ngāou, another prince
of this branch, proclaimed himself emperor in Cantoti province,
but he also was routed by the Tartars. In Kwangse, however,
the Taitars were repulsed in so signal a manner that the vic-
tor Yew Tsin proclaimed himself emperor, aid took the name
of Yungleih for his reign. His son, is said to have embraced
popèry, and adopted the name of Constantihe. The empress
wrote a humble letter to the pope Alexander VII, wherein as
a true daughter of the church she submits herself-to-the-holy
~father! This royāTāmī TWTs soon extinguished.
Shense also fought in vain for its liberty, and even the cruel
Cháng Heenchung was subdued in Szechuen. Fuhkeen maintain.
ed its independence a long time, for the king who reigned there
was supported by an enterprising native of that province, Ching


124 Remarks on the July,
Chelung; who with his followers held out the longest against the
Tartars; but, when abandoued by the prince whom he had serv-
ed, he fled to Formosa, dispossessed the Dutch of their settlement
on the coast, and established there a government of his own.
Whilst the celebrated general Woo Sankwei, was struggling
with all his power (and with some success) against the Tartars in
Szechuen, the Fuhkeen men were equally successful. But death
soon called away Woo Sauk wei, after he had retired to Yun-
man, and the people of Fuhkeen then surrendered their inheri-
tance to the Mantchous. Thus all China was given up to a
tribe of barbarians. Had these numerous leaders acted in con-
cert, they would have saved the nation from this degrading
slavery; but God had given their country to the Mantchous,
aud, therefore all their efforts proved vain.—It is now time to
speak of the origin of the conquerors. -
On the northeast of China live large tribes of Toungouse,
who are as poor as the country they inhabit. Without that
contempt of life and its comforts which is characteristic of all
the Tartar tribes, they are a tame and submissive people, whose
sole care is their daily subsistence. Poor even in resources to
make life confortable, they are contented with the scanty
means which their pastures afford, and are satisfied to live
upon dried, salmon throughout the whole year, if they can
lay up a sufficient store. A great part of these tribes are
under the Russian government; those on the south of the
Amour river are the Mantchous, of whom we are now to
speak. - -- - -
The Joor-jih (or Ju-chih, as the Chinese designate them,)
gave shelter to the Mongols, when the founder of the Ming dy-
nasty had expelled them from his country. They were an
illiterate tribe, possessed of no written language until about
130 years before their chief ascended the Chinese throne,
when they adopted a syllabic alphabet, bearing some resem-
blance in character to the Syriac Karshum, and derived from the
same source as that of the Mongols. -:
Divided into several tribes, like all nomades, they possessed
no 'strength to make conquests, or even to repel invaders, if
any had visited their inhospitable regions. But even in a poor
and despised nation, heroes may be born, who may give a new
impulse to their countrymen. Such a man was Tsung-jin, who
subjected several of the native tribes to his sway, and even
attacked the Chinese frontiers, near the close of the sixteenth
century. The Chinese to free themselves from his attacks,
agreed to pay him a stipend of about 800 taels, and 15 pieces
of brocade. But, whilst they were waging war against the
Japanese and the Mongols, he threw off all allegiance to them,
and boldly took possession of Leaoutung; at the same time
proclaiming himself emperor under the name of Tečnming.
Having fixed his residence in the fertile province of Leaoutung,
he soon perceived that the weak Chinese governinent could not


1833. History of China. 12:
resist his inroads. To give a plausible pretext for invading
China, he drew up a manifest which enumerated seven grounds
of complaint, and began to act on the offensive. His son,
who followed up his father's victories, assumed the natne (kwo
huou) of Teentsung, and established the present dynasty
under the name of Ta Tsing. After hi death, the govern-
ment was placed in the hands of a regent, during the mi-
nority of his successor. ... This regent undertook to join Woo
Sankwei, in order to repress the Chinese rebels. Having
gained a victory over these banditti, he was reluctant to depart
from so fertile a country, and under pretence of remaining to
extirpate the rebels, he took possession of the Chinese throne,
in the name of the young emperor Shunche, in 1644. A
handful of well disciplined troops might have opposed these
invaders, and the Chinese had before ordered a company of
Portuguese from Macao against the rebels; but while on
their march they were remanded, and the helpless Chinese with
all their pride became the prey of these barbarians. After a
long contest, they were firmly seated upon the throne, and
to this moment they mantain with undisputed sway, their
authority over the empire. Notwithstanding all the precautions
taken by them, they very soon became amalgamated with the
Chinese; and at present, they are nothing more than Chinese
Tartars. But their line of emperors, though brief, is not devoid
of worthy men, and on the whole their government is superior
to that of the Ming dynasty, so that in that respect the people
have no reason to complain. - - -
Shunche, was continually engaged in wars against those
who disputed his dominion, so that he could do very little
for the improvement of the nation. He soon perceived the
superiority of Europeans in every science, and appointed the
celebrated jesuit, father Adam Schaal, president of the “mathe-
matical tribunal.” We must not, from so high sounding a
name expect to find anything grand among these children
in knowledge, though Schaal unquestionably possessed great
talents, far superior to any Chinese astronomers. He was not
a man to be contented with so circumscribed a sphere of duty,
but soon succeeded in gaining great ascendancy over the mind
of the emperor.—Shunche was successful in his wars, but
died too early to reap the fruits of all his victories.
Kanghe, who was the greatest emperor of this line, suc-
ceeded him on the throne, at the age of eight years. During his
minority, his guardians abused the confidence reposed in them;
but as soon, as he assumed the reins himself, he showed a
inind, far superior to all his countrymen, and by the wisdom
of his measures, subjected all, China to his sway. We waive
all the extravagant encomiums lavished on him as the pro-
tector of popery, but we must nevertheless acknowledge that
he was an extraordinary man. A mortal seated on the throne
of China, and surrounded by adoring millions, stoops so far


| 20 Remarks on the July,
as to take lessons in mathernatics like a school-boy. and so far
overcoines the national prejudices as to grant to strangers full
liberty to appear at his court, and actually to raise them to
high dignities. Many of his actions doubtless were the result
of advice given him by the jesuits, but some of thein einauated
entirely from himself, and bespeak the most enlightened views
of policy. Opening all the ports of his empire to foreign
continerce was surely a measure which night have greatly
tended to the advantage of his subjects, and shows how far he
was beyond his age and nation. His successful wars in west-
ern Tartary, his conquest of Tibet, his treaty of peace with
the Russians, and his conquest of Formosa, liid the ſountlä-
tion for the future greatness of China. His treatment of the
papal legates, and the excellent inethod by which he managed
the jesuits, without curtailing their liberty, are great proofs
of his political sagacity. Itideed he was the Peter the great
of China. His reign lasted above 60 years, to the great be-
nefit of the whole nation. Had he lived in our time, he would
have been enabled to make amazirig improvements, but it was
his lot to be attended by foreigners who in several respects
were more bigoted than the Chinese themselves. With him
died the desire for improvenient, and his son Yungching, who
ascended the throne in t?22, bore a hatred to Europeans and
to their sciences. If China had strength in itself to rise from
a state of ignorance and diverweening pride, we should not so
much famient those changes which shut the door against foreigh
improveinents; but alas, the whole country is a staghatit 'pool
to which healthful motion must be imparted by foreign hands.
Yungching reigned peacefully for a short time; he had
imbibed the industrious spirit of His father, but he equalled
tim only in this respect. He may be said to have fully
Hearned the system of national exclusiveness, which the Chinese
are so fond of inculcating and prácticing. Throughout the
nation, the badge of submission to the Tartars was adopted,
—a shaved head and loſig tail. Thé great officers who re-
ceive their salary from the emperor, and are entirely depen-
defit on his favor for their ränk, are servile; the inferior of.
ficers fºllow their example, and the people themselves -care
very little who is upon the throne, providéd they are not too
severely oppressed. - . . . . . . . . . . . **** * * * * , . . . . . . . . . . . .
The long reign of Kéénlàng was marked by many 'udim-
portant whrs, which had little influence on the prosperity of the
ampire. He succeeded to the throne in 1786." There had been
disturbances in Soungaria amongst the Eleuths, or Cahnucks.
Reelihulg fearing that the peace of the empire was not se-
cure agiinst them, sent an army, thither in 1755 which tobk
Elé, expelled Dawatsi the turbulentºkhān, placed Amoursaha
on the throne; and Herit "his" owfi lientenants to watch all the
tnotions of the new khāh. But they wery soon revolted; even the
uéw khan was dissatisfied, and a Chinese army sent against


1833. History of China. 127
him was totally destroyed; but after many a hard fought
baule, the Eleuths as well as some neighboring tribes were
subjected to the Chinese sceptre. The vengeance of the Chi-
nese was dreadſul, and the immense slaughter sanctioned by
Keenlung is one of the great stains on his reign. He next
found a pretext to invade Little Bukharia; here also the Chi-
nese arms proved victorious, and in 1759 Bukharia was re-
duced to subjection. ........ - -
... But the imperial army was not so successful in the invasion
of Burmah in 1767. The Burmese, after reducing them to
a want of provisions, put the army to a total rout, and took
so many prisoners that scarcely any returned to tell of their
defeat. A second army shared no better fate; but to give to
the whole affair a plausible aspect, Keenlung gave audience
to a Burmese embassador, who it was stated, came to sue for
Peace. .. * . -
The glory of Kéenlung's reign was well nigh, tarnished by
a rupture with the Russian government. Each nation had
committed aggressions on the other, , but Keenlung's conduct
in seducing many thousand Kalmuck families to leave their
homes in Asiatic Russia, and to migrate to the country of the
Soungars, deserved seyere chastisement. Had the Russians
made an inroad on China, to reclaim their subjects, the Chi,
nese would soon have found, that they were not now to fight
the nomades of the desert. But this they have yet to expe-
rience at some future period. Troubles were afterwards occa-
signed by some Tibetan mountaineers, in the , province of
Szechuen, which cost the Chinese generals a great deal of
fighting; but as we have our information respecting the war
only from Chinese reports, we shall not say mugh respecting it.
§§ chief who had waged war against the emperor, with all
his family suffered death by the slow and painful, execution,
Keśnlung being himself present to enjoy the sight, of the cruel
punishment. - - - - “. . . . . . . .
Though harassed by so many cares, Keenlung yet found
time to establish a large library, and to repair the embankments
of the rivers; he received also a visit from the Bantchin Lama
of Tibet, and rendered divine homage to a man who was
mortal like all his race, and who soon after this died. So far
can rational creatures ſqrget themselves.
The Mohammedans ; i. western frontiers and those near
Kansuh province successively revolted; they resisted the im-
perial armies with great valor, but were finally subdued. In
this contest again the emperor executed the most sanguinary
vengeance upon them who had opposed his authority. Always
desirous to appear great in the eyes of the whole world, he
constituted himself umpire in the wars between Tungking and
Cochinchina, with the intention of subduing the former country.
But his army was repeatedly defeated, and he was glad to
conclude a peace. His aid having been solicited by the


128 Itemarks on Chinese History. July,
Tibetau Laina, whose territories had been plundered by the
Gorkas, Keenlung ordered a large army to march against the
latter, and succeeded in repelling them. From this period,
Tibet becaume a dependency of China. Previous to this, a
bloody insurrection had broken out in Formosa, and the rebels
fought desperately, till after being gradually weakened, they
ſell a prey to the imperial forces. Another rebellion, which
begun among the Meadutsze of Canton province, has never
been wholly crushed to this day, but only temporarily quieted
by compromise between the insurgents and the imperial ge-
nerals. - - -
In ſortning an estimate of Keenlung's character, it is well
to take into consideration the times in which he lived. His
measures were certainly vigorous, but we see no greatness of
soul in his proceedings. He was doubtless actuated by a de-
sire to make his empire universal, and to transmit his fame to
posterity. It is satisfactory however, to observe, that amid the
din of arms, he did not forget literature, but was a firm pa-
tron of every scholar. Yet notwithstanding all his redeeming
qualities, he was far inferior to Kanghe, whom he wished
to emulate. He retired from the throne in behalf of his fif-
teenth son, Keāking, , in the 60th year of his reign, and sur-
vived his abdication three years.
Keāking possessed all the faults, but none of the excellencies,
of his father. One insurrection after another disturbed the peace
of the empire. The emperor was indolent and destitute of ta-
lents to oppose the refractoy spirit which prevailed. He was
honored, towards the close of his reign, by a British embassy.
Tö yield to its reasonable and just requirements was out of
question; the Chinese did not desire to establish fair, inter-
national intercourse, but to exact the homage of vassals.
Taoukwang his son, who came to the throne in 1820," is
a man of quiet and retired habits, without any great talents
for business. His reign has been marked by new insurrections
and petty wars. It was very long before he could subdue the
rebels in Turkestan. The Meacutsze were paid for their sub-
mission. The rebellion in Formosa is still 'raging. "Several
causes are co-operating to bring the empire to a fearful crisis.
We have now traced the outline of the history of China.
There never was a period when the extent of its territory was
so great, as at present. But it has reached its dotage, aud
every adventurer takes advantage of its helpless state. How
long it will stand, is only known to Him who rules the skies.
Let us humbly hope that 'aſſ' the changes, which are to take
place, may be subservient to the progress of the gospel.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .' . . . . . . . . .
* * * * . . . . . . . . . . . . ; ; ; . . . . "
• It being late in the year' (on the 3d day of the 8th moon) when he
sat down on the throne, he decreed that the next year (1821) should be
the first of his reign,


1833, Articles of War. 129
Articlfs of war.—His excellency Loo, the governor of
Canton, has issued a small pamphlet, neatly printed, on the
subject which we have designated “Articles of war.” It con-
sists of some remarks of his own, introductory to two imperial
papers, which he entitles, Shing Heun hing keun ke leuh,-
“Sacred Admonitions on the laws of military operations.”
All that an emperor says or writes is, in courtly style, desig-
nated Shing heun, holy, sage, or sacred, admonitions or in-
structions. A full translation of this document would be a cu-
riosity; but neither our time nor space will permit the attempt.
The laws here republished were originally issued by the late
emperors Keenlung and Keāking. They are prefaced by a
received adage—that
Ping ko pih neen pub yung ;
Puh ko yih jih woo pe.
The army may be a hundred years unemployed;
But may not be a single day unprepared.
Then follows the military decalogue, which we subjoin.
1st Law. It is the duty of a soldier in the day of battle always
to press forward bravely and impetuously; for whoever through
fear, or to save his life, flees, must by the laws of war, be
decapitated, and his head exposed to the multitude as a warn-
ing. He who kills an enemy, performs a meritorious act,
for which he shall be rewarded with promotion. If he dies
in battle, his children and grandchildren shall be compassion-
ated. The coward cannot escape the laws of government. If
a man rushes forward and kills his foe, it does not follow that
he shall die; but if he draws back, it is impossible that he
can live. This article is abundantly plain, and all the officers
should inculcate it on the men; that they may know the great
principles of right conduct; and in the day of battle they will
doubtless be brave, having a hundred chances to one that they
will kill “the thieves”—their enemies, and meritoriously dis-
tinguish themselves.
2d Law. On entering into battle, powder and arrows must
not be expended at a distance from the enemy, but reserved
for the exact point of time in which they will be most effica-
cious. To waste them before this time arrives, so that when
most wanted they are all expended, is like tying their hands
and waiting to be slain.
3d Law. The utmost pains must be taken to preserve their
arms in good order, and their ammunition dry.
4th Law. When an officer is wounded or taken, the men
shall make the utmost efforts to carry him off, or rescue him.
If they neglect to do so, and defeat ensues, the guilty inen
shall be decapitated. -
5th Law. The men must not leave the pursuit of a flying
foe, to collect plunder *
Q-


130 Articles of War. July,
6th Law. The utmost vigilance and silence are required of
men on duty at any pass or post. On obtaining information, they
inust depute able men to communicate it secretly and speedily.
7th. Law. All unnecessary disturbances occasioned to the
peacable inhabitants, injuring corn-fields, robbing, pillaging,
&c., must be severely punished. -
- 8th Law. The soldier who bravely kills an enemy, shall be
rewarded ; but he who is detected in lying pretexts about his
own merits, or who by false tales usurps the inerits of others
as his own, shall be decapitated. - * * -
'9th Law. The horses and camels belonging to the army
must be treated with affection and kindness; and good water.
and provender provided for them. At night if they stray they
must be forthwith sought for, and brought to wells in regular
succession, so that the water may not be fouled by their being
permitted to strive against each other in crowds. Neglect of
this duty must be severely punished.
10th Law. When encamped, the patrol must be vigilant,
and especially so at nights. None must be permitted to walk
about without cause. In the tents especial care must be taken
against fire. On any rumored alarm, none must act hurriedly
or with levity. Secret orders must be carefully obeyed, and
not allowed to transpire from one to another.
It is finally required that these ten laws, or articles of war,
be carefully explained to and inculcated on all the soldiers.
.** -
Appended to the above are twenty-two laws or regulations
ſor defence of a city; directing the steps at first to be taken
in distributing around the walls the force possessed; calling
on the inhabitants, especially the gentry, to assist; storing pro-
visions for themselves, and cutting then off from their enemy.
Means must be used to calm the ſears of the people; to rouse
then to defend themselves and their families; clemency and
kindness must be shown to all; and even the seditious watched,
but not precipitately acted against Vagabonds and beggars
unust be induced to serve as laborers for food, and the affection
of all be won. - -
... These laws, at number seven, glide off to more general topics,
aud contain directions for the army when in actual conflict
with the enemy. By working on his fears the coward must
be stimulated to act bravely; the licentiousness of the soldier
must be repressed; and he must be threatened with punishment
if every shot and every arrow does not kill; &c, &c. The
whole closes by requiring, that a page of the articles of war
be read daily by some good reader in hearing of the soldiers.
"We have thus given a specimen of governor Loo's publica-
tion. He refers in one part to his own achievements at the
late highland rebellion, which many consider disgraceful. But
a temporary peace seeins to be the consequence, and therefore,
perhaps, however brought about, it is better than open war.
º
/
ſ
*


1833. Execution of Laws in China. 131
We are not friends of war; and among many other reasons
for not being so, this is one, viz., that whether the warfare be
to oppose a tyrant and oppressor in order to defend and res-
cue, the innocent, or to assist the tyrant to crush the virtuous,
the soldier is required in either case equally to exert his ener.
gies, or sacrifice his life. He has no choice. And this ap-
pears to us a position unworthy and improper for any rational
and accountable being to be in. - ‘. . .
...We cannot but remark that here, as in the Sacred Edict
which we reviewed last year, the Chinese government addresses
the people as if they were beings without souls, without God,
and, without immortality. All is earthly, mortal, and perishing,
There is nothing sublime in principle, or hope, or aim. The
ancient pagans of Rome had much more regard in their senate
and government to the Deos immortales, than the modern pa-
gans of China. Even the savage warriors of North America
are less groveling than the Chinese. Cromwell made brave
soldiers by religious principles; Mohammed did the same by
the hopes of a future life; but the Chinese soldier, is, we see,
urged on to conflict, chiefly by the fear of death if he draw
back. There is no appeal to justice, honor, religion, and glory.
The fact is observable. We do not think that all those who
die fighting for their country are sure to go to Heaven, al-
though we have heard some Christian princes affirm it. The
Chinese in this document, and elsewhere, commonly speak
contemptuously of their enemies, calling them tsih, ladrones
or thieves, as did the Romans.
Execution of the laws in ChiNA.—The remarks of “An
Inquirer,” which we subjoin, illustrate an important character-
istic of the Chinese. Their legislators, like those persons of
old who bound heavy burdens and grievous to be borne, “ say
and do not.” In the review of the Penal Code, which is now
before our readers, many topics came under consideration, with
respect to which the practice is found to differ—and sometimes
very widely—from the letter of the law. To some of these we
adverted, as we passed on with the review ; but desirous to give,
in r as short space as possible, a summary of the code, it was
dermed expedient, to defer some of our remarks until actual
accurrences should present opportunity to verify statements that
might otherwise appear (at least to those abroad who are not
familiar with China) uncharitable and unkind.—Concerning the
ler non scripta, we shall endeavor to remark hereafter. The
following is the paper from our correspondent.
Mr. Editor;-You are in the course of telling the ... world
about the laws of China; I wish you could append to your
information, something also about the practice: i. e. how the


132 Execution of Laws in China. July,
theory of the laws is carried into effect. Some laws look beau-
tiful on paper; but they are found impracticable. Such
for example are the Chinese laws about the pay of public
officers, magistrates, and the police. These are all provided
for by the laws on an economical scale: but the people em-
ployed by government, often cannot live upon their incomes;
then recourse is had to bribery and corruption; to extortion
and defrauding the revenue. An imperial officer is paid by
government to prevent smuggling ; but he cannot live on his
pay; therefore he accepts of a fee from the smuggler to allow
smuggling. And so of many other cases which could be men-
tioned. The law is made very close and minute in ofder to
catch many offenders, some of whom are always able to pay for
being let loose. -
'We do not know much how the laws operate in the interior;
but the government regulations concerning foreign merchants
and the intercourse of natives with them, are almost all im-
practicable. But though not enforced, because impracticable, they
serve as a reason for annoying and distressing all parties oc-
casionally, for the purpose of extorting fees or bribes.
Governors of provinces, I understand, on good authority, are
generally supported by the emperor and supreme government
in whatever local regulations or laws, they suggest and recom-
mend. The hoppo of Canton recently published anew, a law
obtained about 1810 by the then governor Pih, since deceased.
It went to require all foreign merchants to quit China in the
ships in which they came. If they had claims outstanding,
they might leave somebody to look after these claims; but
the persons so left were required to quit Canton, and, on having
obtained a permit from the Chinese government, to go to
Macao, when the business in Canton was finished.
It is in obedience to Chinese laws, as the phrase is, that
commercial companies quit Canton to reside in Macao in the
summer, when their ships are absent. The hoppo's declared
object the other day was to force from Canton, all those persons
who had not ships or immediate commercial business at
Whampoa or Canton. And he required (according to the
law obtained by governor Pih,) the senior hong-merchants
to send in to him an exact list of all the foreigners in Canton;
stating by what ships they came, what they were doing, &c.
If they did not send in a true list, he threatened to report them
with great severity to the emperor, for despising laws sanctioned by
him, and for conniving at crafty barbarians remaining in Can-
ton, holding illegal intercourse with the natives, getting infor-
mation from them, and combining with them to smuggle, and
do all sorts of evil. How the linguists and merchants made
out their list it is difficult to say; for the law and the prac-
tice are so different. They say, lying is necessary in China:
and having ouce adopted this principle as a rule of conduct,


1832 Execution of Laws in China. 133
lists, and bonds, and such like documents, are made out with
much more facility than they could be where truth is regard-
ed. So far indeed, if facility be the only object attended to,
the argument is in favor of lying. It is curious to observe how
easily the linguists and others, can take to Canton naval and mili-
tary captains, and all sorts of male passengers, from any part of
the world, contrary to the laws, by always converting them,
on paper, into assistant clerks, or writers, book-keepers, or
even servants, to the merchants. Now this is so good natured,
one can scarcely be angry with them for telling such harmless
and kind lies. But where is the wisdom of multiplying im-
practicable laws? The wisdom consists in its affording, when
any disturbance occurs from such smuggled or belied persons,
a reason—I will not call it a pretext—for government servants
getting money. -
Governor Pih obtained from the then emperor Keāking at
the same time as the above, a fixed regulation or law, that
there should be no accession of foreign families allowed at
Macao; nor any new houses built. The old families might
be left to vegetate, and the old dwellings be repaired, but
nothing more. This law though not enforced, is wisely con-
trived to be a source of revenue by fees on foreign ladies
who land there, and bribes to the Chinese officers to allow a
new house to be built. Indeed, Sir, I believe that although a
large fee is demanded for a new site: an old house or a
broken wall cannot be rebuilt or repaired in Macao, without
first paying a bribe to the resident Chinese magistrate. I
never heard what his majesty the king of Portugal said to
the emperor of China for thus interfering in his territory. But
so the fact is. The fee or bribe must be paid; or the house
or -wall, even if blown down by a tyfoon, must continue to
lie in ruins.
The truth is that human legislators sometimes enact laws
vexatious; or laws foolish; or laws oppressive and cruel. But
they generally have a motive, even in the worst cases. Some-
times it is good no doubt; but also occasionally their motive
is anything but to increase the well-being and happiness of
their fellow-creatures. If you could throw any light on the
practice of the law in China, I think your labors would be in-
teresting to many.
By the way, do you know if there is any “common law,” or
lez non scripta, admitted in China. I rather think not, but I
am not sure. I am told that a local magistrate sometimes acts
according to usage, although not in strict conformity to the
written law; and that cases occur in which the court declares
that there is no express law on the subject. In that case they
judge by the law most resembling the point in hand, and get
an imperial decision, which is law for the future.
Your's &c.
AN INgrifter


134 Demonolatry.—The King's Order. JULY,
DeMoxoi.At Ry, or the worship of dead men, whom the ex-
cessive veneration of posterity elevated to the rank of hero
gods, or virgin goddesses.—This was a very eminent branch
of ancient paganism in every quarter of the globe. These ca-
nonized beings were, by the Greeks, styled demons; and though
translated from this sublunary world to a higher state of ex-
istence, they were still supposed to be concerned in the affairs
of those they had left behind, and were: thought to possess
the power both of moderating their sufferings, and of gratify.
ing their wishes. Hence whatever notions philosophical, and
speculative men might have of some great unknown first cause,
the prayers of the vulgar, or rather of all classes, were spe-
cially addressed to the popular demons; and the state policy
of revery gentile government, formally recognised and main-
tained this peculiar mode of worship. This is what St. Paul
calls, the doctrine of “devils” or demons; which, in the latter
times, those pseudo-Christians who forbid marriage, and require
abstinence from meats, were to introduce.” : -
This Dimonolatry is the universal practice of modern pa-
gans of China. We have before us a Gazette from Peking,
of May the 9th, in which the emperor complains, that from
March 27th up to that time, only a few inches of snow had
fallen. : “The last harvest was bad, and the present appear-
ances were very unpromising:” he therefore requires that the
Board of Rites forthwith erect altars at the temple of
Kwan-te, a deified general of the army; and at Ching-hwang
meaou, or the city temple, which is also dedicated to 2-demon,
or patron saint. - !
At the hero god's temple a select party of Budhist priests
were to pray for snow; and at the city temple, a chosen
party of Taou priests. . The service was to continue seven days,
or one week. Several lay grandees were to be in attendance
day and night; to superintend the service, and to join in burn-
ing incense, and performing postrations. The local magistrate
of Shunteen ſoo was required to make all necessary provisions
for the worshipers, during the whole course of the service,
The King's order, or wang ming, that is the death warrant,
in the keeping of the lieutenant-governor, has of late often
been put in requisition. On one occasion for ten persons. at
once, some of them robbers, and one an unhappy young wo-
man, who murdered her husband's mother, an old blind wo-
man, by pouring melted lead down her throat. Drunkenness
and unrestrained anger are frequent causes, among the men
and women respectively, of the most atrocious crimes. :
We have seen, within a few days, a printed proclamation
by governor Loo, stating that banditti go forth in boats to
* See Faber on Prophecy.


1833. The Corcan Syllabury. 13.
*
plunder what has been left to the unfortunate sufferers by the
late inundation. He threatens that whoever may be caught
doing so, shall, on his requesting “the king's order,” be put
to immediate death.
The phrase wang ming is supposed to be derived from high
antiquity, before the use of the word huang, or emperor; and
although the sovereigns of China have been called emperors
for twenty centuries, they still retain the ancient term?king's
order, for a death warrant. These governors of provinces
seem to have a discretionary power of life and death, when
. . . . .
. . . . . .
they think the emergency may require it.
‘. . . . . .
LITERARY NOTICES.
**
* ,
at I
The CoRKAN Syllabar Y.
IN a former number we have
inserted a communication from
the pen, of Mr. Gutzlaff, re-
specting the hitherto almost un-
known language of the Corean
peninsula. In that communi-
cation, there is given a Corean
alphabet, consisting of fifteen
general sounds or consonants,
and eleven vowels. In addition
to this alphabetic arrangement,
in which the Coreans differ
somewhat from the Japanese
(while closely resembling them
in various other particulars), they
have also a syllabic arrange-
ment, consisting of , 168 com-
bined sounds or syllables, each
of which possesses an inherent,
but not inseparable vowel. Of
this syllabary, in its complete
form, a copy was delivered to
us, at the same time with the
above-mentioned remarks on
the language, of which, as well
as of a specimen of Corean
writing, it was our intention to
have taken earlier notice. We
do not regret, however, that we
have been prevented from so
doing, since we have lately re-
ceived some sheets of a valua-
ble publication, now printing at
Batavia, viz. a Comparative Wo-
cabulary of Chinese, Corean,
and Japanese, with the pro-
nunciation and meaning in
English attached. This Wo-
cabulary has served to verify
many of our preconceived opin-
ions as to the varying pronun-
ciation of several letters, arising
perhaps in some instances from
a diversity of dialects, and in
others from individual peculiari-,
ties of pronunciation. -
With the help of this Vocabu-
lary, we proceed at once to
remark on the powers of the
several letters, in the syllabic
order of arrangement. A copy
of the syllabary is annexed. All
the syllables, it will readily be
seen, are simple and easy com-
binations of the fifteen conso.
nants and eleven vowels, which,
as already stated, compose the
alphabet of the Coreans.


136 The Corean
Syllabary. July,
The following are the powers
of the syllables, in the order
in which they are numbered on
the annexed page, commencing,
like the Chinese, at the right.
First column.
1. ka:—the k is as in the
word kite; the vowel an Italian
a, as in calm.
2. kya, or kea :-the li-
quid in this syllable is inherent,
and inseparable from the vowel,
the k and the a have the saune
power as in the first syllable.
3. kö:—the vowel is long,
but different from the broad
English of it resembles rather
the German 6, in Königsberg.
4. kyo:—the liquid, inhe-
rent in the vowel, is the only
difference between this and the
last syllable: its sound is simi-
lar to that of the Chinese word
keué,” in the court dialect, but
rather more lengthened.
5. kö, or koh:—the o is
somewhat abbreviated as in the
wards among, money, &c.
6. kyö, or kyoh :—as in the
preceding, with the addition of
a liquid before the vowel.
7. koo:—as oo in cool,
pool, &c.
8. kyoo (or kew):—like the
preceding, the vowel differing
only in the addition of a liquid,
or as eup in the word pew.
9. kii —the vowel nearly
resembles an abrupt French
u; or it is like 00 in foot.
10. ke, or kee –the vowel
as e in me, or as ee in keel.
11, ká ;—the a is slightly
abbreviated as the a-in fang.
This vowel is used in combina-
tion with the 10th vowel, e, to
form the diphthong ae, which .
is pronounced as the Chinese
word hae,f or nearly as the
in high.
Second co". UMN.
12. na:—the consonant is the
same as the English n, both a
the beginning and ending of
words; as an initial, however, it
appears to be sometimes chang-
ed into d, and to be dropped or
very slightly enunciated before
the 2d, 4th, 6th, 8th, and 10th,
or liquid vowels. The vowels,
in this and all the succeeding
columns, have the same pro-
nunciation as in the first co-
lumn.
13. nya, or 'ya. -
14. no (or sometimes, dó).
15. nyö, neue, or yo.
16. nā, or noh.
17. með, nyoh, or yoh, like
the Chinese neo.f
18. noo.
19. nyoo, new, or yoo.
20. nii,
21. ne, nyee, or yee.
22. ná.
Third column.
23. ta:—the consonant is like
the English t , before the liquid
vowels, it is sometimes pro-
nounced nearly as teh or simi-
lar to the tia in Christian.
24. tya or tcha, -or between
t and to?.
* Like the character
25. to.
26. työ or tcho.
keué.
# Like the sound of the character # hae.
f. Like that of #: netj.
[1]\4








1833.
1:37
The Corean Syllabary.
27. td, or toh.
28. työ, tyoh, or tchö.
29. too.
30. tyoo.
31. til or too.
32. tee.
33. ta.
Fourth column.
34. la, na, ra, or nia. This
consonant appears to be some-
times a combination, when at
the beginning of a word, of the
two letters n and l, but is more
frequently l or r interchange-
ably; as a final, it is always
either l or r. -
35. lya, nya, rya, or ya.
36. 16, no, rö, or n!6.
37. lyö, nyö, ryo, or yo.
38. loh, noh, or roh.
39. lyoh, nyoh, ryoh, or yoh.
40. loo, noo, or roo.
4ſ. Iyoo, myoo, ryoo, or yoo.
42. lü, nü, rii, niú, (or loo,
&c.)
43.” lee, ree, nee, or yee.
44. lá, rā, or nå.
Fifth column.
45. ma or ba;—the conso-
nant is m, occasionally inter-
changeable with b, having the
same powers as those conso-
mants in English; but they are
often very slightly enunciated
before the liquid vowels.
46.4 mya, bya, or 'ya.
, 47, mo, or bo. . . . tº ,
48. , myo or byo.
49... mo, moh, or byoh.
50. ºf myoh, or byoh, , , s , ,
51.. moo, or boo... . . . .
52. myoo, or byoo. -
53. mil (or moo), or bú. . . . .
54. mee, or bee, t": "...”
55. ma, or bà. , , , . . . . . .
Sixth Colu MN.
56. pa:—the consonant is
the common p, and does not
vary its pronunciation in any
position. - -
57–66. pya, &c. The same
vowels as in the preceding co-
lumns follow the consonant p,
in the same order.
Seventh colusin.
67. sa, or sha:—these ap-
pear to be the correct sounds
of this syllable, but it is some-
times confounded with the 89th
syllable, tsa.
68. sya, or shya:—it is rath-
er before the liquid vowels than
the others that the sound of
sh is ſound: the y is then drop-
ped or nearly so, being read sha,
rather than shya. -
69–77. so, or sho, &c., the
vowels as in the preceding co-
lumns.
Eighth column.
78. a, or nga:-as an initial
it is generally silent, sometimes
however assuming the nasal
sound of ng, or the harsher
power of g; as a final, 'it i
always the nasal ng.” - - -
79. ya... - - . . . ;
80. , 6, gö or ngã. . . . .
81. yo. .
82. oh, or ngoh. ... -
83. yoh. - . .
84. oo, or ngoo.
85. yoo. " . . .
86. ii, oo, or ngoo.
87. e, or ngee. . . .
88, a, or ngã. - - -
- Ninth column.
89. , tst, or cha: these two
powers of the consonant are
• From the Comparative Vocabulary to which we have before referred.
it would appear, that this consonant is sometimes used to express the sound
of z.
character in its ordinary form.
R.
It is then written in the form of a triangle, to distinguish it from the


138 The Corean
Syllabary. July,
commonly confounded and in-
terchangeable.
90–99. tsya, or chya, &c.
the vowels as before. -
TENth column.
100. ts'ha :—the only differ-
ence between the syllables of
this and the last column, is
the insertion of an "aspirate
before the vowel; the consonant
is confounded both with ch and
sh. -
101–110. , ts'hya, &c. The
same vowels as in the preceding
columns.
Eleventh column.
| ll. k'ha :—the consonant is
the same as that of the first co-
lumn, excepting the addition of
an aspirate.
112–121. k'hya, &c., the
vowels as before.
Twelfth coluxin.
tha:-the consonant as
in the third column, with the
addition of an aspirate.
123–132, t'hya, &c., as in
preceding columns.
122,
Thirteenth coluxin.
133–148–p'ha, p'hya, &c.
the same as the 6th column,
with the addition of an aspi-
rate.
Fourteenth colux1N.
144–154. ha, hya, &c.—the
same as the Sth coluun, with
an aspirate prefixed.
Fiftee Nth colu MN.
155, oa, or wa This column
exemplifies the inauner in which
the setni-vowel ic is formed
before a, and o, rix, before the
former by prefixing a short o,
and before the latter by pre-
fixing oo.
156, wo.
157. kwa.
158. kwo.
159. swa, or shwa.
160, swo, or shvo.
161. tswa, or chwa.
162. tswo, or chwö.
163. k'hwa.
164. k'hwo. * * * * * *
165. ts'hwa. º
166. ts'hwö.
167. hwa. -
168. hwo. *
From this examination of the
powers of the several letters
which enter into the composi-
tion of the Corean syllabary,
it appears that all the sounds
in the English alphabet are
more or less plainly enunciat-
ed, except the flat sound of a,
the sounds of f and v, the two
sounds of j, the open sound of
o, and the compound sound of
z. At the same time we are:
informed, by those who have
been among the people, that
euphony is studied in a very
great degree. Such a language
is well worthy of more minute
examination;—so simple is it
in the form of its letters, and
yet so well capable of express-
ing almost any sounds.
We look forward, with joy,
to the period, now we hope
near at hand, when Corea shall
become better known to the na-
tions of the west, by a friend-
ly and commercial intercourse,
—but far more, by the same
faith in one Lord Christ Jesus,
who shall in due time rule “fron
sea to sea, and from the river
unto the ends of the earth."


1833. Journal of the Asiat. Soc.—N. Zealand. 139
'I'HE Journal of the Asi-
Atic Society of Bengal. Edited
by JAMEs PRINsep, F. R. s.
Calcutta.
The first volume of this pe-
riodical—published in twelve
monthly nuinbers, during the
year 1832,-contains nearly 600
octavo pages, neatly printed;
which are replete with original
literary and scientific matter.
The work is embellished with
numerous plates, illustrative of
the subjects of which it treats.—
Among the able contributors to
the work, we observe the names
of H. H. Wilson, author of the
Analyses of the Puranas; Rev.
R. Everest; Major H. Burney,
resident at the Burmese court;
and Alexander Csoma de Köros.
Of this latter gentleman, the ed-
itor of the Journal remarks;–
- “Mr. Alexander Csoma's in-
defatigable labors in opening
to us a first acquaintance with
the literature of Tibet, will be
estimated as it deserves by li-
terary men—a contracted circle
perhaps, because deep erudi-
tion and study are requisite to
form critics capable of appre-
ciating the nature and bearing
of his peculiar researches upon
the ‘‘history, languages, and
religions of other nations, both
ancient and modern. All may
however feel sensible of the de-
votion, zeal, and perseverance,
which are necessary to lead a
inan, alone and unpaid, into a
distant and wild country, to
learn its language, and study
its people at the ſountain head.
The volumes of notes which
Mr. Csoma has presented to the
Asiatic Society, will, it is hop-
ed, be published in their Re-
searches at length.” -
Three numbers of the Jour-
nal for the current year, have
recently come to hand; they
more than equal the previous
numbers. The work is a mo-
del of what we should like to
see published in China.
New ZEALAND.—A Narrative
of nine inonths' residence in
New Zealand, in 1827, “ by
Augustus Earle, draughtsman
to his majesty's surveying ship,
the Beagle,” is noticed in the
Edinburgh Review for January
1833. “The New Zealanders,”
according to the reviewer, “are
decidedly the most interesting
savages on the globe. They
combine, in the highest degree
all that is terrible, with all that
RELIGIOUS INTELLIGENCE.
is engaging, in that form of
buman society. Our interest
respecting them is singularly
heightened at the present mo-
ment by the new aspect which
they exhibit, and the change
which is in course of being ef.
fected upon them by British in-
tercourse;—an intercourse be-
tween the extremes of civilized
and savage life, by which the
features of both are strangely
and curiously blended.”


14()
JULY,
Recollections of New Zealand.
In the absence of a profound
and philosophic observer, the
reviewer is “very glad " to
have the picture of the New
Zealanders drawn by the pre-
sent author's ‘animated pencil.’
“Its tints are fresh and vivid,
laid on boldly and roughly, like
those which he spreads over
his panoramic canvas;” and
he has thus produced a volume,
“at once extremely amusing
and full of information;” and
yet there are “considerable
portions of it, which require to
~ be carefully sifted.” While we
regret that the able writer of
the Edinburgh has not “care-
fully sifted,” as most surely he
ought to have done, the amus-
ing volume of Mr. Earle, we
are ‘happy to know that an-
other of his majesty's subjects
has recently visited New Zea-
land, and that another volume is
soon to be before the public.
Personal acquaintance with the
gentleman from whose letter
we are about to quote, enables
us to say confidently that his
observations will be worthy of
the fullest credit, though several
of his statements will give “the
most decided negative” to those
of Mr. Earle.—The - letter is
dated Madras, 3d June 1833;
referring to New Zealand, the
writer says:—
“I spent eight months in
Vah Diemen's Land, and four
months and a half in New South
Wales, including in this time a
visit of five weeks to New Zea-
tand. You will recollect the
anxiety which I expressed to
you about this latter country,
and will therefore be prepared
to understand the motives of
iny trip thither. It would real-
ly appear providential, that the
vindication of the much-injured
cause of those missions tshould
have fallen into the hands of
one who has assuredly an equal
claim to veracity and indepen-
dence of judgment, with Mr.
Earle and such like calumnia-
tors of the excellent men and
their labors in the mission in
New Zealand. Earle's book
has appeared in . England, and
I find has attracted considerable
attention; and the Directors of
the Church Missionary Society
have alluded to it in the num-
ber of the “Church Missionary
Record ” for last September.
These I had not seen until I
returned from New Zealand;
and in my remarks upon what
I saw, it is remarkable enough
that I should have noticed sev-
eral things which give, the inost
decided negative to Earle's
statements. I have upon sub-
sequent consideration, resolved
on sending my observations to
the press, and they will proba-
bly appear in London in Janua-
ry next, in an octavo volume
under the title of
“‘Recollections of New Zea-
land in 1833, by a staff officer
of the Indian Army.”—The
entire proceeds (not profits) will
be appropriated to the publica-
tion of the Holy Scriptures in the
New Zealand language. The
work will be completed in about
150 pages; and I hope and pray
it may be of use to the cause of
missions generally.
“In the compass of a letter I
cannot say much respecting
the very interesting country
and people to which I have
alluded. Everything I witness-
ed far exceeded all my expec-
tations. There is a growing at-
tention to religion amongst the


1833.
| 4 |
Palamcotta.
natives; their churches are lit-
erally crowded with most atten-
tive, and apparently devout wor-
shipers. The Sabbath is ob-
served as a day of rest and
cessation from all labor, ge-
nerally in and around the mis-
sion stations. In many of the
native adjacent villages they
have established houses of pray-
er. Many come in from distant
stations on purpose for reli-
gious instruction, saying they
have heard the good news, and
wish to know more about it; and
many there are who have been
brought to repentance and a-
mendment of life, and who are
giving most satisfactory proof
of their being personally and
deeply interested in the bless-
ings of the gospel.” &c. &c.
PALAMcott A.—The ſollow-
ing short extracts are from a
letter, dated Palamcotta, Feb-
ruary 1st, 1833, which was
written by the Rev. Mr. Rhe-
nius, and addressed to Mr. Gutz-
laff by whom it was put into
our hands. With reference to
the progress of truth in Palam-
cottar Mr. Rhenius writes:—
“The Lord's blessing still ac-
companies our labors. In the
last six months, ending with
December, we have had an ad-
dition to our congregations of
599 souls, making the total of
them 9302 souls. In the past
month of January, at least 100
families more have “cast their
idols to the moles and to the
bats.” In one new village alone
are about seventy families which
have cleared their temple of all
their idols and destroyed them.
One of their headmen is now
in my study. But you must
uot forget that it is easier to
cleanse their temple fron idols,
than their hearts. However
the former is a great step to-
wards the latter; and we may
hope that if not all, yet some
of the people are, or will be,
truly converted to God. The
divine word which they are
now learning, will not be in vain.
“In the schools also, which
are nearly one hundred in num-
ber, we have much encourage-
ment; the Lord is perfecting
praise to himself from the
mouths of these children. Re-
cently in one of our schools, a
boy about twelve years old, and
of a newly established congre-
gation, became very ill, and
there was no hope of his re-
covery. His father asked him
whether he wished to go to
Christ, or to stay here still long-
er. The boy replied; “I should
like to learn still more of the
catechism, but I should like
also to go to Christ;"—and
then addressed his father thus:
“Father, have you still any
idols in the house? If you
have, get them all away, and
keep to the gospel.” A heathen
physician refused to give him
medicine, because the parents
had become Christians; the boy
hearing of it, said, “never mind,
I do not want his medicine, I
have a heavenly Physician.”—
He died with joy, and the pa-
rents instead of repining and
mourning, made a feast. When
the Christian and heathen neigh-
bors who came to visit them,
saw this and expressed their
surprise, the father said: ‘Why
should we mourn ? This is the
marriage day of my boy; may
we all die as this our boy did.'
Does not this show the power-
ful grace of God . . . . . . . * *


142
JUI.Y,
Journal of Occurrences.
JOURNAL OF OCCURRENCES.
We subjoin the following short
translation of the “ order of rites
observed in receiving the in perial
mandate, raising lainentation, and
laying aside (the mourning) clothes.
on occasion of the grand ceremony
following the demise of an empress.”
It has been lately circulated in Can-
ton as a supplement to the daily court
circular.
When the imperial mandate, writ-
ten on yellow paper, comes down
the river, an officer is iminediately
deputed to receive aud guard it, at
the imperial landing place. The
master of ceremonies leads the of.
ficer, and directs him to receive the
mandate with uplifted hands, land
it, deposit it safely in the dragon
dome (a kind of carriage borne by
sixteen or thirty-two men); and
spread it out in proper form. The
civil and military officers, in plain
dresses, then kneel down in order,
in the Sunny-side pavilion, and so
remain until the mandate has passed.
When they have risen, the officer
leads the procession to the grand
gate of the examination court;
and the civil and military officers
then first enter, the “most public
hall,' and there kneel down,-the
civilians on the east side, and the
military on the west,-until the dra-
gon dome has passed; after which
they rise and wait till the dome
has entered the hall of the constella-
tion Kwei." In this hall an embroider-
ed yellow curtain, and incense table,
must previously be prepared, and an
officer he sent to receive with re-
verence the imperial mandate and
safely lay it on the table. When .
this has been done, all the officers
enter; upon which, the master of
ceremonies cries out, “Range your-
selves in order—Perform. the cere-
. The DEAth of the EMPREss, on
the 10th of June last, has been a
frequent topic of conversation during
the present month. The nature of
her disease, and the length of her
illness do not appear; but it seems
that she had long been in bad health.
An imperial edict is before us, on
the subject; in which formality and
tenderness are strangely blended. His
majesty after mentioning the dates
of his marriage with her, and of her
elevation to the title of empress,
states the connubial affection which
has existed between them for twen-
ty-six years, as being “known to all
the palace.” Then, unable to dwell
upon the loss of this “interior as-
sistant,” he proceeds to appoint offi-
cers to superintend all the necessary
rites of mourning. The principal of
these officers are his majesty's brother
Tuntsin wang, and his brother-in-
law Hengan.
We should not have expected, in
such a country as China, to have
found any uncertainty as to the
mourning ceremonies to be observed.
In Canton, two or three different or-
ders have appeared on the subject.The
final one was to this effect;—that
mo officer shall have his head shav-
ed during one hundred days, nor
have any marriage in his family dur-
ing twenty-seven days, nor play on
any musical instrument during one
year; and that the soldiers and peo-
ple shall not shave their heads for one
month, nor engage in marriages
during seven days, nor play on any
musical instrument during one hun-
dred days.—Other marks of mourn-
ing are the use of blue ink in the
public offices, in place of red;
and the removal of the red fringe
which usually ornaments the Chi-
nese caps.
* “In the midst of the seraglio, the constellations Kurei and Peih shed a
brilliant lustre.”—Chinese classics.


1833.
143
Journal of Occurrences.
muny of thrice kneeling, and nine
times knocking the head, rise."
The Inaster of ceremonies then re-
quests to have the mandate read
aloud; and the public official reader
raises up the inandate to do so.
Must. of cer. “Officers—all kneel
—hear the proclamation read-(and
when the reading is concluded he
continues)—rise-raise lamentation.”
The officers do so accordingly.
...After, the lamentation, the reader
places the inandate on the yellow
table, and the master of ceremonies
calls... out,-" deliver the imperial
mandate.” An officer is then sent
to the yellow table, who raises up
the mandate, and delivers it to the
governor, kneeling. The governor
having received it, rises, and deliv-
ers it to the pooching sze, also
kneeling; and he, in turn, rises and
delivers it to his chief clerk, likewise
kneeling. The clerk rises and takes
it to the hall of Tsze-wei (in the
pooching sze's office), to be printed
on yellow paper.
Mast. of cer. “Office's—all put
on mourning dresses.” The officers
then retire; when they have chang-
ed their dresses, the master of ce-
remonies leads them back, and gives
the order, “arrange yourselves, thrice
kneel and nine times knock head-
rise—raise lamentatation-(after la-
mentation)—eat." The officers then
go out to the hall of abstinence:
where they eat a little, the civil and
military each taking their respective
sides... The master of ceremonies
then cries—“retire.” They retire to
the “public place,’ and in the evening
reassemble, and perform the same ce-
remonies. At night, they sleep in the
public place, separate from their fam-
ilies. The same ceremonies are per-
formed, in the morning and even-
ing of the two following days, after
which the officers reurn to their
ordinary duties.
When the mandate has been co-
pied, an officer is sent with it to
the hall of the constellation Kwei, to
place it on the yellow table, and an-
other is sent to burn incense and keep
respectful charge of it for twenty-
seven days, after which it is deliver-
ed to the pooching sze, and sent
hack to the Board of Rites. On the
27th day, the officers assemble as
before, and, after the same ceremo-
nies of lamentation have been gone
through, the master of ceremonies
gives the order—“take off mourn-
ing—put on plain clothes—remove
the table of incense.” All then re-
turn hoine, and the mourning cere-
inonies are at an end.
Inundation.—Along the banks of
some of the rivers of China, the
country is frequently deluged, and
cattle, grain, and houses, with the
inhabitants are swept away. In the
south of China, such inundations are
not very frequent. Though considera-
ble part of the province of Canton
is low ground, yet the waters seldom
rise and break through the embank-
ments, so as to destroy extensively
the habitations of men or the pro-
ductions of the soil.—Very heavy
rains began to fall early in this month,
and on the 9th and 10th instant, the
water stood in some districts a few
miles west of Canton, more than
ten feet above the ordinary mark.
It was a very awful visitation. Ten
thousand lives, it is said, have been
lost. This is doubtless somewhat
above the truth; though the real num-
ber cannot, we think, be below five
or six thousand. A native Christian
whose house and paddy were washed
away thus writes: -
“I find on my return that my
family, old and young, have been
reserved in safety by the care of our
j Father. But one of our mud
houses, and part of another have
been washed away. The other little
houses are much injured by the wa-
ter. In this world, bodily afflictions
or mental anguish are the lot of men;
but those of us who know some-
thing of the mysteries of the gospel
can cast our cares on the Almighty
Father, and wait for his help. It is
ours to be watchful and persevere
in adherence to the Gospel even
unto death.
“By the recent inundation, (the
natives call it shºuy-tsae—water judg-
ment) upwards, of a thousand per-
sons have been drowned at Fuhshan.
At Shuntil district I do not know cer.
tainly how many have been drown-
ed, and how many houses have fallen.
At the western plantation and mulber-
ry gardens in Nanhae districts, five or
six hundred were drowned: and of
houses, great and small, about eight
hundred fell. At the villages on the
right and leſt of my home, about a
thousand fell, and about a hundred
people were drowned—(the rest


144
Journal of Occurrences.
escaped to an adjacent hill). Although
this is a calamity sent from heaven
yet it must be traced to the rebel-
lion and wickedness of man as a
cause. When I see those who have
suffered, my mind is increasingly fill-
ed with awe; and I would cherish a
fear of offending the living and true
God. Pray for me. Sir. that God
may preserve me from sin. and from
disgracing the religion of our Sa-
viour, and then I shall be happy.
“I have heard that the fooyuen
and the leang-taou [superintendent
of the grain department] have sub-
scribed a few hundred dollars, and
have sent a few officers with cakes
to distribute to the distressed suffer-
ers in Nanhae and Shuutih districts:
but at Kaouyaou and Kaouming. the
districts where I live. (the land be.
ing higher) no assistance has been
sent, and the distress of the people
is truly great.”
RETIREM Ext of AN AGED states.
was.-In-China the officers of go-
vernment are regarded as bond-ser-
wants of the emperor, to be kept as
long as he pleases to retain them.
He shows tenderness as much in
permitting them to resign, as in em-
ploying and promoting them. Loo
rts-roo, the fourth in order— of the
cabinet ministers. has been ill for
some months back. and, his health
not improving, has presented a very
earnest request to he allowed to re-
tire. This request is often a mere
matter of form. when an officer has
been long indisposed: but in the
present instance it appears to be of
a more serious nature: and his ina-
jesty has reluctantly granted it, lest
the anxieties he must feel respecting
the duties of his office, should prove
detrimental to his recovery. He is
therefore allowed to retire with the
title of “guardian of the heir appar.
ent." and the allowances and full
salary of his office.
The Cochivch is Ese Escort of the
man-of-war junk, driven last February
*** -
on the coast of Cochinchina and now
brought back, as mentioned in the
last number. has not. it appears.
come empty, but are accompanied
by two large junks, fully laden. They
have therefore moved their quarters
from the Honan temple to one of the
bong-merchant's warehouses, and
the governor has written to Peking,
to ascertain whether or not the du-
ties shall -be reinitted. in return for
their kindness to the wrecked mari-
ners. The officers forming the escort
are six in number, and two of them.
we bear, are no new travelers, having
sailed, in his Cochinchinese majes-
ty's vessels, to Calcutta, the straits
of Malacca. and Manila:—yet they
are mere stammerers except in their
own language. -
The commercial business of junks
trading between Cochinchina or Si-
am and Canton is conducted by two
of the hong-merchants, in annual
rotation. It is this year the turn of
the two junior hongs, established
only last year, to conduct this trade:
the governor has therefore ordered
the two senior merchants to assist
them in attending to the wants of
the Cochinchinese visitors.
Ixstrº Ecriox Ix Szkchtex—There
has of late been some insubordina-
tion on the part of the foreign tribe
called Tsing-ke, attached to this pro-
vince: which has occasioned a large
expenditure of treasure on the part
of the imperial government. Nayen-
paou, a brother of the disgraced
statesman Nayenching, lately de-
ceased.) is Mantchou general of the
province, and has at present direc-
tion of the war. The Chinese com-
mander-in-chief Kwei-han, a general
of 30 year's standing, has died in
consequence of cold taken during a
successful campaign in which he
was engaged against the insurgents.
His majesty conters posthumous ti-
tles on him accordingly, and also
commands particular attentions to
he paid to the members of his sur-
viving family. - -
—-eOe--—
- º - - -
Thr weath ER. during several days near the close of this month. has
been unusually hot. On the 25th the thermometer stood at 93 : it rose to
95° the next day: and on Saturday the 27th, it stood for five hours at 96".
During those three days, a scorching wind blew almost incessantly from the
north and west-
To-day, (July 31st.) as on the two preceding days, rain
has fallen in plentiful showers; and the therinometer stands at Sö'.


146 Description of the AUG.'
The scenery around the city in the adjacent
country is rich, and diversified, but does not pre-
sent anything bold or grand. On the north and
northeast of the city, the country is hilly and
mountainous. In every other direction a wide pros-
pect opens before you. The rivers and canals,
which are very numerous, abound with fish, and
are covered with a great variety of boats, which
are continually passing to and from the neighbor-
ing towns .# villages. Southward from the city,
as far as the eye can see, the waters cover a
considerable portion, perhaps one third part, of the
whole surface. Rice fields and gardens occupy the
low lands, with only here and ºthere a few little
hills and small groves of trees rising up to diver-
sify the otherwise unbroken surface. The city
itself—including all, both within and without the
walls, is not of very great extent; and though
very populous, derives its chief importance from its
extensive domestic and foreign trade. T-
. The city of Canton is one of the oldest cities
in this part of the empire, and since its foun-
dations were first laid, has undergone numerous
changes. It is not easy, and perhaps not possible,
to determine its original site and name, or to as-
certain the time in which it was first built. But
although it is not important to decide either of
these questions, it may be interesting to the read-
er to have a brief account of what the Chiflese
themselves narrate, respecting one of their largest
--
and most populous and wealthy cities.
More than 4000 years ago, according to the Chi-
nese classics, the celebrated Yaou commanded one
of his ministers to repair to Nan-keaou,-which
was also called Ming too, “the splendid capital,”
and govern it and the surrounding country. Nan-
keaou then included the site of the present city of
Canton, and belonged to the southern regions of
Yang, which last formed one of the twelve states


1833, City of Canton, 147
into which the whole world (China) was shortly
after divided. These ‘southern regions' seem to
have been very extensive, and were subsequently
known by different names, as Keaduche, Keaou-
chow, Lingnan, Kwangchow, Nanhºe, Nanyué,
Piliyué, Yué, and Yuétung. This latter name is
often used in classical writings and official docu-
ments, at the present time, to designate the prov-
ince of Canton. - -
During the time of the Shang dynasty, which fell
1123. B. c., the inhabitants of these southern re-
gions first began to pay tribute to the emperors of
China.—Soon after the next, the Chow dynasty,
took the throne, the empire was extended; many
improvements were introduced; the people began
to engage in agriculture; and when the “son of
heaven received tribute from the four quarters of
the earth,” some of the tribes of Keaouchow
(which then included Canton,) “brought crabs and
frogs, others brought snakes and crickets.” These
southern tribes were often very troublesome to the
rulers of China.-About 630 B. c., Ching Wangyun,
a virtuous and benevolent man, became master of
the country of Tsoo, and sent tribute to the em-
peror, who directed him to subdue his disorderly
neighbors on the south, that they might not disturb-
the tranquillity of the Middle Kingdom. Tsoo was
then a powerful state, and the tribes of the south
soon submitted. w
The historians of Canton are able to trace the
origin of their city to the time of Nan-wang, one
of the last emperors of the Chow dynasty, who
reigned 2000 years ago. The city, which was
then called Nan-woo ching—“the martial city of
the south,” was surrounded by nothing more than
a kind of stockade conposed of bamboo and mud;
and perhaps was not very much unlike some of the
modern “strongholds” of the Malays. It was
at first of narrow dimensions, but was afterwards
enlarged, and seems to have been more than once


148 Description of the AUG.
removed from one place to another; and at differ-
ent times, like the country itself, it has been call-
ed by different names, which it received either
from its situation or from some passing occurrence.
One of its earliest names, and one which is still
used in books, was Yang ching, “the city of Rams.”
This designation was obtained from the following
occurrence, viz.:-Five genii, clothed with garments
of five different colors, and riding on rams º:
different colors, met at the capital; each of the /
rams bore in his mouth a stalk of grain having
six ears, and presented them to the people of º
district, to whom the genii thus speak:—
Yuen tsze human hwae, yung woo huang ke:
May famine and dearth never visit your markets.
Having uttered these words, they immediately dis--
appeared, and the rams were changed into stone.
—From this same occurrence, the city is also call-
ed “the city of Genii,” and “the city of Grain;”
and one of their temples is named “the temple
of the Five Genii.” This temple stands near one
of the gates of the city which is called “the gate
of the Five Genii;” and in it the five stone rams
are to be seen to this day.—There are many
other legends interwoven with the history of the
city, but we need not stop here to narrate them.
During the reign of the famous Tsin Chewang,
about two centuries and a half before the Christian
era, the people of the south rose in open rebellion,
and the emperor sent thither 500,000 men to sub-
due them. These soldiers were divided into five
armies, one of which was stationed at Pwanyu.
For three full years these soldiers neither relaxed
their discipline, nor put off their armor. At length
however, provisions failed; the people become des-
perate, and made a furious onset against their inva-
ders; the imperial troops were routed; their com-
mander slain, and the blood flowed several tens
of le, or Chinese miles.—But these rebellious tribes


1833, City of Canton. | 49
shortly after submitted to the founder of the Han
dynasty, two centuries before our era. In the time
of Woo-te, Nan-yué included nine of the thirty-six
keun, or principalities, into which ( h ua was
then divided; and the city of Canton was called
Nanhae keun, “the principality of Nanhae;” and
Puranyu was a distinct hečn.
In the reigh of Kečn-gan, A. D. 210, we first
meet with Kwangchow, which was then the name
of an extensive territory, and is now the name of
the department which includes the city of Canton.
During the two next centuries the changes and
divisions were very frequent, and too numerous to
be mentioned. In the time of "I'ečn-keen, or
Woo-te, “the martial monarch”—whose reign clos-
ed A. D. 543, the people of Canton sent a piece of
fine cloth as tribute to the emperor; but that hardy
warrior was so displeased with its luxurious soft-
ness that he rejected it, and issued a mandate for-
bidding the manufacture of any more cloth of so
fine a quality. During the reign of the same em-
peror, Kwangchow was divided; and a part of it
was called Kweichow, which is now Kweilin, the
capital of the province of Kwangse, . In this di-
vision the Chinese find the origin of the names of
the two Kwang provinces, namely, Kwangtung
sång, or “the wide eastern province;” and Kwang-
se sting, “the wide western province.”—It should
be observed here, that this province was not ac-
tually called Kwangtung sång until a subsequent
period. We first meet with the name Kwangtung
in the reign of Shaouting of the Sung dynasty,
about 1150. Dnring the reign of the next emper-
or, and so until the close of the dynasty, it was
called Kwangtung loo; under the Yuen dynasty
it, was called Kwangtung taou; and received its
present name, Kwangtung sång in the reign of
Hungwoo, the first emperor of the Ming dynasty.
It was at the same time also (about A. D. 1868)
that Kwangchow, the principal district of the


150 Description of the A cc.
province, was first called a foo; previously it had
been usually called Kwangchow loo. .
For three or four centuries previous to this time,
considerable intercourse was maintained between
the inhabitants of India and the people of Canton—
But it was not until about A. D. 700, and in the
time of the Tang dynasty, that a regular market-
for foreign commerce was opened at Canton, and an
imperial commissioner appointed to receive-the-
“fixed duties” in behalf of the government.- “Ex-
traordinary commodities and curious manufactures
began to be introduced;” and in 705 the famous
pass was cut by Chang Kewling, through the Mei-
ling chain in order to facilitate intercourse between
Canton and the more northern parts of the empire.
Multitudes of trading vessels now flocked to Can--
ton; but in 795, either because the extortions were
insupportable, or from some failure in affording
proper inducement to the merchants, they all
deserted the place, and repaired to Cochinchina.
Near the close of the next century, the Cochin-
chinese came by land, and made war on Canton;
provisions became scarce, and large vessels were
built to bring grain from the province of Fuhkeen.
After the fall of the Tang dynasty, A. D. 906,
there arose, reigned and fell, all within the period
of about fifty-three years, five dynasties. To the
first of these the people of Canton sent tribute of
gold, silver, ivory, and various other valuable com-
modities, to the amount of five millions of taels.
In consequence of this, the emperor created Lew-
yen, the principal person concerned in sending the
tribute, king of Canton, under the title of man-hae
trans, “king of the southern sea.” The court of
Canton is represented, at this time, as having been
cruel and extravagant in the extreme:—“criminals
were boiled, and roasted, and flayed, and thrown on
spikes, and were forced to fight with tigers and
elephants.” The horrid tale of these swful cruelties
shocked the founder of the Sºns dynasty, who in the


1833. City of Canton. 15.1
fourteenth year of his reign, A. D. 964, declared it to
be his duty to rescue from evil the people of this
region. A prodigy was now seen in the heavens,
“all the stars flowed to the north ;” and in the ensu-
ing year the people obtained peace and tranquillity.
he first emperors of the Snng dynasty appear
to have studied much the welfare of Canton, whose
inhabitants then lived in a very barbarous state.
Witches and wizards were prohibited ; sorcery was
interdicted; and the temples, which had been built for 2
the practice of superstitious rites, were thrown down
by order of government. The people were forbid-
den, also “to kill men to sacrifice to demons;” and
to relieve the sufferers from the noxious diseases,
which were prevalent, dispensaries of medicines were
established. Useless and extravagant articles of
apparel were discountenanced; and pearls and or-
naments of gold for headdresses were disallowed.
government likewise forbade expeditions against
Cochinchina, reprobating the idea of distressing the
people from a mere covetous desire of gaining
useless territory. In 1067, during the reign of the
fifth emperor of this dynasty, the city of Canton
was inclosed by a wall, at an expense of 50,000
taels. This wall was about two English miles in
circumference, and was built for a defence against
the people of Cochinchina, who had frequently
invaded and plundered Canton. -*
The founders of the Yuen dynasty, who became
masters of the throne in 1279, rushed in upon the
south of China like bloodhounds. Towns and vil-
lages were laid in ruins, and such multitudes of
the people were slain, that “the blood flowed in
sounding torrents.” For a time the foreign com-
merce of Canton was interrupted; but when peace
and trauquillity were restored, commerce began
again to revive. In 1300, an “abundance of ves-
sels came to Canton;” and not long afterwards the
ports of the provinces of Chekeång and Fuhkeen
were also opened for the reception of foreign ships.


- - ar
1j2 Description of the AUG.
Fernão Peres de Andrade seems to have been
the pioneer in European commerce to China by
the cape of Good Hope. He reached Canton in
1517—during the peaceful and most prosperous
times of the Ming dynasty. Spanish, Dutch, and
English adventurers, soon followed the Portuguese.
And the ports of Canton, Macao, and Teen-pih
in this province; those of Ningpo and Chusan in
Cheketing; and that of Amoy in Fuhkečn, became
large marts for European commerce.
We pass now to the time when the present
Tartar family gained possession of the throne of
China. In the third year of Shunche, A. D. 1647,
the inhabitants of the city and province of Canton
“had rest and tranquillity;” and the divisions and
government continued as they had been during the
time of the preceding reign. But this quiet state
of affairs was not long to be enjoyed. Yungleih,
endeavoring to revive the authority of the Ming
family, raised the standard of rebellion; imperial
armies, composed partly of Tartar and partly of
Chinese soldiers, were dispatched from Peking; and
the provinces of Fuhkečn, Kwangse, and Kwang-
tung soon submitted—excepting only the city of
Canton, which resolved to try the fortune of war.
The place was well prepared for defence, and the
people for obstinate resistance. The river on the
south, and the ditches on the east and west of the
city, rendered it accessible to the enemy only on the
north; for the Tartars “had neither boats nor skill
to manage them, but the city had both the one and
the other,” and a free navigation of the river south-
ward to the sea. The garrison of the city too was
strengthened by great numbers who fled hither for
safety. For more than eleven months the Tartars
continued to make frequent assaults, and were as
often repulsed and driven back with great slaughter.
The final capture of the city is described by
Martin Martini, a jesuit who was at that time in
the south of China, in the following words:—


1833. city of Cantom. lj.3
“This courage [of the people of Canton] made
the Tartars fall upon a resolution of beating down
the walls of the city with their great cannon, which
had such an effect, that they took it on the 24th
of November, 1650; and because it was remarked
that they gave to a prefect of the city the same
office he had before, it was suspected that it was
delivered by treason. The next day they began to
plunder the city; and the sackage continued till
the 5th of December, in which they spared neither
man, woman, nor child; but all whoever came in their
way were cruelly put to the sword; nor was there
heard any other speech, but kill, kill these barbarous
rebels. Yet they spared some artificers to conserve
the necessary arts, as also some strong and lusty
men, such as they saw able to carry away the pillage
of the city. But finally, December 6th, came out
an edict, which forbade all further vexation, after
they had killed a hundred thousand men, besides
those that perished several ways during the siege.”
Native writers, while they differ very little from
the above accounts, add other particulars, some of
which we subjoin. The imperial troops were com-
manded by Shang-ko-he and Kang-ke-woo, two
Tartar officers of high rank, who had orders first
to subdue, and then to remain and govern the
southern provinces. Of the rebels, Too Yung-ho
was the commander-in chief, who, as soon as he
saw that the Tartars were victorious, deserted his
men and fled by sea to Hainan. The second in
command was Fan Ching-gan, the traitorous prefect,
who by plotting with the enemy enabled them to
enter the city. According to a manuscript account,
the whole number of slain, during the siege and
the plundering of the city, was 700,000;-"every
house was left desolate.” The Tartars, after they
had finished this work of death, took up their
quarters in the old city, where they still live, and
civil officers were appointed to reside in the new
city. It is said, that in the old city only one house,
T


154 Description of the AUG.
built before the sacking of the city, is standing
at the present time. The destruction of property,
as well as of life, was very great. All prospect
of escaping with their treasures being cut off.
many of the people dug holes in the ground and
there deposited their money in earthen jars; these
are sometimes found by persons when sinking wells,
or breaking up the old foundations of houses and
temples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ;
* From these ruins the city has gradually risen;
and up to the present period, has increased in
population, wealth, and influence. Bands of pirates
and robbers, especially during those periods of
misrule which generally attended a change of dy-
nasty, have frequently harrassed the people and
embarrassed their commerce. Even to the present
time, lawless rovers prowl in the neighborhood
of the city, and often carry off property, and some-
times human victims; but they are too few and
timid to hazard any open attack on the inhabitants,
Foreigners have suffered very little from the de-
predations of these freebooters, and are even much
inore secure than the natives themselves. ' ' ' " "
4. i i + 1
, - " . . . ' ' ' ' - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : * ~ ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;
Without further remarks relative to the history
of this city, we now proceed to take a survey of it
in its present condition... In every age of the world;
and in every country, large cities have exerted &
powerful, controlling influence on the moral, politi-
cal and commercial destinies of nations. 'I'his per-
haps is true in its fullest extent in old and po-
pulous countries. The ancient cities of western Asia.
and of Egypt, and the metropolis of the Roman
empire, did very much to promote civilization, and
the cultivation of arts, sciences and literature. In
modern Europe the influence of “these worlds in
miniature” is very clearly seen. Take for examu
ple the cities of northern Italy. “In spite of their
bloody contests with each other, and the vices to
which these gave rise, they must be considered as
~


1833. City of Canton. I jj
having lighted the torch of modern civilization.”
Elsewere, and in numerous instances, the same
position is illustrated. Cities—comparatively speak-
ing—rose rapidly; “and wealth, industry, know-
ledge and equal laws spread from them through
Europe.” In India the influence of large towns and
cities is noticeable. In China, it is more difficult
for us to estimate accurately the kind and extent
of power which they possess and exert. That it is
very great, there can be no doubt. But whether
Canton is on the whole exerting a salutary or an
injurious influence on the Chinese empire, can best
bé determined after we have surveyed its extent,
and the various institutions, resources, occupations,
and character of its inhabitants. - -
‘. . That part of the city, which is surrounded by
a wall, is built, nearly in the form of a square,
and is divided by a wall running from east to
west, into two parts. The northern, which is much
the largest part, is called the old city; the south-
ern part is called the new city. According to
some foreign, as well as native books, the northern
part was once “composed, as it were, of three
different towns, separated by very fine high walls,
but so conjoined, that the same gate served to go
out from the one and enter the other.” These
divisions ceased long ago to exist. The new city
was built at a much later period than the old. The
entire circuit of the wall which now includes both
divisions of the city, is variously estimated by the
Chinese. At a quick step we have walked the
whole distance in little less than two hours, and
think it cannot exceed six English miles. On the
south side the wall runs nearly due east and west,
parallel to the river, and distant from it perhaps
fifteen or twenty rods. On the north, where the
city “rests on the brow of the hill,” the wall
takes a serpentine course; and its base at the
highest point on the hill is perhaps 200 or 300 feet
above the surface of the river.


136 - Description of the A UG.
The walls are composed partly of stone and
partly of bricks: the former is chiefly coarse sand-
stone, and forms the foundation and the lower part
of the walls and the arches of the gates; the kat-
ter are small and of a soft texture. In several
places, particularly along the east side of the city,
the elements have made such inroads on the walls
as to afford satisfactory evidence, that before the
prowess of a modern foe they would present but
a feeble resistance. They rise nearly perpendicular-
ly, and vary in height from twenty-five to thirty-
five or forty feet. In thickness they are twenty or
twenty-five feet. They are the highest and the
most substantial on the north side, evidently so
built because in that direction hostile bands would
be the inost likely to make an attack. A line of
battlements, with embrasures at intervals of a few
feet, are raised on the top of the wall round the
whole city; these the Chinese call ching-jin, literal-
ly, city men; and in the rear of them there is a
broad pathway. There are two “wings,” or short
walls, one at the southeast, and the other at the
southwest corner of the city, which stretch out
from the main walls; these were designed to block
up the narrow space between the wahs and the
ditches of the city. Through each of these, there is
a gate in every respect similar to those of the city.
The gates of the city are sixteen in number;
four of these lead through the wall which sepa-
rates the old from the new city; so that there are
onty twelve outer gates. Commencing on the north
and passing round to the west, south, and east, the
following are the names of these twelve gates, viz:—
1. Ching-pih mun:—this is the principal gate on
the north; before it is a small semicircular space
surrounded by a wall similar to that of the city;
it forms the entrance for government officers and
the bearers of public dispatches when arriving from
Peking by land : officers not unfrequently come to


1833, City of Canton, 157
Canton in boats, in which case they usually make
their entrance at one of the southern gates.
2. Ching-se mun:—this is the only gate on the
west which leads into the old city; for a Chinese
city this gate is very broad and high—perhaps
fifteen feet wide and twelve high.
3. Ta-ping mun:—this is the only entrance into
the new city on the west; it is similar to the other
western gate, but not so large. -
4. Chuh-lan mun:—this is a small gate, and
the first one you find after passing round the south-
west corner of the city; it is the nearest gate to
the foreign factories.
5. Yew-lan mun:—this is near the Chuh-lan gate,
and like it seems designed chiefly for the convey-
ance of heavy merchandise into the city.
6. Tsing-hae mun:—this perhaps was intended
to be the water gate, as both its situation and name
seem to indicate.
7. Woo-seen mun:—is “the gate of the five genii,”
and has nothing remarkable except its name.
8. Yung-tsing mun:—there is nothing around
this “gate of eternal purity” that can indicate
such a name, but very much to suggest an oppo-
site one; it is moreover the gate which leads to the
field of blood—the royal execution ground.
9. Seaow-man mun:—this “small southern gate.”
is the sixth and last on the south of the city.
10. Yung-gan miºn :-this “gate of eternal rest”
leads into the new city on the east, and corresponds
in every respect with the Ta-ping gate on the west.
11. Ching-tung mun:—this is the only gate on
the east which leads into the old city, and it corres-
ponds with the Ching-se mun on the west, to which
it stands directly opposite.
12. Seaou-pih mun:—this “little northern gate.”
forms a convenient entrance for bringing in water
and provisions, and also building materials, to sup-
ply the northern part of the city.—Having now gone
round the city we pass to the inner gates.


I j}} lºescription of the AUG.
13. A wei-tih mum:—reckoning from the west,
this is the first gate in the wall which separates
the old from the new city. - •
14. Tae-man mun:—“the great southern gate,”
is the second. . . . . . . . . . ; . . . . . . . .
15. Wan-ming...mun is the third: and ºf
16. Ting-hae mun is the fourth, and, last gate.
Of these sixteen gates, the 1st, 2d, 3d, 4th, ; 5th,
6th, 7th, and 13th, as we have numbered: them
above, belong to the Nanhae, and the cther eight
belong to the Pwanyu district. A few soldiers are
stationed at each of the gates, to watch them by
day, and to close and guard them by night. They
are shut at an early hour in the evening and opened
at dawn of day. Except on special occasions no
one is allowed to pass in or out during the night-
watches;–but a sinall fee will usually open the way,
yet always exposes the keepers to punishment. . . . ;
. . " , ; ; ; ; ; ; ( , ! . . . . . . .
" ...We must now extend our description so as to
include the suburbs;–the streets and buildings, of
which differ very little, if at all, from those within
the walls. On the west they spread out nearly
in the form of an isosceles right-angled triangle,
opening to the northwest, having the river on the
south, and the western wall of the city, for its two
equal sides. On the south they occupy the whole
space between the wall and the river. On the east
they are much less extensive than on the west.
There are no buildings on the north except a few
small huts near the principal gate. Taken collec-
tively, the suburbs are scarcely less extensive or less
populous than the city within the walls. -
The streets of Canton are numerous, we have
before us a catalogue containing the names of more
than six hundred, among which we find the “dragon
street;” the “flying dragon street;” the “martial
dragon street;" the “flower street;” “the golden
streets:” the “golden flower street;” and among


1333. City of Canton, 1.59
many more of a similar kind, we meet with a
few which we should not care to translate. There
are several long streets, but most of them are short
and crooked; they vary in width from two to sixteen
feet, but generally they are about six or eight feet
wide, and they are everywhere flagged with large
stones, chiefly granite. The motley crowd that
often throngs these streets is very great indeed.
At a busy hour of the day, the stout, half naked,
vociferating porters, carrying every description of
merchandise, and the nimble sedan bearers, in noise
and bustle make up for the deficiency of carts and
carriages; these together with the numerous tra-
velers, various kinds of retailers, pedlers, beggars,
&c., present before the spectator a scene which
we shall not attempt to describe. n
Not a few of the visitors, and not a little of the
merchandise, brought together here, are conveyed
into the city by means of canals, or ditches. There
are several of these; one of the largest of them ex-
tends along the whole length of the wall on the east
of the city, and another one on the west side. Be-
tween these two, and communicating with them,
there is a third canal which runs along near the
wall on the north side of the new city, so that
boats can enter on the west, pass through the city,
and out at the eastern side; and vice versä. There.
are other, canals in the eastern and western suburbs;
and one in the southern. Into these larger channels
a great number of smaller ones, flow : these the
Chinese call, the “veins of the city.” There
are also several reservoirs; but none of them are
of great extent. Much of the water for the use
of the inhabitants is supplied from the river and
canals; wells are frequent; rain water is employed
also; and for tea, &c., fine wholesome water is
plentifully furnished from several, springs, which
break out on the north of the city, both within and
without the walls.—There are several bridges, some
built of stone, thrown over these canals.


160 .ſ map of Canton. AUG.
A map of the city and suburbs of Canton.
IN the absence of an accurate map of Canton, the accom-
panying one, executed by a native hand—we dare not say
artist,-will afford a tolerable idea of the general plan and
outline of the city. It is a facsimile of one of the best na-.
tive maps, except only in the lettering, in which the Chinese
character has been wholly omitted, and a few Roman letters,
for convenience in reference, placed in their stead.
a a. These letters mark the situation of the Choo keting, or
Pearl river. A small fort, called the French folly, stands in
the river a short distance from the southeast corner of the
city; another fort, called the Dutch folly, stands further up
the river: a little higher up are ledges of rocks, which at
low water are seen above the surface. Beyond the foreign
factories westward, several small canals branch off into the
suburbs; but for a mile or two the river itself is nearly straight.
b. This letter points out on the map the situation of the
foreign factories on the north bank of the river.
c. This letter marks the locality of the Mohammedan
mosque, in the old city near the western gate; it stands erect,
and not inclined as represented on the map. -
d. A native pagoda. This stands north of the mosque, or
Mohammedan pagoda, as it has often been called.
e. A loſty and conspicuous building called the five-storied
pagoda; it stands on the north side of the city.
f. The governor's house; it stands in the new city not far
from the Yew-lan gate.
g. The fooyuen's house, which stands near the centre of
the old city. -
h. House of the tseangkeun or Tartar general; this is
also in the old city, and not far from the two pagodas.
i. The house of the hoppo; it is situated on the south side
of the new city, a few rods east of the Tsing-hae gate.
k. House of the hed-yuen, or literary chancellor of Canton;
it is in the south part of the old city.
1. House of the pooching sze, or treasurer of the provincial
revenue, near the centre of the old city. -
m. House of the ganchá sze, or criminal judge of the pro-
vince, near the house of the literary chancellor.
n. The house of the yen-yun sze, or superintendent of the
salt department; it stands uear the Kwei-tih gate.
o. Kung-yuen; a hall for the reception of literary candidates
at the regular examinations; it stands near the southeast cor-
ner of the old city. -
Yuh-ying-ting; a foundling hospital, on the east of the
city, about half a mile from the walls.
q. Teen-tsze ma-taoui; the execution ground: without the
southern gates, near the river.


. É
D | fºr * N
\º O O /





1833. The Humanity of Womankind. 161
*
MII SC E L L A N I E S.
The HuMANITY OF woxia NkiND.—Travelers among
savages and semi-civilized nations have very free
quently recorded their great obligations to the hu-
mane feelings of kind-hearted women, in relieving
their distresses, and softening the hearts of their
persecutors. There are some instances no doubt
in history of the contrary case, in which proud,
bigoted women have been cruel: but these are the
exception, not the rule. A native correspondent
has brought to our notice a case to illustrate the
first of these remarks. We quote it as given in
the Chinese language. . . .
The woman seized by the police runners of
—, was born in Malacca, and married to an
emigrant from Ta-poo district in Chaouchow. She
bore to him five children, sons and daughters.
The eldest daughter was sixteen, and the eldest
boy, eight or nine. The husband's family name
was Huang, and his name Shing. At Malacca,
he acted as a carpenter, and kept a shop for the
sale of wooden utensils. Afterwards he went to
Singapore, where he accumulated a little money,
and opened a shop for piece-goods and other mis-
cellaneous articles. But latterly trade becoming
dull, his thoughts turned towards home, where his
aged mother was still living. Besides, at Singa-
pore the San-hiſ-hwuy is numerous, and he was
frequently assailed by insult and violence: from the
members of that fraternity, who demanded loans
of money and extorted credit. He therefore sold
off the things in his shop, and had two thousand
dollars or more remaining. . . . .
Ta-poo, his native district, is a place of industry
and economy, where cottages and plats of ground
U ''. --


162 The Humanity of Womankind. AUG,
cau be bought. The women are acquainted with
agriculture, weaving, and cutting wood for fuel. A
boy of only five or six years of age is able to take
care of a buffalo, and a girl of five or six years of
age can spin. Without spinning and weaving, not
a creature “sits and eats,” that is, sits still doing
nothing but consuming food. All work. Three
years' husbandry will leave one year's overplus, as
a provision against famine or drought. And with
the overplus they sometimes trade a little in the
neighboring villages to gain a little money for mar-
riages, and for times of sickness aud funerals. In
that neighborhood somewhat of the custom of the
ancients prevails. One or two thousand dollars
can buy an estate on which a person may have a com-
fortable residence: I should like to live in such a
place and grow old there ; spending half my time
in husbandry, and half in reading books; where
also I might diffuse the knowledge of the true God,
and not spend life in vain.
To this place Hwang wished to return, but he
was seized by the police, with his wife and chil-
dren, and all were subjected to torture as if they
had been robbers or thieves. And there were peo-
ple who told the magistrate that Hwang had twenty
or thirty thousand dollars' worth of property; and
wished him to extort two or three thousand in order
to liberate him and his family. If he would not
disgorge, he was to be sent through the district courts
to the provincial city, with crimes alleged against
him. Hwang was not rich, and he dreaded the
expense of the several courts, as well as being
finally criminated. But God appeared to protect
him, contrary to the machinations of his enemies.
The wife of the magistrate, and her aged mother,
hearing that there was a ###. in the
court, desired to see her. The officers immediately
brought her to the inner hall to see the lady. The .
prisoner prostrated herself and knocked head.
Compassion arose in the lady's heart. The pris-


1833 Chinese Chit-chat. 163
oner's children, both boys and girls, were brought
in sobbing and crying. This increased the sym-
pathy. The lady asked the prisoner why, being
born in a foreign land, she had consented to come
back with her husband. She replied; “Unhappily I
was born in a distant country and became the wife
of a stranger. But I could not part with my
husband and children. I felt compelled to follow
him home.” The lady then exerted all her in-
fluence with the magistrate, and argued thus:–
“This woman's husband being poor went to dis-
tant regions in search of work. He now brings
back his wife and children to nourish an aged
mother. They are good people. You must not
distress them. If you now take their money, and
the many courts they have to pass before they get
home do the same, they will be ruined. If you
send them to Canton under criminal charges, alas !
for their poor old mother, who is standing at her
door and looking with expectation for their arri-
val! You must arrange matters well for them.”
The magistrate now felt for them, and said, that
a wife's following her husband was perfectly rea-
sonable. He forthwith liberated them, furnished
them provisions in abundance, and gave them a
pass, affirming that the wife was born on the coast,
and not in a foreign land—a lie, by the way, in-
tended to defend them against all coasting cruizers,
&c., till they reached their home, that no one might
dare to extort money from them. . . . :
We think it no profanation to remind our
biblical readers of Pilate's wife, who when he
was set down on the judgment seat, sent unto him
saying, “Have thou nothing to do with that just
man, for I have suffered many things this day in
a dream because of him.” “T
ChiNESE chir-ciiAT.—We are no great talkers
with the natives, nor are we mere spectators; our


104 ..Chinese Chit-chat. A cG.
department is rather that of readers. But what
we read is not always addressed to us, and we can-
not therefore call the information, which we some-
times get from our reading, correspondence. We
have occasion to see papers official, general, and
confidential—as to names. From these we collect
our chit-chat, by which we mean the current ru-
mors and opinions of the day, which happeh to
come to our knowledge. We think that a nation's
true character is, in many particulars, better ascer-
tained from the incidental occurrences and opin-
ions, than from more labored and inquisitorial re-
search,--because an “inquisitionist” always forces
a respondent into a cautious and assumed charac-
ter, for the sake of self-defence. . . . .
The late inundation and its destructive conse-
quences are still talked of and written about. One
poor man, when the waters rose, was in the city
of Canton, and his family in the country. He hired
a boat and hastened home; but he found the place
where his cottage had stood, and all the surround-
ing neighborhood one wast sheet of water; and as
he concluded that his wife and chikiren were
“entombed in the stomachs of fishes,” he gave vent
to bitter cries and imprecations, and for ith
essayed to drown himself; but was prevented by
others. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Being now left solitary in the world, he resolved
to have his head shaved and become a priest of
Budha. Some derided him, and others pitied him.
He mentioned his design to one who had acquire
some knowledge of the Christian religion. This
person spoke to him of the providence of Almighty
God, by whom judgment and calainities are sent
down upon mankind, sometimes to punish, the wick-
ed, and sometimes to alarm and awaken the right:
eous. He dissuaded the poor man from the idea
of abandoning the world; and exhorted him rather
to remain in it, to fear God, do good, and prepare
for a future state. Adding, that on this occasion
- - -
—º


1833. Charitable Institutions. . 165
hundreds and thousands have suffered as well as
you; how absurd were they all to become priests
The native friend who thus talked to him, felt a
wish to refer him to the Bible, for he thought
the man well-disposed, but he was afraid before a
stranger to acknowledge his reception of that book,
lest he should on account of Christianity involve
himself in trouble. The poor man seemed to assent
to the advice, but remained silent. wº- -
... ." . . . . . . . . - - * -. §
`-- ,
, wº
CHARITABLE INstitutions.—Of this description
of institutions in Canton, there is one for the aged,
friendless poor, and another for foundling infants;
yet strange to say, instead of being supported by
mative contributions, every “barbarian ship” which
enters, the port pays about nine hundred dollars
towards their support, without even the pleasure of
ever having been informed that the money extorted,
is professedly thus appropriate& We came to this
.."...i. , by the perusal of a letter
from a native, who was discussing the merits of
“rice ships” as they are called, that is, those fo-
reign ships which import rice. Exclusive of what is
called the “measurement charge,” and the “present,”
foreign, ships pay three other sums, which amount
to upwards of thirteen hundred dollars. Nine hun-
dred of these go to the above mentioned institu-
tions,—an arrangeinent which has been sanctioned
by the emperor, and no such arrangement can bo
altered by the local government without an appeal
to his majesty. Four hundred and odd go to the
custom-house soldiers and people to pay for their
food, &c. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . º.
The local government of Canton, in lately dimin.
ishing the charges on the rice ships, did not take
the trouble of applying to the emperor, and there-
fore eut off those allowances of the custom-house
which are not sanctioned by imperial-decree. But
the custom-house people pay for their situations,
and they murmur loudly because of the injustice of
' ' . . . . .


166 Idolatry. Aug.
diminishing their allowances. "I'o revenge them-
selves they have examined old laws about searching
linguist's boats, &c., and have revived them in
order to give annoyance, and obtain, if they can,
a restoration of their allowances, or an equivalent
from somebody, for permission to let business go
on its usual free and unembarrassed manner!
Idolatry—the last stage in the course of declension from God
—the means of knowing right-and wrong without the Bible .
—the means of learning the true God as enjoyed without the
Scriptures—the divine feelings towards idolatry—its uniform
tendency to degenerate—its state in China—effect on personal
character—no hope in it of remedy. -
For two thousand years after the creation, we do not find
that men offered worship to any other than their Maker. It
is granted that they greatly failed to render him the homage
which is his due, and they most grievously sinned against him
in other ways also; but if they rendered obedience to any God,
it was to the true and living God. Whoever sinned, sinned
from the force of temptation, not from the influence, of prin-
ciple; for all the worship and obedience in the world, hitherto
was rendered to the Creator, no device having been yet fråm-
ed to excuse the withholding of homage from him. But this
state of the world was succeeded by a further advance in
wickedness; and is marked by the origin of various systems
of idolatry. . . .
Idolatry may be defined in general terms, rendering religious
homage to something else than the true God. This climax of
stupidity and impiety goes to legalize transgression against
Jehovah, by keeping his claims out of mind; it dignifies the
worship of anything which man may deify, by the name of
religion, and thus sanctifies sin as an offering to the Holy
One. That this has been the actual result, the melancholy
history of idolatry in the world for three or four thousand
years, abundantly testifies. If the Jews be not an exception,
what nation has not first sinned against the known and true
God, next forgotten him and made other gods, and lastly, broken
his laws to render homage to them that by nature are no gods?
To disregard the will of the Creator is the first step in this
downward course: to disregard that will and justify that disre:
gard by substituting the will of another god, is a further, step;
but to adopt such idolatry as demands the violation of the di-
vine will, thus making transgression against Jehovah a merit
with false gods,--this seems to be the lowest stage of infatua-
tion and depravity. This completes the delusion, and sancti-
fies, sin, cruelty, or lust. Yet in every idolatrous nation which


1833. Idolatry. 167
we know or have ever known, this has been the end of the
course; for in all of them, the impiety and frequent inhumanity.
of parts of their religious system, is notorious. Yet what is
especially worthy of remark, the public sentiment of those
countries has been so debased by these very idolatries, as to
tolerate the excesses.
Though these facts are acknowledged and deplored by the
friends of God and man, yet it is often considered the mis-
fortune rather that the fault of the present race of idolaters.
It is said that their fathers having never given then the true
religion, and God having never given them the Bible, it is
very difficult to see how they can be blamed for the worship
of false gods, though they are pitiable. This difficulty which
is often expressed, if we mistake not, is oftener felt than ex-
pressed. Though we cannot compare the guilt of the pagan
who has never seen the revelation of God, with his who rejects
or disregards that revelation, yet neither can we at all believe
that any man is left so destitute of the means of knowing his
Maker as to be excusable for disobeying him, and becoming an
idolater. The question may be fairly stated thus: where God
will hold every rational man, with or without the Bible, accountable
to himself. But as no man can be held accountable to know
God, without at least some means of knowing him, so no man
can be accountable further than he has the capacity and
means of knowing him and his will. The question therefore
turns on a previous point, whether the condition of men is
such in this world, that it is necessary to be idolaters. This
we consider a fair statement of the case, and such as every
idolater may be called to meet in the day of judgment.
In every nation, Jewish, Christian, or heathen, the man who
feareth God and worketh righteousness, is accepted of him.
Here are presented the two grand principles of all true religion
—reverence of God and righteousness towards men. The same
are expressed in other words by our Saviour; “love to God
and love to our neighbor;” and are declared to be the sum of
the law and the prophets. Now if any man is able in any
degree to gain the knowledge of these essentials of religion, he
is bound to practice them in his life. But if he cannot attain
even to these, he cannot be accountable to God for the exer-
cise of any true religion whatever, as it cannot exist without
these. This life therefore could not be in any sense a season of
probation, nor could the present actions of men be any ground
of judgment hereafter, because while living, they could neither
have known their Lord nor his laws.
But in truth, these elements of religion, are interwoven into
our very being. We see especially two avenues of moral per-
ception which God has constituted in our nature, and which
may be termed reason and conscience. These resemble in their
offices, the two senses sight and feeling; one brings information
of the external and the remote, the other of the inore intimate


168 Idolatry. Aug.
and internal. Before it is perverted by indulgence in sin, the
human mind is a most glorious device of the Almighty; and in
nothing inore so than in its complete adaptation to benevolence
like its benevolent Creator. For example; there is no man
living perhaps who has not found by the sad experience of
remorse, that in doing wrong he was doing violence to the best
and noblest part of his nature. So there are few, who have
not after doing a benevolent deed, felt that inexpressible
satisfaction of heart, which plainly told that they had, for that
time, acted as they were designed to act. A single experi-
ment of the right and the wrong is enough to convince beyoni
all dispute, which course is agreeable to his nature. Nor is
this decisive mode of reasoning unknown to any nation; for
the sayings and experience of all men have recoºled, that well-
doing tends to make the actor happy, and evil doing, unhappy.
This native feeling_which makes man a law unto himself, is
overcome only by perseverance in trampling upon it; it is
obſiterated never. So well has the grâcious and almighty Rul-
er of men guarded against their violating the rule, which re-
quires them “to do to others as they would be done unto.”
So palpable is the rule to all, that it is discovered without argu-
ment, by the mere sense of feeling. No rational man can pass
this eternal barrier of the law of love without being deeply and
often reminded of it; therefore every man who does pass it, is
fully accountable for the transgression. But it is not till he
has long passed this barrier, and habitually violated his sense
of right and wrong, that he becomes incapable of seeing God
in all his works in this world. So well is one fundamental
principle of religion involved in the very nature of men.
No less remarkably adapted is the constitution' of men, to
recognize the first principle of religion, love to God; for we
are sure, that a grateful heart, guided by an honest purpose,
cannot pass through this world, radically ignorant of its Ma-
ker. Nor are we alone in this opinion, but it is plainly said,
“the knowledge of God is manifest unto them. Fór that
which is invisible in God, as his eternal power and Godhead,
is clearly seen, being understood by the things which are made ;
so that their ignorance is without excuse.” This divine
testimony is abundantly confirmed by the history of men. Whāt
less than this does the two thousand years' monotheisun of the
world, while yet no Bible was given, prove?' The knowledge
of a supreme Deity which is yet scarcely eradicated entirely
from the pagan systems, proves that such knowledge is not
beyond human attainment. But most of all the motorious fact,
that there have been men in almost all nations, who have
discovered it, if it had been lost, believed it, and taught it,
proves that God has not left himself without witness in the
world. Two of the chief barriers against idolatry which must
be passed before a man can forget his Maker, are the natural


1833. Idolatry. 109
dictate of reason “that the workman is known by his works.”
These two simple principles, which are natural and known to
all men, are sufficient to lead an honest and inquiring mind
to know and love the great Benefactor of mankind.
Give man the capacity of enjoyment, the power of observing
and reasoning, place him in the midst of this world, and then
see what a plenitude of means he possesses of knowing its Maker.
For, every sense which is given him, can find employment only
on the things with which the world is furnished. Every object
of sight, of hearing, of feeling, of tasting, and of smelling, is
either an original product from its Creator, or evidently some
modification only of that product. If he walks, he walks on
a globe which no man made. If he breathes, he breathes an
invisible and boundless atmosphere, which itself makes the
idea of an invisible Power, no novelty to him. If he sees, it
is only in light which is immensely diffused, and which has no
visible Creator. If he speaks, hears, or thinks, he uses and he
knows that he uses only such powers as were given him,
and given him by no unwise or unkind being. Tell us now
how an honest mind, we will not say can, but how can he
not learn the first principle of religion—love to God! Say
not that these thoughts are obvious enough to a person en-
lightened by revelation to contemplate a perfect God, but are
wholly beyond the reach of a mind not previously directed to
seek them. The history of many men who have had no
Bible disproves the objection ; and had others been as earnest
to know their duty and honor their Maker, as to honor them-
selves and live in pleasure, we cannot say that they would
have lived in the worship of idols.
But it is proved also that rational, immortal man may walk
amidst these scenes which are all alive with divinity, and yet
learn little or nothing truly of his blessed Maker. Yet to have
arrived at that stage of stupidity, he must have violated and
blunted the divinely implanted principles of right and obliga-
tion in his nature. For this is evident ; that if man enjoys
life with its attendant blessings, without gratitude to any giver,
he violates his natural principles of gratitude, and for that, he
and not his Maker is accountable. But if he feels grateful to
some being, and yet invests that being with an impure or imperfect
character, he violates the principle of right reason by think-
ing differently of the divine being from what his works exhib-
it him. Lastly, if he clothes the invisible power which he
adores, with those beneficent and mighty attributes, which he
sees must have been exercised both within and all around
himself, he will then have in his mind the true and perfect
God, in his essential character. If now he clings to that God
in grateful obedience, he will be acting the first principle of
true religion, and the great command of God. Say not this is
impossible; that the blindness of men forbids it; their immersion
in gross and sensual pleasures unfits them homestly to seek
w


170 Idolatry. AUG.
for their duty; for that, their Maker cannot be responsible.
Had half the ingenuity and perseverance been exerted in seek-
ing the true God, which has been spent in weaving and defend-
ing fine-spun systems of error, Jehovah would not now be a
stranger in his own world. We cannot pursue the topic fur-
ther, but will propose this question; whether the favored christ-
ian who faithfully clings to his Savior, and so maintains a holy
life in the world as to be saved at last, is saved without as
much honest effort on his part, as would have delivered an
idolater from his delusions ! For if any man lives a penitent
and godly life, who can say that the grace of Christ is unable
to reach him, though while he lived he never heard the only
name by which we can be saved?
We have insisted thus on the capacity of all men to learn
and practice these elements of true religion, for two reasons;
because some persons seem to regard idolatry and its accom-
paniments rather as the harmless vagaries of children, thun as the
accountable acts of men, made in the image of God and made
for immortality;-hence they do nothing to banish it from the
world. Others who would gladly instruct and bless the world
with christianity, feel bound by their sentiments to condemn
idolatry, yet secretly feeling that it is rather a misfortune than a
fault, they are not fully awake to supply the wants of others
as they would be, if they believed that their degraded condi-
tion was self-caused. But to avoid all chance of mistake in
our reasonings, we will look at the decisive expression of the
feelings of the divine Being towards idolatry. That this is
not regarded by the Almighty as a trivial or venial fault, but
with the very deepest displeasure, is known to the readers of
the sacred Scriptures. From the first mention of idolatry
more than three thousand years ago, one condemnatory voice
is uttered against it, from the time of Moses till the days of
the Redeemer on earth. One feeling is uniformly expressed
of it, in whatever nation practiced, but more intense, as
would be expected, against the Israelites. Of them it is, that
such language as the following was used. “And they set
them up images and groves in every high hill and under
every green tree, and there they burned incense in all the
high places, and wrought wicked things to provoke the Lord
to anger; and they worshipped all the host of heaven, and
served Baal, and caused their sons and their daughters to pass
through the fire, and used divinations and enchantments.
Therefore Jehovah was very angry with Israel, and removed
thcu out of his sight.” But of foreign idolaters the Lord
said to the Israelites, “ye shall utterly destroy all the places
wherein the nations which ye shall possess, served their gods.
For every abomination to the Lord which he hateth, have they
done to their gods; for even their sons and their daughters
have they burned in the fire to their gods.” Still from age to
age, from nation to nation, and from continent to continent, men


1833. Idolatry. | 7 |
have wandered away from God, and have loved to wander.
What emphasis does this fact give to the following reproach-
ful language. “God looked down from heaven upon the chil-
dren of men to see if there were any that did understand, that
did seek after God: every one of then is gone back ; they
are together become filthy : there is none that doeth good, no
not one.” Similar language to this, but more severe is found
also amidst the grace and peace which the New Testament
sheds on the world. There, stands out most prominent an
inspired description of heathenism as beheld from the purer
and higher dispensation of Christianity, which will remain to
be pondered by wondering men, long after the vices there
enumerated shall have been banished from the world. We
refer to the first chapter of Romans. In the gospel of Christ
it is, that we meet the repeated, solemn and affecting assever-
ation, “idolaters shall not inherit the kingdom of God.”
Having thus reviewed the causes of idolatry, and the feelings
of the Almighty towards it in all ages, we turn to the inquiry,
whether judging from its course in the world, there remains
any reasonable hope that the nations will be enlightened and
blessed by it. On this point, a truth most obvious to every
observer is, that in every nation where idolatry has once been
established, the worship has become more gross and outrageous
than at its commencement; public inorals have degenz, ated,
and the divine authbrity has been prostituted to impure or po.
litical purposes. For in the infancy of those errors, while the
minds of men gradually fell away from the living God, there
still remained much of truth in their doctrines, and much
comparative purity of morals and of noble sentinents. Hence
it is, that amid the ruins which the completion of these systems
has brought-on later ages, we find all nations agree in turning
backward to the past, as to a purer age, sighing over departed
piety and virtue. In no nation perhaps is this trait so conspicuous
as in China; for hope, and thought, and mind itself, are here
set towards the past. Traces of the comparative elevation of
the earlier religions, may be found in the systems of Pythagoras,
of Menu, and in the Shoo King, the oldest religious book of the
Chinese. But those simpler views and those better days soon
passed away from the nations, along with the knowiedge and love
of the perfect God.
Respecting the religion of the Grecians, the historian Gillie
says; “it would require a volume to illustrate the salutary
effects of this venerable superstition. The nature, characters,
and occupations of their gods were suggested by the lively
feelings of an ardent mind. They were supposed subject to the
blind passions which govern mortals. They delighted in the
steam of sacrifices, which eq;taily gratified their senses and
flattered their vanity.” But even his admiration could not extend
beyond the heroic age. “The dangerous power of oracles, the


172 Idolatry. AUG.
2’
* *
abused privilege of asylums, the abominable ceremonies of the
Bacchanalia, and the horrid practice of human sacrifices, cir-
cumstances which cover with deserved infamy the latter periods
of paganism, were unknown to the good sense and purity of the
heroic age. . . In most of the Greek colonies of Asia, temples
were erected to the earthly Venus, where courtezans were honored
as priestesses of that condescending divinity. Corinth first im:
ported this innovation from the east; and after the repulse of
Xerxes, the magistrates of that republic ascribed the preserva-
tion of their country to the powerful intercession of these votaries
of Venus. Their portraits were painted at the public expense.”
Thus the honor due to the Lord of hosts, was given by the
enlightened Greeks, to prostitutes, sanctifying sin and honoring
pollution I Still this praise is due to the Greeks, that they ex-
hitréd the gods under no other than the human form, though
often degraded almost to a beast. Far more abominable were
the representations of the gods among the Egyptians; and like-
wise those now existing in India, where the form of giants,
brutes, and monsters, are given to the gods. In India, the
boasted sublimity and simplicity of their religion have come
to sanction the notorious cruelty and pollution of their existing
idolatry.
In China, owing chiefly, as we think, the literary and po-
litical regulations, there is perhaps less that is disgusting and
inhuman in their worship than in any other idolatrous nation
which has ever existed. Gross idolatry was introduced here later .
than in any other nation; it has never swayed the government "
by means of a religious establishment; it has not had the learning
and wealth of the nation to maintain it at public expense. The
gross idolatries have not had their full swing here, they have
not had their perfect work, not having generally prevailed till
modern times. Yet with all these impediments, here are already
developed the prominent evils invariably attendant on all heath-
enism. In this age of the world, in some provinces of China
if not in all, the murder of infants is still practiced, and without
any actual punishment from the laws. Yet so open is this
practice that we have it from an eye-witness, who, a few months
since upon the coast, saw the victims of this custom. The
condition of females also here is essentially the same as it has
ever been Tn pagāh countries under the operation of the brute
maxim, that “might gives right.” Their consignment to ig-
norance, to perpetual seclusion from society, and to the almost
complete control of the other sex, is as strongly marked in the
Chinese policy as in any other. This single custom operates
effectually to the degradation, and dismembering from society
of a hundred millions of persons in China. Another heathen
privilege is enjoyed here, though unhappily it has passed to
nations which esteem themselves very far from all paganism.—
We mean the right of religious persecution- This is the
...]aim of a government to prescribe the object and the forms of


1833. Idolatry. - 173
religious worship, and to enforce that prescription by pains and
penalties. Certainly if the will of the Supreme were felt to be
the supreme rule to all, no mere man would dare to encroach
on that prerogative. All those Christian governments which have
endeavored by punishments to enforce religious observances, have
attempted, contrary to their Lord's will, to make his kingdom of
this world. But in these enforcements, they only adopted the
very principle of the heathen governments to which they suc-
ceeded, and by which they were surrounded. Thus the Romish
church, after it became dominant in Rome, adopted the per-
secuting sentiment of the heathen government before it. This
is indeed no excuse whatever, yet it shows us whence the per-
secuting sentiment originated.
The Christian rule that “we ought to obey God rather than
men,” deprives every human government of supremacy over the
human conscience, and it is the only religion on earth which
ſorbids such domination. It is this which has driven persecution
from the only countries where it is not now practiced. There
never was an idolatrous nation which did not claim the right
to persecute of course, and actually use it when convenient. In
China, the command of the son of God, and the command of
the “son of heaven,” are contrary the one to the other,
“teach all nations”—“teach not my nation.” -
The Supreme Being has not been, for thousands of years,
the object of prayer or of any worship with the people of
China. The patriarchal model of government seems to have
devolved the duty of public homage to this Being, entirely upon
the emperor; hence the people who were released from that
worship, released themselves also from the duty of learning him
and of daily communion with him. In process of time, when
this Supreme Being came to be regarded as the pervading
energy of nature, even this stated act of national homage
ceased to be much else than the formal adoration of a me-
taphysical principle. Thus shorn of personality and affections,
this being ceased to be, if it had even been, regarded as the
living One, suited to attract and return the warmest and dear-
est affections of the human heart. Hence the formal and ar-
tificial character of the national worship. But the religious
wants of men demanded something more palpable than the
worship of abstract principles. It is not wonderſui therefore
that the introduction of a foreign idolatry was welcomed in
China by those who had still any heart. Nor is it surprising
that by this means, God should be less thought of than be-
fore, so that the prevailing idolatry engrosses all the religious
affections which yet remained. They know and they acknow-
ledge that the objects of their worship are not God, that He
forms no object of their prayer, of their joy, or of the com-
munion of their heart. -
The most striking effect of this religious system in China is
on the personal character of the people. Nowhere in the world
--


| 74 Idolatry, - AUG.
is there exhibited so settled and so extensive an apathy on
divine subjects as here. You approach a Chinese and in-
troduce the subject of love to God, for he never begins such
a topic. Speak of him as our benefactor, our friend and
ruler. Do you find that his heart is ready to meet you with
pleasure on this common ground ! Is he delighted to dwell
on it as a familiar spot, where his best affections love to linger,
where his heart is at home 7 No, you have not waked the
chord of feeling within him. Follow him, as far as we may,
when the cares and the business of the day are past, to the
quiet of home and the enjoyments of friendship. Does his
mind naturally turn to the solaces of religion with his assembled
family Does he converse with his friends of the power and
the kindness of God? We ask not for the social meeting for
religious conversation and prayer, as in some other countries;
but what evidence appears that religion is his delight, and the
thought of God the dearest of all thoughts to his heart? The
formal burning of a little gilt paper each evening, is small
proof that the remembrance of the Maker is cherished by the
soul which was made in his own image.
The repulsiveness of the Chinese character towards fo-
reigners, has long been matter of history. If this narrow and
selfish feeling were shown towards foreigners only, we might
ascribe it as some do, to the influence of their officers and
laws. But the same or nearly the same want of interest in
the welfare of their own countryman, rather proves it to be
a national trait, fostered by national sentiment. Occupying a
'most fertile soil and salutary climate, they have cut off the free
interchange of kind offices with their fellow-creatures, dissociated
themselves from the family of men, placing themselves alike
beyond the sympathies of others, and beyond commiseration in
the common ealamities of man. They broke the divinely es-
tablished order by which God styles himself the Father of all
nations—all nations whom he made of one blood. They ask
no aid of others, they offer no aid to them, they neither in-
quire for their welfare or existence. It may be said of them
as of the dead:— , -- - -
They have no share in all that's done
Beneath the circuit of the sun.
This violent disruption of the natural brotherhood of men,
seems very unlike the warm-hearted benevolence of the good
man, who seeks not to separate his interests from others, but
rather to identify his happiness with the enlightening of the
world. - - -
Where then is the remedy for these old and multiplied mise-
res It is acknowledged as well by Chinese as others, that for
2000 years there has been a growing corruption in doctrines
and morals, and not only continued but accelerating. The
deep degenerary of these later ages prevents the hope” of
__


1833. Idolatry. 175
reform. The thing is scarcely if at all attempted, and the
modern sages, it is believed would hardly desire it, if it were
practicable.
We look in vain to their policy; we have no expectations from
their old classical books. These books and that policy have
seen their best days; they have had long and unlimited sway
more than any similar system, and yet they have brought the
nation to its present state. There is not vitality and power
enough in them to restore man to happiness. . No man
expects help from them to reform and bless the nation. The
religious apathy is too deep, and the national evils too ex-
tended to admit the hope of their removal by any human
system of restoration
Look over the world, and see whether any remedy is provided
adequate to the miseries of weak and sinful men. What aid
will you call? Learning and philosophy have come, but they
have become atheists, and heed help themselves. Idolatry has
come, and brought more gods but no more aid. The-Koran
has come, but without the sword which must water with blood
the soil where Islamism is to flourish. Most deeply are we per-
suaded that the remedy for t
China, is the same as for us and
Chris Te World to save sinners." This faithful
saying is worthy of all acceptation; for-we-see`no other sure
hope for China or any other nation than in Him who brought
life and immortality to light by the gospel. Every delight
which we daily receive from this heavenly source, makes us
more desirous to see them receiving the same. Very far is our
feeling from sexultation over the weakness and darkness of our
fellow-men, while we are thus examining their religious sys-
tems. Far is it from pride, as though we were naturally a
more deserving and elevated race, No, we owe and we feel
that if benevolent men had not brought to our fathers the gos-
pel which had been given to them, - -
religious delusions equally unprofi • - * * e,
- ſmore barbarous. Raised to happiness and intelligence by
this means, extend the blessing to all the unhap-
py children of men. But oppressed by the weight of ancient
customs, ground down by the extortions and caprice of their
rulers, living often in fear, in poverty, and want, the Chinese
needs the consolations of the gospel to cheer him in this life.
And when the fears of death come upon him, the prospect of
annihilation, or of a return again to life and suffering, are
a poor substitute for the solid hopes of pardon through the
Savior.
The expectations which we cherish of the religion of Christ, and
all for which we aim, are these. We hope it will bring back all
nations, to the love of one and the same God; so that every man
will find in his fellow-man a common ground of friendship, and a
common bond of union. By means of it also, the Bible will


1833. Prophecy. 177
popery have not yet been revoked; the precious gospel, this
divine gift, remains unknown to the nation; and a more
formidable barrier than any other—Chinese apathy towards
everything which does not strike the senses, is as deep as
ever.
This is not the language of despair. Unbelievers may ask;
where is the day of the Lord's coming ! And we humbly an-
swer; “It is not for you to know the times or seasons which
the Father has put in his own power.” Hitherto it has been
the day of small things but our labors have not been quite
in vain. There are converts, schools, preachers; and there is
a door opened to the Chinese empire. Let us not treat the
small things, which God has hitherto done, with contempt,
lest we perish together with an unbelieving world. But let us
ât the same time acknowledge, that as laborers we have never
resisted unto blood. That noble purpose “spend, and be spent,”
—that ardent desire to live and to die for the cause of God, has
not taken entire possession of our whole selves. We do not
indeed wish to see the names of “hundreds subscribed with their
own blood,” pledging themselves to enter the lists of combat-
ants; we want something superior and more essential, an
unreserved surrender to the Savior under the deep conviction
of his omnipotent love. This will teach and prompt us to
persevere to the last in out endeavors to promote the salvation
of our fellow-sinners. This is the great requisite in the Lord's
servants. Bring also arts, sciences, and the goods of this world,
into this holy cause, without boasting of your sacrifices, and
you are welcome. -
- To rush heedlessly into dangers, or to put the world at defi-
ance, will rather injure the cause than promote it;-there is
à more excellent way. When the doors of “the celestial em-
pire” are thrown open, boldly to enter the list of mission-
aries, to gain the hearts of the people by kindness and long-
suffering, to promote their temporal and , eternal welfare by
every measure in your power, without being known or regis-
tered in public journals, neglected and forgotten by friends if
possible;—after all to be treated with contempt both by the
Chinese government and common people, this is the true
way of establishing the gosoel in this remote part of the world.
Let us not deride the supposition that China may very soon be
open for missionary enterprises.
Amongst the numerous promises in Scriptures, there is one
which bears directly upon China, and it is well to dwell a little
open the subject. In the twelfth verse of the 48th chapter of
Isaiah, God says; Behold these shall come from fat; and lo,
these from the north and the west, and these from the land of
Sinim.” Great philologists are agreed, that Sinim was the
name under which eastern Asia or China was known to the
inhabitants of western Asia. Both the Arabs, Syrians, Malays,
and Siamese, to this day, call it Tsin, Chin, or Shin; and
W


} 78 - Prophecy. AUG.
even a narrow-minded man might well doubt, whether the
Hebrews, who knew the existence of Hindostan, (Esther i. 1.)
under the name of Hodu, and of Scythia under the name of
Magog, could be entirely ignorant of the largest and oldest of
empires. Sinim is the Hebrew plural of Sin. Or should we think
that whilst petty nations come into remembrance before the
Lord, the millions of China should never be mentioned 7 All
are numbered before him, they are the creatures which his
hand has made, and for whom the Savior bled and died.
Whatever may be the impenetrable designs of Providence,
that up to these latter days, this great nation remains desti-
tute of the gospel, we cannot fathom them. It is not for us
to know the times or the seasons which the Father hath put
in his own power, but we ought to believe that his unalterable
word will be fulfilled. If nevertheless, sullen despair occupies
our hearts, and we begin to exclaim, “the Lord has forsaken
this country; the Lord has forgotten this empire;”—O let us
remember the divine assurance; “Can a woman forget her
sucking child that she should not have compassion on the son of
her womb Yea, she may forget, yet will I not forget thee.
Behold I have graven thee, upon the palms of my hands; thy
walls are continually before me.” Though this was primarily
addressed to Zion, yet it is applicable to all nations, who are
made of one blood, and who have one Father; and it follows
immediately after the promise uttered in behalf of China.
Therefore we ought to go forth in the strength of this gracious
promise, and plead with the Lord, and wrestle for a bless-
ing upon this nation. Has he not said; “It is a light thing,
that thou shouldst be my servant, to raise up the tribes of
Jacob, and to restore the preserved of 1srael. I will also give
thee for a light to the gentiles, that thou mayest be my sal-
vation to the end of the earth 7"-Or do we think, that our
Savior is not the King of the whole earth, and that China
is not given to him for a possession ? He does intercede
for this numerous, though long neglected people, while seated
at the right hand of the Father, as a true high priest, who com-
passionates all the nations of the earth. -
At the present crisis, which is big with great events, and
when the march of intellect is rapid as the eagle's flight, we
may look for great things. The wall of national separation is
pulled down by a more powerful hand than human-If the
decree is passed in heaven, that China shall be saved,—what
will the imperial edicts and prohibitions avail? There may be a
hard struggle, for it is to be the last; but the bulwarks of Satan
will not withstand the shock, nor his armies prove victorious.
God will reign and subject China to his sceptre. If we then
could ascend on high, we would join in the anthem; “Sing, O
heavens; and be joyful, O earth; and break forth into singing, O
mountains; for the Lord has comforted his people, and will have
mercy on his afflicted.” But whilst we are living here below,


1833. Military Reicards, | 70
let us “lift up our eyes round about and behold ; all these
gather themselves together, and come to thee. As I live, saith
the Lord, thou shalt surely clothe thee with them all, as with
'an ornament, and bind them on thee as a bride doeth.”
Whilst we remember these promises, and believe and labor
to the last, with wisdom granted from above, we shall be suc-
cessful. Has not the Lord said, “I will make all my mountains
a way, and my high-ways shall be exalted t” Only be strong in
our God, and he will remove the appalling obstacles. -
Let us therefore strain every nerve to accomplish the object.
We have to do with a nation half-civilized, which has schools and
a national literature. The press can be made a mighty engine to
batter down the wall of national separation. Our productions, if
well written, will take the attention of the Chinese public at large,
which is not prejudiced either against strangers or Christianity.
Let us at the same time not be prejudiced against them; but give
arts and sciences as wide a range as it is in our power to do; for
these are the handmaids of the gospel. Above all, let us show,
that we are truly interested in the spiritual welfare of those whom
we consider our parishioners, though they do not acknowledge us
as their pastors. There is much misery in China, and we may
alleviate a great deal by proper measures. Whilst we neglect not
the wise and the learned of this world among them, and who
invariably stand high in their own ..". let us condescend to
the poor, the illiterate, and the wretched, who constitute the ma-
jority of the nation. This advice is now very easily given, but
not so easily followed. But so long as we set before us a crucified
Savior, who expired on the cross to save us wretched sinners, we
may follow his footsteps who went about doing good. This will
be a powerful way of preaching the gospel to the heathen, and of
silencing all gainsayers. This way of exhibiting, together with
the propagation of the glorious doctrines of the Redeemer, a
correspondent practice, is humbly submitted to the fellow-laborers
of the writer, who at the same time acknowledges his own defi-
ciencies in word and deed.
It is to be expected that the Missionary, Tract, and Bible so-
cieties will second the efforts of uninſluential individuals, though
already burdened with their owu multifarious operations. And
is there no literary society, either in Europe or America, which
has anything to spare for the Chinese ? We hope not to plead
in vain.—Let us conclude with the prayer; “Awake, awake,
put on strength, O arm of the Lord. Awake, as in the ancient
days, as in the generations of old. Art thou not it, that hast
cut Rahab, and wounded the dragon'" Yea, may it be so.
Amen and Amen.
Military Rewards.--It is the custom in China, as in many
other countries, to reward those who have distinguished them.
selves in battle, with promotion. And those who fall in battle


180 . Chinese Emigrants. AUG.
under peculiar circumstances, are rewarded by honors decreed to
their posterity. Late Peking gazettes furnish a detailed ac-
count both of those who behaved well and ill, on the occasion
of the Formosan insurgents taking the town of Kea-e. One im-
perial officer headed a party of his soldiers in running away, and
seeking shelter among the mountains, where he still continues
not captured. Another, having associated with himself a few
faithful adherents, in order to prevent the powder magazine
from falling into the enemies' hands, blew it up about them-
selves. But the explosion not destroying their lives, they rush-
ed sword in hand upon the rebels, and slew several of them
before they were overpowered. The wives, children, and ser-
wants of these warriors also continued faithful to death, though
some of them were most cruelly treated by the rebels. Two
of the women continued to rail at the insurgents till their noses
were cut off, and their tongues cut out. The sons of the
leader of this little band are to receive a nominal office, to
be hereditary to all generations without end
Chinese EMIGRANTs.-We have seen several statements from
Chinese, who have been in the straits of Malacca, respecting
the situation of emigrants at some of those settlements. They
complain most bitterly of the oppressive old Dutch system of
“farming” the revenue to any vagabond who will bid highest.
The authority thus conferred on gamesters and opium-sunokers,
they consider detestable; and the cupidity of government, mean
and degrading. But the farmers of provisions, such as pork
and the like, are also great oppressors. They league with
native police-men and enter people's houses, insulting their
women, and sometimes robbing the inhabitants under the pre-
text of searching them. They have been known to take a
small quantity of a prohibited article into a house, and pre-
tending to have found it there, then prosecute the inmates in
order to obtain the penalty. The industrious and well dis-
posed Chinese are thus oppressed by governmental people,
and also by secret associations of the idle and vicious among
their fellow countrymen. Those who get rich also commit
great atrocities, which through the influence of money never
come to light. Such a man has lately returned to China.
He first hired Chinese assassins to murder his partner in trade,
and then hired Malays to murder the assassins.
It is painful to read the story of such cruelties suffered by
the Chinese emigrants. Often, no doubt, this class of persons
is such as “leave their country for their country's good,” but
often it is otherwise. Compelled by oppression or pinching
poverty to emigrate, they find too few friends in their wander-
ings. Cast off also entirely from any protection by their own go-
vernment, they are left at the mercy of any foreign oppressors
where they may reside; with the prospect of being plundered
again, on their return home, by their countrymen.


1833.
181
Researches in Armenia,
LITERARY NOTICES.
-
Researches of the Rev. E.
SMITH and the Rev. H. G. O.
Dwight in Armenia: including
a journey through Asia Minor,
into Georgia and Persia, with a
visit to the Nestorian and Chal-
dean Christians of Oormiah and
Salmas. 2 Vols. Boston : 1833.
DURING the last fifteen years,
a large extent of territory a-
round the Mediterranean, in-
cluding Greece, Asia Minor,
Syria, Egypt, and the African
coast has been surveyed by
Protestant missionaries. The
religious and moral condition
of the Coptic, Maronite, and
Greek communities have been,
by these investigations, brought
before the benevolent societies
in Europe and America; and
while many spontaneous efforts
have been made to revive the
“oriental churches,” a desire
has been excited to learn more
accurately the condition of other
sects residing farther east—
such as the Armenians, Geor-
gians, Nestorians, and Chal-
deans. With the special view of
ascertaining by personal obser-
vation the present state and
character of these classes of peo-
ple, especially of the Armeni-
ans, Messrs. Smith and Dwight
were instructed by the “Ameri-
can Board of Commissioners
for Foreign Missions,” to un-
dertake the journey described
in the volumes before us.
These gentlemen left Malta
on the 17th March 1830; touch-
ed at Smyrna, and reached the
capital of the Turkish empire
on the 19th of April. On the
31st of May, after having gained
some knowledge of the Armeni-
ans residing in Constantinople,
they set set their faces eastward.
At Tokat they visited the tomb
of Martyn; then took a view of
Erzroom, which was once a
thoroughfare for the commerce
between Europe and the East;
thence turning northward they
entered the Russian possessions,
and passed up to Tiflis, which
occupies the right bank of the
Koor. Tiflis has the appear-
ance of a busy and populous
city, and its streets present a
crowded and lively scene—in
which the Russian soldier and
the stately Turk, the Armenian
with turbaned head, and the
Georgian priest, the dark Lesgy
with his short sword, the Per-
sian known by his flowing robes,
the half-clad Mingrelian, and
the Circassian driving his spir-
ited horses, all act their parts.
Lying at nearly equal distances
from the Black and Caspian
seas, Tiflis may erelong be-
come again, as it was in the
days of Justinian, the thorough-
ſare for the overland commerce
of Asia. A sad harbinger from
Christian America had gone be-
fore the missionary travelers.
“In the first caravauserai we


182
A UG.
Researches
entered, the day after reaching
Tiflis,” say they “we stumbled
upon a hogshead of New Eng-
land rum !”
On the 5th of August, they
seated themselves in a large co-
vered baggage-wagon drawn by
four horses abreast after the
Russian fashion, and left Tiflis.
As they went down the valley
of the Koor, they met that
dreadful scourge—the cholera
on its march to Europe. One
week's journey from Tiflis
brought them in sight of Shoo-
sha, but not until they had pass-
ed through scenes of personal
sufferings, which they “would
rather forget than describe.” A
crooked route from Shoosha to
Tebriz, led them along the
banks of the Aras; where, as
they travelled from Nakhchevan
up to Erivan and back again,
they gazed upon Mount Ararat,
which is known to the natives
by the name of Masis in Arme-
nian, and Aghur-dagh (heavy
mountain) in Turkish. “At all
seasons of the year, it is cover-
ed far below its summit with
snow and ice, which occasion-
ally form avalanches, that are
precipitated down its sides with
the sound of an earthquake, and
which, with the steepness of its
declivities, have allowed none
of the posterity of Noah to as-
cend it.” From several points
of view the appearance of that
Mount, once “the stepping
stone between the old world
and the new,” was very majes-
tic. At Ziveh-dudengeh, one
fine autumnal morning in No-
vember, when they arose at
the earliest dawn, “the summit
of Ararat was whitened with
the broad light of day, while
1he obscurity of night still dark-
ened its base; the first rays of
the sun soon crowned it with
gold; and then gradually de-
scending, spread over it to its
base a robe of similar brilliancy.”
They reached Tebriz on the
18th of December. Abbas Mir-
za, the prince royal of Persia,
into whose hands the shah has
resigned the management of his
foreign relations, has his seat at
Tebriz. His religious views are
liberal, and his practice tolerant;
but with his liberality he is also
immoral, indulging in drinking
and other dissipation. Abbas
has been nominated by the shah
to be his successor on the throne
of Persia.
Tebriz, now the capital of
one of the most populous and
productive of all the provinces
of Persia, has a population of
about 60,000, and also an ex-
tensive trade, the whole of which
is in the hands of the natives.
“The costly #. of Kash-
meer and the East are brought
by its merchants from the re-
gion of the Indus, and exchang-
ed in the bazars of Constanti-
nople for the manufactures of
Europe. While some of the
productions sent to lndia by the
British East India Company for
the Persian market, find their
way hither from the ports of
the Persian gulf, and the pro-
ductions of Arabia are brought
from Bagdad.”
The first trait in the charac-
ter of a Persian, that strikes a
traveler coming from Turkey,
is his civility. “The Turkish
gentleman receives you stand-
ing, coolly puts his hand upon
his breast for a salutation, asks
you to sit as if the invitation in
any form was an act of conde-
scension, and a few common-


1833,
183
In Armenia.
place questions, with long in-
tervals of silence filled up by
pipes and coffee, complete the
ceremonies of your reception.
The 1ersian not only honors
you by rising, but, putting you
at once into the position of his
lord, and assuming the atti-
tude of your slave, he forces
you into his own seat, if it hap-
pen to be the most honorable.”
The Persian differs also from
the Tu, k, in his readiness
to admit European innovations.
Chairs and tables are used in
the houses of some of the rich
at Tebriz; several beautiful por-
celain tea-sets, of the latest
English fashion, were eagerly
bought up when our travelers
were there; and many shops
in the bazaar were stocked with
a variety of European table
furniture.
During the whole of their
sojourn at Tebriz, Messrs. Smith
and Dwight enjoyed the kind
offices of several English gen-
tlemen. Wearied with their
journey, and sick as one of
them was, the attention of Drs.
M’Neill and Cormick, major
Willock, captain Campbell, and
others, made an impression on
their minds, which they hope
never to forget. The last named
gentleman, then acting envoy,
treated them with a hospitality,
that could hardly have been
exceeded had they been his own
brothers. He readily facilitated
their proceedings in everything
that depended upon his official
capacity; and, what they es-
teemed not the least of his at-
tentions, “he opened his house
for religious services on the
Sabbath, and took pains to
procure a full attendance.”—
At their departure from Tebriz,
captain Campbell and major
Willock supplied them with
recommendatory letters to the
chief officers and khans of Ooro-
miah, and other places.
A journey of a few days now
brought the travellers to Dilman;
and after spending a few days
among the Chaldeans and Nes-
torians on the west shore of the
lake of Ooromiah, they turned
their steps to the north-west,
passed through Erzroom to Tre-
bizond; embarked on board an
Illyrian ship bearing the Austri-
an flag; sailed down the Black
sea; and reached Constantino-
ple, having been absent “just a
year and four days,” and tra-
veled by land more than twenty-
four hundred miles.
We have perused the Re-
searches with much interest and
pleasure. The travelers seem
to have been intent on collect-
ing valuable information of eve-
ry description. The geography,
manners, and cūstoms of the
countries which they visited, as
well as the intellectual, moral
and religious condition of the
people, were objects, which
constantly occupied their atten-
tion. In the Turkish, Russian,
and Persian dominions, they
found the people ignorant, with-
out the means of education, and
accustomed to all the immoral-
ities and crimes which usually
follow iu the train of ignorance,
A numerous priesthood, with
but a few honorable exceptions,
they found scarcely less igno-
rant, and often more vicious,
than the people.—The whole
region over which they taaveled
has for a long time past been
desolated and depopulated by
wars; and agriculture and com-
merce have been interrupted.


184
AUG.
Researches
An introductory article to the
“Researches,” contains a brief
History of Armenia. It is an
inland country, and extends at
bout four hundred and thirty
miles in longitude, and about
three hundred in latitude; it has
its western boundary not far
from six hundred miles east of
Constantinople. The noble Eu-
phrates, the Tigris, the rapid,
furious Aras (Araxes), and other
rivers, have their sources in
Armenia. In its most flourish-
ing period, the country was di-
vided into fifteen provinces. “In
the centre of them all was the
province of Ararad (Ararat),
distinguished for its extent and
fertility, and which, from its
having been almost invariably
the residence of the Armenian
court, is uniformly mentioned
in the Bible, instead of Armenia
itself.” The Armenians are
known at the present day, as a
scattered race; they are found
“not only in almost every part
of Turkey and Persia, but in
India, as well as in Russia, Po-
land, and many other parts of
Europe.” They are great trav-
elers, and almost every impor-
tant fair or mart, from Leipsic
and London to Bombay and
Calcutta, is visited by them.
The whole number of Armeni-
ans has been estimated to be
10,000,000.
While at Tiflis, our travelers
made many inquiries concern-
ing the Georgians; they are at
present a small nation, suppos-
ed not to exceed 600,000 souls;
are divided into three classes,
namely, free commoners, nobles,
and vassals. They are of the
Greek faith, and in their reli-
gion differ very little from the
Russians, whose einperor is trow
their liege lord.—During their
early history, the Georgians
were frequently molested by
the Khazars, the Persians, and
the Greeks. In A. D. 538,
while groaning under the do-
minion of Kai-khosrow of Per-
sia, “the Georgians saw with
astonishment a company of
Chinese, headed by one of the
royal family of that distant em-
pire, burst through the gates of
Dariel, and come to their aid.
They were recéived with joy,
their arms were victorious, and
the prince was presented with
the fortress of Orpet (called
also Samshvilde and Orbisi),
on the Khram, which gave
name to his family. His des.
cendants, the Orpelians, after-
wards distinguished themselves
both in Georgian and Armenian
history, and now, at Tiflis and
elsewhere, they hold their rank
among the Georgian nobility,
and boast of higher heraldic
honors than any of the crown-
ed heads of Europe.”
With the Cossacks they had
much to do in the course of
their journey, and their opin-
ion of them continued to the
last to improve. The first Cos-
sack they met, (it was on the
morning they entered Erzroom
amidst a dense fog,) is thus
decribed.—“In a clear atmos-
phere, large as he really was,
and mounted upon a tall and
stately horse, with a spear at
least twelve feet long projecting
on one side, a rifle slung upon
his back on the other, a heavy
sword by his side, and a brace
of pistols in his girdle, he would
have appeared sufficiently formi-
dable; but magnified by the mist
to a gigantic size, he seemed
almost like Mars himself.” The


1833,
185
In Armenia.
-*.
Georgians speak the same lan-
guage, and profess the same
religion as the Russians; but
they are a distinct nation, with
their own peculiar institutions
and rights. They pay no taxes
to the autocrat, and in their ter-
ritories on the Don, no Russian
holds an office or exercises au-
thority. Yet the emperor claims
from them a military service,
which obliges every man to al-
ternate three years at hone and
three years in the field, “and in
fact converts the whole nation
of more than 200,000 individ-
uals into a standing army.”
The present Chaldean Christ-
ians are of recent origin. Most
of them live in the province of
Ooromiah, and are but few in
number. They are papal Sy-
rians. Their bishop, Mar Yo-
hanna, was educated at Roine;
and his priest had been twelve
years in the college of the Prop-
aganda. -
...The Nestorians are some-
what more numerous than the
Chaldeans. Once their com.
munity was very large. As early.
as A. D. 498, “they assumed the
attitude of the dominant Christ-
ian sect in Persia.” They have
had churches in Mesopotamia,
Arabia, Syria, Hindostan, Trans-
oxiana, Mongolia, “and, if we
may credit [and why may we
not!) a monument subsequently
discovered by papal priests,
Nestorian missionaries planted
churches in the heart of north-
ern China.”—However much
these churches may have been
protected and fostered by Pres-
ter John; Genghis and his de-
scendants, they were destined to
a speedy overthrow. The fell
Tiimur, like a besoul of destruc-
tion, swept Christianity from
Transoxiana, exterminated or
effectually concealed it in Mon-
golia, and persecuted unto death
multitudes of the Nestorians of
Persia.
We are glad to learn that a
missionary has already been ap-
pointed to labor among the Nes-
torians of Ooromiah. How he
will be received by them, exper-
iment alone can fully determine.
“'Their extreme liberality to-
wards other sects, their ideas of
open communion, and their en-
tire rejection of auricular con-
ſession, are considerations which
have produced in our minds,”
the travelers remark, “a firm
conviction, that a mission to the
Nestorians would meet with far
fewer obstacles, than among any
other of the old churches. The
week that we passed among them
was the most intensely interest-
ing of our lives.”
Messrs. Smith and Dwight
had frequent opportunity while
on their journey, to witness the
operations and enjoy the society
of German missionaries. From
them they derived much valua-
ble information concerning the
Armenians, moslems, and others.
—At Shoosha they were in the
latitude of Bukharia, and distant
from it only about sixteen de-
grees, and less than twenty-five
degrees from the Chinese fron-
tiers.—The recent visit of Lieut.
A. Burmes and Dr. Gerard to
Bukharia we intend to notice at
another time.—We view with
lively interest the advances of
enterprising Christian mission-
aries and other intelligent trav-
elers into central Asia. Dark-
ness and confusion have long
reigned over those plains; but
the day will coine, perhaps very
soon, when light will break forth
X


I 86
Aug.
Periodical Magazines.
and order be established. Once,
more freedom of intercourse
was enjoyed; it will be so again;
and a highway will be opened,
by which the traveler, leaving
the capital of Japan, passing
through the gates of Peking,
and then touching at Cashgar,
Bukharia and Teheran, may
without molestation speedily
reach Constantinople, Vienna,
Berlin, Paris, or London.
The Indo-chinese Gleaner:
containing miscellaneous commit-
nications on the literature, his-
tury, philosophy, mythology,
&c., of the Indo-chinese nations,
drawn chiefly from the native
languages. MAlAccA; printed
at the Anglo-chinese Press.
The first number of this Quart-
erly periodical was published in
May 1817, under the editorship
of the late indefatigable Dr.
Milne, and was continued until
April 1822. The need of such
a medium of communication
was very early felt by those
who had undertaken to make
themselves and others familiar-
ly acquainted with the charac-
ter and wants of the people of
eastern Asia. Indeed, one of
the first, though minor objects
contemplated by Dr. Milne and
his colleague and predecessor,
in establishing the Anglo-chi-
nese college, was the publica-
tion of a periodical in the Eng-
lish language. The Gleaner
was commenced and continued
“under many disadvantages;”
still every number was replete
with valuable original matter,
such as could not fail to be
interesting to the philosopher,
to the historian, and especially
to the Christian philanthropist.
Had the Indo-chinese Gleaner
been continued to this day, with.
its wonted ability and spirit, it
would have contained a most
valuable collection of informa-
tion ; even as it is, we know of
no one work that will compare
with it, on most subjects relative
to China. We frequently avail
ourselves of its aid.—For Dr.
Milne's opinion of the value of
such periodicals, we must refer
our readers to “A sketch of the
life of Milne,' which appeared in
our first volume. See page 321.
In the opinion there expressed
we fully concur.
A Monthly periodical in the
Chinese language.—The first
number of this work was pub-
lished in Canton on the Ist in-
stant. An edition of 600 copies
was immediately disposed of; but
was not sufficient to supply sub-
scribers that had already been
obtained; and a second edition
of 300 copies has been struck off.
Few of the natives, we under-
stand, have as yet become sub-
scribers to the work; many cop-
ies of it, however, have fallen
into their hands; and, so far as
we can learn from personal in-
quiry and common report, they
generally entertain a favorable
opinion of it. If it can be con-
tinued, as we trust it will be, we
have no doubt that the number
of subscribers and readers will
soon be very much increased.
What opposition it may have to
contend with, remains to be seen.
We shall anxiously watch the
progress of this new periodical
as it goes forth, in its elegant
costume, to seek new acquaint-
ances and to inform them of
what has been and is now exist-
ing and transpiring beyond the


1833.
187
Java.
limits of the celestial empire;
and we shall endeavor faithfully
to report its successes, and (if
it shall be so) its reverses. Let
it go richly stored with useful
knowledge and science — the
handmaids of true religion—
and we bid it God speed.—We
subjoin the original Prospectus.
While civilization is making rapid
progress over ignorance and error
in almost all other portions of the
globe, even the bigoted Hindoos
having commenced the publication of
several periodicals in their own lan-
guages,<-the Chinese aione remain
stationary, as they have been for
ages past. Notwithstanding our long
intercourse with them, they still pro-
ſess to be first among the nations of
the earth, and regard all others as
“barbarians.” This empty conceit
has greatly affected the interests of
the #. residents at Canton, and
their intercourse with the Chinese.
The monthly periodical which is
now offered for the patronage of the
foreign community of Canton and
Macan, is published with a view to
counteract these high and exclusive
notions, by making the Chinese ac-
quainted with our arts, sciences, and
principles. It will not treat of po-
litics, nor tend to exasperate their
minds by harsh language upon any
subject. There is a mere excellent
way to show that we are not indeed
“barbarian;" and the Editor pre-
fers the method of exhibiting facts,
to convince the Chinese that they
have still very much to learn. Aware
also, of the relation in which foreign-
ers stand to the native authorities,
the Editor has endeavored to concil.
iate their friendship, and hopes ul-
timately to prove successful.
As all the members of the foreign
community here have a common
interest in the successful prosecution
of such a work, the Editor hopes
to find among them a sufficient num-
ber of subscribers to defray the ex-
penses;—the more so, as the Chi-
nese themselves must, at least for
some months, be incapable of ap-
preciating a publication of this na-
ture; and consequently little support
can be immediately looked for from
them. -
The subscription will be for six
months, being at least one dollar per
month, for which sum seven copies
will be delivered. The numbers will
be issued regularly :-each number
will contain upwards of twenty pages,
and will be embellished by maps
and plates, illustrative of geograph-
ical and astronomical subjects, &c.
Should the work meet with the
support and approbation of the com-
munity, it will be considerably ex-
tended by much additional matter.
r Charles Gutzlaff.
Canton, June 23d, 1833.
*-
-
RELIGIOUS INTELLIGENCE.
**.
JAvA.—A gentleman who has
resided in Java has put into
our hands the following brief
notices of that island and its
inhabitants.
“Java is without doubt, the
most delightful island of the
Indian Archipelago. Its fertility
and situation render it a posses-
sion of very great value. But
notwithstanding these advan-
tages, it is deeply to be regret-
ted, that the natives are so fet-
tered by the iron laws of Mo-
hammedanism as to retard or
stop every attempt which may
be made to improve their con-
dition.
“The enlightened policy of
Sir Stamford Raffles broke
through all difficulties, and pro-
vided instruction both for the no-
bility and common people. Those
times are gone by; and the natives
are again subject to the had-
jees, who are their only teach-


188
AUG.
Jlissionaries to the Chinese.
ers and virtual rulers. Nothing
can be so pernicious as to allow
these idle pilgrims to suck up
the marrow of the nation, and
imbue the people with strong
hatred against a Christian gov-
ernment. At the same time it
is clear, that no governmental
laws can control their author-
ity and influence over the minds
of those who believe in the doc-
trines of the Koran ; for most
tenaciously will they adhere to
the dogmas of their false teach-
ers, unless in their youth they
receive better instruction. That
would render the attempts of the
hadjees entirely futile. While
they remain in their ignorance,
they will most surely continue
to be the followers of the false
prophet, and cling to their su-
perstitious and wicked practices.
Some provision for their edu-
cation, therefore, ought to be
made by the civil authorities;
and if this is neglected, these
deluded men will be forced, as
heretofore, to abide in darkness
under the control of the hadjees.
“Though the prejudices of
the Javanese against a liberal
education may be very great, they
surely are not greater than those
of the Hindoos and moslems of
Hindostan. But experience has
proved that the prejudices of
these latter can be over come ;
and they be made willing, nay
anxious to have schools estab-
lished among themselves, under
the superintendence of Euro-
pean teachers, with the New
Testament for a school-book.
“Ought we therefore to del
spair in regard to the Javanese?
Have not the first efforts which
have been made among them;
been attended with most bene-
ficial consequences ! Will the
natives revolt as soon as they
are taught to love their neigh-
bors as themselves, and also to
revere every human power as
the ordinance of God? Does
the history of nations teach us
that education makes the peo-
ple ungovernable and unsub-
missive Or, do the records of
modern missions afford a single
instance where Christian in-
struction has caused men to be
rebellious !
“The middle ages of igno-
rance are passing away; and
with them the inquisitorial laws
which inthrall the human spirit.
Pure religion, arts and sciences
are spreading rapidly, and no
power of darkness can stop their
march. While we are so highly
benefited by Christianity, are we
not bound in duty to impart a
knowledge of it to our fellow-
men, over whom the Almighty
has appointed us rulers? To act
according to such a principle is
characteristic of every wise ad-
ministration; we hope it will be
fully adopted in Java.”
Mission Aries among the Chi-
nese.—By a letter dated Sou-
rabaya, July 6th 1833, we learn
that the Rev. Herman Rottger,
one of the five Dutch missiona-
ries who were appointed to the
Moluccas, has resolved on enter-
ing the Chinese mission.—After
speaking of Mr. Gutzlaff's voy-
ages up the coast; Mr. R. adds;
—“I also am on fire to enter
the combat against the empire
of darkness, where the prince
of this world holds his seat in
China. And f desire and hope
that my fire may not cool from
the length of time which will
elapse, before I reach the celes-
tial empire.”


~ 1833.
Occurrences. 189
Journal of
By another letter from the
Straits, we learn that the Rev.
John Evans has recently arrived
at Singapore from England, to
join one of the stations of the
London Missionary Society's
missions among the Chinese.
The time has come, we can-
not doubt it, when the disciples
of the Lord Jesus feel a new
interest in China. A few, we
hope many, of the churches of
Christ in England, on the con-
tinent of Europe, and in America
are beginning to understand that
it is their duty to send the glo-
rious gospel of salvation to all
their fellow-creatures; and it is
cheering to know that a con-
stantly increasing number “are
living, laboring, praying, and
appropriating time, substance,
and influence, with their eye
steadily upon the speedy con-
a
version of the whole wurld to
God. Whatever field, what-
ever department, of Christian
effort claims their attention—
whether domestic or foreign
missions, the education of min-
isters, the multiplication of Bi-
bles or tracts, the improvement
of morals or education, the ad-
vancement of science, or what-
ever it may be—the object of
pursuit is the same ; it is, the
SPEEDY CONVERSION OF THE
whole world.”
, The command of Christ, a
perishing world, the prosperity
of Zion, and the glory of her
King, call for a rapid increase
of the number of missionaries to
the heathen.—One society has
resolved to send beyond the
Ganges into southeastern Asia
sixteen missionaries, during the
current year.
JOURNAL OF OCCURRENCES.
Mourning for the empress.—
The provincial and local of
ficers of this province went into
mourning for the empress on the
16th instant. But the common
people do not mourn.
INsurrection IN Cochi Nchina.
The governor of Saigon and
the southern provinces of Co-
chinchina died at the close of
last year. He was, we believe,
the very same officer who was
governor (or viceroy) of those
provinces in 1822, when Mr.
Crawfurd visited Cochinchina
as agent for the governor-gen-
eral of India. His duties were
both of a civil and military na-
ture. Under his command, in
his inilitary capacity, was an
officer of considerable rank,
who had incurred the displeas-
ure of most of the superior
officers and princes of the court,
by his disregard of, and want
of subservience to, them. After
the death of his commander and
patron, therefore, he was im-
mediately disgraced, and on
false charges, imprisoned and
condemned to death. His wives


19()
AUG.
Journal of Occurrences.
and children also were con-
demned to become slaves to the
higher officers. To avoid this
ignominy, he formed a plan
for destroying both himself and
them. The people, both natives
and Chinese, with whom he was
very popular, received inform-
ation of this, and went in a large
body to his prison to dissuade
him from his purpose, intend-
ing to take his defence upon
themselves. Being denied ad-
inittance by the jailors, they be.
came riotous, and a party of
the police was sent to disperse
them. They beat back the po-
lice, and finding that they had
gone too far to recede, attacked
the officers before the military
could assemble, killed the ma-
jor part, released their favorite,
placed him at their head, and
sent for aid to Siam.
The above is from a Chinese,
who left Cochinchina to get out
of harm's way: it is dated at the
city of Saigon, July 5th, 1833.
'The Peking GAzettes for
many months past, exclusive of
the recorded degradations and
new appointments, the demise of
some old officers, friends of the
emperor, and of his wife the
empress, have been filled chiefly
with details of murders and fa-
mine, robberies, rapes, and un-
natural crimes. Generals of the
army, the supreme courts and
cabinet ministers assembled with
the privy council and nobles, .
are appointed to try and report
cases to the emperor, which are
much more fit for a justice of the
peace, or the police officers of a
great capital, than for the sove-
reign of a mighty empire.
A short time since, in Peking
the head of a yonth was dragged
from the river by a hungry dog,
He who first reported the fact
was suspected of being concern-
ed in the murder. But a series
of examinations produced such
contradictory statements, that it
appeared more likely that two,
than that one person had com-
mitted the murder. A priest
and a resident in a temple of
Budha were finally accused of
having attempted to abuse the
body of a boy, and, eventually
through rage and vexation, of
cutting off his head.—By latest.
accounts the body r" the boy had
not been found
Suicide.— We have seen a
letter from a native who lives
about twenty miles westward
of Canton. In the neighbor-
hood of his village, a young
bride returned from the house of
her husband,(according to estab-
lished custom,) to visit her own
family and acquaintances. She
had a sister and some other un-
married young friends, (but
probably betrothed,) to wholm
she gave so shocking an account
of the unhappy condition of a
woman when married to a bad
man,—alledging that it was bet-
ter to die than go to the house
of a bad husband,-that in con-
sequence of the conversation and ,
their own apprehensions, four
of the young ignorant creatures
determined to commit suicide.
This they effected by tying
their hands together and throw-
ing themselves into an adjoin-
ing river. An alarm was soon
given and they were taken from
the water, but not until in all of
them life was extinct.
Bohra hills.-According to
authentic accounts received from


1833.
191
Journal of Occurrences.
the Bohea hills—the hills where
the bohea tea grows, in the
province of Fuhkeen, the rains
there were heavy and contin-
uous ſor the space of a whole
month; in consequence of which,
the mountain torrents swelled,
bridges and planks were swept
away, the roads were broken
up, and 'the paths rendered
impassable. The teas already
prepared were washed away or
saturated with water, and the
leaves of those which were not
yet plucked remained to perish
on the plant.
Locusts.--Froin the prov-
ince of Hookwang down to
Kwangse, a species of locust
has descended upon the coun-
try, hundreds of millions, in
number. This species is called
hwang-chung, and vulgarly po-
chung or “winnowing machines.”
Before them, nature appeared
as the garden of Eden; behind
them, it was a desolate wil-
derness.
Fires.—Early in this month,
a fire broke out in Hankow,
which is one of the largest
towns in the province of Hoopih.
The houses of the town are built
chiefly of wood. They contained
a large amount of merchandise.
The fire continued for seven
successive days.
On the morning of the 25th
inst. at about 4 o'clock, houses
were on fire in the west suburb
of Canton, about half a mile
distant from the foreign fac-
tories. The fire-engines were
immediately in motion, and the
fire soon extinguished. Only
three houses were partly con-
sumed.—Had it not been for
their engines, and the improve-
ments which the Chinese have
derived from foreigners, this
last fire might have been as de-
structive as that at Hankow,
which it is said, nearly equalled
that of Canton in 1823.
INUNdAtions—Near the close
of the last Inonth, the waters
which had deluged several dis-
tricts west of this city, had
considerably abated; but sub-
sequent rains caused them to
overflow again, and threaten
destruction to the latter harvest.
The prospect still continues not
very pleasing.
On the eastern borders of this
province also, near Fuhkeen,
the inundation has been very
destructive. Thirty-six villages
in the district of Ta-poo were
buried beneath the waters; and
hundreds of human carcasses
ſloated on their surface.—Puh
haou she keae / exclaimed our
informant as he related the
above particulars.”
In consequence of these long
continued rains and inundations,
governor Loo went in person to
the temples of wind and fire, to
solicit more of the power of these
elements to diminish or stop
the fall of water.
FAMINE.-Scarcity and fam-
ine, says another individual,
(and the Gazettes confirm it,)
have prevailed, more or less, in
all the provinces. And, says a
native observer, from the com-
mencement of the present reign,
there has not occurred one fe-
licitous year! We leave the
reflections to our readers.
* “Puh hadu she keae " may be freely rendered by the old Latiu
phrase—0 tempora, O mores!


102
Journal of Occurrences.
Distribution or Food.—At Pe-
king, of late, large quantities of food
have been distributed to the people.
At first rice congee was given; but
as many did not bring vessels in which
to carry it home, rice was substi-
tuted for it. We find from a report
in the gazettes, that during ten days,
461.129 mouths of great and small,
males and females. were thus sup-
plied with food.
CAP1t Al Puxish MENTs.-At Koten,
in Tartary, as it appears by the Pe.
king gazettes, twenty-one persons,
accused of an attempt to excite re-
bellion, and of murdering two Mo-
hammedan begs, were in January
last, fastened to a cross and cut to
ieces. They wished to force the
Yegs to assist them and proposed to
take the city of Koten; but the Mo-
hammedans held fast their allegiance,
and in words railed at and abused
the rebels, till they died. His ma-
jesty expresses great regret at the
fate of the begs, praises their constan-
cy, and orders posthumous honors.
YUEN YUEN.—Of this officer we have
more than once had occasion to speak
in our previous numbers. Having
just reached his seventieth year, he
has left his government in Yunnan,
and is now at Peking,-‘laying his
head in the mire.” (to use his own
º in gratitude for the pres-
ents of imperial scrolls, silks, &c.,
which his majesty has condescend-
ed to confer on him. Governor
Yiren, on the disgrace of governor
, Le, succeeded to the office of sixth
cabinet minister; and it is rumored
that he will now be kept at court, in-
'stead of returning to his government.
We give the following brief ae-
count of him from Chinese author-
• * > . , t , , , , , . . . . . . . .
—-tº-e Qess--
Rais stonws—The heat at Canton is generally as oppressive during the
month of August as in July. This year it has not been so; frequent rains
have rendered the weather, especially during the last half of the month,
ities:—Yuen Yuen is a more literary
and talented man than almost any
other statesman in China. He took
his second literary degree, that of
keu-jin. at the early Rge of 18; and
he was soon after employed by the
most sacred Duke (the hereditar
descendant of Confucius), as a pri-
vate tutor. From this situation, he
proceeded to take office; and in
after life he married the duke's
daughter, a highly talented woman;
one of his daughters also evinced
her literary powers, by publishing
some poetic pieces, during the pe.
riod of her father's holding office at
Canton.—Yuen Yuen, at the grand
examinations, nitained the chief name
on the list of the Hanlin or doctors.
‘A few years afterwards he became
governor, an office which he held
for many years in Canton, from
whence he was removed to Yunnan.
Though a very literary man,—and
a great patron of scholars, he is not
considered a good governor. It was
by his suggestion, and under his su-
perintendence, that the copious sta-
tistical au- “ of e...".
called Kwangtung Tung Che was pub-
lished,—a work which is as far infe-
rior, in a geographical point of view
to the works of western writers, as
it is superior to the great majority
of Chinese statistical compilations.
Execution.—On the 4th of August,
twenty-three men were beheaded by
the authority of the local govern-
ment of Canton, without reference to
theemperor. The alledged crime was
piracy. It is truly shocking to hear
of men heing, cut-off by tens and
scores, by the b of the execu-
tioner; and without exciting among
the people the least horror or com-
miseration.
- **
unusually cool.
The waters of the late inundation continued to decrease
np to the night of the 25th, when we were visited by a storm from the
east, with abundance of rain.
The storm subsided on the two following
slavs: but rose again on the evening of the 28th; and this morning, (ſhe
30th inst., at 11 o'clock,) it continues with but little, if any abatement.
The fall of rain has been excessive; and the tide, driven by a strong easter.
!y wind, has risen far above its usual mark. -


THE
C H IN E S E R E Pos I To R Y.
Vol. II.-SEPTEMBER, 1833.-No. 5.
Description of THE city of CANToN.
- (Continued from page 160.)
Necessity, which has always guided infant nations
in their first efforts towords improvement, seems
everywhere to have adapted her lessons to the
circumstances of those who were to be instructed.
Prompted by her suggestions, the ancient Egyptians
and Greeks went on rapidly from one improvement
to another; and, taking advantage of those advan-
ces, the nau- ~ of the west are at this moment
moving forward with unexampled celerity and ma-
jesty, attracting universal attention, and conferring
substantial good on all the families of the earth.
It has been far otherwise with this nation. So far
as Necessity urged them, the Chinese went on quick-
ly; but seldom have they ventured or desired to
step beyond the limits which circumscribed the ef.
forts of their remote ancestors; and they have been
equally slow and unwilling to adopt or initate the
usages and improvements of “distant foreigners.”
This is a prominent characteristic of the Chinese,
and one too in which they glory. Hence, without
having much claim to originality, they are exceed-
ingly unlike the nations of the west. In giving a
description of his people, therefore, or of anything


194 Description of the SEP.
that belongs to them, we are not to estimate either
it or them by the criterion of European taste and
usage. Non disputandum de gustibus. With the
Chinese, the left takes precedence of the right, as
the place of honor; and white instead of black is
the appropriate badge of mourning. From the
peculiar structure of their compass, perhaps, which
they call che man chay, “a chariot pointing towards
the south,” they do not number the cardinal points
in our order, but always mention the south before
the north, as in the following prosaic verse:—
Yué nan pih, yué se tung :
South and north, west and east.
And for north-west, &c., they say west-north, west-
south. Without attempting to account for this con-
trariety, it is obvious to remark that the fact itself
ought to be kept in mind, while surveying the va-
rious works, occupations, institutions, and habits of
the Chinese. . . . . - . . . ;
It is generally supposed that the remote ancestors
of this nation, in their migration eastward, dwelt in
tents: their circumstances would require such habita-
tions: and when they became stationary, their wants
would prompt them to seek some more substantial
covering from the heat and the storm. But the tent
was the only model before them; and that they
imitated it, their houses and temples and pagodas,
built at the present day, afford abundant proof. The
roof, concave on the upper side, aad the veranda,
with its slender columns, show most distinctly the
original features of the tent. In fact the whole
fabric of ordinary buildings is light and slender, re-
taining the outline of primeval simplicity. Those
therefore who seek here for grand and stately ed-
ifices, built after the Grecian and Gothic models,
wall seek in vain. Barrow, after having visited the
imperial palaces, and traveled from north to south,
through the whole breadth of the empire, affirmed
that all the buildings of the Chinese are “without
elegance or convenience of design, and without any


1833. - City of Canton. 195
settled proportion, mean in their appearance, and
clumsy in their workmanship.” Macartney was
much better pleased with their architecture; though
it is “totally unlike any other, and irreconcileable
to our rules,” yet “it is perfectly consistent with its
own, and upon the whole, it often produces a most
pleasing effect; as we sometimes see a person, with-
out a single good feature in his face, have, never-
theless, a very agreeable countenance.” ‘’
... In the buildings of Canton, we have doubtless as
great a variety of structure and style, and as fair
specimens of Chinese taste and art as can be found
in the whole empire. A large part of the city and
suburbs is built on low ground or flats. Special
care, therefore, is requisite in order to secure for
houses and temples a solid basis. Near the river,
and in all the most loose or muddy situations, houses
are raised on wooden piles, which make the foun-
dation as secure as brick or stone, and perhaps even
more so. In some cases the piles rise above
the surface of the ground, and then the buildings, .
constructed of wood, rest directly on them; but in
other instances the piles reuch only within a few
feet of the surface, and the remaining part of the
'foundation is made of mud, brick, or stone. When
this is done, the walls of the houses are usually
carried up and completed with the same material.
Not a few of the houses are entirely baseless, or
have only a slender foundation of mud, of which
also their walls are composed; and hence in se-
were rain-storms and overflowings of the river, such
as have recently happened, many of the walls are
prostrated. - - -
Bricks are in most general use for the walls of
lo...". fifths of the whole city are
uilt of this material ; of the remaining part, a very
large portion is constructed of mud; most of the
Tartars in the old city are said to inhabit houses
of this description. Stone and wood are not very
extensively used for the walls of houses; the first is


196 Description of the SEP.
frequently employed about gateways and for door-
posts ; and the second for columns, beams, and raf-
ters. Many of the floors of houses and temples are
formed of indurated mud; marble flags are some-
times used for the same purpose, and often tiles.
These latter, when made very thin, are used for
roofs; they are laid on the rafters “in rows alter-
nately concave and convex, and forming ridges and
furrows, luted by a cement of clay.” Windows
are small, and rarely supplied with glass ; paper,
mica, or shell, or some other similar translucent
substance taking its place. Very little iron is em-
ployed in building houses. -
All these materials for building are procurable
here at moderate prices, and in great abundance.
Wood, usually a species of the fir, is floated down
the rivers, and brought to the city in large rafts.
Bricks are made in the neighborhood of Canton,
and are brought hither in boats, and sold at various
prices from three to eight dollars a thousand. These
bricks are chiefly of a leaden blue color, or of a
pale brown; a few are red; these various tints
are occasioned by the different modes of drying
and burning them: the red bricks are the only ones
that are thoroughly burnt; the leaden blue, are those
which have been exposed to the action of the fire
only for a short time ; while those that have expe-
rienced no other heat than that of the sun, are pale
brown. Excellent stone for building is found in
the hill-country on the north of the province, and
also in several of the islands south of the city.
The stone is chiefly granite and sand-stone; of
each there are several varieties. . .
Such is the general style, and such the usual
material of the buildings of Canton. In passing
through the streets of the city, the spectator is
struck with the difference which he finds in its va-
rious buildings.-though this diversity does by no
means fully '..."..."...."...#
cumstances of the people. A few only are rich; and
--~


1833. ( 'ity of ('anton. 197
the external appearance of their houses does not
at all exceed in elegance those of the middling
class. Many are very poor; and the aspect of
their habitations exhibits abundant evidence of their
abject state. The poorest people are to be found
in the extreme part of the suburbs, along the banks
of the canals, and in the northern part of the old
city; their houses are mere mud hovels—low, nar-
row, dark, uncleanly, and without any division of
apartments. A whole family of six, eight, or ten,
and sometimes twice that number of individuals,
is crowded into one of these dreary abodes. It is
surprising that people can live, and enjoy health,
..T. long life, in such circumstances. To pass
through the streets or lanes of such a neighborhood,
is sufficient to reconcile a person to any ordinary
condition of life. Neither intelligence nor industry
could ever be confined in such miserable cells.
In habitations a little more spacious and cleanly
than these, perhaps one third part of the population
of Canton have their abodes. These stand close
on the streets, and have usually but a single en-
trance, which is closed by a bamboo screen sus-
pended from the top of the door; within these houses
there are no superfluous apartments; a single room
allotted to . branch of the family, serves for a
dormitory, while a third, which completes the num-
ber into which the whole inclosure -is divided, is
used by all the household as a common eating
room. Chinese houses usually open towards the
south; but in these, as also in the poorer kind,
this favorite position is disregarded. Houses of.
this description are rented at four or five dollars a
month.
Another class of dwellings inhabited by a more
wealthy but less numerous part of the community,
are the residences of those in easy circumstances, who
enjoy plenty, without any of the accompaniments
of luxury. These houses, together with the plot of
ground on which they stand, are surrounded by a


198 Description of the SEP.
wall twelve or fourteen feet high, that rises and
fronts close on the street, so as completely to con-
ceal all the buildings from the traveler as he passes
by. Indeed, the prospect as you go along the nar-
row streets, which are lined with this description of
houses, is very cheerless. But if allowed to enter
some of these dwellings, more pleasing scenes will
open before you, different enough however from the
‘home of you childhood. You would enter the outer
inclosure through a large folding door into an open
court, thence you would be conducted by a servant
to the visitor's hall,—which is usually a small apart-
ment furnished with chairs, sofas, tea-stands, &c.
Here your host would meet you, and perhaps in-
troduce to you the younger members of his family.
These halls are open on one side; and the others
are commonly ornamented with carved work, or
hung with various scrolls, presenting in large and
elegant characters the moral maxims of their sages,
or perhaps exhibiting rude landscapes, or paintings
of birds and flowers. The remaining part of the
inclosure is occupied with the domestic apartments,
a garden, and perhaps also a small school-room.
The houses of a few of the most opulent in Can-
ton are in no respect inferior, except it may be in
the space they occupy, to the imperial palaces. The
family residences of some of those merchants who
are licensed by government to trade with foreigners,
furnish good specimens of this kind of buildings.T
The seat of the late: Consequa, which is now half
in ruins, was once superb; that of the present sen-
ior hong merchant is on a scale of great magni-
ficence; “it is a villa, or rather palace, divided into
suites of apartments, which are highly and tastefully
decorated.”—The houses of the officers of go-
vernment, and also the numerous temples of the city,
need not be particularized in this place;—suffice it to
remark, that they are usually more spacious than .
private dwelling-houses, and that at present most of
them are in very ordinary condition.


1833, City of Canton. 199
Very few of the houses or temples of Canton
have more than one story, the halls of which are
usually of the whole height of the fabric, without
any concealinent of the beams or rafters of the
roof. Terraces are often built above the roofs;
and when surrounded by a breast-work, afford in
the cool of the day a pleasant and secure retreat,
where people can ascend to enjoy a purer air, to
secure a wider prospect, or to witness any event
that transpires in the neighborhood. These terraces
are not, perhaps, very unlike the flat roofs of other
orientals. In some other points also there is a co-
incidence between the houses of the Chinese and
those which are noticed in sacred literature. -
Referring to these latter, professor Jahn, in his
Biblical Archaeology, says:—‘the gates not only of
houses, but of cities, were customarily adorned with
an inscription, which was to be extracted from the
law of Moses; a practice in which may be found
the origin of the modern Mezuzaw, or piece of
parchment inscribed with sacred texts, and fastened
to the door-posts. The gates were always shut,
and one of the servants acted the part of a porter.
The space immediately inside the gate is called the
porch, is square, and on one side of it is erected
a seat for the accommodation of those strangers,
who are not to be admitted into the interior of the
house. From the porch we are introduced, through
a second door into a court, which is commonly
paved with marble, and surrounded on all sides,
sometimes, however, only on one, with a peristyle
or covered walk, over which, if the house have more
than one story, there is a gallery of the same di-
mensions, supported by columns and protected by
a balustrade. In this court, large companies are re-
ceived, at nuptials, &c. On such occasions, a large
veil of thick cloth is extended by ropes over the
whole court to exclude the heat of the sun. The
back part of the house is allotted to the women,
and is called in Arabic, the harem, and in Hebrew.


200 Description of the SEP.
by way of eminence, the palace. Behind the harem
there is a garden, into which the women enjoy the
pleasure of looking from their apartments. i. the
smaller houses the females occupy the upper story.
This is the place assigned them also by Homer
in the Iliad and Odyssey.' --
Now, in the buildings of the Chinese, the various
inscriptions seen on their door-posts; the porter at
the outer gate, and the porch and court within ;
the peristyle with its columns, and perhaps a gallery
above, and the palace, kin-te or “forbidden ground,”
with its garden, all have a striking resemblance to
those in the above description. The inner apart-
ments of the emperor are in like manner called,
by way of eminence, kungteen, or “the palace.”
We pass now to notice the government of Can-
ton. Here, as everywhere else throughout the wide
dominions of the Mantchou Chinese, all power
emanates from the one man, who, enthroned on the
‘dragon's seat,' is honored as the vicegerent of
‘high heaven.' Hence, the present line of mon-
archs have not been satisfied with the dignity of
sovereigns, but have laid claim to the character
of sages. “The sovereign of men,” say they, “is
heaven's son; nobles and statesmen are the sove-
reign's children; and the people are the children of
nobles and statesmen. The sovereign, should
serve heaven as a father; never forgetting to
cherish reverential thoughts, but exerting himself
to illustrate his virtue, and looking upwards receive
from heaven the vast patrimony which it confers;
thus the emperor will daily increase in felicity. and
glory. Nobles and ministers of state, should serve
their sovereign as a father; never forgetting to
cherish reverential thoughts; not harboring covetous
and sordid desires; not engaging in wicked and
clandestine plots, but faithfully and justly exert-
ing themselves; thus their noble rank will ever be
preserved. The people should never forget to


1833. City of Canton. 201
cherish reverential thoughts towards the nobles and
ministers of state ; to obey and keep the laws; not
to excite secret or open sedition ; not to engage in
insurrection or rebellion;–then no great calamity
will befall their persons.” -
In accordance with these views, a spacious hall,
called wan-show kung, is dedicated to the emperor
in the capital of every province of the empire. The
walls and all the appurtenances of these halls are
yellow, which is the imperial color. In Canton, the
wan-show kung stands near the southeast corner of
the new city, within the walls. It is used solely
for the honor of the emperor and his family; and
annually, three days before and three days after the
imperial birthdays, all the officers of government,
both civil and military, together with the principal
inhabitants of the city, assemble in it, and there
pay him adoration. The same solemnities are re-
quired on these occasions, as would be were he
present. No seats are allowed in the sacred place;
and every one that goes thither takes with him a
cushion, upon which he sits cross-ſegged on the
ground. So much is done for absent majesty.
The principal of those officers who hold author-
ity in the city, we will mention here in their order.
‘. .1. Tsungtuh:—this officer is styled Leting Kwang
tsungtuh, or “the governor of the provinces of
Kwangtung and Kwangse.” He is clothed with
high authority, and in many cases acts independently
of all the other officers within the limits of his iuris-
diction; usually however he acts in concert, and con-
fers with those, who like himself, have been com-
missioned and sent hither from the capital. He
cannot originate and carry into execution any new
law or regulation without the sanction of the em-
peror; he is required to act according to precedents
and existing statutes. In certain cases, pointed out
by law, he, together with the fooyuen, can inflict
immediate death. New regulations are frequently
proposed to he emperor by the governor and his


202 Description of the SEP.
council, and when these have received the imperial
sanction, (which they almost always do,) they
have the force of law. The governor is, ea of.
ficio, an honorary president of the supreme Tri-
bunal of War at Peking; and occasionally, also, a
member of the imperial cabinet. - -
His commands are most peremptory, and his au-
thority is never to be slighted or resisted with im-
punity. His responsibility, too, is very great; he
is held accountable to his majesty for the good
management of all affairs in the two provinces—
nay, almost for the prosperity of the people, and
the fruitfulness of the seasons. Every calamity
occasioned by fire, water, drought, earthquake, lo-
custs, or by whatever means it may occur, he must
faithfully report to the emperor and to the supreme
tribunals, on penalty of being dismissed from office.
Any real or supposed deficiency in his capacity or
conduct, subjects him to the severest punishment.
Witness the late governor Le; who, during the last
year, for the “untoward affair” at Leãnchow, was
deprived of all rank and honors, put in chains, im-
prisoned, condemned, and sent into remote banish-
ment. In case of fires breaking out in the pro-
vincial city, when more than ten houses are con- .
sumed, the governor is fined nine months' pay; if
more than thirty houses are burnt, he forfeits one
year's salary; if three hundred are burnt, he is de-
graded one degree.—Fires occurring in the suburbs."
do not subject him to the same punishment.:
All the principal officers of Canton, and also a
few of the most respectable private citizens, fre-
quently wait on his excellency. These “calls” are
visits of business or ceremony, according to circum-
stances; and more or less frequent, according to the . .
disposition of the parties. On certain occasions,
such as the arrival of a new governor, all the civil
and military officers of both provinces are required
to send to him “an accurate and perspicuous”
account of themselves, their term of service, and


1833. City of Canton, 203
the condition of their respective districts. But “who-
ever of the superior or inferior officers, with their
advisers, or the salt or hong-merchants, or any other
persons, shall represent that he is intimate with me,”
said one of the late governors, “and in my con-
fidence; or if persons shall write to each other to
this effect, or shall suffer themselves to be thus de-
ceived,—they shall all be arrested and brought to
trial; and those who conceal such things shall be con-
sidered equally guilty with those who commit thern.”
All ultimate appeals in the two provinces are
made to the governor. At the gate of his palace are
placed six tablets, on which are written appropriate
inscriptions for those who wish to appeal to his au-
thority: the first is for those who have been wronged
by covetous, corrupt, or sordid officers; the second
is for those who have suffered by thieves and robbers;
the third, for such as have been falsely accused; the
fourth, for those who have been injured by swindlers.
and gamesters; the fifth, for such as have suffered by
wicked persons of any description; and the sixth is
for those who wish to give information concerning
any secret schemes or machinations. On the 3d,
and 8th, 13th and 18th, 23d and 28th days of each
month, the people are allowed to take these tablets
..in their hands, and to enter one of the outer a-
partments of the palace, where they may in person
present their. complaints to his exce.lency. This
mode of procedure is seldom adopted. To send or
carry up a petition to his gate, is the most common
method of seeking redress from the hands of the
governor. When all these means fail, an appeal
may be made to Peking.—This mode of appeal by
entering the gates of the imagistrate, is allowed also
at the offices of the fooyuen and anchá sze.
The governor's house stands in the new city, near
the Yew-lan gate; it is spacious, and belongs to go-
vernment. His salary is 15,000 taels annually; and
it is generally, believed, that his other emoluments,
during the same period of time, amount to more


204 Description of the * SEP.
than twelve times that sum,-although presents of
every description to officers of government are dis-
allowed. Loo Kwan, the present governor, is an
aged man, and a native of one of the northern pro-
vinces. He seems to belong to that class of persons,
who are fond of ease and pleasure, not very ambi-
tious, but desirous that all under their authority
should know their places, and perform their respec-
tive duties. He has about him a large number of
persons, employed as advisers, secretaries, servants,
&c. He has also attached to him a small number
of troops, who serve for a body-guard, and at the
same time constitute a part of the city police.
2. Fooyuen ;—this officer, who is also called seun-
foo, is usually styled by foreigners, ‘lieut.-governor;'
he is second in authority in this province, to which
his jurisdiction is confined. The title of Choo, the pre-
sent fooyuen, as it appears in governmental papers
runs thus –an attendant officer of the Board of
War; a member of the court of universal examiners;
an imperial censor; patrolling soother of Canton;
a guide of military affairs; and a controller of the
taxes.—Division of power, when it is to be entrusted
to those who have been selected from the people, is
the policy of the Mantchou family. The fooyuen,
though second to the governor, is not under his con-
trol, and in certain cases acts independently of him.
They often confer together, and in matters about
which they cannot agree, they refer for a decision to
Peking. He holds the wang-ming, “king's order,’ or
death warrant, by virtue of which, criminals, in cases
of great emergency, can be put to the sword with-
out a reference to the emperor. His residence is in
the old city, in a palace built in the reign of Shunche,
by one of the Tartar generals who was sent hither
to “pacify” the rebellious subjects of the south.
Choo is a native of Keāngsoo, and a thorough-bred.
son of Han,—stern, resolute, and even obstinate; rath-
er careless about emoluments, a contemner of bribes,
a terror to bandits, a hater of “divine vagabonds,”
-


1833. City of Canton, 205
respected by a few, and feared by all. In his person
he is tall and well-formed ; and his looks show that
he has not “gone hither and thither” discharging the
functions of public life without toil and anxiety. He
rose from very humble circumstances, and has grown
old in the service of his country; he has now no fam-
ily but one son, and he is a sorrow to his father.
Like the governor, he has a small body of soldiers
under his command, but the number of persons kept
in his immediate employ is few; and in his habits of
living—we have his own word for it, the patrolling
soother is both economical and simple, and “an
example to the people.”
3. Tsetingkeun :—this officer, usually denominat-
ed the Tartar general, is commandant of the Tartar
troops of Canton, and is answerable for the defence
of the city. In most cases he acts independently
of the tsungtuh and fooyuen. The soldiers under
his immediate command, except a small detachment
stationed on the river, are quartered in the old
city, where the general keeps his court and camp.
He is always, we believe, a Mantchou, and not un-
frequently a member of the imperial family. Sub-
ordinate to the tseñngkeun, there are two foo-too
tung, or lieutenant-generals; and a great number
of inferior officers, who rank as majors, captains,
lieutenants, &c., &c. His house, which was built
by Tsingnan wang, is said to exhibit some of the
finest specimens of architecture that can be found
in the provincial city.
4. Haekwan keentuh:—this functionary is known
to foreigners, and is often addressed by them, as
“the Grand Hoppo of the Port of Canton.” He
is usually a member of the imperial household, and
receives his appointment immediately from his ma-
jesty; as commissioner of customs, his jurisdiction
is limited to the maritime commerce of Canton.—
Some further particulars of this department of go-
vernment will be given when we come to speak of
the commerce of the city,


206 Description of the SEP.
5. Heóyuen :-this is the highest literary officer
in the province; he is usually called the literary
chancellor of Canton. His office is one of very great
influence and respectability, inasmuch as literary
rank, of which by imperial appointment he is a
judge and dispenser, is necessary for preferment
to all civil offices in the state. He has a general
supervision of all the public schools and colleges,
and literary examinations in the province. On some
special occasions also, his authority extends to the
military. - -
6. Pooching sze:—this officer is the controller of
the revenue of the province; and, under the fooyuen,
directs the appointment and removal of all the sub-
ordinate officers of the local government. The prin-
cipal officers under him are, a king-leih or secretary,
a chaou-mo or keeper of the seal, and koo ta-sze
or keeper of the treasury. -
7. Ganchā sze, or anchá sze:—this officer is
criminal judge of the province; and all the principal
criminal cases which occur within its limits are
brought before him for trial. Sometimes he sits in
judgment alone; but in cases involving the life of
the accused, he is usually assisted by the other chief
officers of the province. At times, also, he holds a
degree of civil power in conjunction with the poo-
ching sze. The government posts, likewise, are un-
der his control. Among other offices attached to
this department of the provincial government, there
... is a sze-yö, who has the general control of the pro-
vincial prisoners; his rank and duties are similar to
those of the keeper of a state prison.
8. Yenyun sze:—this officer has the superin-
tendence of the provincial salt department. Under
him there are a yun-tung who attends to the trans-
portation of salt from one place to another, a secre-
tary, a treasurer, and several other minor officers.
The salt trade is a government monopoly, the duties
upon which form an important branch of the imperial
revenue. The trade is limited to a small number of


1833. City of Canton. 207
licensed merchants, who are usually very rich, and
are often called upon to make liberal grants for the
support of the provincial government.
9. Tuhleting taou :—all the public granaries of
the province are under the direction of this officer;
and their superintendents are subject to his control
and inspection.—There are fourteen public granaries
in and about the city of Canton. These are required
to be kept filled, in order to furnish supplies for the
people in times of scarcity.
10. Kwangchow foo chefoo, or magistrate of the
department of Kwangchow foo. The title of this
officer is often abridged, sometimes to Kwangchow
foo, at others to chefoo. Kwangchow is simply the
name of the foo. Chefoo means literally, “knower
of the department (or foo),” and denotes that it is
the office or duty of this magistrate to be fully ac-
quainted with the portion of territory over which he
is placed. This foo, or portion of territory to which
we have given the name of department, has been
otherwise translated “county.” Either term is suf.
ficient to denote, pretty nearly, what is the authority
of an officer placed at the head of all the affairs
of such a division of the province. There are
numerous civil officers, stationed in various parts
of the department, all of whom are under his im-
mediate inspection. This officer has under his au-
thority a sze-yū, whose duties, as superintendent of
the prisoners of the department, are similar to those
of the chief jailor of a county prison.
11. Manhae heen cheheen:—this officer is sub-
ordinate to the chefoo; and is to the district of
Nanhae, what the chefoo is to the department of
Kwangchow. As cheheen, he is required to know
all the affairs of the district.—The department of
Kwangchow is divided into fourteen heen or dis-
tricts; of which Nanhae and Pwanyu are two of
the principal ones, and include the city of Canton.
12. Pwanyu heen cheheen:—the rank and duties
of this magistrate are the same to the district of


208 Description of the SEP.
Pwanyu, as the last named officer's are in the dis-
trict of Nauhae. Their titles, like that of the che-
foo, are commonly abridged : thus, when speaking
of the Nanhae magistrate, the people usually say,
Nanhae heen; and, when it is not necessary to men-
tion the district, they say simply, cheheen,_desig-
nating by each of these two phrases, the magistrate
of the district of Nanhae.
We have now mentioned and characterized, as .
far as our limits will admit and the nature of the
subject requires, the principal of those officers who
exercise authority in the city of Canton. The reader
will doubtless find it difficult, as we have done, to
determine the exact limits of their respective spherés,
which, like the courses of the planets, often seem
to intersect each other. At the first sight of so ma-
ny bodies, all in motion within so narrow limits, we
feel surprised that they do not immediately come
into collision, destroy each other, and carry destruc-
tion through the whole empire. On closer inspec-
tion, however, we are able to discern some of the
secret laws that govern this complicated system,
preserve it in being, and keep it in motion. Two
influences, the one military and the other literary,
are perhaps the principal forces which regulate and
control the measures of the Chinese government.
Teligion, which often has a gigantie power over
governments, is here blended with civil and state
ceremonies, and exerts but a feeble, and that usu-
ally a most baleful influence on the political des-
tinies of the nation. - -
All the officers enumerated in the foregoing list,
excepting the two cheheen, the chefoo, and the
itseångkeun are, general officers, their jurisdic-
tion extending to all other parts of the province, as
well as over the metropolis. There are likewise two
other officers, commanders-in-chief of the land and
naval forces, who, like the other members of the
provincial government, act alone in certain cases,


1833. City of Canton. 209
and sometimes in concert with the other general
officers. The government is despotic as well as
military; and so constructed that those who form
the provincial government shall, while they enjoy a
degree of independence, serve as mutual checks;
and, at the same time, each superior officer be held
responsible for those who are subordinate and
acountable to himself. Even in the location of these
officers there has been a cautious reference to “di-
vision and balance of power.” For example; the
tsungtuh is stationed in the new city almost within
a stones-throw of his majesty's most faithful “slave,”
the hoppo; the fooyuen and the tseñugkeun are
placed in similar position in reference to each other:
and these two last are so located in the old city,
that—should circumstances require, they could act
against the two first in the new city.
The same principle is observable likewise, if we
mistake not, in the disposition which is made of the
troops. The whole land and naval force throughout
the province has been estimated at (nominally) about
100,000 men; all of whom are, with fixed limitations,
under the control of the governor; he has however
the immediate and sole command of only 5000; and
these are stationed at a distance from the city.
Ontall ordinary occasions, except when he goes to a
: distance, from Canton, he is escorted by a detach-
ment from the Kwangchow hee, (the chief military
officer of Kwangchow,) which, in the absence of his
- own troops, serves him for a body-guard, and con-
stitutes at the same time a part of the police of the
city. The fooyuen has only 2000 at his command;
while the tseangkeun has 5000, which, in an ex-
treme case, would enable him to be master of the ci-
ty. The proper seat of the governor is at Shaouking
foo, several miles west of this eity; but on account
of the superior advantages of Canton, he is allowed
to reside here; he cannot however bring his troops
, hither, lest, in conjunction with the fooyuen, they
should prove more than a match for the Tartar
2 C


210. Description of the SEP.
eneral-commandant and his 5000 fighting men.— .
t should be remarked here, in passing, that no indi-
vidual can hold an office in any province, department,
or district of the empire, that includes the place of
his nativity, or that extends within several hundred
le of it. " . . . -
• ‘The whole number of soldiers ordinarily quarter-
éd in the city does not probably exceed 7000. There
are in the immediate vicinity of Canton a few small
forts; and the city itself is intended to be a strong-
hold; but neither are in such a state that they could
serve any very valuable purposes of defense. Even
the late rain-storm carried away one of the gates of
the city, and opened a wide breach in the walls.
Möst of the forts are dismantled and defenseless,
and present nothing more formidable than the fright-
ful paintings of tiger's heads on the wooden lids
which block up their port-holes. The two Follies,
which are situated in the river opposite to the city,
are very fair specimens of the forts about Canton.
There are likwise for the defense of the city, what
have been called cavalry and artillery; but of these
we have heard little, and seen nothing. Of the Tar-
tar troops, there are 200 chosen men; who, on state
occasions, appear well clad and warliké. But gener-
ally the soldiers are badly equipped and poorly disci-
plined. All their armor and accoutrements, consisting
of shields and helmets, bows and arrows, spears
and javelins, short swords and matchlocks, seem ill
fitted either for defense or attack. The heavy losses
sustained by the troops of Cánton, during the late
highland war at Leônchow, fully confirm these re-
marks; as do also recent imperial edicts, in which
the soldiery are accused of idleness and lazy habits,
—and of “indulging in all the softness of civilians.”
“The police of the city is, on the whole, vigilant
"and effitient. Besides those who act in the capacity.
ofconstables, thieftakers, and so forth, and constitute
"the regular police, there are many neighborhoods,
- as well as private individuals, which make arrange-


J833. City of Canton. . 211.
ments for a constant nocturnal watch. During the
night, almost all the streets of the city are shut up
by strong gates at each end; near one of which there
is usually a guard-house. The night-watches are dis-
tinguished by bells, or some similar instruments kept
by the watchmen. In the winter months, when there
is great danger from fire as well as thieves, watch-
towers are built on bamboo poles, high above the
roofs of the houses;–thus constituting a double
watch. When thieves are discovered, or when a
fire breaks out in any part of the city, the alarm, by
means of the watchmen, spreads quickly from one
extremity of the city to the other. When riotous as-
semblies collect in the streets, they are, in most
cases, speedily dissolved by a vigorous application of
the bamboo or whip. Many, doubtless, “shove by
justice,” and to the day of their death go unpun:
ished; yet the number who are arrested and brought
to trial, annually, is very great. Justice is often ad-
ministered in the most summary manner. Not
unfrequently, in minor cases, the man receives the
punishment and again goes free, the same hour in
which he commits the crime.
The forms of trial are simple. These is no jury,
no pleading. The criminal kneels before the ma;
gistrate, who hears the witnesses and passes sen-
tence; he is then remanded to prison or sent to the
place of execution. Seldom is he acquitted. When
witnesses are wanting, he is sonmetimes tortured un-
til he gives in evidence against himself. There are
four jails in Canton; which together contain several
hundred prisoners.—The jail is called fe-yö, HELI,
or literally, ‘earth's prison. All capital offenders
suffer just without the southern gates, near the
river. Hundreds die there annually. When brought
to the fatal spot, they kneel with their faces towards
the emperor's court, and bending forward in the at-
titude of submission and thanksgiving, suddenly ex.
pire beneath the bloody sword of the executioner.
[To be continued.)


212 Mourning for the late SEP.
" . . . . - i . . " i.
t
. . . . . .
M I S C E L L A N IES. . ...!
The LATE EMPREss.—The first notice in the Peking
gazettes of her late majesty's death is dated the
4th moon 29th day (16th” of June, 1833). It is in
the usual form of an imperial mandate, commenc-
ing thus: “His majesty's commands have been re-
spectfully received. This day at 4 o'clock P. M. the
empress' demise and departure took place.” The
emperor then goes over her history—stating when
he received his father's commands to marry her,
(viz. the 13th year of Keāking,) and his sacred
mother's instructions to constitute her empress, or
the principal person in the middle harem, (viz. the
25th year of Keāking,)—and that for twenty-six.
years in which she had been married to his majesty,
her tenderness, filial piety, and obedience had been
always manifested. This, says the emperor, is
universally known to all in the harem, and in the
imperial household. But now, attacked by an in-
veterate dysentery, she has at last taken the “long
departure,” and I have lost my domestic helper—
an occurrence that causes pain which I cannot
bear to express. He then ordered his brother, the
king Mečnhae, with the comptroller of the impe-
rial household, Hengān, and two others, one a
member of the imperial Board of Rites, and another
of the Board of Works, to superintend the funeral
obsequies. -
Eight days after this, on the 7th of the 5th moon,
another paper appeared in the gazette, praising her
majesty, whose name was Tungkei, for her great
virtues ever since she had been consort to heaven
(i. e. the emperor), and during the thirteen years
that she had held the relative situation of FARTH,
* 1 n a former number. (see nare 142 trusting to an extract from the
Gazette, we stated erroneously that her death occurred on the 10th of June.


1333. Empress of Chima. 21:3
to imperial heaven. This document concludes with
an order to the Hanlin college, to deliberate and
suggest a posthumous title for her majesty. -
Twelve days after this, on the 19th of the 5th
moon, and again on the 23d of the same moon,
other state documents appeared on the subject of
the national mourning. The four persons above
named, differed in opinion from his imperial ma-
jesty on the subjects—how long the people's heads
were to remain unshaven; and how long they were to
desist from marriage, feasts, and music, &c. The
reasonings on each side are given at great length,
with classical and imperial authorities from the time
of ancient Yaou, four thouasnd years ago, up to
the reign of Keāking.
The king and his colleagues considered the pe-
riod appointed for the people to remain unshaven,
and to desist entirely from festivity, as too short,
and that they ought to mourn for the empress as
for a mother—not shaving for a hundred days.-
The emperor referred the case to the premier min-
ister and duke Changling, and to the other minis-
thers, to search for precedents; and their report con-
firmed the emperor in his own decision, to require
both the soldiers and people to cease from shaving
their heads for one month, and from feasts and
music for a hundred days. He then turned round
with anger upon his brother and Hengān, who had
gone lamenting and crying to him at Yuen-ming
yuen gardens, wanting him to alter the order he
had previously given. He says he was half dis-
posed to punish them for the crime of “great dis-
respect,” which would cost them their lives, and
bids them think now they would like that. How-
ever, in mercy to them, he will only hand them
over to a severe court of inquiry, a punishment
slight in comparison with what they deserve. Take
this order, adds the emperor, and promulgate it
universally, outside and inside—or, at home and
abroad Respect this.


214 - Hudhism. SEP.
A latter edict expels Mečnhae and Hengān from
the imperial presence, and condemns the former to
the loss of ten years' salary, or of half his salary
during twenty years, in order that he may have the
other half to live upon. The latter of these princes,
is the man who was lately imperial commissioner to
suppress the highland rebellion; and who having a
sister in the harem had more power than the min-
isters of state. Such is the delectable condition of
society under an absolute despotism. To-day in
the highest favor, and to-morrow for “disrespect,”
in the condition of a criminal;--and soon, like his
late excellency, governor Le, to become as a dead
man out of imind. - * . . . . .
º: " . , ;
* - * --
} - * .
brief notices of the island.
By.
. . . . . .
REMArks on Budhism; together with
of Poo-to, and of the numerous priests who inhabit it.
hilosinensis. . - , - - - -
BUDHISM has lately attracted the notice of several, eminent
scholars in Europe. Anxious to discover a rational system of
idolatry, they have supplied its moral deficiencies from their own
stores of knowledge, and then represented the whole as the
religion most commendable and rational, in the absence of Chris-
tianity. The writer of these remarks has not the slightest wish.
to engage in a contest with those gaints in speculative knowledge;
he wishes merely to present what he has himself witnessed, hav-
ing never previously studied the demonology of the Budhists. In
order however to satisfy his readers, he can state, that he has
since pored over many a book abounding in barbarisms from
the Pali language; that he has perused numerous Chinese works
on the subject; and if, after all, he eonfesses that the greater
part of the Budhistic books contain nothing but absolute absurd.
ities and reveries, unintelligible to the most learned of its vo-
taries, he only coincides in opinion with the more intelligent of
the sect. He admits at the same time, that it is the least. de-,
grading of the idolatrous systems when compared with other
pagan abominations; he allows, that we see it in China in the
least objectionable form in which it exists; yet still he detects
everywhere its principle of atheism, and of gross idolatry. . . .'; )
Having spent about six years among Budhists in various
countries, I can assure those European scholars, that many of
the supposed tenets of Budhism, which they have drawn from
books in the libraries of universities, are as little acknowledged
by the followers of Budha, as are the doctrines of Christianity,
w


1833, Budhism, 215 -
i
They scarcely address themselves to the understanding, but are
content with repeating the prayers delivered to them in the Pali,
to them an unintelligible language; and they pay their worship to
-an indefinite number of images, according to the traditions of
their ancestors. In China, where the peculiarity of the language
precludes its being written with alphabetic accuracy, the Pali
degenerates into a complete jargon, by adapting the sounds
to “the pronunciation of the Chinese characters. . I have tried
in vain to decypher the hard words, which in the Chinese
language have none of the inflections that are so prominent a
feature in the Pali language; I have inquired of the priests, but
they never could give any satisfactory answer, and at length
I have relinquished the hope of ever gaining a thorough know-
ledge of their tenets. As the advocate of evangelical principles,
I ardently desire that Christianity may very soon triumph over
this preposterous superstition. -
“What is Budhism in China at the present moment? It is
very evident that its introduction into this extensive country was
not antecedent to the Christian era. In the year 65 A. D. the
emperor Mingte invited the first priests of Budha to China.
A dream, informing him that the “holy one” was born in the
west, is assigned by the Chinese historians as the cause of the
embassy sent to India, to bring hither some disciples of the new.
born sage. In the classic odes there was found a passage, which
in indefinite terms spoke of some such event; this was imme.
'diately quoted as corroborative of the infallible imperial opin.
ion, that the period had now arrived. Those priests, therefore,
natives perhaps of Ceylon, were received with open arms by the
court, and found an ample field in which they might propagate
their absurd doctrines.
The ancient Chinese retained some knowledge of a Su-
preme Being, which had been delivered to them by tradition.
Yet the worship which they paid to the visible heavens and to
the earth, to rivers, hills, and above all to the dragon, and the
- f. of the lands, was open idolatry. Subsequently, when Con-
fucius rose as the renovator of his age he studiously avoided
explaining himself upon the number or nature of the gods, and
only inculcated the necessity of reverencing those whom the
ancients had worshiped. He defined the rites of their service
with the greatest minuteness. His only wish was, to promote
the social happiness of his countrymen, independently of the in.
fluence which religion exercises upon a nation. His great aim
was the introduction of order and decorum into all the relative
duties of life: and to the strict observance of external ceremo.
nies, he reduced the whole of religion. This deficiency in his
system was very strongly felt by his cotemporaries. Laoutsze,
therefore, the mystic philosopher of China, stepped forward to
supply the wants of the multitude by his abstruse speculations.
According to him, all nature is filled with demons and genu,
who constantly influence the fate of man. He increased the


216 Budhism. SEP.
number of idol gods to an enormous amount, and attempted to
define with scholastic precision their nature and offices. Yet
his demonology wanted perspicuity, and contained too many
palpable absurdities to be generally received. Though some
eimperors have declared themselves votaries of Taouism, they
could never introduce a general belief in doctrines which no-
body understood.
China wanted therefore a popular creed, which every man
might understand; and the Budhists supplied this desideratum.
Accommodating their system to all the existing superstitions,
they opened the door to every sort of converts, who might
retain as many of their old prejudices as they chose. They
were by no means rigorous in enforcing the obligations of
men to morality: to expiate sins, offerings to the idols and to
the priests were sufficient. A temple, built in honor of any
idol, and richly endowed, would suffice to blot out every stain
of guilt, and serve as a portal to the blessed mansions of Budha.
When death, that hideous spectre, approached, they promised to
every one of their votaries speedy promotion in the scale of the
metempsychosis, till he should be absorbed in Narupan or Nir-
vana, nonentity. With these prospects the poor deluded victim
left the world. To facilitate his release from purgatory, they
said mass, and supplied the wants of the hungry departed spirit
by rich offerings of food, of which the spirit enjoyed only the
odor, whilst they devoured the substance. As Confucius had
raised the veneration towards ancestors into idolatrous worship,
they were ready to perform the office of priests before the tablets
of the dead. Thus they ingratiated themselves with the credulous
multitude, who were too happy to avail themselves of their cheap
services. --
But notwithstanding their accommodating creed, the Chinese
government at times have disapproved of it. As the sanctity
of marriage has been acknowledged in China from time im-
memorial, and almost every person at years of maturity has been
obliged to enter that state, the celibacy of the priesthood of
Budha was considered a very dangerous custom. Budha re-
garded contemplation and exemption from worldly cares, as the
nearest approach to bliss; therefore his followers in imitation
of their master, passed and inculcated lives of indolence, and
practised begging, as the proper means of maintaining themselves.
This was diametrically opposed to the political institutions of
China, where even the emperor does not disdain to plough.
If such a system prevailed, - the immense population of
the empire must be reduced to starvation; for it is only by
the utmost exertion that they can subsist. These serious faults
in the foreign creed gave its onemies occasion to devise means
for its extirpation. It was proscribed as a dangerous heresy,
and a cruel persecution followed in consequence; but it had
taken too deep root to be easily eradicated. Theu again some
emperor would think more favorably of its demoralizing tendency,


1833, - Budhism. - 217
and even embrace it himself. Yet the natural consequence of its
tenets was, that it could never become a religion of the state,
and that the priests were never able to exercise any permanent
influence over the populace. Besides, the Chinese are too ra.
tional to believe implicitly all the absurd Budhistic fables, nor
can they generally persuade themselves that those numerous
images are gods. When we add to this, their national apathy
towards everything concerning religion, from their being en-
tirely engrossed with the things of this life, we can easily account
for the dis-esteem in which they hold Budhism. Nor ought we to
wonder, that they worship at one time the divinities which they
despise at another; +or ancient custom bids them follow the track
of their ancestors, without inquiry or doubt concerning its reason-
ableness, even when they cannot but ridicule its absurdities.
The priests of Budha are a very despised class, sprung chiefly
from the lowest of the people. Their morals are notoriously
bad, and pinching poverty has made them servile and cring.
ing. They wander abroad in search of some trifling gift, and
often encounter many a harsh refusal. Those temples which
are well endowed by their founders, are overcrowded with
priests, so that only a few among the higher of them can be
rich. Neither learning nor skill are found among them, and with
a few individual exceptions, they are a very stupid class. Bud.
ha, however, seems to have intimated that stupidity brings
the votary nearer to the blissful state of apathy, and therefore
a knowledge of his institutions is considered the only requisite
to form an accomplished priest. They have no schools or sem-
inaries for the instruction of those who belong to their sect.
They seldom strive to obtain literary honors; they are even
excluded from the list of candidates as long as they remain
priests. Few among them are serious in the practice of
their cwn religion; they are strict in their devotions, appear
sullen and misanthropic, and live a very secluded life. But
religious abstraction and deep contemplation, with utter obliv-
ion of existence, appear to be out of vogue. I have been
in the chentang, or halls of contemplation, and have found
them the haunts of every vice. How can it be otherwise, if
the mind is unoccupied, and the hands not employed with any
good work 1 The nuns are less numerous than the priests, and
more industrious.
It is a general observation that almost all the temples of
Budha are in a state of dilapidation. The contributions of
devotees are inadequate to meet the expenses of repairs. These
temples are very numerous, so much so that there is scarcely a
small village which has not to boast of one; and few ro-
mantic and beautiful spots can be found free from these seats
of idolatry.
The similarity of the rites of this superstition to those of
papaey are striking; every one who visits their monasteries
*
2 D


218 Budhism, “SEp.
can at once discover the resemblance. That they should count
their prayers by means of a rosary, and chant masses both
for the living and the dead, should live in a state of celibacy,
and shave their hair, fast, &c., might perhaps be accounted
for by a mere coincidence of errors into which men are prone
to fall; but their divine adoration of teenhow—“the queen
of heaven,” (called also, shingmoo “the holy mother,’) must be
a tenet engrafted upon Budhism from foreign traditions. We
are unable to fix the exact period of the adoption of this
deity. There is a legend of a modern date, among the people
of Fuhkeen, which tells us that she was a virgin of that
province, who in a dream saw her kindred in danger of being
wrecked, and boldly rescued them; but this affords no satis.
factory solution. Neither is the queen of heaven among the
deities which the Siamese Budhists worship, though they pos-
sess the whole orthodox code of demons. It is very likely,
that some degenerate Nestorian Christians amalgamated with
their faith and ceremonies the prevailing errors of China, and
º the priests of Budha to adopt many of their rites.
ough the Siamese and Cambojan priesthoods resemble the
papal clergy in some points, they do not exhibit so striking a
similarity as the Chinese. Moreover the Budhists of China
have received among the ohjects of their veneration all the
sages which have been canonized by the emperor or by pub-
lic credulity. In one instance, I saw a marble bust of Na-
poleon, which they had put in a temple, and before which they
burned incense; hence it would not be extraordinary, if they
had also adopted among their gods so conspicuous an object
of worship as the virgin, who was adored by so many mil-
lions of Christians. - -
The present dynasty seems to have declared itself clearly in
favor of the great Dalai-lama of Tibet. As the Mongols on
the northern frontier are much devoted to the ºrites of Sha-
manism, and adore this visible deity, it was perhaps with a
view to conciliate their goodwill, and keep those wild hordes
in subjection that this preference was manifested. The religion
of these barbarians being only a modification of Budhism,
we should expect that the Chinese government would equally
extend its benevolence to the Budhists in China.-But such
does not appear to be the fact; they are tolerated, but receive
no stated support from the government.” The emperor may
extend his individual charity to some temples, but this is not
governmental patronage. The high officers of state may oc-
casionally favor the sect, but they will never openly avow it;
for this would be derogatory to their fame, and expose them :
* We are not quite sure that our correspondent is correct in this asser.
tion. The point deserves further attention; and we shall feel much obliged
to any of our correspondents, who will furnish us with such evidence and
facts as shall put the question at rest.


1833. Budhism, 219
to the ridicule of their colleagues. Yet under all these disad-
vantages, a numerous priesthood can find subsistence. The
temples are crowded to excess with devotees on certain festi-
vals, and the exclamation, “O-me-to Fuh,” is familiar to the
ear of every one. -
I have thus given a sketch of Budhism, and fully agree with
the Chinese philosophers, that it destroys the constitution of
human society, by enjoining celibacy as the nearest to perfection,
and-the only perfect state, and by commanding its disciples
to adandon their relations and friends, without fulfilling their
duties as citizens, parents, and children. We are also aware
that this unnatural law is the source of vice and of abomin-
able crime; but at the same time we must allow, that Bud-
hism does not sanction shocking rites or Bacchanalian orgies, like
the other idolatrous systems of Asia. Nor have we to com-
plain of indecency in its representations of idol gods; they
may be hideous, but they are never repulsive to the feelings
of modesty. The temples are open to all, and even serve
occasionaly for theatres, gambling-houses, and taverns.
The Chinese Budhists are surely a temporizing sect. Their
abstinence from animal food is not very strict. They will
seldom stand up in defence of their idols, nor appear much
annoyed if they are treated with contempt. There is much
toleration towards other sects, originating in indifference about
the subject. With them all religions are equally safe, but their's
is the best. They have no desire to make proselytes, for
their number is already too great. Very far are they from
spiritualizing their idolatrous system. True, they may talk of
hungry demons, and of the spiritual presence of the idols in
their statues; but this is all. To assert therefore that they
adore one Supreme Being in the idolatrous representations of
his attributes, is to state an opinion which never found a.
place in their thoughts, or in their canonical works. They
are without God in the world, and estranged from the divine
life, worshiping the works of their own hands, to the eternal
disgrace of human reason.
When, O when, will the darkness which for so many centu-
ries has enveloped China, be penetrated by the light of divine
truth, and the only and true God be adored? We ought to
weep at the delusiou of our fellow-creatures, who, endowed
with reason, can prostitute it thus, and glory in their shame.
None of their most popular philosophers could free his country
from degrading superstition; no imperial edicts could banish it.
The gospel alone can prove victorious over it, and subject the
nation to the sway of divine truth. Whenever the Deliverer,
Jesus Christ, shall stretch forth his almighty arm, and by the
powerful influence of the Holy Spirit disenthrall their minds,
China will be liberated form darkness and share the privileges
pf the children of God. -


220 - Budhism. SEP.
--
Budhism has its sacred places, to which pilgrims resort to of.
fer sacrifices and perform their devotions. Two of these are
rt markable; one is Meichow, an island on the coast of Fuhkeen,
N. E. from Chinchew (Tseuenchow) bay; the other is the island
Poo-to, which was mentioned [on page 53,) in a preceding num-
ber. . Both these islands may be considered as the domains of
priests, and exclusively devoted to idolatry. Both are picturesque,
so as to set off to advantage their numerous temples, and to strike
the pilgrim with solemn awe by the grandeur of nature.
Poo-to is the most romantic of the two, and the priests are also
more numerous. Those solitary caves and craggy rocks on high,
where human industry has excavated fanes and niches to fill them
with images of Budha and of the goddess Kwanyin, attract the
eye and bewilder the senses of the spectator. I have seen rough
sailors, whose sensibility is not very remarkable, stand astonished
and ask themselves, what strange faith and idolatry is this? When
walking along the well-paved roads, we might observe a soli-
tary temple, or rather hermitage, where the more fervent devotees
of Budha chanted prayers, and performed their devotions before
an ant-caten image, or a dimly burning lanip. Even the sight of
foreigners would not recall their consciousness; perpetually bow-
ing and prostrating themselves on the ground, we could hear
them exclaiming, O-me-to Fuh ! O-me-to Fuh ! A missal was
open on the altar to assist in the repetition of prayers, in a lan-
guage which they themselves did not understand. They seldom left
their dismal habitations. One old mam had retired to the top
of a very high hikl, from whence he intended never to return,
but to spend his days in adoring the phantom Budhā. When
he first saw Europeans approaching him, he was amazed, and
designed to honor us with prostrations, from which however he
was timely relieved.
In the tseen sze, the front temple, which is near the land-
*ing-place, the attention is immediately drawn to some large in-
scriptions of recent date, which are hewn in rock. They record the
piety of certain naval officers. On advancing further, a flight of
steps leads to extensive buildings, which are surrounded with thick
shrubbery and trees, to give to the whole the appearance of a laby-
rinth. Such it proves to be by its mazy walks and numerous
apartments. A great number of fine young boys reside here, the
greater part of whom have been bought by the priests. This tem-
ple is furnished especially for the reception of strangers. After
they have performed their pilgrimage to the principal temples,
they feast sumptuously, and at the close, are reminded of their
duty to be generous in their benefactions.
On inquiry we were informed that the whole establishment
was founded during the Leãng dynasty, to record the mercies
of the gracious Kwanyin, who had herself visited these re-
ions. A long catalogue of several thousand devotees gave
eyiderce of the benevolent disposition of the present generation.


1833. Budhism. 22 I
All the temples, both large and small are built in one uni-
form style. After passing the first two halls, where very ugly
idols preside, we arrive at the dwellings of the priests. The
next hall is adorned by Kwanyin and her attendants, and
two others are dedicated to Budha and his numerous disciples.
We perceived a great number of blue beards among them ; but
were unable to ascertain what these strange representations
meant. In all these colossal statues, the Negro features were pre-
dominant. This corroborates the opinion that Budha sprung
from some Ethiopic tribe , whether aborigines of Hindostan,
or originally from Egypt, the cradle of monstrous absurdities,
is uncertain. -
Before our final departure from this island, the high priest
made me a present of four little volumes, three of which con-
tained a description of the island of Poo-to, and the fourth is
entitled, “a Story of the Fragrant Hill.”
The first volume opens with various edicts of the successive
emperors of the Mantchou dynasty, beginning with Kanghe.
They command to keep these temples in constant repair, in
order to render their own names immortal, and to glorify
Budha. The adulation presented to these earthly potentates
for their “divine favor,” is truly disgusting. After giving an
account of the date of the records on which this work is
based, which commenced during the Mongol dynasty, the
progress of the buildings thenceforward is minutely described, and
the imperial favor is constantly quoted as the only cause of
their present splendor. We have also maps of the whola is.
land, sketches of temples, and caverns of the most ludicrous
description. The next chapter gives the inscriptions of the
tablets which were erected near the temples, recounting and
recording the gracious remembrances of three emperors, who
all showed themselves benefactors to this glorious cstablish-
ment. Then follows a minute description of all the caverns
and fountains of the island, which, though exceedingly numerous,
have each an appropriate name. The remainder of the volume is
filled with accounts of the term:)ies, their apartments and idols,
and the means by which they have been erected, &c. A list of
the most illustrious donors, among whom are queens and em-
presses, closes the first volume. - -
The first chapter of the second volume contains legends of
the wonders which have been performed on the island, by the pow-
er of the idols, or by the personal interposition of Budha. From
the introductory remarks we learn, that by being absorbed in one's
own self, and the external senses being undisturbed, the most ex.
traordinary effects are produced. Among the catalogue of events in
which the actors are named, and the year and month specified, we
read that in the year 1666, red-haired men (the Dutch) visited
the island, remained about half a month, and carried away with
them several idols of Budha and streamers; with these they
proceeded to Japan, and by means of trade gained about 200,000


222 Budhism. SEP.
gold pieces. But on their return home, the ship caught fire
without any cause, and all were drowned in the ocean Many
other instances of the avenging power of Budha are related; yet
he is not merely a revenger of wrongs, but often also the remune-
rator of his votaries. But they are very little benefited by his
show of liberality, enjoying only temporary advantages. Would
any one however expect that the Chinese government, whose wis-
dom and justice has been everywhere extolled, could regard these
stories, or place itself under the protection of Budha at Pooto 7
Yet we saw imperial edicts stuck up in the temple, wherein the
priests were ordered to appeal to the supreme power of Budha
that he might grant a fertile spring and rich harvest. . . .
- Short biographical sketches of the most celebrated priests who
have lived in the temple, come next in order. Their piety,
consisting in leaving the world with all its toils and troubles,
is duly commended. Many of them . were remarkable for
spending hour after hour in silent contemplation and apathy.
There are also long lists of others, who have excelled in some
particular branch of Budhism, and who are enumerated with
the greatest care. The author then speaks of the habitations
of the priests, and their means of subsistence. He shows plain.
ly that the lands assigned to them by the paternal care of suc-
cessive emperors and exempted from all duties, are unalienable
property. These farms are situated on several of the surround-
ing island; Lo-kei, which is one of them, is almost wholly
in their possession. Thus circumstanced, they have no reason
to complain, though their brotherhood is very numerous. The
produce which they grow on their lands is various; they give
a long catalogue from the vegetable kingdom, and talk also
of the wild animals which live within their jurisdiction. Though
these are frequently annoying, yet the priests refrain from kill-
ing them;-a proof that they strictly adhere to the rules of Bud:
ha, which prohibit the taking away of life. Thus vermin and
musquetoes ought to be spared, and instead of killing them,
Budha teaches his disciples by example to nourish these trou-
blesome insects. -
- There is a chapter under the head of “minutiae,” narrating
various events, some of which nearly involved the temple in
ruin. The “red-haired men” do not fail to be represented as
the authors of every mischief; they are accused of having cut
down the grove, taken away the sacred cows, demolished the
images, torn up the books, and buried a large bell. Not content
with these depredations, they also stole a golden Budha, silver
platters; cornelian, corol, and other precious stones;—this was
during Kanghe's reign. The times must since have changed amaz-
ingly, if this be true; for when we were there we did not see
even a pice of silver, still less, any precious stones or gold.
The whole seems to be a mere Budhistic story, invented to render
their red-haired visitors odious in the eyes of the Chinese.
*


1833, Budhism. 223
- ---------- - - - - - ----- ~~~~ -- *-*-*
The presents given by every visitor to the temple, are con-
sidered as the perquisites of the priests, and seem to constitute
a part of thir legal income. Imperial grants have given them
the privilege of printing their own classics on the island. Se-
veral emperors, penetrated with gratitude towards the all-com-
passionating Budha, have been desirous to confirm them in these
rights, by which means they might be enabled to propagate their
doctrines extensively.—The second volume concludes with a
public order commanding the rebuilding of two temples, which
had been demolished during the times of anarchy. -
The third volume is a collection of literary pieces relative to
Budha, to the different temples, the priests, and to other things
connected with their rites. They are chiefly written in the Pali-
Chinese, and are therefore unintelligible to common readers. We
find among them frequent rhapsodies, and thousands of words
without any meaning attached or attachable to them. These
pieces are copied out and engraved on stones, on the bells, or
the tripods. There are also inscriptions in Sanscrit.
The “Story of the Fragrant Hill,” is a Budhistic novel, and
as a literary curiousity, not on account of its intrinsic value, de-
serves notice. The whole is written in intelligible, or even in
low Chinese style, and seldom interspersed with Pali phrases.
At the end of every chapter there are some verses which repeat
the whole in measure. The readers are directed to prostrate
themselves to the ground, and to repeat certain prayers, whenever
they come to particular sentences, which relate to the wonder-
ful interposition of Kwanyin.
The author tells us, that during the time of Tsungming,
in the second year of his reign, in the eighth month, and on the
fifteenth day of the month, Tsung-poo-ming, one of those con-
templative Budhistic teachers who lived in Hindostan, was seated
in a hall. An old priest came suddenly in before him and said;
“why do you, Sir, sit here alone and practice religion, without
soaring on high 7 Every just and true principle originates from
above; how can you otherwise exercise universal benevolence 1
You ought to act for Budha, transforming and expanding, so
that you may gradually and completely perform his actions. Thus
you will rule the passions of the multitude, and requite the favor
. of Budha.”
The teacher asked the priest, By what means can I influence
mankind? He replied; “I see that the natives of this country
are devoted to the idol Kwanyin ; therefore give a short outline of
her actions from beginning to end. Publish this to the world, thus
aid devotion, and your happiness will be secure.”. After giving
this advice, the priest went away and hid himself. Poo-ming,
the contemplative teacher, thought on the affair, and com
this volume. When he had completed it, suddenly the goddess
Kwanyin herself appeared on the clouds, like pale gold, holding
in her hand a clean pitcher and a willow. After a long ex-
hibition she disappeared. All those persons who saw her, looked


224 - Budhism. SEP.
up with admiration ; and those who subsequently heard it, in-
creased in devotion, so that this story has spread throughout
the whole empire as an everlasting admonition
The author exhorts- his readers to peruse this volume with
the deepest reverence. He asserts that the power of the name
of Kwanyin is so efficacious that every sufferer will be freed
from misery as soon as he pronounces her name. Let him
enter the fire and call upon her name, the fire will not burn
him ; let him go into deep water and invoke her name, the deeps
will retire, and the water will become shallow.
During the time of Ken-ne Budha, there existed the kingdom
of Hing-lin, governed by tha emperor Poo-kea : that period
was called Meacu-chwang. The empire then extended 180,000
le; his capital had twelve gates, and was 3000 le (about 1000
miles) in circumference; his spacious palace glittered with gold
and precious stones; he received homage from 72 states, was
. dored by his subjects, but had no children. The empress, all
beauty and grace, finally bore him two daughters. Anxious to
present her husband with a son, she addressed herself to azure
heaven.' Being transported in a dream to the blessed regions of
Budha among the genii and saints, she there received the pro-
mise of giving birth to one of the genii, and accordingly brought
forth a daughter, who received the name of Meacu-shen. Her
family thus increased by a third daughter, the public rejoicings
scarcely ceased before they were followed up by new celebra-
tion. Yet amidst all the hilarity of festivals, the emperor could
not suppress his anxiety to have a male heir, and finally resolved
to adopt a son by marrying his daughters to high officers. The
eldest gave her hand to a civilian, the second to a military officer,
but Meacu-shen, the heroine of the story, refused to marry at all.
Her time was spent in devotion; she adored Budha, and was
desirous to become a nun. All the threats and punishments from
her parents were ineffectual to keep her away from a monastery.
She there performed the most menial offices, and was greatly
'rewarded by the approbation of the idols. Neither ridicule nor
violence could prevail upon her to forsake the monastic life; she
bore everything with patience. When she stooped so far as to
become a servant in the kitchen, birds and quadrupeds were
sent by Rudha to her assistance ; and even the old dragon was
dismatched to open the well for her to draw water. -
These thins's were reported to the emperor, who indignant at
the rehearsal of such idle tales, seut a detachment of soldiers to
destrov the temple where his daughter resided. The soldiers set
fire to it, the smoke rose, a tremendous noise was heard ac-
companied with the low sound of weeping and walling. At once
heaven rained down red water, the fire wins extinguished, the
smoke disappeared, aud it was found that the temple was not
injured in the east degree. When the emperor had heard this
report, he brought his daughter home by force, introduce t her
ssan at court, and endeavored to trutuate her into the pleasures


..1833. Chinese Botany. 225
she even disfigured herself, that she might be allowed to live
uninterrupted in retirement. Neither the intreaties of her
mother, nor the insinuations of other ladies, nor even the threats
of her father could prevail upon her to yield to their most ur.
gent wishes of choosing a husband. The patience of her father
was at last exhausted, and he ordered her to be executed.
She bore the sentence with fortitude, for Budha sustained her.
All nature mourned when she expired; even the beasts of the
field, and the fishes of the sea showed their grief, the sun and
moon were darkened in heaven, the atmosphere was filled
with mist, the sea overflowed, and all nations pitied the cruel
lot of the princess. When her body was about to be exposed
on the scaffold, a tiger rushed in, seized and carried away
the corpse into a wood. Her soul, being transported to hades,
took advantage of this excellent opportunity to promulgate
Budhism, and instructed the demons in the doctrines of that
creed.
. . Again she was restored to life, and borne home upon the back
of a tiger to Heingshan, (the Fragrant Hill,) where she became a
nun. Her father meanwhile, was afflicted with a most painful
disease, which no physicians could relieve. When a priest of.
fered his services and was accepted, he directed the emperor
to go on a pilgrimage to Heangshan. There he arrived, met
his daughter, a nun, and honored by all ; he repented of his errors
and became a staunch champion of Budhism.—Thus ends the
Story of the Fragrant Hill. .
ar
CHINEs E. BotANY.—The vegetable kingdom, rich as it cer.
tainly is in this country, has never been an object of much
attention among the, Chinese. The wisest of earthly kings de-
lighted frequently to contemplate the handyworks of his Ma-
ker. He spoke not only of beasts and creeping things, of
fowl and of fishes : but of trees also, even from the lofy ce.
dars of Lebanon. to “the hyssop that springeth out of the wall.”
And, if tradition is true, the ancient sires of this nation were
not inattentive to whatever grew up and bloomed around them.
Nearly 2000 years before our era, Shinnung, “the Divine
Husbandman,” united with others, and by their personal efforts,
(so many of the Chinese believe,) established a national academy,
in which, among other branches of study, that of botany was to
be pursued. But, (so the fact is,) the science is now almost
wholly neglected. There are extant in Chinese a few works
which treat of the subject. From these we hope occasionally
to make translations.—Nor have foreigners pushed their bo.
tanical researches into the interior of this country. No Tourne.
fort, or Thunberg, or Kaempfer, has travcrsed these provinces.
“Loureiro has written pretty fully on the vegetable productions
of Cochiuchina; and has also taken notice of some of the plants
2 E


226 Chinese Botany. SEP.
which are to be found in the neighborhood of Canton and
Maead.” Osbeck did wonders during his short sojourn here in
1750–51. More recently a few individuals have directed their
attention to the subject; but at present, it is wholly neglected.
John Reeves, esquire, who left China about two years ago,
during his residence in this country, turned his attention to bo.
tany. He prepared an Index to the Pun Tsaou-(one of the best
native botanical works which we have ever seen)—an extract
from which has been published in Morrison's Dictionary, part
III. In 1819, John Livingstone, esquire, also of the honorable
Company's establishment, addressed a letter to the Horticultural
Society of London, stating in a lucid manner the causes which
have hitherto impeded the successful cultivation of Chinese bo-
tany, and the transmission of plants to Europe; and at the
same time pointing out a practicable mode of prosecuting ther
subject in future. This letter was published in the Indo-chinese
Gleaner for July, 1819. It may serve as an introduction to
any remarks which we may have to make in future numbers,
respecting Chinese botany.—Addressing the society, Mr. Liv-
ingstone thus writes:—
“The rich variety of objects of great botanical importance, which
are very generally known to abound in China, has excited a cor-
responding desire among many to have them added to the stores
of Europe; and no small degree of astonishment is frequently
expressed by those botanists who are best acquainted with the
subject, at the very slow progress which has been hitherto made
towards its reasonable gratification. Many persons seem inclin-
ed to account for this fact, by supposing that those who enjoy
opportunities of sending or bringing Chinese plants to Europe,
are either ignorant of the great estimation in which they are
held, or strangely unwilling to gratify the wishes of the lovers
of botany. - - - -
“In this paper I propose to lay before the Horticultural Society,
such observations as I have been able to make during the last
twenty-five years. From these, l think it will appear, that much
has been attempted, although, comparatively speaking, very little
has been accomplished. I hope to show that it is to be fairly
attributed to causes very different from those just mentioned. In
doing this, I hope to be able to point out the most material
defects, and to suggest something better for the future. -
“At a short distance from Canton, situated on the side of a small
creek, or branch of a river, are a number of small nursery gar-
dens, well known by the name of Fate, or Flower gardens.
Each of these gardens contains nearly the same collection of
plants, which is doubtless formed to meet the demand wheth-
er of foreigners or Chinese, who contract for those plants, for
which they can depend on finding a ready market. They are
for the most part ranged in ſlower-pots, and planted in the same
kind of strong clay, which constitutes the soil of the garden. To


1833. Chinese Botany. 227
these gardens it has been customary for the captains and officers
of the honorable Company's ships, to make frequent excursions
while at Canton, for the purpose of making such purchases of
plants as suited their particular views or convenience; and they
have done this, in general with no sparing hand, notwithstanding
the very general want of success which they have pretty uniformly
experienced. -
“About fifteen years ago, Mr. William Kerr was sent from the
royal gardens at Kew, for the purpose of enriching that splendid
collection with the stores of China. Infinite pains seemed to have
been taken to supply him with the most judicious instructions.
The cabins for the reception of the plants were planned with the
greatest judgment. Every facility was secured for the transmis-
sion to Kew of all the plants which he wished to send. Yet if
any one will take the trouble to compare the plants actually sent
with those which arrived safe at the royal gardens, it will appear
that Kerr was not more fortunate than private adventurers.
“Kerr came from England in the same ship with myself, and I
was well acquainted with his worth. No mission could have been
better filled; he was familiar with the best practice of modern
gardening, and had acquired a most perfect acquaintance with
the habits of plants. He also possessed a competent share of
botanical knowledge, much natural shrewdness, and great bodily
strength. Under the influence of a burning sun, I have seen him
scale the highest hills in this part of China, whilst l have
myself, though equally ardent in the pursuit, been obliged to seek
a friendly shade, where Kerr would join me with the fruit of his
labor. In three or four years he became greatly changed; desi.
rous to procrastinate every labor—or rendered unable to prosecute
his work, in consequence of some habits he had contracted, equally
new and unfortunate to him. -
“When Kerr was sent to China, it was not deemed neces.
sary to cheer his labor by any-encouragement, or even to secure
to him the respect and consideration of the Chinese servants
he had occasion to employ. His salary amounted to one hun.
dred pounds a year only, a sum which in this part of China was
not sufficient, after paying for washing, to keep up his stock of
clothes so as to have anything to wash. Indeed, he assured
me, had it not been for the kindness of the chief of the factory,
he could not even have done so much. Mr. Roberts gave him
a small house belonging to his garden, to live in, with liberty to
keep in the garden all the plants he collected. But unfor.
tunately he had to go for his meals to the Company's factory,
situated at a considerable distance. This at first occupied much
of his time, especially in hot weather. By degrees, habits of in-
dulgence stole on him ; so that instead of collecting plants,
planting them in a proper soil, and taking care of them after.
wards, he was desirous to procrastinate every labor; and not
unfrequently from his habits, and from their natural conse.
quences, falls, bruises, and sprains rendered him unable to do
{
2


228 Chinese Botany. SEP,
anything for days and weeks. Under these circumstances
he was obliged to depend almost entirely, for the plants which
he wished to send home, on the nursery gardens at Canton.
Hence his want of success.
“I have not the slightest doubt, that Kerr's destruction is solely
attributable to the company he was obliged to keep. Had he
been master of his time, I am persuaded it would have been well
employed. Had he been properly encouraged, I am certain he
would have deserved it most richly. I must, in justice add, that all
the promises which had been held out to him were fulfilled.—He
was promised a better salary at Colombo, where he was told a
botanical garden was to be established. He left China about six
years ago. His letters to me from Malacca and Calcutta were
written with so much attention to his pursuits, that I had hopes
he would be able to conquer his bad habits, I did not hear from
him afterwards; and I think he died very soon after he reached
Colombo.
“When so fortunate as to have the plants, which I have collect.
ed, sent home under the care of a friend, who was not only able
to do them justice, but pleased with such an employment, l have
experienced the most complete success. At times all have arrived
in the Thames, in good order. I have afterwards suffered the
mortification to learn that, before the formalities of office could
be complied with, they have been all destroyed by rats, &c. At
other times I have learned, that only a few of my plants had
reached St. Helena in a sickly state; where, if sent on shore
they are uniformly allowed to die ſor want of care. Again I have
received information, that my “splendid collection had arrived all
dead;” at another time; “only one plant alive, evidently for
want,” it was said, “of a little water,”—since from the appear-
ance of the roots, &c., it was evident no pains had been spared
on my part. My friend, Mr. , informed me, that 95 plants
out of 100 which he carried home fiom China three years ago,
arrived in perfect health. -
"“From this rapid sketch, I think the following conclusions may
be safely drawn. - - -
“ First ; that no insuperable difficulties are necessarily in the
way of conveying plants safely from China to England. But they
must be, [a] skillfully planted; [b.] provided with good water;
[c..] carefully attended to during the passage till landed; and [d.]a
speedy landing must be secured. -
“Secondly; that the death of plants may in general be attributed
to neglect; ...] in not collecting them in proper time, to enable
them to be firmly rooted in the soil in which they are to be trans-
mlanted; (b.] in not planting them in the soil in which they de-
light; (c.] in not arranging them in the cabin or cabins, according
as they require, 1st, much and frequent watering, -2d, mode-
rate watering—or 3d, but little watering; [d.] by not shutting
the cabin when the spray is flying over the ship; [e.] in not open-
ing the cabin in fine weather; [f] but above all, in not watering


1833. Chinese Botany. 229
them with good water; and [g.] in not taking care of them after
their safe arrival in the river Thames. - -
“As it is not possible to procure plants from the Chinese nur.
sery-men, fit for being sent to England, it becomes necessary to
procure them at least six months earlier in order to plant them
in their proper soil, and to bestow on them such attention as may
be necessary to get them in good state.
“Nothing further, it appears to me, is wanting to insure every
reasonable degree of success, but to secure them a hospitable
reception in England. Being without the elements of a correct
acalculation, I must content myself with the nearest approxima-
tion to truth which I am able to make. From my observation, I
am persuaded more than one thousand plants have been sent
from China, for one Chinese plant, which is now cultivated in
• England. The cost of plants purchased in China, including the
freight, is on an average, one tael each, or three for one pound
sterling; consequently each plant now in England, must have
been introduced at the enormous expense of upwards of £330. –
“If we regard this as a just eriterion of the estimation in which
plants have hitherto, been held, I have fully succeeded in repelling
the accusation stated in my first paragraph; and if the expen-
diture is so enormously disproportioned to the intrinsic value of
the objects, it surely becomes a matter of importance to attempt
some more economical method of gratifying the wishes of the
public for Chinese plants. - -
“In submitting the following plan for the consideration of the
Agricultural Society, I feel, I shall greatly need their indul-
gence. It is perhaps too bold and too new to give general sat.
isfaction. I hope it deserves a trial, and I am pretty confident,
it will answer infinitely better than anything which has hitherto
been proposed. - - - - .
“A gardener, with qualifications similar to those of Kerr, must
be sent out with the means of establishing himself in a respecta-
ble house, and have a garden sufficiently commodious to nurse the
plants which himself and the native gardeners, whom he will
find it absolutely necessary to employ, shall collect. He will thus
secure some respect and consideration in the eyes of his own peo-
ple, the want of which was most severely felt by Kerr. The
Society will be able to desive the best means of giving him such
further encouragement as they may deem necessary 5 yet I am
persuaded it will be proper to make it depend in some degree on
his success; say, a small premium on every plant which shall be
landed in good health. - -
“The captains of the honorable Company's ships, who may
wish to engage to bring home plants, should be invited to ap-
ply to the Society in consequence of a very ample premium
being held out to them for every living plant, which they shall
deliver to the Society. Besides this, the necessary arrangements
should be made with the honorable Company, and managing
owners of the ship, to permit a sufficient quantity of tonnage
~


230 Chinese Emigrants, SEp.
to be employed for supplying the plants with water, for which
the Agricultural Society will order payment to be made. When
application has been made, the Society will determine the num-
ber of plants which they wish to be sent by any particular ship,
after which, the arrangement *...* the water may be made;
and it seems to me, the Society might furnish a list of about half
the plants which it may be desirable to send home, the remaining
part may depend on the collector.
“For these purposes, ample funds would become requisite, with
which no Society constituted for general purposes can be sup.
posed provided. I therefore propose that the plants which shall.
be landed, be sold as they arrive. In this way, I am persuaded,
~
ample funds would arise for every purpose, so long as Chinese
plants are held in estimation. When they cease to be so, the
Society can withhold their lists, and recall their gardener.
“This plan does not, 1 hope, in any degree interfere with that
emulative exertion upon which, after all, we must chiefly de-
pend for many” of the productions of distant lands; nor with
that honest love of fame which prefers distinction to every
other kind of reward. Ample scope will still be left for their
exertions; but surely when the point can be stated as a ques-
tion purely of value, or the interchange of values, it is best to
bring it a to business-like issue, which has been my aim.—Still
leaving the Agricultural Society to bestow such honors as they
may deem expedient. -
“Could my views be somewhat allowed to extend, I would
gladly connect with the proposed mission, a head, a gentle-
man, who having no other engagements, might devote an un-
divided attention to the botany of China, the Philippine islands,
Cochinchina, the Malay peninsula, and Malay islands.”
CHINEs E EMIGRANTs.—We have seen a statement of a native
in writing, concerning this class of Chinese. It adds dark
coloring to the picture given in our last. The purport of the
paper is the following.
This season a number of emigrants were returning from the
“Straits” in an European ship. They saw the Great Ladrone
island, and their bosoms beat high with hope that erelong they
would tread their native shores, meet their kindred—fathers, mo-
thers, wives, children, sisters, and brothers; but a storm came on,
and drove them out to sea; the masts were broken, and the spars
killed a number of the high aspirants. -
Those who lived to come on shore tell a sad tale of the state
of Chinese society in the Archipelago. Secret societies have
risen up in all the settlements. But they are all emanations of
the Triad Society. They have secret signs and dark phrases—a
circumstance that identifies them all with that odious fraternity.
Of late, there has arisen a very large stock of this society, con-
sisting of a great many men, extremely powerful and violent.


1833. Chinese Emigrants, 231
They have assumed the names of the Hae-shan Hwuy, “the Sea
and land Society;” and the E-hing Hu'uy, “the Righteous" rising
Society.” These two associations are scattered over all the set-
tlements; and they all obey the orders and restrictions of the
heads of their respective societies, whom they call “the great bro.
ther.” This stock is divided into four, eight, or twelve great
stems, as the case may be, and from these stems there issue scores
of branches. Every stem and every branch has its headman,
who is designated senior brother.
“Emigrants from the hills of Tang (China), are called Sin.
kih (new-comers—griffins). As soon as they arrive at any
settlement, the brotherhood sends persons to invite them to join
the confederacy. If they decline, they are forthwith persecuted.
However, the two above-named societies often wrangle, and if
you belong to the one and not to the other, you are equally
persecuted. - -
“Chinese coming from Bengal with a few hundred dollars,
or a few thousands, which they may have saved, are inveigled
by these banditti to go to the hills and enjoy themselves in
pleasure. When the strangers are brought to a solitary place,
they are probably destroyed, and their property plundered. Thus
half goes to the society, and the other goes to the captors. Thus
it has often occurred, and the local magistrates have got some
slight tidings of it, and have sent to seize the offenders. But,
(says our native writer who has himself been many years in the
Straits) the customs of the settlements are defective. They require
witnesses before they dare convict of guilt. They dare not urge
the question by torture; so that having one or two witnesses
on one side, and a great multitude of sureties for the accused
on the other side, they will never convict. But the new-comer
is a solitary individual, and if his native townsmen-feel for
him and desire to redress his grievances, one person alone
goes to the magistrate to lodge a complaint, and hundreds or
thousands of the brotherhood will come forward to be surety
Sº, for the accused. Often have the local magistrates been thus
deceived and hoodwinked. And afterwards those Chinese who
had indicated feeling in behalf of the stranger, have been forc.
ed to leave the settlement speedily to avoid the secret malice of
the brotherhood.” -
Here we close our quotation, sincerely hoping the authorities
in the Straits will be on the alert—not with the torture, as our Chi-
nese friend suggests—but with something like martial law for these
lawless persons, who make it dangerous to give evidence in the
usual way. Of the truth of the above allegations we have no
doubt. These brotherhoods do not seem to aim at taking the
* This word e, righteous, is used by rebels to denote ther setting up the
standard of right sº their unjust governors. Hing also, often signifies
a rising of troops.--That the “Trial Society” is as fat as China is concern.
td, combined for the destruction of the reigning monarchy has been fully
Ş. by MS. documents belonging to them, which have been found in
acao.


232 Public Calamities, SEP.
external name of a government; but to avail themselves of the
substance. They wish to be the “gentlemen regulators” for all
poor Chinese ; and to leave the gentlemen European governors
and residents in quiet possession of their titles and salaries. For
the amount of horrible crime which such “secret societies” may
commit, we reter our readers to a paper in the Asiatic Journal for
May 1833, on the Thugs of the Doaab.” The Chinese Triad So-
ciety does not seem to equal them in cold-blooded murder; but
they also now and then, carry off to the hills those who show
them “ disrespect,” and there flog them to death.
PURlic cAlAMITIEs—or national judgments.—Those renarka-
ble punishments which God inflicts upon people for their sins
and transgressions, are in the Holy Scriptures called judgments. .
As in Isaiah xxxi. 8, 9. “In the way of thy judgments, O Lord,
have we waited for thee;”. ...“ for when thy judgments are in
the earth, the inhabitants of the world will learn righteousness.”
Although the Chinese have no idea of Almighty God, distinct
from and superior to the material universe; they still think,
that the wickedness of mankind destroys the harmony of na-
ture, and causes public calamities, such as the inhabitants, of
the province of Canton have this year experienced. They have
two words for calamity or misery, namely ho and tsae. The
first denotes those evils which are of a man's own making, or
which men inflict on each other; the second indicates those
calamities which are inflicted by heaven, the supreme power in
nature. - -
We have seen a letter from a respectable old gentleman,
describing the late awful storm and destructive inundation,
which he designates a truly great heaven-sent calamity, which
has not been equalled for the last hundred years. Another
writer says, that in the midst of the gale and torrents of rain,
whilst poor people's houses were falling, and crushing to death
or maiming the inmates, the governor and fooyuen went forth .
to distribute cakes and direct the survivors to the city walls for
refuge. They are reported to have looked up to heaven and
cried and shed tears, while the governor addressed the officers,
who accompanied him, to the following effect: “It is we, who
hold the reins of government, and should be the fathers and
mothers of the people, who have, by our misrule, detroyed the
harmony of nature and induced this judgment; I cannot bear to
see the distress of the people; I would that this calamity were
iuflicted en my own person, if it might prevent the people's being
scattered abroad without house or home.” “. . . . .
This report is confirmed by a public proclamation which the
governor and fooyuen have issued, calling upon the rich to
subscribe for the relief of the sufferers, in which they attribute
this “extraordinary calamitv” to the defects of themselves and
fellow officers, who have failed to lead the people in the work


1833. The Use of Sedans Disallowed, 233
of renovation. “We have induced,” say they, “this deadly
calamity, and must take blame and reproof to ourselves.”—This
we fear is mere cant; but our object is to show the opinions
of the heathen. -
The use of the sedan disallowed to Chinese military officers,
and to foreign residents.--His majesty has issued a long phi-
lippic against the idleness and lazy habits of military men,
throughout the empire, who indulge in all the softness of ci-
vilians, instead of riding on horseback and inuring themselves to
martial exercises. Similar orders have been issued before, but
seemingly without effect. In the present document, the emperor
is very earnest, and threatens to punish all who offend, as well as :
those governors and lieut.-governors who refrain from reporting
the names of culprits. The elegant sedan, or “shoulder chariot,”
is disallowed in all possible cases:—but in passing precipitous
mountains, or on dangerous paths, or through corn fields, or by
circuitous water-courses, where the use of the horse is impractica-
ble, a bamboo hurdle, carried on men's shoulders—may be used.
This is the vehicle that governor Le permitted sick foreigners to use
in passing from their boats into a hong. His majesty seems very
intent on preserving some discipline in the army, and he again
repeats the adage which governor Loo quoted from him lately:
“The army may be a hundred years unemployed; but not one
day without preparative exercise.”
Under very different circumstances, and for a very different pur.
pose, a proclamation has been issued at Macao, disallowing, with
many threats, the native Chinese carrying sedans for “barbarian
foreigners.” This was done “because government had long
since declared that Chinese subjects should not be menial serrants
to foreigners.” By this arbitrary act not only were the foreign
community much incommoded, but not less than a hundred poor
men were instantly thrown out of employ ; and five hundred dol-
lars per month taken from hundreds of half-starved women, and
children. * * * - * *
It has been said, that all nations agree in one thing, viz.
“esteeming themselves and despising others.” If this be true, as
we fear it is, still there are degrees; and in proportion as a nation
is ignorant and uncivilized, it rises above others in pride and
contempt. The Chinese government cherishes the bad spirit on
which we animadvert; and it is illustrated by the conduct of the
magistrate at Macao. - * * * *** * * * * * * * * *
Since governor Le's famous appeal to his imperial majesty
to disallow ladies and guns being brought to the provincial
city, and foreign barbarians sitting in sedan chairs, Chinese
chair-bearers have, by the non-interference of the local magis.
trate, been freely used at Macao. And foreign residents there,
during the hot weather of summer, have found them a great
convenience. At that time, the Kwangchow foo expounded Le's
new law as not extending to Macao. However Lo, who is still
2 F -


234 The Chinese JIagazine. SEP.
a candidate for the lowest official degree, and mere acting tso-
tang at Macao, happened to be abroad one day in his chair;
and some foreign barbarian passed by him in the streets with-
out setting down his chair on one side of the way, and wait-
ing till the great man passed. His wrath was kindled at this,
and he would have seized the poor sedan-bearers in the streets,
had they not been too quick for him. He therefore went home in
great rage; ordered his clerk to search the records, and bring
forward the old order, that “no Chinese should be menial ser-
vant to a foreigner,” and forthwith issued his prohibitory decree.
It is thus, as in many other instances, that governments le.
gislate for the honor and glory of the few, not for the comfort
or welfare of the many. Whenever the local government
wishes to distress foreigners or bring them to submission, they
extend the above proud principle to all domestics, except a cook
and a coolie ; and, as if in mockery, they order away the com-
prador, who is the only person authorized to buy provisions for
the cook to employ his art upon. Of late years this has not
been done, but the law - and the precedent remain, and we
have no doubt, will be had recourse to whenever occasion may
require.—Lo's prohibition continued in force only a few days;
and the chair-bearers are again employed as usual.
LITERARY NOTICES.
The Chi N E s E M Asgaz is E.
The second number of this pub-
lication has made its appear-
ance, and the Chinese seem to
have obtained a better insight
into its nature. They did not at
first clearly understand what was
meant by a monthly periodical.
We have heard many express
their qualified approbation of
the work. Those few who have
done otherwise are for the most
part such as are either self-suf.
ficient in their own knowledge,
or proud of their own ignorance.
We may venture to say that no
natives of good sense and un-
prejudiced minds are against it.
How far it will be supported by
the Chinese themselves, remains
to be seen. The nature of the
work is, so far as we know, en-
tirely new to the Chinese around
us; a periodical for the diffusion
of useful knowledge was, pro-
bably, never before published in
“the celestial empire.” Except.
ing the Peking Gazette and the
provincial court circulars, which
are mere governmental papers,
there are no periodical publica-
tions of any description what-
ever in the land.
The late Dr. Milne, shortly
after he took up his residence
at Malacca, commenced a “pe-
riodical publication in the Chi-
nese language,” and continued
it until his death in 1822. The
first number of this work was


1833. Chinese
35
..}/agazine.
2
brought from the press on the
5th of August, 1815. Dr. Milne's
observations on the Magazine
are worthy of notice. He was a
man who formed his plans with
enlarged and liberal views, and
executed them with great zeal
and carefulness. He was a very
nice observer of men, and en-
joyed excellent opportunities for
learning the character and ha-.
bits of the Chinese; he under-
stood their prejudices, and knew
how to assail them; he saw their
miseries, and toiled even unto
death to relieve them.—In 1819,
be gave the following account of
the Magazine, which had then
been four years in circulation.
“The first specimens were very
imperfect, both as to composi-
tion and printing: but they were:
understood by persons who were
in the habit of reading; and the
editor hoped, that a fuller ac-
quaintance with the language,
would enable him to improve
the style. It was originally in-
tended, that this little publica-
tion should combine the diffu-
twenty hundred years,—will not
be easy. Means of all justifiable
kinds, laborers of every variety
of talent, resources sufficient for
the most expensive moral enter-
prises, and a long period of time,
will be necessary to do this ef.
fectually. But a beginning must
be made by some people and in
some age of the world;—and
after generations will improve
on what the present race of inen
begin. It is better, therefore, to.
commenee a good work with
very feeble means and imperfect
agents, than “sigh to the wind,”
and not attempt it at all. -
“Thus, though that variety of
subjects, intended to be published
in the Chinese Monthly Maga-
zine, could not all be brought in
at first; yet that was not consid.
ered an argument of sufficient
weight to postpone the work.
The essays and papers hitherto
published, have been chiefly of
a religious and moral kind. A
- few essays on the most simple
and obvious principles of as-
tronomy, instructive anecdotes,
sion of general knowledge, with historical extracts, occasional
that of religion and morals, and notices of great-political events,
include such notices of the pub- &c., have at times given a little
lic events of the day, as should
appear suited to awaken reflec-
variety to its pages: but there
has been less of these than could
tion and excite inquiry. To pro- have been wished.
.."º" “To render the Magazine gen-
primar ct; other things
though they were to be treated
in subordination to this, were
erally interesting, it would re-
quire a full half of the time and
labor of a missionary—time and
not to be overlooked. Know—labor well bestowed too—and
ledge and science are the hand-
come the auxiliaries of virtue.
To rouse the dormant powers of
a people, whose mental energies
are bound up by that dull and
insipid monotony, which has
drawn out its uniform line over
them to the length of more than
should unite the productions of
various pens. The editor hopes,
that he may in future have more
leisure to attend to this branch
of his work, and that the grow.
ing acquaintance of his brethren
with the Chinese language, will
enable thein to furnish useful
papers on a variety of subjects;


236
SEP.
Chinese Sages.
especially on those which have
hitherto been but sparingly in-
troduced. The size of the work
has never yet exceeded that of
a small tract, and it has been
given away gratis. For about
three years, five hundred copies
were printed monthly, and cir-
culated, by means of friends,
correspondents, travelers, ships,
&c., throughout all the Chinese
settlements of the eastern Ar-
chipelago; also in Siam, Co-
chinchina, and part of China
itself. At present, (1819,) a
thousand copies are printed
monthly. The demands and op-
portunities for circulation great-
ly increase, and it is likely that
in three or four years two thou-
sand copies will be an inade.
quate supply.”
These remarks are sufficient
to show, that those who have
undertaken the new periodical,
have abºundant encouragement
to persevere. With regard to the
place of publication, support,
execution, topics, &c., the pres-
ent work enjoys great advan-
tages over that of Dr. Milne.
Shing Meadu sze-teen too kaou,
King, Mäng, shing tseih too
foo. 2 " . . .
ple of Sages, with plates; to
which are subjoined plates illus-
trative of the lives of the sages
Confucius and Mencius.-1826.
13 vols. -
This is an interesting produc.
tion, both from the nature of its
contents and the style in which
it is printed; forming, in this
latter respect, a good specimen
of the art in China. A brief
analysis of its contents will be
the best description we can give
of it.—It is edited by a private
and, literati.”
Sacrificial Ritual of the Tem.
individual, not under govern-
mental authority.
The 1st vol. opens with poet-
ical eulogiums on Confucius
and his “four most worthy"
followers, viz. Yen tsze, Tsáng.
lsze, Tszesze tsze, and Mäng
tsze (or Mencius),-composed
by the emperors Kanghe and
Keenlung, and printed with light
re ink.-'Then follow three
prefaces by the editor's friends;
in which the work is highly
praised, and the research mani-
fested in it greatly commended.
In the same volume are por-
traits of “the sage” Confucius,.
and of the “four equals,” who
are also called “ the four most
worthy,”—accompanied by brief
accounts of their lives, deaths,
and posthumous honors.
The second volume contains
portraits and similar accounts
of the “twelve intuitively wise,”
eleven of whom were personal
disciples of Confucius. The
twelfth is the celebrated com-
mentator and philosopher Choo-
he, commonly called Choo foo-
tSze. * * *
The eight following volumes:
contain portraits and brief ac-
counts of 128 “ former worthies
These are ar-
ranged in two ranks to corres-
pond with their tablets in the
‘Temple of Sages,’ to which this 2
work is intended as a “guide.”
The worthies which occupy the
eastern side of the temple take
precedence, in order, of those
opposite to them on the western
side; , thus, the first on the
eastern side takes the lead, then
the first on the west, next the
second on the east, followed by
the second on the west, and
so on. Of these 128 worthies
and literati, a large proportion.


238
SEP.
Journal of Occurrences.
Hear, O God of Israel, there is
but one God. [Qu. Deut. vi. 42)
They are circumcised, and have
a leader and elders.”
This paragraph is from the
Anglo-Germanic Advertizer, and
found its way through England
to Calcutta, where it appeared
in the Christian Observer for
June, 1833. It was sent to the
editor of the Observer by a cor-
respondent, who, after remark-
ing on the paragraph itself and
stating that it had been forward-
ed to Mr. Wolff, gives the follow.
ing account of Jews in China.
“ It has indeed been asserted,
(and as iſ ascertained in a pub-
lication devoted to the Jews and
their conversion,) that the old
Chinese Jews have the Penta-
teuch, which is conformable to
the Hebrew Bible of Plautin :
but the Chinese copy has no vow.
el points. Perhaps this may be
some proof of their high anti-
quity, or they may have reject.
ed the points as introduced by
Esdras after the captivity. They
themselves say they began to
dwell among the Chinese A. D.
73, three years before the des.
truction of Jerusalem; travel-
ing through Khorassan and Sa-
marcand: and their li-pai se or
temple, is said to resemble that
at Jerusalem. At that time they
recorded seventy families, of the
tribes of Benjamin, Levi, Ju-
dah, &c. Much information of
these early Jewish settlers' in
China may be obtained from
“the Jewish Expositor;”, and it
will be a curious subject of in-
vestigation to ascertain whether
the German information will
lead to any real discovery of
that fact, which is positively
asserted to have been ascertain-
ed at Leipsic.”—The writer of
these remarks refers, for au-
thority, to the Jewish Expositor.
JOURNAL OF OCCURRENCES.
T H E IN UN D A T 1 o N.
The late inundations,—by their fre-
quent recurrence, their for many years
unparalleled height, and their calam-
itous effects,<-have become a sub-
ject of paramount importance here,
aspecially among our native friends.
In the conclusion of our last num-
ber, we noticed the heavy rains" and
high rise of the tide, which had reach-
ed far above its usual mark, even on
the 30th of º: On the 31st, and
the following day, the rain abated a
httle, but recommenced on the 2d of
September, and continued till the
morning of the 3d., when it finally
ceased. Meanwhile the tide continued
to rise higher and higher. Numerous
towns and villages were completely
mundated; and boats plied, for seve.
ral days, through almost every street
in the city and suburbs ef Canton–
Many native houses were thrown
down by the force of the current—so
violent that the city gates could not
be closed for several nights,”-while
others were sapped to their founda-
tions, and one after another gave way.
In the country above Canton,
which has suffered the most, embank-
ments both of stone and earth were
broken down, and large portions of
paddy fields were carried away by the
rapid current. Where there were no
* During the month of August, there fell at Macao, 36 inches of rain.
The month was there ushered in with very windy weather, and heavy
rains.
*-


1833.
Journal of Occurrences, 239
But this can be done only very par.
tially.—Many industrious families are
now become public beggars. Many an
individual is thcre now in Canton,
who in one day was left a father.
less, childless, houseless, and money-
less widower. There are several in.
stances, however, of not one escap.
ing. One house of 15, and another of
30 individuals, were entirely swept
away, together with all their effects.
—A temple in which were deposited
the remains of deceased individuals
previous to burial, became a place
of refuge for about 40 men and wo.
men; but while they were congrat-
ulating themselves on their personal
escape, the temple walls fell in, the
waters passed over the ruins,—and
their now-lifeless bodies were ining.
led with the corpses thrown out of the
shattered coffins. Many whose houses
had become a prey to the devasta-
ting element sought refuge on the city
walls.-when the walls crumbling
beneath thern, not a few sunk to rise
no more. Such examples we might
easily multiply. But we refrain. Sure.
ly. “when the Lord's judgments are
abroad in the earth, the inhabitants
of the world will learn righteousness.”
Alas! we fear they are too often and
too soon forgotten.
The inundation has excited great
attention on the part of the official
authorities in Canton. Proclamations
have been issued to encourage and
to require subscriptions in aid of the
sufferers. Demands have been made
in the form of taxes upon cotton and
tea merchants, upon the bouseholders,
and upon various other classes. At
the same time, severe threats have
been issued against auy who may at.
tempt to obtain money from the rich,
by intimidation. The fooyuen, who
has been most active in these matters,
began himself by distributing upwards,
it is said, of 20,000 dollars, among the
poor aná destitute. The government,
has aided the sufferers by distribution
of boiled rice, and by opposing rc.
strictions on the importation of ſo-
reign rice which had been proposed
by the hoppo.
But all these transactions are con-
fined to the departments of Kwang-
chow and Shaouking. In Chaou-
chow foo, on the cast of this province,
the chief city of the department is
embankments, the water, rising grad.
ually on the paddy and then retiring,
caused a far less degree of damage.
But where the embankments stood,
the heavy torrents of rain. ſalling on
the fields and having no outlet, re.
mained so long as to blight the grain
completely; so that the largest portion
of the neighboring country is render.
ed altogether unproductive for the
remainder of the present year; and
not only the paddy, but also the mul.
berry trees, have everywhere receiv-
ed extensive injury. A gentleman
who shortly after traveled up the
Inner Passage from Macao to Canton,
which is for a great part of the way
in the midst of rice fields and mulberry
plantations, describes the country as
almost completely-devastated.
On the 5th and 6th of September,
the tide was at the highest, being
from 4 to 5 feet high * at the eastern
gates of the city, and not far below
that height in many other places
which are much beyond high water
mark. On the night of the 5th, the
weather being calm and serene, at
intervals, when silence prevailed a-
round, the low murmuring of the cur.
rent as it rolled along, was distinctly
audible in the foreign factories. This
was well calculated to suggest most
solemn reflection, when it was com.
sidered how many, who a few days
before had been in the enjoyment of
health and comfort, had now found
a watery grave beneath those waves,
—and how many more, though them.
selves escaped, had therein buried
their little all.
On the 7th, the water began grad.
ually to abate, but it did not return
to its ordinary level till after the 16th,
when the spring tides had passed
over. For upwards of a week. du.
ring the continuance of the inunda-
tion, the current rushed past the city,
with such rapidity, that all business
with the shipping at Whampoa was
entirely stopped, and even light gigs
with European crews had the utmost
difficulty in reaching the city. To
describe all that has come to our
knowledge respecting the effects of
this awful visitation, would far ex-
ceed our limits. A few instances of
suffering will perhaps tend to show
in the best manner the nature. extent,
and consequences of the calamity.
* So it is stated in the government accounts, but many of the popular
accounts inake it twice as high.


240
Journal of Occurrences.
stated to have been almost destroyed
by the inundation.—it is not long since
we heard that upwards of a dozen
villages in that department had been
swallowed up by an earthquake.—
But we have obtained neither official
accounts nor private particulars of
these occurrences.
We have seen a memorial from the
governor and fooyuen to the emperor
respecting the inundation; it states
that the number of houses fallen in
the city and suburbs is about 4000,
Jexclusive of the houses of the Tartar
troops, which come under the Tartar
general's jurisdiction. Such official
accounts are generally considered as
under-rated. We have seen also a
small publication advising the excava-
tion of a canal to the eastward, in
order to draw off some of the waters
to the south, before they can reach
Canton. We shall probably take
furthcr notice of this little tract in our
next number, not for any intrinsic
worth that it possesses, but because
we consider it a curiosity.
INsuknection IN Cochinchina.-
We hear nothing new on this subject
further than that the insurgents had
been so far successful as to drive
back the royal forces, in three suc.
cessive attacks which the latter had
made on Donnai. Several different
arrivals confirm the truth of the ac:
counts first received, though differing
a little in particulars.
Cochinchinese: ENvov, or tribute
bearer.—This being the poriod for the
payment of the Cochinchinese triens
nial tribute, an officer has been sent
from the court of Hué to that of Pe.
king. The 30th of March was ap-
pointed by the emperor for his entry
into the Chinese borders, to pass .
through Kwangse, Hookwang, and
Post s c R i rr.-Of Mr. Gutzlaff, who reached Canton on the 28th inst,
other provinces, up to Peking. On
the 20th April, a report was forward.
ed to the emperor, concerning the
letters, amount of tributary presents,
and names of the officers and follow-
ers of the mission; and on the 19th
of May, the mission entered Kwei-
lin, the capital of Kwangsc province.
There they remained for several days,
during which period they were
entertained by the fooyuen of the
province, who also gave them, in the
name of the emperor, silk trowsers
and other garments, because their
“changes of raiment were insuffi.
cient.”—On the 26th May, they pro-
ceeded by water towards Peking,
where they would arrive in August
or September, when they were to
wait to be feasted by the emperor,
on his birthday.—The mission con-
sists of three officers, eight “compa-
nions,” and an attendant.
The two Cochinchinese vessels
now lying in the river, which brought
back the Chinese war-junk wrecked
on their coast, in February last, are
permitted to sell the “goods which
they brought for ballast,’ and to pur.
chase return cargoes, free of duty.
From the documents, referring to
these subjects, in the Peking gazettes,
it appears that the name of the pre-
sent king of Cochinchina is Fuh-
keaou, and his family name Yuen.
The family of Yuen has been in pos-
session of the country since the 54th
year of Kcénlung, a. d. 1789. It
was however expelled for some time,
during the reign of Keāking, after
which, the father of the present mo-
narch, Yuen Fuhyang, re-established
the dynasty, under its present name,
Yučnan, in place of the old one of
Annan or Anam. The Chinese É.
vernment does not acknowledge the
F. king of Cochinchina by his
wö.haou, or national designation,
Mingming: - :* -:
r
from a short voyage up the coast, we learn that the demand for books, among
the natives, is very great indeed. Mr. G. was supplied with about fifteen
thousand tracts of various kinds; these were in boxes which contained usu-
ally between 1000 and 2000 each. In more than one instance, when he
went on shore and took with him a full box, he was surrounded by hun-
dreds, who, before he could move from the place where he opened the box,
bore off the whole of its contents. The desire to obtain the books was
most amazing, and could not be satisfied. Mr. Gutzlaff was also supplied
with ample stores of medicines, which were likewise in great demand.
It is rumored here this morning, (Sept. 30th.) that locusts have made
their appearance near this city, in the district of Pwanyu.


Th E
ch IN Es E RE Posito R Y.
Vol. II.-October, 1833.-No. 6.
* !" , --
DEscription OF THE city of CANTON.
- (Continued from page 211.) - - - -
THE LITERARY institutions of China are the pillars
that give stability to the government. Her military
forces are utterly inadequate to hold together the
numerous and extensive provinces and territorics that
constitute the wide dominions of the reigning dy-
nasty. With great difficulty the Tartar troops over-
ran the country—conquering province after province,
and gradually extending their authority over the
territories on the west of China Proper. But for
a long period both the discipline and the energies
of the Chinese soldiery have been on the wane; and
at this moment the imperial hosts present nothing
formidable but their numerical amount;-the recent
insurrections at Leônchow and Formosa have af-
forded the most complete evidence of this imbecility.
And not only in this part of the empire, but along
the whole coast up to the Great wall on the north,
and éven beyond that in Mantchou Tartary, beth the
land and naval forces have become so exceedingly
enervated and dissolute, that they exercise no saluta-
ry, influence or control,—except it may be over a
few who are equally debased with themselves. As
police-men, in the capacity of lictors, thief-takers,
, " : 20, . . . . . . . . . * , -


1833, city of Canton, 243
High rank in the state is the brightest glory to
which this people aspire; and with then learning
derives its chiefest value from the simple fact that
it brings them within the reach of that dazzling
prize.
Strict examinations, regulated by a fixed code of
laws, have been instituted. and designed solely to
elicit from the body of the community the “true
talent" of the people, with the ulterior intention of
applying it to purposes of government. At these
examinations, which are open to all except menial
servants, lictors, play-actors, and priests, it is de-
termined who shall rise to distinction and shed glory
back on their ancestors and forward upon their pos-
terity, and who shall live on in obscurity, and die
and be forgotten. The competitors at the Olympic
games never entered the arena before the assem-
bled thousands of their countrymen, with deeper emo-
tions, than that which agitates the bosoms of those
who contest the palm at these literary combats. The
days on which they are held and their results pub-
lished in Canton, are the proudest which its inhabi-
tants ever witness.—A brief notice of them may be
interesting to the reader, and at the same time enable
him to understand more fully the nature and object
of the schools and colleges of the provincial city.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ; - - - . . . . . - - -
-"The highest literary examinations in the empire
are triennial, aud take place at Peking. Beside these
stated, there are also other occasional examinations,
which are granted by special favor of the emperor.
Up to these contests, the most distinguished scholars
go from all the provinces, and the privilege is not
gained without long, patient, and successful endeav-
or. The examinations, at which it is determined who
shall enjoy it, occur also triennially, and are held
in the metropolis of each province. These exami-
nations are of incomparable interest to great mul-
titudes of the people in every department and dis-
trict of the empire. High honors, rich emoluments,


:244 Description of the OCT.
and, in a word, everything that the young aspirant ,
and his numerous kindred most esteem, are at stake.
A long season of preparation has been endured;
heavy expenses incurred; and now the decisive hour
approaches. - ". . . ." .
* Two examiners are chosen from the distinguish-
ed officers at Peking, under the immediate super-
intendence of the emperor. They must leave the
'capital within five days after they are chosen. They
are allowed the use of the post-horses belonging
to government. Upon those who come to Canton,
six hundred taels are conferred to defray their ex-
penses while on the road ; two hundred of which are
paid when they commence their journey from Peking;
and the remainder, by the governor of the province,
when they are about to return after the examina-
tion is completed. These are assisted by ten other
examiners, who are selected from the local officers,
over whom the fooyuen presides. Besides these
there are many inferior officers, who are employed
as inspectors, guards, &c. All these, together with
the candidates, their attendants, &c., amounting to
10,000 and upwards, assemble at the Kung-yuen,
a large and spacious building designed solely for
these occasions. It contains numerous apartments,
so that each candidate may be seated separate from
his competitors. All of the seats are numbered.
The apartments are low and narrow, and have on-
ly a single entrance, and no furniture except a chair
and a narrow writing-desk. - ->
The number of candidates who assemble in Can-
'ton is between seven and eight thousand. They are
often attended by their friends, and continue here
for, several weeks, and sometimes for months; dur-
ing which time the hum and bustle of the city is
greatly increased, and every kind of mercantile busi-
ness receives a new impulse. These candidates
are always persons of some distinction, which they
must have gained, either at previous examinations,
, or by the payment of large sums of money. They


1838. rity of Canton, 245
are all called sewtsae, a title not unlike that of
master of arts; but they are divided into several
classes, and those who have purchased their degree
are often despised by the others, and are generally
regarded with less respect than those who have
gained it by their own merits. They meet now on
equal terms, and their ‘true ability' is to be de-
termined by personal efforts, which are to be made
during a given period and under given circum-
stances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "
The candidates assemble on the 8th moon; but
none are allowed to enter the examination except
those who have been previously enrolled by the lite-
rary chancellor of the province. The age, features,
place of residence, and lineage of each candidate must
be given in the chancellor's list; and a copy of it
lodged in the office of the fooyuen. They must all
attend at the examinations in their native province ;
and those who give in a false account of their fani-
ly-and lineage, or place of nativity, shall be expell-
ed and degraded;—for no candidate can be admit-
ted at any place, without proving that his family
has been resident there for three generations.
The examination continues for several days, and
each student must undergo a series of trials. The
first trial is on the 9th of the moon; the second, on
the 12th; and the third, on the 15th. The candidates
are required to enter their apartments, on the day
preceding the examination, and are not allowed to
leave them until the day after it is closed. Thus
they must pass two nights in close and solitary con-
finement. On the first day of their examination three
themes, which are selected from the Four Books,
are proposed to them, and they are required to give
the meaning and scope of each; and a fourth theine,
on which they must compose a short poem in rhyme.
On the second day, a theme is given them from each
of the “Five Classics;' and on the third day, five ques-
tions, which shall refer to the history or political


246 Description of the OCT,
economy of the country, are given them. The themes
must be sententious, and have meaning which is
refined and profound. They must not be such as
have often been discussed. Those which are given
out for poetry, must be grave and important. In
the themes for essays on political economy, the chief
topics must be concerning things of real importance,
the principles of which are clear and evidently of
a correct nature. “There is no occasion to search
and inquire into devious and unimportant subjects.”
All questions concerning the character and learning
of statesmen of the present dynasty, as well as all
topics which relate to its policy, must be carefully
avoided. . . i -
The paper on which the themes and essays are
written is prepared with great care; and must be
inspected at the office of the poo-ching-sze. It is
a firm, thick paper; and the only kind that may be
used. The price of it is fixed by authority. The
number of characters, both in the themes and essays,
is limited. The lines must be strait; and all the cha-
racters full and fair. At the close of every paper,
containing elegant composition, verses, or answers
to questions, it must be stated by the student how
many characters have been blotted out or altered;
if the number exceed one hundred, the writer is tset
chuh, “pasted out:'—which means, that his name is
pasted up at the gate of the hall, as having violated
the rules of the examination, and he is forthwith
excluded from that year's examination.—There are
usually a hundred or more persons at every exami-
nation in Canton subject to this punishment, for
breaking this or some other one of the regulations.
The candidates are not allowed “to get drunk.
and behave disorderly” during the examination. All
intercourse of civility between the examiners and the
friends and relations of the students must be dis-
continued ; and there must be no interchange of
letters, food, &c. On entering the outer gate of the
kung-yuen, each candidate must write his name in


1833. city of Cuntun, 247
a register kept for that purpose ; and if it is after-
wards discovered that the name was erroneously
written, then the officer superintending the register,
shall be immediately arrested and delivered over to
a court of inquiry; and if it shall be ascertained that
the student has employed any person to compose his
essays for him, or if he be found guilty of any other
similar illegality, both he and his accomplices shall
be tried and punished. Moreover, the student on
entering the hall of examination must be searched;
and if it be discovered that he has with him any pre-
composed essay, or miniature copy of the classics,
he shall be punished by wearing the wooden collar,
degraded from the rank of sewtsae and for ever
incapacitated to stand as a candidate for literary
honors; and the father and tutor of the delinquent
shall both be prosecuted and punished.
All the furniture and utensils, such as the writ-
ing-desks, ink-stands, &c., in the apartments where
the students write their essays, must be searched;
and also each and all of the managers, copyists, at-
tendant officers, servants, porters, &c., &c. If in
any manner a learned person, who is to decide on
the papers, be admitted to the apartments of the
students, dressed as a servant, he shall be punished,
and the chief examiner delivered over to a court of
inquiry. A watch, composed of military officers and
soldiers, is maintained day and might both in the in-
ner and outer courts of the hall; and if any of these
men are guilty of conveying papers to the candidates,
concealed with their food, or in any other way, they
shall be punished.—There are many other regula-
tions and precautions which have been adopted to
prevent fraud; but we have given enough to show
something both of the interest which gathers around
these examinations, and of the schemes which are
formed to gain distinction without the toil and fa-
tigue of hard study. . . . . . . ." . . . . . . . . . ;
Of the thousands of candidates assembled at these
examinations in Canton, only seventy-one can obtain.


248 Description of the OCT.
the degree of keu-jin; the names of these are pub-
lished by a proclamation, which is issued on or be-
fore the 10th of the 9th moon, and within twenty-
five days after the examination is closed. This
time is allowed the examiners to read the essays
and prepare their report. The proclamation, which
contains the names of the successful candidates,
after it has received its appropriate signatures, is
pasted up on the office of the fooyuen. At a given
hour, three guns are fired; and the fooyuen at the
same time comes forth from his palace accompa-
nying the official paper; it is forthwith pasted up,
and again a salute of three guns is fired; his ex-
cellency then advances and bows three times to-
wards the names of the “promoted men' (keu-jin);
and finally retires under another salute of three
guns. -
* * * - -
Ten thousand anxious minds are now relieved
from their long suspense. Swift messengers are
dispatched by those who have won the prize to
announce to their friends the happy result of the
long trial, which they have undergone; and, while
the many return with disappointment to their homes,
the successful few are loaded with encomiums and
congratulations, and their names with their essays
sent-up to the emperor. To crown the whole, a
banquet is prepared for these newly-promoted: men;
and, the examiners, and all the civil officers of rank
in the province join in these festivities. Gold and
silver cups for the occasion must be provided by
the provincial treasurer: . The chief examiner from
Peking presides; the fooyuen, at whose palace the
banquet is given, and who is present as visitor, is
seated on his right, and the assistant examinerton
his leftis; The governor of the province is also pre-
sent ; a train of inferior officers wait as servants;
and two lads, dressed like naiads, holding in their
hands : branches of olive, grace the scene" with a
soug-from the ancient classics. . . . . . ºtitº


1833, - city of Canton. 249
There are three other examinations in Canton!
which occur twice in three years, and are attended
by great numbers of aspirants. At the first, which
is attended by the students of Nanhae and Pwan-
yu, the cheheen preside; at the second, which
is attended by candidates from all the klistricts of
Kwangchow foo, the chefoo presides; but the third
is conducted by the literary chancellor of the pro-
vince, whose prerogative it is to confer the degree
of sewtsae upon a limited number of the most dis-
tinguished competitors. These are preparatory to
the triennial examination, and inferior to it in interest:
they need not therefore be further particularized. It
may be remarked, however, in passing, that they are
open to persons of all ages; and a case very recently
occurred, where a hoary head of eighty, accompanied
by a son and grandson, attended the examination;–
all of them were candidates for the same literary
honors. -
To qualify the young for these examinations, and
thereby prepare them for rank and office in the state,
is a leading object of the higher schools and colleges
among the Chinese. But a great majority of the
schools in Canton are designed only to prepare youth
for the common duties of private life. These latter,
as well as many of the higher schools, are private
establishments. And though there are teachers
appointed by government in all the districts of the
empire, yet there are no public or charity-schools
for the benefit of the great mass of the community.
Whatever may be his object and final destination,
almost every scholar in Canton commences his
course at some one of the private schools. These,
among the numerous inhabitants of this city, assume
a great variety of form and character, according to
the peculiar fancy of individuals. The opulent, who
are desirous of pushing forward their sons rapidly,
provide for them able teachers, who shall devote
their whole time to the instruction of two, three, or
four pupils. A school of this description we have
2 H -


250 Description of the OCT.
repeatedly visited; it is in a hall belonging to iner-
chants from Ningpo, and is kept by an old man who
has three lads under his care, one five, another seven,
and a third, nine years old; he instructs them in
the learned dialect, and the youngest has already
made greater proficiency than is usually done by
boys at the age of ten. Sometimes the inhabitants
of a single street, or a few families who are related
to each other, unite and hire a teacher, and fit up
a school-room, and each defrays a stipulated part
of the expenses. At other times, the teacher pub-
lishes the rules and terms on which he will con-
duct his school, and seeks for scholars wherever he
can find them. " .
Children are not generally sent to school until they
are seven or eight years old; they enter, usually, for
a whole year, and must pay for that term whether
they attend regularly or not. The wages of the
teachers vary greatly; in some instances, (and they
are not unfrequent in the country,) the lads pay
only two or three dollars, but gencrally fifteen or
twenty, per annum. When the teacher devotes his
whole time to two or three pupils, he often receives
a hundred dollars or more from each. -
The ordinary school-room, with all its defects,
presents an interesting scene. At the head of it
there is a tablet, on which the name of the sage,
—“the teacher and pattern for myriads of ages"—
is written in large capitals; a small altar is placed
before it upon which incense and candles are kept
continually burning. Every morning when the scholar
enters the room, he bows first before the tablet and
then to his teacher; the former is not merely a tribute
of respect, but an act of worship, which he is taught,
nay, compelled to pay to Confucius.-The boys usu-
ally continue in school from six o'clock in the morn-
ing until six in the evening, except two or three hours
which they are allowed for their meals. When in
school they all study aloud; and each one raising


1833, - city of Cantom. 215
his voice at the same time, and striving to out-do
his fellows, the noise of the whole is very great.
Upon those who are idle or disobedient, the teacher
plies the rattan with woful severity. Every lesson
must be committed perfectly to memory; and the lad
who fails in this, is obliged to bow down and learn
it upon his knees; and those who are the most in-
corrigible are made to kneel on gravel and small
stones, or something of the kind, in order to enhance
their punishment. , ,
The Santsze king, the famous “Three character
Classic,” is the first book which is put into the hands
of the learner. Though written expressly for infant
minds, it is scarcely better fitted for them, than the
propositions of Euclid would be were they thrown
into rhyme. But “it is not to be understood” at first;
and the tyro, when he can rehearse it correctly from
beginning to end, takes up the Four Books and mas-
ters them in the same manner. Thus far the young
learners go, without understanding aught, or but lit-
tle, of what they recite; and here, those who are not
destined to a literary course, after having learned to
write a few characters, must close their education.
The others now commence the commentary on the
Four Books, and commit it to memory in the same
way; and then pass on to the other classics. The
study of arithmetic, geography, history, and so forth,
forms no part of a “common-school" education.
The high schools and colleges are numerous; but
none of them are richly endowed, or well fitted for
the purposes of education. The high schools, which
are fourteen in number, are somewhat similar to the
private grammar schools in England and America;
with this difference, that the former are nearly desti-
tute of pupils. There are thirty colleges; most of
which were founded many centuries ago. Several of
them are now deserted, and are falling to ruins.
Three of the largest have each about two hundred
students, and, like all the others, only one or two


252 Description of the OC'I',
professors. We have sought long and diligently, but
thus far in vain,_for some definite information con-
cerning the existing discipline and regulations of
these colleges; should we affirm that they are without
rules and order, we should say what we do not doubt,
but what we cannot prove. All those systems of in-
struction which have sprung up in modern times, and
are now doing so much for the nations of the West,
are here entirely unknown. There are however, a few
books in the Chinese language which contain excel-
Hent maxims on the subject of education, give nume-
rous rules to facilitate the acquisition of knowledge,
and detail systems of gymnastic exercises for the
preservation of health. - - -
Of the whole population of Canton not more than
‘one half are able to read. Perhaps not one boy out
of ten is left entirely destitute of instruction; yet of
the other sex not one in ten ever learns to read or
write. There is scarcely a school for girls in the
whole city. Public sentiment here is against the
education of females; immemorial usage is against
it; many passages in the classics are against it; and
the consequence is they are left uninstructed, and
sink far below that point in the scale of being, which
they are fitted and ought ever to hold. The degra-
dation into which the fairest half of the human spe-
cies is here thrown, affords cause for loud complaint
against the wisdom and philosophy of the sages and
legislators of the Celestial empire.
º' We do not knowingly detract from the merits
of the Chinese; in comparison with other Asiatics,
they are a learned and polished race. Those who
have been educated are generally remarkably fond
of books; and though there are no public libra-
ries in Canton; yet the establishments for manu-
facturing and vending books are numerous. And
to supply those who are unable to purchase for
themselves the works they need, a great number
of circulating libraries are kept constantly in motion.
But almost all of these books are bad; this charge,


1833, city of Canton, 253
however, does not lie which equal force against those
works which usually constitute the text-books of
literary men. -
We are admirers of Greek and Roman literature;
but we deprecate the practice of putting into the
hands of young students the “master pieces" of
some of their most celebrated authors. The moral
tendency of many of those heathen writings, which,
- ever since the dark ages have continued to form the
basis of the literary education of not a few Christian
schools, is decidedly inferior to the Chinese. An
elegant English scholar has spoken well on this
point. ‘The Chinese student,” says he, “not being
secured from error by the light of revealed reli-
gion, can only derive his moral precepts from
his school learning. He is certainly therefore for-
tunate in the possession of a body of ancient na-
tive literature, which, while it cultivates his taste
and improves his understanding, contains nothing to
inflame his passions or corrupt his heart. The
Chinese are not compelled, as we are, upon the au-
thority of great names, and for the sake of the gra-
ces of style and language, to place in the hands of
their youth, works containing passages which put
modesty to the blush,_works, in which the most ad-
mirable maxims of morality, are mixed and con-
founded together in the same page, with avowals
and descriptions of most disgusting licentiousness.
The Chinese press is certainly by no meaus free
from the charge of grossness and indelicacy; but the
higher class, at least, of Chinese literature, that
which usually forms the library of the youthful stu-
dent, is in this respect wholly unexceptionable.”
The religious institutions of Canton present for
contemplation a dark and melancholy picture. Creat-
ed in the likeness of the infinite, the high, and lofty
one, and intrusted with the dominion of this lower
workſ, man is fitted for sublime action. His intellec-
tual faculties, capable of unlimited improvement, and


454 Description of the - OCT.
his “living soul” panting after immortality, prove his
origin divine, and that by the exercise of his strength
he can accomplish deeds that shall associate him
with glorified spirits, and make him heir to an eter-
nal kingdom. In themselves princes are but worms;
yet with a renewed spirit, the humblest man on earth
may rise, and, holding communion with his Maker,
shed a benign influence around him that shall cause
multitudes to rise up and call him blessed. The
day-spring from on high has visited the earth; and
millions of our race are rejoicing in the glorious lib-
erty of the children of God. But here, alas, where
“sages” have taught, and where the good and per-
fect gifts of the Father of lights have been richly en-
joyed, the creature denies his Creator, perverts the
use of talents given him for noble purposes, and bows
down and pays divine homage to wood and stone.
Facts shall speak for themselves; and the reader
must form his own opinion on a case, the final de-
cision of which rests not with man. Our judgment
and that of the idolater is with the Almighty: soon
these earthly scenes will be past away, and the great
and small stand together; then gold and diadems will
be worthless; then all human distinctions will vanish;
and then religion—that religion which is pure and
undefiled before God,—will alone be valuable.
We will notice the temples or religious houses of
Canton in order, (as we find them in a native ma-
nuscript,) and narrate only such facts, as are neces-
sary to illustrate their real character and condition.
1. Kwang-headu sze, that is “the temple of glory
and filial duty.’ The Chinese are remarkably fond
of splendid names, and this peculiarity is strikingly
illustrated in the rich and flowery language which
the Budhists have employed in naming their tem-
ples. Sze is one of the most common terms used
to designate the temples of Budha, and the other
two characters, Kwang-headu, form the proper name
of the temple. It is umnecessary, and often difficult,


1833, city of Canton. 255
to translate the names of these temples; we shall,
therefore, usually write them just as they are found
in native books.
The Kwang-headu temple is one of the largest
and richest in Canton; it stands within the walls
near the northwest corner of the old city. There are
thirty-five hundred acres of land belonging to it;
which are rented for the support of its inmates,—
about two hundred in number. This temple was
first built in the time of the San-kwó, A. D. 250; it has
often been repaired, and supplied with new recruits
of idols, which are numerous in all its principal halls.
In the records of its early history there are frequent
allusions to Se-chuh and Se-yih. Se-chuh, also call-
ed Tečn-chuh, is India; but the use of Se-yih seems
not to be well settled.—Professor Neumann, in his
notes on the Catechism of the Shamans, says; “the
meaning of these words [Se yih] is very extensive,
and changes from one century to another. All the
countries within and without the northwest frontiers
of China, and the northern parts of Hindostan, are
now comprehended under this denomination.”—It
denotes “the West,’ much in the same manner in
which we speak of ‘the East.' ' -
2. Tsing-hwuy sze:—this stands near the Kwang-
headu temple, and though inferior to it in extent, is
quite like it in almost all other respects. There is
indeed, a very great similarity in these establish-
ments, not only here but throughout the empire; we
need not therefore repeat what is common to them .
all. The Tsing-hwuy temple was first built in the
time of the Leãng dynasty, and is remarkable chiefly
for a lofty pagoda that rises within its enclosures.
3. Hwae-shing :-this temple was built during the
reign of the Tang dynasty, by fan-jin, “foreigners;’
it has a lofty dome and spire, rising one hundred and
sixty feet in height; which the Chinese call kwang-tá,
‘the unadorned pagoda.’ In the time of Chinghwa
of the Ming dynasty, A. D. 1468, it was rebuilt; and
Ah-too-luh, (Abdulla,) a civil officer, and seventeen


256 Description of the OCT.
familes, resided in or near the temple. These were
all, probably, Mohammedans : they now amount to
about 3,000 individuals, and are distinguished from
the other inhabitants, as ‘persons who have no idols,
and who will not eat swine's flesh.’
4–9. Hae-choo-tsze-too; Paou-to ; Keae-yuen ;
Se-chen-kwei-fung; Se-hwa ; and Tae-tung-koo.—
We fear our readers will frown at these hard, and,
to all but natives—very uncomely names; but they
are, in fact, infinitely less unseemly than the estab-
lishments which they designate. No habitations on
earth are more to be abhorred ; they are full of idols
and all manner of abominations. Their outer courts
are common retreats for crowds of vagabonds and
gamesters; while their inner apartments are usually
inhabited by those miserable beings, who, having
abandoned society, and their better reason too, drag
out an ignorant, idle, and misanthropic life.
10. Chang-show gan:—gan is often applied to
nunneries, of which there are several in Canton. But
there are no nuns in this temple. The number of
priests is about one hundred, who are maintained at
an annual expense of more than 7000 taels. This
money is obtained by the lease of lands, which have
been given to the establishment. The temple, with
its various buildings and gardens, occupies three or
four acres of land. Some of the halls are spacious;
and one of them, which has been recently built by a
member of Howqua's family, is neat and kept in
good condition. In one of the largest halls there is
a fine image of Budha, in an attitude—that of a half-
naked, gross, well-fed lounger, which does honor
to the deified mortal, whom it represents: Directly
above him, in another apartment, stands ‘the God-
dess of Mercy,’—a well favored image, but undis-
tinguished by any superhuman characteristics, ex-
cept in the dimensions of her person, being twelve
or fifteen feet in height.—This temple stands with-
out the walls of the city, about three quarters of
a mile directly north from the foreign factories. It


258 Description of the OCT'.
fat—he must be a hypocrite, and should be punish-
ed with death. He drew his sword to execute with
his own hand, the sentence; but his arm suddenly stiff-
ened, and he was stopped from his purpose. That
night a divine person appeared to him in a dream,
and assured him, that Ah-tsze was a holy man, add-
ing “you must not unjustly kill him.” Next morning
the king presented himself before Ah-tsze, confessed
his crime, and his arm was immediately restored.
He then did obeisance to the priest, and took him
for his tutor and guide; and morning and evening
the king waited on the priest as his servant.
“The inhabitants of the thirteen villages now
heard of this miracle and solicited the priest to in-
tercede in their behalf, that they might be rescued
from the sentence of extermination. The priest in-
terceded, and the king listened, answering thus:—
‘I have received an imperial order to exterminate
these rebels; but since you, my master, say they now
submit, be it so ; I must, however, send the troops
round to the several villages, before I can report to
the emperor; I will do this, and then beg that they
may be spared.’—The king fulfilled his promise,
and the villages were saved. Their gratitude to the
priest was unbounded: and estates, and incense, and
money, were poured in upon him. The king also,
persuaded his officers to make donations to the tem-
ple, and it became affluent from that day.
“The temple had then no hall of celestial kings;
and at the outer gate there was a pool belonging to
a rich man who refused to sell it, although Ah-tsze
offered him a large compensation. The king con-
versing with the priest one day, said “this temple is
deficient, for it has no hall for the celestial kings;’ the
priest replied, “a terrestrial king, please your high-
ness, is the proper person to rear a pavilion to the
celestial kings., The king took the hint, and seized
on the pool of the rich man, who was now very glad
to present it without any compensation; and he
gave coulmand, moreover, that a pavilion should be


1833. city of Canton, 250
completed in fifteen days; but at the priest's in-
tercession, the workmen were allowed one month to
finish it; and by laboring diligently night and day,
they accomplished it in that time.”
Such is the history of the temple of Honan, the
largest and best endowed religious establishment in
Canton.—Honan is an island, and is situated, as its
name denotes, (literally translated,) “south of the riv-
er,” but the village, which for a considerable distance
lines the bank of the Choo keting directly opposite to
the city, may be considered as forming a part of its
southern suburbs.-As the family residences of sev-
eral principal Chinese merchants, and the open fields
lying beyond the village, together with the attractions
of the “jos-house,” make Honan a place of frequent
resort for stranges who visit Canton, some further
particulars concerning the present extent and condi-
tion of the temple, may be acceptable.
Its buildings, which are chiefly of brick, are nu-
merous, and occupy, with the gardens belonging to
the temple, six or eight English acres. These grounds
are surrounded by a high wall.—Crossing the river a
few rods east of the foreign factories, directly after
landing you enter the outer gate, pass through a long
court-yard to a second, called “the hill gate,' over
which Hae-chwang, the name of the temple, is written
in large capitals. Here, as you stand in the gateway,
you see two colossal figures—images of deified war-
riors, stationed one on your right, the other on your
left, to guard, day and night the entrance to the in-
ner courts. Passing further on, through another court
you enter “the palace of the four great celestial
kings"—images of ancient heroes, Still advancing,
a broad pathway conducts you up to the great, pow-
erful, palace. Procul, O procul este profani. You
are now in the presence of “the three precious
Budhas,” three stately images, representing the
past, the present, and the future Budha. The hall,
in which these images are placed, is about one
hundred feet square, and contains numerous altars,


200 Description of the OCT.
statues, &c., it is occupied by the priests while cele-
brating their daily vespers, usually at about 5 o'clock
P. M. Further onward, there are other halls, filled
with other images, among which that of “the God-
dess of Mercy” is the most worthy of notice.
On the right side, after you have entered the tem-
ple, there is a long line of apartments; one of which
is used for a printing office; and others are formed
into narrow cells for the priests; or into stalls and
pens for pigs, fowls, &c. These animals are brought
to the temple by devout devotees, when they come
to make or pay vows to the beings who inhabit the
temple. On the left side, there is another set of
apartments—a pavilion for Kwan-footsze, a military
demigod; a hall for the reception of visitors; a treasury;
a retreat for Te-tsečing wang, the king of hades; the
chief priest's room ; a dining hall; and a kitchen.
Beyond these, there is a spacious garden, at the ex-
tremity of which there is a mausoleum, wherein the
ashes of the burnt priests are, once a year, deposited;
also a furnace for burning their dead bodies, and a
little cell in which the jars containing their ashes
are kept, till the annual season of opening the mau-
soleum returns. There are likewise tombs for the
bodies of those who leave money for their burial.
—There are about 175 priests now in the temple.
They are supported in part by property belonging to
the establishment, and partly by their own private
resources. Only a few, and a very few, of them
well educated.
27–75. These forty-nine temples we must pass
over without mentioning even their names ; several
of them are large, and it would require many vol-
umes to contain all that the Chinese have written
concerning them.
76–78. Yuen-meadu kwan ; Woo-seen kwan ;
and Peih-keu kwan.—These three temples belong
to priests of the Taou sect; and their history is filled
with those wild and extravagant vagaries, which are
so characteristic of that order. The first of the three


1833. city of Canton. 261
was rebuilt in the fifth year of Kanghe, A. D. 1667,
and very richly endowed by officers of the provincial
government. The Woo-seen kwan, or “temple of the
Five Genii,” derived its name from the “five immor-
tals,” who, at a very early period (as already notic-
ed,) came hither, riding upon five rams, as a token
of prosperity to the inhabitants of the country. The
temple is spacious, has many images, and a great
number of pavilions for “the immortals.”
79–86. Fow-yew; San-yuen; Fung-chin; Nan-
hae-shin; Lung-wand; Kwan-te; Fung-shin; Tečn-
how kung.—These are all temples of considerable
note, to which great numbers of the people resort.
The Tečn-how kung or “temple of the Queen of
Heaven,” is much frequented by seafaring people,
of whom her ladyship is “defender and protector.”
87. Ching-hwang-meaou.-The superintendent of
this temple pays $4,000 for his situation; which sum,
with a large profit, is obtained again in the space of
three or four years, by the sale of candles, incense,
&c., to be used by worshipers.
88–124. Most of these are “temples of ancestors,”
and they complete the listbefore us; which, large
as it is, does not, we believe, include the whole num-
ber of temples in Canton.
There are, moreover, a great number of public
altars, which are dedicated to the gods of the land
and of grain, of the wind and clouds, of thunder and
rain, and of hills and rivers, &c. At these, as also
in all the temples, sacrifices and offerings, consist-
ing of various animals, fish, fowls, fruits,sweetmeats,
cakes, and wines are frequently presented, both by
officers of government and private citizens. There
are also in these temples, and at these altars, nu-
merous attendants whose whole lives are devoted
to the service of the idols. On the birthday of the
gods, and at other times, processions are fitted out
at the different temples; and the images are borne
in state, through all the principal streets of the city,
attended by bands of musicians; by priests; lads on


262 Description of the --- OcT.
p
horseback ; lasses riding in open sedans; old men
and boys bearing lanterns, incense-pots, flags, and
other insignia; and by lictors with rattans, and sol-
diers with wooden swords. In addition to all these,
the different streets and trades, have their religious
festivals, which they celebrate with illumination, bon-
fires, songs, and theatrical exhibitions. A great deal
of extravagance is displayed on these occasions—
each street and company striving to excel all their
neighbors. The private and domestic altars, shrines
crowded with household gods, and daily offerings
of gilt paper, candles, incense, &c., together with
numberless ceremonies occasioned by nuptials or the
burial of the dead, complete the long catalogue of
religious rites and institutions which are supported
by the people of Canton.
And why, all this array of men and means? To
what useful end is it devoted 1 Does it adorn the
city ? Does it enrich its inhabitants Clothe the
naked 1 Feed the hungry Instruct the ignorant?
Reclaim the vicious ! Heal the sick? Does it, in
short bring any consolation, or any real support to
the poor and the afflicted 1 The whole number of
priests and nuns, (there is said to be a thousand of
the latter,) is probably not less than 3000; and the
annual expense of the 124 temples, can be put down,
on a moderate estimate, at $250,000. An equal
sum is required to support the annual, monthly, and
semi-monthly festivals, and daily rites, which are ob-
served by the people in honor of their gods. But
it is not the mere outlay, nor even the sinking of
half a million annually, that makes the full amount
of the evil; it is incalculable; like consumption in the
human frame, it preys on the vitals, and destroys
with a slow but steady step the whole system. Bud-
hism and Taouism, with the religious doctrines of the
Sage, acting conjointly for a period of more than
1700 years, have had full opportunity to exhibit their
legitimate results; this they have done; and those


1833. city of Canton. 263
results are too numerous and too palpable to be
misunderstood. We know, and blessed be God for
the assurance, that “in every nation he that feareth
Him and worketh righteousness, is accepted with
him;” but we challenge the abettors of idolatry to
point out to us even so much as one solitary in-
stance, where the direct results of these three reli-
gious creeds have been in the least degree salutary.
We have already alluded to the only two pagodas
in this city, viz. the Hwa tä or “Adorned pagoda,'
so called in contradistinction form the Kwang tá, or
“Unadorned pagoda.’ They both stand near the
west gate of the old city; and when approaching
Canton from the east, they are the first objects that
arrest the attention of the traveler. The geoman-
cers say, the whole city is like a great junk; the
two pagodas are her masts, the five story house
(which rises on the hill close by the northern wall,)
her stern-sheets . The Huda ti was built more than
thirteen hundred years ago; it has nine stories, is
octagonal, and 170 feet in height. The Kwang tº
was built in lhe time of the Tang dynasty, which
closed A. D. 906. It is broad at the base, and slender
towards the top. Its height is 160 feet. Anciently
it was surmounted by “a golden cock, which turn-
ed every way, with the wind;” but that was broken
down and carried off to the Capital, and its place
afterwards supplied by a wooden one, which long
since disappeared.
The account of the charitable institutions of Can-
ton is brief. They are few in number, small in
extent, and of recent origin.
1. Yuh-ying-tang, or “the Foundling hospital.”
This institution was founded in 1698, and it was re-
built and considerably enlarged in 1732. It stands
without the walls of the city, on the east; it has
accommodations for two or three hundred children.
and is maintained at an annual expense of two
thousand five hundred and twenty-two tacls.


364 city of Canton. OCT.
2- Yang-tse-yuen —this is a retreat for poor,
aged and infirm, or blind people, who have no friends
to support them. It stands near the Foundling hos-
pital, and like it enjoys imperial patronage—receiv-
ing annually 5100 taels. Both this sum, and that
for the Yuh-ying tang, are received, in part, or wholly,
from duties paid by those foreign ships which bring
rice to Canton. Every such ship must pay the sum
of 620 taels, which, by imperial order, is appropriated
to these two hospitals. The number of “rice ships”
last year was 28, yielding the sum of 17,360 taels.
What became of the surplus, 9738 taels, does not
appear from any statements, which we have obtained.
3. Ma-fung-yuen, or ‘the hospital for lepers.”
This is also on the east of the city; the number of
patients in it is 341, who are supported at an ex-
pense of 300 taels per annum ! -
Some centuries ago a public dispensary was set
up, in order to furnish the indigent sick with medi-
cines; but for a long time the establishment has
been clossed.—Small plots of ground, situated on
the east and north of the city, have been appropriat-
ed as burying places for those who die friendless
and moneyless. There are, we believe, no tombs
or places of interment within the walls of Canton.
But the hills beyond, and in every direction round
the city, are covered with monuments and hillocks
which mark the places of the sleeping dead; thither
the lifeless bodies of the poor are carried out and
buried, usually, we believe, at the public charge.—All
the above named appropriations are under the care
of government, and are meted out with a sparing
hand. The condition of the three hospitals, if such
they may be called, is wretched in the extreme. The
foundlings, are often those infants which have been
exposed; and who when grown up are often sold,
and not unfrequently for the worst of purposes. Such
is a specimen of the benevolent institutions of the
celestial empire.
To be continued.


1633. Systems of Budha and Confucius. 265
MISC E L L A NIE S.
...! . -
The systems of Budha and Confucius compared —The following curious
paper, which we extract from the Indo-Chinese Gleaner, was composed by
a minister of state and addressed to the emperor Ching-tih, whose reign closed
in 1520. This monarch was much attached to the religion of Budha, and
contemplated sending an embassador, with expensive presents, to some of the
nations of India, in order to bring a few of the most learned Budhists into
China, that they might explain to him more fully the tenets of that sect.
The object of this paper was to dissuade the monarch from his purpose, and
to induce him to follow the doctrines of Confucius. But the paper was never
presented to his majesty.—It exhibits a tolerably fair specimen of Chinese
logic, and also of that apathy, in regard to the destinies of the immortal
spirit, which is so common among the learned disciples of Confucius.-The
minister Wang Yangming, addressing his sovereign, says ;-
I have heard it everywhere reported, that your imperial
Majesty intends to dispatch an embassador to a foreign nation,
for the purpose of bringing from thence more teachers of the
sect of Budha; and that the counsels of your ministers which
have been abundantly poured in, begging your majesty to lay
aside this scheme, have been all rejected. When I first heard the
report, I gave no credit to it, but after ascertaining that matters
were really so, I felt highly gratified, as I perceived therein,
the clear opening of your majesty's immaculate wisdom, and
the rising bud of virtue and goodness. The counsels of your
ministers, without doubt, arose from their great fidelity, and
extreme affection to your imperial person; yet they were not
able to perceive, that your majesty's views were founded in a wish
to do good, and to practice immaculate virtue, a wish which
they ought most certainly to have gratified, and by the streams
have gone up to the source. But, as they merely stickled for
the modes of expression common among the learned of the day,
their eager strife to hinder your purpose was fruitless; and it
was proper for your majesty to reject their counsels, and throw
them aside unexamined. My sentiments on the subject are
different from theirs; still, however, I fear that your majesty's
attachment to Budha may, perhaps, not yet have gone to its high-
est pitch. If your imperial affection to Budha does indeed go
as far as it ought, then you will not merely love the name, but
also the reality—not only love the end, but also attentively seek
the beginning; thus you may attain the immaculate excellence
cven of Yaou and Shun. The abundance of the three ages
[the celebrated dynasties of Hea, Shang, and Chow,) will re.
turn. How fortunate for the Empire' Ilow felicitous to your im.
perial ancestors'
2 J


266 “The systems of Budha Oct.
I beg your imperial permission to explain to your majesty, the
nature of a genuine attachment to Budha. Your bright genius
and sacred wisdom, even during the time of your majesty's mi-
nority, extensively sowed the seeds of virtue through all the space
within the four seas. But, since your accession to the throne, hav-
ing had many unfortunate occurrences to regulate, there has been
no leisure for your. majesty to investigate the doctrines of the
five emperors, (Fuh-he, Shinnung, Hwang-te, Yaou, and Shun,)
and the three kings (the first sovereigns of the three dynasties,
Heñ, Shang, and Chow,) those divine and spotless sages. Although
at stated national feasts your learned ministers have presented
addresses, they were mere declamations on the transactions of
former times, explaining things according to the letter only. How
could these addresses, produced by the spur of the occasion, give
an adequate view of the matter. On hearing them, your ma-
jesty may have thought-4 if the doctrines of the sages be only
such as these, what marvelous pleasure can be found therein 7"
Hence your majesty's abilities, being diverted and turned to horse-
manship and archery; the eye and mind being suffered to rove
in pursuit of pleasure; and not finding elsewhere fit scope for
the exercise of clear intelligence and powerful talents, your at-
tention at length fixed on these. But how can it be for a mo-
ment supposed, that your majesty's clear intellect did not per-
ceive that to rest in these, was both unprofitable and injurious!
Wearied by such toilsome pursuits, clear and collected thoughts
as the rise of the morning, assuredly have produced a growing
distaste for them, and daily regret for having wasted so much
time therein. But, having none before or behind, on the right
or left, capable of setting forth in a clear light to your majesty,
the doctrines of the divine and immaculate ones; hence your
thoughts settled on the religion of Budha—that sect which rose
up in the distant countries of the west; supposing that its doc-
trines were capable of inducing men to cleanse the heart, to
exterminate the passions, and to seek to preserve themselves from
alternate and never ending lives and deaths; so that they can
produce in them, feelings of compassion, and general benevolence,
which would lead them to seek to renovate the whole flock of
living mortals, to help them out of their multifarious troubles;
and thus lift them up on high to the land of pleasures. Your
majesty reflecting, that the present calamity of the empire every
day increases; that thieves and handitti are grown furious, like
the devouring flame ; that the riches and strength of the country
are exhausted ; that the misery of the people is already extreme,
—thought, “if I can, by devoting myself to the study of the
doctrines of Budha, save them out of these calamities, I shall not
only nourish the animal spirits and preserve life; not only obtain
happiness for myself as an individual; but also shall be able
by these, to render the myriads of wretched people in the em.
pire, prosperous and happy. Hence, your majesty has sent down
an order, to issue out presents, and to scnd forth an embassador


1833, and Confucius compared. 267
to a distant nation in the west, with the view of obtaining a
fresh accession of well-instructed priests of Budha, not...fearing
the distance of many thousand miles, not regarding the ex-
pense of many thousand pieces of gold, not sparing to risk, the
lives of several thousand people, and not deterred, by the lapse
of several years, provided, that so benevolent an object, could
finally be accomplished. - For your majesty's wish was, to cleanse
away, at once, all errors of ancient customs, and bring back the
nation to clear and exalted virtue. f : i , . . . . . . . . . .
I beg your majesty to try, my words, comparing them with
yous, own thoughts. Were not your majesty's thoughts, as I
have represented them 4 . Assuredly then, the expressions—“the
clear opening of immaculate wisdom, and the rising bud of
virtue,” which I have above used, are not mere unmeaning
epithets, employed for the purpose of adulation. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. If your majesty be really attached to Budha, permit me to
beg, that you will not love the name merely, but also attend to
the reality; not fix on the end merely, but also search out the
beginning. . If your majesty truly desire to obtain the , reality,
and to search for the beginning, then I beseech you, seek them
not from Budha, but from the holy sages; not among strangers,
but in our own country. These are not mere words of course,
employed to deceive your imperial majesty; in proof that they
are not, I beg leave to give your majesty a view of both sides
of the subject. * . , , , , . . “ — . . . . -
. Now Budha is the sacred sage of foreigners. Our sacred sages
are the Budha of China. Among foreigners, it is highly proper to
use, the religion of Budha, in order to renovate - and lead on
the ignorant and obstinate. But in our Middle Nation, the
doctrines of the sacred sages ought, most undoubtedly to be
embraced, in order that, we may unite with heaten and earth,
in the work of producing and nourishing all things; even as those
who travel by land, use carriages and horses; and those who
travel by sea, ships and boats. Now for us who live, in China,
to honor Budha as our teacher, is just, like a man, employ-
ing a carriage, and horses to cross the sea..., , Had, he even
Tsaou-foo for his coachman, and Wang-leang to support him
on the right hand, the chances are, that he would not only not
make a speedy, passage, but also have the misfortune, to be
drowned , Still, horses, and carriages are vehicles excellently
adapted for conveying men to a distance, but here, being used
out of their proper place, there would not be a fair opportunity
for displaying their qualities and uses to advantage. . . . .
Should your, majesty say, that though the doctrines, of Budha
are, incapable, of directing the government of the empire, yet
perhaps they may assist men in escaping the metempsychosis.;
that though, they cannot be used to co-operate with the powers
above, in the production and nourishment of all things; yet,
they may at times, be useful in leading on the flock of ignor-
ant and stupid plebeians;–well, even admitting these two things


1833, and Confucius compared. 269
By their sterling virtue, spontaneously and without speaking,
they were believed ; without moving, a renovation was effected;
without acting, the age was perfected. Their virtue equaled that
of the gods; their comprehensive knowledge vied with the bright.
ness of the sun and moon; the regularity of their proceedings was
like the successive and unerring return of the four seasons; their
manner of dispensing good or evil to men, was just and equitable,
like that of the AEons. Thus their god-like deeds are without
comparison. How far are they above the ordinary methods of
human acting! In this also, our sacred sages were vastly superior
to Shih-kei. - - -
As to the transformations, said to be effected by incantations, the
legendary miracles, and the fabrication of monsters, all which are
employed to delude the stupid, benighted, plebeian herd,—these
indeed are what the enlightened of the sect of Budha really abhor
and wish to exterminate; calling them, “devilish productions of
alien religions, which are quite the reverse of the true principles
of the sect.” Now if a man ought not to accord even with that of
which the sect approves, how much less with that which it abhors,
and wishes to exterminate
If your majesty reasons that because Yaou and Shun are long
since dead, therefore it is proper to go in search of the true way
from the other party, then I beg leave to remind your majesty,
that Shih-kei is long since dead. If your majesty says, “In the
other party, there are of the disciples of Budha, those who are
capable of explaining his doctrines;” then I beg to ask; are
there none in all our nation—a nation situated in the middle
of the earth, able to explain the doctrines of our divine sages 1
But your majesty has not yet sought for such men. Let your
majesty but inquire, whether there be not some amongst your
noble statesmen and ministers, possessed of talents which ren-
der them adequate to explain the doctrines of Yaou and Shun ;
and, on finding them out, daily inquire of, and discourse with,
them : doubtless they will set forth the doctrines of the divine
and spotless ones, in so luminous and convincing a manner, as
that your imperial majesty will speedily and without fail arrive at
the pure excellence of Yaou and Shun. Therefore, supposing
that your majesty's extreme affection to the sect of Budha,
springs from a genuine wish to discover the good way, I have
ventured to intreat your majesty, not to love the name merely;
but also, to seek diligently the reality : not to regard the end
only, but assiduously to search for the beginning, also; and
that if your majesty truly desire to seek the reality and beginning,
not to seek them from Budha, but from the spotless' sages; not
from foreigners, but in our country. These I beg to assure your
majesty, are not unmeaning words of vain adulation, employed to
deceive your majesty. . . . . . tº ‘’’ • : . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
; Could your majesty be persuaded to love our sacred sages, with
the same ardor with which you kove Budha,-to seek the doc-
trines of Yaou and Shun, with the same earnestness with which


270 Ophthalmic Hospital. at Macao. oct.
you seek these of Shih-kea; then there will be no necessity to send
over many thousand miles of sea, to the happy land of the West :
you will find it, (the object of your research,) near even before the
eye | There will be no need to spend many thousand pieces of
money, to risk the lives of many thousand persons, and to wait for
several years, before the object be gained:—no, , without even so
much as moving a single particle of dust, and with instantaneous
ease, like a snap of the fingers, you will reach the sacred spot ;
marvelous and god-like power, will in a moment effect what.
soever your imperial wishes require. * . . . . . . " . . . . . . . . . . . . .
These are not high swelling assertions, made for the purpose
of imposing on your majesty. Should your majesty inquire into
the foundation of my assertions, they will all be found capable of
proof. I adduce the testimony of Kung-tsze, (Confucius,) who
says; “The very moment that I desire to be virtuous, the attain.
ment is made;” and,-" but for one day resist corrupt propen.
sities, and revert to the proper use of reason, and the whole em.
pire will return to virtue;” also the testimony of Māug-ko
(Mencius,) who says;– “ All men may attain a degree of virtue
equal to that of Yaou and Shun.” Can it then be supposed, that
these sacred ones wished to deceive us! I beg your: majesty to
reflect again and again on this matter. Try, by asking your noble
ministers; and if, on examination, it be found that I have spoken
falsely, I desire to suffer the death appointed by law for those who
commit this crine. . . - - * . . . . . . . . . .
1 am ignorant, and fear I cannot escape your majesty's dis-
pleasure. Humbly preceiving in your majesty's mind, the bud
of imperial virtue, I instantly leaped for joy, and hastened to
prepare and present this address, the intention of which is to
follow out and strengthen your majesty's purpose; hoping your
majesty will condescendingly examine and adopt its suggestions.
Then, how happy for your imperial ancestors, and the district
gods' How happy for the empire! how happy for myriads of
succeeding ages! • * : . . . * * * * * * *
* * * * *
* * ... ." tº. * : ... . . . ºn 1 " . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . ----- , , , , , ; ; ; “ . . . . .” . . . . w
. . . . . o PHTH A LM I C Ho S P ITA L A T M A C Ao. . . . . .
*: - * * * * * * * * * . - º * * * : * ~ * • . . i : *
z-
tº - * * * *:: *, * * , ; it -- - . . . ; ; ; ; ,
Several months ago, (vol. I., p. 334,) we alluded to the existence
of this instisution, and expressed a hope that we might erelong
lay before our readers some account of its operations; but at that
time we were not aware of its extensive usefulness, nor of the con-
fidence in the skill of its founder, which its success has secured
among the native inhabitants. The Chinese need oeular demon-
stration of the'intelligence, practical skill, and kind feelings of those
who come to their shores from far. . 'They have had proof enough
of their enterprise and bold daring ; and not a little too of their


1833. Ophthalmic Hospital at Macao. 271
shrewdness and foresight; but very rarely have they had opportuni-
ty to witness deeds of charity and acts of benevolence. Were the
records that are on high, let down before our eyes, what dark
scenes would they disclose ! Many of the adventurers, who first
penetrated to this farther East, two centuries ago, were as reckless
and cruel as they were bold and intrepid. An honorable com-
merce, and the exercise of Christian charity, would never, we
apprehend, have closed against foreigners the northern ports of
China, or those of Japan. We allude to these things as the
scenes of other times, and with the most confident expectation
that they are not to be reacted. In this opinion we are confirm-
ed by facts, some of which are already on record, and by the
existence of such institutions as that which we now have the
pleasure of noticing. - :
We would remark here, that it was in answer to our own
earnest solicitation that the following documents were put into our
hands. We made the request for them in the full belief that the
publication of such facts will do good, by inciting others to go
and “do-likewise.” We query whether the modern teachers of
Christianity, who have gone forth to the desolate places of the
earth, have not overlooked too much the bodily infirmities of those
whom they would benefit. The conduct, as well as the precept
of our divine Lord is very full on this point; he not only taught
from place to place, but “he went ubout doing good;” he not
only healed the sick and cured the lame, but “unfo many that
were blind he gave sight;"—numerous instances are specified in
the brief memoirs which we have of his public ministry. There
is a luxury in doing good; there is an unspeakable pleasure in reliev-
ing our fellow-men who are in poverty and distress.—The founder
of the Ophthalmic Hospital has commenced a noble work; and
while we thank him for kindly furnishing us with the papers which
we subjoin, we congratulate him on account of the success which
has crowned his benevolent efforts.-The paper which we here
introduce will explain the origin and object of the Hospital. It
was written about a year ago, and in consequence of a benefac.
tion, which was at once most commendable on the part of the
donors, and compatible with the design of the institution in behalf
of which it was granted. The paper is as follows:—
“Having, during the last three years, received from Mr. Vachell,
chaplain to the British Factory in China, the amount of offerings
at the communion table, it seems somewhat incumbent on me
to state the origin and nature of the Institution to which this
money has been applied; and the claim it has on the goodwill
and assistance of all persons anxious to alleviate the pressure of
bodily infirmity, to which we are liable, more especially in a coun.
try possessing few, if any, of those Charitable Institutions which
grate so much our own more civilized and Christian land.
“In the year 1827, on joining the E. I. Company's establish.
ment, I determinca to devote a large portion of my time, and such


272 Ophthalmic Hospital at Macao. OCT.
medical skill as education and much attention to the duties of my
profession had made my own, to the cure of so many poor Chi-
nese sufferers of Macao and its vicinity as came in my way. : My
intention was to receive patients laboring under every species of
sickness, but principally those afflicted with “diseases of the
eyes,” diseases most distressing to the laboring classes, amongst
whom they are very, prevalent; and from which the utter in-
capacity of native practitioners denies to them all other hope of
relief. - - - * - - . * .
“During that year my own funds supplied the necersary out.
lay. Throughout l have received little or no professional as-
sistance. In 1828, many friends. who had witnessed the success
of my exertions in the preceding year, and had become aware of
the expenses I had incurred, came forward to aid in the sup-
port of a more regular infirmary, which I proposed to estab-
lish, and put me in possession of means to provide for the main-
tenance of such patients as I found it necessary to keep for
some time under my care; but who, depending for their liveli-
hood on daily labor, could not otherwise have reaped the bene-
fits held out to them. - - - -
“Thus the hospital grew up upon my hands. Confidence
was established amongst a people who had been accustomed
to consider foreigners as barbarians, incapable of virtuous, almost
of human feelings; and the number of my inmates was regu-
lated only by the limits of my accommodations. Two small
houses have been rented at Macao, capable of receiving about
forty patients: there are many more of the nature of out-patients,
such only being housed, as coming from a distance, have no
friends with whom they can reside. - -
“The best proof which can be offered of the entire confi-
dence of the people, and benefits which have been conferred
on them, is that, since the commencement of this undertaking;
on a small scale in 1827, to the present time, about 4000 in-
digent Chinese have been relieved from impending blindness,
resumed their usual occupations; and have supported, in lieu of
remaining a burthen on, their families. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“The more opulent and respectable classes of Chinese have in
the last three years added their names to the list of subscribers;
and have by giving the hospital the sanction of their support, much
enlarged the circle of its usefulness. The E. I. Company has writ-
ten of it in terms of approbation, and when applied to, liberally
supplied it with medicines. * : , , , . " • ? -
“Independently of the practical benefits conferred on suffering
humanity, it is most desirable, that the enlightened nation to which
I, belong should be known in this country, as possessing other
characteristics than those attaching to us solely as merchants and
adventurers. As charitably anxious to relieve the “distresses of
our fellow-creatures, we may be remembered when the record of
our other connections with China has passed away. -
•: . . . . . . . . . * *
* * *


1833. Ophthalmic Hospital at Macao. 273
“In the above statement nothing is farther from my wish than
to bring forward, and dwell with complacency on my own ex-
ertions and success. No more, I trust, has been said than was
necessary to exhibit the nature and origin of the Hospital which
I have established, and its claim to the aid which I thankfully
acknowledge. T. R. C.”
Macao, China, Oct. 1832.
Most desirable it is, we would loudly reiterate, that enlightened
Britain, and the no less aspiring nation, which glories in the
relationship of having the same blood and the same speech with
Britain, should be known in this country as possessing other cha-
racteristics than those attaching to us solely as merchants and ad-
venturers. In commerce there may be rival interests; but not so
in the works of that charity which seeketh not her own. Every
one who has witnessed the success of the infirmary at Macao,
will concur, we think, in the following testimony; will give the
enterprise his approbation; and endeavor, so far as there may
be opportunity, to enlarge and extend its operations.—We are
allowed to quote the following letter with the signature.
“I have this day visited Mr. Colledge's Ophthalmic Infirmary,
and having witnessed the origin of the undertaking, I am happy
to bear testimony to the complete success which has attended
the zealous exertions of this gentleman in behalf of the suffering
poor in China.
“The number of native patients amounting to about four thou-
sand, who during the last five years have sought aid from this in-
stitution, and among whom many have been restored to sight
and others relieved from almost hopeless blindness, is an honorable
proof of the professional skill of its founder, and of the confi.
dence which he has inspired into all classes of the Chinese. To
Mr. Colledge therefore belongs the merit of having established, by
aid of voluntary donation, the first institution in this country for
the relief of the indigent natives.
“I cannot close these observations without alluding to the hon-
orable testimony that has been at various times recorded of Mr.
Colledge's professional skill and abilities by the Select Committee,
in their dispatches to the Honorable the Court of Directors of
the East India Company—both at the period when he was first se-
lected to fill the situation of surgeon to their establishment in Chi-
na, and also subsequently, when the great benefit derived by the
Chinese suffering poor from this gentleman's professional talent
and benevolent disposition, has been officially brought to their
notice. As an individual who has witnessed the beneficial effects
of Mr. Colledge's medical ability, I feel the greatest gratification
in thus bearing testimony to his merits, both as a surgeon and a
philanthropist.
(Signed) W. H. C. Plowden,”
Chief for all affairs of the
Macao, 26th September, 1832. British Nation in China.
2 K


274 Ophthalmic Hospital at Macao. OCT.
With the preceding papers, we received several others, in Chi-
nese, which were presented to Mr. Colledge by individuals who
after being restored to sight, were about to leave the hospital. Of
these we have selected two, which, while they serve as specimens
of the whole, will show in a very clear light, the feelings with
which natives regard the new institution.—We have found it
necessary, in order to illustrate these papers, to add several notes.
The writer of the first thus expresses his thanks:—
“Your disciple, Tan Sheling of the district of Haeping in
Shaouking foo, deeply sensible of your favor and about to return
home, bows and takes leave. -
“It seems to me that of all men in the world, they are the most
happy who have all their senses (a) perfect, and they the most
unfortunate who have both eyes blind. What infelicitous fate it
was that caused such a calamity to befall me, alas, I know not.
But fortunately, Sir, I heard that you, a most excellent physician,
having arrived in the province of Canton and taken up your resi.
dence in Macao, compassionated those who have diseased eyes,
gave them medicines, and expended your property for their sup.
port; and that by the exertion of your great abilities, with a hand
skillful as that of Sun or Hwa, (b) you drew together hundreds
of those who were dim-sighted, furnished them with houses, took
care of them, and supplied them with daily provisions. While
thus extending wide your benevolence, your fame spread over the
four seas. I heard thereof and came, and was happily taken
under your care; and not many months passed, ere my eyes be-
came bright as the moon and stars when the clouds are rolled
away. All this because your great nation, cultivating virtue
and practicing benevolence, extends its favors to the children of
neighboring countries.
“Now completely cured and about to return home, I know not
when I shall be able to requite your favors and kindness. But,
Sir, it is the desire of my heart, that you may enjoy nobility and
emoluments of office, with honors and glory; happiness and feli-
city that shall daily increase ; riches that shall multiply and flou-
rish like the shoots of the bamboo (c) in spring time; and like
that shall be prolonged to ten thousand years. Deeply sensible
of your acts of kindness, I have written a few rustic lines, which
I present to you with profound respect.
“ England's kind-hearted prince and minister (d)
Have shed their favors on the sons of Han :-
Like one divine, disordered eyes you heal,
Kindness so great, I never can forget.
* Heaven caused me to find the good physician,
Who, with unearthly skill, to cure my eyes,
Cut off the film, and the green lymph removed :—
Such, Sir, were rarely found in ancient times.


1833. Ophthalmic Hospital at Macao, 275
“Honorable Sir, thou great arm of the nation, (e) condescend to
look upon your disciple,
TAN SHE LING,
Who bows his head a hundred times, and pays you his respects.”
The writer of the second paper is much more brief than the
first, and also more sententious. He says:-
“This I address to the English physician : condescend, Sir, to
look upon it.
“ Diseased in my eyes, I had almost lost my sight, when
happily, Sir, I met with you;-you gave me medicine; you
applied the knife; and, as when the clouds, are swept away.
now again I behold the azure heavens. My joy knows no
bounds. As a faint token of my feelings, I have composed a
stanza in pentameter, which, with a few trºng presents, I beg
you will be pleased to accept. Then happy, happy shall I be
Tse jin pečn puh—gae kin yin,
Ho human leſing e—ke tsze Tsin;
Ling yd tun lite—pin chun hang;
Shin chin tsze keu—e hu'uy chun.
Jö fei Tung-tsze—sang tsze she.
Sing she Soo-keun—hečn tsze shin.
Fung she yang fan—kwei kitā how,
Kow pei chang lih—shwuy che pin.
-
He lavishes his blessings.-but he seeks for no return;
Such medicine, such physician-since Tsin were never known:
The medicine—how many kinds most excellent has he ,
The surgeon's knife—it pierced the eye, and spring once more I see.
If Tung has not been born again, to bless the present age,
Then sure, 'tis Soo (f) reanimate, again upon the stage :
Whenever called away from far, to see your native land,
A living monument I'll wait, upon the ocean's strand."
*
-
(a). The body, say the Chinese physiognomists, has five senses; among
which the eyebrows hold the first rank, and are considered as directors,'
which secure longevity; the eyes have the second rank, and are called the
“examining officers; the ears hold the third, and are called ‘distinguishers
of sounds; the nose is the fourth in order, and holds, the office of judge
and-discriminator' of things; and the mouth is the fifth, and is called the
issuing and receiving officer.’—In the San-tsae Too Hu uz, a kind of ency.
clopaedia, there is a plate representing the five senses, woo-kwan; “the word
kwan means, to rule, to control, to direct: or the ruler, the controller, the di.
rector; thus the eye directs the seeing; the ear directs the hearing; and so forth:
(b) Sun and Huda were eminent physicians who lived in the third cen.
tury; to the latter was attributed great skill in the use of the surgeon's knife.
He is said to have laid bare and scraped the bone of the arm of Kwan foo-
tsze, now a deified hero, and thus saved him from the effects of a poisoned
arrow which had entered his arm. He likewise removed the eyeball of a king's
child, cut away the diseased part, and replaced the eye-ball ! Hwa now holds
a place among the gods of his country. - - -
(c). The Chinese are exceediugly fond of borrowing figures and illustra.
tions from the bamboo. That apecies to which the allusion is here made, springs...


276 Canton Dispensary. OCT.
up from the root of the old plant, and grows with amazing exuberance; to
a native, the expression has force and beauty which are utterly lost in the
translation.
(b) In a large medicel work, compiled by the imperial college of phy.
sicians at Peking, and published about ninety years ago, it is said that the
sincere, diligent, and benevolent practitioner, who toils for the health of his
neighbors and fellow-countrymen, holds a place equal in importance to that
of the virtuous ministers of a powerful monarch, who is a blessing to the en-
pire. “Prince" refers to the king, and “minister” to the person addressed,
the two being thus associated in the mind of the writer.
(e) Kwo-show, “the nation's arm,” is an appellation frequently given by
the Chinese to their most eminent medical practitioners ;-meaning that
by their “benevolent art," as they call the healing art, they can rescue their
fellow mortals from death. -
(f) Tung and Soo were, like Sun and Hwa celebrated physicians of
ancient times; and their names are introduced for rhetorical—we should say—
poetical embellishinent.
C ANT ON D IS PEN S A R Y .
Hitherto we have not spoken of this establishment, but should
do wrong at this time to pass it by in silence. In 1828, the next
year after the Ophthalmic Hospital was established, the medical
gentlemen of Canton, following up the example set them at Macao,
opened a Dispensary here, and made it accessible to poor natives
of every description. From that to the present time, great num-
bers have repaired to it, and medical aid has been administered to
them gratuitously. At an early hour in the morning, one may
daily witness the sick, the blind, and the lame—of all ages and
both sexes, crowding around the doors of the Dispensary. We
have seen helpless children brought there in the arms of their
nurses, or more commonly lashed, according to the custom of the
country, upon the back of a young servant. We have seen old.
blind, decrepit men, “ with staff in hand,” led thither by their lit-
tle grand-children; while others, who were in better circumstances,
were brought in their sedans.
No native patients, we believe, have ever been lodged in the
rooms connected with the Dispensary. This has, doubtless, in
some degree diminished their number, and prevented the advan-
tage that might otherwise have been received;—but the evil, under
existing circumstances, could not possibly be avoided. Neverthe-
less, the number of those who have come for aid has been very
great, and the cures not a few. One instance we will here notice.
It was the case of a middle-aged man from one of the northern
provinces. He was afflicted with the rheumatism; which, increas.
ed by his intemperance, chiefly in drinking, had nearly deprived
him of the use of his feet. The disease had finally settled in one
of his knees, and threatened the destruction of the limb, if not of
life. After applying to native physicians a long time in vain,
he despaired of recovery, “when fortunately, being in Canton he
heard of the skill of the barbarians.” Readily he listened to their
advice, and followed their prescriptions; but was reluctant to dis-


1833. Disposition of the Chinese. 277
continue the use of strong drink. He had been several weeks
under the physician's care when we saw him, and had then thrown
aside his crutches and promised to abandon his cups. We have
not seen him since, but understand that he kept his promise, and
in a few weeks was completely restorer.
Among the applicants for aid, there have been several with dis-
located limbs; these, as well as those with diseased eyes, have
usually found speedy relief;-which they never could have obtain-
ed from native practitioners. There have been cases still more
difficult and dangerous; two of which we will notice. The first
was a young man, a tailor by trade. He had fallen into bad
company, and became enamored of a wretched being, whose
charms his father most peremptorily and justly forbade him to
enjoy. This was more than his passions could brook; and in
a fit of vexation and rage, he swallowed a drachm's weight of the
strongest opium which he could procure. As soon as this was
discovered by his friends, aid was sought from the gentlemen at
the Dispensary; and by the immediate application of the stomach
pump, they succeeded in extracting the poison so completely, that
in a few hours he enjoyed again his usual health.-The second case
was a gambler. Having staked and lost all his property, he re-
solved to end his days; and in order to effect this purpose, swallow-
ed a quantity of soft opium which had been prepared for smoking.
Assistance was solicited and obtained—but too late; the poison
had done its work, and the man died.
We might easily extend this notice; but we have said enougi,
for our purpose—enough to show the beneficial results of the Dis.
pensary, and to refute the opinion that natives dare not trust
themselves in the hands of foreign practitioners, and the equally
erroneous idea that, if the patient dies, the benefactor who was
rendering him every aid in his power, shall be held responsi.
ble for his life. What we have now entered on record con-
eerning the Ophthalmic Hospital at Macao, and the Dispensary
in Canton, together with what we shall add on a subsequent
page respecting the distribution of medicines among the inhab-
itants along the coast of China, will both warrant and encour.
age a continuation and extension of these benevolent exertions,
and at the same time excite others to follow examples so
worthy of imitation.
Disposition of the Chinese towards Foreigners.—While the
journals of Mr. Gutzlaff, published in the pages of the Repository,
have corroborated the accounts concerning the moral degradation
of the Chinese, they have contradicted the very prevalent opinion,
that the people, as well as the rulers of this nation, are generally
hostile to foreigners. From private letters, we are allowed to make
a few extracts which will give additional weight to the evidence
already advanced on this point, and show still more clearly, that,
where kindness and goodwill are exhibited towards the Chinese


278 Disposition of the Chinese. Oct.
like feelings may sometimes be shown in return. The gentleman,
whose testimony we are about to cite, was on the coast of China
during the last summer. In reference to what he there witnessed,
repeatedly, when on shore, he remarks:–
“In our excursions we invariably found the people civil and
obliging; but for the most part miserably poor and wretched; and
what was still worse, dreadfully diseased. The books, which Mr.
Gutzlaff used to take with him for distribution, were always receiv-
ed with avidity; in fact, so anxious were the people to obtain them,
that sometimes they almost took them by force from him. It
was however more pleasing to witness these struggles, than to have
found them indifferent. We used also, generally, to take some
medicines with us; and it was a source of astonisament to me to
see how confidently they followed Mr. Gutzlaff’s directions, and in
many instances even suffered themselves to be operated upon by
him. I never should have expected that these beings of a superior
order would have submitted themselves to the skill of a barbarian.
But it is not, I think, so much to the people as to the government,
that we should attribute the disdain and contempt in which fo.
reigners are held; and perhaps when the latter become more
liberal and enlightened, the former will change their opinions, and
not only discover that they are not the only civilized beings on
‘earth, but likewise find that they themselves, so far from being the -
- - w-r **
"...ºhiºiº.
Some TTER of the strength and bravery of the Chinese naval
forces, which now line their coast, may be gathered from the fol.
lowing quotation. The writer, after, describing their own anchcr.
age, in a fine bay, well sheltered on every quarter, says:
“We were a little annoyed in the morning by finding seven
mandarin boats at anchor close ahead of us; and as they no doubt
had come for the purpose of throwing obstacles in the way of our
communication with the shore, we went on board and gave them to
understand, that not being particularly anxious for their acquaint-
ance, we should feel much obliged by their going away; at the
same time hinting, in the case of our request not being complied
with, they mi - er t : but in this instance
we could not complain, for they immediately got under weigh, and
took themselves off.”
The desire manifested among the Chinese to procure books was
very great. It was, no doubt, matter of suprise to the proud and
self-conceited natives, that foreigners should come among them
to distribute gratuitously religious, literary, or scientific works,
written in their own language; but it is not less extraordinary that
such a people as the %. should seek so eagerly to obtain
books from the hands of strangers. The following extracts will
show with what an insatiable desire the natives uniformly rushed
forward to procure copies of the books. -
“On our arrival at a village, we were immediately surrounded
by men, women, and children; the latter of whom were by far the
most numerous, and appeared particularly anxious to obtain their


1833. towards foreigners. 279
share of the books we had brought on shore with us. ***** We
then struck across an extensive plain tolerably well cultivated; and
about a mile and a half distant from the first, we came to a second
village. Here as at the former, we were immediately surrounded
by the inhabitants, to whom we distributed both books and medi.
cines. *** The third village we visited was mučh larger than either
of the preceding, but equally miserable, both in regard to its
houses and its inhabitants. The people pressed round us in all
directions, in hopes of obtaining some books ; but as the small
quantity we had remaining precluded the idea of their all getting
some, they made a rush upon us, apparently with the intention of
obtaining them vi et armis. This, however, I must say was all
done in good humor.” Again, the writer remarks in reference to
another occasion, and while they were at a different place; “We
went on shore in the afternoon, taking with us a trunk full of books
and a few medicines. We visited several villages, in all of which
the inhabitants showed the greatest anxiety to obtain some of our
publications.” The people were civil and hospitable, inviting us
into their houses, bringing us water to drink, &c. The only thing
we could complain of was, their eagerness to get possession of the
books: however, this was more a source of pleasure than pain to
us, since it showed that they set some value upon them.” Again :
“On another occasion we went on shore upon an island. We
were induced to go in consequence of having noticed with our
glasses, a tolerably large town on one side of it. We took as usual
a chest full of books, and a small box of medicines. Immediately
on our landing we were surrounded by upwards of three hundred
persons, as I suppose; and as soon as we opened a bag contain-
ing some books, they instantly made a rush to get possession of
them, and, I am sorry to say, in their eagerness tore many of them
in pieces. Previous to opening the chest, therefore, we took the
precaution of finding a berth, where we were in some measure
protected from the crowd ; and, Mr. Gutzlaff having harangued
them upon the impropriety of their conduct, they became a little
more quiet. It was quite a laborious task to distribute the books,
—we having to use all our strength in order to keep them at
a proper distance. ..". however good natured; and not.
withstanding many of them received blows, took it all in good
part.
The letters before us bear ample testimony both to the mis-
erable condition of the people, and to their eager desire to obtain
medical aid, which was liberally granted them. Whenever our
voyagers went on shore, they had “numerous applications from
persons with sore eyes, itch,” &c., &c. These diseases, “when
added to the filthy state of their clothes and bodies, gave them
altogether a most disgusting appearance.” We will not dwell on
these loathsome scenes, but hasten to cite one or two instances
which will illustrate the eagerness and confidence, with which
these miserable creatures sought help from the strangers,


280 Disposition of the Chinese. OCT.
“As soon as the medicine chest was opened, they were as
quiet as possible, forming a circle around Mr. Gutzlaff, earnestly
watching all his operations. It is a matter of surprise to me that
men who appear to think so meanly of us, should yet put so much
confidence in our medical skill. Persons laboring under all kinds
of diseases soon surrounded us, and even brought their children,
upon whom they suffered Mr. G. in some cases, to use his knife;
and if they showed any symptoms of pain, which was often the
case, took care to hold them fast until the operation was finish-
ed. One poor woman was brought to us with a diseased hand;
Mr. G. performed a slight operation upon it, which however caus-
ed her so much pain, that she never would have submitted to
it, had not her husband, who appeared to put great confidence
in Mr. G.'s abilities, held her in spite of her cries, until the ope-
ration was finished.”
We are unwilling to lay aside the letters of our friend without
quoting some of his remarks concerning the general appearance
of the people and villages which he visited. Referring to the
first places noticed in the preceding extracts, he says:—
“The people in these villages appeared to be industrious
but miserably poor. Their houses are built chiefly of red brick;
and in some instances, variegated with white, having at a
distance rather a picturesque appearance. But on a nearer
approach all signs of beauty vanish, and they are found to
be, what in reality they are, a mere assemblage of miserable
sheds without either neatness or cleanliness, and built with so
little regard to comfort, as to be for the most part incapable
of resisting the attacks either of wind or rain. As to the
interior, they are much like those at Macao and Lintin. A
bed, I should say a bedstead, and one or two stools, constituted
the whole of the furniture. But the most disgusting feature here
.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.
3éred when I beheld the miserable objects who crowded around
us, and my heart must have been callous indeed not to be filled
with pity for these poor creatures, and at the same time lifted
up with love and gratitude towards the Almighty for the mani-
fold blessings he has showered upon me.
“The plain on which these villages are situated may be from
three to four miles in circumference, surrounded on all sides by
hills, excepting the entrance, which is open to the sea, from
whence the sand stretches nearly across to the opposite side. This
part, if we may judge from its saline appearance and the number
of salt pans raised on it, is evidently overflowed during the high
tides. A narrow causeway of stone running across (the entrance),
serves to keep up the communication between the villages when
the sand is flooded. The ground on each side was tolerably well
cultivated, producing rice, pease, beans, sweet potatoes, &c. A
great part of the paddy was already cut; and I noticed several
patches of ground on which the ploughmen were at work.
Throughout the whole of our walk we saw not a single tree.


1833. Dying without the Gospel. 281
“These villages,” referring to those visited on another oc-
casion, “so far as concerns the houses, were much like those
we visited before ; but the inhabitants were far superior. In
the first place, there was not one fourth part of the disease
we met with there; people generally appeared much more in-
telligent; and the females, who appeared to be more numerous,
were better looking, and dressed with a much greater degree
of care and cleanliness. When visiting the different villages,
I could not help contrasting in my own mind, these people
with those of an English village. In the latter, the inhabitants
may be poor, but will, generally speaking, be found clean; their
clothes may be coarse and old, but yet decent; and should you
enter the cottage of the poorest among them, there will invari-
ably be found a degree of comfort and cleanliness utterly un-
known to the Chinese. I have seen but little of this people,
but that little, joined to what I have heard and read, has impress-
ed my mind with ideas, anything but favorable to them—both
in a moral and domestic light.”
The Death of those who have not the Gospel.—“Without Christ,
strangers from the covenants of promise, having no hope, and
without God in the world.” Sorrowing as “those who have no
hope.” Such is St. Paul's description of the heathen in his day,
and such is the general truth respecting them at the present day.
The system of Confucius presents a dark, dismal, hopeless blank
before the mind of a chi mourning for a parent, or a parent for
a child. Budhism indeed suggests something of confused and
groundless hopes, for which no reason can be given. The letter of
a Chinese father to his friend, upon the late unexpected and lament.
ed death of a son, strongly reminded us of the Apostle's words.
Not one ray of consolation appeared from any quarter-no hope
The letter closed by a resolution to refer the event to the “destiny
of numbers,” and to force himself to be consoled. All was blank,
and waste, and cheerless. No divine Father or Friend ; no reconcil.
ed God and Savior; no submission to the infinitely wise and just
arrangements of Providence. Thus the poor old man, though
immensely rich in worldly goods, sorrowed intensely for a while,
as those “ who have no hope.” Would to God that all who know
and feel the hopes of the gospel were more grateful to their Savior,
and more obedient to his command to make it known to every
creature. And those Christians who neglect or despise those hopes,
little know how many and how much others would value them.
“Many kings and wise men have desired to see the things which
we see,” but were not permitted. To whom much is given, of
them will mueh be required.
The father of the deceased received all possible attentions from
his fellow creatures. The governor and lieut.-governor of Canton
sent him their condolence : the civilians of the provincial city sent
2L


282 v. Literary Wotices." ' ().C.T.
or went to sacrifice to the shade of the departed sun. But 'alas,
what does all' this avail to the dead? what does it avail touš
when we have to walk’ throtigh the dark valley of death, to that
world beyond " || Victory,” cries'ohe, “Victory or Westminster
Abbey?", "Ah, what a hope for the immortal spirit of man !"Må
will have their choice, and be it so; but “O my God, give mº
the hope of the gospel—a hope that maketh not ashamed".
• - ". . . . . . . . . . ; ... . . . . . . . . . . .” -- 1:1,111: ". . . . ; tº it:
iſ . . . .251:11, , , i.e.: nº i ! :º) i
- -Si tº to ºzoi! I lii”
* 1: tº .tºſ ºf ...it
“º “... ..., iiii tº . . . ."
ºf tric,...ſi: º, . .';3, 7.
* * * : :::... . . . . . . ºf .
, . . . . '^ - 1
.:, ; ; 12 ºzº, “it ºn ..!!’
LITERARY NOTICES. . . . tº
... " .. ... " " ' ". . .
2^{i : )'',
- ... ". . . . . . . . ---- - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. NavigaNtiuM Arque ITINE- its way.
RANTIUM Bibliotheca, on A
. .COMPLETE COLLECTION OF VOY-
• Ages AND TRAvels...By John
HARRIs, D. D., & F. R. s.
2 vols. folio.
and 1748.
For the minute inqui.
rer, whose object is to study the
progress of discovery and inter-
course in one particular country,
the old collection possesses, the
LoNuon, 1744 greatest advantages;–while to
... the general reader its minute-
2. THE History of MARITIME
AND INLAND Discovery:-being
part of the geographical se-
ries of Lardner's Cabinet Cy-
clopædia. 3 vols. 12mo, LoN-
Inox, 1830–31. . . --
... These two works form a strik-
ing example of the contrast be-,
tween theo book … taste of the
present and the last century.
ness would make it dry and un-
interesting. We ourselves hope
to derive much benefit from both
works, in the compilation of an
intercourse of the Chinese, which
it is our intention to take in hand
as soon as circumstances will
permit. ... On this account we
regret less our inability at pre-
In the one, minute details of sent to enter more minutely into
voyages and travels swell the ºr their respective merits. -
work to two ponderous and un- Something, however, we must
manageable folios;–in the other, say of the difference ln their
all important facts are compris. arrangement. The history is of
ed in three elegant fireside vols. course arranged principally with
Both works are, however, well- regard to time; and presents a
compiled,—resting on the best: well drawn picture of the gra.
authorities that can be procured dual extension of geographical
by persons unacquainted with knowledge, from Egypt, and
the Chinese language and habits, Greece—the centre (not indeed
and written in a pleasing and in. of . world, *...". :
terestingstyle, an advantage Făre-, civilization. The plan adopte
ly to be Iſèl with in the i. by Dr., Harris is of a different
ed stories of journeys and voy., nature;—we give it in his own
ages. . . . . . . . . . . .,,..words:-: , .*,
But it must not be supposed “Hn the first place, we give an
that the modern publication also account, in order of time of the
together supplies the place of ther most remarkable, voyages that
old one. Each work is useful in have been made round the globe;
: ... :. . . . , sº ºr ºf


1833.
283
Literary Notices,
which affords us an opportunity
of inserting a great variety of
curious and useful observations.
We then enter into a distinct
recital of the voyages made by
several European nations, for
discovering and settling the com-
merce of the East and West -
Indies, without which the sub-
sequent accounts could not be
easily or clearly understood. "We
pursue next the common division
of the globe. * * It will appear
'from hence, that the design of
this undertaking is much more
perfect in its kind than the
scheme of any collection of voy-
ages hitherto offered to the pub.
lic; for whereas they only relate
to a few countries, and are not
disposed according to any regular
method, our's will comprehend
all, and in an order which gives
them a perfect connection.”
“We regret the want of space
to quote more from the excellent
remarks contained in his prefa-
tory pages." He justly contends
'for superiority to the “silly” and
“pedantick” Purchas, – whose
“Pilgrims,” with all their faults,
have however become more no-
ted than almost any other En.
glish collection of voyages. Dr.
Harris certainly deserves great
praise for affording us so inter-
esting an extract of “above-six
hundred of the most authentic
writers.”" * . !. ... ſ " . . . . . . . it
. . . . . . . . . . - ' ' " ºf . ; ; ; , ;.
, :: * ~ 1: 1: . . . . . . . , ; c.1: . . . . . .
i.,DIALoguks ... between two
FRIENDs.-This little work, en-
titled. Leing yew Seing lun,
was, written by . Dr. Milne in
1818, and, the next year an edi.
tion of 2000 copies was printed
at, the Anglo-Chinese college at
Malacca. It is one of Milne's
happiest efforts;... its style, is
plain, simple and animated, and
though occupying only forty
leaves duodecimo, contains a
clear and distinct view of the
leading doctrines of the gospel.
It is probably, the most popu-
lar tract that has yet been pub-
"lished by Protestant missiona-
ries in the Chinese language ;
and the number of copies circu-
lated cannot, we -suppose, be
less than 50,000. These have
gone to Java, Malacca, Singa-
pore, Siam, the maritime prov-
inces of China, Mantchou. Tar-
tary, Corea, and Lewchew. As
there is a demand for a new edi-
tion of this work, which is now
being published, a brief notice of
it may be acceptable.
These two friends, whose
names are Chang and Yuen,
meet on the highway; the first
is a worshiper of the true God,
and the second is his heathen
neighbor. The dialogues are
twelve in number: -
1. ‘Questions proposed by Y-,
concerning Christian principles and
character, and the being of God. 2.
Evangelical repentance. 3. Charac-
ter of Christ, and faith in him. 4.
Good men seek their chief happiness
in heaven; annihilation of the soul
considered. 5. C– relates his first
acquaintance with the New Testa-
ment. 6...Y having retired, is
struck with horror at his neglect of the
true God; visits C— and finds him
with his family at prayer; the resur-
rection of the dead. 7. Nature, and
qualitics of the raised bodies; doubts
and objections. 8. Y on visiting
C—in the evening, finds him in his
closet, which leads to a discussion on
the object and, kinds of prayer; wor-
shiping the dead, &c. 9. The awful
judgment to come; a midnight prayer.
10. Y—objects to C–'s last might's
prayer, because he eonfessed himself a
sinner. , 11... Y— deeply impressed
with the idea of the eternity of sin,
spends a whole night in his garden,
bewailing his miserable condition. 12.
C-L- explains to him the method of
salvation by Jesus Christ; the felicity
of heaven, and thc misery of hell."


284
OC'1'.
Religious Intelligence.
RELIGIOUS INTELLIGENCE,
CELEBEs.-The northern parts
of Celebes are inhabited by
Alfoor tribes, which are there
in a semibarbarous state, with
all the vices, but not the intel-
ligence and enterprise of the
Bugis. They are inviolably at-
tached to the Dutch, whom they
acknowledge as their rightful
masters. Divided into many
families and small tribes, with a
petty rajah at their head, they
have generally been peaceful,
scarcely ever attempting to shake
off the yoke of Europeans.
As they are very poor, and
their land not over fertile, they
have not the means of support-
ing a great trade, and have scarce.
ly ever attracted the cupidity of
traders; they are an agricultural
people, satisfied with a little.
Their not being Mohammedans,
and having no fixed superstition,
pointed them out to the old
Dutch ministers, as proper ob.
jects of labor. A preacher esta-
blished himself at Manado, the
capital of the Dutch possessions
on the north side of the island.
He was successful and convert-
ed several tribes, who were no-
minally received into the Christ-
ian community. In order to carry
on the work, they appointed na-
tive schoolmasters, who had also
to superintend the native con-
gregations. This was the more
necessary on account of the
frequent absence of their Euro.
pean teachers, who were recall.
ed from their stations, and the
churches were destitute of a
clergyman, often for 20 or 30
years.
These various tribes also
speaking different languages, it
was impossible for one European
to speak them all ; but a native
who bestows his whole care upon
the acquisition of one, can be far
more useful to the particular
tribe.
When the French revolution
had involved Holland in ruin,
only few ministers were sent out
to India, and the consequence
was that these distant regions
were entirely neglected. No
European teacher arrived until
the unwearied the Rev. J. Kam
entered upon his work. He
traversed the Moluccas in all
directions, and soon learned that
Christianity in this part of Cele-
bes was nearly extinct. Those
old converts and their children
were neither instructed norbaptiz-
ed; and as nobody cared for their
souls, they fell back into heath-
emism. In such state was Chris-
tianity when Mr. Hellendorn, a
missionary of the Dutch society,
came a few years ago. His arrival
excited general interest; several
chiefs who were the descendants
of Christians applied to him to
establish schools among them.
He endeavored as much as was
in his power to accede to their
request, and within a few years
saw more than six hundred con-


1833.
*
Religious Intelligence. 285
verts join the church ; some of
the petty rajahs became decided
friends of the gospel, and offer.
ed themselves as instructors to
their own people. This rapid
progress and the blessing which
rested upon the mission, prevail-
ed upon the directors at home
to send out two other mission-
aries, Reidel and Schwarz, in
order to enter this fertile vine.
yard.
Mr. Kam who lately died had
previously visited the island, and
enjoyed the great satisfaction of
being welcomed in every place
where he went, as the herald of
good tidings. He promised the
chiefs in the Manahasse district
to send them teachers. His re-
ligious meetings were attended
by almost the whole population,
and all the parents desired their
children to receive instruction in
the doctrines of Christianity.
Our gracious Savior blessed
these brief labors abundantly,
and thus the way for the two mis-
sionaries, Riedel and Schwarz
was prepared. They arrived on
the island in 1831. After hav-
ing traversed the whole ground
of their future operations, Mr.
Reidel settled at Tondano, and
Mr. Schwarz at Langowan. The
latter having personally advocat-
ed the cause of this mission at
Batavia, obtained the necessary
funds for erecting schools. Thus
the work commenced with the
blessing of the Lord.
The schools in the environs
of Manado are numerous and
increasing, so is the church also,
and a new era, the day of visita-
tion from on high has arrived.
Though we would not be too
sanguine in our expectations,
we ought to be very grateful for
the great opening into this be.
nighted country, which the Lord
has afforded them. Though the
laborers are few, they are fer.
vent and humble servants of
God, ready to be spent in the
great work. We look up to our .
gracious Redeemer to carry on
the evangelizing of the Alfoors,
which has been commenced un-
der his auspices, that Celebes
also may be filled with his glo-
ry, and the Alfoors bow before
him, and acknowledge him Lord
of all.
The Dutch government has
very much aided in the good
cause, and assisted the mission-
aries in the prosecution of their
work. There is also a spirit of
improvement in the external cir-
cumstances of the natives mov-
ing, which always accompanies
the progress of the pure gospel.
We shall soon hear more re-
specting the great things which
the Redeemer has done for
these poor islanders.
SANDwich Islands.—A let-
ter from the Sandwich Islands
dated August 13th, informs us
that Messrs. Alexander, Arm-
strong, and Parker, with their
wives, embarked on the 26th of
July, 1833, for the Marquesas
Islands, with the design of com-
mencing a mission there.
During several months pre-
ceding the date of the letter
before us, there had been a con-
siderable diminution of the num-
ber of attendants at public
worship, schools, &c. Those
who refrained from vice and at-
tended to the instructions of the
missionaries merely because
their chiefs did so, and because
it was fashionable, have now
thrown off the mask, and appear
in their proper character. Most


286
().C.'I', -
Juurnal ºf Occurrences.
of the high chiefs, however, are
yet on the side of religion ; very
few of the church members have
apostatized ; and many are still
inquiring after “the right way
of the Lord.” There is reason
to hope and to expect, that cir-
cumstances, which now seem
unpropitious, will, resultpin the
furtherance of the gos, el. The
chaff only will be blown away—
the wheat will remain. “ There
must be heresies among”, these
apparent converts, “that they
which are approved, may, be
made manifest.” 1 Cor. xi. 19.
... The American Seamens' chap,
lain, Rev. Mr. Diell-arrived at
Oahu in the spring; he was very
kindly, received by the residents,
and provided with rooms in Mr.
Jones', the American consul's
house, where he was still resid.
ing..., Mr. Diell had, made prepa-
rations for the erection of a cha-
pel in that port; “but on ac-
count of the unsettled state of
affairs, and the tedious way of
doing business, it was not-till
three weeks ago that the loca.
tion was definitely fixed, and the
lot cleared.”. -
* . . . . . . . - . . . . . . . .
º, China.-After all that the
immediate attendants: of the
world’s Redeemer, had seen of
his mighty works, it was not
without good reason that he said
to them, “O fools and slow of
- ºr . . . . . . . . - * * :
- . . . . . . .''' . . . . . . . .
ºf Journal of occurrences.
heart to believe all that the pro.
phets have spoken.” This reproof
was just. And the same strange
unbelief which occasioned it,
even at this day lurks in the
hearts of good men, while both
the word, and the providence of
God call on them to publish his
gospel to every creature. But
the signs of the times are be-
coming daily more and, more
distinct and pleasing. Those
who love the Lord in sincerity,
and are willing to sacrifice, their
own for the good of others, begin
to feel their obligations, and to
act accordingly. And the results
are already, visible in the four
quarters of the world: they are
seen in India, and even beyond
the Ganges. With the purpose of
devoting their whole, property
and lives to the benefit of strang-
ers, eight individuals, four gen,
tlemen with their wives, recent-
ly arrived in Batavia; and two
other gentlemen have reached
China. Such laborers are wel-
come. And what; ; is equally
pleasing, natives are engaging
in the good work. ... At present:
they are few, but their works
are noble. During the present
month, and among the 25,000
literati, attending the public ex-
aminations in Canton, more than
3,000 volumes consisting in part
or wholly of the oracles of the
living God, were distributed.
- "... ºn tº ºf . . . . . .” ºr , i.
..., , , . . . . . . . .
* , , , , ºr 1:
to wait for the arriyal of his succes.
sor, and perhaps repair to Mºš “to
hear the instructions” of his hajesty,
o Paovingial. “OFFICERS.--The foo-
yuen Choo has obtained the imperial
permission to retire, on plea of sick.
ness; and accordingly left Cantom on
the 20th inst. Ke-fun, the fooyuen of
Kwangse province, has been appoint-
ed to succeed him, but as he will have
it will probably be some months before
he comes here. In the meanwhile,
overnor, Loo, officiates, as fooyuen.
hoo, during his stay at Canton, es-


1833,
Journal of Occurrences. 287
~
pecially the latter part of it, has suc.
ceeded in gaining the admiration and
affection of the people, by his disre.
gard of money, and constant refusal of
bribes and presents in any shape. The
natives have expressed their feelings
towards him by numerous ballads pla-
earded throughout the streets of the
dity, containing most extravagant pan-
egyrics and propositions to retain him
in Canton, or in-the-figurative but un-
pdétieal Hanguage of the Chinese, to
detain his boots, and thus prevent him
from setting out on the journey. A
collection of about eighteen of these
extraordinary productions has been
published, introduced by a no less
wonderful rhythmical. (or as some
wouldi say, poetical,) address from
Choo to the people. One of the pane-
gyrics addressed to him contains a
reference to ther, * - - ,
- “Laughable affair of the foreign En.
tºuri glish,” º ... ".
Whose garden on the Choo kcang
- “...: , , was never finished.” ºr
The notable circumstance here refer.
redito was one of the first and the prin-
nipal:events: of the fooyuen's three
years', government. It º in
the summer of L831. Early one morn.
fing, Choo, attended by his usual offi.
cial retinue, with the.hong-merchants
and linguists, repaired to the British
factory, during the absence at Macao
of the Company's supercargos, its oc-
(cupiers." After many wild and angry
'manoeuvres, he ordered the quay,
*(which had been planted as a garden,
and walled in for the comfort and con-
venience of the gentlemen to whom it
belonged,) to be immediately broken
up, and the earth and stones to be cast
into the timiddle of the river. This
-transaction affords a good specimen of
this natural character, which is very
- inpetuous and self willed. He was,
-fora short time acting governor as well
as fooyuen ; but the greater degree of
-responsibility which he at that time
theld, appears to have restrained him
..from any impetuous acts. Except for
disregard of money, and kindness to
the poor, Choo Kweiching has “sooth-
ed” Canton for above three years,
! without any remarkable event in his
government.” tº t . . . . . -
** * * * -
s The Anchásze or chief judge. Yang, ''
has also retired, on account of ill health,
and taken his departure from Canton,
daring the past month. . Yang Chun-
lin has judged Canton for little more
than a year. He arrived during the
mountaineer war, which] was closed
during the last summer, and was in-
mediately dispatched to the spot as
chief commissioner. While there, he
incurred some disgrace, which his me.
rit afterwards counterbalanced. He
also imbibed a disease; which he has
not been able so quickly to get over,
and which has now compelled him to
resign. He left on the 28th inst, with-
out the regard of any one, though
with much pomp and military parade.
LiterARY DEGREEs’ given As A RE.
ward.—During the late scarcity in
the meighborhood of Peking, several
rich men subscribed largely to pro-
vide rice water for the ſamishing poor.
Their donations passed through the
hands of government. As a reward
for this benevolence, the emperor con-
ferred on some peacock's feathers, and
on others the degree of keu-jin, quasi
dicit, LL. D. - - - - -
The censor of Hooman province
has written a delicate renonstrance to
the emperor, praising these signal acts
but deprecating their becoming prece-
dents. If rich men can obtain degrees
for money, farewell to the prospects of
the poor scholar.” Talent and learn.
ing will go out, and wealth and stupid.
ity come into the service of govern-
ment.—To this-remonstrance his
majesty's reply has not yet appeared.
Atrocrities iN SHANTUNG.—The
seunſoo of this province has referred
to the emperor an atrocious criminal
case, in which he is at a loss how to
act. A man named Keuh Wei-yih hav.
ing detected the infidelity of his wife,
instantly killed both her and the as-
sociate of her guilt; but his revenge
not satisfied with this, he hastencq in
his rage to the mother of the adul-
terer, whom he suspected of conniving
at the crime, and killed her and her
second son.
The two first murders the law con.
siders justifiable homicide, and inflicts
no punishment. But the two next
murders come under the law concern-
ing killing two persons in one family,
and it requires the punishment of im.
mediate decapitation. The seunfoo
hesitates however what to do, and has
referred this case to the emperor; who
in his turn has transferred it to the
immediate consideration of the Hing
Poo, or supreme court in Peking.


288
Journal of Occurrences.
Locusrs.—Near the close of the last
month, the chicſ authorities of Canton
issued an edict against the locusts.
which, after traveling from Hoo-
kwang through Kwan had made
their appearance in Kaouchow, the
southwestern department of Kwang-
tung. Locusts are “a new calamity in
Canton,” and therefore in laying down
rules for the “persecution” of these
invaders recourse is had to the ex-
perience which has been gained in the
Inore northern provinces. “Noise
prevents the descent of locusts;" hence
cannon, gongs, &c., are put in requisi-
tion for the occasion; and the milita-
ry are required to come forth and join
the plain agriculturist in making war
on the locusts. Much success to the
imperialists in the new campaign :
There is however very little reason, at
present, to apprehend serious conse-
quences from these new enemies; still
should they come here in clouds, as
they have appeared in other places,
something besides cannon or bribes
would be necessary to “drive them
out instantly.” The closing paragraph
of the document is rather tempting to
Canton avidity;—ducks thrive amaz-
ingly on dead locusts, and pigs that
are fed upon them only four days will
increase in weight from ten to fifty
catties!
FormosaN INsurrection.—By late
Peking gazettes it appears that the
emperor has at length found out that the
late insurrection in Formosa originat-
cd from the vexatious tyranny of the
local government. He has conse-
quently dismissed from the service the
general of the army then in command,
and the head of the commissariat.
They had allowed twenty thousand
troops nominally, to mix with the peo.
ple in trades, &c., till they were well
nigh annihilated, as to any practical
service. And when the insurrection
broke out, the officers were helpless,
and at their wit’s end. His majesty
breathes out his posthumous indigna-
--e Qess-
tion against the late governor of Fuh-
keen, who in the meantime has gone
down to the grave,
Where the weary are at rest,
And the wicked cease from troubling.
Had he been alive now, says his
majesty, I would inflict death upon
him, as a warning to all careless go-
vernors.-"Publish this at home and
abroad.”
Effects of the late inundation.—The
repairs which have been found neces.
sary since the recent overflowing of
the river in Canton, are going forward
with much dispatch. Government
has levied heavy taxes on the wealth-
iest inhabitants of the city, in order to
furnish the poorer classes with rice,
&c. Governor Loo, on the 20th inst.,
sent out a proclamation abolishing all
duties on rice which is brought to the
provincial city by the native mer-
chants.-Appended to that document
is “a catalogue of those gentlemen
who have come forward with contri-
butions to aid the government.” The
name of the senior hung merchant
stands first on the list with the sum of
40,000 taels. Others of the co-hong
give 7,000; others, 5000; and some
only 3,500. The merchants who deal
in black tea have collectively put
down 14,000 taels; and those who
trade in green teas 8,400. From each
pawnbroker's shop, (these are about
830 in number,) a contribution of 200
taels is exacted.—The total amount
raised by the government, is said to be
not less than 1,000,000 of taels.
tº-
EARTHQuake IN YUNNAN.—Letters
from commercial houses in Yunnan
have reached Canton, stating that re-
peated shocks of an earthquake were
felt in that province early in Septem-
ber: “they continued for eight sue-
cessive days, and hundreds of people
were destroyed, in more than ten dif.
ferent districts.” We have yet seen
no official accounts of this calamity.
The weather during the last half of the month has been fair, warm, and
very dry; indeed scarcely any rain has fallen since the severe rain-storms
in August.—In the early part of the month, frequent changes of the weather
from hot to cold, caused considerable sickness among the native population
of Canton; and thc prices of provisions and of labor were high; in these
several particulars, there is up to the present time, (Oct. 31st.) very little
improvement.


THE
CHINEs E REPositor Y.
Vol. Il.—November, 1833.-No. 7.
DEscRIPTION of THE CITY of CANToN.
(Concluded from page 264.)
The situation of Canton and the policy of the Chi-
nese government, together with various other causes,
have made this city the scene of a very extensive
domestic and foreign commerce. With the excep-
tion of the Russian caravans which traverse the north-
ern frontiers of China, and the Portuguese and Span-
ish ships which visit Macao, the whole trade between
the Chinese empire and the nations of the west
centres in this place. Here the productions of every
part of China are found, and a very brisk and lucra-
tive commerce is driven by merchants and factors
from all the provinces. Here also merchandise is
brought from Tonquin (Tungking), Cochinchina,
Camboja, Siam, Malacca or the Malay peninsula, the
eastern Archipelago, the ports of India, the nations
of Europe, the different states of North and South
America, and the islands of the Pacific. We shall,
as briefly as possible, notice the several branches of
this extensive commerce; enumerate some of the
principal commodities which are brought to this city,
as well as those which are carried from it; and add,
in the same connection, such remarks concerning the
situation and circumstances of the trade and those
who conduct it, as seem necessary to exhibit its full
magnitude and importance.
2M


290 Description of the Nov.,
Concerning the domestic commerce we can do lit-
tle more than mention the articles which are here
bought and sold for the several provinces; each of
which provinces we shall notice separately, that we
may at the same time, by taking a view of their
position and number of inhabitants, see to what ad-
vantage the present trade is conducted, and what is
the probability of its future increase or diminution. We
commence with the maritime provinces; then notice
those on the northern, western and southern frontiers;
and finally those in the centre of China proper. The
colonial trade we do not bring into the account. We
give the population in round numbers according to
the 'i'a Tsing Hwuy Tečn for the year 1812, as ex-
hibited in the first volume, page 359.
From the province of Kwangtung are brought to
the metropolis, silks, rice, fish, salt, fruits, vegetables,
and various kinds of wood; silver, iron, and pearls
in small quantities; also cassia and betel-nut: and in
return a small amount of almost all the imports,
whether from foreigu countries or from the other
parts of China, are sent out from Canton through
the province. The population, amounting to nineteen
millions, consumes a large amount of foreign imports,
and might, under better regulations, furnish a much
greater supply of exports.
From Fuhkeen come the black teas; also camphor,
sugar, indigo, tobacco, paper, lacquered ware, excel-
lent grass-cloth, and a few mineral productions.
Woolen and cotton cloths of various kinds, wines,
watches, &c., are sent to that province; which, with
its population of fourteen millions, might in different
circumstances receive a far greater amount of foreign
manufactures and productions in exchange for its
own. The trade of the province is carried on under
great disadvantages. It has been shown by an accu-
rate and detailed comparison between the expense
of conveying black teas from the country where they
are produced to Canton; and of their conveyance
from thence to the port of Fuhchow in Fuhkečn,


1833. City of Caontm. 29 |
that the privilege of admission to the latter port, would
be attended with a saving to the East India Company
of £150,000 annually, in the purchase of black teas
alone. This opinion, given by Mr. Ball, formerly in-
spector of teas in China, and quoted by sir G. T.
Staunton, is deserving of consideration.
Chéketing sends to Canton the best of silks and
paper; also fans, pencils, wines, dates, “golden flow-
ered” hams, and lung-tsing cha—an excellent and
very costly tea. This province has a population of
twenty-six millions, and makes large demands for
foreign imports; these, however, by way of Canton,
go to that province at no small expense to the con-
SUlmer. . . .
Keāngman, which is now divided into the two
provinces Keāngsoo and Ganhwuy, with a popula-
tion of seventy-two millions, has the resources as well
as all the wants of a kingdom. And notwithstanding
its distance from this city, large quantities of produce
are annually sent hither and exchanged for the pro-
ductions and manufactures of the western world.
Green teas and silks are the principal articles of
traffic which are brought to Canton; and they usually
yield the merchant a great profit. - - -
From Shantung, fruits, vegetables, drugs, wincs,
and skins are brought down the coast to Canton;
and coarse fabrics for clothing are sent back in return.
The carrying of foreign exports from Canton to Shan-
tung, whether overland or up the coast in native ves.
sels, makes them so expensive as to prevent their
use among the great majority of the inhabitants,
who are very poor and very numerous—amounting
to twenty-eight millions. . . . . . . . . . . .”
From Chihle, ginseng, raisins, dates, skins, veni-
son, wines, drugs, and tobacco, are sent hither; and
cloths of various kinds, also clocks, watches, and
sundry other foreign imports go back in return. The
population, amounting to twenty-seven millions, is in a
great degree dependant on the productions of other
provinces and countries for the necessaries of life.


292 Description of the Nov.,
Shanse sends skins, wines, ardent spirits, and
musk. Among its fourteen millions of inhabitants,
there are many capitalists who come to Canton to
get gain by loaning money. Various kinds of cloths,
European skins, watches, and native books are sent
up to the province of Shanse. -
Shense also supports a large money trade in Can-
ton; and sends hither likewise brass, iron, precious
stones, and drugs; and takes back woolen and cotton
cloths, books, and wines. The population is about
ten millions.
Kansuh sends hither gold, quicksilver, musk,
tobacco, &c., and receives in return, for its fifteen
millions of inhabitants, a small amount of European
goods. -
Szechuen sends gold, brass, iron, tin, musk, and a
great variety of other drugs; and receives in ex-
change European cloths, lacquered ware, looking-
glasses, &c. Szechuen is the largest of the eighteen
º and has a population of twenty-one mil-
IOIlS. -
Yunnan yields, for the shops of Canton, brass,
tin, precious stones, musk, betel-nut, birds, and pea-
cock's feathers; and receives from Canton silks,
woolen and cotton cloths, various kinds of provi ions,
tobacco and books. The population is five millions.
Kwangse has a population of seven millions, and
furnishes this market with large quantities of rice
and cassia; also iron, lead, fans, and wood of various
kinds; and takes in return many native productions,
and most of the articles that come to Canton from
beyond sea. We turn now to the central provinces.
From Kweichow are brought gold, quicksilver,
iron, lead, tobacco, incense, and drugs; and a few
articles, chiefly foreign goods, find their way back
to that province. Its population is five millions.
From the two provinces, Hoonan and Hoopih,
come large quantities of rhubarb, also musk, tobacco,
honey, hemp, and a great variety of singing birds;
the number of inhabitants is forty-five millions, and


1833. City of Canton. 293
they make very considerable demands on the mer-
chants of Canton, both for native productions and
foreign imports. -
Keāngse sends to this market coarse cloths, hemp,
chinaware, and drugs; and takes in return woolens
and native books. The population is twenty-three
millions.—Honan has an equal number of inhabi-
tants, and sends hither rhubarb, musk, almonds, honey,
indigo, &c.; and woolens, and a few other foreign
goods are received in return. -
This account of the domestic commerce of Canton
is taken from a native manuscript. We have sought
long, but in vain, for some official document which
would show at once the different kinds and the amount
of merchandise which is annually brought from, and
carried to, the several provinces of the empire. The
account which we have given, must be regarded only
as an approximation to the truth. Some articles have
doubtless, been omitted which ought to have been
noticed; and vice versä. One commodity in particular,
which is known to be carried into all the provinces,
and used to the amount of more than $12,000,000
annually, is not even mentioned. Sill the statements,
which-we have brought into view, show that there is
in every part of the empire, a greater or less demand
for foreign productions,—a demand which, so long
as the commerce is confined to this port, will be sup-
plied very disadvantageously both for the foreigner
and the native; but while it does remain thus restrict-
ed, there is reason to suppose that it will, under all
its disadvantages, gradually increase; and even if the
northern ports of the empire should be immediately
thrown open, it will not soon cease to be important.
Though the merchant and factors from the other
provinces enjoy a considerable share of the commerce
of Canton, yet they do not confine themselves to the
domestic trade ; they participate largely in that to
Tun, king, Cochinchina, Siam, and the islands of the
eastern Archipelago. The whole number of Chinese
vessels, annually visiting foreign ports south of Can-


294 Description of the Nov.
ton, is not probably, less than one hundred; of these
one third belong to Canton ; six or eight go to Tung-
king ; eighteen or twenty to Cochinchina, Camboja,
and Siam ; four or five visit the ports of Singapore,
Java, Sumatra, and Penang ; and as many more find
their way to the Celebes, Borneo and the Philippine
islands. These vessels never make but one voyage
in the year, and always move with the monsoon.
Many of the vessels from Fuhkečn and the north-
ern ports of China, which go south, touch at Can-
ton both when outward and homeward bound. But
the whole amount of trade to foreign ports, carried
on by the Chinese merchants of Canton, is not very
great; not so, however, that which is in the hands of
foreigners, and which we now proceed to notice.
Portugal, Spain, France, Holland, Sweden, Denmark,
England, and the United States, have all shared in
the commerce of Canton.
The Portuguese ships led the way to China. Ra-
phael Perestrello arrived here in 1516; and the next
year eight ships, four Portuguese and four Malay,
under the command of Fernão Peres de Andrade,
arrived on the coast; six of these anchored near St.
John's island, and the other two came into the port
of Canton. From that early period the trade of the
Portuguese began to increase rapidly; but difficulties
soon arose, and the adventurers were restricted to
Macao; to which place they have ever since been
limited, except at short intervals, when they have
been allowed, with other foreigners, free access to
all the ports of the empire. - *
Spanish ships, besides having liberty to trade at
this port, are allowed the privilege, which they
neglect to improve, of trading at the port of Amoy.
The French reached the port of Canton in 1820;
but their trade has never been very extensive, though
it has been continued to the present time. During
the-last few years they have employed annually two, .
three, or four ships in this trade. In the season
1832-33, there were three French ships in port.


1833. City of Canton. - 295
The Dutch trade commenced, if we may rely on
native authority, in 1601 ; it had to struggle, in its
origin, with very many difficulties; and during its
progress through more than two centuries has fluc-
tuated exceedingly. Its present prospects are improv-
ing; a few years ago there were only three of four
ships annually employed in this trade. During the
year 1852, there were seventeen Dutch vessels which
came to China: these were all from Holland and
Java. The value of imports was $457,128; exports,
$656,646,-not including the private trade of the
commanders.
< Sweden has never, in one season, we believe, sent
more than two or three ships to China. This trade
opened in 1732; and during its first fifteen years,
22 ships were dispatched to China, of which four
were lost. Peter Osbeck, who was here in 1750–51,
as chaplain of the Prince Charles, a Swedish East-
Indiaman, relates, that there were that season, eigh-
teen European ships in port, viz. one Danish, two
Swedish, two French, four Dutch, and nine English.
For the last fifteen years no Swedish ships have
visited China. - -
* The Danes seem to have come to China earlier
than the Swedes; but the year in which their trade
began we cannot ascertain. During twelve years,
commencing in 1732, they sent 32 ships to China; of
which only 27 returned. Their flag was called Huang-
ke, ‘the imperial flag,' which name it has retained to:
this day. Their trade has never been very great,
though it has been continued to the present time.
The English did not reach the coast of China till
-about 1635. It is stated, on good authority, that
3. Elizabeth in 1599, sent John Mildenhall from
Constantinople overland to the court of the Great
Mogul in order to obtain certain privileges for the
English, for whom she was then preparing a charter.
Mildenhall was long opposed by the arts and pres-
ents of the Spanish and Portuguese jestits at that
court; and it was some years before he entirely “got


296 Description of the Nov.
the better of them." It is also recorded, that the
same wise princess wrote strong recommendatory
letters to the emperor of China, to be delivered by
the chiefs of an expedition intended for his country;
but misfortunes at sea, prevented the ships from
reaching the place of their destination. In 1634, a
“truce and free trade” to China and all other places
where the Portuguese were settled, was agreed to
between the viceroy of Goa and several English
merchants, to whom a license for trading to the
East Indies had been granted by king Charles I.
Several ships were fitted out by these grantees, un-
der the command of captain Weddell, who thought
it sufficient, in consequence of the agreement made
at Goa, to bring letters for the governor of Macao,
in order to be effectually assisted in his projected in-
tercourse with the Chinese at Canton. The account
of this first enterprise is curious and interesting.
We subjoin a few extracts which are found in the
work of sir George Staunton. -
- * *
“The procurador of Macao soon [after the fleet arrived] repair-
ed on board the principal ship of the English, and said, that for
matter of refreshing, he would provide them; but that there was
a main obstacle to their trading, which was the non-consent of
the Chinese, who, he pretended, held the Portuguese in miserable
subjection. The English, however, determined to discover the
river of Canton; and fitted out a barge and pinnace, with above
fifty men, which, after two days came in sight of the mouth of the
river, being a very goodly inlet, and utterly prohibited to the Por-
tuguese by the Chinese, who do not willingly admit any strangers
to the view of it, being the passage and secure harbor for their best
junks, both of war and merchandise; so that the Portuguese traf.
fic to Canton was only in small vessels, through divers narrow
shoal straits, among many broken islands adjoining the main. The
barge anchoring for a wind and tide to carry them in, a fishing
boat was descried early in the morning, which Thomas Robinson
followed, [a tedious chase by reason of their many oars, hoping
to have found some one on board who might serve, either as pilot
or interpreter; but finding neither, having used them with all
courtesy, dismissed them contrary to their timorous expectations;
and afterwards, for the same causes, and with the same success,
spake with another; but after a delay of several days, a small boat
made towards the pinnace, and having sold some refreshments,
signs were made to carry some of the English to Canton, and


1833. City of Canton. 297
bring them to the speech of the mandarins, which the boatmen ac-
cepted of; but the next day, the pinnace being under sail with a
fair wind and tide, after having passed by a certain desolate castle,
a fleet of about twenty sail of tall junks, commanded by an admi-
ral, passing down from Canton, encountered the English; and, in
courteous terms, desired them to anchor, which accordingly they
did; and presently J. Mounteney and T. Robinson went on
board the chief mandarin, where were certain negroes, fugitives of
the Portuguese, that interpreted.
“At first, the Chinese began somewhat roughly to expostulate;
what moved them to come hither and discover the prohibited
goods, and the concealed parts and passages of so great a prince's
dominions? Also, who were their pilots 1 T. Robinson repli-
ed; that they were come from Europe, to treat of such capitula.
tion as might conduce to the good of both princes and subjects,
hoping that it might be lawful for them, as well as for the inhabi.
tants of Macao, to exercise a fee commerce, paying duties as the
others; and as for pilots, they had none; but every one was able
by his art, to discover more difficult passages than they had found.
The Chinese hereafter began to be more affable, and in conclusion,
appointed a small junk to carry up whomsoever they pleased to
Canton, if the English would promise that the pinnace would pro-
ceed no further; for though ench of these vessels was well armed,
yet they durst not oppose her in any hostile way. The same
night, captain Carter, T. Robinson and J. Mounteney left the pin-
nace, with orders to expect their return; and being embarked in
a small junk of thirty tons, proceeded towards Canton, with intent
to deliver to the viceroy a petition for obtaining permission to set-
tle a trade in those parts. The next day they arrived within five
keagues of Canton, whither it seems the rumor of their coming, and
the fear of them, was already arrived; so that they were required,
in a friendly manner, to proceed no further, but to return to their
own ships, with promise of assistance in the procuring of license
for trade, if they would seek it at Macao by the solicitation of
those they should find there, and instantly abandon the river:
the which, (having satisfied themselves with this discovery, and
wifting to remove the anxiety which their long absence might oc.
casion in the rest of the fleet,) they readily performed. In a little
time, the Portuguese fleet of six small vessels set sail for Japan;
upon whose departure it was expected the permission to trade
would have been granted; but being then freed of their conceiv.
ed fear lest captain Weddell and his men should have surprised
their vessels, they sent the English a flat denial.
“The same day, at a consultation called on board the admiral
(Weddell), captain Carter, J. Mounteney, and T. Robinson deliv.
ered to the whole council, together with a draft of the river, the
sum of their attempts, success, and hopes; which being well ponder.
ed, it was generally consented, that the whole fleet should sail for the
river of Canton. They arrived in a few days before the foremen.
2N


293 Description of the Nov.
tioned desolate castle; and being now furnished with some slen-
der interpreters, they soon had speech with divers mandarins in
the king's junks, to whom the cause of their arrival was declared,
viz. to entertain peace and amity with them, to traffic freely as the
Portuguese did, and to be forthwith supplied for their moneys, with
provisions for their ships: all which those mandarins promised to
solicit with the prime men resident at Canton; and in the mean
time, desired an expectation of six days, which were granted; and
the English ships rode with white ensigns on the poop. But their
perfidious friends, the Portuguese, had in all that time, since the
return of the pinnace, so beslandered them to the Chinese, report-
ing them to be rogues, thieves, beggars, and what not, that they
became very jealous of the good meaning of the English; inso-
much, that in the night time they put forty-six cast iron ordnance
into the fort lying close to the brink of the river; each piece being.
between six and seven hundred weight and well proportioned; and
after the end of four days, having, as they thought, sufficiently for-
tified theimselves, they discharged divers shot, though without hurt,
upon one of the barges passing by them, to find out a convenient.
watering place. Herewith the whole fleet, being instantly in.
censed, did, on the sudden, display their bloody ensigns; and
weighing their anchors, fell up with the flood, and berthed them-
selves before the castle, from whence came many shot; yet not
any that touched so much as hull or rope. Whereupon, not being
able to endure their bravados any longer, each ship began to play
furiously upon them with their broadsides; and after two or three
hours, perceiving their, cowardly fainting, the boats were landed
with about one hundred men; which sight occasioned them, with
great distraction, instantly to abandon the castle and fly; the
boats' crews, in the meantime entering the same, and displaying
his majesty's colors of Great Britain upon the walls, having, the
same night, put aboard all their ordnance, fired the council house,
and demolished what they could. The boats of the fleet also seiz-
ed a junk laden with boards and timber, and another with salt.
Another vessel of small moment was surprised, by whose boat a
letter was sent to the chief mandarins at Canton, expostulating
their breach of truce, excusing the assailing of the castle, and
withal, in fair terms, requiring the liberty of trade. This letter, it
seems, was delivered; for the next day, a mandarin of no great
note, some time a Portuguese Christian, called Paulo Noretty,
came towards the ships in a small boat with a white flag, to whom
the English, having laid open the injuries received, and the sincere
intent they had to establish a fair trade and commerce, and were
no way willing, (but in their own defence,) to oppose the Chinese,
presented certain gifts, and dismissed him to his masters, who
were some of the chief mandarins, and who being by him duly in-
formed thereof, returned him again the same night, with a small
junk and full authority to carry up such persons as should be ap-
pointed to Canton, there to tender a petition, and to conclude fur-
ther upon the manner of their future proceedings.” -


1833. ( 'ity of Cantom. 299
The English had now gained their point: two in-
dividuals proceeded to Canton and were favorably
received by officers of high rank in the city; and
arrangements, which were agreeable to both parties,
were soon made. Such was the commencement of
a commercial intercourse which, though always im-
portant, may very soon command a far more exten-
sive and salutary influence than it has ever before
exerted. The British trade with China forms a very
important item of the commerce of the world. It
is divided into two branches; that which is carried
on directly with Great Britain, i. e. the Company's
trade; and that which is carried on between China and
the British possessions in India, nearly the whole of
which is in the hands of private individuals.
The whole number of vessels which arrived in
China under the British flag, during the year 1832,
was seventy-four; seven of these made two voyages;
and three of them made three voyages, during the
twelve months: and one of these last, the Red Rover,
captain Clifton, made her three voyages from Cal-
cutta; she arrived in China on the 28th Feb., 5th June,
and 6th October. The whole number of arrivals was
eighty-seven ; 9 from London; 31 from Bombay; 24
from Calcutta; 2 from Madras; 5 from Singapore
(most of the English ships to or from China touch at
this port); 3 from Sourabaya; 1 from Batavia; 1 from
N. S. Wales; 8 from Manila : 1 from the east coast
of China; 1 from Lewchew; and 1 from the straits
of Malacca. Of these ships, there arrived in Jan., 2;
in Feb., 2; March, 4; April, 2; May, 10; June, 16;
July, 5; Aug., 15; Sep., 17; Oct., 8; Nov., 3; Dec.,
2. There were 14 departures in Jan. ; 2 in Feb.; 5
in March; 2 in April; 5 in May; 4 in June ; 11 in July;
4 in August; 11 in Oct.; 17 in Nov.; 9 in Dec.;—and
two or three vessels remained stationed at Lintin.
... These vessels brought to China, broadcloths, long-
ells, camlets, British calicoes, worsted and cotton
yarn, cotton piece goods, Bombay, Madras and
Bengal cotton, opium, sandal-wood, black-wood,


300 Description of the Nov.
rattans, betel-nut, putchuck, pepper, cloves, cochi-
neal, olibanum, saltpetre, skins, ivory, amber,
pearls, cornelians, watches and clocks, lead, iron,
tin, quicksilver, shark's fins, fish-maws, stock-fish,
&c. Returning from China they were laden with
teas, silk, silk piece goods, sugar, cassia, camphor,
vermilion, rhubarb, alum, musk, and various other
articles. The value of these exports and imports is
exhibited in the following table. -
SEAsons. IMports. Exports.
1828–29. $21,313,526 $19,360,625
1829–30. 22,931,372 21,257,257
1830–31. 21,961,754 20,446,699
1831–32. 20,536,227 17,767,486
1832–33. 22,304,753 18,332,760
The American trade to China is of very recent
origin; it commenced shortly after the revolutionary
war. The first recorded facts which we are able to
obtain, carry back the trade only to the season
1784–5; in which season two American ships were
laden at Canton; they carried to America, with their
other cargo, 880,100 lbs. of tea: in the next season
there was only one vessel, which exported 695,000
lbs. . In 1786–7, there were five ships engaged in
the trade; they exported 1,181,860 pounds of tea;
one of these ships was the “Hope;” other ships
which were in port during this, and the following
season were the “Washington,” the “Asia,” and the
“Canton;” the two last were from Philadelphia. The
number of American vessels which arrived in China
during the season of 1832-33 ending June 1833, was
fifty-nine; some of these, however, did not take in
cargoes at this port. These ships brought quick-
silver, lead, iron, South American copper, spelter,
tin plates, Turkey opium, ginseng, rice, broadcloths,
camlets, chintzes, long ells, long cloths, cambrics,
domestics, velvets, bombazettes, handkerchiefs, lin-
en, cotton drillings, cotton yarn, cotton prints, land


1833. City of Canton, 301
and sea-otter skins, fox skins, seal skins, pearl shells,
sandal-wood, cochineal, music boxes, clocks, watches,
and sundry other articles; and in return were laden
with teas, silks, cassia, camphor, rhubarb, vermilion,
Chinaware, &c.; these articles of merchandise were
carried to the United States, Europe, South America,
Sandwich Islands, and Manila.-The following table
will afford some idea of the progress of the trade,
and show its present amount.
l SEAsoNs. lMports. Exports.
1805–06. $5,326,358 $5,127,000
1815–16. 2,527,500 4,220,000
1825–26. 3,843,717 4,363,788
1830–31. 4,223,476 4,344,548
1831–32. 5,531,807 5,999,731
1832–33. 8,362,971 8,372,175
From the foregoing statements it appears that the
China trade, employing annually 140 first rate vessels
and a large amount of capital, constitutes a very im-
portant branch of modern commerce. But the trade
has always been carried on, and still exists, under
circumstances peculiar to itself; it is secured by no
commercial treaties; it is regulated by no stipulated
rules; mandates and edicts not a few, there are “on
record,” but these all emanate from one party: still
the trade lives, and, by that imperial favor which
extends to “the four seas,” flourishes and enjoys no
small degree of protection.—All vessels arriving on
the coast of China, are, unless destined for the harbor
of Macao or the port of Canton, considered by Chi-
nese authorities as intruders, and as such “must in-
stantly be driven away.” Year after year, however,
vessels have found a safe and convenient anchorage
at Lintin and vicinity; where a large amount of busi-
ness, including nearly the whole of the opium trade,
is transacted. Those vessels that are to enter the
Bogue, must procure a permit and a pilot at the Chi-
nese custom-house near Macao; and the pilot, having
received license to act, must proceed on board im-


;302 Description of the Nov.
mediately and conduct the vessel to the anchorage
at Whampoa. - - - - .
As soon as the ship is officially reported at Canton,
arrangements are made for discharging and receiv-
ing cargo, the whole business of which is sometimes
accomplishcd in three weeks, but usually in not less
time than two or three months. But before this
business can proceed, the consignee or owner of the
ship must obtain for her a security merchant, a lin-
guist, and a comprador, and a written declaration
must be given for every ship, except those of the
E. I. Company, that she has no opium on board.
The security merchant, or individual who gives
sccurity to government for the payment of her duties
and for the conduct of the crew, must be a member
of the co-hong; at present this company is composed
of twelve individuals, usually called hong merchants:
some of these men rank among the most wealthy and
respectable inhabitants of Canton; they pay largely
for the privilege of entering the co-hong, and when
they have once joined that body, they are seldom
allowed to retire from their station, and are at all
times liable to heavy exactions from the provincial
government. Formerly the whole, or nearly the
whole, foreign trade was in their hands; within a
few years, it has extended to others who are not
included in the co-hong, and who are commonly call-
ed outside merchants. The linguists, so called, hold
the rank of interpreters; they procure permits for
delivering and taking in cargo, transact all business
at the custom-house, keep account of the duties, &c.
The comprador provides stores, and all necessary
provisions for the ship while she remains in port.
The port charges consist of the measurement duty,
cumshaw, pilotage, linguist's and comprador's fees.
The measurement duty varies; on a vessel of 300
tons it is about $650; and on vessels of the largest size,
say 1300 tons, it is about $3000; the tonnage of the
vessel, however, affords no fixed criterion for the
amount of measurement duty. But for all ships, of


1833. City of Canton. 30.3.
whatever size, the cumshaw, pilotage, linguist's and
comprador's fees, are the same, amounting to about
$2,573. Those vessels that enter the port laden
only with rice are not required to pay the measure-
ment duty and cumshaw, but are liable to other irreg-
ular fees amounting to nearly $1000. The manage-
ment and general supervision of the port charges are
intrusted to an imperial commissioner, who is sent
hither from the court of Peking. In Chinese he is
called hae-kwan keen-tuh ; but by foreigners is usu-
ally styled the Hoppo; his regular salary is about
3000 taels per annum, but his annual income is sup-
posed to be not less than $100,000.
The arrangements between the native and foreign
merchants of Canton for the transaction of business
are on the whole convenient, and pretty well calculat-
ed to promote dispatch and secure confidence in the
respective parties. The Chinese merchants have a
well earned reputation for shrewd dealers; generall
they have but little confidence in each other, .
every contract of importance must be “fixed”—made
sure, by the prepayment of a stipulated sum: bit,they
place the: most unlimited confidence in the integrity.
of their foreign customers.-Only a small part of the
trade is in the hands of the outside merchants; and
their number being unlimited, there is often among
them a great deal of competition. The whole of the
E. I. Company's business, and a large portion of the
English private trade and that of other foreigners,
is confined to the hong merchants and those who
transact, business in connection with them. . Theres-
tablishments of the principal hong merchants are ex-
tensive; they have numerous and convenient ware-
houses, in which they store their goods, and from
whence export cargoes are conveyed in, lighters to
the 1shipping at Whampoa. … . . . . . .
- , ) . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . - - . . . . . . . . . . . .
The foreign factorics, the situation of which we
have already noticed, are neat and commodious build-
ings. The plot of ground on which they stand is very


304 Description of the Nov.
limited, extending about sixty rods from east to west,
and forty from north to south ; it is owned, as are
also most of the factories, by the hong merchants.
The factories are called shih-san hang, “the thirteen
factories;” and with the exception of two or three
narrow streets, they form one solid block; each fac-
tory extends in length through the whole breadth of
the block, and has its own proper name, which if not
always appropriate, is intended to be indicative of
good fortune: the 1st, commencing on the east, is
E-ho hang, the factory of “Justice and Peace;' by fo-
reigners it is called the Creek factory; the 2d is the
Dutch; it is called Tseih-e hang, the factory of Collect-
ed Justice: 3d is the British factory, which is called
Paou-ho hong, ‘the factory that Insures Tranquillity;'
a narrow lane separates this from the 4th, which is
called Fung-tae hang, ‘the Great and affluent factory:’
5th is the old English factory, called Lung-shun hang :
6th, the Swedish factory, called Suy hang : 7th is
Ma-ying hang, commonly called the Imperial factory:
8th, Paou-shun hang, the ‘Precious and Prosperous
factory:' 9th, the American factory, called Kwang-
yuen hang, ‘the factory of Wide Fountains;' a broad
street, called China street, separates Kwang-yuen
hang from the 10th, which is occupied by one of the
hong merchants: the 11th is the French factory: the
12th is the Spanish; the 13th and last is the Danish
factory: the 12th and 13th are separated by a street
occupied by Chinese merchants, and usually called
New China street. Each factory is divided into three,
four or more houses, of which each factor occupies
one or more according to circumstances. The fac-
tories are all built of brick or granite, two stories
high, and present a rather substantial front; and
with the foreign flags which wave over them form
a striking, and to the stranger, a pleasing contrast
with the flaunting banners and architecture of the ce-
lestial empire. - -
The style of living in Canton, we speak of the
foreign society, is similar to that of India, except in


1833. City of Cantom. - 305
the important particular, that here man is deprived
of that “help” appointed to him by a decree which no
human authority can justly abrogate, and enjoyed
by him in every other land but this.--A gentleman,
fitting up an establishment in Canton, must first ob-
tain a comprador: this is an individual who is per-
mitted by special #...","...". "... ;
he has the general superintendence of the domestic
affairs of the house, procures other servants, pur-
chases provisions, &c., according to the wishes of
his employer. Visitors to Canton usually speak in
high terms of the domestic arrangements of the re-
sidents. But this place presents few objects of much
interest to the mere man of pleasure. Considering
the latitude, the climate is agreeable and healthy;
provisions of good quality and variety are abundant;
but the want of a wider range and a purer air than
are enjoyed in the midst of a densely populated me-
tropolis, to which the residents are here confined,
often makes them impatient to leave the provincial
city. - - -
The manufactories and trades of Canton are nu-
merous. There is no machinery, properly so called,
and consequently there are no extensive manufactur-
ing establishments, similar to those which, in modern
times and under the power of machinery, have grown
up in Europe. The Chinese know nothing of the
economy of time.—Much of the manufacturing busi-
ness required to supply the commercial houses of
Canton is performed at Fuhshan, a large town situ-
ated a few miles westward of this city; still the num-
ber of hands employed, and the amount of labor per-
formed here, are by no means inconsiderable. There
are annually about 17,000 thousand persons, men,
women, and children, engaged in weaving silk;
their looms are simple, and their work is generally
executed with neatness. The number of persons
engaged in manufacturing cloth of all kinds, is about
50,000; when there is a pressing demand for work
the number of laborers is considerably increased; they.
20.


306 Description of the Nov.
occupy about 2,500 shops, averaging usually twenty
in each shop. We have heard it said, that some of
the Chinese females, who devote their time to em-
broidering the choicest of their fabrics, secure a profit
of twenty, and sometimes even twenty-five, dollars
per month ! The shoemakers are also numerous,
and they support an extensive trade; the number of
workmen is about 4,200. Those likewise who work
in wood, brass, iron, stone, and various other ma-
terials, are numerous; and those who engage in each
of these respective occupations, form, to a certain
degree, aseparate community or guild, and have each
their own laws and rules for the regulation of their
business. The book trade of Canton is important;
but we have not been able to obtain particulars con-
cerning its extent. - - -
The barbers of Canton from a separate department,
and no one is allowed to discharge the duties of
tonsor until he has obtained a license. According
to their records, the number of the fraternity in Can-
ton, at the present time, is 7,300. . .
There is another body of men here, which we
must not pass over in silence, but which we know
not how to designate or to describe; we refer to the
medical community. That these men command high
respect and esteem whenever they show themselves
skillful in their profession, there can be no doubt; it
is generally admitted also, that individuals do now
and then by long experience and observation become
able practitioners: but as a community they are any
thing, rather than masters of “the healing art.” They
are very numerous, amounting, probably, to not less
than two thousand. . . ....… o. ºf , ; , " . . . .
No inconsiderable part of the multitudo which com-
poses the population of Canton live in boats. There
are officers appointed by government to regulate and
control this portion of the inhabitants of the city.
Every boat, of all the various sizes and descriptions
which are seen here, is registered; and it appears
that the whole number, on the river adjacent the
º
|


1833. City of Canton, 307
city, is eighty-four thousand. A very large majority
of these are tan-kei (egg-house) boats; these are
generally not inore than twelve or fifteen feet long,
about six broad, and so low that a person can scarce-
ly stand up in them; their covering, which is made of
bamboo, is very light, and can be easily adjusted
to the state of the weather. Whole families live in
these boats; and in coops. lashed on the outside
of them, they often rear large broods of ducks and
chickens, designed to supply the city markets. Pas-
sage-boats, which daily move to and from the neigh-
boring villages and hamlets; ferry-boats, which are
constantly crossing and re-crossing the river; huge
canal-boats, laden with produce from the country;
cruisers; pleasure-boats, &c., complete the list of
these floating habitations, and present to the stran-
ger a very interesting scene. -
. The population of Canton is a difficult subject,
about which there has been considerable diversity
of opinion. The division of the city, which brings
a part of it into Nanhae and a part into Pwanyu,
precludes the possibility of ascertaining the exact
number of inhabitants. The facts which we have
brought into view in the preceding pages, perhaps,
will afford the best date for making an accurate
estimate of the population of the city. There are,
we have already seen, 50,000 persons engaged in
the manufaeture of cloth, 7,300 barbers, and 4,200
shoemakers; but these three occupations, employ-
ing 61,500 individuals; do not probably include more
than one fourth part of the craftsmen of the city;
allowing this to be the fact, the whole number of
mechanics will amount to 246,000. These we sup-
pose are a fourth part of the whole population, ex-
clusive of those who live on the river. In each of
the 84,000 boats there are not, on an average less
than three individuals, making a total of 252,000.
If now to these we add four times 246,000 (which is
the number of mechanics) we have a total of 1,236,000
as the probable number of inhabitants of Canton.
*


303 Description of Cantom, Nov.
.*
This number may be far from the truth; no one,
however, who has had opportunity of visiting the
city, of passing through its streets, and viewing the
multitudes that throng them, will think of its being
much less than 1,000,000.
It only remains now, in conclusion, to remark
briefly concerning the influence which Canton is
exerting on the character and destinies of this na-
tion. Intelligent natives admit that more luxury
and dissipation and crime exist here, than in any
other part of the empire; at the same time, they
maintain that more enterprise, more enlarged views,
and more general information prevail among the
higher classes of the inhabitants of Canton, than are
found in most of their other large cities: these bad
qualities are the result of a thrifty commerce acting
on those who are not guided by high moral prin-
ciples; the good, which existin a very limited degree,
result from an intercourse with ‘distant barbarians.”
The contempt and hatred which the Chinese author-
ities have often exhibited towards foreigners, and
the indifference and disdain with which the nation
generally has looked down upon everything not
their own, ought to be strongly reprobated; on the
other hand, the feelings which foreigners have often
cherished, and the disposition and conduct which
they have too frequently manifested towards this
people, are such as should never have existed; still,
notwithstanding all these disadvantages, we think
that the intercourse between the inhabitants of the
western world and the Chinese has been beneficial
to the latter. Hitherto this intercourse has been
purely commercial ; and science, literature, and all
friendly and social offices, have been disregarded;
but men are beginning to feel that they have moral
obligations to discharge, and that they are bound by
most sacred ties to interest themselves in the men-
tal improvement of their fellow-men. But concern-
ing the future influence and destiny of this city,
we cannot proceed to remark. -
,”
º


1833. Titles of Chinese Emperors. 30
9
MISC E L L A NIE S,
Titles of CHINese EMPERoRs.—The ancient monarchs of
China were distinguished by the titles, Hwang, Te," Wang, and
Teen-tsze. The two first and the last of these, bave by Europeans
commonly been translated “emperor;’ while the last but one,
wang, has been rendered “king.” This translation is conforma.
ble to the present use of the terms, and also to the opinion enter. .
tained by several writers of the middle ages, that these titles were
not applied indiscriminately to all, but were used with reference to
the monarch's rank in the esteem of the people. Others, how-
ever, contend for the perfect equality of the titles, not merely as to
the degree of sovereign power which they designate, but also in
all other respects. The various writers on this subject, are like-
wise far from being agreed respecting the derivation of the terms,
and the rules by which they were applied. It is curious to observe
them disputing this point with regard to those eras which are evi-
dently formed from antediluvian traditions, clothed in the fables of
a later period. We will make a few extracts from a modern his-
torical compilation which we have before us. It is named Yih She,
‘the Unravelment of History,’ was published in the reign of Kang-
he, A. D. 1670, and consists of 150 chapters, bound up in 50 small
Chinese volumes. The object of it is, by a comparison of the
principal old writers, however discordant in opinion, to elucidate
all the important points in Chinese history, literature, public insti-
tutions, &c. prior to the Han dynasty, B. c. 202.
“Huang,” says one, “is heaven. Heaven speaks not, yet the
seasons follow in regular succession, and all nature springs forth.
So were the three ancient huang. Without a word from them,
the people performed their duty. Their virtue was inscrutable
and boundless, like the supreme heaven; therefore they were call.
ed hwang.”—The formation of the word hwang in this work may
suggest another explanation. In the common form it is composed
of the word wang, commonly rendered king' or ruler,’ surmount.
ed by the word “clear’ or ‘manifest.” Here it is composed of the
same word surmounted by the word ‘self,’ which differs only from
the word “clear' in a single stroke. This gives the very intelligi.
ble signification of “self-ruling.’
Te is not so minutely explained as huang, with which it is now
united in the modern title of emperor. One writer says, “he whose
virtue is allied to heaven and earth is called te; he who combines
benevolence and justice, is called huang: there is a difference in
the power of each. But what does hu'ung mean Hwang is


310 Chinese Theology. Nov.
princely, excellent, great; it is the greatest and most glorious ap-
pellation of heaven. * * He who can cause annoyance to a single
individual, cannot be hueang.”
Of Wang, one says, “the inventor of writing, by drawing a link
of union through three strokes, = represented a king HE, wang.
The three are heaven, earth, and inan; and he who combines them
in equal union is the wang.”
“Teen-tsze, heaven's son,” says another, “shows plainly that
the monarch's office is to serve heaven.” A more credulous wri-
ter asserts; “the mothers of the ancient holy men, begat their
children under the influence of heaven ; therefore their sons were
called the sons of heaven.” May not this fable be founded on an
erroneous understanding of the tradition which we find recorded in
equally ambiguous terms by Mose, Gen. vi. 4 1 “There were
giants in the earth in those days; and also after that, when the
sons of God came in unto the daughters of men, and they bare
children to them; the same became mighty men which were of
old, men of renown.”
Against the idea of a gradation in the above titles are the follow-
ing authorities, founded on undisputed ancient accounts and
traditions. In the time of the Chow dynasty it was asserted,
“Our kings (wang) are the same as the ancient monarchs (te).”
In this, says the historian, “where is there any difference of rank
or eminence 7” Neither might the nobles ever assume the title
of wang, as is evident from the common saying: “Heaven
cannot have two suns; nor the people two kings (wang); nor
the nation two rulers; neither can there be two to receive
supreme honor.”—with regard then to a widely different sub-
ject, out of their own mouth can they be convicted; the earth
eannot have two Lords; for “Jehovah thy God is one Lord.”
We will not weary our readers with more than one short ad-
ditional quotation. A knowledge of these distinctions is useful
for the purpose of understanding many portions of their history,
“The combination of the terms hwang and te anciently had the
same meaning as that of hwang and wang, that is a mighty
prince :-thº were never used together as a common title, until
the time of Tsin (b. c. 220). The united term hwang-te was
then adopted, to express the possession of the whole empire. The
ancients had the titles of kung, how, pih, tsze, nan, (similar to
duke, count &c.) for their ministers;–the title wang was never
conferred on them, until the time of Han (b. c. 202). Then first,
were the meritorious servants and the sons and brothers of the
monarch styled wang (kings).”
---
CHINese Theology.—Perhaps some of our readers would be
interested to know the theology which the Chinese sages have
taught in their classic books. The native character of man has
been a prominent subject of controversy and inquiry among


1833. Chinese Theology. 311
serious men of all ages, and appears no less so at the present
time. We do not quote their sentiments indeed as of binding
authority or certain truth, but that the reader who pleases, may
compare the doctrines inculcated here, with the opinions enter-
tained among Christians, and chiefly with the Bible itself.
In the last of the Four Books, there is a discussion upon this
subject between Mencius (a disciple of Confucius,) and several
objecters. Kaou-tsze said, “Human nature resembles the willow,
and justice is like a willow basket; in forming human nature to
justice and virtue, we must do as we do when making a vessel
of willow.” Mencius replied: “Do you not thwart and twist
the nature of the willow before you make the pet-keuen vessel ?
Would you in the same manner thwart and twist human nature
to form it to justice and virtue ! If so, your doctrine would
lead all men to consider justice and virtue to be misery.”
Kaou-tsze said, “Human nature resembles the flowing of water;
cut a channel to the east, and it will run east; cut one to the
west, and it will flow west. Man's nature originally is neither
inclined to virtue or vice.” Mencius replied; “True, water prefers
neither east nor west, but does it incline neither to run up nor
down 7 Men are all naturally virtuous, the same as all water
naturally flows downward. If you strike water or leap into it, you
may cause it to rise above your head. Dam up its course, and
you may raise it to the hills; but is this the natural inclination
of water 7 No, it is impelled to do so. Human nature in the
same manner may be made to practice vice.”
Kung-too-tsze said, “Kaou-tsze says, that human nature is orig-
inally neither virtuous nor vicious. Some say that nature may be
led to virtue or vice. Hence when Wán and Woo reigned, the
people loved virtue; but when Yew and Le reigned, the people
then took pleasure in cruelty. Some say, that there are people
whose natures are radically good, and others whose natures are
radically bad. Hence, when the good Yaou reigned, there was
the incorrigible Seáng. When the unnatural Koo-sow was a
father, there was the filial Shun. Now since you say that nature
is virtuous, these various results could not have been.” Mencius
replied; “If you observe the natural dispositions you may see '
that they are virtuous; hence I say that nature is virtuous. All
men have compassionate hearts, all men have hearts which feel
Tashamed of vice, all have hearts disposed to show reverence
and respect, and all men have hearts which discriminate be-
tween right and wrong. A compassionate heart is benevo.
lence; a heart ashamed of vice is rectitude; a heart which
respects and reveres, is propriety; and a heart which clearly dis.
tinguishes right from wrong is wisdom. Now benevolence and rec.
titude, and propriety and wisdom are not melted into us from
something external; we certainly possess them of ourselves. But
many think not of this. Hence it is cautioned, “seek and you shall
obtain, let go and you shall lose;’ some do lose one, some tenfold,
and some innumerable; thus they do not improve their natural,


1833. and Chinese Officers. 813
Let us begin with the ministers of the imperial Cabinet of
Peking, which holds daily sessions. Its inembers are sixteen
in number. The first is a Mantchou, the second a Chinese ;
thus alternately through the highest six grades. Four of the
ten inferior in rank, are Chinese, so that nine of the sixteen
ministers, are either Mantchous or Mongols. Besides this
Cabinet, there is a Privy Council, the names of whose members
we do not know ; but they are selected from all the higher
stations, without any exact rule as to rank or number. - - -
The six supreme Tribunals of state, together consist of thirty-
six members. Each tribunal has two presidents, a Mantchou
, and a Clinese. The vice presidents are twenty-four, who also
are alternately Mantchou and Chinese ; so that eighteen of the
thirty-six are of the conqueror's race. The president of the
national college, Hanlin, is a Chinese. -
If we now leave Peking, and examine the officers throughout
the eighteen provinces which compose China Proper, we shall
obtain the following results. The highest provincial officers are
the governors, of whom there are but eight. Five of these
have each two provinces, one has three, and the remaining two
have each a large province under his jurisdiction. These high
servants of the emperor each have dominion over a country
not inferior to a small kingdom; often exceeding the island of
Great Britain two or three times in territory, and not less superior
in proportion of population. Six of the eight governors are Chinese,
and thirteen of eighteen provinces, are therefore ruled by the “sons
of Han.” Next in rank to these officers are the lieutenant-
governors, of whom there are fifteen in all. Ten of these are
Chinese. -
If again we enumerate in the order of rank, the governors,
lieut.-governors, commanders-in-chief of the military forces, the
treasurers, criminal judges, and the literary chancellors, reckon-
ing all in these seven grades, we shall find the whole number
in all the provinces to be 102, and that seventy-three of these
are Chinese. Thus the ratio of Chinese to Mantchous, as
found in the seven highest provincial posts, is more than two
to one. But it should be remembered also that the ratio of
the Chinese population to that of the Mantchous, is probably
as twenty or thirty to one.
REMARKs, concerNING THE condition of FEMALEs IN ChiNA.
—It has been justly remarked that a nation's civilization may be
estimated by the rank which females hold in society. If the civili-
zation of China be judged of by this test, she is surely far from
occupying that first place which she so strongly claims. Females
have always been regarded with contempt by the Chinese. Their
ancient sages scem to have considered them scarcely worthy of
- 2P


314 Condition of Pºmulcs. Nov.
their attention. The sum of the duties they require them to per-
form is, to submit to the will of their masters. The lady, say
they, who is to be betrothed to a husband ought to follow
blindly the wishes of her parents, yielding inplicit obedience to
their will. From the monent when she is joined in wedlock, she
ceases to exist—her whole being is absorbed in that of her lord.
She ought to know nothing but his will, and to deny herself in
order to please him. Pan Hwuypan, who is much admired as
a historian, composed a book of instructions for her own sex, in
which she treats of their proper station in society, the deportment
they should exhibit, and the duties they ought to perform. She
teaches them that they “ hold the lowest rank among mankind,
and that employments the least honorable ought to be, and in fact
are, their lot.” She inculcates entire submission to their husbands,
and tells them in very plain terms that they ought to becomo
abject slaves in order to be good wives. We cannot expect
that these doctrines, inculcated as they are by a lady, who ought
to advocate the cause of her sex, and by one held in so high repute
as is Pan Hwuypan, will be overlooked by the “lords of creation;”
cspecially as they accord so perfectly with their domineering
disposition in China.
Confucius, the prince of letters, divorced his wife without assign.
ing any cause for doing it; and his followers have invariably adopt-
ed similar arbitrary measures in their treatment of the weaker sex.
The price which is paid to the parents of the bride constitutes her
at once a saleable commodity, and causes her to be regarded as
differing little from a mere slave. In the choice of a partner for
life she acts only a passive part. She is carried to the house of
the bridegroom, and there disposed of for life by her parents.
The birth of a female is a matter of grief in China. The father
and mother, who had ardently hoped, in the unborn babe, to em-
brace a son, feel disappointed at the sight of a wretched daughter.
Many vows and offerings are made before their idols in order to
propitiate their favor and secure the birth of a son. The mercy
of the compassionate Kwanyin especially, is implored to obtain
this precious gift; but after they have spent large sums of money in
this pious work, the inexorable goddess fills the house with mourn-
ing at the birth of a daughter. “Anciently,” says Pan Hu'uypan,
“the female infant was thrown upon some old rags by the side
of its mother's bed, and for three days was scarcely spoken or
thought of. At the end of that time it was carried to a temple
by the father, accompanied by attendants with bricks and tiles
in their hands.” “The bricks, and tiles,” says Pan-Hwuypan
in her comment on these facts, “signify the contempt and suf.
fering which are to be her companions and her portion. Bricks
are of no use except to form inclosures, and to be trodden under
foot; and tiles are useless except when they are exposed to the
injuries of the air.”—The She King, one of the vonerated an-
cient books, says, -


1833. Condition of Females. 315
When a daughter is born,
“She sleeps on the ground,
“She is clothed with a wrapper, -
“She plays with a tile;
- “She is incapable either of evil or good."
This last assertion is explained thus: “If she does ill, she is not
a woman : and if she does well, she is not a woman; a slavish
submission is her duty and her highest praise.” At the present
day, as well as anciently, the female infant is not unfrequently
an object of disgust to its parents, and of contempt to all the
inmates of the family. As she grows up, her feet are so confin-
ed and crumped that they can never exceed the size of infancy,
and render it impossible for her ever to walk with ease or safety.
Small feet, that badge of bondage, which deprives them of the
power of locomotion, confines them to the inner apartments, ex-
cept when poverty forces them to earn their livelihood abroad by
labor, which they render exceedingly difficult and painful.
Females of the higher class seldom leave the house, except in
sedan chairs. Their lives are but an honorable captivity. They
have few or no real enjoyments; are ignorant of almost every.
thing—very few of them being able to read, and live and die
little more than mere ciphers in human society. Pale and ema.
ciated, these spend the greatest part of their lives in embellish.
ing their persons; while females of the poorer classes, whose feet
are necessarily permitted to grow to the size which the God of
nature designed, perform all the drudgery of husbandry and other
kinds of work. These last are in general very industrions, and
prove to be helpmates to their husbands. Being remarkable for
their good, sound understanding, they manage their families
with a great deal of care and prudence ; and so far as industry
and economy are concerned, they are exemplary mothers. Not.
withstanding the degradation in which they are held, they are
generally far 'superior in intellect to the common cast of Asiatic
women. They are very ingenious in their needle work, and
the like; and to be a good mother, in the entimation of this
class of the Chinese, a woman must be a weaver. But it is to
be regretted that they have very little regard for the cleanliness
of either their persons or houses. Their children crawl in the
dirt, and the few articles of furniture in their dwellings are co-
vered with filth.
Infanticide of females is not unknown among the Chinese.
They are far from regarding this crime with the horror it deserves.
“It is only a female,” is the answer generally given when they
are reproved for it. -
May the Father of mercies soon send his glorious gospel to
China, that woman here may be raised from her present degradation.
It is Christianity alone, that assigns to woman her proper rank :
and secures the rights of the weaker sex against the encroachments
of the stronger. In vain shall we expect any great amelioration
of the moral condition of this nation, so long as the wife, the


316 Navigation of the Nov.
daughter, the sister, and the mother are regarded and treated as
slaves. Where females do not mingle in society, the manners of
the other sex become coarse and inelegant. All the finer feelings
of human nature, which can be produced only by the friendly and
happy intercourse of the social and domestic circle, where the
sexes meet on terms of intellectual and moral as well as civil
equality, are of course unknown. This is too much the case in
China; and the “celestial empire,” with its boasted high state
of civilization, is peopled by men, unpolished by the influence
which the mild and amiable qualities of female companions never
fail to exert upon the manners of “the sterner sex.” This
remark Inight be considered trivial, were it not that the influence
which the seclusion of females has upon Chinese society, is
too baneful to be regarded with indifference. How much does
China lose in consequence of the incapacity of its mothers to
instruct their children, during that early age when the mind is
most easily made to prefer activity to sluggishness, and the heart
to receive its first and strongest bias to virtue or to vice. Were
this deficiency supplied, children would receive the first and
best rudiments of knowledge, before they are old enough to
enter a school; and mothers, instead of the insults and con-
tempt which they now have to endure, would be treated with
kindness and respect.
NAvig Arion of the YANGTszE KEANG.-Several attempts,
which have been made to penetrate into the interior of China, have
proved abortive. The anti-social policy of the celestial empire,
which excludes all foreigners from its dominions, greatly impedes
the progress of enterprises, which are advancing with a steady
and majestic step, and must eventually break down the tyranny
of despots. Fully aware of the difficulties of maintaining a friendly
... intercourse with the Chinese, we might readily subscribe to the
opinion, generally entertained, that this country is inaccessible to
foreigners, if we did not believe that the wall which separates it
from the rest of the world is mostly imaginary. In the minds of
the Chinese generally, there exists no hostility against foreigners;
on the contrary, they are often very fond of strangers. But to
barbarians, who presume to think that man has a natural right
to maintain free intercourse with his fellow-men, and who do not
respect the boundaries which a crooked policy has prescribed for
itself and others, the Chinese government is opposed. Yet what
are a few unprincipled men against hosts of enlightened indivi-
duals’
Central Asia, hemmed in on one side by savage tribes, extensive
deserts and high mountains, and on the other by an ancient em-
pire which forbids research and repels & intruders,” has hitherto
remained unexplored. But shall its inhabitants and its produc-
tions continue to be secluded, and shut up from the enterprising


1833. - Yungtsze keting. 317
men of the nineteenth century | Has not human ingenuity and
perseverance, under the guidance of divine Providence, often over.
come greater obstacles than now impede our progress into central
Asia? Have not the Russians penetrated to the utmost confines
of the frozen regions of Siberia? Are not modern adventurers,
even at this moment, traversing the burning sands of Africa, and
vigorously pursuing their way through regions hitherto unexplor-
ed? A tour through the whole of central Asia presents advan-
tages, to be gained for religion, science and commerce, far greater
than any other similar enterprise which now engages the attention
of scientific and philanthropic men.
But is such an undertaking possible 1 is it possible to reach
those remote regions and open there a highway for the nations?
The Yangtsze keting, one of the finest rivers in the world, takes its
rise some degrees beyond the source of the Yellow river, in Tsing-
hae or Koko-nor. On its way down to Szechuen, it is called
Muhloosoo; but soon after entering Szechuen it takes the name
of Kin-sha, “golden-sanded,' and runs southward through Yun-
nan, and then northward through those parts of Szechuen which
are inhabited by subdued Meacutsze. lt afterwards takes the
well known name Yangtsze keting, which it retains as it flows on
through Szechuen, Hoopih, the northern parts of Keāngse,
Ganhwuy, and Keāngsoo, to the sea. This river is broad, deep,
and sometimes rapid; and from its long course and the number of
provinces through which it passes, it has been called “the girdle
of China.’ In some places it spreads out so as to form islands,
upon which rushes grow abundantly; and many of the most fertile
and densely populated parts of the Chinese empire are found
along its banks. Having a central course, in respect to the pro-
vinces, it is easily connected by canals with many other rivers,
and forms a most extensive inland water communication. The
boats which are employed on the Yangtsze keång are very nume.
rous, and with little difficulty they can ascend almost to its source,
Thus while this noble river affords great facilities for traversing the
most fertile parts of China Proper, it brings the adventurer into .
Tibet, near to other waters which flow southward through the
territories of British India. There is no doubt that by means of
these rivers a communication might be opened between some
of the principal cities and marts of India and those of China.
In order to obtain a more perfect knowledge of the Yangtsze
keñng, let us take a survey of it through its whole course. The
mouth of the river is about twenty miles broad; it is in lat. 31?
34° N., lon. 120° 32' E. from Greenwich. There are extensive
banks near its entrance, and the whole island of Tsungming is an
alluvial deposit formed by the waters of the river. Near the
mouth of the Yangtsze keång, are some of the largest and richest
cities of China. Soochow foo, the Chinese Arcadin, and the
most beautiful of all their cities, is in lat. 31° 23° N., lon. 120°20'
E. Shanghae heen, a very extensive and important mart, is in
lat. 31°9′ N., lon. 121° 4' E. Both of these places, by means


3.18 Religious Worship Nov.
of canals, are connected with the Yangtsze keing ; indeed almost
all the important cities which are near the river, are united with it
by canals. Not far southward are Keāng-foo and Hangchow;
both of them are important cities; the latter is the capital of Che-
keång. On the northern shore, is Haemun, which has a fort for
the defense of the river, but it is utterly dismantled. Beyond Hae-
mun northward, is Tungchow; westward on the banks of the riv-
er, in lon. 120° 4', is Tsingkeing heen; and opposite to it is Yin-
keång heen. - -
Passing on westward through the province of Keāngsoo, the
first cities we meet with are Taechow, Changchow foo, and
Chinkeing foo, all of which carry on a brisk trade. Nanking,
or Keāngning foo, in lat. 32° 44' N., lon. 118° 38' E., is only a
league from the Yangtsze keång, with which it is connected by
canals. Nanking, as a commercial city, is too well known to need
any further description in this connection. Before leaving the
province of Keāngsoo, in ascending the river, we find it diminish-
ed to a mile in breadth, but covered with boats, some of which are
of two hundred tons burden. * , -
The first remarkable city, which we find in Ganhwuy, is Tae.
ping foo in lat. 31° 38' N., lon. 118°24' E., on the southern banks
of the river. Opposite to the city is Ho-chow; and the whole
adjacent country is fertile and well cultivated. Further onward is
Woowei chow and Ganking foo; this last city, which is the
capital of the province, is situated in lat. 30° 37' N., and lon. 116°
55° E. - - -
Proceeding up the river, we pass through the northern extremity
of Keāngse, and enter the province of Hoopih. The river here
receives several tributary streams, the principal of which is the
Han keang, which comes down from the northwest, and falls into
the Yangtsze keang, near Hanyang foo, in lat. 30° 34' N., lon.
114° 384 E.; this place is near Woochang foo, the capital of
the province, in lat. 30° 34' N., lon. 114° 35' E. The river here
bends southward, and almost reaches the Tungting lake; and
then northward to Szechuen. In this province the majority of
the commercial cities stand on the Yangtsze keång, which winds
its way through a hilly country, and is increased by several streams
which fall into it, some from the north, and some from the south.
From Szechuen, it stretches on in a northwest direction to Koko-
nor or Tsing-hae, but its sources are not well defined. The re-
gions of Koko-nor and Tibet are well watered, and give birth to
several important rivers, which flow southward. The traveler,
having now surveyed these upper countries, might then select his
route, and descend to the British possessions in Burmah or Bengal.
.* . . . r
* * *: *** * . . .
RELIGiors worship of the JAPANEse.—We have pleasure
in giving to our readers the following remarks on the religious


1833, of the Jupanese. 319
worship of the Japanese, from the pen of Dr. G. H. Burger, who
a few years since paid a visit to China. He had, previous to his
arrival here, been for sometime resident in Japan; and he is now,
we believe, continuing his researches in that country. We ought
perhaps to apologize to him for publishing remarks which were
not prepared by him for the press, but only for private informa-
tion.
A few observations on the paper before us are necessary. The
writer is not strictly correct when he says, that the Japanese
form of worship has no resemblance to the Chinese, as those
who are acquainted with the latter will readily perceive. The
difference is however very great. Dr. Burger has fallen into an
error which we have already had once or twice to notice; that
of deducing the name Fo (or Fuh), Budha, from Fohi (or Fuh-
he), the first monarch, of what the Chinese consider the doubtful
period of their history;—a period, it appears to us, founded on
traditionary recollections of the antediluvian ages. Nothing
can be more erroneous than this confusion of names; yet the
Asiatic Journal defends it without meeting with correction from
any of the sinologues of Europe. -
But the doctor has committed a more serious error in confound.
ing the Budhistic and the Brahminical religions, between which
there exists a wide difference. To point out the difference would
however take up more time than we can now spare to the subject.
What Dr. Burger calls the hereditary, is the same that is com-
monly termed the ecclesiastical, emperor. On this subject, M.
Klaproth says (in the Journal Asiatique for Feb. 1833.): “It is
a wide spread error among us, that there exist in Japan two em-
perors, ecclesiastical and civil. We give the first epithet to the
Dairi, or real emperor; and the other to the Seogoun (in Chinese
tseñngkeun or general), who, in fact, is but the first military dig-
nitary in the empire, or general in chief of the army. It is true
that the seogouns have usurped the supreme power, and that by
this act the Dairi is placed under their influence; but this state of
things, though confirmed by long usage, is illegal, and the seogoun.
is not even in Japan, considered in any other light than as the first
officer of the Dairi, and in no way as a second emperor. Nor is
the dignity of the last merely ecclesiastical, as is generally believ-
ed; he is a monarch, like any other, but a monarch whose ances.
tors have had the weakness to let the power be usurped by the
military chief of the empire.”
In the account of the ancient burial rites of the Japanese, we
observe a striking resemblance to those of the Chinese; among
whom the burial of men and animals in the tombs of emperors
was retained even so late as the Yuen or Mongol dynasty, in the
13th century. In the words of Confucius, as quoted by Mencius,
we find also mention made of the custom of burying images of
human beings in graves. The says, “they who commenced the
use of wooden images (in place of bundles of straw hearing but
a faint resenblance to the human form), shall they not be without


320 - Religious Worship - Nov.
progeny ‘’’ This remark shows how far the “great sage’ carried
his hatred of so inhuman a practice, since he regarded even
a nearer approach to the resemblance of human beings worthy of
such punshment.—But we turn now to the paper of Dr. Burger.
He says,
“The form of religious worship in Japan especially the old form,
has no resemblance whatever to any of the cotemporary Chinese;
the earlier inhabitants of Japan had a peculiar form, which being
respected as that of their ancestors, has maintained itself to this
day, as well in the hut of the peasant as in the palace of the hered-
itary emperor. Being generally liked, it is not only tolerated, but
even protected and venerated, by government; and even at the
present time it might be named as the the positive religion of the
Japanese, had not political causes obliged the subjects openly
to acknowledge one of the sects of Buddoo. The doctrines,
views, and mode of explaining the ancient worship of the Japan-
ese, are in no essential points similar to those of Buddoo ; and
although by a contact of a thousand years they appear to have
more or less amalgamated, yet they are kept strictly and rigor-
ously separate by the present theologists of Japan.
“The Sintoo form of religious worship.–The name Sintoo
was introduced of late years as a denomination of the old religion,
in distinction from the new one, that of Buddoo. The first is
called Sintoo,” the way of the Spirit; the second Buddoo or
Budtoo, the way of God. The principal articles of faith, and
the rites of the Sintoo service are the following: -
“The originators and founders of the Japanese empire are
held to be the descendants of the sun and moon, and particularly
Ten-syoo-dai-zin, or in pure Japanese, Amaterasu-oho-kami, is
the supreme Being, the highest deity. The pure Sintoo worship
recognizes no higher being or spirit than him. The hereditary
emperors spring from this divine race, which descended from
heaven upon the Japanese land, and are genuine representations
and followers of Ten-syoo-dai-zin: by their title of Ten-zi, sons of
heaven, they recognize their divine origin. The race also can
never become extinct; for in case of a failure in the succession, a
descendant is sent from heaven to the childless Ten-zi. Even
at the present day, in case the hereditary emperor has no progeny,
a child from some noble family is chosen by the emperor himself,
and by an arranged secret convention is found under one of the
trees of the palace, and as sent from heaven is established heir of
the throne. The spirit of their ruler is immortal, and this also
confirms the faith of the people in the existence of the soul after
death; thus the idea of immortality exists, and with it, that of
rewards for the good, and punishments for the bad; as also that of
a place to which the spirit goes after death. Their paradise is
called Takamakahava; their hell Ne-no-kuni, the land in the
* An analysis of the signification of this and most of the following Japanese
words will be found at the end of this paper.


1833. of the Japanese. 321
root [bottom or lower part] of the earth. Here the spirit must
answer for itself before its heavenly judges. The good, rewarded,
remove to takamakahava, and are received into the ranks of the
heavenly rulers. The wicked are punished and cast down into
the abyss, ne-no-kuni. In the worship of the kami, (spirits or
gods,) particular dwellings for them are erected on earth, which
are called mia ; these are temples of various sizes, and built of
wood; the smaller of lignum vitae, the larger of cypress. In the
centre of them, slips of paper fastened to pieces of lignum vitae,
are deposited as emblems of the godhead, and called gohei.
These gohei are to be found in every Japanese house, where they
are preserved in simall shrines, on an elevated spot. At both sides
of the mia, stand flower-pots with green boughs, generally of the
myrtle or pine ; then two lamps, a cup of tea, and several vessels
filled with the liquor sake. Here every Japanese, morning and
evening, offers his prayers to the creator Ten-syoo-dai-zin. Large,
single standing gates and triumphal arches (in which I thought
was discernible an order of architecture peculiar to the Japanese,)
lead to the temples, which, with the dwellings of the priests and
other buildings, frequently form extensive and stately edifices.
Before the dwellings of the kami, two dogs, called Roma-in,
are placed ; and before those of Ten-svoo-dai-zin two guards
called Sarutihako. These creatures, of a peguliar shape, are
said to have been the guides and guardians of Ten-syoo-dai-zin.
They are also at popular festivals, carried in procession before
the god;—the one named Ho-no-oo is adored as the tutelar god
to protect men from fire; the other Mizu-oo, to guard them from
water.
“Daily, occasionally, or at appointed times, as on the anni-
versaries (matsuri) of births and deaths, prayers and gifts are
offered to the spirits of the founders of the empire, of good rulers,
and of meritorious statesmen to the praise and honor of such
godlike beings (kami). These periods are often celebrated as
national festivals; however to the highest kami, Ten-syoo-dai-
zin, the pious cannot address their prayers directly, but by in-
tercessors and mediators between this supreme deity and his
children on earth. These are called Syu-go-zin, watching and
protecting gods. All kami, except Ten-syoo-dai-zin, are tutelar
gods; and as animals have often been serviceable to kami, they
also are adored as protecting deities; such for instance as foxes,
hares, &c. B sides some flower-pots, a bell, a drum, and some
other musical instruments, there is a mirror (kagami) near the
habitation of the kami, signifying here the purity and clearness
of the soul. Several writers appear to have confounded the
mirrors used in the Sintoo worship with those employed in that
of Buddoo. Thunberg and Malte-Brun have done so, both
having copied from Kaempfer.
“On stated occasions, but mostly at the beginning and middle
of the month, various eatables, as rice, mille", cakes, fish, &c., are
offered to the kami and to their tutelar gods. In very ancient
Q


322 Religious Worship Nov.
times, human sacrifices were offered to the watching and pro-
tecting gods, among which are the nine headed dragon, &c.
These evil creatures were looked upon as attendants of the
divinity, and it was sought to reconcile them to mankind
by offering such dear pledges taken out of the family. In ge-
neral the victim was a beautiful and innocent daughter. It is
permitted to the followers of this religion to kill animals, and
to stain themselves with blood; the priests also may marry. The
dead are buried in coffins resembling a mia or temple; and in
former times, when men of rank died, a number of their de-
pendents and friends were buried with them in their graves;
in later times they used to rip up their own bellies, that they
might follow their deceased masters and friends after death. In
the 33d year of the reign of Suizintenoo, (A. d. 3,) these usages
were interdicted, but they still maintained themselves till the
time of Taiko (A. p. 1650). They also used in lieu of human
beings, clay images, which are frequently dug up even at the
present day.
“The Buddoo form of religious worship.—This religion was
probably first introduced from China, through Corea, into Japan,
A. D. 540; and was confirmed A. D. 576 by the introduction of
the image of Syaka (Shakia, in Chinese Shikya,) likewise from
Corea. According to the accounts of learned Japanese, the
dogmas of this religion are divided into classes, distinguished
as a higher and lower doctrine of faith.
“The higher doctrine rests on the following foundation. “Man
derives his origin from nothing, and therefore has no evil in
himself; the impressions of the world without, bring out in him
the first seeds of evil, from which also he derives his first ideas
of wickedness. One must therefore seek to guard himself against
these impressions, which is done, by singly and alone following
the bent of the soul which lives within us. This is the deity
itself, which guides our actions. Hence no worshiping of idols is
permitted. The human body sprung from nothing, and after death
returns to nothing. The soul survives; that of the wicked floats
eternally in the void of space; that of the good reposes in the palace
of the deity, from whence, if the inhabitants of the world should
require the assistance of a virtuous man, it is sent from heaven to
occupy another human body.”
“The lower doctrine of Buddoo, which properly is the religion
of the people, is thus explained. “There is on the other side a
great judge called Emaoo ; before him stands a large mirror, in
which the actions of all men are imaged forth. Near this mirror
stand two evil spirits, servants to Emaoo, who observe all the
actions of the inhabitants of earth in the mirror, and report them
to the king. The one on the right hand is called Doo-soo-zin, the
quick-eared spirit; the one on the left, Doo-me-zin, the “quick-
sighted spirit.’ A third spirit at the side of the king takes down all
the reports in writing, by which the souls of the dead are judged.”


1833. of the Japanese. 323
But properly the souls of the dead, both good and evil, are sent to
their rewards and punishments by six different roads. This con-
firms their belief of the transmigration of souls. These roads are:—
1. Gokurak, the road to paradise.
2. Ningen, the road to the world of men, or perhaps, to the men
of the earth.
3. Syura, the road to the fighting hell.
4. Gaki, the road to the starving hell.
5. Tsikusyo, the road to the animal hell.
6. Ten-nin, the road to the men of heaven.
“Amida, the receiving, helping, and saving god, is the principal
deity and dweller in paradise. There are five commandments,
given as rules for the guidance of human actions, viz.,
1. Moogo, not to lie.
2. Z'yain, not to commit adultery.
3. Sewasyoo, not to kill any living creature.
4. Insyoo, not to get drunk.
5. Tsyootoo, not to steal.
“'These two chief branches of the doctrine of Buddoo, spread
again into several ramifications; and there are now in Japan the
following sects which are tolerated by government.
1. Zen ; of which there are three subdivisions, viz. Rinzai,
Syootoo, and Oobak, named after Chinese monks;
2. Zyoodo; 3. Hokke ;
4. Tendai ; 5. Singon;
6. Gusya; 7. Z'yoosits;
8. Sitzoo. These eight sects now divide the various doctrines
of Buddoo (Buddoo signifies the same as Syaka); they are nam-
ed from their books, principles, or earlier habitations, whereof I
will give the following brief particulars.
Zen means literally sitting quiet, sunk back in perfect repose
of thought.
Zyoodo means holy land, and thus indicates the belief in a holy
land.
Hokke, Gusya, Z'yoosits, and Sitzoo are names of the books
bequeathed by their authors.
Tendai is termed thus from a mountain and temple of that
name in China. (Query, Hindostan 1)
Singon means to repeat true psalms.
“The two last named sects, in their doctrines and prayers make
use of the Indian writing, known under the name of the old Deva-
Nagari. They themselves call it Bonzi. It is also written in
the books Ziki and Sittan mata teimon, that they are received by
the Brahmins.
“Beside these two principal religions, there now exists also the
sect of Syuntoo, i. e. the morality of Confucius, which has existed
in Japan, since A. D. 59. Here also, as in China, its only object
is a virtuous life in this world, without troubling its followers
about aught that may occur after death.


324 Japanese Religion. Nov.
“Lastly, we observe also the sect of Jamabus, literally “mountain
soldiers,' properly magicians, proceeding from two of the sects of
Buddoo, viz. Tendai and Singon. These Jamabus, whose exter-
nal appearance much resembles the priests of the abovementioned
sects, except in some insignia, are particularly distinguished from
all other priests and monks of Buddoo, by being permitted to eat
flesh and to marry, which are most rigorously forbidden to the
former.
“From this superficial statement of the dogmas and divisions
of Buddooism, the religion will at once be recognized as that of
Fo, Foe, or Fohi of Syaka ; in short as the brahminical religion
which began in India about 2,800 years since, and has latterly
spread over the southeastern parts of Asia. The more its doctrines
were thrown into a form, comprehensible to the people, so much
the more profuse it became in the use of images. One may there-
fore easily fancy the erection of innumerable temples filled with
multifarious and polymorphous symbols and attendants of the dei-
ties, to consecrate and direct the sensuality of the common people.
“Foe is also known to the present Japanese. They affix this
name to everything possessing the power of doing anything ex-
traordinary. It is therefore an attribute of the deity, of all Budds
and kami, and there are consequently innumerable Fo; l allude
to the Fo of the learned, which is sometimes called Syaka, some-
times Budda, and who is the founder of the brahminical religion.”
ANALysis of THE JAPANESE words.
Sin-too: from sin, or zin, spirit, god, properly spirit of god, and
too, law, way.
Bud-doo: from budd, god or Budha, and too (for euphony read
doo), way.
Ten-zi : from ten heaven, and zi, child, son; the emperor.
Ne-no-oo: from hi or fi, fire, no, the possessive sign, and oo, great
lord; the lord of fire.
Mizu-oo: from mitz', water and oo, great lord; the lord of water.
Syu-go-zin: from syu, watching, go, protecting, and zin, spirit or
god; the tutelar gods or intercessors.
E-ma-oo: from e, flame, ma evil, and oo, king or great lord; the
judge of hades.
Doo-soo-zin : from doo, quick, soo ear, and zin, spirit or god; the
quick-eared spirit.
Doo-me-zin : from doo, quick, me, sight, and zin, god or spirit; the
quick-sighted spirit.
A-mi-da: from a, receiving, mi, saving and da, helping; this is
one of the Indian attributes of Budha. w
Syun-to : from syun, moral, and too, way or law; the principles of
Confucius. -
Jama-bus : from jama, mountain, and bus, soldier; the sect of
.Jamabus.


1833. Choo's Farewell Address, 325
Choo's FAREwell. Address.-The late lieut.-governor of Canton,
when about to retire, published a sort of farewell address to
the people, in eight verses, which were printed and sold in the
streets. The manner of doing such things in China is a little
different from that in India and other places, when a favorite
officer retires, although the principle is much the same ; each
party flatters and praises the other, and so both are pleased.
However in Choo's case, there was no dinner, nor speech-
making; nor was there a letter or address sent to him with a
great many signatures; yet he put forth the following, which
shows somewhat of the mind and feelings of men in China:—
Having been long ill, I requested and obtained permission of
the emperor to return to my native village. The scholars (or
gentry) and common people heard the announcement with alarm,
talked about it, and some even wept. When I heard this my
feelings were wounded, and I wrote the following disconnected
verses to console, and excite them to virtue.
Yu kei seen she-show joo fung;
Leſing tae e jin—taou Yué chung :
Kin jih keu jen—che sze tsee :
Hang tseting tso tih—Le we hung;
&c. &c. &c.
From ancient days, my fathers trod the path
Of literary fame, and placed their names
Among the wise; two generations past,
Attendant on their patrons, they have come
To this provincial city.” Here this day,
'T is mine to be imperial envoy;
Thus has the memory of ancestral fame
Ceased not to stimulate this feeble frame.
My father held an office at Lungchow,f
And deep imprinted his memorial there;—
He was the sure and generous friend
Of learning unencouraged and obscure.
When now I turn my head and travel back,
In thought to that domestic hall, it seems
As yesterday, those early happy scenes;–
How was he pained, if forced to be severe!
From times remote, Kwangtung has been renowned
For wise and mighty men; but none can stand
*The Chinese have a great affection for the place of their nativity, and
consider being in any of the other provinces like being in a foreign settle.
ment. They always wish to return thither in life, or have their remains
carried and interred there after death.
f A district in the province of Canton.


326
Choo's Farewell Address. Nov.
Among them, or compare with Keuh Keāng:—*
Three idle and inglorious years are past,
And I have raised no monument of fame,
By shedding round the rays of light and truth,
To give the people knowledge. In this heart
I feel the shame, and cannot bear the thought.
But now, in flowered pavilions, in street
Illuminations, gaudy shows, to praise
The gods and please themselves, from year to year
The Inodern people vie, and boast themselves,
And spend their hard earned wealth, and all in vain,
For what shall be the end ? Henceforth let all
Maintain an active and a useful life,
The sober husband and the frugal wife.
The gracious statesman, [gov. Loo.) politic and wise,
Is my preceptor and my long tried friend;
Called now to separate, spare our farewell,
The heart rending words affection loves so well ;
That he may still continue to exhort
The people, and instruct them to be wise,
To practice virtue, and to keep the laws
Of ancient sages, is my constant hope.
When I look backward o'er the field of fame
Where I have traveled a long fifty years,
The struggle for ambition and the sweat
For gain, seem altogether vanity.
Who knoweth not that heaven's toils are close,
Infinitely close ! Few can escape.t -
Ah! how few great men reach a full old age
How few, unshorn of honors, end their days'
Inveterate disease has twined itself
Around me, and binds me in slavery.
The kindness of his majesty is hight
And liberal, admitting no return,
Unless a grateful heart; still my eyes
Will see the miseries of the people.—
Unlimited distresses, mournful, sad,
To the mere passer by, awaking grief.
• Keuh Keāng was an ancient minister of state, during the Tang dynasty.
His imperial master would not listen to his advice, and he therefore retired.
Rebellion and calamities arose. The emperor thought of his faithful ser-
vant, and sent for him; but he was already dead.
t The natives consider this sentence an insinuation unfavorable to the
monarch, and amounting almost to treason. It is well for Choo that he is
not going to Peking, where some friend might bring this verse to his majesty's
notice.
: In permitting Choo to retire from public life.


1833. Superstition and Idolatry. 327
Untalented, unworthy, I withdraw,
Bidding farewell to this windy, dusty world;
Upwards I look to the supremely good—
The emperor, to choose a virtuous man
To follow me. Henceforth it will be well.—
The measures and the merits passing mine;
But I shall silent stand, and see his grace
Diffusing blessings like the genial spring.
These hasty lines are written by Choo Kweiching of Kinling,
in Cheketing province.
The auove, in the original, is considered a tolerable specimen
of Chinese verse. Of poetry it contains nothing. Choo seems
unhappy. He finds nothing to satisfy the immortal mind. Would
that he knew and would receive the glorious gospel which brings
life and immortality to light.
Superstition AND Idolatry.—These are words of a very in-
definite meaning, judging by their application in the western world.
We give below, what we consider examples of these abominations,
not meaning, however, that there are none elsewhere.
The Peking Gazette of the 26th of the 5th moon of the current
year, the 13th of Taoukwang, contains a Nong document con-
cerning Shoo-hing-tae, a Mungkoo Tartar, who, while he held the
office of major in his majesty's cavalry during the wars in Cashgar,
became ill of a pulmonary disease, which disabled him from doing
duty on horseback. He was afraid of being dismissed, and there-
fore sent in his resignation, but did not wait for an answer. He
disappeared for a long period; at last he was seized by the police
of Peking in a huckster's shop, where having engaged in a dispute,
he had recourse to blows. Being taken into custody for breaking
the peace, he was required to give an account of himself. The
account he gave was so unsatisfactory, that he was considered a
suspicious person. The present emperor of China is actually, as
well as nominally, “the first magistrate,” the head of the police;
and he also thought the major a “suspicious person,” especially
because of his having changed his name, and that more than once.
Shoo-hing-tae's case as stated by himself, was as follows. The
reader will judge of the propriety of the term superstition, which
we have prefixed to his recital. When he found himself ill of a
dangerous disease, and unfit for the emperor's service, he made a
vow, that if he should recover, he would become a priest of the
Taou sect, quit the world, and visit, in order to worship, the five
great mountains of China. He was restored to health, and went
to the flowery hills of Shense, and was ordained a priest. Hav-
ing effected this, and in the temple of “thunder's ancestor,’ wor-
shiped Koo-jin-chaou as his master, he set out upon his pilgrimage
to the five great mountains, calling at his mother's house in his


323 Idolatry and Superstition. Nov.
way, when unluckily he fell into the dispute in the huckster's
shop. About his person were found some doctor's and astrologer's
books, on which he had written his name, differently from the
name taken at his ordination. This, he said, arose from careless-
ly writing his familiar, boyish name, mixed with his priestly name.
He was sent back to Shense, where he had obtained priest's
orders, to be there tried by the local magistrates, and confronted
with his professed spiritual master. In his vow, he limited his ef.
forts to the term of ten years, but was cured at an earlier period.
The idolatry we refer to, appears in the Peking gazette for the
5th moon, 25th day. There, the fooyuen of Kwangse, and Loo,
the governor of Canton, on their knees beseech his imperial majes.
ty to confer honors on an old idol goi, the image of a man named
Chin, who lived in the time of the Sung dynasty. The reason for
this special favor, in conferring which, his majesty is requested to
manifest his compassionate kindness to the gods, is, that during
the late highland rebellion, which is not yet forgotten, this idol
showed wonderful power and was marvelously preserved. It
was much esteemed, and on the descent of the mountaineers, much
prayed to ; and in consequence, the rebels passed the villages near
where it stood without burning them. Afterwards, these same re-
bels were caught and tied with cords in the idol's temple. At mid-
night they attempted to unloose themselves, while the guards inside
were asleep. But a red flaine issued from the idol's temple, and
alarmed the troops outside. The plot was discovered, and a heavy
fire of artillery opened upon the prisoners within, by which they
were all killed. Still, notwithstanding all the cannonading, the
idol remained unhurt. The walls were battered by the shot, but
the image remained entire. For these divine services in behalf of
the reigning dynasty, the governor and lieut.-governor solicit the
emperor to conſer the honor of a new tablet upon the idol's temple.
Surely it is hard to tell whether one should laugh or weep at this.
Men, educated men, and thought fit to be governors over millions,
thus petitioning for honors to be conferred on—what? Why, a
block of wood it may be, or a piece of stone ! Again, petitioning
the emperor to shew his compassion to the gods! Doubtless
they need it; and much good will the idol derive from his new
honors.
But it is better to feel our spirits stirred within us, as Paul
did when he saw the idolatry of the Athenians. Tell us, ye, who
acknowledge Jehovah as your God, the Author of your every good,
of the world in which you live, and of yourselves, can you look on
and see his honor thus given to senseless idols with indifference 1
—his glory to graven images, and make no effºrt to prevent it !
We should feel our hearts moved with compassion, as a greater
than Paul did, when he saw men ignºrant and wicked, and should
follow his example by seeking to enlighten and save them, even
though it be at the expense of pleasure, and honor, and ease, yes
of life itself.


1833.
329
Literary Notices:
LITERARY NOTICES.
Publications of the Society for
the Diffusion of Useful Know.
ledge.—We have been obliging-
ly furnished with a small pamph-
let, entitled, “Some remarks
on the fifth annual report of the
Society for the Diffusion of Use.
ful Knowledge;” it was accom-
panied by the following note,
addressed “To the Editor of the
Chinese Repository.”
“Sir, having been requested,
by the committee of the Society
for the Diffusion of Useful Know.
ledge, to give circulation to the
enclosed “Remarks’ in answer
to various made
various attacks—recently made
upon the Society, chiefly b
#:Q_COD-
si emselves aggrieved by
########.
in your journal, (whose objects
are of a cognate character with
those of the Society,) such por.
tions of the remarks as appear
calculated to promote the end
in view, and are likely to prove
interesting to your readers.
I am, Sir,
Your most obedient serv't,
J. F. D.”
we do not suspect that this note
was intended as a hint to reduce
the price of .#
tion; but coming with the pamph-
let as it did, when we were
considering the expediency of
so doing, it brought us at once
to the -conclusion that such a
measure is expedient; and when
we proceed to the third volume,
2 R
unless good reason can be ad-
duced for changing our present
purpose, we s its
price one half, anticipating of
course that the number of copies
circulated will be more than
doubled. -
We are exceedingly gratifie
by the manner in which the Re-
pository has been received, and
are persuaded that a tolerable
degree of faithfulness on our
part will increase its circulation,
and give it new claims to the at-
tention of the reading worid.
The exigencies of the case de-
mand such a publication. These

easte resent a wide
for research and inquiry;
the number o
informati ern-
ing them, is rapidly increasing.
†"...#
subjects of importance, is daily
extending. Forty years ago, in
the opinion of Edmund Burke,
there were only 80,000 readers
in Great Britain: but, during
the last year, it has been shown
that there are 200,000 purchasers
of one periodical work, the Pen-
ny Magazine; and “it may be
fairly calculated that the num-
ber of the readers of that single
work, amounts to a million.”
The works now published by
jº.
number, viz-Hibrary of Useful
Knowledge, Library of Enter.
taining Knowledge, Farmer's
series of the Library of Useful
Knowledge, British Almanac,


330 Literary
Notices. Nov.
Companion to the Almanac,
Journal of Education, Portraits,
Maps, Working-man's Com-
panion, and Penny Magazine.
In addition to these, a Penny
Cyclopædia will be commenced
with the new year.” Such was
the number of the Society's pub.
lications at the close of the year
1832.
The character of these works,
their intrinsic value, and the
very low price at which they
are sold, are well known to the
public. The writer of the pamph.
let before us notices cach of
them separately; but our limits
forbid us to follow him in detail.
Concerning the “acts” and the
“intentions of the Society,” he
says:—
“With the the sum of £300
per annum, (the sum total deriv-
ed from life and annual sub-
scriptions,) at-ite-disposal, the
Society, according to some
statemehts, has been able to
a great
f
dividual publisher—to render
the publication of fiew books a
hopeless speculation—and to
depreciate the labors of all liter-
ary men, but the few engaged
by the Society. These, indeed,
are great evils to be accomplish-
ed by such small means; but if
we look farther into the report
[of the Society], we shall find
that even this little fund cannot
be applied without some abate.
ment. “ average amount
* In the mean time the Socie-
ty is steadily enlarging the circle
of its operations; in supporting
the permanent expenses of its
establishment, which, although
upon a very moderate scale,
amount to £800 per annum; and
is investing a large amount of
capital in future undertakings.
How is this to be explained?
Simply thus. Society does
ions
at-all. Those subscriptions were
necessary when its success was
a matter of experiment; but the
majority of the publications of
the Society, cheap as they are,
afford a profit, partly to the So-
ciety, and partly to its publish-
ers. Every new work of the
Society is a commercial specula.
tion, involving a large expendi-
ture of capital, and considerable
risk. The only peculiar advan-
tage which the Society possesses,
and which we shall endeavor to
explain in detail is this;–that
it has calculated upon a much
carry on, what is termed,
Tonopoly—to undersell the in. larger number of readers and
purchasers of books, than was
ever before assumed in any esti-
mate upon which the current price
of books has been fixed; and
that thus, having established a
new standard for the market
value of books, by speculating
upon a large demand instead of
a small one, it has necessarily
created a broad distinction be.
tween the price of books for the
many and for the few, the real
nature of which distinction, the
of yearly subscriptions en-parties interested in the produc.
£125, after dé l he ex- tion of books for the few, have
Tpenses of collection, and the
price of the treatises delivered
to subscribers.” But even this
amount is falling of- these
annual subscriptions have gra-
dually diminished.’
attempted to control.”
In this way—by making its
publications cheap, and adapting
them to the wants of their pur.
chasers, and not by entering “into
unfair competition by the power


1833.
331;
History of China.
of a large subscription fund,”
the # has been enabled to
give its publications such a wide
- and-aſsó ITETreate a
*monopoly” as extraordinary
as ITIS confounding to some” of
the aggrieved members of the
“ trade.” And hence the attacks
which have been made upon the
Society. “On one day, we hear
a complaint, that its efforts to
improve the condition of man-
kind, by enlightening their un-
derstandings, are confined to a
• Treatise on Probability;’ on
another day we are told that the
Soci ished a monop-
oly of cheap and po -
§: Some say that t
ociety is utterly powerless in its
effects upon the minds of the
people; others, that its works
are calculated to destroy all
originality, by absorbing every
other literary effort,” &c. A
publication, because it is cheap,
is not therefore necessarily of no
value. “The bent of civiliza-
tion,” says Chenevix, “is to
make good things cheap.”
That some members of the
trade have been deeply wound-
ed by the operations of the So-
ciety, there can be no doubt.
“Poor Robin,” the indecent al.
manac, was discontinued as ear-
ly as 1828. “Season on the
seasons,” one of the astrologi-
cal writers, has also expired;
and • Francis Moore,' though he
has retreated from blasphemy
and stupidity, “limps onward to
its fate, being kept alive solely
through the force of habit in its
purchasers.” In China, “there
are no previous licenses demand.
ed, or restrictive regulations en-
ſorced,” in order to secure and
control the press; “nor in the
case of publications upon ordi-
nary subjects, are any checks
whatever imposed on their num-
ber or variety. This is the tes-
timony of the translator of the
Chinese Penal code, and it is true; e.
it is true also, according to the
pamphlet before us, that for a
century and a half “no one but
the privileged corporations,” the
two universities and the Sta-
tioners' Company, could even
so much as “print or publish an
almanac, as no one but the two
universities and the king's print-
er can now print and publish a
Bible.” Erskine overthrew the
monopoly of almanacs in 1779;
but the other, the monopol
rinting Bi e
ese
History of CHINA.—This
country is daily becoming more
and more an object of attention
among enterprising men. Its
productions, almost from time
immemorial, have been sought
for by Europeans; while the
country itself has been to them
a “Great Unknown.” A new
interest, however, is beginning to
be excited; and inquiries are
becoming frequent. One enter-
prise will lead on to another;
and each advance will bring into
view new objects for investiga-
tion. The wall of separation
between this country and Chris.
tendom will disappear; the fra-
ternity of nations will be ac-
* We are far from supposing that all the members of the trade are offend.
ed at the operations of the Society; on the contrary, there are many, we
doubt not, who are its friends and rejoice in its measures for the diffusion of
useful knowledge.


332
Nov.
Aborigines of New Zealand.
knowledged, and its rights re-
spected. The unnatural condi.
tion in which China stands in
regard to the rest of the world
cannot long continue. But her
present state needs to be more
clearly and faithfully exhibited;
and every additional item of in-
formation, relative to this sub-
ject, that shall be presented to
the minds of men whether fo-
reigners or natives, will hasten
forward “a consummation de-
voutly to be wished.’
While such is the condition,
and such the relations of China,
we hail with joy every publica-
tion that seems calculated to aid
in the grand enterprise. The
work, the title of which stands
at the head of this notice, was
commenced by Mr. Gutzlaff,
while on the coast of Fuhkeen,
and finished during his recent
sojourn in Canton. He took
great pains to consult the best
authorities, both native and for-
eign, and has endeavored to give
a succinct and connected history
of China, and its intercourse
with foreign nations. We have
had opportunity to peruse the
work in manuscript, and are
sure it will be read with no or-
dinary interest by those who
seek information about China.
RELIGIOUS INTELLIGENCE.
Aborigines of New ZEALAND.
A recent number of the Orien-
tal Christian Spectator contains
a letter from the gentleman re-
ferred to in the Repository of
July (page 140), some extracts
from which we wish to lay before
our readers. New Zealand is
becoming one of the most inter-
esting countries on the globe,
whether we contemplate it as
philosophers, philanthropists, or
Christians. A people of more
than common energy, both phy-
sical and intellectual, is fast
emerging from a state of barba-
rism, and coming forth to expe-
rience the influence of civiliza-
tion and science; and the phi-
losopher watches their progress
to see: what are the effects of
that influence when operating
upon the human character in
almost its worst and lowest state,
A nation of savages, of insatiate
cannibals, is ceasing to feast on
human flesh, and exchanging
those habits which made “ war
their glory, and fighting the
principal topic of their conver-
sation,” for the employments and
customs of civilized society. And
the mere philanthrophist, he who
seeks the good of his fellow-men
without reference to religion or
the immortality of the soul—
while he rejoices in the change
by which this small portion of
his race is made more happy,
endeavors to learn how a similar
change may be effected among
every savage people. The Chris-
tian, while he views the scene
with all the interest of the philo-
sopher and mere philanthropist,
also derives form it other and
higher enjoyments. He sees in
it a new proof, or rather, since
the point has long been proved,
a new instance of the power of
the gospel of Jesus Christ to
tame the savage, elevate the de-
graded, and make the wretched
happy. He rejoices also in the


1833.
333
Aborigines of New Zealand.
hope that the change, which has
taken place in the character of
many, will be as lasting in its
effects as is the soul of man in
its duration, and honorable to
its author as well as salutary to
its subject.
The first Christian efforts for
the benefit of the New Zealand-
ers were commenced about the
year 1810. We have not room
for a hi-tory of those efforts, but
merely remark, in passing, that
the missionaries have had to
contend with difficulties, and
encounter dangers, such as
would dishearten any but those
whose hope relies upon the pro-
mised protection and blessing of
the Almighty. When retiring to
rest at night they have had rea-
son to fear that they should feel
the murderous mery before the
morning sun should rise ; and
have actually been driven from
some of their stations. Yet they
persevered in their work, confi-
dent that in due time, according
to the promise of Him in obedi-
ence to whose command they
had gone thither, they should
reap the fruit of their labors and
sufferings. That their hopes
have not been disappointed, is
abundantly shown by the letter
before us. We quote the more
largely because facts are narrat-
ed in a plain manner, such as
nature dictates when the writer
is interested in his subject, and
the truth—the simple truth, is to
be told ; but our limits oblige us
to omit several paragraphs, and
even abridge those from which
we make extracts.
The writer landed on Satur-
day, Feb. 9th, 1833, at Paihia,
one of the missionary stations,
of which he says; “on ascending
the beach we saw an aged chief
seated on the turf, wrapped up
in his mat, who had come from
Wangaroa, a bay about 50 miles
to the northward, on purpose to
spend the Sabbath at the settle-
ment with a view to religious in-
struction The church bell rung
as usual for evening prayers,
on which occasion the building
was nearly filled with natives.
The next morning ushered in a
day that will not soon be forgot-
ten. The church bell rung at
8 o’clock, and assembled the in-
habitants of the place to the
morning service. There was
nothing to disburb the quietness
of the Christian Sabbath, and
natives were seen assembling
from different directions for the
worship of that God, of whom
but very lately, they, as their
fathers had been, were altogeth-
er ignorant. The church was
completely filled as I entered it,
and the sight of so many natives
seated on forms, some clothed
in mats and others in blankets,
whilst a few were habited in
English costume, and all quiet
and orderly, was deeply inter-
esting. The Rev. W. Williams
conducted the native service,
which was commenced by sing-
ing a translation of a beautiful
hymn by Kelly. The whole con-
gregation appeared to unite in
singing with much devotion and
propriety; and the notes of a
fine toned organ were almost
drowned by one general burst of
harmonious voices, united in
singing the praises of Jehovah.
I was much interested, while
Mr. W. was preaching, in ob-
serving the fixed attention of the
natives. Their fine, manly fig-
ures, tattooed countenances, and
native costumes, while they were
thus drinking in as it were, the


334
Nov.
Aborigines of New Zealand.
• water of life,’ made it indeed
a scene not to be described.
Some women, rather than be
kept away to nurse their infants,
brought them on their backs;
and some who could not gain
admission, were standing in the
vestry and at the windows listen-
ing. Many of this large con-
gregation had ‘tasted that the
Lord is gracious,’ some had felt
their need of a Savior, and all
were attentive listeners to the
word of life; and a more order-
ly, attentive, and apparently
devout assembly I never witness.
ed even in a Christian country.
“The next day I inspected the
schools where I was much gra-
tified to behold old and young,
high and low, chief and servant,
bond and free, all engaged in
learning to read and write.
Every old prejudice appears to
have worn off, and there is now
a general thirst for instruction.
Hostile tribes here throw away
their animosities, and come even
from a distance of many miles
to gain admission to the mission
schools.
“From Paihia I proceeded to
Waimate, an inland station a-
hout 16 miles from Paihia. From
Waimate, I made two tours in
the surrounding country. In
one of them we fell in with the
converted chief Ripi. He and his
people were voluntarily engag-
ed in cutting a road through a
forest to enable the missionaries
to get at a friendly village be-
yond it for the purpose of afford.
ing instruction to its inhabitants!
Rigi never fails to express his
mind fully to the natives when
they meet. On one occasion,
when arguing with another chief
on the evils of his former courses,
he alluded to the motives of re-
putation and power, by which
the natives are influenced. “The
name,’ said he, “which one gains
by such means is like the hoar-
frost, which disappears as soon
as the sun shines upon it; but if
a man is brave in seeking after
the things of Jesus Christ, his
name lasts for ever.” This noble
individual now conducts daily
worship in his village with his
own tribe, and is walkirg in the
light of truth, and adorning the
gospel in his daily conduct.
“In another of my tours we
called on an old chief named
Tamoranga, an old friend of
the Rev. S. Marsden, the father
of the New Zealand mission.
This chief has evinced his anxie-
ty for the religious instruction
of himself and his people by mak-
ing a road of three miles extent
across the country to Waimate
and constructing several small
wooden bridges over rivulets,
across which the road runs, in
order to facilitate the journeys
of the missionaries from that
station.
In one village, the natives have
actually established amongst
themselves, without any direct
interference of the missionaries,
a daily school according to the
circulating class system, used
first at Islington (Fngland), and
now generally adopted in the
New Zealand mission schools;
and old and young, free and
bond, all fall into their classes,
and learn to read and write.
“At Waimate I attended a na-
tive wedding. It was a deeply
interesting and affecting cere-
mony. I observed several chiefs
and others standing up and
appearing deeply interested,
even to tears, as the vows of
mutual conjugal affection and


336
Journal of Occurrences.
CRIMEs AND PUNishments.-In Shen-
se, a widow and her mother-in-law both
lived in illicit intercourse with differ-
ent men. The widow brought in
supplies of rice and money by her
vicious conduct. Her paramour, how-
ever, ſell into poverty and the supplies
ceased. The mother, who was
aware of all the intercourse order.
ed the daughter to go after the man
and bring home supplies. She failed.
The mother began to chastise her.
The daughter seized a sharp hook or
sickle; they fought, and the mother
was killed. The daughter cast the body
into a neighboring river to remove all
evidence of her crime. She was sen-
tenced to be cut in pieces, but in con-
sideration of the mother's illegal con-
duct in selling the daughter to vice, her
sentence was changed by the supreme
court to immediate decapitation.
We see here some of the natural ef.
fects of the doctrines referred to in
the preceding article in this number
upon the condition of females in China;
woman a saleable commodity; entire
control of the parent over the daugh-
ters, and the uselessnees of knowledge
to females. Vice, unrestrained pas-
sion, and brutality. are, and for ever
will be, the inseparable attendants of
ignorance and degradation. It is when
we are reminded of this by such facts
as those just mentioned, and when we
think of the unfitness of such beings
to become inhabitants of a pure and
holy heaven, that we feel constrain-
ed to labor and pray for the introduc-
tion of that Gospel which teaches that
woman has an immortal soul, as pre-
cious as that of him, who now tramples
her in the dust; and to call upon
others of every place, if they would
claim to themselves the character ei-
ther of philanthropists or Christians,
to join us in using every possible
means for expelling such evils, by the
introduction of that knowledge which
can purify from vice, and save from
ruin.
The number of persons killed, is said
Fifteen other individuals were
for more than eight months, many
individuals were slain, many degrad.
ed, and many have at length been
promoted. “Now all are again quiet;"
the cultivators of the soil have resum-
ed their usual occupations, and the
imperial troops have returned in
triumph to their former stations; and
“the mind of his majesty is filled
with consolation."—The principal
transactions of the insurrection are
reviewed in a late gazette, and the
subject seems to be finally disposed of,
being set for ever at rest.
Severity of PUNIshment.—The
Criminal Board at Peking, expressed
to the emperor in September, 1832, a
wish, on their part, to alter the law
which involves, with a rebel, all his
kindred. In reply, his majesty says
that their recommendation is unsuit-
able. “Rebels are a virulent poison
which infect a whole region; and inas-
much as they involve officers, soldiers,
and their families, their crime is su-
preme, and their wickedness infinite;
if then their descendants are not all ex-
terminated, it is an act of clemency.”
As to the suggestion of the court
that “when they arrive at the place
of exile, disallowing them to marry,
will be sufficient:” his majesty regards
their representations as “empty words
preserving the name, but neglecting
the reality of punishment. It will
never prevent the increase of these
rebellious descendants: and it is far
from exhibiting a due severity of pu-
nishment.” However, the emperor
says, that in the existing law there is
an inequality of punishment, which he
orders them to deliberate upon, and
alter to something more equal. “At
present the kindred of rebels, if arriv-
ed at years of maturity, are banished
to new settlements, and given to the
soldiery for slaves: and those under
age are emasculated, which seems to
be treating them with more severity
than older criminals.”
Postscript.—Recent intelligence from Yunnan confirms the report con-
cerning an earthquake in that province.
to be several tens of thousands; but we have yet seen no official statements.
The execution of Yê Mungche, the famous village tyrant mentioned in our
first volume, took place on the 25th instant.
executed at the samc time and place with him; of these 12 were decapitated,
and the other three, with Ye Mungche, were strangled. One of these latter was
a priest of Budha.


THE
CH IN E S E IRE POSITORY.
Wol. II.-DECEMBER, 1833–No. 8.
REVIEW.
AN authentic account of an embassy from the king
of Great Britain to the emperor of China; includ-
ing cursory observations made, and information
obtained, in traveling through that empire, and a
small part of Chinese Tartary: taken chiefly from
the papers of his excellency the EARL of MACARTNEy,
knight of the Bath, his majesty's embassador ez-
traordinary and plenipotentiary to the emperor of
China. By Sir GeoRGE STAUNTON, secretary of
the embassy, &c. 2 Wols. London, 1798.
During the last two centuries, several embassies have
been sent from Europe to the emperors of China. The
sovereigns of Holland, Portugal, England, Russia, and
the popes of Rome, have been represented at the court
of Peking. These missions have always been com-
posed of chosen men, fitted out at no inconsiderable
expense, and while in progress were objects of uni-
versal attention. Concerning their expediency and
success, or the reverse, the political world has been
fruitful in remark, and has generally differed widely
in its conclusions; but in regard to the fact, except it
may be in the case of the Russians, that their in-
fluence has now nearly or quite ceased to be felt, or is
felt only to the injury of foreigners, there is probably
- 2S


338 Macartney's Embassy DEc.
but one opinion. Whatever may have been the ob-
jects of those embassies or their effects, immediate
or remote, no one of them was planned and executed
with more care than the present, which reached
Peking in 1793.
“Much of the lasting impression which the rela-
tions of lord Macartney's embassy leave on the mind
of his reader,” says an able writer, “must be ascrib-
ed, exclusive of the natural effect of clear, elegant,
and able composition, to the number of persons en-
gaged in that business, the variety of their charac-
ters, the reputation they already enjoyed, or afterward
acquired; the bustle and stir of a sea-voyage; the
placidity and success which finally characterized the
intercourse of the English with the Chinese; the
splendor of the reception the latter gave to their
European guests; the walks in the magnificent
gardens of ‘the son of heaven;’ the picturesque and
almost romantic navigation upon the imperial
canal; and perhaps, not less, to the interest we feel
for every grand enterprize, skillfully prepared, and
which proves successful, partly in consequence of the
happy choice of the persons and the means by which
it was to be carried into effect. The names of Ma-
cartney, the two Stauntons, and Barrow, are now
familiar to every reader. The emperor Kečnlung
lives probably in the memory of every impartial Eu-
ropean, at the head of the sovereigns of half-civiliz-
ed nations. Indeed, since Cook's voyages, no expe-
dition to a foreign and distant country, has become
so popular as that of which we speak.”
The grievances which the English had suffered
long at Canton, and the necessity of representing
them to the emperor, from whom they were carefully
concealed by the local authorities, were among the
principal considerations which led to the appointment
of an embassador. Macartney's secretary, in the
work before us, after enumerating the transactions
that had caused an “unfavorable impression of the
English in the minds of the Chinese,” says:–


340 Macartney's Embassy DEc.
“Though the natives immediately engaged with foreigners in
mercantile transactions, have been very considerable gainers by
such an intercourse, the body of the people is taught to attribute
the admission of it, entirely to motives of humanity and benevo-
lence towards other nations standing in need of the produce of
China, agreeably to the precepts inculcated by the great moralists of
the empire; and not to any occasion or desire of deriving recipro-
cal advantage from it. For a considerable period indeed, there
was little demand for European goods at the Chinese markets;
and the consequent necessity of paying for the surplus value of
their commodities in money, an object so desirable for nations
which may often have occasion to remit cash elsewhere, was thought
in China, where such a want could seldom occur, to be productive
of little other alteration, than to increase the relative weight of the
metal representing property; aud which increase was considered
rather an inconvenience than a benefit.
“With such an opinion of foreign trade, those who presided over
it, being indifferent to its progress, and suffering it, rather than
seeking for it, there was a very slender chance of favorable atten-
tion, or even common justice, towards the strangers who carried it
on; especially the English at Canton, who had not the faculty of
asserting their own cause upon the spot, and were entirely with-
out support at the capital, where their grievances might be redress-
ed. They were, in fact, subjected to many oppressions in their
dealings, and insults upon their persons. They did not however,
conceive that such treatment was authorized by the emperor of
China, or even known to him; and therefore several of the East
India Company's agents employed in the Chinese trade, suggested
the propriety of an embassy to his imperial majesty, to represent
their situation, in the hope that he might issue orders for the
removal of the hardships under which they labored.” “It was
urged, that a British embassador would be a new spectacle; and
his mission a compliment that would probably be well received.
Upon general reasoning, it appeared that every motive of policy
or commerce, which led to the maintenance of ministers from
Great Britain, at European courts, and even in Turkey, applied
with equal strength, to a similar establishment, if practicable, at
Peking.” ... "
Besides the embassador and his secretary, “minis-
ter plenipotentiary in the absence of the embassador,”
the mission cousisted of the following persons; viz.
captain, now sir Erasmus Gower, commander of his
majesty's man-of-war, the Lion; “young gentlemen,
of the most respectable families, glowing with all the
ardor and enterprise of youth,” who were admitted
into the Lion, considerably beyond the customary
complement of midshipmen; a military guard, con-


1833. to China, in 1793. 341
sisting of “picked men,” under the command of
colonel Benson, assisted by lieut.-colonel Crewe, and
captain Parish ; doctors Gillan and Scot; doctor
Dinwiddie and Mr. Barrow, “both conversant in
astronomy, mechanics, and every other branch de-
pendent on the mathematics;” Mr. Acheson Max-
well, “who had formerly resided in India with lord
Macartney, and was much in his confidence;” Mr.
Edward Winder, “a young gentleman from the
university;” Mr. Henry Baring ; a page, (now sir
G. Thomas Staunton, but then) “of years too tender
not to have still occasion for a tutor ;” two Chinese,
“perfectly qualified to interpret between their native
language and Latin or Italian,”—these were from
the Chinese college at Naples; also musicians, arti-
ficers, soldiers, and servants. To carry out such
presents and persons, as could not be accommodated
on board the Lion, the Hindostan, one of the largest
Company's ships, was appointed; and a small brig,
the Jackall, provided as a tender. At length, every
thing being ready, all those who were to accompany
or attend the embassador, joined his excellency at
Portsmouth, from whence they set sail, September
26th, 1792.
Lest the undertaking might, through error or
design, be made to assume a warlike or suspicious
appearance, and the embassador's reception thereby
be rendered “dubious,” an early opportunity was
taken of announcing the embassy to the Chinese
government. For this purpose, three commissioners
were selected by the Company, from among their
most approved servants at Canton, to whom it was
intrusted to communicate intelligence of the intended
mission, by delivering a letter to the governor of
Canton from the “Court of Directors.” In this
letter, sir Francis Baring, then chairman of the
Court, stated that:—
“His most gracious sovereign, being desirous of cultivating
the friendship of the emperor of China, and of improving the
connection, intercourse, and good correspondence between the


342 Macartney's Embassy DEC.
courts of London and Peking, and of increasing and extending
the commerce between their respective subjects, had resolved
to send his well beloved cousin and counsellor lord Macartney,
a nobleman of great virtue, wisdom, and ability, as his em-
bassador extraordinary and plenipotentiary to the emperor of
China, to represent his person, and to express, in the strongest
terms, the satisfaction he should feel if this mark of his atten-
tion and regard should serve as a foundation to establish a per-
petual harmony and alliance between them; and that the embas-
sador, having several presents for the emperor, from his Britannic
majesty, which from their size, and nicety of mechanism, could
not be conveyed through the interior of China, to so great a dis-
tance as from Canton to Peking, without the risk of damage,
he should proceed directly, in one of his majesty's ships, properly
accompanied, to the port of Teentsin, approaching, in the first
instance, as near as possible to the emperor of China.”
After visiting several places on his way to China,
the embassador arrived off Macao, June 20th, 1793;
there he obtained information that the emperor had
given orders, that officers and pilots should be in
waiting on the coast to take charge of his excel-
lency's ships, and conduct them in safety to Tečn-
tsin;–concluding his commands in these remark-
able words, “that as a great mandarin had come so
far to visit him, he must be received in a distinguish-
ed manner.” Feelings very different from these
were cherished towards the embassy, by the officers
of Canton, “particularly by the hoppo,” whose con-
sciousness of having merited reprehension, always
connected in his mind the subject of complaint with
the views of the embassy, and every engine in his
power was set to work to prevent its success. The
governor of Canton was anxious to receive a list of
the presents, alleging that “he could not send the
letter announcing the embassador's approach, with-
out transmitting the particulars of it.” But this
request was not granted.
On the 23d of June, they weighed anchor and
proceeded northward, and in a few days arrived in
the Chusan Archipelago; there they found a great
many valuable harbors—“places of perfect security;”
and their ships were supplied plentifully with provi-
sions, and thronged with visitors. Several officers


1833 to China, in 1793. 343
came on board, one of whom was accompanied by a
native interpreter, who had formerly been connected
in the trade there with the agents of the East India
Company: by this man's account, the English had
given no just cause of dissatisfaction in that place,
though they have been interdicted from it, “through
the means, as is most likely, of the superior influence
of the officers governing at Canton,” who draw large
sums from the accumulation of trade in this port.
At Chusan, the squadron had arrived at the ut-
most boundary of recorded European navigation;
the sea from thence northward was wholly unknown,
except to those who dwelt in the neighborhood of
the shores. After some delay, two native pilots
were obtained, and the squadron sailed for the mouth
of the Pei-ho, where it arrived near the close of July,
and was received by Wan, a military, and Chow a
civil officer, and a third person, a Tartar of high
distinction, who acted as the principal legate on the
occasion. On the 5th of August, the embassador
and his suite quitted their ships, and on board small
craft proceeded towards the capital. No slight
magnificence was displayed, and no expense seemed
to be spared. Ample provision was made for every
member of the embassy; almost every vessel con-
nected with it had on board both Europeans and
Chinese ; and the scene which it now exhibited was
truly novel; and the regard manifested towards the
present strangers, showed that they were not unwel-
come visitors. The mutual interest felt on the oc-
casion, is thus noticed by the embassador's secretary.
“The approach of the embassy was an event of which the re-
port spread rapidly ameng the neighboring towns and villages.
Several of these were visible from the barges on the river. Crowds
of men were assembled on the banks, some of whom waited a
considerable time to see the procession pass, while the females, as
shy as they were curious, looked through gates, or peeped over
walls, to enjoy the sight. A few indeed of the ancient dames
almost dipped their little feet into the river, in order to get a
nearer peep; but the younger part of the sex generally kept in the
background. The strangers on their part were continually


§ 14 Jacartney's Embassy Dec.
awused and gratified with a succession of new objects. The
tave of the country, the appearance of the people, presented, in
alumost every instance, something different from what offers to
view elsewhere.”
lt was announced to the embassador while at Teen-
tsin, that the emperor was at his country residence
in Tartary where he intended to celebrate the anni-
versary of his birthday, and wished to receive the
embassy. This arrangement was pleasing to the
strangers, for it would afford them a better opportu-
nity of seeing the country, and give them a view of the
Great wall. The country, as they moved up the river,
was remarkably level, and the sky serene; not so
much as a hillock was observed by them, until the
fourth day after they left Teentsin, when some high
blue mountains were seen rising from the northwest.
These indicated their approach to the capital, beyond
which they were situated. On the 16th of August,
the yachts anchored within 12 miles of Peking,
being then 90 miles from Tešntsin. Here they left
the river and proceeded by land to the capital; to
carry them, and their baggage, 90 small waggons, 40
hand-carts, upwards of 200 horses, and about 3000
men were required, The road to Peking is a mag-
nificent avenue, bordered with trees.
Shortly after reaching the capital, attempts were
made to extort from the embassador the promise of
making the Chinese prostration: these were success-
fully resisted, and his own conditions were proposed,
riz.: “that a subject of his imperial majesty, of rank
equal to his own,should perform.before the picture he
had with him of his majesty (the king of Great Britain),
dressed in his robes of state, the same ceremonies
that the embassador should be directed to do before
the Chinese throne.”—A part of the presents, and
some of the members of the embassy were detained
at Peking, while the embassador and the others set
out for Zhe-hol (Jé-ho); his excellency rode in an
English carrriage drawn by four Tartar horses, and
was cheered with a “gracious message" from the


1833. to China, in 1793. 345
emperor, inquiring about his health, and recommend-
ing to him to travel by easy journeys, and to be
accommodated at the places where he himself usual-
ly stopped on his way to Tartary. Their journey
northward was agreeable; they had a fine view of
the Great wall; and on their approach to the resid-
ence of the emperor were received with military
honors.
Here the question concerning “the ceremony”
was again agitated, and was brought before Ho-
choong-taung, (Ho-kwān,) the chief minister of state.
In the course of this discussion, it was remarked by
the embassador, “that to his own sovereign, to whom
he was bound by every bond of allegiance and at-
tachment he bent, on approaching him, upon one
knee; and that he was willing to demonstrate in the
same manner, his respectful sentiments towards his
imperial majesty.” This form of obeisance in lieu of
the Chinese prostration, was deemed satisfactory by
the imperial court. The attention of the embassy
was now taken up in preparation to wait upon the
emperor. The presents were carried to the palace,
and everything put in readiness for the occasion;
and the 14th of September, three days previous to
the emperor's birthday, was fixed on for the parti-
cular reception of the British embassy. On the
morning of that day, before the dawn of light, the
embassador and his suite went to the palace garden,
where were several tents, in one, and the largest of
which, “his imperial majesty wes to receive, seated
on his throne, as a particular distinction, the delegate
from the king of Great Britain.” The emperor's
approach, and the introduction of the embassador
are thus described by sir George;—
“Soon after day-light, the sound of several instruments, and
the confused voices of men at a distance, announced the emperor's
approach. He soon appeared from behind a high perpendicular
mountain, skirted with trees, as if from a sacred grove, preceded
by a number of persons busied in proclaiming aloud his virtues
and his power. He was seated in a sort of open chair, or trium-
phal car, borne by sixtecu men ; and was accompanied and fol-
2T


346 Macartney's Embassy DEc.
lowed by guards, officers of the household, high flag and umbrella
bearers, and music. He was clad in plain dark silk, with a velvet
bonnet, in form not much different from the bonnet of the Scotch
Highlanders; on the front of it was placed a large pearl, which was
the only jewel or ornament he appeared to have about him. On
his entrance into the tent, he mounted immediately the throne by
the front steps, consecrated to his use alone. Ho-choong-taung,
and two of the principal persons of his household, were close to
him, and always spoke to him upon their knees. The princes of
his family, the tributaries and great officers of state being already
arranged in their respective places in the tent, the president of the
Tribunal of Rites conducted the embassador, who was at.ended by
his page and Chinese interpreter, and accompanied by the min-
ister plenipotentiary, near to the foot of the throne, on the left
hand side, which, according to the usages of China, so often the
reverse of those of Europe, is accounted the place of honor. The
other gentlemen of the embassy, together with a great number of
mandarins and officers of inferior dignity, stood at the great open-
ing of the tent, from whence most of the ceremonies that passed
within it, could be observed. * * * - -
“The broad mantle, which as a knight of the order of the
Bath the embassador was entitled to wear, was somewhat upon
the plan of dress most pleasing to the Chinese. Upon the same
principles, the minister plenipotentiary, being an honorary doctor
of laws of the university of Oxford, wore the scarlet gown of
that degree, which happened also to be suitable in a government,
where degrees in learning lead to every kind of political situation.
The embassador, instructed by the president of the Tribunal of Rites,
held the large and magnificent square box of gold, adorned with
jewels, in which was enclosed his majesty's letter to the emperor,
between both hands lifted above his head; and in that manner
ascending the few steps that led to the throne, and bending on
one knee, presented the box, with a short address, to his imperial
majesty; who, graciously receiving the same with his own hands,
placed it by his side, and expressed “the satisfaction he felt at the
testimony which his Britannic majesty gave him of his esteem and
ood-will in sending him an embassy, with a letter and rare pres-
ents; that he, on his part, entertained sentiments of the same
kind towards the sovereign of Great Britain, and hoped that
harmony should always be maintained among their respective
subjects. * * * - -
ºf His imperial majesty, after a little more conversation with the
embassador, gave, as the first present from him to his majesty, a
gem, or precious stone, as it was called by the Chinese; being
accounted by them of high value. It was upwards of a foot in
length, and curiously carved into a form intended to resemble a
sceptre, such as is always placed upon the imperial throne, and
is considered as emblematic of prosperity and peace. . The Chi-
nese etiquette requiring that embassadors should, besides the
presents brought in the name of the sovereign, offer others on


1833. to China, in 1793. 347
their own part, his excellency, and the minister, or as the Chinese
called him, the inferior embassador, respectfully presented theirs;
which his imperial majesty condescended to receive, and gave
in return others to them.”
His imperial majesty appeared perfectly unreserv-
ed, cheerful, and unaffected during the interview,
which was considerably lengthened by interpreting
whatever was said by either party. The emperor,
adverting to the inconvenience arising from such 'a
circumstance, inquired “whether any person of the
embassy understood the Chinese language; and
being informed that the embassador's page, a boy
then in his thirteenth year, had alone made some
proficiency in it, the emperor had the curiosity to
have the youth brought up to the throne, and desired
him to speak Chinese. Either what he said, or his
modest countenance, or manner, was so pleasing to
his imperial majesty, that he took from his girdle a
purse, hanging from it for holding areca nut, and
presented it to him.”
After these ceremonies were over, some Hindoo
embassadors from Pegu, and some Mohammedans
from the neighborhood of the Caspian sea, were intro-
duced to the emperor on the right side of the throne;
they repeated nine times the most devout pros-
trations, and were quickly dismissed. A sumptuous
banquet was then prepared, and the European guests
allowed to feast with his imperial majesty, who “gra-
ciously” sent them several dishes from his own table:
when the repast was over, the venerable monarch
called his visitors round him, and “presented with his
own hands to them,” a goblet of wine. “He asked the
embassador the age of his own sovereign ; of which
being informed, he immediately replied, that he
heartily wished him to equah himself in years, which
had already amounted to eighty-three, and with as
perfect health. He was indeed yet so hale and vigor-
ous that he scarcely appeared to have existed as
many years, fifty-seven, as in fact he had governed
the empire. When the festival was entirely over,


348 Macartney's Embassy Dec.
and he descended from the throne, he marched firm
and erect, and without the least symptom of infirmity,
to the open chair that was waiting for him.”
After this the embassador and his suite had oppor-
tunity of visiting the imperial “gardens or pleasure
grounds,” and of joining in the celebration of the
emperor's birthday; on which occasion the number
of troops assembled was about eighty thousand, and
the number of officers about twelve thousand. But
the time had now arrived for the embassy to return;
in left Jé-ho on the 21st of September; traveled
back upon the imperial highway; and made its re-
entrance into the capital with “usual honors.” Short-
ly afterwards the emperor returned to Peking; in-
spected the presents; and called a council of his
ministers to take into consideration the letter from
the king of Great Britain, and to deliberate on the
mode of proceeding proper to be used towards his
subjects. An answer to the letter of his Britannic
majesty was soon prepared, and with “farewell pres-
ents,” in due form transmitted to the king’s “well be-
loved cousin and counsellor.” With the receipt of
these, Chinese etiquette required that the embassy
'should cease; nor could any personal communication
afterwards take place with the emperor. According-
ly, on the morning of the 7th of October, the em-
bassy left Peking; on the 19th of December arrived
at Canton; and on the 17th of March, 1794, quitted
the shores of China.
Such was the progress of an embassy, which was
carried forward with greater splendor and ability
perhaps than any other mission that has ever visited
the court of China. And what did all this pa-
geantry and talent achieve? What melioration of
grievances did it effect? It was a mere visit of
ceremony. The advantages gained, or supposed to
have been gained, may be summed up in few words.
While the embassador was at Canton, the govern-
or promised him that “no obstruction should be
given on the part of government to the acquisition


1833. to China, in 1793. 349
of the Chinese language by foreigners.” In his “good
disposition to protect the English,” his excellency
was confirmed by late dispatches from the emper-
or, in which his imperial majesty expressed “how
welcome the return of an English minister to his
court would be to him.” The governor added “out
of another letter from the emperor, that as he meant
to resign his crown on the completion of the sixtieth
year of his reign, 1796, “he should be glad to see
such minister by that time, or as soon afterwards as
might be convenient. Thus the embassy, according
to the expectations which led to the undertaking,
but contrary to the prospects which clouded it some-
times in its progress, succeeded at length, not only
in obtaining permission, but receiving an invitation,
for a similar intercourse with the court of China,
whenever the government of Great Britain and the
Company shall deem expedient to renew it.” How
this contemplated “intercourse” has been sustained,
during the forty years which have now elapsed, we
need not undertake to tell; suffice it to remark, that,
in a commercial point of view, none are more in-
terested, and none are likely to succeed better in their
intercourse with the Chinese, than Britons.
In concluding this article, we cannot do better
than to quote the words of one who had long resided
at the capital, and who was thoroughly acquainted
with the court of Peking. He says, that “the Chi-
-nese have no other idea of an embassy, than that of a
visit with presents, on some solemn festival, and to
last only during the continuance of the latter; that
accordingly, of the many embassies sent to them in
the past and present century, none of them were suf-
fered to pass that period; that in the present reign,
the embassador of the Portuguese, the most favored
nation, was dismissed in thirty-nine days; that the
Chinese have little notion of entering into treaties
with foreign countries; but that whatever business
it might be desirable to transact with them, must,
after a favorable foundation for it, laid by the compli-


1833. Possessions in the East. 351
nese, than most of the other nations which frequent these shores.
In addition to their other advantages, their possessions in the East
give them facilities for commercial intercourse with the Chinese,
far better than are enjoyed by any of the other nations of Europe.
To be thoroughly convinced of this fact, we need only look for a
moment at ‘the Kingdom of the Philippines,' which is the property
of the crown of Spain. A small volume entitled “Remarks on
the Philippines, and on their capital Manila,” published in India
in 1828, will supply us with much information relative to our pre-
sent subject.
“Of the numerous groups of islands which constitute the ma-
ritime division of Asia, the Philippines, in situation, riches, fertil-
ity and salubrity, are equal or superior to any. Nature has here
revelled in all that poets or painters have thought or dreamed of
the unbounded luxuriance of Asiatic scenery. The lofty chains of
mountains, the rich and extensive slopes which form their bases,
the ever varying change of forest and savannah, of rivers and lakes,
the yet blazing volcanoes in the midst of forests, coeval perhaps
with their first eruption—all stamp her work with the mighty em-
blems of her creative and destroying powers. Java alone can com-
pete with them in fertility; but in riches, extent, situation and politi-
cal importance, it is far inferior.” Their position is strikingly advan-
tageous. “With India and the Malayan Archipelago on the west
and south, the islands of the Pacific and the rising empires of the
New World on the east, the vast market of China at their doors,
their insular position and numerous rivers affording a facility of
communication and defense on every part of them, an active and
industrious population, climates of almost all varieties, a soil so fer-
tile in vegetable and mineral productions as almost to exceed cred-
ibility; the Philippine islands alone, in the hands of an industrious
and commercial nation, and with a free and enlightened govern-
ment, would have become a mighty empire: they are a waste!”
By a census taken in 1817–18, their population amounted to
2,236,000 souls. Only a few hundreds of these are Europeans;
the remainder are Negroes, Malays, Mestizos, and Creoles. “The
negroes are in all probability, the original inhabitants of these is-
lands;” they are small in stature, woolly headed and thick lipped;
they subsist entirely on the chase, or on fruits, roots, herbs, or fish;
they are often nearly or quite naked, and live in huts. Sometimes
however, they form villages in the deep vallies, and sow a little
maize, or rice.
The Malays, or Indians as they are called by the Spaniards,
appear to have emigrated to this country at different times, and
from different parts of Borneo and the Celebes. Those of
the provinces are all “a proud-spirited race of men; and such
materials, with proper culture, would form the foundation of all
that is great and excellent in human nature; “but for three hun-
dred years they have been ground to the earth with oppression;
they have been crushed by tyranny ; their spirit has been tortured
by abuse and contempt, and brutalized by ignorance.” It is not


352 Spanish Relations and DEC.
here meant to accuse the Spanish laws; many of them are excellent,
but these are rarely enforced, or if they are, delay vitiates their
effect. That this country, the most favored perhaps under heaven
by nature, should have remained till the present day almost a
forest, is a circumstance which has generally excited surprise in
those who are acquainted with it, and has generally been account-
ed for by attributing it to the laziness of the Spaniards and
Indians; but this is a superficial view of the subject; the true
reason why so little improvement has been made by the inhabit-
ants of the Philippines is, “beeause there is no security for
property.” Does an unfortunate Indian scrape together a few
dollars to buy a buffalo, in which consists his whole richest
Woe to him if it is known; and if his house is in a lonely situation,
he is infallibly robbed. Does he complain, and is the robber
caught? In a short time he is let loose again, to take ven-
geance on his accuser, and renew his depredations. Hundreds
of families are yearly ruined in this way. -
The imperfect mode of trial, both in civil and criminal cases,
lays them open to a thousand frauds. While the civil power is thus
“shamefully corrupt or negligent of its duties, the church'has not
forgotten that she too has claims on the Indian. She has marked
out, exclusive of Sundays, above forty days in the year, on which
no labor must be performed throughout the islands. Exclusive of
these are numerous local feasts in honor of the patron saints of towns
and churches.” These feasts are invariably, after the procession
is over, scenes of gambling, drinking, and debauchery of every
description. Thus they unsettle and disturb the course of their
labors by calling off their attention from their domestic cares; and
by continually offering occasions of dissipation, destroy what little
spirit of economy or foresight may exist among so rude and igno-
rant a people. Notwithstanding all these disadvantages, the writer
of the “Remarks” before us, in summing up the character of the
Indian, says, “He is brave, tolerably faithful, extremely sensible
to kind treatment, and feelingly alive to injustice and contempt,
proud of ancestry, which some of them carry to a remote epoch;
fond of dress and show, hunting, riding, and other field exercises;
but prone to gambling and dissipation. He is active, industrious,
and remarkably ingenious. He possesses an acute ear, and a
good taste for music and painting, but little inclination for abstruse
studies. He has from nature excellent talents, but these are useless
for want of instruction. The little he has received, has rendered
him fanatical in religious opinions; and long contempt and hope-
less misery have mingled with his character a degree of apathy,
which nothing but an entire change of system and long persever-
ance will efface from it.” -
Under the name of Mestizos are included by the author of the
book, not only the “descendants of Spaniards by Indian women
and their progeny, but also those Chinese, who are in general
whiter than either parent, and carefully distinguish themselves
train the Indians. The Mestizos are, as their names denote, a


1833. Possessions in the East. 353
mixed class, and, with the Creoles of the country, like those of all
colonies, when uncorrected by an European education, inherit the
vices of both progenitors, with but few of the virtues of either,
Their character has but few marked traits; the principal ones
are their vanity, industry, and trading ingenuity: as to the rest,
money is their god; to obtain it they take all shapes, promise and
betray, submit to everything, trample and are trampled on ; all is
alike to them, if they get money; and this when obtained, they
dissipate in lawsuits, firing cannon, fireworks, illuminations, pro-
cessions on feast days and rejoicings, in gifts to the churches, or
in gambling. This anomaly of action is the business of their
lives. Too proud to consider themselves as Indians, and not
sufficiently pure in blood to be acknowledged as Spaniards, they
affect the manners of the last, with the dress of the first, and des-
pising, are despised by both.” Such are the three great classes of
men which may be considered as natives of the Philippine islands.
The creole Spaniards, or those whose blood is but little mingled
with Indian ancestry, pass as Spaniards. Many of them are
respectable merchants, and men of large property, while others
are sunk in all the vices of the Indians and Mestizos.
The government of the islands is composed of a governor, who
has the title of captain-general; a lieut.-governor; and the supreme
court, which is also the council, and is composed of three judges
and two attorney generals. The financial affairs are under the
direction of an intendant, who may be called a financial go-
vernor. Commercial affairs are decided by the consulado or
chamber of commerce, composed of all the principal, and in
Manila, some of the inferior merchants. The civic administra-
tion is confined to the ayuntamiento, which is composed of two
alcaldes, twelve regidors or aldermen, and a syndic ; these en-
joy very extensive privileges, approaching those of houses of
assembly. The civil power and police are lodged in the hands
of a corregidor and two alcaldes; to the corregidor are subject the
Indian captains and officers of towns, who are annually elected
by the fiatives. The provinces, twenty-nine in number, are go-
verned by alcaldes, “the determined enemies and the real oppres-
sors” of the Indians. -
The ecclesiastical administration is composed of an archbishop
(of Manila), who has three suffragans, two on Luçonia and one on
Zebu. The revenue of the archbishop is $4000, and that of the
bishops, $3000 annually. The regular Spanish clergy of all orders
are about 250; the Indian clergy are in number from 800 to 1000.
Until very lately, these rich islands have been a constant burden
to the crown of Spain, money having been annually sent from Mex-
ico to supply their expenses. The establishment of the monopoly of
tobacco has principally contributed to supply this deficiency; “the
sales of this article amount more or less to $1,000,000 per annum.”
Another of these monopolies is that of cocoa wine, a weak kind of
spirit produced from the juice of the toddy tree, Borassus gonutus,
and from the nipa, º nupa ; of this large quantities are used
• D
a-


1833. Free Trade with China. 355
bonded warehouses, or a system of drawback duties on re-expor-
tations. A glance at their position, and the consideration of the
monsoons, will convince any one, that this was of all things that
for which ample provision should have been made; and it would
be no exaggeration to say, that this commerce would in a few years
have increased tenfold with China alone, had this plan been adopt-
ed. The enormous duties and vexatious spirit of the Chinese go-
vernment, together with what must often be the case, the fleecing
combinations of the hong-merchants, would long ago have driven
away every vessel from their ports, could another have been found
near enough to insure a supply of goods, which from the enterpris-
ing spirit of the Chinese, could not have failed. Manila is this
port. * * * It would be foreign to the object of a cursory sketch,
like the present, to enter further into the details of the subject.
Enough has been said to bear out an assertion, which those who
are acquainted with the trade will not think exaggerated, that had
this system been fairly and equitably established, one half of the
trade to China, would before this, have centered at Manila; and
it is only at Manila that the advantages of such a transit could
have been unknown or neglected in the nineteenth century.”
We have followed our author much further in detail than we at
first intended; and we have done this solely in consideration of
the interest and importance of the facts which he narrates, and
which, generally, are fully corroborated by a manuscript account
written in 1830. If in a single instance we have deviated at all
from the truth, it has been unintentional ; we owe the Spaniards
nothing but good-will; and we deeply regret that they have turned
to so bad account the privileges which they have enjoyed, and con-
tributed, as they certainly have done, to raise and strengthen the
barrier which has separated China from the rest of the nations.
The Philippines were discovered by Europeans early in the 16th
century, and received their present name in 1543. They were
shortly after visited by the Chinese, whom the Spaniards have al-
ways, from that to the present time, regarded with jealousy and
treated with hostility; sometimes interrupting their commerce or
expelling them from their territories, and sometimes slaughtering
-them in great numbers.
Note. Since the above was in type, a friend has informed us, that he thinks,
the warehouse system, which our author recommends, has been established.
Free Trade with the Chinese,
A variety of documents have lately been received from Europe
relative to the affairs of India and China; the latter of course are
the most interesting to this community, as they contain the poli-
cy proposed to be pursued in regard to our trade with this place,
which is the broad principle of%. commerce.
- ---


356 Free Trade with China. DEC.
In adopting this principle, ministers have no doubt, been influ-
enced by the public feeling, and the growing aversion to exclusive
preferences in any shape. The stationary nature of British com-
merce with China had long attracted public attention, and the
opinions of the day are the growth of many years. The rapid
increase of the Indian trade, contrary to the affirmations and as-
severations against the possibility of it, established a conviction of
the fallacy of the views taken by the Company's servants, even by
the most talented of them. But the most influential fact with re-
ard to China, was the glaring circumstance of other nations, par-
ticularly the Americans, becoming the carriers of Europe, which
the Company did not partake in, and which they would no abandon
to free British shipping. Another fact no doubt operated, name-
ly, that the export of manufactures by the Company did not supply
the wants of China, and that the trade fell into foreign hands to
the exclusion of British shipping and capital.
It has been judiciously remarked by a friend, that the commit-
tee of foreign trade of the House of Lords in 1820, was formed in
all probability with regard to India, for the purpose of giving the
East India Company an opportunity of conceding that to the na-
tion, which was not available to themselves. Such an act would
have been viewed in a liberal light by the British community, and
any reasonable extension of their charter would have been conced-
ed in return. Fortunately they did not avail themselves of it, or
we might have been obliged to wait five or ten years longer for that
which now appears almost within immediate attainment.
The British trade with China is now becoming the property of
the free merchant; and how we may avoid past errors, and turn
it to the best advantage is a very important consideration. With
regard to the new regulations of the trade we know little; nor do
ministers appear to have fully made up their minds. As the press
of Canton has attracted their attention, a casual hint that .
knowledge may give, may not be entirely without its use.—And
first, a short view of our early connections with China, and of the
advantage or otherwise of our policy, may not be altogether su-
erfluous.
The British nation, after a long series of intercourse, remains on
as unsocial a footing as ever. The reverse of what takes place
in the usual intercourse of nations, has resulted from ours with the
Chinese. The intolerant nature of the Chinese government re-
pels every nation from intercourse, and submission has tended to
widen the distance, by increasing their contempt of us. The ear-
ly contentions between the Portuguese and Dutch, and subsequent-
ly with ourselves, most materially deteriorated European character
in their estimation. Hence has arisen that arbitrary conduct, and
that insolent language, which has since been strictly adhered to.
It has at length become habitual, and firmly grafted on their habits
and feelings; nor has there been anything in our policy calculated
to raise us in their estimation.


1833. Free Trade with China. 357
The prejudice against foreigners is even extended to those of their
own nation who trade with them. The hong-merchants seem to
be in some measure out of the pale of the law that protects others;
and to be exposed to extortion, which is not applied to the Chinese
people generally. The delivering up of the gunner of the Lady
Hughes, and the conduct of admiral Drury, have confirmed this
feeling; and many other acts, in common with these, have tended
to establish more firmly the prepossessions against us.
The magnitude of the British trade has been brought forward as
tending to give weight to the national character; but the facts upon
which this assumption is founded are at best but of a negative kind.
Passing over previous disputes, we come to that of 1829; which is
remarkable as being different from all others, inasmuch as in all
former disputes we were put on the defensive; in this we took an
opposite position, and gave the Chinese to understand, that unless
they complied with our wishes, we declined to trade with them.
The influence of British commerce was fairly brought into the
scale and found wanting. The most that could be obtained were
a few minor concessions; and Britsh influence has at no time ever
extended beyond this. In fact, we do not appear to have emerg-
ed at any time from that character, which we had early fixed upon
ourselves; and we continue to be considered as poor foreigners
and traders; which character has been fatal to any social, or more
elevated, intercourse.
It has been more than once suggested, that the appointment of
consul being given to the chief British authority, would add to his
weight and consideration here. But it seems to have been entire-
ly overlooked, that such an appointment could have no influence
in overcoming long established prejudice, created by our early acts,
and confirmed by the failure of our more recent ones. Nor is it
reasonable to think that any honorary appointment could be com-
prehended by the Chinese; at least to an extent that should be
able to overcome the prejudice of years. As difficult would it be
to convince an enlightened Englishman of the day, that an educat-
ed and talented merchant or supercargo, is not fit company for a
peer or a prince, as to convince a Chinese, that a foreign trader
is fit company for a mandarin of even ordinary rank.
It is the failure of not knowing ourselves, in our relative posi-
tion with regard to the Chinese, in which all our errors are ground-
ed. It is in vain that we know and feel that we are gentlemen,
and engaged in a profession equal with those that rank the high-
est—if there be an alloy in the sight of others that we cannot over-
come or dissipate. In short, we possess a tainted character with
the Chinese, and until our government raises it by just and effi-
cient measures, we must confess our fault, and have our sins ever
before us. By so doing, we shall avoid, at least, past errors and
incongruities. Let us take one for example; no doubt can be well
entertained, that our embassies should never have come to Canton,
and associated with resident merchants and supercargoes of the
place. What could be more incongruous to Chinese notions, than


350 Free Trade with China. DEC.
to see poor merchants and foreigners mixed up with a great man-
darin authority, the representative of his celestial majesty's
equal 2 What impression could the Chinese receive, when they
saw their own classification of extreme ranks, the antipodes in fact,
so jumbled together, that it was utterly impossible to form any true
notion respecting the embassy, or reconcile its component parts
with each other, or with their own ideas of reason and common
sense? They might well ask the question whether it came from
the Company or from the king. They could not possibly avoid
having some misgivings, and even having suspicions of a surrepti-
tious attempt to impose on them. Whatever may have been their
precise notions, the embassy was evidently deteriorated below
mediocrity; and its treatment marks the fact.
This has been more particularly dwelt upon, as it is the ignis
fatuus that has allured us into error, and by a full knowledge of
which we can alone act more skillfully in future, and avoid the fol-
ly of attributing to ourselves, an influence that we possess only in
a very limited degree. Let us not run, however, upon Charybdis,
or refuse ourselves honor where honor is due. A trade of magni-
tude, such as the British trade to Canton, or the Company's taken
separately, whether conducted by an individual, or by a body, must
always have weight and influence; but the degree must mainly de-
pend upon the talent and ability, with which either the one or the
other conducts the trade; it being necessary to form a just estima-
tion of the weight of sueh influence, and not to apply it beyond its
just powers, and thus render it inefficient, which has been one of
our past errors.
But this species of influence when applied to a government can
at best be but of a minor nature. The only thing that has raised
our character above its debasement, and created an influence with
the Chinese, is the conduct of our men-of-war. They indeed
have established a character which makes the Chinese tremble at
the knowledge of their approach: no considerations have induced
them to submit to anything, that was not due to their own high
characters, and the honor of their sovereign's flag. The Centurion,
the Topaze, the Alceste, may be named as having created a real
influence with the Chinese, distinct and elevated, far above that
which may be supposed to arise from the magnitude of our trade.
Their conduct has produced a distinct notion of British mandarin
authority, weighty and uncompromising, a power distinct from
commerce, the very opposite of a submissive temporizing character.
Nothing can more strongly mark the low ebb at which we stand,
than the means we are obliged to employ to obtain redress for
any grievance of importance; namely, by assembling in large bo-
dies and forcing our way into the prohibited city; and nothing
can be more offensive to the Chinese authorities, where the forms
of gravity, order and sobriety are so strictly kept up. Yet so firm-
ly are their prejudices fixed, that they will not listen to the milder
means that are generally, in the first instance, resorted to through
the hong-merchants. They permit themselves to be tumultuously


1833. 'rce Trade with China. 359
bearded by those they accustom themselves to despise; and thus
allow an example of insubordination, which if followed by the peo-
ple would be fatal to themselves and their government. For it is
well known that the Tartar dynasty floats upon a smooth, but dan-
gerous sea, and that its existence depends upon the habit of tran-
quil obedience to their authority. Sensible of this, the high autho-
rities view with abhorrence anything, however remote, that savors
of perturbation; yet obnoxious as it is, they submit to it, rather than
deviate from their fixed habits of haughtiness and contempt,
We in fact as merchants have little influence, and it appears lit-
tle short of absurdity to have supposed that any honorary title could
in any w y elevate those whose rank and situation are essentially
mercantile. But under existing circumstances, some authority will
undoubtedly be appointed ; and the first essential object is, and
undoubtedly will be, to keep him distinct from anything like a
commercial character. It matters not what his designation be ;
whether consular, or some higher title be selected; but it is import-
ant that it be distinct, and invested with authority and rank which
the Chinese should distinguish as mandarin authority, that is au-
thority emanating directly from the king. The objection is unim-
portant that has been urged with regard to the Chinese recognizing
him; on necessary occasions, whenever broils may take place, his
coming forward for the object of adjustment will virtually involve
recognition.
The great difficulty that presents itself, is that of keeping the
authority, whether diplomatic or consular, in that elevation that
it is requisite he should hold with relation to the Chinese; for it is
evident he could only enter into intercourse with the governor or
hoppo, or at least with officers of the highest rank.
A chamber of commerce will in all probability remedy this in-
convenience; at least, no other at this moment suggests itself to
our minds, and it might perhaps be so formed, as to exist in contra-
distinction to the co-hong, if composed, as we suppose it must be,
of the resident merchants of the place; and no doubt can be en-
tertained of the efficacy of the consultations of talented and edu-
cated men, inspired by a common interest. The co-hong would
then be balanced by the chamber of commerce, and arrange with
them in all matters of trade; the king's authority holding himself
superior to either, and admitting of no equality but with the go-
vernor or hoppo.
A species of anthority might then be established; the parties
might be invested with civil and criminal jurisdiction; determine
disputes about wages and engagements, &c., and try the misconduct
of sailors. Such powers would tend materially to prevent disputes.
A jury might be formed, composed of captains, officers, merchants,
&c.; and the authorities be empowered to administer prompt pu-
nishments. Such acts might be made consistent with British law,
and have weight and effect with the Chinese authorities.
Although a government authority is recommended, it may be ob-
served, that the China trade could be conducted by the establish-


360 Free Trade with China. DEc.
ment of a chamber of commerce, without any intervention on the
part of government, except as may be required for its formation,
regulation, and protection. Such a step would be the slightest pos-
sible removal from the past system, and would much resemble in
character and functions, the Company's committee of supercargoes
about to expire. The free trade of China would in a great mea-
sure be left to itself, in its first efforts, after emancipation from past
trammels. It must certainly be admitted to be a reasonable expe-
riment, which if failing, government would have the power of step-
ping in when they might deem it expedient. -
Some regulations might be formed for its guidance of a general
nature, and the president instructed from time to time to ii.form go-
vernment of its proceedings; it might adopt the routine of the Select
Committee and continue their records. This view is suggested by
the perusal of the proposed changes eontained in Mr. Grant's letter
to the Secret Committee of the 12th of February, 1833, in which an
open trade to China seems fully determined upon. It would leave
the free traders to themselves for a time, that the “patient, thrifty,
dexterous assiduity of private and untrammeled enterprize” might
have full scope.
It is not probable that men possessing these qualities would be
content with or be confined, like the Company, to Canton as the
object and the end of their views; nor would they in all probabil-
ity leave so noble a field as China, accessible only through one
port. Their untrammeled enterprize will advance to other ports,
nor stop until it has passed the coast of China, traversed the Yel-
low sea, and put to the test the repulsive patience of the Coreans
and Japanese. Past traders may ask, “why should they do all
this, and force upon a government that which they wish to avoid
taking,” and which they ought to add, “the people are too willing
if possible to receive tº Surely no morale will be urged against it.
For they have notoriously supplied a deleterious drug, and collat-
erally aided its introduction into a country where it is expressly
rohibited. We cannot for a moment presume to contrast the in-
troduction of goods and wares which contribute to the comforts and
happiness of the people, with the introduction of that which ener-
vates and destroys. It is not intended, there is no wish speak
disrespectfully; but it has been repeatedly asked, ‘what right have
we to force a trade which the Chinese government object to " and
that we have no right has been urged against the extension of com-
merce by free traders. Should this argument however have any
weight, it falls infinitely heavier upon the introduction of a prohi-
bited and objectionable article, than upon those which are recog-
nized by law, and admitted under regulated duties; yet this smug-
gling trade bears manifest indications of what untrammeled en-
terprize can do. Ten or twelve years ago 6000 chests supplied
the market; now 22,000 is about the amount annually consumed.
If you ask a Chinese the cause of this extraordinary increase, he
will answer in his crude way, “China has got too much people.”


1833. Free Trade with China. 361
The countries abovementioned, as well as China, have been a
dead letter heretofore to our commerce; by breaking up the mo-
nopoly, a chain is destroyed that bound these beautiful provinces
and kingdoms together, and excluded British enterprize from ope-
rating upon them. In destroying this barrier, it is no hyperbole to
say “the Pyrenees are removed.” Populous countries are laid
open to us, and the first great political step is taken, to make these
countries administer to the comfort, and form a part of the social
system of nations.
Great as the expectations are which the China trade holds out,
we are met at the threshold, by a confirmed antisocial system, so
fixed and stubborn, that it has hitherto resisted all endeavors to
overcome it. These endeavors it is true have been ill adapted to
the end; and some, so insignificant and puerile as to have rather
confirmed than eradicated existing evils. The means of evading,
of mitigating, or of overcoming this obnoxious, repulsive system
are forcibly thrust upon our consideration. The question is one
of no small difficulty ; it embraces a variety of considerations, of
ten contradictory, and attended with all that entanglement, which
invariably results from a highly civilized nation's coming in contact
with one replete with notions of the highest barbarism, and where
no standard, like the law of nations, can be made to apply equally
to both.
Briefly as it is proposed to treat this question, it must be done
somewhat seriatim, that the subject as a whole may be brought to
our view: and first let a chamber of commerce be spoken of
This, while it gives consistency and weight to the deliberative
acts of merchants, forms a court or committee of record ; its cha-
racter would be so quiescent, that it could be considered only as a
continuance of our past passive system, and at the same time, leaves
the free merchant at liberty to follow his own plans. Certainly to
see the British free merchant, with his principles of free intercourse,
stimulated by the hope of personal advantage, struggling to over-
come the obstinacy of a people, (it should be government, for the
people are decidedly with us,) inspired with the most opposite sen-
timents, will be a sight at once singular and instructive.
The process if successful, can be but slow and progressive; and
if it be found inefficient, or of doubtful success, it must be admit-
ted that it is the first and the most natural position in which to
placé the two parties. And it may be asked, short of the applica-
tion of force, what power has England to put in action, equal to
the energy of the commercial spirit, or likely to act so constantly
upon the repulsive character of the Chinese government 7
It may be objected, that the field has been open to the Ameri-
cans, and that they have not availed themselves of it. This objec-
tion, with one or two others, is more specious than solid. The
Americans have not been a manufacturing nation, their operations
with China have been exclusively those of commerce; but the En-
glish are not alone commercial, there are other principles of im-
pulse more Powerful than commerce, which may be said to over-
2V


362 Free Trade with China. DEc.
rule, and constantly propel it. These are our capital, our manu-
facturing interest, our power-looms, which cry out “obtain us but a
sale for our goods, and we will supply any quantity.’ It is evident
therefore, that no comparison can be made between America and
ourselves, in any way bearing upon the question; with this propel-
ing power constantly in action, and operating upon China, there
will be a stimulus existing, which the Americans will be in want
of, and which changes the essential quality of this question,
There appears to be something substantially proper, in the pre-
sent state of things, in leaving our merchants to their own tact and
ingenuity. Yet it is subject to the great objection, that it leaves
unamended the real evils of past times; and we should advance
nothing towards putting our commerce and revenue on a more se-
cure basis; for our revenue and commerce are inseparably united.
No one can doubt their magnitude or importance, yet they rest upon
the most transient, insecure foundation. Mr. W. S. Davidson, in
his reply, (6344 of evidence,) says very truly, “that complete pro-
hibition of trade with foreigners is unavoidable, sooner or later
under our present undignified system, and earlier under an open
trade unquestionably.” Some of the acts of this undignified sys-
tem have been already noticed.
Although a governmental authority has been spoken of, and
in some measure recommended, we must not shut our eyes to the
position he will be placed in, supposing him to have simply a pas-
sive character; the difficulties and disadvantages of which are not
of a common nature.
Let it be supposed that all intervening difficulties are overcome;
that a king's authority is recognized by the Chinese as having com-
plete control over British interests in China, and in communica-
tion, (as he should be,) with the governor and hoppo, a supposition
most gratuitous; but it will serve to illustrate the position in which
he may be placed, and probably would, be placed, by the cunning
diplomacy of his antagonists.
The first acts of the free traders after the Canton market be-
came glutted, would be to press their way into other ports, and it
may be said infest the ports of China; a circumstance that would
not fail of alarming the Chinese authorities, and they would turn
to the king's authority to put a stop to it. To act upon such a re-
quisition, would be to destroy that extensive field that is now open-
ing to our commerce: the officer would find himself in an awkward
dilemma. He would be obliged to refuse any interference in the
suppression of a trade, which the Chinese would represent as being
against their fundamental laws; or should he be induced to acqui-
esce, he would destroy one of the most valuable advantages likely
to arise from our open trade.
They might then demand the suppression of the opium trade.
This exsits under prohibitions so severe that little doubt can be
entertained of the desire of the Chinese government to suppress it,
and no doubt as to the duty of the authorities so to do; who, (such
is their venality,) protect it, and receiving bribes for the same, it


1833. Free Trade with China. 363
may be said, obtain a revenue by connivance. This illicit commerce
is so interwoven with our financial system in India, as well as with
our commerce, that it is not inferior in importance to the revenue
obtained from tea at home. These two points are sufficient to
show the case put. They would seize these to argue upon, place
themselves upon the vantage ground, and refuse any concessions
until we had complied with their laws. In what a position then
would an authority be placed? He could only have put himself
in communication with the Chinese (at least the case is supposed,)
by the representation of the equitable character of the sovereign
whom he represented, and by his own disposition to be guided by
justice and equity in his transactions with them. Yet he would
find his pretensions and professions invalidated by demands, so
grounded in law and justice, that they could not be with reason
refused, but as assuredly they could not be complied with.
It is useless to enter into any notice of the many arguments that
might be used to repel these demands, or of the casuistry that
might be employed ; the main facts after all would remain the
same; namely, that any confidence that might be obtained would
be destroyed, and his office reduced to a dead letter.
Such are some of the difficulties, and they are of no small magni-
tude, which a governmental authority would have to encounter,
could he effect an impossibility, or what at present may be consi-
dered as such, i. e. insinuate himself into a communication with
the head authorities of Canton. Hence it is a question, whether
such a position is desirable or could be made beneficial. A cham-
ber of commerce, acting simply in the affairs of trade, and not
having or presuming to have, any delegated authority, seems some-
what preferable also, from the circumstance, that no new character
would be introduced to alarm the Chinese, and that the present
British residents are quite equal in point of talent and numbers
to form themselves into one. They would be equal in point of un-
ity and influence with the select committee of the Company, and
perhaps superior as combining a greater number of interests.
In this short review of the probable position of a passive au-
thority, (and some only of the inconveniences have been pointed
out,) it will appear, that the appointment would be of little prac-
tical utility, little or nothing could be effected by him, and abso-
lutely nothing, towards placing the British subject free from the
oppressions, annoyances and insults, to which he is daily exposed
in common with those occurring under the select committee.
These evils have not, nor can they be adequately described. The
major ones are not only great, but the minor ones are perpetual
and incessant. The free spirit must one day recoil against one
class of injuries or the other, under the present state of things,
and the minister of England would be wrong, not to expect to
receive by every dispatch, the account of some formidable rupture,
and his scheme of finance, to the amount of some three or four
millions, inlvolved.


864 Free Trade with China. DEC.
If an authority therefore be placed in China, he must be an
efficient one, and vested with powers of no ordinary nature; as
being placed in a position that may force him into a state of
war in spite of his best endeavors to the contrary; nor indeed,
should our valuable commerce and revenue, both to India and
Great Britain, be permitted to remain subject to a caprice, that a
few gun-boats laid alongside the city would overrule by the dis-
charge of a few mortars. The governor and hoppo would soon find
that their freaks of fancy were no longer the pastime they used
to be, and that it was not prudent to provoke those who were
willing to be their friends, merely that they might gratify their
assumed superiority, and exhibit their contempt of us to the com-
mon people. -
The result of war with the Chinese cannot be doubted, but re-
flection will suggest, whether more apprehension is not to be en-
tertained of the fatal consequences that would attach to China
itself, should the spark of war once be lighted, by the internal
revolutions it would create without any extrinsic aid, than doubt
of what would be effected by ourselves, should we be driven to that
extreme. -
Putting aside for the present, this deeply important considera-
tion, we will consider it merely in the abstract, and rather as it
relates to ourselves than to them. Hostilities with China are of
the most anomalous nature; as the slightest application of them
may produce the effect required, or force us into all the extreme
operations of war. That we shall one day be coerced into it, we
take for granted. It is unreasonable to expect that we shall be
less exposed than heretofore, and it is utterly impossible that ag-
gression can be overlooked; nor indeed is there any cause that it
should be. When we reflect that our intercourse has been put in
abeyance, for refusing to deliver up individuals, demanded for no
other object than for immolation, we must revolt against the idea
of its future recurrence. The case of the American is the last
instance; he was delivered up on the promise that justice should
be rendered; the next morning he was strangled. Acts of this
nature, possessing their own peculiar features of aggravation, can-
not but involve hostility. - -
Our position would then be this; we must succeed, or fall infinite-
ly below our present level;-having passed the Rubicon we must
proceed to Rome, or lose the empire. Another admiral Drury's
affair would be fatal to us, from the effects of which we have not
yet recovered, notwithstanding the more recent spirited conduct of
our navy. In short, we might be obliged to establish an embargo
on their shipping about Canton, or extend it to the whole coast,
or cut off their communications by the Great canal, or land an
army of fifteen or twenty thousand men in the Yellow sea, and
obtain a substantial commercial treaty under the walls of Peking.
But we must first ask, are there not objects far more worthy of
contending for, than the port of Canton; and ground much better
:


1833. Free Trade with China. 365
adapted to contend upon, than that, situated at the extremity of a
great empire These questions must both be answered in the
affirmative. The past traders to Canton, it is true, have confined
their attention to that place, and abandoned ports we once pos-
sessed to the eastward. Under existing circumstances, (always
referring to Mr. Grant's letter,) “the Pyrenees are removed,” our
views become less bounded. The question is no longer of Canton,
but of China entire; from a minor object, we turn our eyes, as it
were, to the rising sun.
We must then repeat, that China entire, a coast of 1600 miles,
with a dense population among whom British manufactures have not
yet obtained an entry, is the more worthy object of our attention.
And when we consider, that this may be obtained, with no greater
efforts, no greater exertions, no greater tact, than is necessary
to obtain the commerce of a provincial town of the empire,
Canton diminishes in magnitude and importance. -
Taking then this enlarged object, as the proper landmark
upon which to direct our efforts, Canton should no longer be
the base of operations, be they of negotiation, of peace, or of
war. As we proceed, other causes will be shown, why this local-
ity should cease to be the point d'appui, and why this point
should be transferred to the seat, or the centre of the empire.
An admiral's station should therefore be selected. For the
sake of resting upon some point, let Ningpo be adopted, or the
adjacent island of Chusan. This locality is well known; it is
fully described by the foreign missionaries, by Du Halde, and
was formerly the station of a British factory. This place is
mentioned for the sake of removing us from Canton. But close
‘and minute investigation may show, that a position more north-
ward, about the great promontory of Shantung, might be more
desirable, or perhaps a station near the mouth of one of the two
great rivers. The latter position would command the great
artery of internal commerce—the Grand canal; a circle of 100
miles diameter, containing within its circumference six to eight of
the largest and richest cities of the empire.
Hostilities, and the impossibility of avoiding them, have been
already touched upon; and it is now requisite to enter into some
brief notices on this point. It must however be premised, that
wanton or inconsiderate hostility would never be tolerated by
a British parliament, nor is it consistent with the moral or political
footing of the people of Great Britain; much less would we pre-
sume to offer any remarks tending to such an end. This obser-
vation is requisite, that any following ones may not be entangled
or deteriorated, and to mark the fact and circumstance, that when
we speak of hostility, it is under the supposition, that it has been
forced upon us, and that more than adequate cause has been
given. - - - - -
Our navy must always form a prominent feature with regard
to China, not only from its own pre-eminence, but also from the
accessibility of the Chinese coast. The effect produced by the


306 Free Trade with China. DEC.
uncompromising conduct of our men-of-war has already been notic-
ed; their power has never failed to overawe the Chinese when-
ever duly exerted, and to produce upon them the most remark-
able effect. The succumbing to the spirited conduct of the Topaze
and Alceste is sufficiently illustrative of the fact, not to require any
additional force from comment. The Company, in their negotia-
tions with government, have repeatedly set forth the influence of
their servants in China, which they only possessed to a limited
degree, and may almost be said not to have possessed at all; what-
ever did or does exist, with regard to the British nation, we owe
to the spirited conduct of our navy. It has been before observ-
ed of them, that no considerations of a less elevated character
were ever permitted to interfere with the honor of the British
nation and the royal flag.
That the Chinese are sensible of their incapacity and weakness,
we have many proofs; witness their solicitude to get the shipping
from their shores which conveyed hither our embassies. In fact,
the empire is at present in so crumbling a state, that they dread
danger beforehand, and fear the slightest external symptom, that
might ruffle the torpid calmness of their government. That we
have been most unwittingly and ignobly the creatures of their policy,
cannot fail to gleam upon us, perhaps with a blush, as we investi-
gate; for we must remember that we have suffered insults of no
small magnitude. That they have skillfully played their game
cannot be doubted; but the range of our vision is now extended,
and we must acquire juster perceptions and retort their own game
upon them.
We ourselves must practice upon their fears, and change the
current that has so skillfully been set against us; and instead of
prohibiting our ships of war from appearing, instead of soliciting
that no men-of-war should approach China, let them rather be
invited to show themselves; there are certainly ample objects of
nautical pursuit for the employment of our ships of war in the
China and eastern seas. These have hitherto been forbidden regions,
for which no good reason can be assigned, unless monopoly fears
may be considered as such. In the employment of them in the
various services that may be suggested, they should visit the Chi-
nese ports, in the same way as those of civilized nations, and
claim the same respect and attention that is due to his majesty's
flag; on all occasions making due allowance as to form, but noth-
ing to the want of respect that is due. Conceding everything to
courtesy, but nothing to arrogance and insult.
The presence of our cruizers would sufficiently alarm them,
however friendly might be our conduct, nor is it desirable that
it should be otherwise. It might probably invert the past order
of things, and oblige them to be the complainants. They might
first refer to Canton. If a chamber of commerce were there, they
could only answer, as the select committee have only been able
to answer, that a mandarin ship was above them, and beyond
their control. Urged by their fears they might send an address to


1833. Free Trade with China. 367
the viceroy of India. One thing we might look to with certainty,
that with such companions on the coast they would not proceed to
any extremity, or touch the trade of Canton. In short, we must
establish a new base of operations, by the formation of a flag sta-
tion; and that base should be about the centre of the coast of
China, or nearer to Peking.
The appearance of our ships on the coast of China, whether of
war or of commerce, would be received and repelled, by two
conflicting dispositions;–they would be received with joy and
satisfaction by the great mass of the Chinese population; they would
be opposed and repulsed by the mandarins or officers of govern-
ment wi.h a more dominant power. A deep and distinctive line
must be drawn between the nine-tenths of the Chinese population
who delight in the exchange of civilities, and enjoy themselves in
social intercourse; and the remaining tenth, who form the manda-
rins, or Tartar officers of government of all grades; whose study
it is to maintain the rule, that has obtained against foreigners, and
to enforce it upon the people. -
Yet it must not be hastily inferred that the mandarins or officers
of government are averse to intercourse. The provincial ones
are materially benefited by it; there is not a single office about
Canton that has not its price, which is paid for, by extortion
from foreigners. New ports of trade would open advantages which
Canton is now usually known to possess. Hence their cupidity is
strongly tempted, and there is no doubt of their willingness to relax.
But they are withheld by the espionage of mandarins of the court,
who would readily avail themselves of the slightest opening to
charge them with negligence of duty in regard to foreigners, that
they might displace them, and again sell their posts.
This manifests strongly the necessity of drawing nearer to the
court. It is at the fountain head that we must turn the current
into the proper channels. To negotiate at Canton, and for Canton,
would be a waste of time, and of no practical utility. The
Chinese government will be as much at ease, as if we communicat-
ed from England. Create apprehensions from without, approach
the capital, and we shall have attention from within; until then,
little shall we do with the Chinese; then, much may be hoped for.
These remarks may appear to have little to do with hostilities,
the subject we proposed speaking of, but it must be remembered
what is here spoken of, is a sort of hostilities demonstrative, and
would be so considered by the Chinese; hence, they would have a
more powerful effect: when we come to speak of negotiation, their
value will become more clear. -
The flag ship was supposed to be established in the port of
with her cruizers; the most valuable would certainly be our small
sloops of war and flat bottomed gun-boats. It will be seen by
reference to the maps, that the admiral would possess, by means of
the Hwang-ho and other rivers, facilities for operating upon the
Grand canal and cutting off the supplies of Peking. It is scarcely
necessary to notice the magnitude of the consequences that would


363 Free Trade with China. DEC.
result from such an act, and its overwhelming effect upon the
capital of the empire. - -
An embargo would be a minor and more preparatory act. Yet
in this we are struck with its weight, as affecting the Chinese.
At once is brought to view the whole of the Chinese coast, studded
with boats, craft, and junks, the feeders of the empire. These are
totally unprotected, and even the stoutest among them unable to
contend with the meanest of our cruizers. It is difficult to find
terms to express adequately the disparity between what is Chinese
and what is European with regard to the military and to the navy.
One small brig of war may be considered equal to the mightiest
of their junks of war; one battalion as equal to any 10,000 men they
could produce. As to military numbers, in a most serious recent
rebellion, they are said not to have been able to produce more than
15,000 men in the field, although their muster roll, like that of their
population, is enormous. It is not pretended that this is any
just estimate—it is merely to render our vague notions less inde-
finite. Of the effeminate character of the Chinese, both physi-
cal and moral, few can have, without some local knowledge,
any just idea; and this effeminacy singularly agrees with their
social habits, and trafficking dispositions.
An embargo would carry with it consequences the most weighty.
That we should ever be driven to it, by the unimportant causes,
that will one day lead to it, cannot but be a matter of deep regret;
and when we consider its effect upon a portion, and an extensive
portion, of an innocent population—feelings both of justice and
humanity loudly call upon us, to suffer no consideration, of a less
generous nature, to prevent us from devising the means of averting
so inhuman a recourse. Our interests with this nation have be-
come too mutual to be easily severed; too valuable to be left upon
the present basis of caprice and chance; too capable of extension
to be treated with monopoly indifference; and above all, too sus-
ceptible of being placed upon a substantial basis of mutual inter-
ests, not to demand the most serious and immediate attention of
government at home for the common benefit of both empires.—
With all possible respect, it may be asked, shall one of two great
exclusive barriers which the Chinese have erected, be permitted to
exist for ever? The Tartars, in centuries gone by, passed the
Great wall of China, and seated themselves upon the throne;
that wall now remains, but an eternal monument of Chinese co-
wardice and imbecility. Yet the invisible one of prejudice, the wall
constructed by a tithe of the people, still towers in all its strength,
and the enlightened nations of Europe, the British, who pride
themselves upon their intellect, who would scorn to be called dupes,
crouch nevertheless to its influence, and it may be said, worship
the edifice they have contributed to erect. -
But to return; an embargo would intercept their supplies of
fish, rice and salt, destroy a large portion of their tribute and re-
venue, and carry distress to the inmost recesses of the empire.


1833. Free Trade with China. 369
Our brigs of war, by intercepting these articles from the islands of
Hainan and Formosa, the granaries of the adjacent provinces,
would act so forcibly upon the wants of the population, that no
government could withstand the calls that would arise from it.
It is very doubtful indeed, whether an army of 15,000 to 20,-
000 men, acting upon Peking, could produce a more influential
effect. Yet such a body of troops, efficient and disciplined, it is
maintained, would overturn the dynasty and the empire; from
which opinion few who can judge, will be found to dissent. To
what point force should be directed is subject to a variety of opin-
ions; the fertile island of Formosa has been suggested; secondly, the
seizure of the island of Lantao; thirdly, the cession of Macao
from the Portuguese.
All these propositions seem liable to the same general objection,
that any one of these steps would equally excite the jealousy of the
Chinese;—we could not even obtain the cession of Macao, with-
out producing that effect. After all, what advantage would it be,
placed as it is at the extremity of China? Yet it has been serious-
ly spoken of for years past, as a step that would relieve us from the
arrogance of the Chinese. In a political or commercial point of
view; no advantage could be derived from it whatever. It would
in fact, remove us from the facilities of trade; the Chinese would
in all probability interdict any island that may be taken, and leave
us to our own plans, as they did recently until we chose to adopt
their system.
To take an island therefore from the Chinese, is but to open
Pandora's box upon ourselves, without the chance of obtaining any
remunerating benefits; it would attract their displeasure without
enabling us to obtain one advantage over them. It is mamifest,
that on the employment of force, to direct it upon the centre or
the capital of the kingdom, would be by far the most efficacious;
the moral influence of such a step will readily be seen, com-
pared to that of acting upon an isolated point, or an extremity.
Puerile indeed does appear the idea of influencing a great empire
by the seizure of one of their petty islands; it has been fledged
under leaden wings, and scarcely rises above the atmosphere of
Boeotian dullness.
To close all further remarks with respect to hostilities, it may be
sufficient to observe, that of all the nations of the east, not one is
so removed from a military character as the Chinese; and there
are advantages with regard to China as a military field, that we
are not accustomed to meet with in the East, arising from soil, cli-
mate and locality. Any body of men rendezvoused at Singapore by
the end of March, would have six months of fair monsoon for action.
Twenty days would carry them to any port of the Chinese domin-
ions. There, a climate healthy and salubricas would attend them,
cultivated and fruitful provinces would facilitate their operations.
No forests or impervious jungle would impede their course, or des.
troy by premature sickness their numbers, as in the recent Bur-
Inese War.
2W.


370 Free Trade with China. Dec.
Passing from the military to the moral of the Chinese charac-
ter, two feelings may be said to overrule all others with regard to
foreigners. These are arrogance and fear; the one dictates the
assumption of superiority, the other creates the policy of expulsion.
With regard to the British, fear may be said to be, since the Bur-
mese war, the prevailing sentiment; other causes have doubtless
contributed, but this has had the most overpowering influence with
them. Burmah has been the grave of more than one Chinese army,
and they are by them considered as formidable and warlike. In
the late war, the Chinese fully predicted our defeat; the opposite
result rendered their astonishment the greater, and the full convic-
tion of our power could no longer be driven away; and this impres-
sion may be considered as universal throughout the empire.
Under these impressions our attention should be fixed upon ne-
gotiation; and it has been to come at this important point that we
have been obliged to wade through the foregoing details somewhat
seriatim:—between demonstration in its most qualified forms, and
the application of force, lies this vast and extensive field. It is here
that diplomacy has full scope, proceeding firmly but with caution,
supported by a navy ostensibly engaged in scientific pursuits, the
Chinese feelings of haughtiness and insult would be half put in
abeyance. The king's authority could neither be treated with the
flippancy, or the insolence to which past embassies have been sub-
jected. It would not be a first repulse that would dishearten him,
or nullify his powers. He would be a resident either afloat or
ashore; every repulse would be but a signal, to renew in some other
shape the object of his mission; our cruizers visiting their ports,
would sufficiently alarm them, and supplied with able interpreters,
a communication with the authorities would follow, mutual expla-
nations would result, their apprehensions would be gradually allay-
ed, and an armed force would be found to have no other object
than peace; each communication would rapidly pass and repass to
Peking; at length they would find that their ease and security were
alike consulted, by complying with views of moderation and reci-
procity. This is yet untried ground, and loudly calls for due con-
sideration, as containing in it objects of the last importance to Brit-
ish interests.
In these remarks it has been the object, rather to put forth the
various considerations that the subject suggests, than to advocate
any particular one. But certainly our opinions do predominate on
the humane side, namely, that by bold demonstrations through our
cruizers, followed up by negotiation through a commissioner, we
might arrive at arrangements with the Chinese government mutu-
ally beneficial, without any violation of justice, or any act of hos-
tility, and by it avoid being driven to acts of violence, which will
admit of no compromise. ‘By firmnese and decision, we can
certainly attain all that we have a right to require, without resort-
ing to any of those extreme alternatives, which have been brought
forward, but to complete the general picture of our relative posi-
tions; and as we fully prepare for that last alternative, the first steps


1833. Free Trade with China. 371
become more efficient to effect the object. Undoubtedly, negotia-
tion has not been fairly tried, and rational and substantial grounds
do exist for bringing it to a successful issue.
It is with reluctance that the acts of past times are referred to,
as the censure they call for, may bear an invidious interpretation;
yet let any one take up a collection of Chinese edicts with regard to
foreigners, and aſter perusing them ask himself, (for to judge fairly,
we must apply the case to ourselves,) whether as an Englishman
he does not feel degraded in his own estimation by the epithets
applied to him. Let a minister ask himself, whether the dignity
of his country or of his sovereign, is consulted by permitting a
nation, v.hom we might crush in a grasp, to draft their official
language, in terms the most offensive that can be selected, and by
allowing his sovereign's picture to be insulted. Is it humane or
just, to permit those British merchants whose trade contributes so
greatly to the revenues of Great Britain and India, to be exposed
to every species of degradation, while they effect this great object 7
To be spurned as barbarians and bearded with appellations, nothing
short of ignominious? To be deprived of every social enjoyment,
of every domestic comfort, and pent up in a space to which the
King's Bench is a domain? Why has this obtained Simply be-
cause the authorities at home, anglo-monopoly as they have
been, were content to be underlings.
But relieved from this incubus, will the spirit of the British na-
tion permit the continuance of such a course, feeling as they will,
that both the Chinese nation, and themselves are endowed with a
reciprocal disposition in regard to commerce, the former being
chained down only by the dominant power of their Tartar con-
querors? For, we must once for all dismiss the prevalent jargon,
which so erroneously confounds the people of China with their
Tartar conquerors. These are separate and distinct, in interests
and sentiments, and are in every way opposed to each other: this
truth has been smothered in common with many other undigested
facts with regard to China. But to the British people, and we
trust, to our executive, the dawn of conviction will arrive; that
the moment we assert our national dignity, from that moment, the
great barrier that has been permitted to rise, will cease to exist.
One great obstacle, the monopoly, by the hands of Mr. Charles
Grant, has received its “coup de grace;” what others remain will
we trust be as powerless as the Great wall itself, which a daring
nation, with a handful of men, for centuries past, has cleared; and
et at naught both it and its constructors.
This fact, among many others which history records, is one
that shows the inapplicability of the principles of civilization to
any practical object, in their adaptation to a barbarous, or to a
demi-civilized people. To take the law of nations as a rule with
a nation where no knowledge of it exists, at best seems idle. With
regard to China, Carea and Japan, its operation has been, and
still is, to exclude us from a valuable commerce, except under
restrictions and contumely, as disgraceful to us, as inconsistent


372 Free Trade with China. Dec.
with reason and common sense. Cautious ourselves of violence
that we would not endure, they have attributed our forbearance to
any cause, but the proper one; and we have permitted them to
doze in error, when one rude shock would have aroused them to
a sense of it, and placed us at once upon an equal footing of social
intercourse. One mistake produced another, until the very re-
verse of the opinion, that would have arisen with a civilized
nation, was produced upon this barbarous one.
Let us now take a fact. A barbarous nation, the Tartars, de-
spising treaties and the Great wall, have seized the destinies of
China, and ruled it with an iron hand. We, with our principles
of forbearance, have been fixed in a corner of China; onrselves
insulted, our fellow subjects unjustly slaughtered, and insult and
contumely showered upon us most unsparingly. Far be it from any
one, to deprecate our humane forbearance, or to praise the iron
severity of the conquerors. But reason and impartiality will ask
the question, and we trust, our countrymen at home will ask the
question, has not the principle on our side been carried to an ob-
noxious extent? Has not their purity been sullied by the re-
turn that has been made 1 Has not the nation been disgraced by
its extreme humiliation in the face of insults of the grossest nature?
Has not the Chinese commerce of Great Britain been purchased
with the blood of the gunner of the Lady Haghes? Has not his
immolation up to this day, remained unavenged? Have we not
been told by the Chinese, that blood for blood is the law of their
empire, and have we not submissively subscribed to it? It matters
not to tell, be it in Gath or in the streets of Askelon, that all this
was under an anglo-monopoly, and that the British nation has no
concern with it; the feelings of Englishmen will respond in spite
of them, “there is the smell of blood still.”
What reason existed, where this and other sanguinary laws were
practiced upon us, that we should not have arranged our civil and
commercial relations? Will any reasonable man maintain that
there was not sufficient cause for insisting upon it, coute qui coute,
or that the same causes do not now exist? If the monopoly
were an impediment to the vindication of our national honor, it is
the more necessary, the moment we are removed from its tar-
nishing influence, that we should lose no time, in setting ourselves
right with posterity, and wiping off the sordid fact, of having
purchased our commerce with the blood of a fellow subject. The
past, the present, and the future demand it, for each day but ex-
poses us to fresh liabilities. Such then, has been the result, of ap-
plying the principles of civilization to a barbarous people; they
have acted conversely to our intentions, and to their ordinary
course; they have thrown back ignominy upon ourselves, and
disgraced our nation's character; and so they will for ever act until
our policy is adapted to the character of the nation with which we
deal.
The success of any operation with regard to China, be it to
redeem the past or establish the future, must depend mainly upon
the authority selected; one high, not in rank, but in talent. In


1833. Free Trade with China. 373
him, should all authority be invested, alone, without council or
control. When the important powers that must be placed in an
authority are considered, the tact it would require, and the value of
the objects to be attained, it may be fairly said that a consular de-
signation does not correspond with the high nature of the func-
tions that would be delegated; nor would that of embassador be
more appropriate, but some term should be adopted correspond-
ing to a general designation of the various powers intrusted to him.
The basis of his demands should be an open trade with China,
for which, the edicts of Kanghe would form the incipient argu-
ment. That emperor threw the whole of the ports of the empire
open to free trade in about 1680, and they continued so till
about 1720, when a mandarin represented to the emperor that
Europeans were a dangerous and turbulent race; which assertion,
the folly of the missionaries but too much justified: they absolute-
ly TāFFässartme-cmass-beyond the bounds of Ordina r-
ance, with their-speethletive-doctrineSF and Commerce was made to
pay the TEDESOTECCTESlastical arrogance.
Twould too much TGTATThis subject to touch upon the other
various points that would follow this leading claim founded upon
past records. What we would insist upon, should be well digest-
ed, and firmly adhered to, when once determined upon. Our
authority would find, when he had once established a re-
putation of moderation and of determination, that he had not
taken the task of negotiation in vain. The scrupulous deport-
ment of past embassies should be wholly laid aside; submission to
etiquette and forms would produce no advantage, but must be
considered as defeating the objects intended to be gained. A
diplomatic Petruchio would be far preferable, who to tame his
wayward wife, insisted that black was white, the sun the moon,
confounded the order of things, and who overruled all by the de-
fiance of all, yet preserving due decorum even in the torrent of his
passion. Such a character would be infinitely better than one
cringing to forms, which as he submitted to them would be multi-
plied ad infinitum.
We now close these remarks. It must forcibly strike any one,
that a king's authority, possessing less powers than those of the
most confidential description, would be a nullity. In 1829, the
Company put forth all their direct and latent powers; and it must
be recollected that at home they have repeatedly set forth their
influence; yet they were incapable of obtaining any effectual re-
medy for their grievances; they fairly measured their strength with
the Chinese and were found wanting; they put forth all their
direct and collateral influences, passive or negative as they were,
that can ever be brought to bear upon the Chinese government.
Should they be wielded by consular or royal authority, nothing
more could be exerted or brought into action. Therefore, if
powers beyond this and entire responsibility be not given, it is
only necessary to repeat our first quotation “laissez faire,” under
the auspices of a chamber of commerce.


373 The Chinese Rotow. DEC.
Yet the field is a noble one. A late minister has had the merit
awarded him of calling the western world into existence; certain-
ly the one who directs his energies upon China, Corea and Japan,
which with great propriety may be called the terra incognita of
the East, has not a less glorious field; and to call these coun-
tries into social and commercial existence, would be an act not
less elevated, and of much greater value, as affecting the interests
of Great Britain, and her possessions in the East.
A BRitish MERCHANT,
Macao, 1833. (Formerly of Canton.)
The foregoing document, concerning free trade with China, cam- to us ac-
companied by a note in which our correspondent says, “A friend of mine, who
lately departed from China, left with me the accompanying manuscript, to
make what use of it I pleased. It is carelessly and diffusely written, and con-
tains a good deal that there is room to dissent from, but withal has some hints
which I think valuable. If you think it would suit the pages of your Repository,
I should like to see it in print; and would feel obliged by your making such
curtailments and corrections as may be considered necessary and desirable.”
As the subject discussed is one of considerable interest and importance, as well
as difficulty, we have preferred to give the paper entire. We do not however
vouch for the correctness of all the positions taken and the arguments advanc-
ed by the writer, who shows himself, on most points, well acquainted with his
subject, and handles it with much ability and fairness. We will now only add
a short paragraph from the speech of Mr. C. Grant before the House of Com-
mons, on 13th last June. He said, -
“With regard to the trade with China, that should be free. The public
voice had decided that question. Commerce had been struggling under the
tramincls which confined it, until at last it had broken through them, and it
became necessary to do away with the restrictive system. The exclusive
privilege of the trade with China upon every ground must now be considered
to have arrived at its natural termination. The Chinese were a sensible, jea-
lous, and capricious people. They were despotic and arbitrary, and there
might circumstances occur that would excite a collision between them and this
country. Year after year brought news to that most sensitive and suspicious
people of the great and important victories obtained by the Company. The
emperor had forbidden, on good grounds, the trade in opium, and the late
. viceroy at Canton had legalized it by a duty. Now it was proposed to send out
persons, armed with considerable authority, to represent the British at Canton.
It would be unwise, he thought, to have any previous negotiation with the
Chinese authorities. The trade with China, under the charter of the East India
Company, would terminate in April, 1834.”
The Cui Nese Korow. “What are called ceremonies, some-
times affect materially the idea of equality. They are not always
mere forms and nothing else, but speak a language as intelligible
as words; and it would be just as conclusive to affirm, it is no mat-
ter what words are used, words are but wind, as to affirm, it is no
matter what ceremonies are submitted to, ceremonies are but mere
forms, and nothing else. Some ceremonies are perfectly indif-
ferent; as whether the form of salutaion be, taking off the hat and
bowing the head; or keeping it on and bowing it low, with the
hands folded below the breast; these, the one English, and the
other Chinese, are equally good. There is, however, a difference
of submission and devotedness expressed by different postures of


1883. The Chinese IVotow. 37.5
the body; and some nations feel an almost instinctive reluctance
to the stronger expression of submission. As for instance, stand-
ing and bending the head, is less than kneeling on one knee; as
that is less than kneeling on two knees; and that less again than
kneeling on two knees and putting the hands and forehead to the
ground; and doing this once, is in the apprehension of the Chi-
nese, less than doing it three times, or six times, or nine times.
Waving the question whether it be proper for one human being to
use such strong expressions of submission to another or not; when
any, even the strongest of these forms, are reciprocal, they do not
interfere with the idea of equality, or of mutual independence; if
they are not reciprocally performed, the last of the forms express-
es, in the strongest manner, the submission and homage of one
person or state to another: and, in this light, the Tartar family
now on the throne of China consider the ceremony called san-kwei
kew-kow, thrice kneeling, and nine times beating the head against
the ground. Those nations of Europe who consider themselves
tributary and yielding homage to China, should perform the Tartar
ceremony; those who do not consider themselves so, should not
erform the ceremony.
“The English embassador, lord Macartney, appears to have
understood correctly the meaning of the ceremony, and proposed
the only alternative, which could enable him to perform it; viz. a
Chinese of equal rank performing it to the king of England's pic-
ture. Or, perhaps, a promise from the Chinese court that should
an embassador ever go from thence to England, he would perform
it in the king's presence, might have enabled him to do it. These
remarks will probably convince the reader that the English go-
vernment acts as every civilized government ought to act, when
she endeavors to cultivate a good understanding, and liberal in-
tercourse with China; but since, whilst using those endeavors,
she never comtemplates yielding homage to China, she still wisely
refuses to perform by her embassador, that ceremony which is the
expression of homage.
“The lowest form by which respect is showed in China at this
day is kung-show, that is, joining the hands and raising them be-
fore the breast. The next is tso-yih, that is, bowing low with the
hands joined. The third is ta-tseen, bending the knee, as if about
to kneel. The fourth is kwei, to kneel. The fifth is ko-tow, kneel-
ing, and striking the head against the ground. The sixth, san-kow
striking the head three times against the earth before rising from
one's kneee. The seventh, luh-kow, that is, kneeling and striking
the forehead three times, rising on one's feet, kneeling down again,
and striking the head again three times against the earth. The
climax is closed by the san-kunei-kew kow, kneeling three different
times, and at each time knocking the head thrice against the
round. Some of the gods of China are entitled only to the san-
ow; others to the luh-kow; the teen (heaven), and the emperor
are worshiped with the san-kuei kew-kow. Does the emperor
of China claim divine honors?” See Morrison's Memoir, p. 142.


376 Pride and humility. Dec.
BENDING The kNEE.—Chaou Tun-she, one of the censors has
complained to the emperor, that in the courts at Peking a spirit of
servility is creeping among the officers, which is manifested by
some of them, who ought to stand erect when they see others, now
bending the knee and wishing them repose. They are also accused
of receiving too-e, emblems of prosperity such as the emperor sent
to the king of England. The latter part of the accusation, which
was leveled at some of the emperor's kindred, the censor, before
the court of nobles which investigated the case, could not sub-
stantiate; and he himself is subjected to a strict, or rather severe
court of inquiry.
PRupe AND HUMILITY.”—Poor, mortal man has always been dis-
posed to arrogate to himself authority and honors, which belong
only to Him who rules above, and before whom all “nations are as
a drop of a bucket, and are counted as the small dust of the ba-
lance:”—yea, they are as nothing, and are counted by him as less
than nothing, and vanity. For he “hath measured the waters in
the hollow of his hand, and meted out the heavens with a span,
and comprehended the dust of the earth in a measure, and weighed
the mountains in scales, and the hills in a balance.” As the de-
sires of man are not bounded by earth, his ambition can never be
satisfied with short-lived, earthly glory, which passeth away like
the flower of the field. The conqueror, satiated with earthly glory,
regards all the titles which this world can bestow as not sufficient
to portray his dignity; his ambition reaches up to heaven, and the
frail child of clay claims relationship with the sun, moon, and
stars. But he stops not here even; he proclaims himself lord of
those luminaries. Reason smiles at this presumption; philosophy
pronounces it absurd; and pure religion stigmatizes it with
eternal infamy. Alas, how many mortals have arrogated to them-
selves divine honors, and sought to be deified here on earth, and
adored as gods by their fellow men.
These facts afford the most decisive proof of our apostacy, and
constrain us to confess that we have been in league with the great
destroyer of good. Clad with celestial glory, far above many of
his compeers in heaven, he fell by his abominable pride. Cast
down to the realms of darkness for his transgression, he now seeks
to seduce our race, and lead them to offend by a similar exhibition
of pride and vain glory. He has declared himself lord of this world,
and promised that whosoever will fall down and worship him,
shall share with himself the glory and the empire of it; and man,
proud man, with equal ambition, seeks for universal sovereignty.
These are not the idlestrains of dark demonology. Alas, men have
given too much proof that they are under the influence of the prince
of darkness. Though his power is invincible and little acknow-
ledged—yea, even ridiculed and denied, his sway is wide and pow-
erful; and if the omnipotent God did not set bounds to his influ-
* From a Correspondent


1833. Pride and Humility. 377
ence over mankind, they would act the part of demons towards
each other, and by perpetual contests for supremacy, would deso-
late the earth. But to fathom the machinations of this power of
darkness is beyond our ability. The fuel of ambition is in our
hearts; Satan throws in the spark, and the fire becomes unquench-
able. Her responsibility however, is not lessened on this account;
we are warned to flee from this arch fiend; and if we resist him,
God will deliver us from the power of darkness and translate us
into the kingdom of his dear Son. The fruit of this spirit of dark-
ness is ungovernable pride; the fruit of Christ's spirit is deep
humility. Unless the human mind is reduced to obedience to
Christ, we may never expect to see men truly humble before God.
The more enlightened a nation becomes, the less will be the
pageantry of royalty and the desire to assume higher honors
than belong to man. The more uncultivated the mind and the
more addicted to idolatry, the greater is the danger of giving way
to the idle fancy of usurping divine honors. We read of a
Babylonian monarch who caused himself to be deified and wor-
shiped. The millions who obeyed the sovereign of Persia, were all
the slaves and worshipers of their king. Even Alexander, though
he had received a Grecian education, could forget himself so far
as to wish to receive divine honors. Many of the Roman empe-
rors were foolish enough to permit their statues to be adored, and
finally made a law requiring this impious worship of every citizen
of the empire. Could there be an instance of more gross idolatry
than this A whole nation, composed of men whom we honor
for the soundness of their judgment, and the many noble qualities
which they possessed, thus degrading themselves below many a
nation of barbarians and savages.
It is vain to interpret this deification of mortals as only emblem-
atical. Nations, which are without God in the world, are vain in
their imaginations, and are led on from one error to another, till
they become hateful in the sight of God, and dishonor themselves
by the vilest abuse of the noble faculties bestowed on them by their
Creator. When we see untaught barbarians puffed up with vanity
and self conceit, we pity them; but when we see enlightened na-
tions, who possess the means of knowing their own insignificancy,
exalting themselves before the Most High, our compassion may
well be mingled with contempt.
Christianity, though it admits of no boasting before the Judge of
all mankind, has been accused of cherishing the spirit of pride and
self-complacency, by substituting the grace of God for our own
righteousness. Fallible men have extolled and trusted in their
own meritorious deeds, and thought themselves worthy to appear
in the presence of Him who looks not at the outward conduct mere-
ly, but knows the innermost recesses of our hearts, and who cannot
behold sin but with abhorrence. Vain delusion this Wain indeed
will it appear at that day, when the eternal sanctity of God shall
shine forth in its proper lustre, and when every stain and imperfec-
tion of the most holy men that have ever lived shall be clearly seen.
ºx


878 A Hortatory Command. .DEc.
Our brightest ornament in the sight of God is, to be clothed with
deep humility. Our great pattern, Jesus Christ, “being found in
fashion as a man, humbled himself and became obedient unto
death, even the death of the cross.” Let us follow him, that we
may not be found naked and forlorn when all the vain glory of this
world shall cease to dazzle, and all its pleasures be set at naught.
TRAIT of the IMPERIAL CLAN.—The court of General Police
has represented to the emperor, that the widow Lewseu only
eighteen years of age, applied to their office, and stated that her
niece, a girl of fifteen years of age, whose father was dead, was
persecuted to become his wife by Changpa, a powerful man of
the clan. It was the duty of her late husband Mingshow, to
protect the girl. His consent to sell her was necessary, be-
fore Changpa could make the purchase. Changpa often en-
deavored to frighten Mingshow into compliance in vain. He
then hired vagabonds to seize him, and carry him to his house ;
which they did, and there bound him and beat him to force him
to sign an agreement. Under this usage he made a false promise
to refer the matter to the head of the tribe. But the headman
himself was afraid of Changpa, and instead of helping the op-
pressed, joined hands with the oppressor. Changpa next armed
a number of followers, who entered by violence the house of Ming-
show. He ran out at a back door, and in his fright threw himself
into a well. The crowd of assailants wished to rescue him; but
Changpa stepped forward and prevented them, and so Ming-
show her husband lost his life. Peking, August, 1833.
A hort Atory command.—It is difficult to combine an exhorta-
tion and an order; but the government of Canton, to soften the
command addressed to all householders, requiring them to sub-
scribe for the relief of the sufferers in the last inundation, have
prefixed to it the word exhortation. This keuen-yu, as they call it,
has given great dissatisfaction to the people, some of whom have
stuck up anonymous placards against the governor and his late
colleague, the fooyuen. In these they sneeringly thank the foo-
yuen for his kind wishes, with which however they cannot com-
ply, and intimate that the officers of government devour what they
thus extort. They argue that many widows and poor persons who
let small houses, have nothing else but the rent to live upon: take
from them a month's rent, and they must go without a month's
food. Besides, they are scandalized at the official collectors' feast-
ing every day out of the sums collected from the poor subscribers
for the relief of the houseless and distressed sufferers. The
managers of charity in China, as well as elsewhere, think that.
charity begins at home; they must have a good dinner and choice .
wines, when they take care of the affairs of the poor. The horta-
tory command extends to them who occupy a house of their own.
An estimate of its probable rent is made, and that sum demanded.


1833.
379
Religious Intelligence.
RELIGIOUS INTELLIGENCE.
SANDwich islands.—By the
Prussian ship, Princess Louisa,
which arrived in this port on the
24th ult., we received letters from
the Islands to the 31st of August;
one of them is from the princi-
pal of the High School at La-
haina. This institution was
founded in the summer of 1831.
For the first year, the number of
scholars was limited to fifty; but
it has now increased to near one
hundred. Since the language of
the Islands has been reduced to
writing, and incipient measures
adopted to instruct the inhabit-
ants, many thousands have been
taught to read, and the want of
more competent teachers is sen-
sibly felt. A leading object of
the high school is to train up
native teachers, who being well
instructed, may aid the mission-
aries in their arduous duties, or
pursue other occupations as a
sense of duty shall direct. “It
is also the design of the institu-
tion to disseminate sound know-
ledge throughout the islands;
embracing literature and the
sciences, and whatever will tend
eventually to elevate the natives
from their present ignorance,
and render them a thinking,
enlightened, virtuous people.”
We wish the school every
success; and hope its directors
will, without delay, be enabled
“to raise it as high as possible,
consistent with the length and
breadth of its foundation;” and
the principal may be assured
that “whatever will please and in-
struct his pupils,” which it is in
our power to command, shall be
forwarded to him by every con-
venient opportunity. We would
not see Chinese ethics transplant-
ed to another soil; but some-
thing of Chinese industry as dis-
played in their husbandry, ma-
nufactures, &c., might not be
amiss among the Sandwich Isl-
anders.
“There is an article on ‘Per-
secution' in the July numbe
of the Repository for 1832,” says
a correspondent from the islands,
“which purports to have been
founded on “reports’ in circu-
lation concerning the “South
Sea islands,’ and implying that
the chiefs or missionaries have
attempted to ‘enforce church
discipline' upon the people gen-
erally. Now as to the Sandwich
Islands, the rulers, as such,
have not attempted to enforce
church discipline even on church
members, much less on those
who are not members of the
church. And the missionaries
surely have not attempted to en-
force church discipline on any
but members of the church; the
doors of which they have ever
guarded with great care to pre-
vent multitudes rushing in,
who were ready to be baptized,
and to take on them the vows of
the covenant, at least, many
who proclaimed themselves to
be thus ready, but whom we
feared were not truly born of the
Spirit. In all the islands, only 669
have been admitted to church-
membership.”
Missionary Seminary at Bat.
ticotta, Ceylon.—This institu.
tion has been in operation abou
ten years, and has thus far fully


380
DEc.
Religious Intelligence.
answered the expectations of its
founders. It was called into ex-
istence by the wants of the peo-
ple in that and adjoining districts
—wants which are felt in per-
haps an equal degree in every
part of western Asia. These
wants may not indeed be known
to those who are the subjects of
them. The palsy of intellect is
too complete for that. The moral
disease has progressed till there
is not life enough left to enable
the people to perceive what their
wants are. But they are seen
and felt by those who know what
men are capable of doing and
enjoying, and who wish to see
these nations rising to an intel-
lectual and moral equality with
the nations of the west.
The object of the institution
is to give some of the most pro-
mising youth selected from the
mission schools in the surround-
ing country a thorough educa-
tion. This the founders justly
regarded as the surest means of
freeing the minds of such youth
as might come under their in-
struction from the errors in phi-
losophy, morals, and religion,
which have from time immemo-
rial prevailed among their
countrymen; and of preparing
them to become teachers of
others.
The principal building be-
longing to the institution is
Othey Hall; so called in honor
of sir Richard Otley, who con-
tributed liberally for its erection.
It is 64 feet in length by 29 in
breadth, built of hewn stone.
It is completely surrounded by
a verandah, and contains four
large rooms for library, lectures,
and public examinations, and
several smaller ones for other
purposes. The whole necessary
expenses of a native student,
tuition, library, &c. being gratis,
do not exceed $30 per annum;
connected with the seminary, is
a preparatory school, the object
of which is sufficiently indicat-
ed by its name.
The course of study is liberal
and well calculated to effect its
object as stated above. Of this,
the following list of books used
by the several classes i.1 1831, is
a sufficient proof.
“First class, 17 students.
Lennie's grammar and exer-
cises; Blair's lectures on rheto-
ric; Porteus' evidences of Chris-
tianity; Euclid through the 4th
book; Blair's grammar of na-
tural philosophy through optics;
translating, declamation, and
composition; and Tamul classics.
“Second class, 18 students.
Woodbridge's geography: Len-
nie's grammar; Euler's and
Bonnycastle's algebra; Mental
arithmetic (reviewing): Tamul
and English phrases; Euclid 1st
book; Pronouncing Testament;
Tamul grammar of the high
language, and Tamul classics.
“Third class 18, and fourth
class 30 students. Lennie's
grammar; Colburn and Joyce's
arithmetics through logarithms;
phrases; Native arithmetic;
first lessons in astronomy; writ-
ing in English; New Testament
and English tracts.--All the
classes attended to the study of
the Bible in connexion with
chronology.” -
Special attention is paid to
the subjects of geography, natu-
ral philosophy, and astronomy,
on account of the connexion of
the native systems with the my-
thology and superstitions of the
Ceylonese. According to the
Skanda Purana, one of their


1833.
sacred books, which is used,
very much to the terror of the
priesthood as a classic in the
seminary, “The earth is flat,
one thousand millions of yosany
(or 2,000,000,000 miles) in di-
ameter, one hundred thousand
yosany from the sun, and twice
this distance from the moon,
and remains immoveably fixed.
It is the opinion even of the best
informed among the natives,
that these things were not as-
certained by human investiga-
tion, but are matters of pure
revelation; sanctioned, however,
by the testimony of all antiqui-
ty; consequently whatever mili-
tates against this system, is to
be rejected as false, if not pro-
fane.”
With the help of a valuable
apparatus procured in England,
the principal has succeeded in
convincing not only the students
generally, but also many others
who are usually present at the
public examinations, and occa-
sionally attend his lectures, of
the incorrectness of the systems
taught in their sacred books.
The truth is made so plain that
its evidence cannot be resisted,
unless it be by a determination
not to be convinced, which will
not yield even to the evidence of
sight. The effect desired is
produced. Their confidence in
those books, and consequently
in the gods from whom they
were supposed to have been
received, is shaken, and in some
cases entirely overthrown. A
spirit of inquiry is awakened
and the native intellect begins
to be in motion. Those who
are accounted learned men
begin to tremble for their repu-
tation, and the priests for their
credit and support. The people
Missionary Seminary at Batticotta.
381
begin to think, to distinguish
truth from error, and free them-
selves from the chains of super-
stition and bigotry in which
their fathers were held. This is
to be attributed in no small
degree to the wise policy which
gave the institution a character
truly and decidedly Christian;
and has led its instructors to
use every proper means for
bringing the truths of the gospel
to bear upon the minds of the
students with all their force.
They are not satisfied when they
have convinced their pupils of
the truth of Christianity, nor even
when they see evidence of their
real piety. They endeavor to
inspire them with the same spi-
rit of active benevolence which
dwelt in the bosom of Him who
“went about doing good,” and
which is the distinguishing cha-
racteristic of real Christanity.
A large proportion of themspend
a part or the whole of their va-
cations in going from village to
village, and from house to house,
and by conversation, reading
the Scriptures, and the distribu-
tion of tracts on various sub-
jects, correcting the errors of
their countrymen, and commu-
nicating to them the knowledge
they have obtained at the semi-
nary; and some usually spend a
part of every day in such labors.
Let this system continue in
operation a few years more, and
the sacred books and the Brah-
mins will lose their influence,
truth take the place of error,
and virtue and happiness suc-
ceed to vice and misery. In
these anticipations we are not
alone. So long ago as 1824,
sir Richard Otley, then govern-
or of Ceylon, after attending an
examination and testifying his


382
approbation by a very liberal
donation, remarked, “I enter-
tain much more sanguine hope
of the progress of civilization
among the natives, than I did
previously to witnessing the ex-
amination.” Sir R. usually at-
tended the annual examinations,
at the close of which he address-
ed the members of the seminary
and their parents and friends
who were present, sometimes
distributed rewards to the most
deserving of the students, and in
various otheir ways rendered im-
portant aid to the institution as
long as he remained on the isl-
and; and at his departure promis-
ed to recommend it to the favor-
able consideration of the British
government; a happy instance
of the union of rank and influ-
ence with decided and efficient
piety; such as we ardently
desire to see exemplified by those
who bear the Christian name
in every other land.
Sir Robert W. Horton, the
present governor, is no less fa-
vorably disposed towards the
seminary. The last examination
of which we have received any
account, was attended by him
and lady Horton, together with
a large assembly of the ladies
and gentlemen of Colombo.
The students were prepared to
be examined in theology, En-
glish reading and grammar,
Latin, Greek, Hebrew, geogra-
phy, arithmetic, algebra, geo-
metry, and trigonometry. His
excellency selected passages
from the classics used by the
students in which they were ex-
amined. Their reading, pars-
ing, and answers to questions
proposed, were in general highly
creditable to themselves and
their instructors, and seemed to
Missionary Seminary at Batticotta.
DEC,
give great satisfaction to the
highly respectable audience.
We have watched the pro-
gress of this institution with the
greater interest, because we
believe that the work of arous-
ing the Ceylonese, and every
people in this part of the world,
from their comparatively stupid
state, and of effecting the need-
ed reformation in their charac-
ter and condnct, must be done
chiefly by natives. We recollect
no instance in which a great
reformation has been effected
among any people by foreign
influence alone. Foreigners may,
and often do, bring into a coun-
try the knowledge which rouses
the native mind to activity, and
thus give the first impulse to the
agency which changes a nation
of savages or pagans into an
enlightened and Christian peo-
ple. But to give this impulse is
all that can be expected from
abroad. This is all that we ex-
pect will be done for the Chi-
nese by those foreigners who are
interested in their moral and
religious improvement; and it
is all that needs to be done.
When all the great truths in
science and religion which have
made western nations what they
are, shall have been fairly
brought to the knowledge of a
comparatively small number of
the Chinese, and they shall
have been led, like the members
of the Batticotta seminary, by
the influence of those truths to
put forth the energies of their
minds for the instruction of their
countrymen; then the great ob-
ject of our desire will be near
its accomplishment; then China
will soon be delivered from her
ignorance, bigotry, and super-
stition, and the evils which they


1833.
383
Sycee Silver and Dollars. .
produce and perpetuate ; and
her sons and daughters be seen
walking in the paths of know-
ledge and holiness.
Roman catholics IN MACAo.
Two or three months ago we
heard it rumored, that his excel-
lency, the Portuguese governor
of Macao, had determined that
all the Catholic priests in that
settlement, who were not the
subjects of his catholic majesty,
should, on an appointed day,
(15th inst.) leave the place. We
doubted that rumor at first, but
it has proved to be true. Four
of the priests, and no doubt the
true and faithful subjects of his
holiness, have accordingly quit
Macao; three of these are
Frenchmen, the other is a na-
tive of Italy, and agent for the
Congregatio de propaganda fide
at Rome. How his excellency
can reconcile this conduct with
the catholic principles of Chris-
tianity, or even justify himself
to the pope and the other high
authorities of Europe, we are
unable to conjecture. But of this
we are confident, that such a
procedure cannot be supported
on Christian principles, and that
it must and will be condemned
as unfriendly, uncharitable, and
unjust by enlightened and libe-
ral minded men of every name
and denomination. * * -
JOURNAL OF OCCURRENCES.
CANton.—During the month, an
imperial messenger has visited the
government here to bring an offic al
intimation of the late empress' re-
mains having been deposited in the
imperial mausoleum. This messenger
wore only a gold button, which indi-
cates the lowest rank; but in honor of
his master, the governor went down
on his knees and knocked his head
nine times on the earth, whilst the
other stood erect on the bow of his
boat. This envoy brought, it is said, a
request from a royal personage in Pe-
king, to a hong merchant who had
formerly sought his patronage, that he
would procure for him a pair of gold
wash hand-basins.
Sycee silver AND pot.LARs.—From
the province of Chekeång, a repre-
sentation has been made to the em-
peror, stating that sycee silver was
exported from the country for the
purchase of opium, &c., but that no
law existed for unishment of the
offense; moreover there was some job-
bing in playing foreign dollars and sy-
cee silver against each other, by which
the price of silver was enhanced, as
best suited the interests of the jobbers.
By his majesty's order, the Criminal
Board deliberated on the subject, and
decided that the exportation of “yel-
low gold and white silver" should be
punished in the same manner as the
clandestine exportation of rice or other
grains. The Board recommended that
the trade with foreign d be i
t o for goods; but
in the term white silver, they Wöuld not
include “foreign money," or dollars;
since the dollars were imported, they
might also be exported without detri-
ment to the metals of the country.
Against this decision Hwang Tseó-
tsze, censor of the province of Fuh-
keen, has protested. He says, “the
people are pleased with dollars for
their convenience in counting; they
are of value also for the facility of
transport, and for use where sycee is
extravagantly high, as dollars can be
made .# an inferior touch. On these
accounts, dollars are made from sycee
silver by crafty merchants in Canton,
Fuhkeen, Keāngse and Keāngsoo,
similar to the foreign dollars; so that
if dollars apparently foreign may be
exported with impunity, all the sycee
silver in China, may be converted into
dollars, and thus sent abroad without
any crime. The new law, he says,
prohibits the export of sycee with one
hand, and permits it with the other.
He begs the emperor to prohibit by


384
Journal of Occurrences.
penalty the coining of dollars, as he
does the secret coining of cash; and as
rice and money are so different in
bulk while the same in value, that
he should accordingly increase in the
same proportion the punishment for
exporting silver. Otherwise the trea-
sure of the land will go forth to feed
the cupidity of barbarians, and injure
China for myriads of years. The ex-
port of copper and iron affects only
military weapons, but that of silver
touches the vitals of the empire.
JEALousy of the Chinese govern.
MENT.-Two nobles of one of the tribu-
tary Tartar tribes, employed in atten-
dance on the cmperor at Peking, had
lately to return to their native tribe, to
sacrifice to the manes of a deceased
prince. On their way back, feeling
a desire to see new places, they left
the ordinary route outside of the Great
wall, and proceeded to Peking through
Shense and the other provinces imme.
diately south of the wall;-defraying
all charges themselves, in place of
expending the traveling allowances
to which they were entitled, on the
usual outside route. For this they
have fallen under the imperial dis-
pleasure, and the Board of War is
directed to deliberate regarding the
punishment of their demerit.
GAME LAws of TARTARY.-The wild
horses and cattle of the Mantchou
forests are, like the ginseng which
also grows there, considered the pro-
perty of government; and to hunt
these cattle is prohibited to every one
who is not employed by government
for the purpose. It has however been
found impossible to prevent the con.
stant infringement of the laws, and
therefore it is to be taken off in some
places, but retained in others. By
this change the government still re-
tains in fact the monoply: for as the
frequent hunts on the free lands will
drive the cattle into the government
forests, the people will rarely be able
to maintain the hunt with success.
The Kwangchow foo, whose name
is Kin, or Gold, is in very bad odor
among the people of Canton. The
late fooyuen Choo forced him upon
his predecessor Hoo, who died of vex-
ation; and mow he is placarded in the
streets, and even against his own office.
One of these placards now before us,
accuses him of having taken three
sisters to be his wives without any of
the formalities that law and custom
require; and of making two thousand
taels of silver the price of every favor.
able decision.
PEKING. We have received the
Gazettes to the 8th of the 9th moon,
October 20th; the recent numbers con-
tain very little that is interesting to
foreigners. We have looked them all
over, but have found nothing to repay
the trouble. The military governor
of the “nine gates of Peki.g,” conti-
nually reports cases of theft, robbery,
assault, sodomy and rape, such as in
other nations are managed by officers
of the police, or inferior judges.
On the 27th of the 8th moon, he re-
ported the apprehension of a band of
vagabonds, who had committed all
these crimes, and who endeavored to
escape being detected by pretending
that they were officers of government
patroling the strects at night.
In another gazette a case of parricide
is recorded. The deceased was a
Mantchou, who belonged to the Han-
lin college. The son says, he was at
home superintending the worship of
tablets dedicated to heaven and earth,
when his father having neglected to
give orders, he omitted to burn incense
at the proper time. The father, then
in front of the tablet, used abusive
language to the son; who in a fit of
passion seized a billet of wood and
broke his father's skull. He then drag-
ged the body into the street, intend.
ing to make some pretext to screen
himself from the charge of murder, but
was seen and apprehended.
On another occasion eight individ-
uals were seized for having propagat-
ed heterodox opinions and formed
associations.
A member of the imperial family
has petitioned government to seize
his rebellious and vicious son, in order
to send him to Mantchou Tartary,
and shut him up in perpetual confine-
ment, -
Delinquencies of Chinese Officers. His
majesty has recently been very much
displeased at the carelessness of many
of his officers who have charge of the
seals of government. Four cases have
come before him this year, where-
in the parties lost the keys of the box-
es in which the seals were kept,


386 Crawfurd's IIistory of the JAN.
by the half civilized nations of India, who being
almost entirely ignorant of geography and naviga-
tion were poorly qualified either to extend their own
researches, or to communicate to others the little
knowledge which they had already acquired. Dur-
ing the middle ages, the productions of these eastern
islands constituted the most important part of “that
oriental commerce which lighted the enbers of civi-
lization in Italy;” and finally, it was the search for
them that led to the interesting discoveries of Gama
and Columbus. . . . . . . .
It is matter of deep regret, that to the present
time, these islands and their inhabitants remain in so
great a measure unknown to the enterprising and
philanthropic people of modern Europe and America.
Rich, fertile, and salubrious in a very high degree,
they are, with but few exceptions, the abodes of un-
civilized tribes, who hold a very.inferior rank in the
scale of nations. Were they better known to the
people of the west, and more frequently visited by
them, they would unquestionably contribute much to
the advantage of the visitors; and were the visitors
men of probity and benevolence, able and ready to
communicate, they would prove themselves to be the
benefactors of the islanders. . . . . . . . . . . . . .”
Both the Hindoos and the Arabians who first visit--.
ed these islands were ignorant of their topography;
they sought only for their productions, and to them.
their knowledge was confined. The natives were,'
and are still, equally ignorant. Though from their
geographical situation they are necessarily a maritime
people; yet their enterprises rarely extend beyond
those islands and countries which are in the imme-
diate neighborhood of their own. Their voyages
are usually confined to the coast; sometimes however,
favored by the steadiness of the monsoons, deriving.
some assistance from observing the heavenly bodies,
and now and then having recourse to the compass,
the more adventurous navigators pursue a bolder
track, and quitting sight of land, by a direct course


1834, Indian Archipelago, 387
make for their port of destination. At what period
the mariner's compass was introduced among them,
and whether they received it from Europeans or from
the Chinese, it is difficult to determine: they call it
pandoman, which is a native name. The islanders
have no term to designate the monsoons; they divide
the year “into a dry and a wet half,” and designate
them by the “native term masa or mangsa, meaning
season, or by the Arabic one of the same significa-
tion, musim,” which Europeans have changed into
monsoon. The natives have no common name to
designate the whole group of islands which is so well
defined and known by the appellation, Indian Archi-
pelago. The words pulo and nusa, which ought to
be translated ‘islet, they seldom apply to any portion
of land, “the insularity of which is not within the z
range of vision.” The name which they give to an
island is usually borrowed from the physical aspect
of the country, most commonly from its configura-
tion: for example, Penang, ‘the areca nut,' is so
called from some imaginary resemblance of the shape
of the island to that fruit. Ubi, or Uwi, ‘a yam,'
is a name given to several small islands, in allusion
to their form. When an island is inhabited by a
tribe considerable for its civilization or numbers, the
idea of insularity is dropped, and the country takes
its name from such a tribe. On this principle Am-
boyna, Bali, &c., are called, not the islands of the
Amboynese, Balinese, but tanah Ambun, tanah Bali,
the lands of these people. . . . . . . . . . . . .
... The Indian Archipelago is by far the greatest
group of islands on the globe. Its proximity to Chi-
na, and the intercourse which subsists between the
inhabitants of the two countries, not to mention va-
rious other considerations, often attract our atten-
tion to that interesting and important subdivision of
the earth. After a residence of fourteen years in
India, nine of which he spent in the islands of the
eastérn Archipelago, Mr.Crawfurd was well prepared
to write the history of these islands. From his work


388 Crawfurd’s History of the JAN.
the title of which stands at the head of this article,
we shall here introduce a rapid sketch of the geo-
graphical and physical features of the country, add-
ing from the same source brief notices concerning the
character of its inhabitants, their history, and their
intercourse and relations with foreign nations. All
that we can state in the present article will be ge-
neral; the more particular accounts of the several
islands and their productions, and the different tribes
of men and their “innumerable languages” must be
reserved for future numbers. * * . . . . . . . . . .
The Indian Archipelago embraces in length forty
degrees of longitude, and in breadth thirty degrees of
latitude; thus comprehending, with the intervening
seas, an area of 4,500,000 geographical, or about
5,500,000 statute miles: it extends from the western
extremity ef the island of Sumatra, to the parallel of
the Araoe islands; and from the parallel of 11° south
to 19° north of the equator. “Its general position is
between the great continental land of New Holland,
and the most southern extremity of the continent of
Asia. It is centrically situated with respect to all the
great and civilized nations of Asia, and lies in the
direct and inevitable route of the maritime intercourse
between them. Its eastern extremity is within three
days sail of China; its western not above three weeks
sail from Arabia. Ten days' sail carries a ship from
China to the richest and most centrical portion of
the Archipelago, and not more than fifteen are requir-
ed for a similar voyage from Hindostan. Taking a
wider view of its geographical relations, it may be
added, that the passage from Europe or America to
the western, extremity of the Archipelago, may be
readily performed in ninety days, and has been often
done in less, and that the voyage from the west coast
of America may be effected in little more than one
half that time. Such are the extraordinary, advan-
tages of the geographical and local position of these
fine countries.” * - -


1834. Indian Archipelago. 389
The following short abstract of the topography will
serve our present purpose. It contains.three islands
of the first degree in size; namely, Borneo, Sumatra,
and New Guinea; of the second rank, it contains an
island and a peninsula, namely, Java, and the Malay-
an peninsula; of the third rank, it contains three,
Celebes, Luçonia, and Mindanao; and of the fourth,
it contains at least sixteen, namely, Bali, Lombok,
Sumbawa, Chandana, Flores, Timur, Ceram, Booroe,
Gilolo, Palawan, Negros, Samar, Mindoro, Panay,
Leyte, and Zebu. Of the relative importance, value,
and populousness of the different islands, the size is
by no means a just criterion. Many valuable islands
of small size are excluded from the preceding list;
some of these may be noticed in the sequel. “The
whole Archipelago is arranged into groups or chains
of islands, with here and there a great island inter-
vening. The islands are upon the whole thickly
strewed, which gives rise to innumerable straits and
passages, which would occasion, from their intricacy
a dangerous navigation, were the seas of the Archi-
pelago not distinguished, "beyond all others, by the
proximity of extensive tracts of land, by their pa-
cific nature, and by the uniformity of the prevailing
winds and currents.” . . . . . . . . .
tº Five portions of the ocean which encompass or
intersect the different islands of the Archipelago are of
z considerable extent, and tolerably free from islands.
The first of these in extent is the China sea, which
lies between Borneo and the Malayan peninsula; the
second is the Java sea; the third is that tract of
waters called the Banda sea, lying between Celebes
on one side, Booroe and Ceram on the other, and
the chain of islands to the south, of which Timur
and Timurlaut are the most conspicuous; the fourth
is the clear tract of ocean named the sea of Celebes,
lying between Celebes and Borneo to the south and
west, and Mindanao and the Sooloo chain of isles to
the north; the fifth and last is the basin formed by
the Sooloo chain, Borneo, Palawan, the southwest


300 Crawfurd's History of the JAN.
side of the Philippines, and Mindanao, usually known
as the Mindoro or Sooloo sea.—The bay of Bengal
and the lindian ocean, wash the western shores of
the Archipelago, the Pacific, its southern and east-
ern shores, and the China sea its northern. . The
western boundary of the Archipelago is formed by the
Malayan peninsula and Sumatra. The southern
boundary is formed by a long chain of contiguous
islands, the most singular which the physical form of
the globe anywhere present; it commences, with
Java, and terminates nearly with Timurlaut, running
in a straight line almost due east and west, in a course
of 1600 geographical miles. The eastern boundary
is more extensive, broken, and irregular than any of
the rest; it is principally formed by the great island
of Luçonia. The northern barrier is formed by the
great islands of Luçonia, Palawan, and Borneo.
The whole Archipelago lies within the tropics, and
almost the whole of it, with the exception of the
Philippines, is situated within ten degrees (on each
side) of the equator. “There is necessarily a ge-
neral uniformity in climate, in animal and vegetable
productions, and of course, in the character of the dif-
ferent races of inhabitants. Notwithstanding this, a
nearer acquaintance both with the country and its
inhabitants, soon points out to us that there is much
diversity in both, and we shall find that the whole is
capable of being subdivided into five natural and well
grounded divisions.” . We will notice each of these
divisions, and nearly in the words of our author.
. The first, comprehends the Malayan peninsula,
Sumatra, Java, Bali, Lombok, and about two thirds
of the western part of Borneo, up to the parallel of
longitude 216° east. The animal and vegetable pro-
ductions of this division are peculiar, and have a
higher character of utility than thase of the others; the
soil is of superior fertility, and better suited for rear-
ing vegetable food of the first quality. The civilized
inhabitants have a general accordance in manners,
language, and political institutions; they are far more


1834. Indian Archipelago. 391
civilized thun those of the other divisions, and have
made considerable progress in arts, arms, and letters.
The island of Celebes is the centre of the second
division, which comprehends, besides that island it-
self, the smaller ones on its coast, as Bouton and
Salayer, the whole chain of islands from the parallel
of longitude 116° to 134° east, with the whole east :
coast of Borneo within the same limit, and up to
about 3° of north latitude. The animal and vegeta-
ble productions have generally a peculiar character,
the soil is of an inferior quality to that of the last,
and less suited to the rearing of rice of the first qua-
lity. In language, manners, and political institutions,
the inhabitants agree remarkably among themselves,
but differ widely from their western Ileighbors, and
are inferior to them. Rice is their priucipal food,
but it is not abundant; sago is occasionally used.
The third division differs in a most remarkable
manner from all the rest. Its extent is from the pa-
rallel of longitude 124° to 130° east; and from south
latitude 10° to latitude 2° north. The character of
the monsoons is here reversed. The eastern mon-
soon, which is dry and moderate at the west, is here
rainy and boisterous; the westerly monsoon, rough
and wet in the two first divisions, is here dry aud.
temperate. The greater number of the plants and
animals of the two first divisions disappear in the
third, where we have strange productions, in both
kingdoms, unknown to any other parts of the world.
This is the native country of the clove and nutmeg,
and the only one in the world which produces them.
in perfection. For raising the better kinds of vegeta-
ble food, the soil is of inferior fertility. Rice is scarce-
ly produced at all, and the staple food of the people is
sago. In language, mantiers, and political institu-
tions, the people agree among themselves, but differ
essentially from all their neighbors. They are far
inferior to the inhabitants of the first two divisious in
civilization, in power, and in kilowledge of the useful.


392 Crawfurd's History of the JAN.
arts. They have never acquired of themselves the
use of letters. - -
The fourth is, of all the divisions, the least distinctly
characterized; it extends from the parallel of 116° east
longitude to about 123; and from 4° to 10° north lati-
tude, and includes the northeast angle of Borneo, the
whole of Mindanao, and the Sooloo archipelago. The
clove and nutmeg are indigenous, but of imperfect.
and inferior quality. Sago is very often used, but
rice is the principal article of food. In civilization
the inhabitants are superior to those of the third
division, and inferior to those of the first, or even the
second. Their language, manners, and institutions
are peculiar, agreeing among themselves, and differ-
ing from those of all their neighbors. - -
The fifth and last division is the well-known group
of the Philippines, extending from the parallel of 10°
to 19 north latitude. A geographical situation so
different from that of all the other countries of the
Archipelago, produces much relative difference in
climate and productions. This division is the only
portion of the Archipelago within the boisterous re-
gion of hurricanes, and this circumstance alone gives
a peculiar character to the country. The soil is of
eminent fertility, and rice is the food of the more ci-
vilized races. The manners, the political institutions,
and above all, the language of the inhabitants, differ
in genius and form from those of all the other divi-
sions. - - - - .
“Such,” says our author, “are the particular cha-
racteristics of the different divisions of this great
country. The more general features of the whole
Archipelago, and those distinctive marks which cha-
racterize it from other portions of the world, are easily
enumerated. It has the common characters of other
tropical countries, heats, moisture, and luxuriant ve-
getation. It is throughout of a mountainous nature,
and its principal mountains from one extremity to
the other are volcanoes. It is very generally covered
with deep forests of stupendous trees. The number


1834. Indian Archipelago. 393
of grassy plains is very small, and there are no arid
sandy deserts. It is distinguished from every cluster
of islands in the world, by the presence of periodical
winds, and from all countries whatever by the peculiar
character of those winds. The Archipelago is the only
country of Asia situated upon the equinoctial line, or
very close to it. *** The insularity of the whole re-
gion, the contiguity of the different islands, and the
facility and rapidity of the navigation, are also pro-
minent and characteristic features. The animal and
vegetable productions of the Archipelago either differ
wholly from those of other countries, or are import-
ant varieties of them. In one quarter, even the prin-
cipal article of food is such as man nowhere else sub-
sists upon. The productions of the ocean are not
less remarkable for abundance and variety than those
of the land.” -
Two aboriginal races of human beings inhabit the
Indian islands; these are “as different from each
other as both are from all the rest of their species.”
Setting aside the minor divisions of the inhabitants,
as the Javanese, Malays, Bugis, Balinese, &c., we
shall confine our remarks to these two ; the one of
which may be described as abrown-complexioned peo-
ple, with lank hair; and the other as a black, or rather
sooty-colored race, with woolly or frizzled hair. Mr.
Crawfurd thinks that these two races of men present,
in their physical and moral character, a complete pa-
rallel with the white and negro races of the western
world; and the first, he adds, have always displayed
as eminent a relative superiority over the second, as
the race of white men have over the negroes of the
west. . * * * -
The persons of the brown-colored tribes are short,
squat, and robust. “Their medium height may be
reckoned, for the men, about five feet two inches, and
for the women, four feet eleven inches, which gives
about four inches less than the average stature of Eu-
ropeans. Their lower limbs are rather large and hea-
vy, but not ill-formed. Their arms are rather fleshy
2Z


394 Crawfurd's History of the JAN.
than muscular.” The face is of a round form; the mouth
wide; the teeth, when not discolored by art, very fine;
the chin is rather of a square form; the angles of the
lower jaw remarkably prominent; the cheek-bones
are high, and the cheek consequently rather hollow ;
the nose is short and small, never prominent nor flat;
the eyes are small, and always black, as with other
orientals. The complexion though usually brown,
varies a little among the different tribes. The fairest
races are generally towards the west, but sume of
them, as the Battaks of Sumatra, are upon the very.
equator. The Javanese, who live most comfortably,
are among the darkest people of the Archipelago; the
wretched Dayaks of Borneo are among the fairest.
Compared to Europeans, Arabs, Persians, Tartars,
Burmese, or Siamese, the Indian islanders must be
considered as an ill-looking race of people. In color,
virgin gold is their standard of perfection; but their
complexions are scarcely ever clear, and a blush is
seldom seen upon their faces. - - - -
The sooty-colored race is a dwarf African negro;
and by the brown-complexioned tribes is designated
the Pua-pua (Papua, or woolly haired) race. A full
grown male brought from the mountains of Queda
was found to be no more than four feet nine inches
high. Among those brought from New Guinea and
the adjacent islands, our author thinks he never saw
any one that exceeded five feet in height. Besides
their want of stature, they are of a spare and puny
frame. The following distinction has been drawn
between the Papuan and the African negro, by sir
Everard Home ; speaking of the Papuan he says:—
“His skin is of a lighter color, the woolly hair grows
in small tufts, and each hair has a spiral twist. The
forehead rises higher, and the hindhead is not so much
cut off. The nose projects more from the face. The
upper lip is longer and more prominent. The lower
lip projects forward from the lower jaw, to such an
extent that the chin forms no part of the face, the
lower part of which is formed by the mouth.” The


396 Craufurd's History of the JAN:
natives. From the correspondence of gentlemen, some
of whom have long resided in the islands and are
well acquainted with them and their inhabitants, we
hope to be able from time to time to lay before our
readers interesting notices of the Indian islanders.
We now proceed to notice very briefly the principal
foreigners who have at various times come in and
settled among them. These are Indians, Chinese,
Arabs, Portuguese, Spaniards, Dutch, and English.
The natives of Hindostan are found chiefly in the
western portion of the Archipelago. By Europeans
these are called Chulia; but by the natives Teling or
Kaling, which is more correct. Kalinga is the only
country of India generally known to the islanders;
and they give the name Kaling to those who come
from that country. Between the Coromandel coast
and the Indian islands, a commercial intercourse has
existed from time immemorial. “A passion on the .
part of the Hindoos, in common with the rest of
mankind, for the spices and other rare productions
of the islands, gave rise to this commerce, which in-
creased as the nations of the west improved in riches
or civilization; for the trade of the people of Coro-
mandel was the first link of that series of voyages,
by which the productions of the Archipelago were
conducted even to the markets of Rome.” Taking
advantage of the westerly monsoon, these adventurers
came annually to seek their fortunes in a country
richer and far less occupied than their own. In their
character, they are shrewd, supple, unwarlike, men-
dacious and avaricious; a large portion of them re-
turn to India, but a considerable one also colonizes
and intermarries with the natives. . . .
Of all foreigners, the Chinese are the most nume-
rous in the Archipelago. Their junks never fail to
bring a large supply of emigrants, and the European
trading ships frequently do the same—as many as
450 have been known to sail in a single ship. Many
of these return to their own country, “and the first
intention of every emigrant is probably to do so; but


1834. Indian Archipelago. 307
circumstances detain a number of them in the islands,
who, intermarrying whith the natives of the country,
generate a race inferior in energy and spirit to the
original settlers, but speaking the language, wearing
the garb, professing the religion, and affecting the
manners of the parent country. The Chinese settlers
may be described as at once enterprising, keen,
laborious, luxurious, sensual, debauched, and pusil-
lanimous. They are most generally engaged in trade,
in which they are equally speculative, expert, and
judicious. 'l'heir superior intelligence and activity
have placed in their hands the management of the
public revenue, in almost every country of the Archi-
pelago, whether ruled by natives or Europeans; and
of the traffic of the Archipelago with the surrounding
foreign states, almost the whole is conducted by
them.” The principal part of these settlers are in
Java, Borneo, Singapore and Penang; but a few
scattered families are to be found in every island
where the people are in any manner civilized. Of
these emigrants, sir Thomas Herbert has given, in
the quaint language of his time, the following ac-
count:—“The Chyneses are no quarrellers, albeit
voluptuous, venereous, costly in their sports, great
gamesters, and in trading too subtle for young mer-
chants; ofttimes so wedded to dicing, that, after
they have lost their whole estate, wife and children
are staked; yet in a little time, Jew-like, by gleaning
here and there, they are able to redeem their loss;
and if not, at the day, wife and children are then
sold in the market for most advantage.” -
. . The Arabians began at a very early period to trade
to the Archipelago; but these settlers are more consi.
derable for their influence than for their numbers. In
1296, when Marco Polo visited Sumatra, he found
many of the inhabitants of the coast converted to
Mohammedanism. Arabian adventurers have settled
in almost every part of the country; and of...all
who meet on this common theatre, the Arabs are the
most ambitious and bigoted. They have a strength


308 Crawfurd's History of the - JAN.
of character which places them far above the natives;
and when not devoted to the service of the prophet,
are wholly occupied with mercantile affairs. The
genuine Arabs are spirited, fair, and adventurous
merchants; but they often intermarry with natives,
and the mixed race is of a less favorable character.
Such are the Asiatic strangers, who at various
time have visited the lindian Archipelago. With
regard to Europeans, three nations only, the Portu-
guese, the Dutch, and the Spaniards, have establish-
ed a dominion of such extent and duration as to pro-
duce a material influence on the condition and cha-
racter of the native inhabitants; the Dutch and
Spaniards are the only people who have colonized
in the Archipelago, or at least who now exist there as
colonists. The British, at the present time, and under
the government of the honorable the E. I. Company,
have a governor and resident at Singapore, Malac-
ca, and Penang. “It is instructive,” says our author,
“to contemplate the difference which has characte-
rized the policy pursued by European nations in these
countries and in America, which became known to
Europeans nearly about the same time. Avarice
was the main spring of the policy with respect to both
countries, but it took a different direction, and was
differently modified according to the circumstances
in which they found the nations which occupied them.
The gold of America was soon exhausted; the per-
secution of the natives which followed the search of
it soon ceased ; the Americans had no rich commerce
to prosecute; their soil furnished no productions on
which Europeans put an extraordinary estimate;
colonization was consequently early resorted to, and
the prosperity of America has been comparatively
great and progressive. The lndian islands, on the
contrary, were found to have an industrious and com-
mercial population, and to abound in highly prized
commodities peculiar to themselves. . The attain-
ment of these commodities by violent means, and not
the search for gold, became naturally the object of


1834, Indian Archipelago, 399
the European adventurers ef all nations. The prose-
cution of the same object has continued down to the
latest period to actuate their policy; a systematic in-
justice which has, in every period of the European
connection, generated a train of evils and misfortunes
to the native inhabitants, of which no other portion
of mankind has been so long the victim.”
- Of European nations, the Portuguese were the first
who reached the Indian islands by way of the cape
of Good Hope. Diego Lopez de Sequeira led on the
enterprise; and, “if we except the accidental visits
of Marco Polo, Mandeville, and others,” may be look-
ed upon “as the proper discoverer of the Indian Ar-
chipelago.” Malacca was wrested from the natives in
1511, and its immense riches were given up to plun-
der. During the 130 years the city remained in the
possession of the Portuguese, it was 18 times besieg-
ed or blockaded; six times by its legitimate posses-
sors, seven times by the king of Acheen, thrice by the
Javanese, and twice by the Dutch. In 1521, a squa-
dron of nine ships appeared in the Spice islands for
the purpose of taking possession of them in the name
of the king of Portugal. The “simple sovereigns”
of the Moluccas received their treacherous guests
with caresses, and contended for the honor of enter-
taining them. De Britto established himself in Ter-
nate ; and was soon astonished by the arrival of the
companions of Magellan, who had reached the Mo-
luccas in the course of the first voyage round the
world. These he seized and imprisoned; and the na-
tives no sooner knew Europeans, than they were pre-
sented with the odious spectacle of their hatreds and
animosities. The first governor of the islands,
“stirred up civil war,” and even distributed rewards
for the massacre of the unfortunate natives. For
sixty years during which their dominion continued,
“the same scenes of rapine and cruelty were exhib-
ited. Kings were made and dethroned, executed
and extirpated at the caprice of these petty tyrants
of the Moluccas.” -


400 Craufurd's History of the JAN.
The Dutch intercourse with the people of the
Archipelago, did not commence until 1596; in which
year, a fleet of four ships, after a voyage of ten long
months, arrived at Bantam, then the principal trad-
ing port in the Indies, for those commodities which
the habits of Europe demanded. The adventurers
acted without judgment or moderation, in their inter-
course with the natives. At Bantam they embroil-
ed themselves with the inhabitants, and committed
actual hostilities. At Sádayu, “they committed a
horrible massacre, and at Madura a still more atro-
cious one, in which the prince of that country and
his family, coming to visit a Dutch fleet in a friendly
manner, lost their lives through the suspicious timi-
dity of these strangers.” . The early period of the
Dutch history, “consists in a compilation of their
commercial transactions, their wars with the Span-
iards and Portuguese, their broils with the English,
and their aggressions upon the natives.” We might
follow our author through many pages of similar
narrative, but we have no heart to do it, and we
desist from the task. At the present time, the Dutch
have possessions in Java, Amboyna, and Macassar;
and their countrymen at home in concert with a few
in the east, as in former times, are making laudable
efforts for the improvement of the islanders; and we
hope their success will be equal to the opportunities
they enjoy. - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Of the Spanish possessions, which are confined
to the Philippines, we have already spoken in another
article, and shall not here resume the subject further
than to quote one short paragraph from the work-be-
fore us. “It is remarkable,” says Mr. Crawfurd,
“that the Indian administration of one of the worst
governments of Europe, and that in which the ge-
neral principles of legislation and good government
are least understood, one too which has never been
skillfully executed, should, upon the whole, have
proved the least injurious to the native inhabitants of
the country. This, undoubtedly has been the cha-


1834, Indian Archipelago. 401
racter of the Spanish connection with the Philippines,
with all its vices, follies, and illiberalities; and the
present condition of these islands affords an unques-
tionable proof of this fact. Almost every other country
of the Archipelago is, at this day, in point of wealth,
É. and civilization, in a worse state than when
2uropeans connected themselves with them three
centuries back. The Philippines alone have improv-
ed in civilization, wealth, and populousness.”
We have now brought into review all the topics
which we proposed to notice in this article. We
shall conclude it by adding, in the form of a chronolo-
gical table, brief notices of the principal events in
the history of the Archipelago, whether native or
European. Our limits will not allow us to give
the table entire as it stands in the volumes of Mr.
Crawfurd; we select only the most important and
interesting particulars. - -
- . . . C H R o No Lo G 1c Al T A B l E -
Of the principal events in the history of the Indian Archipelago.
1160. A. D. A MALAYAN colony, first from the original country
of that people, and latterly from Palembang in Sumatra, set-
tles at the extremity of the Malayan peninsula, and founds the
city of Singhapura (Singapore). -
1252. The i. of Java invades Singhapura, and drives the Ma-
lays from thence, who, proceeding further westward, found the
city of Malacca.
1276, Sultan Mohammed Shah ascends the throne of Malacca,
and embraces Mohammedanism. - .
1304. The Javanese and Malays visit the island of Ternate for
cloves, and many of them settle there, and are soon followed
by Arabians. - -
1340. The king of Malacca engages in a war with Siam, whose
sovereign is killed in a battle which ensues.
1350. An Arabian adventurer instructs the king of Ternate in
Arabic, and in the art of ship-building. -
1391. An unsuccessful attempt to convert the Javanese to Mo-
hammedanism is made by a rajah.
1465. Javanese, Malays, and also Chinese, in great numbers,
frequent Ternate in quest of cloves.. . . - - - - -
1478. The Mohammedan religion established in Java; and short-
ly after, the people of the western end of the same island, or
the Sundas, converted to Mohammedallisin.
3A .


402 Craufurd's History of the JAN.
1495. The king of Ternate embraces the Mohammedan reli-
gion, and visits Java to receive instruction in that faith. -
1509. A Portuguese squadron of four ships, under the command
of Diogo Lopes de Siqueira, reaches the Indian Archipelago.
1511. The renowned Alphonzo Albuquerque, viceroy of the In-
dies, with a fleet of nineteen ships, and fourteen hundred men,
conquers Malacca, and sends a squadron under Diogo de
Abreu for the discovery of the Moluccas; he touches only at
Amboyna, and returns with a cargo of cloves. • * * * * * * *
1512. The Portuguese permitted to settle in the Celebes, where
they find some of the inhabitants converted to Mohammedanism.
1521. The Spaniards, conducted by Magellan, arrive in the Mo-
luccas by the straits bearing his name. That great navigator
is killed in an affray with the people of the little isle of Maktan,
one of the Philippines. : . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1523. The king of Acheen besieges the fortress of Passe, the
Portuguese garrison of which, after a gallant defense, take flight,
which puts an end to the Portuguese dominion in Sumatra.' '
The king of Bintan invests Malacca with a fleet and army,
the former under the command of the celebrated Laksimana; Al-
phonzo de Sousa arrives and relieves the city, sails for Pahang,
where he destroys all the merchant vessels, kills six thousand
persons, and takes prisoners in such numbers as to afford every
Portuguese siz slaves.
1526. The Spaniards form their first establishment in the Mo-
luccas, on the report of the companions of Magellan. ... .
1530. Gonçalvo Pereira, as governor of the Moluccas, sails for
those islands, touches at one of the ports of Borneo, where he
makes commercial arrangements with the king. . . '"
1531. The kings of Gilolo, the Papuas, and the princes of the
Moluccas, join in a league to exterminate the Portuguese, who
are blockaded and confined until the arrival of the new govern-
or, the heroic Galvan. To save the effusion of blood, Galvan
proposes to the kings of Gilolo and Bachian to meet each of
them in single combat, which they accept, but the meeting is
prevented and peace concluded. ". . . . - - -
1537. The king of Ternate, sent to India, is there converted to
Christianity, and sent back to be reinstated in his kingdom, but
dies at Malacca on his way to the Moluccas. . . . . . . . .
Galvan employs himself zealously in converting the islanders
to Christianity, institutes a seminary for religious education,
which was approved of by the council of Trent; and, after mak-
ing himself beloved to such a degree as to cause the inhabitants
of the Moluccas to propose making him their king, is supersed-
ed in his government: during his rule, Christianity made rapid
progress in the Moluccas and spread to Celebes and Mindanao.
1547. Francis Xavier, “the apostle of the Indies, makes his ap-
pearance at Malacca, and the Portuguese ascribé to his presence
the salvation of the place from a formidable attack of the king
of Acheen, who came against it with a fleet of seventy large gal-


1834. Indian Archipelago. -403
lies, and an army of a hundred thousand men, among whom
there were five hundred 'Turkish janissaries. Two years after
this, Xavier propagates Christianity in the Moluccas.
1565. Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, in the reign of Philip II.
- of Spain, takes nominal possession of the Philippines.
1571. Manila founded by the Spaniards, and three years after,
attacked and nearly taken by the Chinese rover, Limahon.’
1578, Nov. 14th. The English, under sir Francis Drake, make
their first appearance in the Archipelago, touching at Ternate
- and Java. "... "… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .” : -
1581. The king of Ternate captures the Portuguese ſortress, and
::puts an end to their dominion in that island. The kingdom of
- Portugal being united to that of Spain, its ladian dominions
fall under the power of the latter. . . . .
1586. There is a great eruption from the volcanic range of moun-
. . tains in the islands at the eastern end of Java. -
1588. Thomas Cavendish, in his circumnavigation of the globe,
touches at Java. • * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1590. The emperor of Japan sends a mission to the Philippines;
tº the king of Camboja does the same, and begs the governor,
Dasmarinas, to assist him against the king of Siam.
1593. The governor of the Philippines, having sailed against the
Moluccas, his fleet is dispersed, and he is murdered by the mu-
tiny of the Chinese part of his crew, who had been cruelly used
by the Spaniards... . . . . . . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . . .
1596. The Dutch under Hautman, arrive in Java, and the
prince of Madura and his family are massacred by them while
paying a visit of ceremony on board of Hautman's fleet.
1600. The Dutch visit Acheen; and the next year the king sends
two embassadors to Holland, one of whom dies there, but the
other returns in safety. Tobacco is introduced into Java.
1602. The emperor of Japan sends another embassy to the go-
vernor of the Philippines, requesting a continuation of the com-
mercial intercourse between Japan and those islands, and also
... that some Spanish shipwrights might be sent to him. -
1603. The emperor of China sends an embassy to Manila to as-
certain the truth of a report that had reached him, that the port"
of Cavité was formed of gold. The Chinese of the Philippines
shortly after this, revolt against the Spaniards, and after a long
resistance, are exterminated to the number of twenty-three
thousand. The emperor sends a mission to inquire concerning
the murder of his countrymen, is satisfied with the explanation
afforded by the governor, and the commercial intercourse goes
on as formerly. - • *- : * * * * * -
1605. Dadu ri Bandang, a native of the Malayan kingdom of
- Menangkabao, converts the kings of Goa and Tallo in Celebes,
‘by whose influence the Mohammedan religion is accepted by all
the Macassar states. The next year the Macassars force the
people of Boni, and the Waju nations, to adopt the Mohamme-
dan religion.
*** * * : , ; , ,
; : , ºr . . . . . . .


404 Craufurd's History of the JAN.
1611. Peter Both, a Dutch governor-general, arrives at Java;
enters into a treaty with the king of Jacatra, by which the Dutch
are allowed to build a ſort, and establish a factory.
1613. King James I. of England sends a letter and presents
to the king of Acheen; who writes a friendly answer to his Bri-
tannic majesty, and requests to have one of his “countrywomen
to wife,' promising to make her son king of the pepper countries.
1619. Coen attacks and destroys the town of Jacatra, and the
name of Batavia is given to the Dutch fort of that place.
1620. The Dutch and English East India companies having en-
tered into treaty, the former propose the reduction of the Banda
isles as a joint enterprise, which the latter decline, declaring
their want of means to be the sole reason. The Dutch by them-
selves achieve the conquest of those isles.
1621. The French make their first appearance in the Archipela-
go, carrying a letter and presents from the king of France to
the king of Acheen.
1623. The Dutch pretending to have discovered a plot of the En-
glish and their Japanese soldiers to sieze the fort of Amboyna,
put the supposed conspirators to the torture, and execute them
upon their confession on the rack.
1624. The Dutch commence hostilities against the inhabitants of
the Moluccas, for selling their cloves to other strangers.
1625. The Spaniards make a settlement on the east side of For-
mosa, and are successful in converting the native inhabitants to
Christianity.
1626. An expedition sails from the Philippines against the Dutch
establishment in Formosa, but returns without reaching the place.
Another expedition is fitted out against the Dutch commerce; it
sails to Siam, where the Dutch being protected by the king of
that country, the Spanish commander burns their junks, and
takes prisoners the Siamese mission, proceeding on its annual
voyage to China.
1629. The king of Siam sends an embassy to Manila, claiming
redress for the ravages committed by the Spaniards in the Siam-
ese port, and the seizure of the embassador proceeding to China.
The king of Camboja sends a mission to the Philippines, claim-
ing the assistance of the Spaniards against the king of Siam,
and requesting shipwrights, who are sent to him.
1636. Antony Van Diemen, governor-general of the Dutch In-
dies. The next year the governor of the Philippines sails
against Sooloo and Mindanao, and after an obstinate struggle,
reduces them, but is soon obliged to recall his garrison, and aban-
don his conquests.
1639. The Chinese in the Philippines, now amounting to thirty
thousand men, revolt against the Spanish authority; being at-
tacked by a military force, they are driven from post to post,
and at length yield, after their number has been reduced to
seven thousand.


1834. Indian Archipelago. 405
1640. The Portuguese settlements in India are separated from
those of Spain, by the rise of the duke of Braganza to the in-
dependent throne of Portugal.
1642. Malacca is taken by the Dutch after a seige and blockade
of five months. Their having established themselves in Formo.
.sa, occasions great consternation among the Spaniards at Manila.
1643. A truce of ten years for India is concluded between the
Dutch and Portuguese. Tasman discovers New Zealand and
Van Diemen's Land.
1645. A succession of earthquakes takes place during sixty days
in the Philippine islands, when Manila is entirely destroyed,
and many lives lost.
1649. The sultan of Mataram issues an order to his subjects,
enjoining all the men to marry each two wives.
1652. The king of Ternate is carried off to Batavia by the Dutch,
and compelled to sign a treaty, agreeing to destroy all the cloves
in his dominions. Vlaming, the governor of Amboyna, executes
more than twenty of the nobles of the Moluccas by breaking
some on the wheel, and strangling or drowning others.
1653. Corrolat king of Mindanao, puts to death two Jesuits and
other Spaniards sent to him as embassadors from Manila.
1660. A copper currency is established for tin coin by order of
the sultan of Mataram. -
1662. Koxinga (Ching Chingkung), having taken Formosa from
the Dutch, sends a mission to Manila, requesting the payment
of tribute, and his acknowledgment as sovereign of the Philip-
pines, in consequence of which the governor directs all the
Chinese to quit the islands. But the death of Koxinga frees
them from the danger of a Chinese invasion.
1666. The Dutch send a great force, under admiral Speelman,
for the conquest of Macassar.
1669. The treaty between the Macassars and Dutch is broken
and war renewed.
1671. A violent earthquake takes place at Amboyna, another
occurs in 1673, and another in 1674.
1683. The king of Bantam grants to the Dutch the exclusive
trade in pepper, and the monopoly of the sale of cotton goods in
his dominions, and expels the Danes and English.
1684. The English send an embassy from Madras to Acheen, re-
questing permission to build a factory, which is peremptorily
refused. The next year they establish their factory at Bencoolen.
1687. 'The Dutch, on the call of the king of Bantam, attack
Succadana and conquer it, making the English who are found
there prisoners. -
1699. Surapati attempts the conquest of the province of Prono-
rogo in Java, and is defeated.
1705. The Dutch general, De Wilde, takes the field with an army
of eight thousand Europeans, and seven thousand Javanese and
Madurese, and the army of the Susunan is defeated.


406 Craufurd's History of the JAN.
1706. The Dutch again take the field against the dethroned Su-
sunan and Surapati; the latter flies, after receiving a wound of
which he dies. - . . . . .
1708. The Dutch make offers to the Susunan, who surrenders
himself on assurance of grace; he is sent to Batavia, and then
banished to Ceylon, where he dies. -- -
1709. The Chinese are banished from Manila, under the pre-
text of carrying off the public wealth. - - - - - -- * *
1710. The Spaniards attempt the conversion of the Pelew
islanders; but the priests sent thither with that view were never
heard of after landing. . . . . . . - ºr---. ". .
1713. The Dutch banish the king of Tambora in Sumbawa to
, the cape of Good Hope. -- 1: . . . . . ;: ... sº a
1717. The governor of the Philippines sends a mission to Siam,
to cultivate friendly, and commercial relations with that coun--
try; and the Spaniards obtain liberty to establish a factory; but
a ship of Siam having, in the meantime, come to Manila, and
the crew being ill used by the Spaniards, the effects of the mis-
sion are frustrated. * -- - - --- ---, * - - -
1719. The natives of Sumatra, irritated by the misconduct of the
agents of the English East India Company, rise upon the Euro-
peans at Bencoolen, and the garrison abandons the fort; but the
natives alarmed by the encroachments of the Dutch, invite the
‘English to come back, and they return accordingly. . . . . . . . . .
1723. The culture of coffee is introduced into Java-by the Dutch
governor-general Zwardekroon. ºr "...ºu. --
H739. The English admiral, Anson, captures the Acapulco gal-
leon, with a million and a half of dollars in silver specie. . .
1740. The Chinese, to the number of ten thousand, are massa-
cred at Batavia by the Dutch, on suspicion of conspiracy.
1741. The Dutch governor-general is arrested and put on trial
for the massacre of the Chinese. The same year the Chinese
join the Susunan in a league to exterminate the Dutch; they
capture a fortress at Cartasura, and put to death the European
officers who had surrendered by capitulation; they then march to
Samarang, lay seige to the Dutch fort, but are finally defeated.
The Susunan forsakes his alliance with the Chinese, of whom
he massacres a number, and then joins the Dutch. The Chi-
nese retreat into the interior of Java, and raise to the throne a
prince of the house of Mataram. The Dutch, on the 29th of
November, celebrate their triumph over the Chinese, by a pub-
lic thanksgiving at Batavia. . - - - - , , , , ; ; , , ;":" .
1742. The Chinese attack Cartasura, and have several engage-
ments with the Dutch troops. ...tº... ... ... tº
1743. . The Chinese disperse, and Kuning their prince, surrender-
ing himselſ to the Dutch, is banished to Ceylon... . . .”
1747. A royal order arrives at Manila for the final expulsion of
, the Chinese, the execution of which is suspended... . . . . . .
1748. The Dutch East India Company install the Prince of
Orange as supreme director and governor-general of the Indies.


1834. Indian Archipelago. 407 -
1755. The Spaniards of the Philippines, under the priest-Ducos,
are successful in checking the inroads of the neighboring native
States.
1757. The Chinese are finally expelled from the Philippines,
in comformity to the royal edict, and the temporary residence
of traders from China only tolerated.
1760. The French destroy the whole of the English settlements
on, the west coast of Sumatra. - -
1762. The British, on the 22d of September, arrive at the Philip-
pines, with a military and naval force, and demand the surren-
der of the islands, which being refused, they cominence military
operations. On the 5th of October, they storm the fortifica-
tions of Manila, and carry the town. The military commander,
Señor Anda, retires from Manila, and maintains the authority
of the king of Spain, so that the British authority never extends
much beyond the confines of Manila. The Chinese, who in
the course of three years, had increased to prodigious numbers
in the Philippines, all join the English and commit great exces-
ses; and Señor Anda orders all the Chinese on the island to
be hanged, which order is very generally carried into effect.
1763. The British settlements on the west coast of Sumatra
are re-established; and that at Bencoolen, or fort Marlborough,
is erected into an independent presidency. The English de-
liver over Manila to the Spaniards. -
1785. The English establish a settlement on Penang, or the
Prince of Wales' island. - - . -
1795. The British capture Malacca and its dependencies. ...
1811. The Dutch colonies of the Indian Archipelago, following
... the fate of the mother country, become a portion of the French
empire, and Janssens is appointed governor-general. The Bri-
...tish, August 4th, land a force on Java, and on the 10th, take
., possession of Batavia, drive the Dutch and French troops from
the cantonments of Weltervrieden, and on the 26th, storm and
... take the entrenched position of the enemy at Cornelis. Jans-
... sens, having retreated to the eastern part of Java, is defeated
, near Samarang, and on the 18th of September, he capitulates
... with the British authorities for the surrender of Java and the
other Dutch possessions. The Dutch possessions in the Cele-
bes are transferred to the British. • . . . . . . . . . . . .
1812. Banca and Billiton ceded to the British. The sultan of
Java is made prisoner, and his son is placed on the throne, who
cedes to the British government the provinces of Kadu, Blora,
Jipang, Japan, and Garobagan. - - - - -
1813. The British government of Java, under the direction of
, sir Stamford Raffles, effects a number of beneficial changes,
commercial, fiscal, and judicial. . . . . . . . . . . .
1816, August 19. Java is ceded by treaty to the Dutch, and is
taken possession of by them. - . . . . . . .
1818. The settlement of Singapore commenced. “The rapid
rise of this important station,” says a correspondent of the


409 - Formosa. JAN.
marquis of Lansdowne, in a letter dated April 15th, 1820,
“during the year that it has been in our possession, is perhaps
without its parallel. When I hoisted the British flag, the popu-
lation scarcely amounted to 200 souls; in three months the num-
ber was not less than 3,000; and it now exceeds 10,000, prin-
cipally Chinese.” -
1825. The sovereignty and property of Singapore, in their pre-
sent extent, confirmed to the British government, by a conven-
tion with the king of the Netherlands, and a treaty with the
Malay princes of Jehore, to whom it belonged.
MISCELLANIES.
Formosa. Its situation and extent; discovery by the Chinese ;
occupation by the Dutch; their government there, and expulsion by
the pirate Kozinga; its cession to the Chinese; present govern-
ment and divisions; the late rebellion; its aboriginal inhabitants;
productions and population.
Formosa, “the beautiful island,” as named by the Portuguese,
has been recalled to notice by the recent insurrections there, and
by the prospect that it may be destined hereafter to attract more
the attention of foreigners. The Chinese name is Taewan, which
signifies Terrace bay. Its intrinsic and relative importance will
justify us in recalling a portion of its history, and in exhibiting a
brief description of the island. Its length which is greatest from
north to south, includes more than three degrees of latitude; its
breadth, which at most is about 80 miles, is much narrowed to-
wards each extremity. The southeast point of Formosa, accord-
ing to one authority is in latitude 22° 6' N.; but by the observa-
tions of La Perouse and Broughton compared with. the Dutch,
it is lat. 21° 53° 30° N., and in longitude 120° 57° E. Ke-lung, the
most northern point, is 25° 16' N. and 121° 4' 3" E. from Greenwich.
'The channel which separates Taewan from the Chinese coast,
is from 75 to 120 miles in breadth; in which, and about 25 miles
from the island, lie the Pang-hoo or Pescadore islands. They
afford good harbors, and were long the resort of Chinese pirates,
and of the Dutch, who from this secure station could easily com-
mand the passages on both sides. -
Though lying opposite to the Chinese coast, and within one
day's sail of the port of Amoy, yet Formosa does not appear to
have attracted the notice of the Chinese government till a modern
date. According to their history, they had no knowledge of it
till 1430 a. d., in the reign of Seuen-tsung, the fifth emperor of
the Ming dynasty, when an officer of the court was driven by
storm upon the island. More than a century later, a pirate, who
had been driven with his ſleet from the Pang-hoo isles by a Chinese
:t


1834. Formosa. 409
squadron, took refuge on Formosa. The island was then unculti-
vated, and inhabited only by savages. The pirate, who was an
ambitious man, seized upon the island for himself, and the better
to fit it for his purposes, massacred all the inhabitants that fell
into his hands, smearing his vessels with the blood of the unfor-
tunate natives. In some such way, doubtless, many Chinese must
have gone over to Tae-wan before its occupation by the Dutch,
which we now proceed to relate. -
The early voyages of the Hollanders to the East Indies, says
Burney in his voyages, were projected by individuals or different
companies, and were prosecuted with the spirit of reckless adven-
turers. The Dutch East India Company was established in 1602.
Nowhere was the mutual enmity of the Dutch and Portuguese
more actively displayed than in these Indian seas, where commer-
cial jealousy was superadded to many other causes of animosity.
Soon after the formation of their company, the Dutch, began to
contend with the Portuguese for the Chinese trade. The Portu-
guese successfully opposing their designs, the former in return
besieged Macao in 1622, from which however they were repulsed
with much loss. From the tenure by which the Portuguese held
Macao, the Chinese regarded this attack as an act of hostility
against themselves. But the Dutch accused them of aiding the
Portuguese, and alledged as just cause of complaint, that they were
admitted to trade on a fairer footing than themselves. Frustrated
in their designs on Macao, they therefore sailed for the Pang-hoo.
islands. The Chinese having no sufficient force there, the Dutch
took possession of them, and began a fort, to forward which
many Chinese crews were condemned to labor. Of 1500 work.
men thus employed, it is related, that 1800 died in the progress
of the building; “for they seldom had more than half a pound of
rice for a day's allowance.” The Dutch pleaded in vindication,
the cruel usage received by their countrymen, who had been im-
prisoned by the Chinese.
This establishment of the Dutch annoyed all parties;–the
Spanish, by rendering dangerous the commerce between Manila
and China; the Portuguese, by interrupting the trade between
Macao and Japan; and to the Chinese it was “an incessant and
intolerable grievance,” who therefore commenced negociations.
The emperor required the preliminary step of their withdrawing
from the islands; the Dutch claimed “nothing more than liberty of
commerce with China, and the prohibition of it between the
Chinese and the Spaniards in Manila; ” nothing therefore was:
effected, and the Dutch recurred to their former means of persua.
sion. Eight ships were dispatched at one time to scour the sea
and destroy whatever they could seize along the Chinese coast.
Negociations were resumed, and the Chinese promised that if the
Dutch would withdraw from the Pang-hoo islands they might for-
tify themselves upon Formosa without reprehension;—a reason-
able permission, no doubt, from them who had no right to the
islands. In the year 1624, the Dutch concluded peace with the
3B.


410 Formosa. - JAN.
Chinese, by which liberty of commerce was granted them. They
on their part evacuated the island, sailed to Formosa, and took
possession of a harbor on the southwestern side. The best en-
trance to it was narrow and shoal, there being at high water no
more than thirteen feet.
Thus the Dutch entered upon Formosa; a small Japanese co-
lony then resident there, soon retired, and the natives offered no
opposition. To defend their new establishinent, a fort and batte-
ries were built, which protected the principal harbor, Ta-keting;
this fort was named fort Zealand. For the defense of the trade
between China and Manila, the Spanish governor of the Philip-
pine islands fortified the port of Ke-lung, in 1626; from which,
however, the Spaniards were subsequently expelled by the Dutch.
Thirty miles from this harbor, on the western shore, another settle-
ment was formed, called Tan-shwuy. Yet the jurisdiction of the
Dutch extended little beyond the towns and villages in the neigh-
borhood of their principal fort. In these they wisely combined the
Dutch and native authority; “they introduced new laws among
them, and instead of their councils of elders, constituted one of
their chief men surpervisor in every village, who adminstered jus-
tice, and was accountable to the governor of the island.” The
natives in these districts were reclaimed from many barbarous
customs, and became attached to the government of the Dutch.
In 1626, George Candidius, a Protestant divine, was appointed
minister to the settlement; and he took great pains to intro-
duce Christianity among the natives. At the governor's request,
he gave his opinion on the prospects of propagating the gospel in
Formosa. He considered both the dispositions and circum-
stances of the people favorable for their conversion to Christian-
ity. “With good capacities, they were ignorant of letters; their
superstitions rested only on tradition, or customs to which they
were not strongly attached, and which had been almost totally
changed within the last sixty years: no obstacles were to be ap-
prehended from their government. God blessed his labors in For-
mosa, so that during a residence of sixteen months, part of which
was occupied in studying the language, he instructed 120 of the
natives in the Christian religion.” The number of Christians, it
is said, daily augmented; the intermarriage of Dutch and natives
was practiced; churches and schools were multiplied, so that in
all, many thousands of the islanders were converted to Christian-
ity and baptized. “But the Dutch governors in India were cau-
tious of encouraging the conversion of the Formosans, lest it
should give offense to the Japanese, with whom they had com:
merce, and by whom Christianity was then heavily persecuted.”
Thus as often elsewhere the interests of true religion were sacri-
ficed upon the altar of Mammon, and the knowledge of salvation
withheld for money. - , -
The whole interval of Dutch authority in Formosa was a period
fraught with calamity to China, both from the scourge of civil war
and foreign invasion. In 1644, the Mant chou Tartars had gained


1834. Formosa. 4 || |
~
the capital, Peking, and the Tartar chief was acknowledged as
emperor of China, by most of the northern provinces. At the close
of the next year, twelve of the fifteen provinces had submitted to
the usurper. Throughout the whole course of this long war, the
Chinese were emigrating to other countries to escape the miseries
of their own. Early in the struggle, 25,000 families are said to
have transported themselves to #. The industry of these
strangers gave the island a cultivated appearance, and increased
the produce of rice and sugar for exportation. At first the Dutch
, encouraged this immigration, and at length were unable to prevent
it; which influx of foreigners aided in the final overthrow of the
Dutch dominion in the island. But the unexpected and unheard
of result, that of Europeans being defeated in contest with the
Chinese, will excuse a minute description, and demands a brief
retracing of some previous events.
These calamitous and turbulent days produced in China, as
ever elsewhere, some daring spirits, who rode upon the storm, and
whose names are well known in the history of those times. None
of these was more remarkable than the half piratical, half patriotic
naval chief, Ching Chingkung, better known as Koxinga. His
father was once a servant of the Portuguese at Macao, and was
instructed in the Christian religion, and baptized by the name of
Nicholaus. From a petty trader, he grew by foreign trade to be
the richest merchant in China; and afterwards equipped, at his
own expense, a small fleet against the Tartars. His success gra-
dually drew around him a vast number of Chinese vessels, till he
became the coinmander of as formidable a fleet as ever sailed these
seas. But after many battles, the Tartar chief invited him to court,
and offered him the dignity of king, which he accepted, leaving
the command of the fleet to his son Koxinga, while himself was
doomed to perpetual imprisonment at Peking. Koxinga, with
more than his father's valor, opposed the usurper, and continued
faithful to his country. During several years, he scoured the seas
with his formidable fleet, descended upon the coast, and with the
aid of a land force, retook some cities and defeated the enemy in
several engagements. But in three or four years the Tartars by
force and bribes recovered all, and drove him from the coast to the
numerous islands which line the shore. In this state of affairs,
the larger and fertile island of Formosa became the object on which
the exiled chieftain rested his last hopes. The Dutch foresaw the
danger; they were aware that the agents of Koxinga held secret
correspondence with the resident Chinese; and the garrison at
fort Zealand was accordingly increased in 1650. For several suc-
ceeding years, there was no open hostility, and Koxinga being
fully employed against the Tartars, neglected Formosa; yet dis-
satisfaction was mutually increasing between the Dutch and the
chief. But after his severe defeat in the seige of Nanking, he had
no resource left but to obtain the island ; his followers were dis-
persing to procure subsistence, and his fleet could not be kept
together. He now began in earnest to look at the “beautiful isle.”


1834. Formosa. - 4 lº
country. Koxinga now summoned the fort, threatening to put all
to fire and sword, if they did not surrender inmediately.
A consultation was immediately held, and it was agreed to
send deputies to Koxinga, offering. to surrender fort Province
rather than to lose all. They went to his camp, then consisting
of about 12,000 men who were besieging fort Province. They
were armed with three different sorts of weapons; the first, of bows
and arrows; the second, of cimiters and targets only; and the third,
of backswords and pikes, three or four feet long, with broad point-
ed irons at the ends. The deputies were conducted into a spacious
tent, where they waited till Koxinga was at leisure. He mean-
while wrs employed in combing his black, shining hair, a great
ornament among the Chinese. “This done, they were introduc-
ed into his tent, all hung with blue; he himself was seated in an
elbow chair behind a four-square table; round about him attend-
ed-all the chief coininanders, clad in long robes, without arms, and
in great silence, with a most awful countenance.” Koxinga repli-
ed; that “ Formosa had always belonged to China, and now the
Chinese wanted it, the foreigners inust quit the island immedi-
ately. If not, let them only hoist the red flag.” Next morning
the red flag waved over fort Zealand, but fort Province was
surrendered, with all its garrison and cannon.
To prepare for a more vigorous deſense, all the men able to
bear arms were taken into the fort, and the city set on fire, but
not so effectually as to prevent the Chinese from preserving
many of the buildings, which afforded them a shelter. They also
brought up thither 28 cannon to bear against the fort; but they
were so galled by the fire of the Dutch that the streets were co-
vered with the slain, and the beseiged making a successful sally,
spiked the enemy's guns. Koxinga now finding all his attacks
fruitless, began a close blockade, and meanwhile made the open
country feel his rage. He made the Dutch, especially the minis-
ters and schoolmasters, prisoners, because they were suspected of
secretly encouraging their parishioners to kill the Chinese residing
among them; some were crucified by the Chinese, and their cross-
es erected in their respective villages. One-individual event of
this kind as related by Nieuhoff, is so Regulus-like that we pre-
sent it entire to the reader. -
“Among the Dutch prisoners taken in the country was one
Mr. Hambrocock, a minister. This man was sent by Koxinga to
the governor, to propose terms for surrendering the fort; but in
case of refusal, vengeance w8uld be taken on the Dutch prisoners.
Mr. Hambrocock came into the castle, being forced to leave his
wife and children behind him as hostages, which sufficiently
proved that if he failed in his negociation, he had nothing but
death to expect from the chieftain. Yet was he so far from per-
suading the garrison to surrender, that he encouraged them to a
brave defense by hopes of relief, assuring them that Koxinga had
lost many of his best ships and soldiers, and began to be weary of
the siege. When he had ended, the council of war left it to his


414 Formosa. JAN.
choice to stay with them or return to the camp, where he could
expect nothing but present death; every one intreated him to stay.
He had two daughters within the castle, who hung upon his neck,
overwhelmed with grief and tears, to see their father ready to go
where they knew he inust be sacrificed by the merciless enemy.
But he represented to them that having left his wiſe and two other
children in the camp as hostages, nothing but death could attend
them if he returned not : so unlocking himself from his daughters'
arms, and exhorting every body to a resolute defense, he returned
to the camp, telling them at parting, that he hoped he might prove
serviceable to his poor fellow-prisoners.
“Koxinga received his answer sternly; then causing it to be
rumored that the prisoners excited the Formosans to rebel
against him, ordered all the Dutch male prisoners to be slain;
this was accordingly done, some being beheaded, others killed in
a more barbarous manner, to the number of 500, their bodies strip.
ped quite naked, and buried 50 and 60 in a hole; nor were the wo-
men and children spared, many of them likewise being slain,
though some of the best were preserved for the use of the com-
manders, and the rest sold to the common soldiers. Happy was
she that fell to the lot of an unmarried man, being thereby freed
from vexations by the Chinese women, who are very jealous of
their husbands. Among the slain were Messrs. Hambrocock,
Mus, and Winshaim, clergymen, and many schoolmasters, who
were all beheaded.” Thus ended that tragical scene.
Two days after the council at Batavia had censured Coyet for
his fears, and had dispatched his successor Clenk to Formosa, the
Maria arrived with the news from Formosa. They immediately
revoked the censure and suspension, and fitted out 10 ships with
700 soldiers for the island; but Clenk arrived first off 'Tae-wan,
where instead of the rich and peaceful station he had flattered
himself with obtaining, he saw the red flag flying, and hundreds of
Chinese vessels lying in the northern roads. He anchored in
the southern, sent his dispatches ashore, did not land himself, but
sailed for Japan, and was heard of no more at Formosa. Soon
the succors from Batavia arrived, and the besieged began to act
on the offensive. They were unsuccessful however in attempting
to dislodge the enemy from the city of Zelandia, and suffered the
loss of two ships and many men, in the attempt; the garrisons were
now ordered from the two northern ports, Kelung and Tan-
shwuy, to increase the force of the besieged. “The women and
children and other useless persons were also sent to Batavia.”
These preparations checked the approaches of Koxinga for the
present, which led to an injudicious act on the part of the besieged.
The governor received letters from the viceroy of Fuhkeen, re-
questing his coöperation in expelling the remains of Koxinga's
forces from the coast, and promising his whole aid afterwards to
the Dutch at Formosa. Five ships were therefore dispatched for
this purpose, but three were lost in a storin and the remainder re-
turned to Batavia.


1834. Formosa, 4 15
This act was just to the wish of Koxinga, and led the besieged
to despair of holding out much longer. A deserter from the Dutch
encouraged the besiegers, and directed them where to press the at-
tack. They now assailed the fort from three near batteries, and not-
withstanding opposition, after many assaults succeeded in making
a breach, and gaining one of the redoubts, ſiom whence they an-
noyed the Dutch, and seemed ready for a general assault through
the breach. Then the besieged began to deliberate, and the ma-
jority of the council agreed that the fort was untenable. The go-
vernor yielded his opinion to the majority, surrendered the public
property, but was allowed to embark their private property for Ba-
tavia in their only remaining ship. Thus after a siege of nine
months, with the loss of 1600 men, the Dutch returned to Java;
“where the governor and council of Formosa, after all the ha-
zards and incredible hardships they had undergone, were impri-
soned, their goods confiscated, and the governor condemned to
perpetual banishment in one of the Banda isles,” but was finally
recalled by the Prince of Orange. Thus after thirty years' duration,
ended the Dutch authority in Formosa, in 1662.
Freed from all opposers, Koxinga now distributed garrisons
throughout the western parts of Tae-wan, and established an undis-
puted dominion there. He constituted himself sovereign of the
island, assumed a princely style, and fixed his palace and court at
Zelandia. Then the island assumed a new aspect; for with their
proverbial industry he introduced also the Chinese laws, customs,
and form of government. He even looked beyond “the beauti-
ful island ” to the rich clusters of islands which almost bordered on
his narrow domain. He had threatened the Philippines, and was
preparing for an expedition against the Spanish there, when he
was arrested by death only two years after his gaining Formosa,
and left his possessions to his son. Ten years aſler, when the
provinces of Kwangtung and Fuhkeen revolted against the em-
peror Kanghe, this son resolved to join the king of Fuhkeen : but
not being acknowledged by the latter as a sovereign prince, he de-
clared war against the king on the spot, defeated him in several
battles, and weakened him so that he was obliged to submit again
to the emperor, and receive the tonsure. Kanghe now abolished
the title of king, and appointed a governor over Chekeang and
Fuhkeen. This man seized upon the Pang-hoo isles, and pro-
claimed general amnesty to all who submitted to the emperor.
This policy had the desired effect of inducing many Formosun
emigrants to return again to China, and of weakening the enemy
upon the island, till it was finally surrendered to Kanghe by the
grandson of Koxinga. Thus ended the sovereignty erected by
that chief, and Formosa passed into the hands of the Chinese go-
vernment in 1683.
Little change ensued in the government or customs upon this
change of masters. The imperial authority on the island, though
often assailed by insurrections during the last 150 years, is still
maintained. The lands possessed by the Chinese in Formosa


416 Formosa. JAN.
were at that time divided into three districts; the subject natives
composed 45 towns or villages. Little can be said with certainty
of the events which have since transpired there.
The two most prominent events are the destructive inundation in
1782, and the rebellion in 1788. The official report of the former
disaster states, that in May (which is not the month for tyfoons,) a
wind, rain and swell of the sea together for 12 hours, threatened
to overwhelm the island. On its cessation, the public buildings,
granaries, barracks, and salt warehouses were found totally des-
troyed, and most private houses were in ruins: of 27 ships of war,
12 had disappeared, and 12 more were wholly ruined; of other ships,
about 200 are lost. Without the harbor, a prodigious number of
barks and small vessels disappeared, and left not a piece of wreck
behind. The emperor directed that all the houses thrown down
should be rebuilt at his expense, (i. e. from the public treasury,)
and provisions supplied to the people. “l should feel inuch pain,”
said he, “were one of them to be neglected.” Subterranean con-
vulsions may have conspired with the winds to aggravate this ca-
lamity.
This event was followed six years later by the most important and
bloody rebellion which Formosa has yet witnessed. The particulars
of it cannot be given, but its suppression by cruel punishment and
almost indiscriminate proscription, tarnished the name of Keen-
lung, the emperor. M. de Graminont states in a letter of March,
1789, that “the troubles on Formosa are ended at last, but at the
cost of a shameful and expensive war to China. She has lost at
least a hundred thousand men, destroyed by disease or the sword
of the rebels; and she has expended more than two millions of
taels. The only advantage that she has secured, is the recapture
from the Formosans of the two places they had seized. According
to the returns of the Chinese general to the emperor, the renowned
rebel leader, Lin Chwang-wan has been captured and cut into a
thousand pieces; but according to private advices the rebel still
survives, and the real sufferer was only a Formosan bearing the
same name.” -
A brief geographical description, adapted to its present condition
will be found at the close of this account. One prominent object
with the Chinese government in retaining Formosa, second to pre-
serving it from the possession of foreigners, is to prevent its becom-
ing a rendezvous for criminals and desperadoes from the empire.
For this purpose they have always maintained a numerous guard of
soldiery upon the island. The officers stationed there have been strict,
even to vexation, in granting passes to the applicants who come
thither from China to trade or to reside. Many hundred thou-
sand emigrants from Fuhkeen, Kwangtung, and Chekeang have
peopled the villages of Formosa, and it is said a regular system of
extortion is praticed by the officers upon the new comers. They
demand a fee so large, that poor settlers have no other means
to pay it, than to bind themselves to the officers in a certain por-
tion of their profits till the whole demand is discharged. Thus an


1834. Formosa. 4 |7
their arrival, many of the emigrants find themselves in a manner
slaves to the mandarins, as to them much of their hard earnings
must revert. “Though they are industrious,” says a recent observer
of the island, “yet the emigrants have deservedly a reputation for
insubordination and lawlessness. They associate much in clans,
and clannish attachments and feuds are cherished among them; but
they are very fond of intercourse with foreigners. Many of them
are unmarried, or have left their families in China, to whom they
hope to return after amassing a little property.” Having just es-
caped from the grinding tyranny of magistrates at home, they na-
turally wish to enjoy more freedom in their voluntary exile. But
the mandarins of Formosa on their part also, by being more re-
noved from the supervision of their superiors, can proceed to more
open and extreme extortion than in China itself, since complaint is
difficult, and relief still more so. Thus mutual dissatisfaction is
excited and cherished, on the one hand by new acts of oppression,
and on the other by new arts of evasion or resistance; hence, in
no part of the empire have insurrections been so frequent as in
Tae-wan. The late threatening rebellion there has but just closed,
though for some time it has ceased to excite any conversation or
interest. The reports from the seat of war were so imperfect or
contradictory, that it is either difficult or impossible to obtain satis-
factory information. . . : -
It appears that the naval and military forces stationed on the
island were noways contemptible as to numbers. An imperial
report states, that 20,000 of the troops there in garrison had been
allowed by their officers so to mingle in the employments and in-
terests of the people, that on the breaking out of the rebellion, no
effective ſorce could be mustered on the island. The general cause
of the war doubtless was, and the emperor at last acknowledged it,
the growing oppression of the officers of government. But there
was no unity among the rebels, nor any previous concert to rise
against the government. The occasion of the insurrection is said
to have been a quarrel between two clans, one of which, by appeal-
ing to the officers, brought in the other for an unusual fleecing from
the mandarins, which in this case was not endured. The oppo-
sition burst forth about 15 miles from Tae-wan, the capital, and
20 or 30 officers with near 2000 men were killed at the first ex-
plosion. The news soon spread, and there was a very general
rising throughout the districts, and the imperial troops were destroy-
ed or fled into the mountains; they disappeared. While troops
were being levied and dispatched from the four southeastern
provinces of China, the insurgents were expending their strength
against each other. It was said that one clan had seized the
capital, and kept possession of it with 30,000 men, and that 50,000
of the hostile clan were marching against them. The navy and
most renowned officers were dispatched to suppress the mebellion;
commissioners were sent from Peking for the purpose, aud, woe
be to such officers in China, who are not successful hy some uneans
or other. At length, by force and money, and if report, be true,
3C


4:15 Furmosa. 'JAN.
not niuch less by the latter than the former, the insurrection was
checked; but it broke out again at different umes and places till
June; 1833. After n continuance of eight or nine months, “ now
all are again quiet;" says the final report, “and the imind of his
majesty is filled with consolation.” . . . . . * . . . . . . 1-1 i
j." After this sufficientiy extended sketch of the history of the islaud,
we proceed to its form of government and productious. Formosa,
together with the Paug-hool islands forms one foo, or department
of the province of Fuhkeen: , H is immediately subject to the foo-
yuen of that province.” For an account of its present, divisions,
wd refer to a geographical description in the Canton Register, the
-writer of which drew from Chinese statistical books. The depart-
tnents, defined as above, comprises six heen, or subordiuate dis-
tricts, five of which are in Formosa, the remaining one includes
the Pang-hoo isles.” The aboriginal inhabitants of the western
parts have been mostly subdued and enslaved by the Chinese; but
they do not continue in quiet submission to their conquerors, ex-
cept the small proportion which are styled matured foreigners,
and are civilized. Tue-wan heen, the chief district, is a narrow
tract of land; coinprehending a town, 21, Chinese and 3 native
villages. The capital. Tae-wah, is in latitude 23° N. Its.harbor
had formerly two entrances, one of which called 'Ta-keang, is
now entirely blocked up by the accumulation of sand; here stood
the fort Zealandia: “The other is so shallow and intricate on ac-
count of shoals that; it is impracticable without an experienced
pilot. The city of Tae-wan is described as ranking, among cities
of the first class in China, in the variety—and richness of its mer-
chandise, and in population. Its streets are covered inany months
of the year to avoid the rays of the sun. Fung-shan, heem, lies
south of the former, and includes a town, 8 villages, and some plan-
tations of Chinese." The native villages are 73, of which 8 only
are occupied by the civilized natives. Choo-lo heen lies uorth of
"Tirezwan and comprehends a town; 4 Chinese and 33 native vil-
lagas; 8 belonging to the civilized natives. Chang-hwa heen,
(besides its town-has 16 villages and 132 plantations of Chinese,
-and-51'native villages. Tan-shwuy-heen has a town, 132 farms,
and, 70 native villages. Pang-hoo ting, according to Nieuhoff
-whé-visited it, “has severabgood harburst and two commodious
'bays, where ships may ride safely at anchor in eight or nine
fathoms ºf water, It contains thany-populous villages, the islands
being all well storedo with inhabitants, with fat cattle, especially
cows, and, birds of all sorts, with an incredible number of fine,
|Arge-cocks. Here are always seen many Chinese vessels for fish-
ing and traffic; the islands are many in number; the two most
ſfahöns are Fisher's isłand, (which is the western,) and Pehoo. The
southeast side of Fisher's island is so barren that it produces, not a
treet'd Perhaps thinkast remark may aid us to, understand other
accounts, which represent these islands as desolate and barren..., ,
Athain of mountains divides the island in its whole length,
ſtbm north to south, forming in general, the barrier between the


420 Formosa. JAN.
extensive plains which spread below; but throughout the island
the water is unwholesome to drink, and to unacclimated strangers
it is often very injurious. “All the trees are so beautifully ranged,
that when the rice is planted, as usual, in a line and checkerwise,
all this large plain of the southern part resembles a vast garden,
which industrious hands have taken pains to cultivate.” Almost
all grains and fruits may be produced on one part of the island
or another ; but rice, sugar, cainphor, tobacco, &c., are the chief
productions. Formosa has long been familiarly known as the
granary of the Chinese maritime provinces. If wars intervene, or
violent storms prevent the shipment of rice to the coast, a scarcity
immediately ensues, and extensive distresses, with another sure
result—multiplied piracies by the destitute Chinese. Some idea
of the exports from the island may be formed from the reports of
an European who has visited the island, and who is intimately
acquainted with the maritime provinces of China. “The quan-
tity of rice exported from Formosa to Fuhkeen and Chekeång is
very considerable, and employs more than 200 junks. Of sugar,
there annually arrive at the single port of Teentsin upwards of
70 loaded junks. Much of the camphor in the Canton market is
supplied from Formosa. The greater part of the colonists are
cultivators of the soil, but many of the Amoy men are merchants,
fishermen, and sailors. The capital which they employ is very
great and the business profitable. The natives have receded farther
and farther towards the east coast, and have been partly amalga-
mated with the planters. The whole population may amount to
two or three millions.”
The position of Formosa is admirable as affording facilities for
trade; within 30 leagues of China, 150 of Japan, and less of the
Philippines, its situation and resources make it a desirabte station
for the commerce which is now opening, and yet to be opened in
those long forbidden lands. But except Ke-lung, there is no good
harbor yet explored on the whole coast; at Tae-wan, the greatest
depth at high water is eight or nine feet. The Lord Amherst, which
stopped at Formosa a few days in 1832, could not approach with-
in several miles of the shore. Junks also lay a long way outside,
and received their cargoes in lighters. It is well known that the
harbors are becoming shoaler, and the land is increasing by con-
stant and large accretions of sand. The currents in the channel
are very strong, so that unless the wind be fair, Chinese vessels
cannot bear up to regain their course; and in passing from Fuh-
keen to Formosa, they have often been driven so far to the south,
that they not could reach their destination, when not unfrequently
they bring up at Cochinchina or Siam, there to await a change of
the monsoon. But foreign ships, during the last and present winter,
beat up the channel against the full strength of the northeast mon-
soon and the current; yet this can be accomplishd only by strong
and superior sailing ships -


1834. The Chinese Wury. 42 |
The ChiNese Navy.—The Peking gazette of the 17th day of
the 9th moon, October 29th, 1833, contains a paper of six pages
concerning the navy of China, from the pen (or rather pencil) of
his ir ºrial majesty. It was occasioned by the operations of the
Canto ºn nay, a few months ago, on the coast of Cochinchina,
when a p.º.e named Chin Keahae was taken prisoner. He was
really a Chinese, but made himself a citizen of either nation as
suited his convenience. It will certainly be better for some peo-
ple,” when all are allowed to be citizens of the world, but amen-
able to no one state in particular. The emperor's attention being
called to the navy by the operations above alluded to, and by some
failures against pirates on the coast of Fuhkeen, he takes occa-
sion to animadvert in rather severe terms on the present state of
the Chinese navy. He begins his paper by this first principle,
that, “according to the ancients, in the government of a nation,
while civilians required rubbing up, the military no less required a
brushing. Government,” he says, “appoints soldiers for the pro-
tection of the people; and naval captains are not less important
than dry-land soldiers. But the navy has lately fallen off, as ap-
pears by many cases of failure on the high seas.
“On shore a man's ability is measured by his archery and his
horsemanship; but a sailor's talent by his ability to fight with,
and on the water. A sailor must know the winds and the clouds,
and the lands and the lines (or passages among the sands). He
must be thoroughly versed in breaking a spear with (or beat-
ing against) the wind. He must know, like a god, how to break
through the billows, handle his ship, and be all in regular order
for action. Then, when his spears are thrown they will pierce;
and his guns will follow to give them effect. The spitting tor-
nadoes of the fire-physic (gunpowder) will all reach truly their
tnark; and whenever pirates are met with, they will be vanquish-
ed; wonderously. No aim will miss its mark. The pirate ban-
ditti will be impoverished and crippled, and even on the high seas,
when they take to flight, they will be followed and caught and
slaughtered. Thus the monsters of the deep, and the waves
will be still, and the sea become a perfect calm, not a ripple will
be raised. .
“But, far different from this, has of late been the fact. The
navy is a nihility. There is the name of going to sea; but there
is no going to sea in reality. Cases of piracy are perpetually oc-
curring, and even barbarian barks anchor in our inner seas, with-
out the least notice being taken of them | I, the emperor con-
sider,” &c. Here his majesty looks back on the past, and has
rather dismal forebodings for the future, arising from such an un-
comely appearance of things;–but the shadows of night are ob-
scuring his paper, and the translator is weary of his subject, and
therefore, leaves the rest to the imagination of the reader. After
advising and threatening his naval servants, the emperor adds,
“do not hereafter say that you were not early warned.”
.


422 * Seamen in the . . JAN.
SEAMEN IN the porp of CANto N.—In iro place in the world is
the character and conduct of seamen inore deserving of considera-
tion, than in China: for nowhere else does so much depend
on their deportinent. We do not say this solely or chieflyn, vac-
count of the magnitude and importance of the foren trade, but
in consideration of the liability of that trade to be injuered or
stopped in consequence of the ill conduct of sailors. Of all the
causes, which have heretofore interrupted the commerce with the
Chinese, and led to long protracted and vexatious disputes with
the local authorities; this has been one of the most frequent. And
if the contemplated changes in the British trade take place, as
they most surely will, there is reason to fear that still morr serious.
evils may arise in future from the same cause. In order to show
that the most, undesirable consequences may result from the rash:
and improper conduct of seamen here, we will cite a few, from
among a very great number of occurrences, which bear directly
on the point in question. We do not allude to past transactions
with any other view than that they may serve as beacons to warn
off from danger those who may hereafter visit this port; nor will
we designedly attribute to seamen any of that blame which justly
belongs to those natives who rudely attack them, cozen-them, or
decoy them into evil. . . . . , it . . . * *
The first case which we have to notice occurred in 1721. The
Bonita, a trading vessel at Whampoa, was preparing to sail for
Madras, when David Griffiths, a man belonging to one of the
other, ships, having engaged to sail in her, procured one of her
boats to tranship his effects. On his way to the Bonita, a custom-
house boat made towards him, intending to search his boat. “Grif.
fiths, being intoxicated and also alarmed for his property, fired a
musket at the Chinese boat, and killed one of the custom-house
men... The next morning, the corpse was laid before the door of
the iBnglish factory, and a supercargo belonging to the Bonita,
who-happened to be the first Englishinan that went out of the fac-
tory, I was apprehended by the officers of the Chinese police, and
ked ºchained about the streets of Canton. Griffiths was secured
and confined on board one of the East India Company's ships,
whilst endeavors were made by the factory to appease the Chi-
nese, which, however, was not done, nor the release of the super.
cargo obtained, until the culprit was delivered into their hands.”.
… In 1772, a Chinese and some Europeans were wounded in an
affray, which originated in the fourth officer of the Lord Camden
having incurred debts which he was unable to pay; the trade was
in consequence stopped. - - - -
in 1800, the supercargoes of the Company “made strong repre-
sentations to the court, respecting the English sailors and their
riotous conduct while on shore at Canton, whither they were oc-
casionally permitted to go to purchase necessaries. . It was hoped
that the court would seize any opportunity to make regulations
which might be effectual, as the scenes described were disgrace-
ful in the eyes of the Chinese, embarrassing to the Company's


1834. Port of Canton. 423
interests and to their servants, and highly offensive to all descrip-
tions of persons.” - - -
Again in 1804, the attention of the court was called to the “long
established practice” of perinitting the seamen to spend three days
-on shore at Canton, “where they are exposed to the arts practiced
by the Chinese of mixing their liquors with ingredients of an irri-
-tattug and maddening effect, causing a state of inebriety more fe-
rocious than that occasioned by any other spirit, and leading to
riotous scenes of the greatest enormity, and which tend to keep
Talive in the minds of the Chinese, the most unfavorable opinion of
: our-character.” * - - - -
- , . The circumstances connected with the execution of the unfor-
tunate Francis Terranova, an Italian sailor serving on board an
American ship, in 1821, are yet fresh in the recollections of many.
We do not undertake to say what degree of blame was imputable
to him in causing the death of Ko Leding she. It is generally be-
lieved that he was bartering with that woman for ardent spirits,
when the quarrel arose which ended in her death. The charge
of murder was brought aginst him, the whole American trade
was stopped, and the security-merchant and linguist of the ship
º, Emily, to which he belonged, were both arrested, and placed in
close confinement within the walls of the city of Canton. On the
25th of October, Terranova was brought from Whampoa, and plac.
ed in irons at the public hall of the hong-merchants. “During the
two following days, the forms of a Chinese trial were gone-through
in the same place, but the precise nature of the proceedings can
only be conjectured, as no foreigner of any description was allow-
ed to be present ; and on the third day, about day-break, notwith-
standing a very general expectation entertained here, that his life
would be spared, the unfortunate man was brought forth and pub-
licly strangled at the usual place of execution, without the, walls
of the city. His body was given up to the Americans in the
- course of the evening; and on the following day, the trade was
re-opened.” “. . . . " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ."
The preceding instances of disturbances, and the testimony con-
cerning them, will suffice for our present purpose of showing that
the most serious consequences may result from the bad conduct
of seamen here; and that the acts of a single individual, in a fit of
intoxication, may put in jeopardy the property and the persons of
many, 1. These unpleasant occurrences have not been confined to
men of any oue, nation: they have been witnessed among seamen
- under most, if not all, the several flags, which visit this port. Lat-
terly they have been less frequent, probably, than they were thirty
years ago. Still they have occurred recently, and will continue
- to do so, unless, most carefully guarded against. . . . . . . . . . . . .
The liquor which is given to sailors on entering most of the
shops, which, they are wont to frequent in Canton, and which is
frequently conveyed to them either, openly or secretly at Whatn-
poa, is a rare dose, coinposed often of alwhol, tobacco juice, su-
gap, and arsenic. ... The liquor which contains the alcohol, and


424 Seamen in Cantom. JAN.
which constitutes the principal part of the dose, is literally and
very properly called hotsend, fire liquor.' Its effects, with the
substances mixed with it, are awful; when taken in considerable
quantities, it not only destroys the reason and senses of the man,
but, at intervals, it throws him into the most frightful paroxysms
of rage.
Some may say that “the reformation and inprovement of sea-
men cannot be effected, their case is hopeless, and they must be
left to take their own course,” i. e. must continue to be neglected.
But the success that has already attended the incipient efforts for
their improvement, demonstrates clearly that their case is not
hopeless. To raise them to the rank, in regard to mora' charac-
ter and conduct, which they ought and are able to hold, needs
only the prompt, united and persevering efforts of those who are
engaged in commerce, cooperating with the numerous friends of
seamen who are rising up to plead their cause in every part of
Christendon.
Most of those who are engaged in the trade with the Chinese
are aware of the difficulties and embarrassments, to which they are
exposed on account of the misconduct of seamen. Should any
such, or others who are about to embark in this trade, inquire
“How may these evils be avoided ?” We would answer: “In
the first place, take the most special care to employ commanders
and officers who can be relied on ſor maintaining discipline; and
in the second place, ket the commanders see to it that they have
orderly crews, composed of temperate and trustworthy men.”
With these precautions, and a proper degree of carefulness by all
while they are in port, not the least difficulty need be apprehend-
ed. But it is not enough that foreign seamen abstain from acts
of aggression. As civilized and Christian men they should exhib-
it conduct worthy of such a character and name. We give our
most decided approbation to the efforts of those who are striving
to elevate and improve: the character of seamen; and, so far as
we may have opportunity, shall joyfully coöperate with them in
their good work. - * * * * * * - -
In a short “Address to masters, officers, and seamen, in the
port of Cauton,” published last September, the seamen's chaplain
notices several things which he deems it, desirable to accomplish
here for the benefit of searnen, and several evils which are to be
removed. But one thing of moment, which deserves immediate
attention, he did not notice; we refer to some medical aid for the
stok. Whether improvements cannot be made in the accommo-
dations for seamen on board ship, is a question that demands
more attention. than it has yet received. Few individuals would
be willing to take up with the ordinary accommodations of com-
mon seamen. Could these men be better provided for, there
would be among them doubtless less sickness, and fewer deaths.
There is an economy which tendeth to poverty and distress. To
the exercise of this economy in the accommodations of seamen,
may be attributed inany of the discomforts, and much of the sick-
• * * *


1834. Government Gratuitics. 425
ness and premature death prevalent among them. Go the mer-
chantman, when she is about to sail on a voyage of ten months or
a year, and see what preparations are made for her crew during
that long time. A space twenty feet long by ten or twelve wide,
having little light and poorly ventilated, without chairs or table,
half filled with berths and chests, and the persons often or twenty
men, is their only room for eating and sleeping, and generally
also for their accommodation in times of sickness. On their
homeward passage, a part even of this space is often occupied by
stores, &c. While the ships are in this port, during the first au.
tumnal months, when the weather by day is usually very hot, the
air in thºse forecastles becomes so close, confined, and warm, as
to render them utterly unfit for dormitories. Hence, where it is al-
lowed, the sailors accustom themselves to sleep upon deck, till the
fever and ague, or other disease, obliges them to tetreat from the
cold, damp night air, and seek for rest in their berths. -
Of the American ships employed in the Chinese trade, very few
are provided with physicians. English laws require that every
British ship having more than forty men on board shall be provid-
ed with a surgeon. But if the large ships of the East India Con-
pany cease to frequent this port, it is probable that a very consi-
derable part of the English merchantmen will be equally destitute
with the American ships. With eighty or a hundred ships then
annually visiting this port, shall there be no medical aid provided
for their sick? Something, it seems to us should be done. The
medical gentlemen who are resident at Canton might, perhaps,
by fitting up a hospital at Whampoa, and securing the aid of one
or more medical practitioners, make all the necessary and desired
arrangements. Or some other plan might be adopted; other medi-
cal gentlemen might, perhaps, independently, establish themselves
there, and during the business season attend upon the sick and
administer to their wants. At Lintin also, if the shipping contin-
ues to increase, as it seems likely to do, the constant presence of a
medical gentleman will soon, uo doubt, be deemed indispensable.
Gover NMENT GRATuities, in times of calanity and scarcity.
That the Chinese government does nothing for the poor and dis-
tressed is not true; but to use a Chinese phrase, there is so often
“the name without the reality,” as to make the doing appear next
to nothing. These remarks are suggested by two official papers
before us, which were recently issued in the form of proclama-
tions to the people. - -
When in the month of August last, the middle of the seventh
moon, the rains, the winds, and the river conspired to wash away
or rend to pieces the humble dwellings of the poor, the government
sent around surveyors to take a list of the names of the sufferers.
On the 28th of the 11th moon (the 7th instant), an official docu-
ment was published p" Huang and Le, i. e. “Yellow” aud,
3 - - -


426 Literary Notices. JAN.
“Plum,” the magistrates who divide the city of Cantou between
then, stating that on the 2d, 3d, 4th, and 5th, days of the 12th
moon, the sufferers from the inundation (which occurred about five
months ago), might apply for relief, which would be paid to
them out of sums subscribed by the public, in the following pro-
portions. - -
To the poor who were utterly unable to rebuild their houses, and
where one roof had fallen in were to be paid 2 inace, 5 candareens.
'Po the poor whose houses had fallen in, and who were destitute,
money was to be given for two months' food; i. e. for every big
person's mouth were to be given, per mensem, 1 m. 3 c. 5 cash;
and to every little person's (or child's) mouth one half of that sum.
That is (as the proclamation states it) for two months, each big
mouth was to receive 2 m. 7 c.; and each little mouth 1 m. 3 c. 5 c.
Thus, a poor man, five months after the falling in of his house,
who has strength to wait and rush and reach the distributor with
his ticket, will get two mace and five candareens gratuity to help
to rebuild his house. But this sum (about, say largely, 2 shillings
sterling), as a native has observed, is not enough to remove the
rubbish of a fallen in house, nor to buy a single beam.
The supply of rice to the poor by government, notified in anoth-
er proclamation, is on the same liberal scale. The allowance
per month for “big mouths,” or grown people, is given at a rate of
imoney, value 1 m. 3 c. 5 c. For “little mouths” or children, the
abateinent is valued at one half of this. Thus the poor may apply
at once for the two months' allowance, or 2 m. 7 c. 0 c. for the
“big mouths;” and 1 m. 3 c. 5 c. for the little inouths. But here
again, to obtain this pittance of fron one to two shillings, there
is so much rushing and pushing and waiting,<-for the aged and
feeble have to go two or three days successively before they can
reach the distributing officer, who does not preside many hours
per day,+it becomes a question with mauy whether to go or not.
Of course those who have employment are not required to go, and
would do better to stay at home. We state these facts to show the
case, and not for the purpose of reflecting on the government, for
with the best intentions their task is difficult. . -
Liter ARY Notices.
-
Tan-kuei Tseih, the Olea fra-
grans Miscellany; or some say,
the Laurus cassia, which grew
in heaven and fell from the moon.
This is the title of a collec-
tion of Chinese religious and
ethical essays in four small vols.
It is a popular work, and is often
given away by benevolent na-
tives as an expression of gra-
titude for mercies received. We
bought our copy, but the title
page gives the name of a person
who printed a thousand copies,
for distribution in the twenty-
third year of the late emperor
Keāking. The value is about
two mace five caudareens, or one
third of a Spanish dollar, -
This Fragrant Miscellany is


1834.
427
“Literary Notices.
is called a “pious-fraud.”
of the eclectic school, and con-
"tains extracts from the writ-
ings of the Confucian sect or
the Joo-keaou, and also from
Shih and Taou, i. e. the "Bud-
hists and Taouists. There is
in it consequently a good deal
of variety of opinion, and ra-
ther contradictory sentiments,
but supposed to be consistent in
one thing, viz., in béing favora-
ble to *irtue and opposed to
‘vice. För'example, the preface
sets out with the high-flying
doctrine of infidelity, that hope
of reward and fear of punish-
ment are incompatible with vir-
tue; and yet the body of the
book is filled with the:sentiment
that virtue is rewarded and vice
punished in this life. ... : :"
* ... The first two volumes con-
tain various essays on morals;
and papers which profess to be
revelations from the gods; and
the two remaining volumes con-
sist of illustrations and proofs,
derived from legendary tales,
which are often frivolous and
silly, and generally absurd fic-
tions. . .i. ... : zitawi . . 3rto
--The-style of these books is
. . . . .
generally sententious and per-
spicuous; abounding in point
and energy. The thoughts are
sometimes beautiful and just ;
but often disfigured by super-
stition and d nonsense. The
whole book is what in Europe
In
our opinion nôTăud Cà be pi-
ous; man should never do evil
that good mayu come; nor ºat-
tempt to help the truth by tell-
ing a lie." In religion and mo-
rals,r, truth; alone, is of value:
If superstition be any check on
the vices of mankind, it is only
in consequence of its contain-
ing some portion of truth.
In the collection there are
about forty essays, most of
which are common to Chinese
ethics. The mere titles of
them would give but little idea
of their contents; and a trans-
lation of them would be too
voluminous. In them, however,
many “virtues are inculcated,
though from mistaken princi-
les, and 'fallacious sanctions.
ilial piety of course holds a
chief place.' Truth, honesty,
chastity, temperance, mercy and
kindness are all taught. And,
what is remarkable for a pagan
... and a Qhinese, humility, for-
bearance, and the forgiveness
of injuries are also inculcated.
: There are dissuasives against
gambling, infanticide, and un-
natural crimes; against sland-
der, backbiting, and envy. Some
of the papers have already ap-
peared in , Morrison's Chinese
works, but the most of them are
new to the readers of the west-
ern world. ‘We hope as Chi.
nese scholars increase.
#.
that before us will more abound.
Memoirs of Louis XVIIIth,
written by himself. 2 Wols.
London, 1832. “” ºf it.” ". . .
"If this book be a faithful pic-
ture of the court of France,
and the Romish' religion, it
would seem that vice and su-
perstition were as prevalent in
Paris, the most scientific city in
Christendom, as in pagan China.
Louis, the XVth died in the
wmidst of the vices in which he
had lived; but what is called
the “last. sacrament” in the
book before us, was thought es-
sential to, and -seemingly per-
fectly sufficient for; the “king's
eternal welfare.” Still the


430.
JAN.
Journal of Occurrences.
59,824 learners. Income, $130,-
574. -
2. The Bible Society, organ-
ised in 1816, has published about
1,084,513 Bibles and Testa-
ments; — 238,583 in 1829–30.
Income, $170,067. *
3. The Tract Society, insti-
tuted in 1825, has issued 648 dif.
ferent publications, of which
about 28,954,173 copies have
been put in circulation. Income,
$62,443. . ºf
4. The Home Missionary
Sºciety employs 509 missiona-
ries and agents, chiefly in the
western states. Income, $43,240.
5. The Education Society
assists 673 young men in pro-
curing such an education as will
qualify them to become preach-
ers of the gospel. Income $41,-
6. The Baptist Board for Fo-
reign Missions. Income $20,000.
The income of other societies
whose object, with one or two
exceptions, is the same, $142,-
655; inaking a total of $641,-
439.
Thus England and the United
States alone expend, by means
of these societies, to say nothing
of what is contributed in other
ways, for benevolent purposes
more than two millions, five hun-
dred thousand dollars annually.
In addition to this, probably
not less than 1,500,000 chil-
dren receive instruction in their
Journal of occurrences.
Rev ENUF of ChiNA —In a Gazette
of the 11th of October there is a long
document, which is the result of deli-
beration among the several supreme
Boards and the Hoo Poo or Treasury
department. Its object is to increase
Nie revenue for current expenses;
Sabbath schools from at least
150,000 teachers, who thus
make a weekly donation of 25,-
000 days' time to the cause of
benevolence.
Let this benevolent spirit con:
in - se. and it will
soon fill every dark place withe
light, and cause the whole world
to rejoice in its genial influence.
Let it progress during the next
40 years in the same ratio in
which it has during the last 40,
and wherever it is allowed to
extend its operation, it will give
every child an opportunity to
attend a school, give every slave
his liberty, enable every indivi-
dual to hear the gospel preach-
ed, and give to every family that
will receive it, a copy of the
word of God. But opposition
and reverses are to be expected,
and the grand result, the uni-
versal diffusion of the blessings
of science and Christianity will
probably not be witnessed with-
in so short a period as that just
named. Yet the above state-
ments show an increase of be-
nevolence at which every friend
of man must rejoice. It is the
true “glory of the age.” Wiew-
ed in connection with the pro-
mises of God, it may justly be
regarded as a sure indication
that the true golden age of the
world, when knowledge, virtue,
and happiness will be universal,
is fast approaching.
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Y'ſ
because, during the last few years,
the outlay has exceeded the income
more than thirty millions of taels. This
is attributed to the two Mohammedan
rebellions, together with the “ugly
monkey tricks of the highland moun-
taineers;" also the calamities from


1834.
431
Journal of Occurrences.
water and drought, in opposite ex-
tremes, which made it necessary to
remit the land-tax, during the last
two years of his majesty's reign :
and to the various public works in re-
pairing the banks of rivers, which
have drained both the general and
provincial treasuries. The method
now adopted to raise money is the sale
of office, i. e. eligibility to office, as
vacancies may occur. This method
has been resorted to several times
of late years, for a given period.
The present term is to continue till
the 5th moon of next year, when
it will be closed. Each of these
periods, like the European loans, has
an appropriate name. The sale now
open is called the Chow pe ling ſei
he, and the vacancies occurring are to
be filled up in certain proportions
by the old and the new purchasers.
But the system is altogether a bad one.
Many of the old purchasers are un-
eunployed and standing idle for want of
office; and those who get into office,
having bought their places, deem it
but just to repay themselves as fast
as possible from the people.
§. the preceding was in type,
more informaion has come to hand
on the same subject. In the, Gazette
of the 9th moon, 28th day (Nov. 9th),
there is an elaborate state paper con-
cerning the revenues by the censor of
the province of Keāngse, Na-sze-hung-
ah, a Tartar, as his name and style in-
dicate, for he calls himself noo-tsae, ‘a
slave,' which is the usage of the Tartar
statesmen, whereas Chinese call them-
selves chin, “a servant.’ This slave
says, that the whole income from land
tax, salt monopoly, customs and duties,
with items paid to make these good,
does not exceed forty and odd millions
of taels; and the regular outlay of the
nation is thirty and odd inillions. He
adds, that although the overplus be not
great, yet were there no deficiencies
of income. the machine of state would
go on long, and the supply be abun-
dant. But of late years, there has not
been one in which numerous defalca-
tions in every department have not
occurred, so that the income has not
been adequate for times of tranquillity;
whilst in cases of insurrection, scarci-
ty, and so forth, the deficiency has
amounted to millions; and to supply
these, various expedients have been
proposed. Some have been for open;
ing the mines; some have advised
raising the price of salt, some for
selling appointments, and persuading
inerchants to subscribe for the wants
of the state; thus causing anxiety to the
sacred mind of his majesty, on whom it
devolved to balance the advantages
and disadvantages of these plaus, and
either to reject then at once. or give
them a trial, and then desist. But these
measures have been only the result of
necessity, and not of any well di-
gested and permanent plan.
Robbery.—On the evening of the
10th of Jan. about ten o'clock, a band
of robbers in the district Kaou-ining,
repaired by torchlight to plunder a
respectable clothier's shop, situated
at the entrance of Po-shih (Broken-
stone) street. They carried off proper-
}. worth from one to two thousand
ollars.
An officer of an adjoining guard-
house saw the robbers proceed to their
booty, but was afraid to attack them
with his inferior force. However he
secreted himself near the path by
which they retired, and under the
cover of darkness, shot twenty or
thirty arrows against the crowd of
plunderers. They, notwithstanding,
went off; and the next morning reveal-
ed that many of them had been wound-
ed, for the arrows tinged with blood
were thrown upon the path. One of
their number severely wounded, re-
mained behind, and died before any
confession was obtained from him.
King, the local magistrate, directed
the parties concerned to report the
matter as a case of simple theft, and
not of open robbery. . The neighbors
complied, but the father and son,
belonging to the shop plundered. re-
fused to conceal the truth, and by the
last accounts were kept in custody in
order to coinpel them to comply with
the direction of the magistrate. How-
ever, the surrounding neighborhood.
became roused by the firmness of
the father and son, demanded their
release, and that the case should be
prosecuted according to the facts. To
bring the local magistrate to terms,
the markets were discontinued, the
shops closed, all business suspended.
The people in fact struck—they stop-
ped the trade. This proceeding is
-known in China by the term pashc.
Homicine.—In a Peking Gazette of
November 22d, the emperor delivers a


432
Journal of Occurrences.
severe censure on the governors of
provinces, and their subordinate offi-
cers for, delay and inattention in cases
of homicide. The circumstance which
called his attention to the subject,
was an appeal from the province of
Canton, which alleged that nine lives
had been destroyed eleven years ago,
and no satisfaction obtained from the
government. Governors and lieut.-go-
vernors are expressly appointed, his
majesty says, to take care of the lives
of the people, and they should unite
with th. judges and see into affairs
themselves. Speedy justice is requir.
ed, that the dead may be satisfied, and
the living witnesses set free. The
emperor then threatens those govern.
ors, &c., who notwithstanding this
admonition are found remiss.
Decapitation of a son for the murder
of his father.—In Shense, a young
man being vexed with a creditor, who
was urging his claims with abusive
language, picked up a stone and threw
it at him as he stood in the doorway.
At that moment the creditor stooned,
and the father of the young man rose;
and the stone, passing over the foe,
killed the father. The son for this
unintentional parricide is condemned
to be decapitated. Had it been in-
tentional, he won!d have suffered
the slow and ignominious punishment
of being cut to pieces; but as it was
confessedly unintentional, the sen-
tence was commuted to merely cut-
ting off his head! Surely it may be
said, their tender mercies are cruel.
HETERodoxv.–Im the province of
Shantung, the propagators of what
the Chinese call seay keaon, “deprav-
ed doctrines,' have been apprehend-
ed. But, as it usually happens in such
cases, the doctrines which they pro-
pagate are not specified in the Gazette.
Szechuen.—On the frontiers of
this province there have recently
been some military operations against
the barbarians. Twenty-three of the
prisoners taken were put to death.
The imperial troops pursued the ene-
my among the hills, killing and burn-
ing in all directions. They found also
The emperor has received his mo-
ther's orders to confer the titles “im-
erial, honorable,” &c., on three of
is concubines; and has ordered the
Board of Rites to search and see what
are the proper formalities for so grand
on occasion.
The commercial business of Canton, during the current season,
Postscript.
has been carried on with few interruptions. A - - -
The chinese are busily employed in arranging their
already left the port.
affairs for the new year, which occurs on the
some Chinese women, who had been
previously carried off.
Coast of Cheke ANG.-It appears
by reports in the Gazettes, that vessels
of Corea and Lewchew have been
wrecked on this coast, during the last
season.
Koxo-nor.--The head Tartar prince
at Koko-nor has “sickened and made
a vacancy," i.e. died. To select anoth-
er from the kings and nobles is spok-
en of as a great event, previously to
which a sacrifice was offered ſo the
Tsing-hae, ‘azure sea,' lake Koko-nor.
The barber's shop, or stall, is in
China the place to which travelers, in
town or village, repair for local in-
formation, and the news of the day. '
A man who wants his head shaved, or
his hair plaited, has a right to enter the
shop; and as it is said of portrait paint-
ing, that a talent for conversation is
essential to the artist, so it is in barber-
ing—the shaver, who can lather his
customer well, or, as is the case in
China, (where the barbers do not use
soap,) can scald him well and bring
off the hair, and at the same time re-
gale him with news or scandal, is sure
to succeed.
Idolatry of an aged statesman. Wang
How-ho, an old officer of the Board of
Rites at Peking, returned thanks to the
emperor for having sent him, on the
70th anniversary of his birth, an in-
scription for his gate, and the word
longevity written with his majesty's
own hand; also an image of Budha.
The old statesman says on receiving
the heavenly marks of the emperor's
favor, he spread out an altar of in-
cense on the groundin token of his gra-
titude! Alas, what childish idolatry
in the emperor and in his minister.
Almost all the foreign ships have
9th of February. All public
offices will be closed on the 29th instant, the 20th of the 12th moon.


T H E
CHIN E S E REPOSITORY.
Vol. II.-FEBRUARY, 1833.—No. 10.
DESCRIPTION OF THE CITY OF PEKING.
Peking, the capital of the Chinese empire, stands
on a vast plain, in the interior of Chille, (or Pin
Chihle), the most northern province of China Pro-
per. It is situated in latiude 39° 55' north, and in
longitude 116° 45' east from Greenwich, and about
3° 30′ east of Canton. On the east and south, the
low and sandy plain extends farther than the eye can
reach; on the west and north, hills begin to rise
above the plain only a few miles from the walls of the
city; and at a distance beyond, the prospect is bound-
ed by mountains which separate the province of Chih-
le from Mantchouria. Viewed from the summit of
those mountains, the city appears as if situated in the
midst of a thick forest; this effect is produced by
the clusters of trees that cover the villages, temples,
and numerous cemeteries which encompass the capi-
tal. From the great wall, which passes along upon
this ridge of mountains, Peking is about fifty or six-
ty miles distant; and a little more than a hundred
from the gulph of Chihle. The Pei ho, rising in the
north beyond the Great wall, flows within twelve
miles of the city on the east, and then passes down
in a southeast direction by Tečntsin into the sea.
Several smaller rivers, issuing from the mountains on
the northwest, water a part of the plain; and one of
3E


434 Description of the Feb.
them, which is called the Tung-hwuy, descends to
the city and supplies its numerous canals and tanks;
it then flows eastward, and uniting with one of the
larger rivers forms an extensive water communica-
tion by which provisions are conveyed to the capital.
Peking or Pih king ‘the Northern capital,’ is re-
garded by the Chinese as one of their most ancient
cities: its early history, however, is involved in ob-
scurity. The imperial court has been repeatedly re-
moved from one province to another, having been
held in Shense, Honan, and in other more south-
ern provinces. The first monarch of the Yuen dy-
nasty, who ascended the throne in A. D. 1279, kept
his court for several years at the capital of Shanse;
but subsequently removed it to Shunteen foo, the
principal department of the province of Chihle, and
the present site of Peking. Hungwoo, the first em-
peror of the Ming family, established the seat of his
government at Keāngning foo, the principal depart-
ment of the province of Keāngnan, and hence sty-
led Nanking, ‘the southern capital;' but Yunglö,
the third monarch of the same line, removed it to Pe-
king, where it has remained to the present time.
On native maps the city is not usually denomi-
nated Pih-king, but Kingsze, ‘the residence of the
court.” Since the foundations of the city were first
laid, it has undergone many changes in its extent and
form. For a long period it was surrounded only by
a single wall, and had nine gates; and hence, even
to the present day, it is sometimes spoken of as ‘the
city of nine gates.” At a later period it was extend-
ed towards the south by a new wall, leaving the former
southern wall between the old and the new city. At
the present time, the northern division is called nuy-
ching, ‘the inner city,' and the southern, wae-ching
‘the outer city;' and as in the case of Canton, the
northern part is frequently denominated the Tartar
city. The new wall which surrounds the outer city,
or southern division of Peking, has seven gates.
The northern division of the city is nearly in the


1834. City of Peking. 435
form of a parallelogram, of which the four sides face
the four cardinal points; it extends from north to
south about four miles, and from east to west three,
having an area of twelve square miles. The south-
ern division extends from east to west nearly six
miles, and two and a half from north to south, occu-
pying an area of about fifteen miles. Thus the en-
tire circumference of Peking may be estimated at
nearly twenty-five miles, and its area at twenty-seven
square miles.
The walls of the northern division of the city, ac-
cording to Barrow, are thirty feet in height, twen-
ty-five feet in breadth at the base, and twelve at the
top. The inclination is chiefly on the inner side;
the outer side is smooth and nearly perpendicular.
Near the gates, the walls are faced with marble or
granite, but in other places with large bricks laid in
Inortar, which is made of lime and clay, and “in pro-
cess of time becomes almost as hard and durable as
granite.” The intermediate space between the in-
ner and outer surfaces of the wall is filled with the
earth and clay that was dug from the ditch which
surrounds the city. On the outer side of the walls,
square towers, projecting about fifty feet from the
line of the wall, and of the same height with it, are
built at the distance of about sixty yards from each
other. Two such towers, of equal height with the
walls, stand one on each side of every gate, and are
connected in front by a semicircular fort. The arches
of the gates are strong, being built of stone; they are
surmounted by large wooden buildings, several stories
high. On the inside of the wall, at the side of every
gates, also near the middle of the interval between
the gates, and at the several corners of the city,
there is a species of esplanade for ascending to the
top of the wall. A ditch surrounds the whole city,
which is supplied from the waters of the Tung-hwuy
river: with this ditch others are connected, by which
the same waters are conducted to all the principal
parts of this great metropolis.


436 Description of the FEB.
To the stranger approaching the city of Peking,
its lofty walls and towers give it an imposing appear-
ance, not unworthy the capital of a great empire ;
but when he comes within the walls, his admiration
is turned to surprise. He beholds there none of
those beautiful and superb edifices, none of those neat
and elegant streets, which are the principal ornament
of European cities; instead of these, he sees in va-
rious directions irregular assemblages of houses,
shops and temples. The style of the architecture,
and the general appearance of the buildings, is the
same as in Canton. Most of the streets are indeed
sufficiently wide and straight; but they are not pav-
ed, and, in general, their bad condition is a just sub-
ject of complaint, in this as well as in other Chinese
cities. As, however, the front of every shop in the
business streets, has an arrangement peculiar to itself,
and before it, on either side, a perpendicular sign-
board as high as the roof, covered with inscriptions
in large gilt or painted letters, describing the wares
within and the reputation of the dealer, and often
hung from top to bottom with flags and ribbons;
this diversity in the arrangement of merchandise, to-
gether with the profusion of gaudy decorations and
the bustling crowd by which he is surrounded, di-
vert the attention of the spectator, and cause him to
forget in some degree the more disagreeable parts
of the scenery around him.
The smaller streets are quiet and free from crowds;
but those which lead to the principal gates are con-
stantly thronged with people. The following de-
scription by an eye-witness will serve to convey some
idea of the scene they often exhibit. “The multi-
tude of movable workshops of tinkers and barbers,
cobblers and blacksmiths; the tents and booths where
tea and fruit and rice and other vegetables were ex-
posed for sale; with the wares and merchandise ar-
ranged before the doors of the shops, contracted the
spacious street to a narrow road in the middle.
The processions of men in office, attended by their


1834. City of Peking. 4:37
numerous retinues bearing umbrellas and flags,
painted lanterns and a variety of large insignia of
their rank and station; trains accompanying, with la-
mentable cries, corpses to their graves, and others
conducting brides to their husbands with squalling
music; the troops of dromedaries laden with coal
from Tartary; the wheel-barrows and hand-carts
loaded with vegetables; occupied nearly the whole
of this middle space. All was in motion; the sides
of the streets were filled with people buying and sel-
ling and bartering their different commodities. The
buzz and confused noises of this mixed multitude,
proceeding from the loud bawling of those who were
crying their wares, the wrangling of others, and the
mirth and laaghter which prevailed in every group,
could scarcely be exceeded. Pedlars with their
packs, and jugglers, and conjurers, and fortune-tel-
lers, mountebanks and quack-doctors, comedians and
musicians, left no space unoccupied.” Such, accord-
ing to Mr. Barrow, is the scene exhibited in a street
in Peking. The crowd of people, and the variety of
strange sights and sounds on the occasion described,
was probably rather greater than usual; but he has
given too correct a representation of what may some-
times be witnessed even in the suburbs of Canton,
to allow us to accuse him of much exaggeration.
Soon after the present dynasty took possession of
the throne of China, in 1644, the government, de-
signing to occupy the northern division of the city as
barracks for its troops, purchased the houses of the
private owners and gave them to the Tartars who had
served in its wars; but these brave soldiers, less skill-
ed in the arts of peace than the people they had sub-
jugated, were very soon obliged to sell them to the
Chinese. In consequence of this, all the principal
and many of the smaller streets, with the exception
of those near the imperial palace, are owned and
occupied by Chinese; and the Tartar soldiery have
been compelled to take up their abode in the lanes
and alleys near the walls of the city. Thus far we


4.38 Description of the FEB.
have spoken of the capital as a whole; we now pro-
ceed to survey its principal parts.
The northern division of Peking consists of three
inclosures one within another, each surrounded by
its own wall. The first contains the imperial pa-
lace and the abodes of the different members of the
imperial household; the second was originally de-
signed for the residence of the officers and atten-
dants of the court, but is now occupied in part by
Chinese merchants; the third consists of the remain-
ing space inclosed by the outer walls, which have
already been described.
The first inclosure, which is called the forbidden
city, being the seat of ‘the dragon's throne,' the
place from which emanates the authority that governs
one third of mankind, is the most splendid, as well
as the most important part of Peking. According to
the notions of a Chinese, all within its walls is gold
and silver. “He will tell you,” says Mr. Barrow, “of
gold and silver pillars, gold and silver roofs, and gold
and silver vases, in which swim gold and silver fishes.”
It is situated nearly in the centre of the northern
division of the city. It is an oblong parallelogram
about two miles in circumference, and inclosed by a
wall of nearly the same height and thickness as that
of the outer wall of the capital. This wall is built of
polished red brick, and surrounded by a broad ditch
lined with hewn stone, and covered with varnished
tiles of a brilliant yellow, which give it the appear-
ance, especially when seen under the rays of the sun,
of being covered with a roof of gold. On each of
the four sides is a gate consisting of three arcades
or avenues, surmounted by a tower. A tower also
stands at each corner of the wall. The interior of
this inclosure is occupied by “a suite of courtyards
and apartments which seem to vie with each other in
beauty and splendor.” The terraces and glacis are
covered with large bricks, and the walks that lead to
the great halls are framed of large slabs of gray,and


1834. City of Peking. 439
white stone. It is divided into three parts, the east-
ern, middle, and western. The middle division con-
tains the imperial buildings, which are subdivided into
several distinct palaces, each having its particular
name and destination. “There reigns,” says father
Hyacinth, “among the buildings of the forbidden
city, a perfect symmetry both in the form and height
of the several edifices and in their relative position,
indicating that they were built upon a regular and
harmonious plan.” We will notice a few of the
most remarkable objects it contains, beginning at
the southern part of the middle division.
1. Woo mun, “the meridian gate.” Before this gate,
on the east, is a lunar, and on the west, a solar dial,
and in the tower above it a large bell and gong.
Public officers, of both the civil and military depart-
ments, enter and leave the palace by the eastern
avenue; none but the princes of imperial blood are
permitted to pass the western, and no one but the
emperor the southern avenue. Whenever he goes
out or returns through it, the bell is rung and the
gong struck. When his troops return in triumph
from war and come to present their captives, the em-
peror places himself here to perform the ceremony of
receiving the prisoners. Here also, are distributed the
presents which the emperor makes to foreign prin-
ces and their embassadors, as well as to his own vas-
sals. After passing this gate the visitor enters a large
court, through which runs a small canal, over which
are five bridges adorned with balustrades, pillars,
steps, and figures of lions and other sculptures, all
of fine marble. He next enters a beautiful court,
terminated on the right and left by gates, porticoes,
and galleries adorned with balconies supported on
pillars.
2. Tae-ho mun, “the gate of extensive peace.”
This has five avenues, and in other respects resem-
bles the Woo mun, or meridian gate ; it is a su-
perb building of fine white marble. The height of
the basement is twenty feet, and of the whole edifice,


440 Description of the FEb.
according to father Hyacinth, one hundred and ten.
The ascent to it is by five flights of forty-two steps
each, bordered with balustrades, and ornamented
with tripods and other figures in bronze. The cen-
tral flight is very broad, and is reserved for the emper-
or alone; princes and officers of the first rank enter
by the two next, and inferior officers by the others.
Here the emperor, on the first day of the year, on
the anniversary of his birth and several other occa-
sions, receives the congratulations and respects of his
officers, who prostrate themselves to the earth before
him and strike the ground with their foreheads.
3. Chung-ho teen, “the hall of perfect peace.”
This is the hall of audience where the emperor comes
to examine the implements prepared for the annual
ceremony of ploughing; and where also the genea-
logical tablets of his ancestors are presented to him.
4. Paou-ho teen, “the hall of secure peace.” In
this the emperor gives a banquet to his foreign
guests on newyear's day; and the authors of the bio-
graphy of his deceased father come in pompous ce-
remony to this hall to present to him their work.
After ascending three flights of steps, and passing
another gate, the keen-tsing mun, the visitor sees
before him
5. Keen-tsing. kung, ‘the tranquil palace of
heaven, i.e. of the emperor. This is a private re-
treat, to which no one can approach without special
permission. To this palace the emperor repairs
whenever he wishes to deliberate with his ministers
upon affairs of state, or to see those who present them-
selves as candidates for office or for advancement.
It is described by Timkowski as “the loftiest, rich-
est, and most magnificent of all the palaces. In the
court before it is a small tower of gilt copper, adorn-
ed with a great number of figures, which are beauti-
fully executed. On each side of the tower is a large
vessel likewise of gilt copper, in which incense is
burnt day and night. It was in this palace that Kang-
he, in the fiftieth year of his reign, instituted a grand


442 Description of the - FEB,
10. Shin-woo mun; this gate stands beyond the
imperial flower garden, and forms the northern en-
trance to the forbidden city. We have now com-
pleted our survey of the central division of the kin
ching; the eastern contains fewer objects of interest.
11. Nuy-kö, ‘the council chamber.” This term,
nuy-kö, is used to denote not only the Cabinet of the
emperor, but also the hall in which that body holds
its sessions. It is situated near the southern wall;
and beyond it, towards the east, is the nuy-koo, the
imperial treasury.
12. Chuen-sin teen, “the hall of intense mental
exercises.” It is situated at some distance northward
from the Nuy-kö. Offerings are brought and sacri-
fices presented here to “the deceased teacher,” Con-
fucius, and likewise to other ancient sages.
13. Wiin-yuen kö, the imperial library, or, more
literally, “the hall containing the literary abyss:' this
is situated near the Chuen-sin teen, and consists of se-
veral buildings and suites of rooms, which, containing
a large compilation of the national literature, Sze koo
tseuen shoo ‘the complete books of the four treasu-
ries' (or libraries), presents the largest and most
coinplete literary collection in the empire. Farther
north, in this division of the prohibited city, are si-
tuated several imperial buidings, and the palaces of
princes : and also
14. Fung-scèn teen, a temple to which the em-
peror comes to “bless his ancestors,” whose names
are written on tablets deposited here. Before the
day when any great sacrifice is to be offered, and
when he is about to leave the city, as well as when he
returns, the emperor pays a visit to this temple; like-
wise, at the commencement of each of the four sea-
sons of the years, and on the first and fifteenth days
of every month, offerings are here presented, and du-
ring each day are thrice repeated.—In the western
division of the prohibited city, beginning again at the
south, we notice only a few of the principal objects.
15. Van-hewn teen ; this hall stands near the


1834. City of Peking. 443
southern wall, and in it are collected the portraits of
the sovereigns of preceding dynasties, and likewise
tablets, and broad rolls, containing the portraits of
eminent scholars and sages; these are arranged ac-
cording to the degree of merit attributed to each.
16. Woo-ying teen; this hall contains his majesty's
printing establishment; it has a bindery and buildings
in which the blocks used in printing are preserved.
17. Nuy woo foo; here are held the sessions of
a court of commissioners, or controllers, which “has
among its prerogatives the regulation of receipts
and expenditures of the court, its sacrifices and feasts,
rewards and punishments, and all that relates to the
instruction of its younger members, &c. This estab-
lishment, together with the principal magazines of
the crown, which are under its superintendance, is
situated near the wall on the west side of the city.
18. Ching hwang meaou, “the temple of the
guardian deity of the city,’ which stands at the north-
west corner of this inclosure. In the northeastern
part of the same division, are six palaces which are
occupied by the females of the emperor; they are si-
tuated like those designed for the residence of the
princes, in the eastern division.
We have now completed our brief survey of the
prohibited city, which is regarded by the Chinese as
the most sacred and awful of places. In their esti-
mation it is also the most magnificent. The glitter-
ing yellow, and various ornaments of the roofs of its
palaces and other edifices, and the brilliant colors and
abundant gilding applied to the interior, give it, in
their eyes, a dazzling glory; but were we to seek in
it for convenience of construction, or for much that
can seem elegant or grand to one whose taste has
been formed according to any of the rules of archi-
tecture adopted by the people of the west, we should
doubtless meet with disappointment.
(To be continued.)


444 Chinese Weights and Measures. FEB.
MISCELLANIES.
Chinese weights AND MEAsures.—The frequent mention of
Chinese weights and measures, in the pages of the Repository,
renders a brief description of them desirable, especially to those of
our distant readers who may not be familiar with the terms in use
among this people.
The Chinese weigh all articles that are bought and sold that
are-weighable; as money, wood, vegetables, liquids, &c. This
renders their dealings simpler than those of other nations who buy
and sell commodities with more reference to the articles them-
selves. Their divisions of weights and measures, are into money
and commercial weights, and long, land measures, &c.
1. Monry weights.
The circulating medium between forcigners and the Chinese is
broken Spanish dollars, the value of which are usually computed
by weight. Dollars bearing the stamp of Ferdinand have usually
borne a premium of 1 to 14 per cent., while those of Carolus have
risen as high as 7 or 8 percent., but are subject to a considerable
variation, according to the season and different times of the season.
Those coins bearing the stamp of the letter G, are not received
by the Chinese except at a discount. Mexican and United States'
dollars do not pass among the Chinese, but are taken at par by
foreigners. Every individual coin has the mark of the person
through whose hands it passes stamped upon it; and as the num-
ber of these marks soon become very numerous, the coin is quickly
broken in pieces, and this process of stamping being continually
repeated, the fragments gradually become very small. The high-
est weight used in reckoning money is the tael (leang), which is
divided into mace (tseen), candareens (fun), and cash (le). The
relative value of these terms, both among the Chinese and in fo-
reign money, can be seen by the following table. It should be ob-
served here that these terms, taels, mace, candareens, cash-peculs
and catties, covids and punts, etc., are not Chinese words, and are
never used by the Chinese among themselves; and why foreigners
have employed them instead of the legitimate terms it is difficult to
conjecture.
TheITMacTCiná.TCash. TOTECTTGFTTSier.TDSIRF. T
ITTTTTTTTW, 1.20s TV, 9.S.TT 6s. 8d. 1,389 a 1,398
-T-I-I-I-II $7.5SAT-STTISS a T3'ſ
1 10 5.7984T,87.
The value here given for the tael, in sterling money and dollars,
is not the exact value; and it is difficult to ascertain it owing to


446 Chinese Weights and Measures. FEB.
the same as 84 catties, and one pound avoirdupois equals # of a
catty. The Portuguese at Macao have a pecul for weighing cot-
ton and valuable articles; a second for coarse goods; and again a
different one for rice. But the Chinese among themselves know
no difference either in the weight of a pecul for different articles,
or in the tael, whetier used for money or goods.
3. MEASUREs.
The principal measures in use among the Chinese are three,
namely, long measure, land measure, and dry measure: each of
these we notice separately, -
Long measure. The principal measure of length is ‘he covid
(chih) which is divided into ten punts (tsun). The covid varies
considerably, according as it is used for measuring cloths, dis-
tances, or vessels. That determined upon by the mathematical
tribunal is 13.125 English inches: that used by tradesmen at Can-
ton is about 14.625 inches; that employed by engineers for pub-
lic works is 12.7 inches; while the one by which distances are usu-
ally rated is 12.1 inches nearly. The le, or mile, is also an uncertain
measure, varying more than the covid or foot. Its common mea-
sure is 3164 fathoms, or 1897; English feet, and it is the usual
term in which length is estimated. The Chinese reckon 1924
le for a degree of latitude and longitude; but the Jesuits divided
the degree into 250 le, each le being 1826 English feet, or the
10th part of a French league, which is the established measure at
present. A le, according to this measurement, is a little more
than one-third of an English mile.
Land measure. This also has varied considerably, but is at
present established by authority. By this rule, 1200 covids make
an acre or mow, which contains about 6600 square feet.
Dry measure. Rice or paddy is the only article measured in
vessels, the dimensions of which have been fixed by law or usage;
but as even rice and paddy are usually weighed when sold in large
quantities, the vessels for measuring these commodities are but
1.ttle used.
To perform their calculations, the Chinese have a kind of arith-
metical board or abacus "called swan-pan, or “counting board,' on
which, by constant practice, they will perform calculations in num-
bers with surprising facility. In consists of an oblong frame of
wood, having a bar running lengthwise, about two-thirds its width
Trom one side. Through this bar at right angles, are inserted a num-
ber of parallel wires having movable balls on them, five on one
side and two on the other of the bar. The principle on which com-
putations are made is this: that any ball in the larger compartment,
being placed against the bar and called unity, decreases or in-
creases by tenths, hundredths, &c.; and the corresponding balls in
the smaller division by fifths, fiftieths, &c.; if one in the smaller com-
partment is placed against the middle bar the opposite unit or inte-
ger, which may be any one of the digits, is multiplied by five.


1834. Articles of Import and Erport. 447
Imports and Exports of Ganton.
Supplementary to the account of the provincial city, published in former
numbers, we introduce here a bricſ description of the principal articles which
are bought and sold by foreigners in Canton. Some of the commodities no-
ticed in the list, such as tea, silk, &c., will require more detailed accounts,
which must be reserved for future numbers.
AGAR-AGAR. This is a species of sea-weed, of which the Chi-
nese make the guun used in the manufacture of their transparent
lanterns. It is incomparable as a paste; and is not liable to be
eaten by insects. It is extensively employed in making silks and
paper; and when boiled forms a sweet, glutinous compound
which if used in sweetmeats. It is brought from New Holland,
New Guinea, and other adjacent islands; between 400 and 500
peculs are imported annually by the Chi:ese at a prime cost of $14
to $2 per pecul. Its cheapness and admirable qualities as a paste,
render it worthy the attention of other countrics.
ALUM. This salt is exported by the Chinese in considerable
quantities to the Indian Archipelago. It is probably found in the
same geological positions in this, as in other countries, namely in
a slate, known as alum shale. The supply seems to be abundant
from the quantities brought to market. It is commonly much
adulterated with other substances, as gypsum, lime, &c.; the taste
is not so sharp as that of European alum ; but the pieces are large
and transparent. Great quantities of alum are employed by the
Chinese in purifying the water of their rivers, which they use for
culinary purposes. The duty on the article when exported is 5
taels per pecul, and its value in market is from $2 to $3 per pecul.
AMRER. This fossil is found on the shores of several islands of
the Indian Archipelago, and in some small quantities on the coast
of China and Tungking (Tonquin). A considerable part of the
amber in the markets of the East comes from the eustern coast of
Africa; and as far as investigation has gone, it is found in great-
er or less quantities on all extended lines of sea-coast, having
been brought from the shores of Europe, America, Africa, and
all the islands of the eastern part of Asia. Its value was former-
ly very great in those countries of the East where it was used for
ornaments and incense ; but other substances cheaper and more
odoriferous, have superseded it In choosing it, those pieces should
be selected which are hard, transparent and of a lively yellowish-
brown color; and it should attract light substances after being rub-
bcd on cloth. If there are insects in it, the value is greatly increas-
ed, but if the pieces are opaque and foul, they ought to be rejected.
The price is from $8 to $14 per catty according to the quality and
size of the pieces. False amber is also sold in Canton at prices
almost as great as those which the genuine article bears.
AMBERGR1s. This has been often confounded with amber, which
it resembles somewhat in appearance, and it is used for nearly the
sanie purposes. The origin of the two, however, differs widely;
amber being a vegetable fossil, and ambergris a substance found in
the intestines of the Physeter macrocephalus and spermaceti whale.


1834. and Export of Canton. 449.
cocoa-nut tree, and 35 of rice. The process of making it is as fol.
lows; the rice is first boiled, and after cooling, a quantity of yeast
is added, and the whole pressed into baskets, in which condition it
is placed over tubs and left for eight days; during this time, a li-
quor flows abundantly from the rice. This liquor is distilled and
then mixed with the molasses and toddy, which is all left to fer-
ment for a week in large vats; after the fermentation is over, the
arrack is distilled one, two or three times, according to the strength
required. That made at Java is chiefly for home consumption,
but is exported to China and India, where it is sold at 40 cents
a gallon for the best, and 27 or 30 cents for the poorest.
The arrack produced at Goa is sweeter than that which comes
from Java, being made entirely from toddy, by repeated distilla-
tion. It is preferred by the Hindoos to the Batavian on that ac,
count, though it is an inferior spirit, containing only one seventh of
pure alcohol. That made at Colombo is the poorest, and but little
of it is exported. -
Assafoetida. This is the concrete juice of the roots of the Fe.
rala assafoetida, a tree which grows in Persia. To obtain it, the
roots, after the earth is taken away from them, are covered with
leaves to defend them from the sun for forty days; they are then
cut off transvers ly, and the thick milky juice exudes and thickens
on the wound; this when hard is scraped off and another trans-
verse section made. This operation is repeated until the root is
entirely exhausted of juice. The gum is nauseous and bitter, and
as it grows old loses its efficacy. The masses are composed of
grains, of a variegated color; the best color is a pale-red, having
the grains nearly white; the odor should be penetrating, and when
the piece is broken, the fracture ought to bear a marbled appear-
ance. The vessels employed to carry this drug are so scented
with the odor, that they spoil most other goods. Considerable
quantities of it are brought to this market; and it ranks high in
the materia medica of the Chinese physician. Its value is from
$4 to $5 per pecul. -
BAMBoo. The uses of this plant are very numerous; it is em.
ployed for purposes of building and clothing, for food, paper, boats,
masts, sails, ropes, medicines, sweetmeats, beds, fodder, &c. All
these uses are made of it however, only where it is indigenous. It
is exported in considerable quantities, in the shape of canes and
umbrella sticks, &c.
BEEs-wax. This article has been introduced by foreigners
from the Indian Archipelago and Europe, and it has gradually su.
perseded the product of the tallow-tree; Stillingia sebifera. In
the islands where the bees are found, the natives collect the wax
from the nests in the forests, disregarding the honey, which is lit.
tle in quantity and worthless. The islands of Timur and Timur.
laut afford bees-wax in sufficient quantity to form an important
article of export; the Portuguese there send away 20,000 peculs
annually to China and India, at a prime cost of $5 per pecul.
The Chinese use it to form cascs or envelopes for the tallow of
3G -


450 Articles of Import FEB.
the Stillingia, in the manufacture of the candles used in their tem-
ples. The wax when so employed is colored with vermilion.
BETEL NUT. The leaf of the betel pepper, Piper betle, and
the nut of the areca palm, Areca catechu, together constitute
this article, which is improperly called betel nut, and which is
used as a masticatory so universally throughout the east. But as
an article of commerce it is always sold separately, under the
name of ‘betel nut,” so called because always used with the leaf .
af the betel pepper. .
The habit of chewing this compound has extended from the is-
lands, where the plant is found, to the continent of Asia, and it
is now used from the Red sea to the Pacific. The areca nut is
the fruit of a slender palm, not above six inches in diameter and
about thirty feet high. The tree produces fruit from the age of
five to twenty-five years. The nuts resemble a nutmeg in shape,
color and internal structure, but are a little larger and harder.
The annual produce of a single tree is averaged at fourteen pounds;
and the little care requisite in producing it, allows the cultivator to
sell it at the rate of about half a dollar a pecul. In the Deccan,
the expense of rearing the palm is much greater, and the crop
tmore precarious. The betel pepper is the vine from which the
leaf is obtained, and for which alene it is cultivated. The flavor
of the leaf is very peculiar, being between a herbaceous and an
aromatic taste, and is a little pungent. This vine requires a rich
soil where there is abundance of water. The tree on which it is
supported affects the quality and quantity of the produce.
The preparation of the betel nut for use is very simple. The
nut is cut into slices, and wrapped in the raw leaves together
with a quantity of quick-lime, enough to give it a flavor. All clas-
ses of people, male and female, are in the habit of chewing it. “It
sweetens the breath,” so say those who use it, “rectifies and
strengthens the stomach and preserves the teeth;” it also gives the
teeth, lips and gums a dark-red color, which is esteemed a mark
of beauty in proportion to its darkness. Much more can be said
in favor of the use of it, than of tobacco; its narcotic properties
are not so great, and the taste is more pleasant. Persons of rank
carry it prepared for use in splendid cases suspended from their
girdles. Poor people are contented with cases of any kind, pro-
vided they contain the substance itself. A present of one of these
cases is esteemed as a mark of high favor and friendship, and is
valued accordingly. Among some of the inhabitants of the Indian
Archipelago, to refuse, on meeting a friend, to accept the betel nut
is regarded as an offense, and satisfaction is demanded. So in-
terwoven into their ideas, has the practice become, that figures of
beauty are taken from it, and a face is not accounted beautiful, un-
less the mouth be stained of a dirty red round the outside of the lips.
The nuts brought from the coast of Malabar are not so good as
those from the Indian islands, and they are injurious to the health
and destroy the teeth of those who chew them. They are of two
sort, the boiled and the raw ; the one is the nut alone, the other


1834. and Eagort of Canton. 451
the nut cut into slices and boiled with a small quantity of cutch
and then dried. Another method of curing the nuts is to split and
dry them hastily over a fire, or to dry them slowly without split-
ting. - The betel nut is seldom carried to Europe or America,
though the leaf might be employed in dyeing cottons, as it is cheap,
and used for that purpose in India. Most of that imported into
China comes from Java, Malacca and Penang. It varies from
$2 to $3 per pecul. It is prepared for use in the same manner as
in the islands, except that the Chinese color the lime with a red
mixture, -
BENzoir or Benjamin. This resin is the concrete juice of a
small tree, Styrax benzoin, which grows on the plains of Borneo
and Sumatra, in a rich moist soil. Its geographical limits are the
same as the camphor tree, being found only in Borneo Proper and
the territory of the Battaks in Sumatra; but unlike that tree, it
is cultivated. When the plants are seven years old, an incision is
made in the bark, from whence the gum exudes, and is carefully
scraped off. The trees produce the best benzoin in three years;
this first gathering is called head: that produced during the next
eight or ten seasons, and which is inferior in quality, is known by
the name of belly; at the end of the last named period, the tree is
supposed to be worn out, and is cut down and split to pieces, and
all the gum is scraped off from the fraginents of wood; this
last is denominated foot, and is full of sticks and dirt. These va-
rieties bear a price proportionate to their goodness; the first quali-
ty, varying at the emporia, from $50 to $100 per pecul; the se-
cond from $25 to $45; and the worst from $8 to $20 per pecul.
The gum is brought from the interior in large cakes, which
among the natives are standards of value, as metals are in other
countries. These cakes require to be softened by boiling before
they are packed, and care should be taken to free them from exter.
nal impurities. Good benzoin is full of clear, light colored spots,
and when broken appears marbled; it is almost tasteless, but
when rubbed or heated gives off an extremely agreeable odor.
The head only should be selected for Europe; the other kinds are
imported to China and India and used in temples. This is the frank-
incense of the east, but different from the Arabian, which is oliba-
num. It has-been used for incense in the ceremonies of the Roman
Catholic, the Mohammedan, the Hindoo, the Budhistic, and pro-
bably also, of the Israelitish worship. From remote ages, almost
all nations have sought for this substance. The Arabians prize it
more than they do their best olibanum; the Javanese chiefs
smoke it with their tobacco; and rich Chinese often fumigate
their houses with its grateful odor.
Bezoar. This name was first applied to a concretion found in
the stomachs of a goat in Persia, but latterly has been used for
similar substances found in various other animals, as the horse,
boar, camel, &c. That produced by the goat was formerly much
prized as a medicine, sometimes selling for ten times its weight in
gold; but since its constituents have been ascertained, it has ceas.


452 Articles of Import FEB.
ed to be sought after. Different animals produce bezoars, the sub-
stance of which differs often in the same kind of animal, as well
as in dissimilar species. The famed oriental bezoar is formed
of bile and resin; other kinds are found to be made of hair, others
of wood, and some principally of magnesia and phosphorus. The
true bezoar from Persia is counterfeited so well by pipe-clay and
ox-gall that even those have been deceived who procure the gen-
uine from the animal. The genuine throws off only a small scale
when a hot needle is thrust into it; when put into hot water it re-
mains unchanged; when rubbed on chalk, the trace should be
yellow, but green on quick lime. That found in the camel is high-
ly esteemed as a yellow pigment by the Hindoos. The cow be-
zoar is valued in this market at from $20 to $25 a catty, and is
used by the Chinese solely as a medicine. All bezoars are caus-
ed by diseases of the animals which produce them, and are formed
by continual accretions to a center nodule.
Bicho DE MAR or biche-de-mer. This slug, (Onchidium ?) as
its name imports, is a product of the sea, and resembles that often
seen in damp places on land. It forms the most important arti-
cle of commerce between the islands of the Indian Archipelago and
China, excepting perhaps pepper. It is found on all the islands
from New Holland to Sumatra, and also on most of those in the
Pacific. It is produced in the greatest abundance on small coral
islands, especially those to the south and east of the Sooloo group.
Among the islanders it is known by the name of tripang; the
Chinese at Canton call it hoy-shum (hae-shin). It is an ill look-
ing animal, and has but few powers of locomotion in common
with other gasteropoda. It is sometimes two feet long; but its
common length is from four to ten inches, and its diameter two. Its
tentaculae are short, and when the animal is captured are folded
up under its body. It is taken with the hand by natives, who of.
ten dive for it; and after it has been cleansed, dried and smok-
ed, it is fit for the markets. For a long time the Chinese were the
sole carriers of the article; but recently foreigners have engaged
in the trade, and found it profitable. In the markets it appears
hard and rigid, and has a dirty brown color. The Chinese use it
by itself, or as an ingredient in other dishes, and in large quanti-
ties. The varieties into which they divide it are about thirty,
varying in price from $80 down to $1.3 per pecul. About 7000
peculs come annually from Macassar, and much more than that
from Manila.
Baps' Nests. These, which owe their celebrity only to the
whimsical luxury of the Chinese, are brought principally from Java
and Sumatra ; though they are found on most of the rocky islets
of the Indian Archipelago. The nest is the habitation of a small
swallow, named (from the circumstance of having an edible
house,) Hirundo esculenta. They are composed of a mucilaginous
substance, but as yet have never been analyzed sufficiently accu-
rately to show the constituents; externally, they resemble ill con-
cocted, fibrous isinglass, and are of a white color, inclining to red ;


1834. and Export of Canton. 453
their thickness is little more than that of a silver spoon, and the
weight from a quarter to half an ounce. When dry, they are
brittle and wrinkled; the size is near that of a goose egg. Those
that are dry, white, and clean are the most valuable. They are
packed in bundles with split rattans run through them to pre-
serve the shape. Those procured after the young are fledged,
and denominated foot, are not saleable in China.
The quality of the nests varies according to the situation and
extent of the caves, and the time at which they are taken. If pro-
cured before the eggs have been laid, the nests are of the best kind;
if they contain eggs only, they are still valuable, but if the young
are in the nests or have left them, the whole are then nearly worth-
less, being dark colored, streaked with blood, and intermixed with
feathers and dirt. The nests are procurable twice every year; the
best are found in deep, damp caves, which if not injured will
continue to produce indefinitely. It was once thought that the
caves near the sea-coast were the most productive ; but some of
the most profitable yet found, are situated fifty miles in the interior.
This fact seems to be against the opinion that the nests are com-
posed of the spawn of fish or of biche de mar.
The method of procuring these nests resembles somewhat that
of catching birds practiced on the Orkney isles. Some of the caves
are so precipitous, that no one, but those accustomed to the em-
ployment from their youth, can obtain the nests, “being only ap-
proachable,” says Crawfurd, “by a perpendicular descent of many
hundred feet by ladders of bamboo and rattan, over a sea rolling
violently against the rocks. When the mouth of the cave is at-
tained, the perilous task of taking the nests must often be per-
formed by torch-light, by penetrating into recesses of the rock,
where the slightest slip would be instantly fatal to the adventurers,
who see nothing below them but the turbulent surf making its
way into the chasms of the rock.” Such is the price paid to gra-
tify luxury.
After they are obtained, they are separated from feathers and
dirt, are carefully dried and packed, and are then fit for the mar-
ket. The Chinese, who are the only people that purchase them
for their own use, bring them in junks to this market, where they
command extravagant prices; the best or while kind often being
worth $4000 per pecul, which is nearly twice their weight in silver.
The middling kind is worth from $1200 to $1800, and the worst or
those procured after fledging, $150 or $200 per pecul. The most
part of the best kind is sent to Peking for the use of the court. It
appears, therefore, that this curious dish is only an article of ex-
pensive luxury among the Chinese; the Japanese do not use it
at all, and how the former people acquired the habit of using it is
only less singular than their persevering in it. They consider the
birds' nests as a great stimulant and tonic, but their best quality,
perhaps, is their being perfectly harmless. The labor bestowed
to render them fit for the table is enormous; every feather, stick
or impurity of any kind is carefully removed; and then after un-


1834. and Export of Canton. 455
pieces and dried for exportation; has internally a whitish co-
lor, but externally it is rough and of a reddish color; it has a
pungent and bitterish taste, and a slight aromatic smell. It is ex-
ported to Bombay, and from thence to Persia and Arabia; it is
said to be used for medical purposes, and also to preserve clothes
from insects. The price is about $6 per pecul.
CARDAMoMs. There are several varieties of these, produced by
various plants in different countries. The lesser and greater
are, however, the principal distinctions made in this article.
The lesser cardamoms are obtained from a small shrub, Elettaria
cardamomum, which grows on the coast of Malabar. They are
the capsules of the plant, and merely require drying to be ready
for sale. They have a sweet aromatic flavor; and the seeds when
chewed impart a gratcf il pungency to the Inouth. The capsules
have a bright yellow color, a pungent smell, and when good are
plump and broken with difficulty. They should be well dried.
In the mountains where the cardamom grows, the natives fell and
burn trees to cause others to grow ; wherever the ashes fall, it
is said that this plant will spring up, and that those cultivated are
of an inferior quality. The greater cardamoms are the fruit of the
Amomum cardamomum, a tree which grows in China, Ceylon,
Java, and other places. The seeds are of a triangular shape
and of a black color; and longer and larger than those of the other
kind. They are inferior in pungency and flavor to the lesser, and
only used when the other cannot be obtained. Both are employed
for culinary purposes among the Chinese, by whom alone they are
imported. The lesser cardamoms are carried to Europe for medici-
nal and other uses. .
Cassia. This of three kinds; cassia lignea which is the bark
of the tree, cassia buds, and cassia fistula or pods; the latter of
these is usually known by the name of senna. Cassia lignea is
the substance commonly called cassia, and is exported from China
to all parts of the world. It is the decorticated bark of the Laurus
cassia, a large tree which grows in Japan and China in great quan-
tities; the tree is also found in the northerly islands of the Indian
Archipelago. The bark is stripped off by running a knife longitu-
dinally along the branch, on both sides, and then gradually loosen-
ing it; after it is taken off, it is suffered to lie for twenty-four
hours, during which time it undergoes a kind of fermentation, and
the epidermis is easily scraped off. The bark soon dries into the
quilled shape in which it comes to market. Thin pieces, having
an agreeable taste, a brownish red color and a tolerably smooth
surface are the best kind ; that which is small and broken, is of an
inferior quality. The cassia brought from Ceylon and Malabar,
is inferior to the Chinese, more liable to foul packing, thicker and
darker colored and less aromatic. The Chinese-cassia is sewed
up in mats, usually two or more rolls in each mat, and a pound in
a roll; it is easily distinguished from cinnamon, which it resem-
bles, for it is smaller quilled, breaks shorter, and is less pungent.
The trees do not however grow in the same countries, and there.


456 Articles of Import FEB.
fore the liability to mistake will happen only distant markets.
Cassia fistula is the plant that produces the cassia pods; this
grows in China, and the East Indies, but that from Egypt and
South America has superseded it. Cassia buds are not obtained
from the same tree as the cassia lignea, but are the fleshy recep-
tacles of the seeds of the cinnamon tree. They bear some resem-
blance to a clove, and when fresh, possess a fine cinnamon flavor.
Those that are plump and fresh and free from stalks and dirt
are considered the best. It is probable, however, that much of
this article is procured from the cassia tree, since it is found in this
country, where the true cinnamon tree is not knowr If the
buds are packed in the same bundles with the bark, the flavor of
both are improved. The relative value of cassia bark and buds
is as 8 to 5; this varies however according to the quantity in
market.
CAssia oil is obtained from the leaves of the cassia tree by dis-
tillation ; and is used as a medicine, under the name of oleum ma-
labathri. It is easily tested by putting it on the hand, where it will
evaporate slowly, and any foreign substance in it will thus be de-
tected. The leaves are exported under the name of folia malaba-
thri. There is hardly a product of the east that is more useful than
the cassia tree. The wood, the bark, the leaves, the buds, and
the oil, are all in request for various purposes in carpentry, medi-
cine and cookery. The price of cassia varies from $8 to $10 per
pecul; the buds are generally a little advance of that, and the oil
is from $14 to $2 per catty.
CHINA Root. This is the root of the Smilar China, a climbing
plant. The roots are jointed, knobbed, thick, of a brown color,
and break short; when cut, the surface is smooth, close, and
glossy; but if old and wormv, dust flies from it when broken. The
market price varies from $33 to $4 per pecul. It is used by the
Chinese extensively as a medicine, and is exported to India for
the same purpose. -
CHINAware, or Porcelain. Very little of this ware is now ex-
ported. When the productions of the east were first carried round
the cape of Good Hope, the porcelain of China bore an enormous
price, and the profits of the first shipments were great. But the
process of manufacturing it having been ascertained, the Euro-
pean nations began to make it, and soon rivaled the Chinese.
Chinaware is sold in sets, consisting of a table set of 270 pieces at
from 12 to 75 taels, a breakfast set of 20 pieces at three taels, a
long tea set of 101 pieces at 11 to 13 taels, and a short tea set of
49 pieces from 5 to 6 teals. Flower pots, vases, jars, fruit bas-
kets, table ornaments, &c., are also made of porcelain to any pat-
term by the Chinese. -
Cloves. These are the unopened flowers of a large tree, Ca.
ryophyllus aromaticus, which grows in the Molucca islands, and
is cultivated to a very limited extent in Sumatra and Mauritius.
The tree resembles the pear tree in shape; the bark is smooth and
adheres closely to the wood; the leaves are reddish on the upper
---
• 


l634. and Export of Canton. 457
and green on the under side; and the whole plant, like the cin-
namon tree, has a strong aromatic odor. When an exotic, the
tree does not begin to produce till 9 or 10 years of age, but in its
native soil, is usually productive at 5 or 6. The buds appear
in the beginning of the rainy season, about the first of May, and
during the four following months are perfected: they are green at
first, then yellow, and finally, when ripe, change to a blood-red co-
lor. Soon after this, the flowers open, and in three weeks the seeds
are fully ripe. They are gathered very carefully by the hand and
by crooked sticks, in order that the trees may not be injured. Sir
T. Herbert gives the following fanciful description of the buds of
the clove. “It blossoms early, but becomes exceedingly incon-
stant in complexion, from a virgin white varying into other colors;
for in the morn, it shows a pale green, in the meridian, a distem-
pered red, and sets in blackness. The cloves manifest themselves
at the extremity of the branches, and in their growing evaporate
such sense-ravishing odors, as if a compendium of nature's sweet-
est gums were there extracted and united.” They are cured by
placing them on hurdles over a slow fire for a few days, and af.
terwards in the sun, until they are thoroughly dried. The pro-
duce varies in different years; the average quantity for an orchard
is from 6 to 10 lbs. from each tree; some trees have produced
150 lbs. in one season. The ordinary age is 70 years in Amboyna,
and in their native isles about 90. In commerce, there are four
varieties of the clove; the common, the female, the royal, and the
wild or rice clove. The two latter are smaller and more scarce
than the other kinds. The best cloves are large, heavy, have a hot
taste, and an oily feel. Those which have had the essential oil ex-
tracted, are shriveled and usually want the knob at the top.–The
clove trade is in the hands of the Dutch, and has been a monopo-
ly ever since they obtained supremacy in the Moluccas: the cul-
tivation of the tree is restricted to the single island of Amboyna.
Cloves are now 55 per cent. dearer than when first brought round
the cape of Good Hope, and are sold to the consumer at an ad-
vance of 1258 per cent. on first cost of production! The price for
Molucca cloves in this market is from 828 to $30 per pecul; for
those from Mauritius, $20 to $24 a pecul. .*
Mother cloves are a larger and inferior description, of late years
imported from the straits of Malacca. The price fluctuates great-
ly according to the supply; from $10 to $12 per pecul, however, is
the average. We believe it is used by the Chinese for scents.
OiL of Cloves. This is procured by distillation, and is export-
ed for various uses in the arts. If it be suspected to be adulterated
by any other oil, it can be proved by dropping into it spirit of wine,
when the two will separate; or by setting it on fire, when the
smell of any other will be detected. The color when pure is of
a reddish-brown, which gradually becomes darker by age.
Cochine AL. This insect is brought to China from England
and Mexico, and is used for dyeing silk goods, crapes, &c. The
insect itself is about one-third of an inch in length, and has been
3H


458 Articles of Import Fig.
materially improved by culture from what it was in its wild state ;
it lives solely on the leaves of the Cactus cochinilifer, a species of
prickly pear. Attempts have been made to raise it in India, Java,
and Spain but with little success. The climate and situation of
China and Japan being similar to Mexico, it is probable that the
cultivation of the plant and domestication of the insect would be
successful in these countries. In selecting cochineal, care should
be taken that the black color has not been occasioned by art; this
deception may be discovered by the bad smell of the article. The
insects are divided into the wild and the domesticated, and are col-
lected thrice in a year. A watery infusion of cochinea' dyes scar-
let; an alcoholic infusion produces a deep crimson ; while an
alkaline, gives a deep purple color. It is occasionally imported to
China from Mexico vià. Manila, and is called ungarbled, to distin-
guish it from that brought from England, which bears the name of
arbled. Garbling is the term given to the process of repacking
it free from all impurities. Garbled cochineal is valued at $280,
or $300 per pecul, and ungarbled at from $180 to $200.
Copper. This metal is found in Persia, Sumatra, Borneo and
Japan. It formed an export to England from Persia formerly,
but is now sent to the Indian presidencies. In the island of Bor-
neo, copper has been lately discovered; and it has been known a
long time in Sumatra and Timur. The utensils made of this me-
tal in those islands, always contain some iron, and the bars or
cakes into which it is cast when sold for unalloyed copper, re-
quire much labor to make them pure and malleable; the ore is so
rich as to produce half its weight of pure copper. The copper
found in Japan contains gold in alloy; it occurs in the market in
small bars, six inches long, flat on one side and convex on the
other, weighing 4 or 5 lbs. each; this copper is the most valuable
of any found in Asia. South American copper is brought to this
coast, but not latterly to the market in Canton; as it fetches a high-
er price at Lintin for rennittance to India. The price so obtained
is from $19 to $22 per pecul. There is a natural alloy of several
metals found in the interior of China, known under the name of
white copper, which is used by the natives in great quantities.
The constituents are not known, but copper and iron are probably
the chief. It is used for dish covers, which when new and po-
lished look almost as well as silver. -
CoRAL is brought from all the islands of the Indian Archipelago,
and is here wrought into many ornaments. It sells from $40 to
$60 per pecul according to the color, density, and size of the frag-
ments. When made into buttons, it is used among the Chinese
as insignia of office.
Cotton. Of this import we need only enumerate the different
kinds. The raw cotton is brought mostly from Bombay and Ben-
gal in English ships; it sells from 9 to 13 taels per pecul. Ex-
cept sheetings, which are from America, cotton piece goods come
principally, from England, the chief articles of which are cam-
brics, muslims, chintzes and long-clothes. In selecting these goods


460 Articles of Import FEB.
in making their mixtures. It is the concrete juice of the Calamus
rotang, a large rattan which grows in Borneo and Sumatra.
It is found in the market either in oval drops, or in large and im-
pure masses, ccmposed of several tears. That which is good is of
a bright crimson when powdered, and if held up to the light in
masses is a little translucent. The tears are usually the firmest,
and the most resinous and pure. If it is black when made fine, or
very friable in the lump, it is inferior. It is often adulterated
with other gums; but that which is genuine melts readily and
burns wholly away; is scarcely soluble in water, but fluent in alco-
hol. Its uses are various in painting, medicine, varnishing, and
other arts. The best is procured at Banjermassin in Borneo; and
is brought to this market in reeds; its price varies from $80 to
$100 a pecul. The Chinese hold dragon's blood in much estima-
tion, and are the principal consumers of it in the East.
EBCNY. This is the heart wood of the Diospyrus ebenus, a tree
growing in Mauritius and other islands of the Indian ocean. The
best wood is of a jet black, the texture compact, free from cracks
and not worm-eaten. The outside wood should be ail taken off.
There are other kinds of wood resembling ebony in external appear-
ance, which are often substituted for it. The price of Mauritius
ebony is about $6 a pecul, and of Ceylon and India about $24 per
ecul.
p ELEPHANT's TEETH. These are obtained in South Africa,
Siam, Burmah, &c. They should be chosen without flaws, solid,
straight and white; for if cracked or broken at the point or decayed
inside, they are less valuable. The largest and best weigh fºom
5 to 9 to a pecul, and decrease in size to 25 in a pecul. The cut-
tings and fragments are also of value sufficient to make them an
article of trade. Elephants' teeth when manufactured are called
ivory. The number of articles which the Chinese make of it,
and the demand for them on account of their exquisite workman-
ship, render its consumption very grº-r; and the quantity is gra-
dually decreasing. The circular balls which the Chinese make
of ivory, as well as their miniature boats, are neat specimens of
carved work. From a quantity of ivory not weighing over three
pounds they will make a toy worth a hundred dollars. The larg-
est teeth are valued at $90 a pecul, and the cuttings at $70. Bur-
mah and Siam afford the greatest part of those which are brought
Chinn.
Fish-MAws. These are the stomachs of fishes, and are used as
an article of luxury among the Chinese. They are of a cartilagi-
nous nature; and when properly dried are fit for the market. lf
they become damp, they will decay and are then worthless. They
are brought in junks from the Indian islands; the price is from
$50 to $70 per pecul.
FLINTs, which are uncut, are imported from Europe at 50 cents,
and sometimes one dollar per pecul.
GAMBIER. This is the inspissated juice of a trailing plant,
Funis uncatus, which grows in the more western and poorer is.


1834. and Export of Canton. 461
lands of the Indian Archipelago. It was once called Terra Japoni-
ca, and often confounded with that substance. The plant is culti-
vated in dry situations; the seedlings are transplanted when eight
or nine inches high; and at the end of the first year the leaves
are ready to boil, in order to extract the juice. It is brought to
market in square cakes, the best of which have a white, clear ap-
pearance, but the inferior are brownish. The plants grow eight
or ten feet high, and yield for twenty years. Gambier in consider-
able quantities is imported to China from Java and other islands.
The trade is in the hands of the Chinese, who pay at the emporia
$1 or $2 per pecul. One of its principal uses among the islanders
is as a masticatory with the betel nut. The taste is first bitter, but
when it has remained in the mouth some time, agreeably sweet.
It is used in China for tanning leather, which it renders porous
and rotten.
GAMboGE. This is so named from the country Camboja, which
produces the tree, Stalagmitis gambogioides; it is also found in
Ceylon (where it distils spontaneously), China and Siam, in which
latter country the tree is wounded to obtain the gum-resin. The
juice is inspissated in the sun, and made into rolls which have a
brownish-yellow color and a smooth surface. If when rubbed up.
on the wet nail, the color be a bright lemon, and no grittiness be
felt, it is good; when burned the flame is white, and the residuum
a grayish ash. The large, gritty and dark colored pieces are of an
inferior quality. Gamboge is used as a beautiful pigment and as
a medicine; and is carried in considerable quantities from China
and India to the west. It varies from $70 to $75 a pecul.
GalANGAL. This root is obtained from two different plants, the
greater from the Kaempferia galanga, the smaller from the Ma-
ranta galanga. The greater is a tough, woody root, with a thin
bark, and full of knobby aircles on the outside. It is bitterish, less
arounatic and less valuable than the smaller. This latter is a root
of a reddish brown outside, and pale red within. The roots are
rarely over two inches in length, extremely firm, though light.
The best is full and plump, has a bright color, a hot, acrid, peppery
taste, and an aromatic smell. The smaller, which should always
be obtained if possible, sells for $33 to $4 per peoul. It is used
principally in cookery.
GINGER, PREs ER v Ed. This is a sweetmeat made of the tender roots
of the ginger plant, Zingiber officinalis, and when good has a
bright appearance, a dark yellow color, and is somewhat transluc-
ent. If the roots are old, the conserve will be stringy, tough and
tasteless. Considerable quantities of preserved ginger are carried to
Hamburgh and Singapore; to the latter place for reexportation to
the continent of Europe. -
GINseng. This is the dried root of the Panar quinquefolia.
It is obtained in Tartary, and also in America, from which latter
country, it is exported to China. It is generally considered by the
Chinese physicians as a panacea. All the ginseng growing in
Tartary is the property of the emperor, and he sells a quantity


1834. and Erport of Canton. 463
burned, it throws off much sulphurcous smoke. The market
price is from $8 to $11 per pecul. ~
HoRNs and Bones of various animals are brought to China in
junks from the adjacent countries and islands, and form an im-
portant article of import with the native vessels. The horns are
made into handles, buttons, and other useful articles; and the
bones are burned into lime. In a single year, 502 peculs have been
brought to Canton. -
INDIA INk. This is the only ink used by the Chinese. It is
made of lump-black and glue, size or gum, and formed into cakes
or sticks, which are often perfumed and gilded. Good ink is of
a shining black, and free from all grittiness, which last particular
can be ascertained by rubbing it on the wet nail. It was once
erroneously supposed that India ink was made of the black fluid
found in the cuttle fish, after being inspissated and purified.
IRoN in bars, rods, and scraps has lately become an article of
importance in this market. Bar iron from 1 to 3 inches wide, and
rod of + inch and less, are the common sizes imported. Bar is
worth from $1.20 to $1.40 per pecul; rod from $2:50 to $2; and
scrap about $1.50 per pecul.
LAcquerrid warr. This ware was formerly exported in con-
siderable quantities, but owing to the liability of injury, and the
little demand for it in foreign markets, the exportation has dwind-
led to a mere trifle. The articles now sent to England and the
United States consist of those which have always been in request,
as fans, waiters, boxes, tea-boards, &c. The patterns worked on
them affect the sale, and the least mark spoils the varnish. The
best kind of ware comes from Japan, but it is rather difficult to be
obtained. The varnish with which this ware is covered has not
been successfully imitated in Europe.
LEAD. Much of this metal is imported in the form of pig and
sheet lead. The market price varies from $4 to $5 per pecul.
Lead, comparatively speaking, is very scarce in Asia and the In-
dian islands. Most of that which is used comes from Europe and
America. Perhaps the low state of civilization in the countries of
Asia has left undiscovered many treasures in the bosom of the
earth, which may be brought to light in after times, when the
states inhabiting this continent shall have other objects of attention,
besides war and conquest. Lead has not yet been found in the
islands of the Indian ocean ; but New Holland, New Guinea and
Borneo yet remain unexplored. A considerable part of that im-
ported is made into paints by oxydation, and exported again as red
and white lead. The red lead sells for about $1.1 per pecul, and
the white at $10. The lining of tea-chests consumes a propor-
tion of the lead brought to this country. The mode of making the
sheet is very simple and expeditious. Two smooth stones or covered
tiles are placed near the melted lead, and the workman, holding
the upper one by its side, with the opposite edge resting on the
lower stone, pours the liquid metal on the under one, and then
drops that he holds in his hand; the sluects are inade into the


1834, and Export of Canton. 465.
a paler color than the true, and the hair is uneven. The degree
of purity and strength of this drug can be ascertained by mace-
rating it for a few days in spirits of wine, to which it imparts
a strong scent. Musk is adulterated with many substances, and
every bag should be opened. When good musk is rubbed on pa-
per, the trace is of a bright yellow color, and free from any gritti-
ness. The price varies from $65 to $80 a catty, according to the
quality. It is used for perfumery and medicine. The musk-ox
found in North America also produces this substance of an inſerior
quality. That which comes from Russia is very inferior to the
Uhinese, and is probably obtained from a different animal.
Musk seed. These are the fruit of Hibiscus abelmoschus, which
grows in China and other countries. The Arabians use them to give
flavor to their coffee. The seeds are flat, kidney-shaped, about
the size of a large pin head, and have a considerable odor of musk,
with a slightly aromatic, bitterish taste. The black and musty
seeds are not good; a grayish color is the natural one. They are
now brought to Europe from South America and the West Indies.
ſyRRh. This celebrated gum is brought from Arabia and
Abyssinia, and is used by the Chinese for incense and perfumes.
It exudes spontaneously from a tree of the genus Acacia, or is
obtained by incision. It occurs in irregular grains of different sizes
up to that of a horse bean. The grains or tears are resinous,
greasy, and easy to be broken, of a reddish-brown color, with an
acrid, warm and bitter taste. The pieces ought to be clear, light,
and unctuous, but it has usually other gums mixed with it. The
price varies from $4 to $18 per pecul in the Canton market.
NANKEENs. This is a kind of cotton cloth, so named from Nan-
king, the city where the reddish threads were originally made.
They are divided in Company's nankeens and the narrow ; the
former are the finest and most esteemed. Nankeens are also manu-
factured in Canton and other parts of the empire, and in the East
Indies. Those made in China, still maintain their superiority in
color and texture over the English manufacture. The price va-
ries from $60 to $90 per hundred pieces.
NUTMegs. These are the fruit of a large tree, Myristica mos-
chata, which grows in the Banda isles; it is fifty feet in height, and
well branched. In its general appearance it resembles the clove
tree; the bark is smooth and ash colored, the leaves green above
and gray beneath, and if rubbed in the hand leave a gratefully
aromatic odor. The sap has the property of staining cloth indeli-
bly. The tree bears buds, flowers and fruit at the same time. The
flower is not unlike the lily of the valley. The fruit in size and
appearance resembles the nectarine; it is marked with a furrow,
like the peach, and as it ripens has the same delicate blush. The
following description by sir Thomas Herbert is somewhat fanciful,
and at the same time true. “The nutmeg, like trees most excel.
lent, is not very lofty in height, scarce rising as high as the cherry;
by some it is resembled to the peach, but varies in form of leaf and
grain, and affects more compass. The nut is clothed with a de-
3 I


466 Articles of Import FEs.
fensive husk, like those of a baser quality, and resembles the thick
rind of a walnut, but at full ripeness discovers her naked purity,
and the mace chastely entwines (with a vermilion blush.) her
“udeared fruit and sister, which hath a third coat, and both of them
breathe out most pleasing smells. The mace in a few days, (like
choice beauties,) by the sun's flames becomes tawny ; yet in that
complexion best pleases the rustic gatherer.” The plant bears
three crops in a year, but the fruit requires nine months to become
perfect. The nutmeg has three coverings, which are all of different
textures. The first is the outside coat, which is about half an inch
thick, and when ripe cracks and opens of itself; the second is the
reticulated mace, which appears through the fissures of the first,
and has a bright scarlet color; the third is a hard, black shell,
which incloses the nutmeg. Good trees will produce from ten to
twelve pounds of nuts-and mace annually; but the average of an
orchard is 65 oz. avoirdupois, or about two peculs to an acre.
Nutmegs of a lightish-gray color, a strong, fragrant smell, an aro-
matic taste, large, oily, and round, and of a firm texture, are the
best. The holes made by insects in eating into the kernel, are of.
ten neatly filled up, which can be ascertained by the inferior weight.
They are packed in layers of dry chunam. In commerce, nut-
megs are divided into royal and queen, the former are of an ob-
long, and the latter of a round shape. The trade in this article,
like that of cloves, is a monopoly in the hands of the Dutch. They
have entered into treaty with the petty rajahs of the Molucca is-
lands to destroy all the trees in their dominions, for which they pay
them a small annuity. In the Banda isles, to which the cultiva-
tion is restricted, the Dutch are obliged to import slaves to tend the
trees. Any person who engages in the spice trade illicitly, is liable
to the severest penalties. Yet it is computed that 60,000 lbs. of
nutmegs, and 15,000 lbs. of mace, are clandestinely exported every
year. The prices paid by government for the cultivation are fixed,
and during a course of years, they have been obliged to raise the
compensation, till at present, they pay five times as much for the
nutmegs as when the trade was first opened. This strange and
unnatural mode of operation has forced the raising of the nutmeg
tree at Bencoolen in Sumatra, but at a great disadvantage. In
the Chinn market, nutmegs sell from $120 to $140 a pecul.
Oml of Nutmegs. Nutmegs produce both an essential and a
volatile oil; the former of which is known under the name of
Banda soap. It should be free from impurities, and of a pleasant,
aromatic smell. The volatile oil is not known in commerce.
The nutmegs from which the oil has been extracted are sometimes
offered for sale, but they are of no value. -
OLIEANUM. This is the frankincense of the ancients, and is
used in China, as in other countries, for incense in temples and
perfumery in houses. The Greeks, Romans, Persians, Israelites,
Hindoos and Budhists have used this substance in the various cere-
monies of their religious worship. Olibanum is the gum that
exudes spontaneously from the Juniperus lycia, a large tree which


1834. and Export of Canton. 467.
grows in Arabia and India. The drops have a pale reddish color,
a strong and somewhat unpleasant smell; a pungent and bitter
taste, and when chewed adhere to the teeth and give the saliva a
milky color. If laid on a hot iron, the gum takes fire and burns
with a pleasant fragrance, leaving a black residuum. In market,
olibanum is seen in tears of a pink color, brittle and adhesive ; the
boxes each contain one cwt. Garbled olibanum is valued at $6 per
pecul, and the ungarbled at $2 or $3 per pecul in the Canton market.
Opium. This is the concrete juice of the Papaver somniferum,
a species of poppy cultivated in India and Turkey. The cultiva-
tion of it is a strict government monopoly in British India; in
Malwa and other native states it is free, but subject to heavy du-
ties in 1ts transit to the coast for exportation. That raised in
Patna and Benares is superior to the Malwa, and both are prefer.
red by the Chinese to the Turkey opium. Good opium is mode-
rately firm in texture, capable of receiving an impression from the
finger; of a dark yellow color when held in the light, but nearly
black in the mass, with a strong smell and free from grittiness.
That produced in different countries, however, varies considera.
bly, and experience alone can determine the best article. The
value increases for a short time by age; but this soon ceases
to be the case, and Turkey opium in particular, deteriorates unless
carefully preserved from the air. Opium is adulterated with
leaves, dirt, and other substances; if very soft it is not usually good.
The great consumption of this drug among the Chinese, has made
the opium trade a very important branch of commerce. About
fourteen millions of dollars' worth have been annually sold to them
for a few years past, and the demand is increasing. The trade is
carried on by means of ships stationed at Lintin; here the opium
is stored, and the owner gives his orders for its delivery to the buy.
er, who always pays the money before receiving the drug. The
trade has ever been (nominally at least,) an object of dislike to the
Chinese authorities, and many ineffectual edicts have been issued
against it. The opium brought from India varies from $600 to
$700 a chest, and the Turkey from $620 to $680 a pecul.
PEPPER. This spice is the fruit of the Piper nigrum, a hardy
vine found in Sumatra, Malabar and Malacca. The cultivation
of it is very simple and easy. Soil on primitive rocks produces the
best pepper. The fruit is collected semiannually; the vine bears
when three years old, and continues to do so till twenty, and lives
to the age of thirty years. As soon as the fruit has changed from
a green to a red color, it is picked and put into tubs, and afterwards
separated from the stalks, and when dried thoroughly, it is then rea-
dy for market. Pepper is known in commerce under two names,
the white and black. White pepper grows from the same seed as
the black, and is deprived of its skin by being immersed in water
and rubbed between the hands. It is but little used; the difference of
price not being sufficient to pay for the extra labor. Good, black
pepper has a very pungent smell, an extremely acrid and hot taste.
That which has large grains and smooth skin, is the best. The pep.


470 . . Articles of Import FEE.
afford a great variety of beautiful and rare shells, such as the cab-
bage shell, the nautilus, the trumpet shell, the ducal mantle,
&c. The greatest part of all the genera known can be found in
great abundance in this market, and purchased at reasonable
prices.—Beside shells, as objects of natural history, insects are
also procurable at Canton, well preserved; they are mostly hard.
winged insects as beetles; butterflies and other classes are also
gathered, especially those which are gay. Precious stones are:
seen in small quantities, but rather inferior; cornelians and agates
are the most common. Other minerals, especially limestones, are
often seen cut into fantastic shapes; but these specimens being
always lacquered, are spoiled for natural objects. Birds or fishes
are seldom seen preserved. -
Sea weed. Several species of Fucus are brought to Canton in
junks, and used as an article of food among the poorer classes.
They are eaten both raw and cooked.
Shark's FINs. The fins of the shark are sought for from the
Indian ocean to the Sandwich islands to supply this market. The
chief supply is from Bombay and the Persian gulf. They are fat,
cartilaginous, and when cooked, esteemed by the Chinese as a
stimulant and tonic. They should be well dried and kept from
any moisture. About five hundred pieces are contained in a pecul.
The price is from $20 to $45 per pecul.
Silk. The importance of this article demands for it a full and
minute description, which we shall defer for a future paper. -
SKINs were formerly one of the most profitable articles tha
could be brought to the Chinese market, but their high price and
the introduction of woolen goods has materially lessened their
importation. Seal and otter are the most in request, the latter
selling as high as 840 a skin. Beaver, fox, and rabbit skins are in
demand, bnt the supply is limited. Many skins are brought to
Peking from Siberia by the Russians. -
SMALTs. This is an impure oxyd of cobalt united with potash.
In the mass it is not much used, but when ground fine is employed
in coloring glass and porcelain. The powder is of a fine azure
blue, and known under the name of powder blue. The demand
is but limited; the price is from 850 to $90 per pecul.
Soy. This is a condiment made of a species of bean which grows
in China and Japan. To make it, the beans are boiled soft, and
then an equal quantity of wheat or barley is added; after this has
thoroughly fermented, a quantity of salt and three times as much
water as the beans were at first, are added. The whole compound
is now left for two or three months and then pressed and strained.
Good soy has an agreeable taste, and if shaken in a tunbler, lines
the vessel with a lively yellowish-brown froth; the color in the
vessel is nearly black. It improves much by age."
SPELTER. This is the impure zinc, used in the manufacture of
brass. It is in plates of half an inch thick, of a whitish-blue color.
The Chinese import it but little, the mines found in their own
country furnishing them with a supply. It sells at $44 per pecul.


1834. and Export of Canton. 471
- Steel. Swedish and English are the kinds usually imported.
The quantity brought is increasing annually ; and probably the
demand will be greater every year, as the use of it becomes better
known. From $4 to $5 per tub is the usual market price.
Srockfish. These are dried fish brought from Germany and
England, cured without the use of salt. In appearance, when
preserved, they resemble codfish. The quantity brought is small;
the price is about 85% per pecul.
Sugar. This is the manufactured product of the juice of the
Saccharum officinale, or sugar cane. From all the notices that can
be obtained from ancient history, it is very probable that China was
the first country in which the sugar cane was cultivated. Its na-
tive country is the southern part of the continent of Asia, and its
properties have been well known by the inhabitants for many ages.
Among the Chinese, the cultivation of it is carried on to an extent
sufficient to supply their own wants and also to form an article of
export. The varieties of the cane are several, but most of those
that are indigenous have a reddish juice, which renders the sugar
unsaleable. The only one cultivated is the same as that which
grows in the West Indies. The process of manufacturing it is sim-
ple and laborious; the machinery is coarse, and the labor perform-
ed mostly by human strength. In the Indian islands, the manu-
facture is in the hands of the Chinese, the natives supplying them
with the cane. The natives, however, make a coarse sugar for
their own use, called jaggery. The sugar exported from China is
principally in a crystalized state, and therefore usually called sugar
candy. This is carried to India in great quantities, and its purity
and beauty have been long and justly esteemed. -
TEA, which now constitutes an important branch of commerce
throughout the world, must be reserved for a future number.
THREAD. Gold and silver thread is imported into China from
England and Holland. It is used in the borders of fine goods, in
ornamenting ladies' dresses, and in other similar objects. The
quantity imported is great; the English sells for from $36 to $40
per pecul.
TIN. This metal is found very abundant and of a pure quali-
ty in the island of Banca. It is cast into ingots weighing from 20
to 60 lbs.: the purity of these bars is superior to those which are
made of tin from the mines in Malacca. All that is of a superior
quality which is brought to China in bars is called “Banca tin,'
while the inferior is known as Straits tin.” The former sells for
about $17, and the latter for $14 or $15 a pecul. Plate tin is brought
from England and America in boxes, containing from 80 to 120
plates, and sells for about $10 per box.
Tortoise shell. This is the crustaceous covering of the Tes.
tudo imbricata, an animal found on the shores of most of the Indian
islands. The common name is hawk's bill tortoise. The shell is
thicker, clearer and more variegated than that of any other species,
and constitutes the sole value of the animal. It is heart-form, and
consists of thirteen inner with twenty-five marginal divisions.


474 Free Trade with China. FE8,
quences than attend the use of wine and spirits under a moral re-
straint. There are men who wallow in drunkenness in all coun-
tries. The introduction of opium is easy ; it is universally conveyed
from the junks by being carried on shore in small balls concealed
about the person, and is sufficiently valuable to recompense the
chance of detection. How is this with broadcloth, calicoes, cot-
ton, iron, and lead, &c., &c. 7 And are not the Chinese, a happy,
thriving, and contented people without these articles? Is it neces-
sary for them to export their own manufactures or the produce of
their own soil 1 The one has almost entirely ceased, even from
Canton, the other only exists in the form of “tea;' but this is far
too valuable an article in its transit through China, both as an em-
ployment to the people, and a source of revenue to provincial of.
ficers, for the government to permit it to be exported nearer the
region of its growth, unless compelled to do so by “ British can-
non;” and who will venture to uphold such a system, or say we
have a right to make a nation trade on our own terms, and in ports
of our own selection ?
We must not be led astray by the reports of those who have re-
cently visited the northern ports, and who without exception ad.
mit, that although the theory of opening ports is as good as ever,
the practice of forcing commodities has been a miserable failure in
all save opium. Without wishing to impugn their authority, I
will only observe that the sources of it are impure; doubtless those
natives with whom they conversed, expressed to the European su-
percargoes, that the nation was anxious for an open trade, the
mandarins only against it; that every custom-house officer was a
rogue, and every war-boat a smuggler; that the government was
rotten, &c. But, independent of the fact that these Chinese, prin-
cipally smugglers, cordially detest every sort of custom-house of.
ficer, or government officer of any description, are such authorities
to be trusted Other parties conversing with foreigners knew
their auditors, knew the purpose on which they were bound; and,
being no bad judges of human nature, told those tales which they
were well aware would be most pleasing to their hearers, who
were all men necessarily prejudiced to believe whatever suited
their own views. I question whether we should not hear the same
story about prohibitory and other duties in England and France,
or any less civilized country: and in truth, I believe, these two
countries are alone superior to China in civilization. I cordially
agree with the British merchant that as a warlike nation, China
is contemptibly weak, although its internal and domestic power is
very great, because it pleases and cherishes the mass of the people,
and oppresses only the rich, who are always objects of envy to the
poor. It is true a single gun-boat would make the whole Chinese
navy quail; but the imperial government of China has a firmer hold
over the people and more power of effectual control, than either
Great Britain, France, or any other nation; and there is every
reason to believe that happiness is more generally diffused through
its population. The British merchant in advocating the necessity


1834. Free Trade with China. 475
of foreign commerce to the Chinese, seems altogether obliviscent
that from the immense extent of the Chinese empire, greater than
that of the whole of Europe, she necessarily possesses within her.
self, the varied productions of every soil and climate, and is indepen-
dent of other nations for whatever claims her necessities or luxuries
may require. To put the point in its true light, the British mer.
chant had better boldly assert, that Great Britain wishes or ought
to take every possible means, foul or fair, to exhort, persuade, in-
timidate, compel, the Chinese people to receive her manufactures,
molentes volentes. But push not the object beyond just and hono-
rable measures. The Chinese nation can far better do without us,
that we without them. -
I would now wish to canvass the observations regarding the con-
tempt in which foreign commerce is held in China, and conse-
quently the little importance which merchants possess in the eyes
of the government. The fault is attributed to monopoly; be it so.
But let me ask whether it is not as probable to have arisen from
the fact that foreign commerce is of very little utility or import.
ance to the Chinese nation ? And, be not startled, my readers, in
these days when only one side of a question is tolerated, has it not
solely been preserved and rendered firm, by what some term va-
cillating, others politic, conduct on the part of these said bugbears,
monopolists Was the trade which once existed and flourished in
different ports of the Chinese empire, lost through concession, or
resistance 1 The British merchant should be well up in his facts
before he founds an argument upon them. From a small stream,
originally, the full tide of commerce with China now flows through
the arteries of Great Britain ; but how has it been nurtured and
fed By monopoly, if a liberal and extended commercial policy
can be so termed. Why should not the port of Canton have fol.
lowed the fate of all other ports, but for the monopoly of the East
India Company Look into the annals of commerce with Canton;
it has been by opposing in a firm and politic way divers imposts,
by breaking the fetters which had already borne to the dust the in-
dividual merchant, that this trade was saved at all. It has now at-
tained a height which could scarcely have been contemplated, but
which like all other difficult points, when once effected, becomes
to mens’ minds, “ simplicity itself.” The Chinese in Canton,
and provinces adjacent, derive such advantage from the foreign
trade, that its cessation would now involve many in ruin; but the
government at Peking derives little if any advantage from it. We
must be cautious how we conduct it hereafter. Perhaps Great
Britain may have been too tamely inclined, recently, to submit to
absurd edicts, overflowing with Asiatic hyperbole; but mark, it
has been the British government, and not the E. I. Company alone,
or their servants in China, who have been desirous of continuing
one stated routine, when it became no longer necessary. The
Company have by their monopoly reared a commercial structure
of vast consistency and firinness; it remains with their successors
to place a dome upon it, or erumble it to the dust. I must say,


476 Free Trade with China. FEB.
that if speculative theories are to rise paramount to solid advan-
tages, the latter fate will speedily await it. ---
In your strictures on the abasement of foreign commercial
character in China, and your desire that it should be duly appre-
ciated, you make a strange observation; namely, that our embas-
sies should not have been even partially composed of men engaged
in commerce, as implying a want of knowledge of the character
of the Chinese government: surely such an admixture of members
of the British factory with high officers of state must have gone
far to evince to the Chinese, British ideas of such personages, and
have tended to elevate them to their proper station in the eyes of
the Chinese authorities. Having blamed the E. I. Company for
succumbing to Chinese opinion, as degrading to commercial dig-
nity, you equally object to so legitimate a means of uplifting it,
founded as it is on the usages of our own country. Averse as you
are to bestowing a scintilla of credit on monopolists, you must
have been ill versed in the history of our embassies, if you are ig-
norant, that small as the advantage is which we have derived from
them, we have been saved from positive evil by this sprinkling of
practical and useful men. -
The “Boeotian dullness” that would require an island of our
own on the coast of China is not quite so apparent to the world at
large, as to the circumscribed views of the “merchant.” We are
not bound to relinquish our trade at Canton because we possess
an island; we are not bound to abstain from the same system pre-
cisely, as that advocated by the “merchant,” because we possess
an island ; but we have a nucleus wherefrom to radiate into all
the eccentric motions of a free trade; in fact, the parties who ar-
gue against the possession of an island on the coast of China,
may perhaps be not altogether disinterested. . Warehouses might
supersede floating go-downs. “Boeotian dullness” may be able to
Lenetrate thus far. “Pandora's box” has still hope at the bot-
tom, with its usual attribute of an anchor; which may be as hea-
vy to fly as “leaden wings.” -
I would further add that the British merchant should entertain
a rather more modest opinion of his own abilities, than to level so
sweeping an accusation of stupidity against those who may be as
well, or better able to judge than himself. And may not the charge
retort with grater force against the system of powers with which
he would propose to invest the chamber of commerce 7 For mer-
chants to make laws for themselves, to judge of their own acts,
and be themselves the official agents between themselves and the
local authorities, to erect themselves into a ciminal court for the
trial of offenses, would be no less anomalous than dangerous to all
parties. Merchants, where their own pockets are concerned,
would be but indifferent diplomatists, more especially, as most, if
not all of us, are daily engaged in contravening the fiscal laws of
the empire. I for one would rather our trade were subject to a
consular authority in all things, than-to so heterogeneous a mass
as would collect to rule upon this occasion. It would be worse


1834. Chinese Metal Types. 477
than no rule at all. Doubtless we are all “honorable men,” but we
shall be a little the better for having some restraint on our acts and
deeds. A chamber of commerce for all usual and legitimate pur-
poses, or as a counterpoise to the hong-merchants, would doubt.
less be a good institution and ought to be adopted. -
Your obedient servant,
Canton, January 22d, 1834. Another BRITISH MERCHANT.
Chinese Metal Types. We have much pleasure in laying before our read-
ers the following “Brief statement relative to the formation of metal types for
the Chinese language.” The object and efforts of Mr. Dyer are worthy of all
commerdation.
MANY arguments have been brought forward to show the disad.
vantages of metal types for the Chinese language, and their infe-
riority in appearance to the wooden blocks in common use for
printing in China. But these arguments have been fully refuted;
and both the utility of the Chinese metal types, and the practica. .
bility of making them elegantly, may now be considered as ques-
tions entirely set at rest. Hitherto Chinese types have been made
only on the imperfect and expensive plan of cutting every cha.
racter separately on the face of the type metal.
The principal difficulty of procuring Chinese types has hitherto
consisted in providing handsome and cheap steel punches, from
which copper matrices may be struck, and the type cast. A mul-
titude of calculations have been made of the probable expense of
procuring types, according to the respective average price of each
punch, as demanded by different individuals. At the lowest price
per punch required in England, the cost of punches for a font of
3000 characters in variety, would amount to 30,000 rupees; but
cut in India, where work is so much cheaper, the atmount would
not much exceed 4,000 rupees, as already amply proved by ac-
tual experiment. The want, however, of tools and machinery has
occasioned many difficulties and delay; and the necessity of ac-
quiring the knowledge of type-cutting by much reading and ex-
periment has been the cause of multiplied errors; but by perse-
verance these have been completely overcome. - -
Upon the plan of cutting punches for the principal characters
in the language, first, according to a scale lately made with great
accuracy; gradully proceeding from the more to the less import.
ant characters; and then supplying the occasional characters, by
cutting them on the face of the tin or other type metal, until these
also shall be cut in steel; the font may be very useful when about
1200 punches are cut. And the further we advance in punch cut-
ting, the less need will there be of providing occasional characters in
any other way. The average price for which punches can be cut at
Penang is not more than 68 cents; and the copper matrices
are struck from them for the additional sum of 24 cents each.
Further to reduce the cost, some characters are divided perpendi.
cularly into halves, thirds, and two-thirds; and horizontally into
halves, where such division can be inade without affecting the


478 Siam. FEB.
beauty of the character: by this method, a large number of punches
will be saved. Also, when a punch is injured in striking the ma-
trix of any character, it may very frequently, after a little dress-
ing, be used to strike matrices for similar characters of a fewer
number of strokes. -
About 400 rupees have been subscribed, and nearly 200 punches
have been cut; the funds remaining in hand will not admit of
much fºrther progress; but the work will proceed just as far as
funds are provided. With the requisite funds, about four punches
could be cut per day, supposing five men to be employed—the
agreement with the work-people heing to give entire satisfaction in
every purch, or else to recut the same. -
It is worthy of particular notice, that if we could proceed no
farther than we have done, a very great object is obtained; for the
200 characters (nearly) which have already been cut, are those
which are wanted most of all; and they can combine with type
made in the common wav, viz. by cutting the character on tin. But
every contribution of 68 cents will carry us one step farther; and
thus we intend (D. V.) progressively to advance, to the number of
some thousand punches. Whether our progress be more or less
rapid we leave for our friends to determine. It is hoped that all
who feel interested about China will help in this work: a most
herculean work, requiring the aid of very many; and a most bless-
ed work, fraught with good to one-third of the human race.
Penang, 31st October, 1833.
SAMUEL DYER.
* -
-
Contributions will be thankfully received by the Editor of the Chinese
Repository, Canton; by the principal of the Anglochinese college, Malacca,
and by Mr. Dyer, Penang.
RELIGIOUS INTELLIGENCE.
SIA.M.–Uetters from Bankok dated
on the 22d of September have recent-
ly been received from Mr. Jones, who
was still alone in that field of labor.
The Rev. Stephen Johnson and fam-
ily left Singapore for Siam on the 24th
of Nov., and returned to the same
place on the 31st of December; the
vessel in which they embarked having
been unable to proceed on her course
against the monsoon. The opportu-
nities for correspondence between Sin-
gapore and Siam appear to be few.
The Jemsetjee Jeejeebhoy and three
other Surat ships had arrived in June,
and were still in Bankok when Mr.
Jones wrote; since their arrival, sugar
had risen from 8 to 13 ticals (about 62
cents) per pecul.
Kin, a young native who was for-
merly employed as Siamese composi-
tor in the printing office at Singapore,
has been for some time past engaged
in preparing types from such materials
as that country affords; and he is now
making preparations to print the Si-
amese History in 25 vols. The amount
of each volume will be the contents
of one of the Siamese black books,
which are formed of thick paper fold.
ed backwards and forwards into from
30 to 35 folds. Chau-fa-noi, the king's
half brother is also preparing several
peculs of tvne for printing.
Phra Meh-tap, the commander-in-
chief of the Siamese military forces,
had gone with a number of vessels for
the purpose of removing several thous-
and more Cambojans to Bankok, “so
to release them from the terrors they
suffer through fear of the Cochinchin-
esc.” This a specimen of the man-
ner-in which Cochinchina and Siam
respectively partition Camboja, and
give protection to its inhabitants! The
commander-in-chief returned on the
24th of September, and brought with
him about a dozen boats each con-


1834.
479
Siam.—Mulacca.
taining nearly 60 persons, men, wo.
men and children. Others were still
to follow.
With respect to his own labors and
engagements, Mr. Jones says:
“I have from 10 to 30 patients daily.
For soune my prescriptions have prov-
ed successful, so much so that patients
have come 15 days’ journey to consult
me. Last Sunday we had more than
20 Chinese; the others were Peguans,
Arabs, Burmans, Portuguese, and La-
os. I wonder that we have so much
fuccess in ..his business since we know
so little about medicine.
“Binty (a Chinese baptized by
Mr. Gutzlaff) and his associates con-
tinue their weekly meeting at our
house for Christian worship in Chi-
nese: present last Sunday twenty, a
greater. number than usual. Some
of them, so far as I can judge, give
pretty good evidence of being true
converts. One has solicited baptism;
but as I cannot examine or instruct
him, I have deferred it. You can
hardly imagine how much we need a
Chinese missionary, or how much I
wish there were here even an inter.
preter only. They are mostly (to use
Mr. Gutzlaff's orthography.) Tio-
chow people who visit us, though we
have some of almost every dialect.
“At present, we have a good deal
of intercourse with the Burmans; I
think I have given most of them a
general-outline of Christianity; but
I fear no fruit has yet sprung up. Mrs.
J. and I have spent most of to-day
among them. I visited their monas.
tery (I can think of no better name);
it contains from 40 to 60 priests. In
conversing with the head priest, I ask-
ed him in what state those who went
to Nigban (commonly translated an-
nihilation) existed ? Holding up his
finger, and giving it a puff, he said,
‘in just the state of an extinguishcd
candle.”
“Some of the Siannese seem friend.
ly to me, but on what ground, their
general character gives room to sus-
pect. I have visited several of the nobi-
lity. One of the phra-klang's sons has
offered to build me a house rent free,
if I will come to his neighborhood;
but if I were to be houseless till it is
done, I fear I should suffer the pelt-
ings of many a monsoon.”
Cochinchina.-Rumors of insur.
rections and disturbances in Cochin-
clina still continue to reach us iroin
various quarters. “The Christians in
all the provinces,” says the editor of
the Singapore Chronicle, in his paper
of the 2d ult., “who were protected
by Ta-kong, (recently an officer of
high rank and great influence, but now
dead,) and who had nothing to expect
from the king but punishment, fled to
the fort of Saigon; and 700 of them,
at the taking of Dongnai, defended
themselves heroically and did great ex-
ecution among the enemy. Thay (one
of the leaders of the insurgents,) sus-
tained all the attacks of the royalists,
and even made several very success-
ful sallies. Being as politic as brave,
he gained an advantage over his broth-
er-in-law, who commands in Tonquin,
and created a division by exciting
a rebellion in that quarter. 'The king
was obliged to remove a great part of
his troops from the south to the north,
but the result is not yet known. There
is, however, reason to suppose that
the revolt in the north will be more
serious than that in the south; and if
the communication between the two
revolting parties could be effected by
sca as well as by land, the king will
have much to dread. The centre of
Cochinchina is not quiet either; some
suspicions, perhaps false, have been
attached to the king's brother, and he
has been condemned to carry a chain,
though he is allowed to remain in his
own palace.
“All the Christians are persecuted
excessively; and several have been
condemned to death. Of this number
is Mr. Gagelin, a French missionary
who was at Saigon with Ta-kong, and
who was returning to Hué to take his
leave before departing for Macao. M.
Jacard and father Odorico were pri-
soners at Hué, and there are strong
reasons for suspecting they have al-
ready been exccuted.”
MALAccA.—We have before us scv.
eral letters and papers from Malacca,
some of which are dated as late as the
6th ult.; they afford us a variety of in-
telligence, especially concerning the
college and schools, and encourage us
to expect more information from the
Saine sources.
An earthquake occurred at Malac-
ca on the 24th November at half past
8 o'clock P. M. The trembling of the
earth continued nearly a minute, and
shortly after an indistinct, rumbling
noise was heard, like distant thunder
in the direction of Sumatra. “During


480 - Journal of Occurrences.
the whole evening,” says our corres.
pondent, “there was hardly a breath of
air, and just previous to the shock, the
atmosphere was sultry and oppressive;
and we noticed an unusually thick,
smoky sky over the sea, westward; this
gradually disappeared after the earth-
quake and rumbling noise, and the sky
became clear and tranquil, and soon
a cool land breeze set in, which made
the night comfortable. Probably all
we have experienced here are but the
effects of a sudden eruption of some
volcano in Sumatra. Two of our ser-
vants who are advaced in years, re-
member two former earthquakes at
Malacca, both more severe than the
present.
“Our minds were much awed by
this display of the majesty and power
of the Almighty. When he arises in his
great power, he can make the earth
shake and tremble as easily as the leaf
is moved by the wind. Some of the
Chinese and Malays when they felt
the shock, immediately began to pray
and call upon their gods with much
noise and confusion.
“P. S. On referring to a chart, the
only volcano I find laid down in Su-
matra is one near to mount Ophir,
150 or 200 miles southwest from Ma-
lacca. Probably its renewed heavings
and fiery belchings shook the earth and
made the hearts of men quake at this
remote distance.” Shocks were felt
at Singapore at the same time as at
Malacca.
Our limits allow us room here for
only a remark or two concerning the
schools and mission. There are al-
ready several schools for boys, and a
few for girls; and had the missionaries
“the means” they could open many
more immediately. The Rev. Mr.
Tomlin, who for almost two years has
been acting for the principal of the
Anglochinese college, intends soon to
open a new school on an extensive
scale, which shall include boys of dif.
ferent nations, such as Chinese, Ma-
lays, Portuguese, &c.; it is to be mo.
deled after one of the best and most
successful schools in Calcutt . The
Rev. J. Evans has entered on his du-
tics in connection with the college.
Mr. E., we understand, has for many
years been accustomed to the business
of education, having, while in Eng-
land, been professor of the classics,
mathematics, Hebrew and Arabic,
successively; and trained a number of
pupils for Oxford and Cambridge.
BATAVIA.—We are indebted to the
kindness of the Rev. Mr. Medhurst, for
a copy of the “Report of the Mission
staion at Batavia for 1833;" and of a
“Journal of a voyage from Batavia to
Sourabaya and Sumenap on the isl.
ands of Java and Madura, during the
months of July, August, and Septem-
ber, 1833.” Copious extracts from
both these documents shall appear in
our next number; suffice it to remark
here, that the mission amidst many
discouragements and hundrances is en-
joying great prosperity.
JOURNAL OF OCCURRENCES.
CANTow. Since the 9th inst., this
city has presented a scene of festivi.
ties, rejoicings, and congratulations
which is usual throughout the Chinese
empire during the holidays of new
year. In the meantime there has been
an unusual amount of suffering, espe.
cially among the lower classes of the
inhabitants. Great numbers of the
poor, who were rendered houseless
aud pennyless by the inundation last
August, have perished during the win.
ter. No one can describe the wretch-
edness of some of these sufferers; and
none but an eye-witness can conceive
of it. Morning after morning, and in
the same place, we have seen two,
three, and four dead bodies; and in
the narrow compass of a few rods we
have seen at noon-day more than 20
individuals stretched on the ground
half naked, and either senseless or "
writhing in the agonies of death caus-
ed by hunger. No man cares for their
bodies; none for their souls.
His excellency, Le Taekeaou, the
literary chancellor of Canton, hung
himself in his own house on the morn-
ing of the 26th inst. We may give
some particulars of the case hereafter.
Banditti have again appeared on the
hills at Leen chow, carrying terror and
destruction in every direction. Gov-
ernor Loo has ordered troops and sup-
plies to the field; the result of the ex-
pedition is vet unknown in Canton.—
We have Peking gazettes to the 2d of
December; but they contain nothing
of special interest.
|


THE
CH IN E S E R E POSITORY.
vol. II–March, 1834.—No. 11.
DESCRIPTION OF THE CITY OF PEKING.
Hwang ching, ‘the imperial city,” received its
name from the circumstance that it was designed
to be the residence of the emperor and his court.
This constitutes the second inclosure, and surrounds
the forbidden city. It is about six miles in circum-
ference, and surrounded by a wall twenty feet in
height. It has four large gates, one on each side,
and on the south three or four of an inferior size.
Like the forbidden city, its form is that of an oblong
parallelogram, having, however, a slight indentation
at the southwestern corner. We will notice a few
of the most remarkable objects it contains, begin-
ning at the south gate.—We continue the series of
numbers which was commenced on the preceding
pages of the description of Peking.
19. Tešngán mun, “the gate of heavenly rest.’
Before this gate is a large open space inclosed by
walls, and terminated at the south by “the gate of
great purity;' which no one is permitted to enter ex-
Cept on foot. After passing another gate, turning to
the right, we find, -
20. Tae meaou, “the great temple,' which is de-
dicated to the ancestors of the reigning family. The
outer wall, which as usual includes several buildings,
3L.


482 Description of the MARch,
is nearly 3,000 feet in circumference. At the close
of the year, offerings are presented here to the
father, grandfather, and great grandfather of the
reigning monarch; and also to the deceased females
of the same family. In another part of the temple
are the tablets of more remote ancestors, to whom
likewise divine honors are paid. Westward from
this temple, and on the other side of the broad avenue
that leads from the southern gate towards the impe-
rial palace, is -
21. Shay tseih tan, “altar to the gods of land and
grain.” It consists of two stories, each five feet high;
the platform of the lower is sixty-two, and of the up-
per, fifty-eight feet square. The face of the altar is
of particolored earth, “each color answering to its
quarter in the heavens:” the north side is black; the
south, red; the east, green; the west, white; and the
centre, yellow. The account, or rather the fable of
its origin is, that “Chow, the son of an emperor who
reigned B. c. 3114, having done much for the im-
provement of agriculture, succeeding generations to
do honor to so worthy an example, sacrificed to him
under the name of Tseih. His great grandson, Kow-
lung, about three hundred years after, taught his coun-
trymen to distinguish the different kinds of soil.
Men of after ages therefore sacrificed to him under
the name of Shay.” Shay is placed before Tseih only
for the sake of euphony. Whatever we may think
of this account, it is certain that from a very remote
period in Chinese history, honors which belong to
God alone, have been given to these men. Sacrifices
are offered to them in the second month of spring and
autumn by the emperor himself, no other person be-
ing allowed to perform the ceremony.
Near the eastern gate of the forbidden city is a de-
pository of military stores of every kind requisite for
the clothing and equipment of infantry and cavalry;
and also shops for their manufacture. Northward
from these is the Russ school, designed to furnish
interpreters for the government in its intercourse


484 Description of the MARch,
some places with a white marble balustrade, and in
others lined with clusters of elms, lindens, and aca-
cias, through the dark foliage of which glisten the
roofs of surrounding temples and palaces. During
the summer and autumn, the lake is covered with the
flowers of the tribulus and water lily (Nymphaea),
which spread their fragrance throughout the gardens.
“In a word,” says father Hyacinth, “the infinite va-
riety of beauties which the lake presents on every
side, make this one of the most enchanting spxts on
earth.” - - -
23. On the southeast side of the lake stands the
superb summer-house, ying tae. It consists of se-
veral edifices, which are surrounded on three sides
by water, and has many magnificent apartments and
beautiful gardens and walks. In these gardens, the
author just quoted says, “the monstrous rocks equal
in height the loftiest trees of the forest, and the trees,
which fill the air to a distance with the perfume of
their flowers, are arranged by nature in a manner the
most picturesque.” The emperor often comes hith-
er to attend to affairs of state, or more frequently,
to taste the sweets of repose. -
24. On the west side of the lake, a little south of
the bridge described above, stands tsze kwang kö,
an edifice to which the emperor comes annually in
the month of September to see the military licentiates
exhibit their skill and prowess in drawing the bow
on horseback. It is customary also to celebrate here
the triumphant return of his armies from war. To en-
kindle an enthusiasm for military glory, the walls are
hung with representations of battles, and portraits of
generals and other officers, who have distinguished
theinselves by their exploits on the field of battle,
or who have contributed by their activity or the wis-
dom of their counsels, to the success of the empe-
ror's troops. -
25. Tseaou yuen, “the plantain garden;' situated
near the east end of the marble bridge which cross-
es the lake. It is filled with various fruit trees and


1834. City of Peking. 485
odoriferous shrubs. Among the buildings around it
is a beautiful pavilion entirely surrounded by water, to
which the emperor comes in summer to amuse him-
self with sailing in his yacht, and in winter to see his
soldiers display their skill in skating.
26. Ching kwang teen, a royal pavilion situated
northward from the plantain garden. It is surround-
ed by a high circular wall with battlements above
it, which rise in the form of a cupola designed to re-
present the canopy of heaven.
27. North of this pavilion is a bridge of white
marble, with an ornamental arch or gate of the same
material at each end. This bridge leads to ‘the
marble isle,' which presents the aspect of a hill of
gentle ascent covered with groves of trees, temples,
summer-houses, and palaces, and crowned at the
summit with a white obelisk. It affords a delightful
prospect of the lake and gardens around it. A large
part of the hill consists of rare and curious stones,
which were transported by land several years ago
from Kaefung foo in the province of Honan. The
present dynasty has erected here a temple which is
inhabited by emasculated priests; and converted this
beautiful island into a place of idolatrous worship.
28. Near the northeast corner of the western
gardens is a temple consecrated to “the discoverer
of the silk-worm.” This discovery is attributed to
Yuenfe, the wife of the emperor Hwangte, who be-
gan to reign, according to Chinese history, in the
year b. c. 2636. It is built upon an elevated base-
ment, and its roof is covered with green tiles. Near
it is a terrace four feet high and about thirty-five feet
square, designed for the reception of the leaves pro-
duced by a neighboring plantation of mulberry trees;
and also a palace surrounded by a colonnade and cov-
ered with green tiles. The empress dowager and other
great ladies of the court assist in tending the worms,
in order to encourage a branch of industry which is
indispensable to the clothing of the inhabitants of
China; and the empress herself comes in person to


486 Description of the MARcii,
attend the annual sacrifice here “presented to the
genius that protects silk-worms.” -
29. Woo lung-ting ‘the five dragon pavilions.
These are situated near the north end of the lake.
Rising abruptly from its bosom, and their shadows
being reflected by it waters as by a mirror, they
have a very beautiful appearance. They are fre-
quently visited by the emperor, and are the summer
residence of the most beautiful women of his harem.
30. Chen fuh sze, ‘the temple of great happiness,'
is situated near the northeast corner of the lake.
The beauty of its site makes it one of the greatest
ornaments of ‘the western park.’ And in another
temple a short distance northeast from this is a co-
lossal statue of Budha. It is made of copper, com-
pletely gilt; is sixty feet in height, and has, accord-
ing to Timkowski, a hundred arms.-In these gar-
dens, the arrangement of the lakes and valleys, the
hills and groves and bowers, is such as to make the
whole seem to be the work of nature. This appear-
ance, the exact reverse of that presented by the for-
bidden city, where all seems to be the labored work
of art, makes them a pleasing retreat for those who
love retirement, and can taste the delights of rural
scenery. But although we can say thus much with-
out fear of uttering falsehood, yet from what we have
seen of Chinese negligence, we cannot avoid the ap-
prehension, that these places which might be so beau-
tiful, are despoiled of half their loveliness by want of
cleanliness and proper cultivation. -
31. The movable type printing office is situated
on the east side of the gardens, between them and
the forbidden city. “The movable characters were
formerly cast in copper like so many seals and then
divided for use. In the reign of Kanghe a collec-
tion of books was printed with these types, forming
in all 10,000 sheets. This collection is divided into
6109 chapters, bound in 522 volumes, and is regard-
ed as an encyclopaedia. More than half the types
with which it was printed, have since been lost.”


1834. City of Peking. 489
The court has decreed that a victim be here immo-
lated on the first day of each year and of each month,
and on several other occasions. The emperor him-
self comes in a superb car, arrayed in his most splen-
did costume, and preceded by all his court, to attend
the sacrifice. At the moment when it is offered, he
kneels and prostrates himself to the earth three
times; then rises, and repeats, a second and third time,
the sarne ceremony, None but the emperor himself
is permitted to commence this service. The princes
and grandees afterwards present their offerings, each
in his turn, to the ancestors of their sovereign.
39. Kin sing tae, the imperial observatory, is
built partly upon the eastern wall, near the south-
east corner of the city. It was founded in the time
of the Yuen dynasty, A. D. 1279; but the instruments
having become unfit for use, the emperor Kanghe,
in 1673, gave orders that a new set should be made
under the direction of the jesuits who were then high
in favor at Peking. In this observatory, the astrono-
mical instruments which the king of England sent as
a present to the emperor with lord Macartney's
embassy, were deposited.
. .40. Kung yuen, situated a short distance to the
northeast of the observatory, is a vast establishment
where candidates for literary degrees are examined.
It contains many fine apartments for the accommoda-
tion of the examiners and their attendants, and an
immense number of chambers or cells, where the
candidates write the compositions which are to be
the test of their scholarship. The successful candi.
dates are entitled to promotion to certain offices in
the government. -
On the east side of the city are several magazines,
which usually contain large quantities of grain, par-
ticularly of rice. . . . . - -
iſ 41. The Russian church of the Assumption, in
the northeast corner of the city. . . . . . .
42. , Yungho kung, ‘the temple of eternal peace,’
about half a mile west from the church of the As-
3M


492 Description of the MARch,
such an honor, and also those of all their most dis-
tinguished ministers. Offerings are presented at .
stated periods and sometimes, by the emperor in per-
son, before these tablets. - -
54. Pih ti sze, “the white pagoda temple,’ stands
a little west of the temple of kings and emperors.
Within the inclosure which surrounds it is a white
obelisk, erected in honor of the founder of Budhisin,
in the 11th century, and rebuilt in 1819. It received
its principal ornaments from Kublai, who was induced
to contribute liberally for its decoration, by an artifice
of the priests, which served to persuade the Chinese
whom he had recently conquered, that he was the
man appointed by heaven to reign over them. “The
corners,” says father Hyacinth, “are covered with
jasper, and the projecting parts of the roof with or-
naments of exquisite workmanship tastefully arrang-
ed. The magnificence and art displayed in the em-
bellishment of this obelisk is such as has been and
ever will be, seldom equaled.” Around it are ar-
ranged 108 small brick pillars, on which are plac-
ed as many lamps in honor of the sacred deposit
said to be preserved here. This is a scab from the
forehead of the holy personage mentioned above, pro-
duced by his frequent prostrations and knocking his
head upon the earth. At the present day, a kind
of paste is made of flour, and of this paste, small pills
are formed which are deposited here in a vase. Over
this vase, prayers are read for about two months ;
and if the person who reads them is pure in body and
spirit, the pills are then supposed to be incorrup-
tible, and to have acquired the property of healing
a multitude of diseases.”
55. A building or suit of buildings, in which the
deputies from Turkestan, Tungking, Siam, the Lew-
chew islands and other countries who come to bring
tribute to the emperor, take up their abode. It
stands near the western wall of the imperial city.
The northwestern part of the northern division is
Comparatively thinly peopled. It contains several


494 Description of the MARch,
the third 120, and each is 10 feet high. The upper
stage is paved with nine rows of stone slabs, each row
consisting of nine slabs. The other stages are pav-
ed in a similar manner. Each is surrounded with a
balustrade of marble, and ascended by marble steps.
The hill is encircled by a wall, in which are four
handsome gates facing the four cardinal points. The
palace of abstinence stands towards the northwest
from the terrace. The wall which incloses it is more
than half a mile in circumference, aud surrounded by
a deep ditch or canal. Between the wall and canal
is a walk covered with a roof, which is supported by
163 columns. “Before the principal entrance, on
the left hand is a pavilion of stone in which is a bronze
statue, representing a man in deep contemplation,
and on the right, another, in which stands the monu-
ment of time.” Before offering the annual sacrifice
to the heavens on the day of the winter solstice, the
emperor comes hither to prepare himself for the ce-
remony by three days' fasting. . . . . . . . . . . . ;
57. In the western part of the southern city
about half a mile from the street that divides this city
is lew le chang, a manufactory of polished tiles. It
is about two thirds of a mile in length, and serves as
a deposit for all manufactures of a similar kind. On
the south of it are warehouses containing large quanti-
ties of glass and crystal manufactures. The best book-
stores in Peking are also found in this neighborhood.
58. A little more than a mile from the southwest
corner of the city is a mansion, which is much...fre-
quented by the literati and officers of the court on ac-
count of the agreeable walks around it. It stands
upon an eminence, and affords,the visitor a delightful
view of rural scenery. It is surrounded on every side
by “gentle hills and vallies clothed in summer with
grain, or meadows covered with verdam roses''...
59. Hih lung tan, “the black dragon, pool, is a
little east of the mansion last noticed. It was form-
ed by order of government in 1771. Near it stands
a temple where the emperor comes in seasons of ex-


1834, City of Peking. 405
cessive drought or superabundant rain, to pray for
rain or sunshine as the case demands.-It only re-
mains that we notice º
60. Scén nung tan. This is a terrace for sacrificing
to the inventor of agriculture. It is in the southeast
part of this division, near the temple to the heavens.
‘Fhe “inclosure in which it stands is about two miles
in circumference. It contains four altars “dedicated
to the fpirit of the heavens, the spirit of the earth,
the planet Jupiter, and the inventor of agriculture.”
Near the first stand four slabs of granite, on which
are engraved figures of dragons in clouds. Sacri-
fides are offered before them “to the five sacred
nountains, the five predominant mountains, and the
five ordinary mountains.” On two other slabs are
engraved representations of rivers, and at their base
are dug cisterns that are filled with water at the time
of the sacrifices, which are offered before them “to
tlie spirits of the four seas and of the four great rivers.”
But what makes this pluce particularly worthy of
notice, is the annual ceremony of the emperor's
ploughing. This takes place at the opening of the
season for agricultural labors in the spring. After
his majesty has “directed the plough,” he ascends a
neighboring eminence, whence he can observe the
work of some of his principal officers, who take the
plough by turns, in imitation of his example. In the
meantime musicians are chanting around the work-
men hymns in honor of the employment of the hus-
bandman. The instruments used on this occasion
are very neat, and are preserved in buildings appro-
priated to that use. The ploughs are drawn by oxen
which are never used on any other occasion. It is
pretended that the grain produced by the emperor's
labor is siperior to any other; and it is consequently
used to make cakes for the sacrifices to the heavens.
The celebration of this ceremony is made known
by an imperial edict throughout the empire.
Around"most of the gates of Peking are suburbs
more or less extensive ; some extend more than a


496 Description of the MARch,
mile from the wall. They contain several large tem-
ples and some public buildings, which we have not
room to describe.
At the distance of eight or ten miles west and
northwest from the city are several extensive gardens
and pleasure grounds, interspersed with summer-
houses, temples, and palaces. The most important
of these are the celebrated Yuen-ming yuen, which
are often the residence of the emperor. Mr. Barrow
supposes them to contain an extent of at least twelve
square miles; a great part of which, however, is
waste and uncultivated. The landscape is broken
into hill and dale, and diversified with woodlands and
lawns. Among these are numerous canals, rivulets,
and large sheets of water, the banks of which have
been thrown up in an irregular and apparently for-
tuitous manner, so as to represent the free hand of
nature. Around these artificial lakes bold rocky pro-
montories are seen jutting out into the water, and val-
lies retiring between them, some of which are choked
with trees and bushes, and others kept in a state of
high cultivation. In particular places where pleasure
houses have been erected, the views appear to have
been studied. The trees are not only arranged ac-
cording to their height and form, but the tints of their
foliage seem also to have been regarded in the com-
position of the picture.
... Thirty distinct places of residence for the emperor,
with all the necessary appendages to each for the ac-
commodation of the officers of state whose presence
is occasionally required, for the eunuchs, servants,
and artificers, each constituting a considerable village,
are said to be contained within the inclosure of these
gardens. But these imperial abodes have the usual
deficiences of Chinesc buildings, and hardly deserve
to be called palaces. . . .
. . The principal hall of audience stands upon a plat-
form of granite four feet high, and is surrounded by a
row of large wooden columns, which support the roof.
The length of the hall within is 110 feet, the breadth


498 Description of the MARch,
they spend the remainder of their lives. The sons of
the emperor have the privilege of wearing a robe of
brilliant yellow, which is the distinctive color of the
imperial family; but the real advantages they enjoy in
consequence of their noble birth, are few and unimpor-
tant. His daughters are usually given in marriage to
Tartar princes and officers, but rarely to Chinese.
The palaces of the emperor are filled with eunuchs,
some of whom are required to keep the buildings
and gardens in order, and others to attend upon him-
self and the ladies of his harem. The greatest ſa-
vorite sleeps in the same room with his master, and
by means of his constant access to his presence, of.
ten obtains great influence over him.
The internal regulations of Peking, and its public
institutions, are essentially the same as those of other
Chinese cities, except those connected with the court;
most of which have been noticed. It is difficult, es-
pecially at this distance, to obtain any authentic in-
formation respecting the population. The accounts
of those who make it amount to ten or fifteen millions,
and of Malte Brun who reduces it to 600,000, and
says, “the city of Peking does not afford space
enough for three millious of men to stand on,” are
alike absurd. No inconsiderable portion of the space
inclosed by the walls is occupied by lakes and gar-
dens, and by temples, palaces and other public build-
ings. Many of the streets are broad. On the other
hand, very little space is occupied by a Chinese fami
ly of the middle and lower classes. Europeans are
surprised at the immense crowds of people they con-
tinually meet in the streets. The number of inha-
bitants, including those that live in the suburbs, is
probably between two and three millions.
The city derives its support chiefly from the cen-
tral and eastern provinces of the empire. The coun-
try around it, though not barren, is less fertile than
many other parts of China. Most of the provisions
and manufactures used by its inhabitants are convey-
ed thither by means of the Grand canal. Some


1834, City of Peking, 499
mutton and beef is brought from Mongolia ; and
coals, which are little used except for culinary pur-
poses, from the mountains at the northwest.
The vast establishment of the emperor, and the
numerous persons in the employment of the govern-
ment, receive their support from the public revenue,
a large part of which is distributed by these means,
among the inhabitants of the capital. A portion of
the taxes levied upon the products of the country, is
paid in kind, and serves to replenish the granaries of
Peking. These contain, during most of the year,
vast quantities of grain, especially of rice; but they
are often nearly empty before the new crop is gath-
ered, and as in Canton, multitudes of the inhabitants
frequently suffer, and many perish, for want of food
and clothing. The apprehension that they may not
be able to provide for their support, often causes pa-
rents to become the murderers of their children.
The multitudes of people who inhabit this great city
are subject to all the evils by which heathenism is
sure to be attended. The almost numberless tem-
ples to ancestors, sages and heroes, to the heavens
and earth, sun and moon, stars, mountains, rivers,
&c., show what is their religious condition. Whe-
ther the ignorance that now corrupts and debases
thern shall be removed, and the knowledge that pu-
rifies, elevates, and sanctifies the mind of man, be
communicated to the present generation of its inha-
bitants, not improbably depends, under God, upon
those who now in different parts of the world enjoy
the multiplied blessings of Christianity.
Note. In addition to native authorities for the facts contained in
the preceding description, we have consulted the Travels of Tim-
kowski, and also Description de Péking, par le Rev. P. Hyacinth.
The map, drawn chiefly from the Ta-tsing Yih-tung Che, exhibits
a tolerably correct view of the city and its several divisions. The
numbers, corresponding to those used in the description, point out
the sites of the most important buildings and objects of general in-
terest in the capital ; in the forbidden city, No. 16 on the map,
should take the place of No. 17, and the latter be placed a little far.
ther north; the river, laid down southwest of the city, is much too
large. The other imperfections of the map must be attributed to
the imperfect state of our lithography. . .


.500 Burmah. MIAitch.
MiscellANIEs.
BURMAH –its situation, extent, population, productions and trade;
manners and customs of the people; their language, and those of
the Peguans and Karens, education, books, 3 c. By BENEvolkNs.
The situation in which I have been placed a few years back, has
put some facts in my possession, a communication of which will,
I trust, throw light on the geography, language and mythology of
Bürmah, and the progress of Christianity in that empire. In my re-
marks, I propose to make reference to the Encyclopaedia Ameri-
cana, which contains some of the most recent information I have
seen regarding the country. I blame not the writers of the articles
to which I shall refer for their incorrectness, for they seem gener-
ally to have consulted the best authorities they could obtain.
In consequence of the reduction of large portions of territory to
British sway, the empire now extends only from latitude 15° 30' to
25° 30′ north, and from longitude 94° to 98° 30′ east from Green-
wich ; consequently its length cannot be more than 600, nor its
greatest breadth so much as 300 miles. These have been its di-
mensions since 1825.
The population is a subject attended with much difficulty, as there
is no census or register kept, by which it can be ascertained with
much accuracy. Symes, in 1795, estimated the inhabitants at
17,000,000; Cox, in 1800, at 18,000,000; Canning, in 1810,
thought this estimate too high. Others have estimated it at 12 and
at 4 millions. Some suppose that the population found on the
banks of the rivers, should be regarded as a fair representation of
the populousness of the country generally, and others that nearly
all the inhabitants are congregated on the rivers. I have made
many inquiries of natives who have traversed the country, and they
uniformly testify that the people living in the interior exceed those
residing on the banks of the rivers. If so, and I doubt not that it
is, they have been both over and under estimated. A gentleman
who has spent twenty years in the country, and been more
extensively conversant with the people than any other foreigner
ever was, estimates them at 10,000,000. These estimates, how-
ever, were designed to include not only the inhabitants of the Bur-
man empire, in its present extent, but as it was in 1823, including
Arracan, and the provinces on the east of the Salwin, since ceded
to the English. Arracan is known to be more populous than the
other provinces. An attempt was made a few years ago, to take
a register of the inhabitants in the Tennasserim province, but their
confidence not having been fully secured, they were apprehensive
of some sinister design, and fled from their villages to the jungles
en masse. The most probable estimate of the population, and that
indeed very indefinite, would be from 8 millions to 12 millions for
the Buriman empire,
* : * ~ *, *


502 Burmah. MARch,
“Menderagee removed the royal residence to the new city of
Ummerapoora (190 leagues east of Calcutta,) on a tongue of land
which runs up into the lake of Tounzemah. Ava, once so magnifi-
cent a city, about four or five miles distant, now lies in ruins.”
The present king again changed the royal residence, and while
Ava has been built with more than ordinary magnificence, Am-
erpoora is utterly desolate. Rangoon is mentioned as an “im-
portant trading city,” and it is added, “many Europeans reside
there.” If three or four, at most, can be called many, this is true;
not otherwise. Rangoon is however a place of second, if not of
first importance, as being the seat of all foreign trade. The trade
is principally with Calcutta, Maulumein, and Penang.
In regard to manners and customs of the people a few particulars
may be noticed. “The Burmans are all fond of painting both
their faces and hands. They slaughter no tame animals, and live
simply ; and for the most part, on vegetables.” It is a very unusual
thing to see a Burinan with either hands or face painted. The
men are usually tattooed upon the body and legs, the women fre-
quently besmear themselves and their children with turmeric, or
white clay, and other substances, which they regard as greatly con.
ducive to beauty. The other remark is generally true; but it often
happens among the wealthy, that though they will not violate the
precepts of their religion by killing “tame animals” themselves,
they keep Mussulman servants to perform the office for them, and
when an animal is once dead, no Burman scruples to eat his flesh.
Hence domestic animals that die of themselves are frequently eat.
en. “ The chief amusement of the Burmans is their theatre, where
declamation, dancing and music alternate; the higher classes are
fond of dramatic spectacles. The new year is celebrated with all
sorts of purification. At this time, young women appear in public
with water, and sprinkle every one they please; it is considered
improper to sprinkle females first.” They are also fond of horse-
racing, boat-racing, cock-fighting, &c. Throwing spears at a
mark is a favorite sport at certain periods of the year. It is very
common for persons of all ranks to spend half the night at chess,
and other games. -
“Among the Burmans, the distinguished dead are burned ; the
poor are interred; the richest are embalmed, commonly in the an-
cient simple mode in honey.” The practice of embalming the
priests is almost universal. They are usually preserved in the way
above mentioned many months, and then burned with great cere-
mony. The death of any important character, and often of ordi.
nary ones, is signalized by music continued at intervals, day and
night, for three or four days; then a feast is made for relatives and
friends. They have funeral processions, which are sometimes
very becoming, but often irregular and trifling.
The Burman language is spoken to a greater or less extent,
and with more or less purity not only throughout the whole of the
Burman empire as it was in 1823, but also at Penang, Bankok, and
yarious places in Siam and the Laos country. In different places


1834. Burmah. j03
there are slight variations in dialect, but in all, the written languages
and books are the same. Thus in Arracan, beside the use of a
few peculiar words, there is a greater roughness of pronunciation
than in most other places, owing to the different power they assign
to the character (2) rah-gouk. The people of Ava, Rangoon, &c.,
pronounce it like our y; while the Arracanese give it the full roll-
ing sound of an Irish r. While the former almost invariably say
Yan-goon, the latter speak more comformably to the English or-
thography, Rangoon. In Tavoy, and among those who come from
thence, the variations from the colloquial dialect of Ava are greater
than at any other place. Still, the same books are taught in their
schools, as in other places, and are understood,
The Burman alphabet consists of 10 vowels, and 32 consonants.
The general form of the letters is circular, every letter is compos.
ed of one or more circles. The vowels are expressed by symbols
before and after, above and below, the consonants. The various
combinations which are made by these are classified in a regular
manner, and constitute what they denominate a them-bong-gyee;
this is their spelling book. All of these cornbinations, amounting
to some thousands, must in their mode of education, be thorough-
ly eoramitted to memory before the least attempt is made to read.
Besides the words formed by the simple combination of consonants
with one or more vowels, most of them are capable of expressing
a different meaning according as they are pronounced with a diſ.
ferent stress, or quantity of voice. To indicate these they have
appropriate marks. A shay-pouk (3) placed after any combina-
tion, denotes a grave and heavy stress; anmyeet (...) placed un-
derneath, requires a light and quick pronunciation, and where
these do not occur, a natural tone is implied.
Hence, san, (natural) to go up a river;
sang, (heavy and protracted) to differ, to vary;
san, (quick and light) to stretch out straight.
As the language is fundamentally monosyllabic, the Burmans
are accustomed to unite two words, whose meanings are closely
allied, to express a single idea; sometimes six or eight are strung
together. As many words have two, three, and even ten significa-
tions with the same orthography, this manner of connecting words
is of important service in removing ambiguity. The verbs are
very numerous, but the nouns are not so, especially those expres-
sive of science or mental affections. This defect, however, is in a
great measure supplied by the privilege of drawing from the Pali
such as are wanted; and all verbs may be made nouns by the an-
nexation of a substantive affix.
The numerous noun, verbal, and adjective affixes, give great pre-
cision to the language. By these are indicated the regimen of nouns
and verbs, the number, relations, and often the form of objects, and
the time of actions are expressed very exactly. Where number is
spoken of, if reference be had to an object having a specific form,
an affix is added to the numeral to indicate that form ; thus lon,
round, is applied to all things globular, as eggs, eyes, fruit, &c.


1834. Burmah. - 505
from the Burman into it by Ko Man-poke, a learned Talieng and
Burman scholar. One tract has been printed. The number of
this people and their character loudly call for more efficient efforts
to spread the knowledge of Christianity among them.
The Karens are a simple people, scattered over all the Burman
territories, but are most numerous on the mountains which separate
Burmah from Siam. Till very lately, their language was never
written. Recently it has been acquired by Messrs. Wade and Ma-
son, and reduced to writing. So far as the Burman and Talieng
alphabets are adapted to express it, they have been employed, and
but few additional characters are required. This furnishes import.
ant facilities in regard to printing, as the Burman types will, with
trifling modifications, print the three languages.
It is amusing to a Burman scholar to read what has been grave.
ly written and published, in regard to the Ruk’heng.” The pro-
priety of calling the language spoken at Penang, the Malay, and
that at Singapore, the Singapore, would be equally as manifest as
the propriety of distinguishing the language used in Arracan from
the Burman used elsewhere. There is only a slight variation in
pronunciation, and perhaps, a few provincial phrases, but it might
as well be said that the Scotch do not speak English as that the
Arracanese do not speak, read, and write Burman. Other lan-
guages are spoken in Burmah by foreigners to a considerable ex-
tent, as Hindostanee, Chinese, &c., but they claim no special
regard here. -
“Every Burman,” says the Fncyclopædia Americana, “learns
arithmetic, reading and writing.” This is generally true of the men,
and yet there are many thousands who are utterly ignorant of either,
and so are three-fourths, if not nine-tenths of the women. The
arithmetic which most learn, is rather a series of tables made ready
for them, than any ability to calculate for themselves. Their writ.
ing is taught with their reading, and both are learned at the same
time. “It is common for court ladies to cultivate literature, and many
in the humbler spheres of life are found not inattentive to the ad.
vantages of education. The monasteries are freely open for the
admission of male pupils, in which, under the gratuitous instruc.
tion of the priests, they learn to read and write, on a plan, funda.
mentally the same as that denominated the Lancasterian. * * *
There is no such thing known as a classical education; no de.
finite period of time, or course of study, is ever contemplated by the
pupil, as the term and the object of his application.”
In common writing, the Burmans use a thick paper, blackened
with charcoal, and a pencil of soft stone. Royal and court orders
are written upon a long palm leaf, with an iron style cut to a point
at each end. Books likewise are written in the same manner upon
palmyra leaf, and when finished, the edges are trimmed and some.
times beautifully gilt. The writing is made legible by rubbing
the leaf with oil. Works in prose as well as poetry, are read,
• Ruk’heng is the same as Arracan, and though not exactly expressive of
the Burman pronunciation, is more nearly so than Arracan.
30


500 p-
England and America. MARcii,
some being works of fiction, and others of a religious character;
of the latter kind, the Dzal and Wootto, or those books which
illustrate the influence of merit and demerit, are the most exten-
sively, read. Few individuals have the means or the opportunity
of collecting private libraries.
The Pali or Magadhi is, with slight modifications, the sacred or
religious language of all Budhist nations. Various facts and au.
thorities lead to the supposition that it is the same as the Sanscrit,
except those changes which have been made to create a greater
correspondence with the vernacular dialects. For example, the
Bali of Burinah, Pegu, and Siam, are all substantially the same, but
the orthography differs. - r
Thus, in Burman Pali, tha-tha-mah, means religion;
Siamese do. sah-sa-nah, ditto.
Burman do. thee-la, means religious law;
- Siamese do. see-la, ditto.
The Siamese have no letter equivalent to th, and cannot utter
that sound; hence the s sound is uniformly substituted for it.
“The form of the Pali characters among the Burmans is quad.
rangular,” says the Encyplopaedia. This quadrangular character
may be found in the libraries of the priests and rulers, but is very
unusual. The common circular Burman character is almost uni.
versal. . A thorough knowledge of Pali is very seldom acquired,
except by the most talented of the priesthood. A smattering of it
is however very common. Again the work above-quoted says:
“The literary Burmans translate from the English all important
works of science, particularly on astronomy and law.” No
Burman ever yet had sufficient knowledge of the English lan.
guage to translate the simplest work from it, much less any on
science. No European work has been translated into their lan-
guage except by foreigners. A dictionary, compiled principally.
by Rev. A. Judson, with various additions not always correct, by
Rev. J. Colman and Rev. Felix Carey, was published at Calcutta
in 1826 under the supervision of Rev. J. Wade, and although con-
fessedly incomplete, is exceedingly valuable. Mr. Carey publish-
ed a small grammar many years ago which is now entirely out of
print. One has also been compiled by Mr. Judson, and consider-
ably enlarged and illustrated by other missionaries. It is still in
manuscript, owing to the constant demand on the press for reli-
gious works. The way is now open for an easy acquisition of the
language. I reserve an account of translations to a subsequent
communicatiou.
ENGLAND AND AMERICA for the World. The following is an
extract from a letter dated London, May 22d, 1833, addressed to
an English gentleman in China. Alluding to the correspondence
of the British and Foreign Bible Society, the writer says:
... We have observed with inuch pleasure what you have said
respecting the Americans wishing to print Chinese [versions of the]


508 - The Diffusion of MARcii,
But as yet, for the dignity of virtue, for the supremacy of the
Deity, for the regeneration of man, but little has been gained in
these idolatrous regions. We heartily pray that henceforth all
Christendom may be for the world, and not against it.
The Diprusion of Knowledge in China.” Enjoying the bless-
ings of Christianity, with all its concomitant advantages, we have
never felt the evils of that wretched state incident to an uncivilized
life. We may occasionally exclaim of the pagan, “poor creature,
he knows no better :” and we may laugh at his ignorance. If in-
deed we knew of no higher delights than sensual enjoyment, we
might call the ignorant happy, because they know few wants;
though this scale of estimating happiness would concede a still
greater share to the brute, which knows still fewer wants, and the
greatest of all to the stone, which knows none. If we were gifted
with a body only, it would be well to bend our whole attention to
satisfy its wants; but being endowed with an immortal, wonderful
soul, a spirit possessed of the greatest capacities; every mortal of
every clime and color is to provide for its cultivation. Unhappily,
the greater part of our fellow-creatures are too deeply sunk in igno.
rance to feel their mental wants; nor are they in such a state as
to enable them to relieve their wretchedness were it perceived. If
others therefore have the means to improve their condition, their
fellow-men have claims upon them for assistance. Though we
grant that knowledge improperly communicated, may aggravate
the evils under which they labor, yea even become a bane to them;
yet the great advantages derived from the possession of useful
knowledge both individually and nationally, counterbalance all the
incidental evils. -
In relation to China, we who reside on its confines have the larg-
estfield on the globe for beneficence, in blessing this great nation.
The antipathy against foreigners, the contempt in which they are
held by governments, and the vain boasting of mental superiority,
have proved so many barriers against the introduction of European
sciences. At the same time also, facilities of another sort are here
presented greater than in any other Asiatic nation i. their language
is adapted to convey the knowledge which a Chinese is capable
of receiving, so that there are few sciences which might not be
dressed in a Chinese garb: the reading class is very large, the de-
sire of reading new books is never satiated, and their minds though
greatly bigoted, are not entirely blind to those things which may
be useful even when they have a foreign origin.
Our own situation will be improved so soon as we have trans-
fused more enlightened principles into the minds of the people, and
though this may not be the work of a few years, by unwearied ex-
ertions, it will ultimately be accomplished. Under this convic-
tion it is, that the writer of these lines feels himself called to con-
tribute his mite towards this great object. He has very little to
• By Philosinensis.


1834. Knowledge in China. 509
bestow, but this little he bestows cheerfully, hoping that others with
greater means and zeal will lend a stronger hand in this great
work. We have seen in England, a society for the promotion of
useful knowledge, established under the highest patronage, and
even ministers of state do not deem it beneath their dignity to co-
operate. A similar society might be formed at Canton, the opera-
tions of which would extend over the greatest empire in the world.
By vigorous exertions its patrons might thus render to China and
to their own countrymen also, a greater service than it has been hi-
therto possible to effect by individual labor. If the members joined
heart and hand in this great work, much could be effected with
small means and in a little time. To extend useful knowledge in
the widest sense of the word, naturally ought to be the only object.
We do not wish to form scholars, nor publish works for academi-
cians, but to benefit a whole nation.
As there is scarcely any science upon which we do not find one or
another work written in Chinese, we ought to conform our treatises
to the dress in which they have clothed their own. In history, we
have met excellent works which would not do dishonor to the Chi-
nese, if they were translated into the western languages; upon these
we would fix as standard works, and imitate them as closely as
possible in giving them the history of the occidental world, toge-
ther with allusions to the corresponding events in their own history.
In geography, the Chinese possess tolerable works relative to their
own country; but their descriptions of foreign lands are ridiculous,
nor have they any correct idea of their positions. Natural philo-
sophy labors under still greater difficulties; whatever is useful re-
lative to it, is the work of the missionaries; the saine remark ap-
plies to physics; geology is scarcely known; medicine has received
a full share of attention, but would be highly benefited by Euro-
pean aid. We abstain from further remarks; whenever there
shall be a desire to embark in this great work, the writer would be
most happy to lay before the community a statement, with an out-
line of all the points in question.
There are other objects which are entirely foreign; such for
instance as the great improvements and inventions which of late
have been made so rapidly. To these we should wish to call the
attention of the Chinese, to rouse them from their lethargy, and to
make them sensible of their deficiencies; combining these objects
with teaching true principles of morality and religion, which ele-
vate the soul and rouse her attention and gratitude to the Creator
and Savior, we humbly hope that some good would be done in dis.
inthralling this great empire from antiquated customs. These
considerations we submit to the residents in Canton, respecting a
noble enterprise, worthy the combined influence of all wellwishers
of mankind, and higlity creditable to the true friends of China.
We offer them at a time, which is marked by great events; and
whilst the world is making rapid progress in knowledge, this re-
mote but no longer insignificant corner ought likewise to share in
the improvement and the blessing.


510 Peace Societies, und the MARcii,
PEACE Societies, AND THE CoN GREss of Nations. Recent arri-
vals from beyond sea have brought us accounts of the transactions
of peace societies in Geneva, London, and New York. There
are many persons, and theirnumber is increasing, who are begin.
ning to view the business of killing their own species in its proper
light; and there are many others, who considering the subject
merely on the principles of political economy, see it to be too ex-
pensive to property, to human life, and to national prosperity, to
be any longer upheld and vindicated. When we consider the creed
of the Mussulman, and the untutored character of barbarians and
savages, we do not wonder that such men should rise and destroy
their fellow-beings who happen to differ from them in the places
they inhabit, in the clothes they wear, in the food they eat, in the
language they speak, or in some other particulars equally as :n-
important : but when we peruse the constitution of the Prince of
peace, we find it difficult to ascertain on what principles those act,
who, while they love their neighbors and even their enemies,’ un-
dertake at the same time to imaintain a system of human, or rather
inhuman butchery, veiled under the name of war. If it is right for
a man to defend himself from the wild beast of the forest, it is
equally right for him to repel the assault of the assassin or any
other being who assails, with intent to injure, his person or his pro-
perty. But it is a nice question to determine what measures ought
to be adopted by any given state or kingdom to preserve itself in
peace; and it is a question that demands of people and rulers far
more consideration than it has ever yet received. When we re-
duce the system of war to a small scale, so that we can view it in
its full extent, it is at once divested of all its false coloring, and
among civilized men can have no abettors. Should a dozen fami-
lies composing a village of savages, each arm and equip themselves
in order to maintain peace within their own border and through-
out the whole neighborhood, they would act in character, and in
miniature represent but too well the present attitude and conduct
of the nations of Christendom. -
The Peace Society at Geneva is pursuing efficient measures for
diffusing on the continent of Europe, right principles concerning
war: other societies will soon be organized and imitate its example.
The report of the “Society for the promotion of permanent and
universal peace,” which was read before that body at its annual
meeting in London last May, shows that the minds of men are
awaking to a sense of duty on this subject. “The primary step of
peace societies,” says the report, “is to produce a conviction of
the unlawfulness of war on the community at large; for the public
must first imbibe correct opinions upon the subject, before they can
so influence governments as to preserve the peace of the world.”
The New York Observer for July 6th, 1833, states that, “by the li-
berality of two friends of the cause of peace, the board of the Ame-
rican Peace Society are enabled to offer the premium of $1000 for
the best essay on a congress, or court of nations for the amicable
settlement of national differences and the abolition of war.” The
t


1834. Congress of Nations. 511
conditions are, that the essay contain from 60 to 150 octavo pages,
or about these limits, and be transmitted to the office of the society
before the 20th of June, 1834. “The wish of the society and of
the donors is, that the essay may, under God, effect, as to the sub-
ject of war, a revolution in the public mind: may, if possible, pro-
duce in the sentiments men have on this subject, a change, radical
and entire ; may effectually demonstrate that war is needless; that,
in fact, it is as practicable as rational, for nations to decide their
differences by reason; that a resort to swords is irrational, brutal,
cruel, and wicked. As rulers, accordantly with public opinion,
do now require those whom they rule to settle their differences
peaceably; so, the change that is desired being wrought, the peo-
ple, by the resistless power of their united calls, the energetic
inºuence of the popular voice rightly expressed, shall cause that
statesmen become true ministers—the nation's servants shall ad-
just all difficulties of the nation, in the same rightful and legal way.
The essay which shall carry conviction to people and govern-
ments, that national differences can be settled without recourse to
arms—and ought to be, if nen are rational beings, and must be, ere
the full reign of the Saviour on earth can commence,—is the one
sought for. It needs then to show how unadapted to adjust na-
tional diſſerences is the brutal force of war, that teeming source of
human ills, to show, in reference to this adjustment, the perfect
fitness of a court of nations, its advantages, and its feasibility.”
We are glad to see that this subject has been taken up in India.
• The question of war reviewed,' ‘Sketches of the horrors of war,'
and other similar publications, have been reprinted in Calcutta;
and the Christian Observer, for November last, contains a per-
tinent paper relative to the prevention of war.” In the Oriental
Christian Spectator, published at Bombay, a number of spirited
papers have recently appeared, arguing against the lawfulness of
war... “No man,” says the writer of one of those papers, “who be-
lieves in the divine inspiration of holy Writ, can doubt that there
will come a time when the prophetic declaration, “people shall
learn war no more, &c.,’ will be literally fulfilled on earth; but it
must be allowed, on the other hand, that there is no one plain and
direct command in the holy Scriptures, which would seem to force
any Christian soldier to leave the army; yet, notwithstanding, it
will be considered by every Caristian, that the spirit of the whole
New Testament is directly opposed to the practice of war.” And
again the same writer adds; “I doubt not that the time will come,
and is perhaps nearer than we suppose, when every one who com-
mences, not only an unjust war, but even a just one unnecessarily,
and all those who assist therein, will be destested by the whole Chris.
tian community as much as a slave trader is now detested and treat-
ed as a felon. And if every unnecessary war is thus abhorred and
viewed by all Christians as infamous, kings and ministers will soon
convince themselves that most, if not all wars are unnecessary, and
will become ingenious enough to avoid them without endangering
the honor or the safety of the state.”


512 Shipwrecked Foreigners. MARch,
We are unable to conjecture what feelings his majesty Taou-
kwang would entertain concerning a congress of nations, were the
subject duly propounded for his consideration; but we cannot
doubt that, in the present state of his empire, he would rejoice in
the assurance that his dominions were secure from the encroach-
ment of foreign powers. We have no expectations, however, that
the one man who rules over the four seas,' will ever condescend,
until urged by necessity, to meet other potentates of the earth on
terms of equality..
Shipwrecked for EIGNERs. It is well known that the Chinese
authorities on the coast of their own country, always admit the
obligation of providing shipwrecked sufferers with food and closh-
ing; however ill, sometimes, they may perform it. In the 13th
volume of the original Chinese penal code, (Ta Tsing Leuh-le.)
page 10, the law on this subject is given in the form of an imperial
edict which is dated the second year of Keenlung, A. D. 1737.
The following is a translation:—
“Along the whole extent of our coast, it continually happens
that foreign ships and people are driven on shore by gales of wind.
It is hereby ordered that the governors and lieut.-governors of pro-
vinces take the lead, and cause officers to be particularly attentive
in affording compassion ; that they employ the public money to
bestow food and raiment on the sufferers, and to refit their ships.
After which, that they cause their goods to be returned, and see
that they are sent home to their own country. This is doné to
manifest my extremely tender feelings towards men from remote
reigons. Take this order and command it to be an everlasting
law. Respect this.”
The above mandate refers not only to European ships, but to
those of Corea, Japan, and Lewchew, many of which are every
year wrecked on the eoast of China.
The IMPERIAL CLAN, so we translate tsung-shih, “the honor-
able house,” the supreme family. The members of this family,
or rather clan, are under the jurisdiction of a court appointed on
purpose to control them, and they are not subject to the common
laws of the land. The pages of the Peking gazette are often filled
with accounts of their irregular conduct, crimes, and punishments.
From one of these documents before us, it appears that in Peking
they have for the copper coin, a paper representative, a bank-note
in value about a halfpence, which they call tseen-peaou. One
Tseang-yew, a member of the tsung-shih, passed off on a shopman
a forged bank-note, and refused to take it back again. The shop.
man was importunate, and the imperial gentleman gave him a cut
with a sword he had by his side, and brought the fellow to the
ground. One of his partners carried him off, laid him on a couch.


1834. Correspondence, &c. . 515
We cannot consider the reply to our address as any assurance
of this innocent man's safety: and as it is in the name of the En-
glish that he is detained, we are called upon by our office again to
protest against any injury being offered him. Should he be al-
lowed to become an unhappy victim to his own folly, we hereby
declare, that after this public declaration, we cannot be held re-
sponsible for any consequences. Further, we have to repeat, that
the person, who has been persuaded to come up from Macao, is
not in any way connected with the affray at Cum-sing-moon; that
he has not “in obedience to the laws surrendered himself,” but is,
in violation of the laws, a substitute for a person accused of mur.
der. We accordingly request of your excellency his immediate
liberation. " . . . * * * We have, &c. ! . .
(Signed by the president for the committee.)
Canton, January 29th, 1834. - - , "
Loo, governor of Canton, &c. &c., hereby issues his commands
to the hong-merchants. ** - -
On the 20th day of the present moon (January 29th), the En-
glish chief Davis, and the others, again presented a statement
concerning the foreigner who has delivered himself up to the
public courts. They have again made a declaration. Besides
issuing a public reply to their statement, (it is here remarked) that
the circumstances and phraseology of their document are exceed.
ingly inexplicable. How could an innocent man be willing to be
persuaded by others to confess himself guilty! Further, there is
the expression: “Because of his own folly, and unhappily lose
his life.” The affair emanated from no intention of the heart, and
assuredly will not lead to the forfeiture of life. To ascertain whe.
ther or not the said chief and others entertain doubts and fears
which have led to their presenting this statement, an order is here.
by issued. As soon as the order reaches the hong-merchants, let
them forthwith immediately enjoin it on the said chief and others
that they, in obedience thereto, may present a reply. Oppose
not. A special order.
(Canton, February 26, 1834.)
To his excellency, the viceroy, &c. &c. &c.
Sir, The declaration contained in your excellency's last reply,
that the man on whose behalf we protested will “assuredly not
lose his life,” has given us great sntisfaction, and we are happy to
find that our apprehensions lest he should be put to death were
mistaken. It now only remains for us to request that your excel.
lency will issue your commands for his liberation, in order that the
doubts and fears of foreigners at Canton may be finally set at
rest concerning him. We have, &c.
- - (Signed by the president, for the committee.)
Macao, February 11th, 1834.
(True copies.) J. H. ASTELL, Secretary.


516
The Royal Asiatic Society.
*
MARch,
LITERARY NOTICEs.
Proceedings of the tenth an-
nual meeting of the Royal Asia-
tic Society of Great Britain
and Ireland, held May 11th,
1833. London.
The energies of this noble in-
stitution, during the year 1832.
33, were directed by its commit.
tee of correspondence to the
following objects:
1. To an examination into the cha-
racter and tendency of all the various
works which are used in the different
parts of British India by the several
classes of Hindoos, for the education
of their youth t 2. To the collection,
in different parts of India, of such ma-
terials as may be necessary to enable
the writers upon political economy in
England to write a statistical account
of the whole of British India: 2. To
the collection, in India, of such mate.
rials as may be necessary to enable
rofessor Ritter to complete the work
. is about to publish, on the geogra-
phy of Asia: 4. To the history of the
different parts of British India from
the most ancient times, with respect
to the right of the sovereigns of the
country to call upon their subjects to
labor on particular occasions; and
also with respect to the right of a mas-
ter over his domestic slave, and also
over the slave who is attached to the
soil: 5. To the history of the particu-
lar forms of representative govern-
ment which, according to Mackenzie
and others, appear to have prevailed
in one part of Malabar for three or four
centuries: 6. To the histories of the
provinces of Tanjore, Trichinopoly,
&c., as connected with the trade of
Europeandother quarters of the globe:
7. To the history of the pearl fisheries,
&c.; 8. To the nature of the instruc-
tions which are to be sent to lord Nu-
gent at Corfu, and to the chevalier
Crot Bey at Alexandria, for the auxi-
liary Asiatic societies which they are
respectively about to establish.at those
places: and 9. To the various means
which ought to be adopted for excit.
ing, both in England and in British
india, an interestin favor of the differ.
ent objects for the attainment of which
the Royal Asiatic Society was estab-
lished.
Not many more anniversaries
of the Royal Society will be ce-
lebrated, we hope, before its
inquiries shall be directed be.
yond the Ganges to China and
the adjacent kingdoms and
states, fields which are as yet
almost entirely unexplored: we
are encouraged in this hope, by
the fact, that a small number of
papers concerning these coun.
tries have already found a place
in their “Transactions.” The
following is a list of those which
refer to this country: 1. Me.
moirs concerning the Chinese:
2. The art of writing the Chinese
character with correctness: 3.
Geographical notice of the from-
tiers of the Burman and Chi-
nese empires: 4. Notices of west.
ern Tartary: 5. Essay on the
poetry of the Chinese; by J. F.
Davis esq. F. R. s., M. R. A. s. 6.
Some account of a secret as-
sociation in Chiná, entitled the
Triad Society; by the late Dr.
Milne, principal of the Anglo-
chinese college, Malacca: 7.
Some account of charms, talis.
māns and felicitous append.
ages worn about the person, or
hung up in houses, &c., used
by the Chinese; by John Ro-
bert Morrison esq., Cor. M. R.
A. s. 8. Notices of China; by
Padre Serra. In addition to
these, the “Transactions’ contain
several extracts from the Peking
gazettes, and also edićts issued
by local officers of Canton,
translated by Mr. Davis and
the Rev. Dr. Morrison,


Jara.
MARch,
RELIGIOUS INTELLIGENCE. w
JAvA. All those who are in-
terested in the progress of truth
and righteousness, the increase
of knowledge, and the improve-
ment of their fellow-men, will
read with pleasing emotions the
following facts and extracts con.
cerning Christian efforts in Java:
they are taken from a manu-
script “Report of the mission
station at Batavia, for 1833,”
which has been very obligingly
forwarded to us by the Rev.
Walter H. Medhurst, by whom,
and by Mr. William Young jr.,
assistant missionary, it is sign-
ed. The report is dated Oct.
1st, 1833, and includes twelve
months immediately preced.
ing that time. Preaching the
word, the preparation and dis-
tribution of books, and the su-
perintending of schools, have
been the chief objects of the
mission, and form the leading
topics of the report.
Preaching. Eight religious
services are performed every
week, at which about 500 per-
sons in all are brought under the
sound of the gospel: 1. On
Sabbath morning, a sermon is
preached in the chapel, when
20 or 30 individuals, besides
children, usually attend ; 2. on
Lord's day evening another ser-
mon is preached; 3. on Thurs-
day evening a prayer meeting
is held, and an address is given:
these three services are conduct-
ed in English, and the two lat-
ter are less numerously attended
than the first : 4. a Malay, ser-
vice in the mission chapel, Sab-
bath noon, at which about 40
attend : 5. a similar exercise on
Tuesday evening, when about 10
persons, besides children, attend;
6. a catechetical exercise for the
benefit of the Malays, is held
Wednesday afternoon; 7. ser.
vices for the Malay congregation
in the Dutch chapel, and for the
native convicts, every alternate
Sabbath afternoon; and 8. a ser-
mon is preached on Friday even-
ing in a school-room near town,
at which from 20 to 30 country
born Christians attend. In ad-
dition to these, occasional ser-
vices are held at Depok and
Tugoe, where Christian congre.
gations are assembled : at the
former place, the school chil-
dren are 40, the church mem-
bers 40, and the catechumens
20; among these “the rising
generation are the most promis-
ing, exhibiting in their intelligent
countenances and ready an-
swers, the striking effects of
education and culture on the
human mind, as compared with
those who have not been bless-
ed with the same advantages.”
Marked attention and serious-
ness characterize all the reli-
gious meetings, and general im.
provement in the knowledge of
divine things is in some evident-
ly conspicuous. “Our situa.
tion,” say the writers of the re-
port, “ in a foreign colony,
where decency is too frequently
outraged without restraint, ren-
ders it the more difficult to effect
any moral reformation in the
habits of those around us ; but
the influences of the divine Spi-
rit are sufficiently powerful to
make those who are accustomed
to do eyil learn to do well ; for


1834.
5 19
Java.
these therefore we look and pray,
hoping that the Lord will soon
open the windows of heaven,
and shower down his blessing
upon us.”
Again; speaking of the Malay
attendants at the mission cha-
pel, they say: “about one half
of them are soldiers, whe came
originally from Menado, in the
island of Celebes, and being
without any religion were desir-
ous of embracing that of the
g-spel. On their first arrival,
nearly two years ago, they were
entirely ignorant of letters, and
were nor a little jeered and ri.
diculed by their more advanced
companions, for their presump-
tion in aiming to raise them.
selves from their original igno-
rance and blindness: but they
persevered in their endeavors,
going regularly to the regiment-
al school, and attending the
religious exercises at the mission
chapel, until at length they were
able to read and understand the
Scriptures. Some who appear-
ed more proficient than the rest,
were selected as candidates for
Christian baptism, and after
much trial, consideration and
prayer, on Lord's day, Septem-
ber 29th, six of them were ad-
mitted to the reception of that
ordinance.
“It was a joyful day for us,
after such long waiting, to see
in some small degree the fruits
of our endeavors, and to wit-
ness, six heathens coming for.
ward to testify their faith in the
Lord Jesus, and their determi.
nation by the strength of divine
grace, to persevere in following
him even to the end. Tears of
joy were shed on earth, and
harps of joy were doubtless
struck in heaven, over these re-
turning and repenting sinters.
In addition to these six, twelve
more continue as candidates for
the same privileges who attend
with great seriousness, and learn
with diligence the lessons allot-
ed them. In their quarters,
they assemble together for mu-
tual instruction and reading the
Scriptures, encouraging one an-
other in good things, and bear-
ing with meekness the ridicule
cast upon them.”
Besides preaching the gospel
to assembled congregations,
they engage in other labors
which though varied are unin.
terrupted; these “consist in
daily visits to the Chinese streets
and Malay villages, together
with frequent tours to the mar-
kets and fairs around. In these
visits, religious conversation is
immediately entered on, which
with both Mohammedans and
heathens is not so difficult of
introduction, as it is with many
who are called Christians. With
the natives of the east it is con-
sidered neither impolite nor un-
seasonable to introduce religious
discourse, and the very circum-
stance of the missionary who
engages in it having to differ in
many respects from his hearers,
in their long cherished and much
loved opinions, imparts a kind
of liveliness and interest to the
conversation, which it would
not otherwise possess. A be.
ginning is made with a few re-
marks on things about which
both speaker and hearers are
entirely agreed; such as the re-
compense of vice and virtue,
the general government of God,
our obligations towards him; a
transition is then made to vari-
ous topics, with which the hear.
ers are little if any acquainted,


520 Jura.
MARch.
but which they do not object to
hear, such as the undertaking of
Jesus Christ for sinners, his life,
death, and resurrection, together
with his power and ability to
save all that come unto God by
him. After this, the conversa-
tion generally turns on things
in which we differ, such as the
sin and folly of idolatry, and the
utter uselessness of every false
refuge to which the sinner is
apt to cling, since there is no
other name given under heaven
among men whereby we can be
saved, but the name of Christ
Jesus. This generally excites
opposition, and the politest Chi-
nese, together with the most
servile Malay, will not stand to
have all their hopes swept away,
and all their much loved prac.
tices condemned, without striv-
ing to say something in their own
defense; the common plea of the
Chinese is the custom of their
country, the example of their
forefathers, and the dread of
appearing singular. Some have
urged, that if they do not sub-
scribe to the idolatrous feasts
abroad, and practice its ceremo-
nies at home, they will soon have
the troublesome office of master
of ceremonies at a sacrifice al-
loted them, which would occa-
sion them both inconvenience
and expense if undertaken, and
subject them to fine and im-
prisonment if refused. Others
again, who pretend to have
-more feeling urge, that, they
could not bring their minds to
neglect the usual sacrifices to
their deceased ancestors, while
they see others offering them.
Not a few however plead for the
real truth and efficacy of their
idolatrous system, and that
fherefore it is both right and
proper to maintain it. The Chi-
nese seldom make many objec-
tions to the gospel plan of salva.
tion, principally because they
do not seek to understand, or
care to avail themselves of it.
They have no conviction of sin,
consequently no desires after
pardon, nor anxiety to flee from
the wrath to come; and there-
fore the plain unvarnished take
of Jesus of Nazareth dying for
sinners, awakens few sympa-
thies, excites no attention, a.d
meets with no opposition. They
are little concerned about a Sa.
vior of any kind, much less of
one who comes recommended
to them by foreigners, of the
place of whose birth they have
never heard, and of the facts of
whose history they are unable to
judge. They are moreover so
incessantly occupied with the
business of money-making, and
so much taken up with the in-
quiry of what they shall eat, and
what they shall drink, that they
have little time and less heart
for the still more important
question, of what they shall do
to be saved.” -
Books. The whole number
of books and tracts printed du-
ring the year was 15,225, con-
taining 574,058 pages; a part of
these were printed by means of
blocks, and a part by lithogra-
phy: the number distributed,
including 4557 sent to China
for Mr. Gutzlaff, , was 18,092:
of these 13 were in French, 180
English, 728 Javanese, 2271
Dutch, 5918 Malay, and 8982
Chinese. -
“In all our visits to the na-
tive population,” quoting again
the words of the report, “one
great object is the distribution of
tracts whether from house to
!


522.
MARch,
Sandwich Islands.
“bound on a tour of observation
and inquiry among the islands
of the Indian Archipelago.” A.
mong the primary objects which
are to a claim: their attention
wherever they go, “are the topo.,
graphy of the islands or districts,..
the various communities, popu...
lation, languages, and religions,
the intellectual, the moral and-
social, condition of the people,
their disposition to receive Chris-,
tian teachers—the means of ac-
cess to , them, and the facilities
for sustaining a mission, when
once commenced among them.”
SANdwich Islands. Some
of our friends have expressed
surprise that we should remain
silent, while reports have been
abroad aspersing the character
of Christian missionaries at the
Sandwich Islands. We were
not silent because we believed
or even suspected those reports
were true. We knew too well
the parties, both the assailants
and those attacked, to entertain
any doubts on the subject. And
though we have very great con-
fidence in the individuals who
compose that mission, still we
have more fears that they will
become weary, or too confident
of success, and so fail through
want of perseverance and watch-
fulness, than that they will be
overthrown by the foe from
without. The progress of im-
provement since the mission
commeneed in 1820, is most sig-
nal, , and, calls for devout grati-
tude to God, who has given the
increase; the work however is
only in its infancy and requires
patience, zeal, and faith--all of
a higher order than have hither.
to been exercised, that the work
may be carried on to perfection,
We have-letters from the is...
lands to the 7th of February
1834: the view of the mission,
which we present below is dated:
Honolulu, Oahu, Oct. 2d, 1833.
In reply to our inquiries, our.
correspondent says: ºt.’,
“You wish us to give you facts.
respecting our mission. The
reading world already. , teems,
with facts, and falsehood too,
respecting ...the mission at the:
Sandwich Islands; but,the great
majority of English and Ame, i.
can readers are nearly as igno-
rant of the true state of things,
here, as they are of the interior
of the “Celestial empire.’ This
ignorance, or rather misappre-
hension, has resulted from va-
rious causes. One extreme na-
turally leads to the other. The
writers on one side of the ques-
tion have shown so much bare-
faced absurdity and falsehood in
their representations, that the
friends of missions in defense
of the cause have sometimes
gone to the opposite extreme,
and presented only the fair side
of the picture, and that in glow-
ing colors. Besides, it is more
pleasant to missionaries and to
missionary agents, and they are
inclined to imagine more bene-
ficial to their cause, to present
to the public encouraging facts
and circumstances, than those
which are discouraging. . On
this account, the remarkable
success, with which God has fa-
wored this mission, has been
dwelt upon and magnified to an
extreme, while the dark side of
the picture has been kept out of
view, or passed over slightly.
“But the great, source of
misapprehensſon...respecting the
state of things is owing, I think,
to the nature of the subject,


524
MARcil,
Sandwich Islands.
in feeble health, and able to
do but little missionary work.
These 28 missionaries are locat-
ed at 10 different stations, and
on 5 different islands. Public
worship is regularly maintained
at all these places, and occasion-
ally in several other parts of the
islands. Our congregations have
considerably diminished during
the past year. They now vary
from 300 to 1500 or 2000.
“We have a high-school just
going into operation. It has
many difficulties to struggle with,
as everything has to be done;
we must begin at the very foun-
dation. We cannot, therefore,
anticipate with any certainty its
results. It contained 63 schol-
ars during the last year. Se-
veral more have recently enter.
ed. It is under the instruction
of Mr. Andrews as principal.
The progress of the scholars
must at present be slow, owing
to the want of hooks, and other
means of instruction. -
“The number of marriages du
ring the last year, at eight of the
stations,—there were no returns
from the other two—was 1290;
the number of readers in our
schools, was 20, 184; the num-
ber of persons admitted to the
church during the year, was
72; and the whole number of
persons admitted to the church,
since the commencement of the
mission, is 669. This statement
is made out from the reports of
the different stations presented
at the last general meeting of
the mission in June.
“A few have been excluded
from our churches for miscon-
duct, and several have died;
so that the present number of
church members is somewhat
less than that given above. Ma-
my who have been taught in our
schools are not classed as read-
ers, and of course, are not in-
cluded in the number; and some
who are included, are very in-
different readers.
“In addition to our common
schools taught by native teach-
ers, (which by the way hardly
deserve the name of schools, for
they are taught with very little
system or efficiency,) we have
schools at most or all of our sta-
tions taught by some of our ovºn
number, and designed particu-
larly to qualify teachers for in-
structing the common schools.
In these station schools, read-
ing, writing, arithmetic and
geography are taught.
“As it regards printing, &c.,
we have two iron presses, and
two old Ramage presses. One
of them will soon be removed to
Lahaina, in order to facilitate
the business of making books
for the high-school. The other
presses will be used at this place.
The New Testament has all
been published in the native
language; from the Old Tes-
tament, most of Genesis, Exo-
dus, and Joshua, and a small
part of Leviticus, the whole of
Deuteronomy, and 23 Psalms.
More of the Old Testament is
nearly ready for the press. In
addition to the above, we have
published several elementary
school-books, catechisms, tracts,
&c. The whole number of
pages printed at our presses du-
ring the last year amounted to
9,518,560; most of them in
18 mo. These are eagerly re-
ceived and read by thousands;
but the people need more gene-
ral knowledge and mental dis-
cipline to derive all the benefit
from our books which is to be


1834.
Sandwich Islands. 525
disired. Multitudes cannot read,
and of course, have no special
desire for books.
“Gradual improvements are
made by the people, especially
by the chiefs, in external appear-
ance, and in the arts and usages
of civilized life, but they can be
regarded as only just emerging
from a state of barbarism. Much
time must yet elapse, under the
most favorable auspices, before
they will deserve to be called a
c; wilized people. It is absurd
to suppose, that a nation can be
raised from the lowest state of
barbarism to civilization in the
short space of ten, or twelve
years, without the intervention
of a miracle. A manifest pro-
gress, however, is perceptible
from year to year; and the
means now in operation, and
others, which may be put in
operation will, we trust, with
the blessing of God, produce the
expected result. -
“I have perhaps already wea-
ried your patience, but I cannot
close this letter, without advert-
ing for a moment to an article
in the Chinese Repository for
July, 1832, page 100. After a
few remarks, under the head of
Persecution, the writer says:
• We have been led to these re-
flections, by various reports con-
cerning the missionaries in the
South Sea Islands. If the mis-
sionaries do not protest against
the chiefs' persecuting their
subjects, or strangers, they do
exceedingly wrong. They should
know, and teach the chiefs, who
profess Christianity, that, the
discipline of a voluntary society
of Christians, i. e., a Christian
church, ought not to be enforced
as laws for the regulation of their
subjects generally.”
“On reading these remarks, I
was not certain, whether the
writer intended to include in the
phrase “South Sea Islands,’ the
Sandwich Islands or not. I am
not aware, however, that the
remarks apply any better to the
missionaries in the Society and
Georgian Islands, than to the
missionaries in the Sandwich
Islands. You doubtless hear
various reports concerning us,
and it would not be strange, if,
among others, you should hear
reports of our persecutions. I
am pleased with the sentiments
of the article. To bear our tes.
timony against anything, which
can properly be called persecu.
tion, we are certainly bound to
do in all proper circumstances,
as lovers of political and reli-
gious liberty, in the cradle of
which we have been nurtured.
But I am not aware, that the
chiefs here can be justly charged
with persecution, unless it be in
the case of some of their own
subjects, who became followers
of the jesuits. And it is doubt.
ful whether their conduct in this
case can be called persecution
for conscience' sake. When
they sent away the two Ca-
tholic priests from the islands,
they exercised a right, which
every nation exercises. How
wisely and justly, it was exer.
cised in that case, I shall not
now undertake to discuss. You
will see the subject very fairly
represented in the Missionary
Herald, and in the last report
of the American Board. Some
of the measures of the chiefs
with regard to the followers of
the jesuits, to say the least, bore
hard upon persecution; but
these measures were disapproved
of by the missionaries. But to
~


Sandwich Islands.
MArch,
stimate properly the conduct
of the chiefs in this case, they
must not be placed in the condi.
tion of the enlightened rulers of
the present age but rather in
the condition of the heads of
families. This is very much the
relation, which they have always
regarded themselves as holding
towards their subjects. They
exercise much the same author-
ity over their people, that a pa.
rent exercises over his children.
It must be a long time before the
principles of civil and religious
liberty can be understood, and
brought into complete operation
atmong the people of the Sand-
wich Islands.
“I am not aware, that the chiefs
have ever thought of adopting
the discipline of the church, as
laws for the regulation of their
subjects generally. They have
it is true, endeavored to form
their laws upon the principles
of the Bible, so far as to make
regulations for the external ob.
servance of the Sabbath, for the
suppression of drunkenness, for.
nication and, adultery. lf this
is enforcing the discipline of the
church upon their subjects, we
should hope that all Christian
rulers would do the same. So
far from “enforcing the disci.
pline of the church upon their.
subjects generally, the chiefs,
who are members of the church,
have nothing to do with enforc.
ing the discipline of the church,
even upon its own members;
the missionaries thinking it pru-
dent for the present to retain
this power in their own hands.
The whole external change has
undoubtedly, been owing, in a
great measure, to the influ-
ence of the chiefs, but this in-
fluence, so far, as religion is
concerned, has been a kind of
paternal influence, and not the
influence of law. No civil pe.
nalty has ever been inflicted on
their subjects by the chiefs for
neglecting schools, public wor-
ship, &c. . . . * * * ... "
“I feel very sensibly the force
of the remarks in the article re-
ferred to. The fact that so
many of the chiefs are mem.
bers of the Christian church,
renders great caution necessary
on our part to keep the church
distinct from the state, and free
from hypocritical members. In
past ages, the frowns of royalty
have, in many instances, proved
a blessing to the church, while
its smiles have proved a curse.
The church should, therefore,
rejoice with trembling, when
caressed by civil power. We
are warned by what we have
already seen here not to put our
trust in princes. They have
done much, to be sure, to bring
about an external reformation
among the people, but this very
fact renders us less confident of
its permanency. We are alrea.
dy reminded, that, should the
popular current turn against
morality and religion, much that
is now fair and inviting will be
swept away, and a great army
will arise here to espouse, the
cause of the enemy. We wish,
therefore, to be prepared for re-
verses, and we wish our friends
to be prepared for them; and
we wish them, when reverses
come, not to feel that all is lost;
for it can certainly be no loss to
the church to be purified, and
separated from its dross. Let
us then, confide more in God to
convert the nations to himself,
He'alone came accomplish “the
work.” . . . . . . . ****:


528 Journal of Occurrences.
theim in a sitnilar way, and two inore
are to follow. Everything is still
quiet here. The ostensible cause of
this war is said to be the oppressions
practiced on Camboja, and the ob.
structions of Siamese commerce.
“The king of Siam is employing his
Burman subjects in laying out plans
of the Burman country, the roads,
distances of places, &c., but for what
purpose I know not. The people in-
form me that an English embassador
has come from Maulmein to the Siam-
ese borders with 500 foreigners and
500 Burmans. Those intimately con-
nected with the government allow that
one has come with a great company
of attendants, but that the king refuses
to allow him to advanee, unless some
of them are dismissed. P. s. January
7th. Another detachment of soldiers
has gone on to Cochinchina, and the
English embassador has returned with-
out visiting this city.”
Kidnapping children. A recent
number of the Peking gazette con-
tains bitter complaints from one of the
censors, about a system of kidnapping
children and young persons in Pe.
king. The agents of this inhuman
traffic are women, who, when con-
victed get off easily, by pleading ge.
neral laws in favor of their sex: so
that, instead of corporeal punishment,
or transportation, for stealing and sell.
ing children, they are merely fined.
The yushe, or imperial remembrancer,
suggests to his majesty the exemplary
severe punishment of a few of these
women, to operate as a warning to
the rest. He recommends that they
should be transported and given as
slaves to the common soldiers.
This punishment is one way of get-
ting rid of their evil acts in one place,
but it does not promise much for the
improvement of the morals of the em.
pire. However, to get rid of a pre-
sent and a pressing evil, seems all that
is contemplated by most of the go-
vernments of the world. The prin-
ciple of obtaining the greatest happi.
ness for the moment, is substituted for
that of obtaining the greatest happi-
ness for a long continued course of
time—the Christian system is reversed.
• TMPERIAL SEveRrty. From the
province of Honan a reference has
been made to the emperor recom-
mending to mercy a man under sen-
tence of decapitation. Lehe stole
something from Lewhwuy and run
off with it. Lewhwuy pursued, and
the thief dropped his booty. But the
pursuer being dim of sight did not ob.
serve this and caught Lehe, whom
he began to beat severely with his
fist. Lehe, smarting under the pain,
and his passions excited, converted his
head into a battering ram; rushed
against Lewhwuy's stom, ch, and
. him such a thrust as knock d him
own and caused his death. It is urg-
ed in favor of the thief that he did lot
use violence to the owner of the pro-
perty, nor did he plot his death. The
manslaying was unintentional, done in
a fit of excitement, and therefore his
life may be spared.
The emperor answers that it is con-
trary to the letter of the law; and if
indeed there had been left a thread of
mercy, he himself would have taken
hold of it, without this suggestion.
Let therefore Lehe, as has already
been decided, be given to the sword.
The Pihleen keaou, or Sect of the
Water-lily, has often given trouble to
the present dynasty. In the province
of Ganhwuy a man has been seized
charged with an attempt to revive it.
The law requires that those who are
not leaders should be transported to
western Tartary and given as slaves
to the Mohammedan begs, or other
great men who have power to control
them. The leaders must suffer death.
Suicide.—A few days ago a poor
woman named Pae, with her eldest
daughter eighteen years of are, hang;
ed themselves, and left unprotected
five female children and three boys.
The family was once in better cir-
cumstances. The husband became
dissipated, and hunger and want has
been of late the lot of the family; in
consequence of which, in the absence
of right principles, these two unhappy
persons, weary of life, committed sui-
cide. The neighborhood subscrib-
ed for coffins to inter them. What
is to become of the motherless and
helpless children none can tell.
Postscript. The weather during the month (to the 28th), has been mild, and
the prospect for the first crop of rice is fair.—The foreign ships are very
numerous for the season, there being 17 in port, and 20 at Lintin.
º


THIE
CH IN E S E R E POSITOR Y.
Vol. II.-April, 1834.—No. 12.
REVIEW,
Report of proceedings on a voyage to the northern
ports of China, in the ship Lord Amherst: ez-
tracted from papers printed by order of the House
of Commons, relating to the trade with China. By
H. H. LINDs.AY. London, 1833.
Journal of two voyages along the coast df China, in
1831 and 1832; the first in a Chinese junk, the
second in the British ship Lord Amherst: with
notices of Corea, Lewchew, &c. By Charles
* r * GUtzi.AFF. New York, 1833.
Except at the entrance of the ports of Canton and
Macao, the waters which wash the shores of China,
Corea, Japan, Lewchew, and Formosa, have seldom
been visited by foreign ships during the last one hun-
dred years: consequently, most of the works extant,
which treat of these seas, were written, or have been
compiled from accounts of surveys which were made
prior to that time. Considering only the population
and various productions and wants of these empires
and kingdoms, together with the great extent of sea-
board, and the number and magnitude of their rivers,
it seems surprising that they have attracted so little
attention. Nowhere else are such wide fields open
for enterprise, yet in no other part of the world is so
little exhibited. In spite of a thousand hindrances,
the power of steam is opening a way into the centre


532 Journal of Messrs. - APRIL,
any information that I was acting in the employment
of the Company; and therefore gave the following re-
port in writing, with which they professed themselves
perfectly satisfied: “The ship is one of the English
nation fron Bengal; her complement is 70 men; she
is commanded by Hoo Heane, and is bound for Ja-
pan.’ This report, though true in some respects, yet
certainly gives no clue for the Chinese to trace the
ship. She is from Bengal, and at the period I wrote
`this, it was anticipated that Japan would be compris-
ed in the voyage.” As they expected to have fre-
quent communication with the Chinese, Mr. Lindsay
thought it best to style himself the commander of the
ship; and as his ówn name would be known at Can-
ton, he substituted for it his Christian name, Hugh
Hamilton, which he wrote Hoo Heame. Keale
was also adopted for the Christian name of Mr. G.
The general appearance of the coast in the pro-
vince of Canton, is described as barren and arid; the
people as being employed in the manufacture of su-
gar, the staple article of export in most of the districts
already visited. Salt, which is made by the evapora-
tion of sea-water, is another of the principal produc-
tions. The following extracts are from Mr. Lind-
say's report:
“The island of Nan-aou (in the local dialect Namoh,) is about
fourteen miles in length, and of irregular breadth, varying from
one mile to five or six. On the northern side are two deep bays,
at the bottom of which are large villages and a considerable extent
of cultivated ground. The general appearance of the island is
mountainous and barren, though Chinese industry has here shown
what effects patience and perseverance may produce in despite of
the niggardness of nature. The mandarin resides at the eastern town,
which is called Nan-tsze. This island, which is half in Canton,
and half in Fuhkeen province, is the second naval station of Can-
ton. It is the residence of a tsungkwan, or admiral, who has
a nominal force of 5,237 men under his command, of which 4,078
belong to Canton, and 1159 to Fuhkeen. The existence, however,
of these troops is very doubtful. The defenses of the station,
as we saw it, consisted of seven or eight small junks, in appearance
resembling the smaller class of Fuhkeen trading vessels, and in
all respects inferior to those of Canton. On an island, at the en-
trance of the bay, are two forts, the upper one mounting eight, the


1834. Lindsay and Gutzlaff. 533
lower six guns; but as is invariably the case in Chinese fortifica-
tions, they are both commanded by heights immediately behind
them; up the bay there is another small fort without any guns.
Here also, we met with the strongest proofs of the jealousy and sus-
picion of the mandarins. Wishing to go on board of one of the
war junks, we were refused admission, under the pretence that the
admiral had issued positive orders that no one should hold the
slightest communication with us. There were several large trad.
ing vessels windbound here, and on sailing past one we went on
board by the express invitation of her commander, an intelligent
and respectable person, who received us with the greatest cordiali-
ty. We had been here but a few minutes, before no Jess than three
smal. war boats with mandarins joined us, and at first commenced
engrily upbraiding the captain, for entering into communication
with barbarians. An interesting and amusing conversation follow-
ed, in which we soon found, that though our opponents were very
ready to commence with violent and angry words, yet that a mix-
ture of independent and good humored argument very soon lowered
their tone, and they ended by apologizing for the uncivil reception
we had met with ; the blame they threw entirely on their superiors;
and we then spent half an hour talking on various subjects in the
most friendly manner. The point which seemed most to puzzle
them, and indeed gave them most uneasiness, was hearing foreign-
ers converse in their own language, and show some knowledge of
their local institutions and geography; it was, however, decided
among them that Mr. Gutzlaff was a Chinese from Amoy, and one
of them asked me in a confidential way, to confess that their surmise
was true. I took some trouble to explain to him that far from such
being the case, the gentleman had only been six years out of Eu-
rope, and previously to that was perfectly unacquainted with the
language. Having given all the information required for a report
to the mandarins, we parted on friendly terms, the chief man say-
ing to me, “we shall report you to be well disposed persons, who
thoroughly understand the rules of propriety.” Much regret was al-
so expressed at their not daring to avail themselves of my invita.
tion to visit the ship. Here, as at Keā-tsze, in unguarded freedom
of conversation, the mandarins dropped hints expressive of the
great alarm which the admiral had been in, thinking us a ship of
war, as reports had reached them that a numerous fleet was ex-
pected at Canton. - - -
“We had now quitted Canton province and entered that of Fuh-
keen. During the last month we had constant intercourse with
the people at every place where we stopped. Strangers and un-
protected, either by any force of our own, or by the countenance of
the government, we had repeatedly entered their villages, and been
surrounded by hundreds of Chinese; and instead of the rudeness
and insult which is but too frequent near Canton, we had met with
nothing but expressions of friendship and good-will. It is true the
places we have hitherto visited, are mostly poor, nor is it proba-
ble that much advantage will ever arise from intercourse with them :


1834. Lindsay and Gutzlaff. 535
long time had a factory here'; and the Spanish have
to this day a nominal right to come hither. The cause
of the cessation of trade has not been so much the
prohibitions of the emperor, as the extortions to
which it was subject. The renewal of commerce
will have the most beneficial influence both upon the
nation engaging in it, and upon the Chinese.”
Boldness, pride and generosity are characteristics
of the people of Amoy. When abroad, they often
acquire great influence. “One of their descendants,
as late as the middle of the last century, ascended
the throne of Siam.” But at home, their enterprise
is repressed by the heavy exactions of government.
Passing over many particulars relative to difficulties
which were thrown in the way of our adventurers
by the Chinese authoritics of Amoy, we give the fol-
lowing summary in Mr. L.'s own words. He says:
“On subsequent reflection, I felt convinced in my own mind,
that in our negotiation with the authorities of this place, I had com-
mitted several errors, the knowledge of which would, however,
prove useful to me in future; first, I was wrong.in seeking for an
interview with the higher officers of government without a distinct
previous understanding that we were to be treated with due civility
and courtesy; by standing in the presence of mandarins of infe.
rior rank who were seated near the tetuh, we evidently lowered our-
selves in their estimation. The experience I acquired here, also
rendered it apparent to me, that by a too scrupulous acquiescence
with what the local authorities chose to term the invariable laws
of the celestial empire, the object of our present voyage, which is
principally for the acquisition of information, would in all proba-
bility be entirely thwarted; wherever we go, we evidently must be
prepared to receive positive orders instantly to depart, with threats
of the most serious consequences in case we dare to disobey. It
therefore became a matter of reflection how far I should feel my-
self justified in disobeying their injunctions, and at least trying the
experiment of what measures the authorities would take for enforc-
ing them, when they saw that mere words were disregarded by us.
“On arriving here, we were positively prohibited from setting foot
on shore, and ordered to sail away without a moment's delay. Both
these points were disobeyed, and the comparatively trifling object of
obtaining our provisions on our own terms, was successfully con-
tested; would not more important points have been granted to us,
if we had insisted on them The result of our subsequent pro-
ceedings at Fuhchow foo convinced me that less submission on
our parts would have met with greater readiness to meet our wish-
es on theirs. -


536 Journals of JMessrs. . APRii.,
“We remained at Amoy till the 7th instant, but nothing else
worthy of remark occurred, except the somewhat singular behavior
of the authorities in sending a simple sailor from one of the trad-
ing junks, to act as our comprador, instead of one of their own de-
pendents as had been agreed at the audience. Subsequent to that.
day, no mandarin of any description was allowed to visit the ship,
and one Le laouyay, who had always shown himself very civil and
obliging, sent a message to me expressive of his regret at not being
allowed to come and bid us farewell. No reason can be assigned
for this conduct, excepting a jealous apprehension lest we should
establish a too favorable impression of the justice and reason of our
arguments. The conduct of the authorities towards the poor man
who was commissioned to provide us with provisions, was fan more
unaccountable, and places the wretched weakness and injustice of
the government in a very strong light; indeed, it is difficult to
think or speak with any respect of a government which is reduced
to such contemptible expedients to keep up a semblance of author-
ity. This man had become acquainted with Mr. Gutzlaff during
his former visit to Mantchou Tartary; and having received some
benefits from him, was anxious to come and converse with him.
He recognized his features while we were walking through the
streets of Amoy; and having some friend in the funfoo's office, he
requested permission to be allowed to accompany him on board
in a mandarin boat. This officer, hearing the circumstances, and
his acquaintance with Mr. Gutzlaff, immediately directed him to go
and officiate as our comprador; and thus a poor, illiterate sailor,
who could neither read nor write, found himself suddenly forced
into the situation of mediator between ourselves and the highest
officers of government; both himself and the junk he belonged to
were made responsibie for our acts, over which certainly he could
have no inăuence or control. Our water and provisions being all
on board on the morning of the 6th of April, this man earnestly
requested that I would immediately move the ship. On my inquir:
ing what possible interest he could have in our movements, he told
me that the mandarins had stopped the sailing of his junk, which
was on the point of starting to Formosa, until our departure, and
had further threatened him with corporeal punishment -unless he
induced us to depart. I at first refused him any answer, but sent
him with a message to the tetuh, stating that I would readily give
him a proper reply if a suitable messenger was sent, but otherwise
I would not enter into any explanation whatever of my intentions.
He returned shortly with many polite messages, which he either
had, or pretended to have received from the tetuh towards us, but
again appealed to our feelings of compassion, declaring that if we
did not move out to sea to-morrow morning, he was threatened not
only with torture from the mandarins, but the anger of his ship.
mates, who were all detained on our account. The sole motive
which brought him to our ship, was his friendly feeling towards
Mr. Gutzlaff, and his anxiety to see him, and he now implored
that gentleman's intercession in his favor. As I had determined


1834. Lindsay and Gutzlaff. 537
on proceeding to sea the following morning, I did not think it just
to keep the poor fellow any longer in suspense; and the burst of
joy with which he received the intelligence, was strong proof of his
sincerity, and that he had not been deceiving us, but really was
threatened with punishment as he stated. Let it be viewed, how-
ever, in either light, either as a concerted scheme between the man-
darins and himself, or a real intention on their part to punish him,
in order to induce that compliance in us they were otherwise pow-
erless to enforce, I submit it to the judgment of any candid mind,
whether it does not convey undignified ideas of a government
which finds itself necessitated to adopt such measures to maintain
its authority; yet, notwithstanding this, edicts were issued the day
after our departure, announcing that the imperial fleet had driven
away the barbarian ship !
“Mr. Gutzlaff’s servant returned on board during the night of
the 5th, and informed us that the feeling of alarm excited on our
first appearance was beyond belief. The most vague and exagge-
rated reports had been spread all along the coast, of the disputes
between the English and Chinese authorities, in consequence of the
outrages committed in May, 1831; and on our arrival a report
spead like wildfire, that we were only the precursors of a fleet of
twenty ships of war, which were coming to avenge the insult and
injuries that had been offered at Canton. Expresses had been
in consequence, sent to the adjoining districts for the collection
and concentration of all the disposable forces in the neighbor.
hood. He further stated, that so soon as the panic in some de-
gree subsided, and the people became satisfied we were merely a
merchant ship, desirous of peacefully trading, and laden with Eu-
ropean commodities, that much interest had been excited among
the mercantile people, and the greatest anxiety expressed that
permission might be granted by the authorities for commercial
intercourse. The severity of the measures adopted towards all
those who ventured to approach our ship had terrified the respect-
able traders so much, that none of those to whom he had mention-
ed his connexion with us, dared to engage in any transaction of
trade; but a general feeling of disappointment was expressed
among all classes at the conduct of their rulers in prohibiting our
trading at Amoy. -
“During the six days we remained at this place we daily landed
for exercise, entered both the town and adjoining villages, and
took long rambles about the country in every direction. When in
the neighborhood of Amoy we were generally attended by a party
of soldiers and mandarins, who were uniformly polite, and assured
us their only reason for accompanying us was fear lest the unruly
populace should do us an injury; but we always were anxious to
escape from their offered protection, and throw ourselves on the
kind and friendly feeling of the people, which it was really gratify.
ing to witness, whenever no mandarins or their satellites were
present to check the spontaneous expression of their good-will. On
these occasions our party rarely consisted of above three or four,
3S


1834. Lindsay and Gutzlaff. 541
nation What business have you here ! You must begone instant-
ly,’ &c. &c. I had just commenced a reply, when his excellency
turned sharply to Mr. Gutzlaff, and said, ‘You are a Chinese.” Mr.
Gutzlaff denying it, he told him to take off his cap, that he might
see if he wore a tail, which being done, he said, ‘No, I see you are
a Portuguese.’ I now told him that the ship was English, which
assertion he treated with perfect discredit, saying, “I have lived at
, Macao, and know the barbarian customs; your ship is from Ma-
cao.’ I again replied, that it was strange in his excellency to accuse
me of falsehood in this manner, and that both myself and the ship
positively were English, in spite of all he had known and learned
at Macao. I then took a pencil and wrote on a slip of paper, “Ta
Yingkwó (Great Britain) is my nation,’ and placed it in his hands.
GAn receiving it he burst into the most scornful laugh, and exclaim.
ed, “Nonsense ! the great English nation! the petty English nation,
you should say you tell lies to me.” Up to this moment, I had
kept my temper perfectly, and answered all his insulting remarks
with civility, but I confess that the grossness of this last speech
completely overcame the natural placidity of my disposition. I
snatched the paper, which he was still laughing at, out of his hands,
and seizing hold of the admiral's arm, 1 said, “As you have come
to my ship merely to insult my nation and myself, I insist on your
instantly quitting the ship, and suiting the action to my words, I
was on the point of handing him out of the cabin. His excellency
now saw that he had carried the matter too far, and commenced
apologizing. ‘Pray excuse me; I did not mean to offend; you
know well there is the Ta Se-yang, and the Seaou Se-yang (the
one is generally applied to Portugal, the other to Goa); I thought
there also was the Ta Yingkwá, and the Seaqu Yingkwā; I ac-
knowledge my offense, and again beg you will excuse me.’ This
ingenious apology was accompanied with a profusion of bows, and
a behavior as cringing as it had before been insolent. He staid on
board a considerable time, but his manners and conduct were so
singular as to raise a suspicion that his judgment was not quite
sound, which was corroborated by some of his officers who accom.
panied him, and who expressed much regret at the indecorous con-
.duct of their commander.”
The Lord Amherst arrived off the entrance to the
river of Fuhchow foo on the 21st of April, and left
the same place on the 17th of May. Fuhchow, the
capital of Fuhkečn, and the residence of the fooyuen
of that province, and of the governor of the two pro-
vinces of Fuhkečn and Chekeång, stands inland
about 50 miles from the mouth of the river Min, which
is in lat. 26°6′ N., long. 119° 55' E. After a short de-
lay, Mr. Lindsay drew up a petition to the governor
requesting his permission to trade; and being resolv-


544 Journals of Messrs. April,
head foremost into the water, and our party of four were left in
possession of the junk. The only persons to be seen on deek were
the admiral and his personal servant, both of whom seemed in the
greatest state of alarm. Mr. Simpson then quietly cut the cable
as directed, and returned on board. I will not now offer any com-
ment on this singular scene, further than to repeat the plain fact,
that four men, two of whom were unarmed, thus took undisputed
possession of the junk of a Chinese admiral, and that during seve-
ral minutes they were on board, not an individual was to be seen
except the ta jin (great man) himself, and that all his gestures
were to implore mercy for an imaginary injury; for our object
was to extricate him as well as ourselves, from the consequences
of his ignorant and unseamanlike behavior. This trifling fracas
was unattended with any unpleasant circumstances, nor did it i.
the least interrupt the friendly intercourse with the mandarins; on
the contrary, it appeared to increase the estimation they held usin,
and one very satisfactory result was, that from that day no war
junk ever anchored within half a mile of us, excepting when they
came to trade. The three spars destroyed by the admiral's junk
were replaced before our departure by order of the civil mandarin
of the district.
“On the following morning, the 28th, a numerous deputation
of the elders came from the village of Hookeang, where we were
so hospitably entertained on our arrival, bringing with them the
annexed paper, which was read aloud by Mr. Gutzlaff on the
quarter-deck. I record it as a pleasing testimony of the effect
produced by the distribution of our books, particularly that con-
cerning the English nation, the fame of which has spread greatly,
and almost the first requst of our visitors is to be favored with a
copy. The remark in this address, on the character of their ru-
lers, I confess, surprised me much, till the daily repetition of such
sentiments from all classes of people, convinced me not only of
the unpopularity of the government, but also that the people dare
give utterance to their grievances. Our visitors were very curious
about last night's affair, and on being informed concerning it, their
delight was extreme, and the general remark was, “you are quite
right, our mandarins are rogues, but the people are your friends.’
The following is a translation of the paper from the elders. “We,
the inhabtiants of this village, have never yet seen you foreigners
(foreigners, not barbarians). All people crowd on board your ship
to behold you, and a tablet is hung up therein stating that there is
a physician for the assistance of mankind: there are also tracts
against gambling, and other, writings, besides a treatise on your
country, with odes and books; all which make manifest your
friendly, kind, and virtuous hearts. This is highly praiseworthy;
but as our language differs, difficulties will attend our intercourse.
The civil and military mandarins of the Fuhkeen province, togeth-
er with their soldiers and satellites, are unprincipled in their dispo.
sition. If you wish to trade here, wait upon his excellency the foo.
yuen ; prostrate yourselves and ask permission. If he complies,


1834. Lindsay and Gutzlaff. 547
following statement will give a tolerably accurate idea
of the shop prices then current.
- Camlets, - - - - 856 a 70 per piece.
Superfine broadcloth, 38 a 42. , 92
Calicoes, - - - - 9 a 12 , 29
- Long-ells, - - - - - 10 a 14 , 29
Iron, - - - - - 2 per pecul.
As regards the probability of establishing foreign
trade at Fuhchow, the experience which Mr. L. gain-
ed, led him to the following conclusion.
“That, under present circumstances, an avowed permission is
not to be expected from the Chinese government, and that it will
be invariably refused when requested as a favor; but that a tacit
sanction, and indeed connivance, will readily be extorted from their
weakness, provided ships remain outside the port, in which case
the government can make out any account they please, to transmit
to the emperor. Some management will be required by the first
ships which come there, to steer a course which will both keep the
mandarins at a respectful distance, and at the same to conciliate
the good-will of the people. This will remove one great source of
uneasiness to the local government, lest affrays and homicides
should arise between the natives and foreigners, which must then
necessarily involve the mandarins. Nothing however will be more
easy than to continue and improve the natural good understanding
which prevailed during the whole period of our stay; it is only
when the Chinese see the foreigners insulted and despised by their
rulers, that they also treat them with habitual disrespect, and thus
a sort of national antipathy is created which indeed it is the main
object of the Chinese government to promote. At Canton they
have succeeded too well; let us hope that when the time arrives,
in which foreigners are again allowed to frequent other ports of
China, circumstances may be different: for when they are respect.
ed by the government, I have no hesitation in saying, there will be
mutual good-will between all classes of the Chinese and English.”
The voyagers arrived among the islands of the
Chusan archipelago on the 24th of May, where and
at Ningpo they continued till the 18th of June. Their
proceedings were much the same as at Fuhchow,
but on the whole more prompt, and their reception
better than at the former place. They had learned
the “the only way to proceed successfully with the
Chinese is, never in the first instance to ask permis-
sion, but act, and afterwards (if necessary) to offer
excuses.” Ningpo stands a few miles inland, in lat.


550 Journals of Messrs. APRIL,
being opened, Mr. Simpson and Mr. Stephens settled
the point by two vigorous charges at the centre gate
with their shoulders, which shook them off their hing-
es, and brought them down with a great clatter, and
we made our entrance into the great hall of justice,
at the further end of which was the state chair and ta-
ble of the taoutae. Here were numerous official
assistants, who seeing us thus unexpectedly among
them, forgot totally our unceremonious mode of ob-
taining entrance, and received us with great polite-
ness, inviting us to sit down and take tea and pipes."
The taoutae being absent, the chehečn soon made
his appearance, and after upbraiding the visitors for
their temerity, “sat down, and I (says Mr. L.) in-
stantly seated myself opposite to him, on which he
again rose, and casting an angry glance at me, strode
out of the room without vouchsafing a word, as if he
considered himself degraded by seeing me seated
in his presence.” The taoutae soon entered ; an
audience was agreed upon, and the petition delivered
into his hands; he was evidently prepared to brow-
beat the stranges with fierce looks and angry words,
commanding them in a boisterous tone instantly to
depart and return to Canton. Twenty-four hours,
however, had not passed before the demeanor of
these men was greatly changed, and even the super-
cilious cheheen met them with the greatest polite-
ness, and obsequiously forced them to take the high-
est seats. “Such,” says Mr. Lindsay, “are Chinese
mandarins all over the empire. Compliance begets
insolence; opposition and defiance produce civility
and friendly profession.”
After visiting several parts of the city, and distri-
buting many copies of their pamphlet and other tracts,
Messrs. Lindsay and Gutzlaff returned to the ship,
just as she was on the point of entering the river. In
order to prevent this, all the military and naval forces
of the neighborhood were put in requisition: tents
were erected, and large guns without carriages were
placed along on each side of the river; and to make


1834. Lindsay and Gutzlaff, 551
the scene still more imposing, a row of mud heaps in
the form of tents were thrown up, and then white-
washed; and finally, fifteen imperial war junks sta-
tioned themselves in the mouth of the river; but the
Lord Amherst passed safely through their line, and
anchored at some distance up the river. Neither
threats nor intreaties could induce the barbarians
to swerve from their course. In more than one in-
stance did the imperial officers prostrate themselves
and ºffer to perform the kotow. But notwithstand-
irg the tact and promptitude of the adventurers, the
whole of their “intercourse with the officers of
Shanghae was unsatisfactory and wearying, with-
out being productive of any results.” “The policy
finally adopted by the officers was,” says Mr. L., “to
leave us entirely unmolested, and take little notice
of us, merely contenting themselves with keeping
the people from visiting our ship, and to trust to our
departure when we saw that no object could be
obtained by a longer stay.” We have room for only
one more extract from Mr. Lindsay's report.
“As this is the first time the emporium of Shanghae has been
brought under the immediate notice of Europeans, some few re-
marks on it may not be inappropriate. Considering the extraor-
dinary advantages which this place possesses for foreign trade, it
is wonderful that it has not attracted more observation. One of the
main causes of its importance is found in its fine harbor and navi.
gable river, by which, in point of fact, Shanghae is the seaport of
the Yangtsze keang, and the principal emporium of eastern Asia,
the native trade of it greatly exceeding even that of Canton. On
our first arrival I was so much struck with the vast quantity of junks
entering the river, that I caused them to be counted for several suc-
cessive days. The result was that in seven days upwards of 400
junks, varying in size from 100 to 400 tons, passed Woosung, and
proceeded to Shanghae. During the first part of our stay most
of these vessels were the north country junks with four masts, from
Tečntsin, and various parts of Mantchou Tartary; flour and peas
from which place formed a great part of their cargo. But during
the latter part of our stay, the Fuhkeen junks began to pour in, to
the number of 30 and 40 per day. Many of these were from For.
mosa, Canton, the eastern Archipelago, Cochinchina, and Siam.
“The river Woosung comes out of the Ta-hoo (great lake), at
Chang-keaou kow ; it then traverses the Yun-ho or Great canal, and
thus communicates with the Yangtsze keang, the Yellow river, and


1834. Ilindsay and Gutzlaff. 553
Having completed their transactions at Shanghae,
and purchased “sundry trifles and various specimens
of the beautiful silks and crapes of Soochow,” with
a necessary supply of provisions, the voyagers bade
farewell to their friends on the morning of the 8th of
July, and were followed out of the river by a fleet of
junks, which performed the usual ceremony of expell-
ing the barbarians by firing several rounds of guns
when the ship was about six miles distant. On the
15th. the Lord Amherst touched at Weihae wei in
Shantung; the next day she stood out to sea; and
by 10 A.M. on the 17th, made the land of Corea. Our
limits forbid us to follow her track through the re-
maining part of her course. In laying aside the Re-
port and the Journals, it is unnecessary for us to say
a word in their commendation; no enterprising or
philanthropic man can read them without the liveliest
interest, and the strong desire that the wall which
now separates China from the other nations of the
earth may soon be broken down. We do not expect
the governments of the present day to embark in
Quixotic enterprises; “yet, (repeating what we have
already said,) if our distance might give us that hear-
ing which our presence could not claim, we would
assure the exalted personages who hold the reins of
empire in the west, that if by the united expression
of their desires, they could influence the policy of
China, their generation would thank them and pos-
terity would honor them. It is a great object invit-
ing and meriting their concert.” But whether they
will engage in the enterprise or not, the train of events
now in progress must sooner or later, and perhaps
within a very short period, introduce here a new or-
der of things—overcoming ancient prejudices, break-
ing down misanthropic and antinational antipathies,
and laying the foundations of an unrestrained inter-
course between the people of China and the enlight-
ened states of Christendom. In hastening a consum-
mation so devoutly to be wished, the journals of
Lindsay and Gutzlaff will bear a conspicuous part.
3 U


1834. Burmah, 555
Jam-mun-na, where the eugenia tree grows. 4. Má-hee, where
the buffaloes bathe. 5. Thä-rá-boo, where the brown lizards bathe.
Méet-su-ma-day-tha, the middle part of the world, including the
sixteen great countries, is the scene of the sacred histories of
Budha. (This is the northern part of Hindostan.)
Héma-woon-tah is an immense, but imaginary forest, (said to be
situated in Thäu-lä-tha, or South Behar,) in which are seven large
lakes; the width of each is about 560 miles, and the depth the same.
It is in this forest that most of the wonderful things mentioned in
the Budhist scriptures are said to have happened. Sám-boo-tha-bya,
the eugenia tree which produces gold, is said to grow on the north-
ern extremity of the island Sam-boo-de-pah. Thee-ho, the isl-
and Jn which the Burman sacred books were written, is said to
be Ceylon.
The Burman books say that there are eight wonders of the
sea, viz. 1. The waters continually rising into swells, and sinking
into vallies; 2. that the waters do not overspread the shore; 3. that
it throws dead bodies on the shore; 4. that the five great rivers
lose their names when they reach the sea; 5. that its waters never
diminish nor increase; 6. that the salt is so mingled with the water
as to become one; 7. that it is the repository of precious stones;
and, 8. that it is the residence of the nats.
Their theory of earthquakes is this; the earth is an extended
stratum, which rests on a stratum of water; this again upon a stra-
tum of air, beyond which is an entire vacuum. The stratum of air
thus situated, is easily agitated by a variety of causes; when agi-
tated, it communicates its motion to the superincumbent water,
which in turn shakes the earth above it. How simple the theory!
and how indicative of the state of science among them : What
the Burmans call a great island is the same as a continent with us,
and should be so reckoned in our estimate of the correctness of
their geographical notions. The base of My-en-mo mount should,
on their theory, be found where the island of Spitzbergen lies.
Astronomy. The Burmans enumerate eight planets, viz. the sun,
moon, Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus, Saturn, and Rāhu. The
last of these is not discoverable, but is said to be the residence of
the nat who occasions eclipses. Nine principal constellations are
enumerated, corresponding with the twenty-seven nék-khâts (stars),
viz.: 1. the crow; 2. a kind of bird; 3. a species of crab fish; 4.
scales; 5. the crest, an ornament used to fasten up the hair; 6. the
fisherman; 7. the elephant; 8. the horse; 9. the heron or paddy
bird.
Wé-de-thon-bah-the are the three courses of the planets round
My-en-mo mount, the inner, middle and outside courses. The sun
enters the inner course at the full moon in March, and continues
till the full moon of July, which is the hot season; it then enters
the middle course, in which it continues till the full moon of No-
vember, which forms the rainy season, after this, it passes through
the outer course till the full moon of March, and this the cold sea.
son. The earth being supposed to be an extended plain, the daily


556 Burmah. A PRii.,
disappearance of the sun is attributed to the intervention of My-en-
mo mount. As we live on the great south island (Sām-boo-de-pah),
this mountain must be to the north of us. In their views of cos-
mogony, it cannot, with perfect accuracy, be said to lie under the
north star, because its height is much greater than the elevation of
that star, but its latitude and longitude are the same.
Upper Regions. Bö-wāh- meaning a state of existence, a world,
is the world of passion, including the four states of punishment; the
state of man, and the six inferior heavens, the world of visible ob-
jects, including the sixteen material superior heavens, and the world
of invisibles, including the four immaterial superior heavens. The
six inferior heavens here mentioned, are the six stages of he nat
country. Sá-dû-ma-hāh-réet is the first stage of the world or nats
situated round the waist of My-en-mo mount. Thön-an-dáh is a
famous garden in the first stage of the nat country; it extends about
12,000 miles, and is the scene for recreation and pleasure to the
inhabitants. Tâh-wā-ding-thah, the second stage of the world of
nats, is situated on the summit of My-en-mo mount. The others
rise successively above these.
Thöke-dáth-thana is the name of a city in the nat country, where
the king of the nats resides. Brämha-bon, which is the abode of
the Bramhas, includes the superior celestial regions, of which there
are twenty stages or stories, sixteen material and four immaterial
or invisible. Thöke-dāh-wāh-tha, one stage of the Bramha coun-
try, consists of five divisions; in one the inhabitants live through-
out a thousand complete revolutions of nature (see Māhā-kāt);
in another the inhabitants live through two thousand revolutions
of nature; in a third, through four thousand; in a fourth, through
eight thousand; aud in a fifth, through sixteen thousand complete
revolutions of nature. -
Offerings and rewards. There are said to be five particulars
which respect offerings; vix., 1. making an offering in the expec-
tation of the reward; 2. with proper materials and free from blem-
ish; 3. giving to travelers the best of flowers and fruits in a time
of famine; 4. making offerings when one is very indigent; the 5th
is not mentioned. The priests in their exhortaions to the people
are accustomed to promise a great variety of rewards as an induce-
ment to be liberal in their benefactions. These rewards are fre-
quently of an intellectual nature, but more generally of a sensual
kind. The following are of a general character. Ah, a kind of
wisdom which destroys the four enslaving principles to which all
men are subject. Abín-yin, which denotes certain excellent attain-
ments; viz., 1. the faculty of seeing like a nat: 2. hearing like a
nat: 3. creative power; 4. knowledge of other men's thoughts; 5.
prescience; 6. knowledge of one's past existences. Dzānn, a cer.
tain. attainment or state of mind, which enables the possessor to
traverse different worlds. It is divided into five constituent parts;
1. thought; 2. consideration, reflection; 3. pleasure, joy; 4. bliss,
happiness; 5. permanency, immutability.
The following are examples of rewards promised to specific acts.


558 Burmah. APRIL,
1834
which is encompassed by sixteen inferior hells, in all, 136. These
are provided with tortures corresponding to the previous crimes
of their respective inhabitants, some of whom experience hunger
and thirst, some are rolling in flames, and others have their flesh
torn from them with hot pincers, &c.
Periods. Māhā-kāt, a period in which an entire revolution of
nature is performed, is subdivided into four grand periods, each of
which is again subdivided into sixty-four intermediate periods, and
each of these again into sixty-four life periods. Thán-woot-táh
is one of the four grand divisions of an entire revolution of nature.
This period, it is said, commences with rain which deluges the four
great, and all the small islands, together with My-en-mo .mount,
and destroys all that exists therein; after this seven suns succes.
sively break forth, dry up the waters, and consume the system
Thán-woot-táh.htāh-yee is another of the four grand divisions of
Māhā-kāt. This period continues from the time general con-
flagration ceases, through another deluge, whose waters, by conti-
nual motion and dashing together congeal, and harden and thus
form the substance of a new system: We-woo-táh is one period in a
complete revolution of nature. In this period the waters which
deluged the universe disappear, and according to the eternal laws
of nature, the sun, moon and stars break forth, everything comes
into sudden existence, and Bramhas descend and people the earth;
but they can-teturn to the upper regions when they please. Wé.
woo-tá-táh-yéa, is another period, and a complete revolution of
nature. At the commencement of this period, the Bramhas begin
eating a kind of earth, by which they lose the power of ascending;
the period of life begins to shorten, and continues to do so till a
person is old at the age of ten years, after which it begins to length-
en and continues to do so till the system is destroyed by water.
Böke-dāh-kāt is a grand revolution or period of time which is dis-
tinguished by the successive appearances of five Budhas. Ayoo-
kát is a period of time, during which the life of man gradually ad-
vances from the length of ten years to an indefinite extent and
returns again to the length of ten years; sixty-four of which make
one intermediate period. From a comparison of Thá-kén-pôrāh
(see Intel. beings) with Böke-dāh-kāt, and with a statement of one
of the Burman books, from which we learn that the death of Gau-
dama occurred, b. c. 554, it will appear that 91,467 years of the
present Böke-dáh-kāt have already passed away, but the fifth
Budha has not yet appeared.
Duties. It would require volumes to mention all the duties en-
joined on different classes of Budhists. The following will give
an idea of their general character. There are five laws (thée-lā)
binding on all mankind, viz. to refrain from murder; from stealing;
from adultery; from lying; and from intoxicating liquors. They
are to be solicitous about four things, viz. watching over the body;
watching over the mind; an attentive consideration of the miseries
of life; and the duties of religion. They are also enjoined these
four things; viz. l. using exertion to prevent demerit while as yet
the pe
prever
Somet
merit
after a
There
which
and w
The
for sel
l, rig
action
tellige
leed m
eight
telligit
to be
echo,
represt
lāy-ba
Ocean
from t
man fr
above,
to his {
perly
ing la
diggin
cloth,
Ded
people
Their
deeds
period
person
is not
vious
term (
exhau
establ
previc
perfor
previt
W,
godas
cluste
fruits
tops;
Contr
ºf pt


1834. Burmah. 559
the person has done nothing blameworthy ; 2. using exertion to
prevent the increase of demerit after the person has already done
something sinful; 3. endeavoring to do that which will procure
merit while the person is yet destitute of it; and 4. endeavoring
after a person has a stock of merit, to excel in meritorious actions.
There are moreover laws which embrace all those religious duties
which consist in avoiding objects unfit to be used, eaten, handled,
and worn ; also the places where it is improper to go, or remain.
The following eight good ways are causes of merit, and grounds
for self gratulation. They may therefore be reckoned as duties.
1. right opinion; 2. right intention ; 3. right words; 4. right
actions; 5. right way of supporting life; 6. rightly directed in-
telligence; 7. good heed, caution ; 8. composure, serenity.—Good
!.eed must always be paid to the voice of God of which there are
eight characteristic tokens or evidences, viz. 1. it is clear or in-
telligible; 2. agreeable, pleasant; 3. easy to be known ; 4. worthy
to be heard; 5. infrequent ; 6. full ; 7. deep; 8 produces an
echo. The distinction between a good man and a bad one, is thus
represented by the Burmans. There are four things (wāy-gyen-
lāy-bāh) very remote from each other, viz. 1. one shore of the great
ocean from another; 2. the rising from the setting sun; 3. the earth
from the top of My-en-mo mount; and 4. above these, a wicked
man from one who is religious. In addition to what has been said
above, every Burman is expected, as a matter of duty, according
to his ability and circumstances, to employ himself and his pro-
perty in building and ornamenting pagodas (see worship), in form.
ing large and small images of Gaudama, building monasteries,
digging tanks, supporting the priesthood by presents of food,
cloth, &c.
Death. It may not be uninteresting to know to what causes a
people so ready to assign a cause for everything, ascribe death.
Their books mention four, viz. 1. though the influence of good
deeds performed in a previous state, is not exhausted, yet the
period which is the established term of human life being past, the
person will die; 2. though the established term of human life
is not yet passed, the influence of good deeds performed in a pre-
vious state being exhausted, the person will die; 3. when the
term of human life is past, and the influence of former good deeds
exhausted, the person dies; 4. in the last case, though the
established term of human life is not passed, nor the influence of
previous good deeds exhausted, yet on account of some evil deed
performed in a previous state, the person dies suddenly, without
previous illness, and without changing his position.
Worship. Their worship consists “in prostrations before pa.
godas and images, in presenting before them lighted candles,
clusters of flowers, umbrellas of various descriptions, rice, and
fruits; in erecting high poles and suspending long flags on their
tops; in casting bells and hanging them near their pagodas, or
contributing to and of these objects; in attention to the recitations
of priests, and whenever an offering is made, expressing a wish


1834. Conversion of the Chinese. 565
but without a radical change of heart, this is scarcely desirable.
Their outward compliance with our forms of religious worship
would only prove detrimental to the progress of the gospel. It is
in vain, therefore, to hope that they will forsake their idolatry, it
the power of the Holy Spirit does not regenerate their hearts. For
this we incessantly pray. May those feeble endeavors to point out
to the priests of Meichow the way of salvation be blessed from
above.
Remarks concerning the Conversion of the Chinese. We have
long bren told that the .#.--
of the gospel. This sentiment has paraſized the efforts of the Chris-
tian # in behalf of the Chinese ; and we sincerely hope it will
soon cease to exist. We cannot, indeed, at present adduce many
instances of actual conversion to prove its fallacy.; but it may be
safely asserted that the #######!...+
the gospel into this great nati s, not so much in the physical
and poſitical position of the empire, as in the indifference of the
people themselves—The hardness-dfa Chinese heart is great. A
lying spirit is implanted and cherished in them from their child.
hood; they can form no conceptions of spiritual things; and the
things of this world seem to satisfy all their desires.
The difficulty of bringing such a people to feel the influence of
religious truth is indeed great; yet not so great as that of introduc.
ing it among Mohammedans, or even among the Hindoos. Here
we meet with a reading people, comparatively free from prejudice,
willing to listen to the truth, with a good portion of common sense,
and not trammeled by any religion of state. To a true Chinese
all religions are alike. Provided he move in the track of his fore-
fathers and worship their manes, it matters very little with him
what i e—worships; yet he must have some object of adora-
tion, however small and contemptible. This, however, can hard-
ly be regarded as a favorable indication; the sick man, who is in.
sensible of his disease, and therefore seeks no remedy, is in the
greatest danger. What must be the sensations of the Chinese at
their transit into that world, where they find themselves surrounded
by realities, of which till that moment they had never had a
thought ! But we cannot, while we live, pursue them and mark
their condition in the world of spirits. Though we must all enter
that world, it is beyond the power of human reason to tell what
will be our sensations there.
China's millions nconverted have often been the
theme on Which the friends of missions have dwelt. Their readi.
ness to succor those who are engaged in the great work, and to
sacrifice their property for the promotion of it, show that their zeal
consists in something more than more words. Though their means
might not be adequate to meet the demand, were the work to be
carried on as vigorously and extensively as it needs to be, we may
expect that they will use their utmost exertions in behalf of this


568 The Self-delusion of Mankind. APRIL,
The court says, there was nothing rebellious or disrespectful in
his paper. And he was in fact, nothing more or less than a Chi-
nese Owen of Lanark. But for his presumption and imprudence in
giving unasked for advice, their decree that he shall receive one
hundred blows with the large bamboo, and be transported three
years, would not have been passed. However, he set up a plea that
he was the only son of an aged mother. The court therefore di-
rected that in the first instance he be sent back to Ganhwuy, the
green tea country, whence he came, that the local government
may ascertain the facts of the case; and if his allegation be true, to
put him in the pillory, and bamboo him, before they send him to.
his mother; but if false to transport him as before directed. The
court in their memorial add, that his suggestions are impractic...bili-
ties, and recommend his majesty to dismiss the subject without
further consideration.
In the new “Memoirs of the court of king Charles the first,”
by Lucy Aikin, we find that poor William Prynne, about two hun-
dred years ago, for writing a book against stage players, female
actors, and royal book of sports for Sundays, &c., was used more
harshly by the Star-chamber of England, then Kin Mingkwan was
by the criminal court of Peking. Prynne had to pay a fine of £5000
to the king, to stand in the pillory, to lose his ears, (that is, to have
them cut off) tº have his book burned before his face, and to be
imprisoned for life. Another zealot of that day, Dr. Alexander
Leighton, a Scotch divine, for an appeal to parliament against
prelacy, and some rude remarks on king Charles' Roman catholic
queen, was sentenced “to pay a fine of £10,000, to be imprisoned
for life, to stand twice in the pillory, and each time to be whipped,
to have an ear cut off, a nostril slit, and a cheek branded.” For
this sentence, bishop Laud pulled off his cap and publicly gave
thanks to God, and the whole savage punishment was inflicted on
Leighton, without the slightest mitigation' What changes have
200 years produced in the western world! And if knowledge be
diffused, why may not similar happy changes for the better be some
day effected in the eastern world, where horrid inhumanity and
cruelty still exist even in the forms of law, and by its solemn
delberate sanction ? The most cruel thing in Chinese law, as it
appears to us, is the putting to death all the male kindred of a
rebel leader, from his grandfather to his grandchildren, his wife's
male kindred and his daughters' husbands; whilst all the females
are doomed to be slaves. Of course this severity is intended to
deter men from rebellion; but legal cruelty perhaps enrages more
than it intimidates. -
The self.delusion of mankind, or Satanic influence inducing false
belief, is strongly exhibited by the mode of speaking common both
in Christian and Pagan lands concerning persons departed this
life. That the judgment of the deceased should be left to Him
who cannot err, is what our minds approve ; but it is the usage to


1834. Distribution of Tracts. 569
“say nothing but good of the dead,” and hence the truth—that is
the whole truth, is not told ; silence would be better. As it occurs
in Christendom that services are said over deceased persons, sup-
posing that they are all “with God,” so in pagan lands, all
descriptions of persons are sent to some elysium, or made blessed
genii or demigods.
A case of this kind occurred on the 19th of the first moon of the
current year in Canton. The literary chancellor Le, a namesake
of the late governor, having recently obtained high promotion, was
it is said, so elated by prosperity, that he indulged in a proud self-
sufficiency and disrespect to inferior officers. The tale as it was
given to us by a native correspondent runs thus. Last year, chan-
cellor Le, went on a literary examination for degrees, to Leen-
show. There resided the magistrate of Hópoo heen, who through
life had been intimate with Le, and whose father had been Le’s
tutor. When the magistrate called, as his official duty required,
and presented his “show-pun,” or card containing his official
history, according to custom, it was simply received, but no notice
taken of him who presented it. Thus commenced bad feeling.
The magistrate in the next place had selected a candidate for the
first name in the successful list, said to deserve the place. Chan-
cellor Le however had been bribed to install a stupid fellow, a rich
man's son in the same place. The magistrate obtained his proofs:
represented the facts to the governor of Canton, and he to the em-
peror, which when Le found out, he became so “frightened at the
crime” he had committed, and the consequénces likely to follow,
that he retired to the western side of his mansion and hanged him-
self. Next morning the provincial court circular announced that Le
the magnate, had from his palace “gone to ramble among the
blessed genii.” Concerning Le's destiny we presume to say noth-
ing; but only lament that mankind should persuade themselves
and rashly affirm that criminal suicides, and other wicked persons
dying impenitent assuredly go to heaven.
RELIGIOUS INTELLIGEN ("F.
Distribution of tracts on the
islands of Java and Madura.
The following extracts are from
the journal of Mr. Lukas Mon-
ton, which was alluded to in our
last number: the journal was
written during the months of
July, August, and September,
1833, while Mr. M. was on a
voyage to Cheribon, Samarang,
Lassam, Sourabava, Grissec,
and Indramayoe, 0.. the coast
of Java, and at Sumenap on
Madura. At all of these places
he was well received by the na-
tives and found opportunities
for circulating upwards of 2800
tracts. He was however inter-
rupted in his benevolent work
by the Dutch authorities, on ac-
count of his having circulated a
few Javanese tracts, which that
3 W


.) 4
A PR11,
Journal of (Jerurrences.
Jesus is not the son oſ (;od, but
the spirit of God ; and which of
these titles ascribes to the Savior
most divinity "Some Europeans
who were sitting with the sultan
while I was talking with him,
now began to rub their noses,
and getting up they walked
away. Upon which I said, Of
all people there are nºne so in-
consistent as professing Chris.
tians. “I lºw is that " said the
sultan. ‘Let your highness,' I re-
plied, “only look at the Chinese;
they make a god of paper and
wood which is but a false god,
and yet they respect it, and
bow down to it; but Europeans,
who have the knowledge of God
and of his Son, cast contempt on
the very religion they profess.
God wishes us to become his
children, but the majority choose
rather to be children of the
devil, who was a transgressor
from the beginning.” On hear.
ing this, Mr. Plocgman urged
me to go home.”
JOURNAL OF OCCURRENCES.
Termination of the hom. E. I. Compa-
my's exclusice rightsºn China.- The
exclusive right of trading with the do-
minions of thc emperor of China, long
enjoyed by the united Company of
merchants of Fngland,” ceased on the
22d inst.; and hcnceforth (notwith-
standing any provision, enactment,
matter or thing made for the purpose
of protecting the exclusire rights of
trade, heretoforc enjoved by the said
Company, contained in any act of the
said Company or of the British parlia-
ment,) it shall be lawful for any of the
subjects of his most excellent majesty,
king william the Fourth, to carry on
trade with any countrics between the
Cape of Good Hope and the Straits of
Magellan.' This act of king William,
passed “by and with the advice and
consent of the lords spiritual and
temporal, and Commons" of Great
Britain, will aid verv much in hasten-
ing the abolition of the long cherished
Exclusive Rigirts of the celestial cm-
pire. That the new arrangements will
cause cmbarrassment to some of the
native merchants we havc no doubt;
but that they will prove bencficial to
the nation, and to the world, seems
most certain. We are by no means
disposed to criminate the men who
enjoyed thosc exclusive privileges;
and none, we trust, will grieve that
such exclusiveness is going into disuse.
Every Briton, and every freeman,
must exult in the triumph of principles
v. Lich l, mand the relºcal “l well
laws, however long they may have
been established, as take the natural
rights of the many, and make them
the chart.cred privileges of the few.
We do not suppose that the renoval
of the “incubus" will give a freer re-
spiration to British subjects in China
than they bcſore enjoyed, or cause all
to realize what they may expcct from
ſrce commerce. Some, perhaps ma-
ny, will engage in the new trade to
their sorrow. Among the native mer.
chants and local officers there is a good
deal of curiosity to learn what are to
be the new arrangements. His excel.
lency governor Loo, we understand,
has taken pains to inquire of the Brit-
ish factory why their ships cease com.
ing to China, since tea has become
necessary to England.
Death anong the beggars of Canton.
—The number of beggars, time out of
mind, in Canton, has been very great;
but during the past winter, and chiefly
in conscquence of thc inundation which
occurrcd last summer, both their
number and their distresses have been
greatly multiplied. We have sought
in vain for the means of making a sa-
tisfactory estimate of the number in
and about the city at the prescnt time;
judging from what we have seen we
think it cannot be less than 5000, and |
it may be even twice that number. In
ordinary tunes, only a few are left to
lamish and lic in the streets: but dur.
no the 12 in V month: “I the rºl.


34.
575
Journal of Occurrences.
*t year, many hundreds have perish-
ed for want of food and rament. Now
** then an individual has died near
the foreign factories; but most of these
*appy beings are to be found near
* market-places and the temples. A
nºe from a correspondent, which we
*** here introduce, shows what mav
-Ct "itnessed at a single spot; and
prºbly does not exhibit one-twen-
tº part of what is suffered by the
t"lars of Canton. The temple to
yºğh our correspondent, refers is that
&"Wan woote, situated about one hun.
dré rods northwest from the foreign
fictones. Our correspondent writes:
“Mr. Editor: You have frequently
sluded in the Repository to the con-
qtion of the poor in Canton ; I there.
fºre suppose you will not be unwilling
tº admit a few plain facts. I happen.
et one morning to pass by a temple
before which a number of beggars had
passed thc night, several of whom had
died of cold and hunger. Preparations
for some ceremonies in the temple
drew my attention to the same place
the next morning, when the number
that had perished during the night was
still greater. I have been there, as oft.
en as every other morning since, and
have almost always found several
dead bodies; sometimes eight or ten-
A considerable number of poor crea
tures pass the night there, with no
ºther covering than a mat; and fre-
‘luently without even that. Not a few
āppear like persons who have seen
better days; and some are probably
brought thither, when sickness has
disabled them, by those who should
their friends. Some are young,
from 10 to 15 years old. I have seen
heveral such that died of starvation;
*nd have often witnessed scenes too
horrid and disgusting to be described.
For weeks I did not attempt to ascer-
|ain the number that perished ; but
Huring the last week, ending April 26,
on the five inornings I went there, I
wounted 15; on one morning five, and
another six. I hope it will not be sup-
Rosed that any citizen of a Christian
country can witness suchwretchcqness
Without endeavoring to do nomething
for its relief; but the aid afford.cd has
but too feeble, and I invite the
attention of others to the subject with
the hope that more general and effi.
cient means may be used for the relief
of these sufferers. They are men, as
well as we ; and are º of want
le.”
beforc our doors. ilo.
Since the preceding paragraphs were
in type, we have heard that a procla-
nation has been issued by one of the
local officers, giving notiee that the
salt merchants of Canton have advanc-
ed monev to purchase coffins for such
beggars and poor people as die in the
streets: but not a cash is offered to
procure food or raiment for the living.
It is painful to observe the indifference
with which the Chinese look on the
distresses of their fellow beings. Since
we received Philo's note, we have vis-
ited the temple of Wan-woo.te; it was
in the afternoon; and instead of seeing
a company of beggars, we found a
stage erected, upon which a company
of players were acting the parts of
statesmen and warrinrs for the enter.
tainment of hundreds of spectators–
men, women. and children. Just in
thc rear of this multitude, as we walk.
ed away from the scene, we saw sev.
eral emaciated half naked hoings in
the very last stage of starvation. Can
nothing be done to relieve these suf.
ſerers ?
Girost of chancellon Le. It is rumor.
ed that the ghost of the late chancellor
who hanged himself, sometimes makes
its appearance at the court where he
used to preside. Gov. Loo's report to
the emperor concerning this suicide is
long and elaborate; concealing the
facts of the case; and attributing the
deed to something like mental de-
rangement, arising from the weight of
responsibility, which his office as the
awarder of degrees brought upon him.
Some think the varnished tale will
not obtain the emperor's belief.
Execurrion. The year before last, a
party of insurgents opposed govern.
incrit in Keāngsoo, at one of the ein.
bankinents, and broke it down by su.
perior force. The leader of this party
Chin-twan. notwithstanding very ur.
gent orders from the emperor to
capture him. remained concealed till
about five inonths ago. When an ex-
press "communicated the information
of his capture to his majesty, he burst
into expressions of joy, scarcely be.
coming his dignity. He says, “it is an
event sufficient to give great delight
to the hearts of all men:" and orders
him to be forthwith conveved to the
place where the crime was committed
and there executed, to illustrate the
Justice of government, and be a burn.
ing beacon to sinular offenders. The
:
*





* …


|
- -
**
UC BERKHEV LIBRARIES
IIIIMIII